mam 
 
 K 
 
FROM -THE -LIBRARY- OF- 
 A. W. Ryder 
 
iDeatb's flDoDern Xanauage Series 
 
 A 
 SHORTER FRENCH COURSE 
 
 BY 
 
 W. H. FRASER AND J. SQTJAIR 
 
 PEOFESSORS IN THE ROMANCE DEPARTMENT, UNIVERSITY OF TORONTO 
 
 D. C. HEATH & CO., PUBLISHERS 
 
 BOSTON NEW YORK CHICAGO 
 
COPYRIGHT, 1913 
 By D. C. HEATH & Co. 
 
 II. 8 
 
 . UJ: 
 
 
PREFACE 
 
 IN preparing this book the authors have had particularly in 
 mind the requirements of elementary classes in schools and col- 
 leges. 
 
 The amount of grammatical material in each lesson is small, and 
 in nearly all cases the exercises are based on extracts of connected 
 French illustrating the points of grammar under observation. 
 These extracts cover a wide range of topics relating to every-day 
 life. The vocabulary employed has been kept within moderate 
 limits, and. consists of words and expressions in common use. 
 
 The numerous oral exercises based on the French extracts are 
 not intended to be exhaustive, but are designed rather to furnish 
 suggestions for additional practice of a similar kind, to which the 
 authors attach great importance. In most of the lessons oral or 
 written practice is also provided in the continuation of tense-forms 
 combined into connected phrases. Such exercises should be thor- 
 oughly studied and committed to memory, particularly since they 
 often furnish additional examples of constructions which illustrate 
 grammatical points contained in the lesson. 
 
 The English sentences in the exercises are provided for trans- 
 lation into French as a final test of knowledge. It is recommended 
 that written tests of this nature should be required only after the 
 translation has been mastered orally. Where two or more sets of 
 English sentences are given, the first one is regularly based directly 
 on the French above it, the additional set or sets being of a more 
 difficult and general character suitable for extra drill and review. 
 
 For the convenience of teachers who prefer to begin with the 
 spoken language rather than with the written language, a phonetic 
 transcription of the French of the first ten lessons has been given 
 at the end of the Introduction. 
 
 It is hoped that the exercises in general will prove suitable for 
 the purposes of teachers who desire to combine in their class-work 
 
iv PREFACE 
 
 the advantages of the direct method with those of the grammatical 
 method. 
 
 The book is not primarily intended to serve as a reference gram- 
 mar, but the addition of a copious index and the prominent type 
 of the section headings will render it easy of consultation for this 
 purpose. 
 
 The authors take this opportunity of expressing their thanks to 
 a large number of teachers for advice and criticism in the prepara- 
 tion of the work, and in particular to Professors Saint-Elme de 
 Champ and W. C. Ferguson, of the University of Toronto, for 
 assistance in the revision of the manuscript and proofs. 
 
 JANUARY, 1913 
 
CONTENTS 
 
 INTRODUCTION : PAGE 
 
 Pronunciation, etc ix 
 
 Exercises on Pronunciation xxiii 
 
 Phonetic Transcription of Lessons I-X xxv 
 
 LESSON 
 
 I. Indefinite Article 1 
 
 II. Definite Article 
 
 III. Present Indicative of avoir. Pronouns in Address . . 3 
 
 IV. Present Indicative of etre. Agreement of Pronoun . . 4 
 V. Present Indicative Interrogative of avoir and etre. In- 
 terrogation. Possessive de 6 
 
 VI. Present Indicative Negative of avoir and etre. Use of a 8 
 VII. Present Indicative Interrogative Negative of avoir and 
 
 etre. Agreement of Adjectives 10 
 
 VIII. The Possessive Adjective 12 
 
 IX. Void and voila. Some Personal Pronoun Objects . . 14 
 X. Present Indicative of donner. Interrogation. In- 
 direct Object 16 
 
 XI. Conjunctive Personal Pronouns 19 
 
 XII. The General and Partitive Noun 21 
 
 XIII. Expressions of Quantity. Use of en . 23 
 
 XIV. Omission of Article and Partitive Sign. H y a .... 25 
 XV. Irregular Plurals. Position of Adjectives 28 
 
 XVI. Irregular Feminine Adjectives 31 
 
 XVII. Use of ce. Some Relative Pronouns 1 . . 33 
 
 XVIII. Indefinite Pronoun on. Use of y. Tout 35 
 
 XIX. Regular Conjugations. Present Indicative of don- 
 ner, finir, vendre. Demonstrative Adjective ... 37 
 XX. Compound Tenses. Past Indefinite and Word-Order 40 
 XXI. Agreement of Past Participle. Interrogative Adjec- 
 tive quel 42 
 
 XXII. Compound Tenses with etre 45 
 
 XXIII. Disjunctive Personal Pronouns 47 
 
 XXIV. Disjunctives (continued). Present Indicative of voir 48 
 
 v 
 
VI 
 
 CONTENTS 
 
 LESSON PAGB 
 
 XXV. Comparatives and Superlatives 50 
 
 XXVI. Infinitive. Present Indicative of aller and pouvoir 52 
 XXVII. Imperfect Indicative. Present and Imperfect of 
 
 faire 55 
 
 XXVIII. Position of Pronoun Objects 58 
 
 XXIX. Imperative. Position of Pronominal Objects ... 61 
 
 XXX. Future and Future Anterior 64 
 
 XXXI. Demonstrative Pronouns 66 
 
 XXXII. Possessive Pronouns. Present Indicative of vouloir 69 
 
 XXXIII. Interrogative Pronouns and Locutions 72 
 
 XXXIV. Relative Pronouns. Conjunction que 75 
 
 XXXV. Indefinite Adjectives and Pronouns. Negatives . 78 
 
 XXXVI. Orthographical Peculiarities. Present Indicative of 
 
 dire 82 
 
 XXXVII. Place-Names. Present Indicative of partir .... 84 
 
 XXXVIII. Conditional and Conditional Anterior 88 
 
 XXXIX. Impersonal Verbs 92 
 
 XL. Reflexive Verbs 94 
 
 XLI. Passive Voice 97 
 
 XLII. Reflexive Compound Tenses 99 
 
 XLIII. Cardinal Numerals. Money, Weights, Measures . 102 
 XLIV. Ordinals. Fractions. Numeral Adverbs. Col- 
 lectives. Year Dates. Numerical Titles. 
 
 Dimensions 106 
 
 XLV. Days. Dates. Age. Holidays 109 
 
 XLVI. Time of Day 113 
 
 XL VII. Present and Perfect Participle. Forms in -ing . . 115 
 XL VIII. Present Subjunctive. In Noun Clauses. Tense 
 
 Sequence 118 
 
 XLIX. Subjunctive. In Adjectival and Adverbial Clauses 
 
 and in Principal Sentence . . 122 
 
 I* Past Definite. Pluperfect. Past Anterior ... 125 
 
 LI. Imperfect Subjunctive. Tense Sequence .... 128 
 
 LII. Irregular Verbs. Principal Parts 131 
 
 LIII. Verb and Subject. Agreement and Position ... 134 
 
 LIV. Principal Parts: pouvoir, vouloir, voir 136 
 
 LV. Auxiliary Function 137 
 
 LVI. Principal Parts: aller, devoir, venir 139 
 
 LVII. Use of devoir, aller, venir 140 
 
 LVIII. Principal Parts: dire, faire, mettre, prendre .... 143 
 
 LIX. Causative Use of faire 144 
 
CONTENTS 
 
 Vll 
 
 LESSON PAGE 
 
 LX. Principal Parts: envoyer, recevok, mouvoir, mourir 146 
 
 LXI. Additional Verb-Phrases 147 
 
 LXII. Principal Parts: croire, lire 149 
 
 LXIII. Infinitive for Noun Clause . 150 
 
 LXIV. Principal Parts: boire, coudre, moudre, resoudre . 152 
 
 LXV. Use of Infinitive 153 
 
 LXVI. Principal Parts: battre, dormir, servir, nettoyer . 155 
 
 LXVII. Government of Verbs 156 
 
 LXVIII. Principal Parts: partir, sentir, suivre 159 
 
 LXIX. Use of c'est and il est 160 
 
 LXX. Principal Parts : traduire, construire 163 
 
 LXXI. Impersonal Verbs 164 
 
 LXXII. Principal Parts: cuke, courir, valoir 166 
 
 LXXIII. Use of Tenses and Moods 167 
 
 LXXIV. Principal Parts: asseoir, suffire 170 
 
 LXXV. Remarks on Subjunctive 171 
 
 LXXVI. Principal Parts: offrir, souffrir 174 
 
 LXX VII. Infinitive or Subjunctive 175 
 
 LXXVIII. Agreement of Past Participle 177 
 
 LXXIX. Principal Parts: ecrire, vivre 179 
 
 LXXX. Partitives. Article with Titles. Apposition . 180 
 
 LXXXI. Principal Parts: plaire, rire 183 
 
 LXXXII. Omission of Article. Article for Possessive . . . 184 
 
 LXXXIII. Principal Parts of tenir 187 
 
 LXXXI V. Adjective Forms and Agreement. Comparatives 188 
 
 LXXXV. Principal Parts: cueillir, ouvrir, tressaillir .... 191 
 
 LXXX VI. Personal, Possessive and Relative Pronouns ... 192 
 
 LXXXVII. Principal Parts: craindre, joindre, peindre .... 195 
 
 LXXXVIII. Pronoun on. Whoever, Whatever 196 
 
 LXXXIX. Adverbs from Adjectives. Adverbial Distinctions 199 
 
 XC. Negation 203 
 
 XCI. Use of a, de, en, sur. Prepositional Distinctions 207 
 
 XCII. Conjunctions 210 
 
 MATERIAL FOR CONVERSATION 215 
 
 REVIEW EXERCISES 218 
 
 APPENDIX 233 
 
 VOCABULARIES : 
 
 French-English 263 
 
 English-French 287 
 
 INDEX . 313 
 
INTRODUCTION 
 
 A. The Alphabet 
 
 The letters of the alphabet, with their French names, are as 
 follows : 
 
 a a h ache o o v ve 
 
 b be \ i p pe w double ve 
 
 c ce j ji q ku x iks 
 
 d de k fca r er y i grec 
 
 e e 1 eZ s ess z zed 
 
 f ef m em t te 
 
 g ge n en u u 
 
 In addition to the letters, the following orthographic signs are em- 
 ployed : 
 
 1. The acute accent (accent aigu), as in ete. 
 
 2. The grave accent (accent grave), as in voila, pere, oft. 
 
 3. The circumflex accent (accent circonflexe), as in ame, tete, ile, 
 cote, fut. 
 
 NOTE. None of these marks serve to denote stress. 
 
 4. The cedilla (cedille), used under c to give it the sound of s before 
 a, o or u, as in avancais, lecon, re$u. 
 
 5. The diaeresis (trema), to show that the vowel bearing it is to be 
 pronounced separately from the preceding vowel, as in Noel. 
 
 NOTES. 1. Words are commonly spelled orally by naming the letters as above, 
 together with the other orthographic signs, if any, e.g. bonte = be-o-en-te-e accent 
 aigu; when, however, e has no accent mark, it is often named by the sound which it 
 has in me, le, etc. (cf. H, below), e.g. mer= em-e-er. 
 
 2. According to a newer method of spelling, employed by some, the letters are 
 named thus: a, be, ce, de, e, fe, gheu, heu, i, je, ke, le, me, ne, o, pe, ke, re, se, te, 
 u, ve, double ve, kse, i, ze. 
 
 3. The names of the letters are all masculine, according to some, while others 
 make the names of f, h, 1, m, n, r, s, feminine, thus: un f or une f. 
 
 B. Pronunciation and Spelling 
 
 The pronunciation will be explained, as far as possible, by 
 comparison with English sounds, but it must never be forgotten 
 that the sounds of any two languages rarely correspond ex- 
 
X INTRODUCTION 
 
 actly. Moreover, the spelling of French, like that of English, 
 is irregular and inconsistent; hence, to avoid confusion, a 
 phonetic alphabet will be employed, in which each sound is 
 represented by but one symbol, and each symbol represents 
 but one sound. 
 
 C. Phonetic Alphabet 
 
 [The examples are in ordinary spelling; the heavy type indicates the letters which 
 correspond to the sounds of the symbols, and the phonetic transcription is given with- 
 in brackets, as will be done wherever used throughout the book. The alphabet em- 
 ployed is that of the Association Phonetique Internationale.] 
 
 SYMBOLS EXAMPLES SYMBOLS EXAMPLES 
 
 i (sign of length) ji agneau, digne [ajio, diji] 
 
 a patte, part [pat, pair] o beau, ndtre [bo, noitr] 
 
 a pas, passe [pa, pars] o note, fort [not, foir] 
 
 a tant, tante [ta, tait] 5 bon, oncle [bo, oikl] 
 
 b beau, robe [bo, rob] oe neuf, neuve [noef, noeiv] 
 
 d dame, fade [dam, fad] ce un, humble [63) ceibl] 
 
 e ete [ete] peu, creuse [p0, kroiz] 
 
 8 pres, pere [pre, pe:r] p pas, attrape [pa, atrap] 
 
 e pin, mince [pe, meis] r drap, rare [dra, ra:r] 
 
 a le [b] s si, pense [si, pais] 
 
 f fort, neuf [fo:r, noef] $ chou, vache [$u, va$] 
 
 g gant, longue [ga, lo:g] t ta, patte [ta, pat] 
 
 h aha! [a(h)a] u tout, tour [tu, iuir] 
 
 i ici, vive [isi, vi:v] y tu, mur [ty, my:r] 
 
 j hier, soleil [jeir, soleij] q huile [in'l] 
 
 k car, roc [kar, rok] v va, cave [va, kaiv] 
 
 1 la, cale [la, kal] w oui [wi] 
 
 m mot, dame [mo, dam] z zone, rose [zo:n, roiz] 
 
 n ni, une [ni, yn] 3 Je, r uge [3, 101:3] 
 
 NOTE. Before studying the pronunciation in detail, there are three important 
 matters affecting it to be considered, namely, (1) syllabication, (2) stress, (3) vowel 
 quantity. 
 
 D. Syllabication 
 
 When consonants come between vowels in French the fol- 
 lowing rules are to be observed: 
 
 1. A single consonant sound goes with the following vowel sound to 
 form a syllable: a-mi, fi-nir, a-gneau, ta-cher. 
 
INTRODUCTION xi 
 
 2. So also combinations of consonants which may be pronounced 
 together, of which the last consonant is 1 or r (but not rl, Ir) : e-clai-rer, 
 ou-vrir, pre-scrit. 
 
 3. Other combinations of consonants are divided: par-ler, mon-trer, 
 per-du, fac-teur, mer-cre-di. 
 
 4. Final e (usually silent in prose) is regarded as forming a syllable: 
 dou-z(e), bra-v(e), fi-n(e), u-n(e). 
 
 5. Doubled letters have regularly only a single sound, but are di- 
 vided where necessary in writing: pa(s)-ser. 
 
 6. The prefix ex- is divided in speaking, but not in writing: ex-a- 
 men ( = eg-za-men). 
 
 NOTE. Observe from the above that French syllables end in vowel sounds 
 wherever possible, and hence that the consonantal ending of syllables, so frequent in 
 English, must be carefully avoided. Compare in this respect ci-te, ta-bleau with 
 *cit-y,' 'tab-leau.' 
 
 E. Stress 
 
 In French the syllables of words are uttered with almost 
 equal force, a very slight additional force (" stress' 7 ) being 
 given to the last syllable, or to the last but one, in case the 
 word ends in e, thus: che-val, par-ler, par-Ions, fa-ta-li-te, per- 
 dre, ta-ble. 
 
 NOTE. Remember that accent marks have nothing to do with stress. 
 
 F. Vowel Quantity 
 
 By vowel quantity is meant the length of time consumed in 
 uttering a vowel sound. The following are the principal gen- 
 eral rules : 
 
 1. Final vowel sounds (including nasals) are short: fini, vie, parler, 
 tableau, donner, tant, sapin. 
 
 2. All stressed vowels are long before the stninds [v], [z], [3], [j], 
 [r final]: cave [kaiv], amuse [amyiz], rouge [mis'], feuille [fceij], faire 
 [feir], livre [liivr]. 
 
 3. Of stressed vowels standing before other consonant sounds, nasals 
 are long: grande [graid], prince [preis]; [o] and [0] are long: faute [foit], 
 meute [m0it]; [a] long (almost always): passe [pa:s]; [e] long or short: 
 reine [rein], vienne [vjen]; other vowels regularly short. 
 
 NOTE. It is also possible to distinguish between "long" and "half-long" vowels 
 in unstressed syllables, but for simplicity only long vowels will be indicated in the 
 transcription. 
 
xii INTRODUCTION 
 
 G. Pronunciation of Vowel Sounds 
 
 In pronouncing French vowel sounds the following general 
 rules should be carefully observed: 
 
 1. Never drawl a vowel sound or allow it to become a diph- 
 thong, as often happens in English; French vowels are uniform 
 throughout their utterance, the position of the organs of speech 
 remaining unchanged during the whole continuance of the sound. 
 
 2. Never slur over or clip out vowel sounds (except e in 
 certain cases, see below), but give each its full value. 
 
 3. Lip rounding (as observed in 'who/ 'no/ 'law') and 
 lip retraction, that is, drawing the corners of the mouth back> 
 ward as in smiling (to be observed in 'let/ 'hat') are much 
 more definite and energetic than in English. 
 
 NOTE. Some vowel sounds are denoted by a single letter; others are denoted by 
 two or more letters; see below. 
 
 H. Single Letters denoting Vowel Sounds 
 
 a usually like a in 'pat/ but with wider mouth opening and def- 
 inite lip retraction; the point of the tongue is against the lower 
 teeth Symbol [a] : patte [pat], part [pair], chat [$a], malade 
 [malad], papa [papa], mal [mal]. 
 
 a always as above: la [la], voila [vwala]. 
 
 a usually like a in 'ah!' 'father/ but with the mouth well open, 
 the lips neither rounded nor retracted, and the tongue not 
 touching the lower teeth Symbol [a]: pate [pait], batir 
 [batiir], baton [bat 5]. 
 
 EXCEPTIONS: 1. a before final s, usually before medial s, 
 and also in some rarer combinations (but with varying usage) 
 = [a]: pas [pa], passer [pase], gagner [gajie], nation [nasjo], oc- 
 casion [okazjo], bataille [bataij]. 2. a in verb-endings = [a] ; 
 nous donnames [donam], vous donnates [donat]. 
 
 e almost always like a in 'patience/ but with definite lip retrac- 
 tion Symbol [e]: ete [ete], alle [ale], ne [ne], deregle [deregle]. 
 
 e, I always like e in 'let/ but with the mouth wider open and the 
 lips definitely retracted Symbol [e]: pres [pre], pret [pre], 
 pere [peir], espece [espes], fete [feit], meme [meim], etes [eit]. 
 
 e (1) like e in 'the boy/ but with slight lip rounding Symbol 
 [a]. It is so pronounced in monosyllables and in any syllable 
 
INTRODUCTION xiii 
 
 not final before a single consonant sound (but see note, be- 
 low): me [ma], le [la], que [ko], cheval [$aval], tenir [tani:r], 
 tu seras [sara], ceci [sasi], mercredi [merkradi], appartement 
 [apartama]. This letter is commonly called e mute (e muet). 
 
 (2) but in the endings -er, -ez (r, z silent), in words like les, mes, 
 etc., in et and a few other words, e = [e]: donner [done], fevrier 
 {fevrje], avez [ave], chez [$e], les [le], ses [se], et [e], pied [pje], 
 clef [kle], etc. 
 
 (3) it regularly has the sound of [e] (cf. e, above), before a 
 doubled consonant, or before two or more consonant sounds: 
 cesser [sese], perdre [perdr], esperer [espere] ; also before a final 
 consonant sound, and before silent final t: avec [avek], cet [set], 
 fier [fjeir], jouet [swe] (but not in et); also before il, ill: soleil 
 [soleij], abeille [abeij]; further, in tu es [e], il est [e]. 
 
 EXCEPTIONS: Observe descendre [desaidr], femme [fam], and 
 adverbs in -emment, e.g., prudemment [prydama]. Words in 
 eff-, ex- (before vowel), dess- may be pronounced either with 
 [e] or [e] : effet [efe or efe], example [egzaipl or egzaipl], dessert 
 [deseir or deseir], but observe dessus [dasy], dessous [dasu] and 
 words like ressembler [rasable]. 
 
 Silent e: The letter e is silent in prose (1) at the end of words: 
 rue [ry], donnee [done], place [plas], ai-je [ei 3], table [tabl], 
 vendre [va:dr]; (2) within words after a vowel sound: gaiete 
 [gete], remercierons [ramersiro]; (3) in the verb-endings -es, 
 -ent: tu donnes [don], ils donnent [don], ils donnaient [done]. 
 
 NOTE. In ordinary speech the [a] sound is usually slighted or wholly 
 omitted in most cases where consonantal combinations resulting therefrom 
 can be readily pronounced, e.g. mad(e)moisell(e), ach(e)ter, maint(e)nant, 
 am(e)ner; but mercredi, apercevant, lentement, etc. 
 
 i, i like i in 'machine/ with energetic lip retraction (never like i in 
 'city') Symbol [i]: ici [isi], vive [viiv], vie [vi], il [il], ile [il], 
 famille [famiij]. 
 
 EXCEPTION: For i = [j], see Semi- Vowels, below. 
 
 o usually like o in 'not/ but with definite lip rounding Symbol 
 [o]: note [not], dot [dot], fort [fo:r], robe [rob], ecole [ekol], votre 
 [votr], etoffe [etof], orner [orne]. 
 
 6 regularly like o in 'ocean/ but with much tenser lip rounding 
 and protrusion, as for whistling Symbol [o]: cote [kote], vdtre 
 [voitr], bientdt [bjeto]. 
 
 EXCEPTIONS: 1. o = [o] as a final sound, and in a few other 
 words: mot [mo], nos [no], gros [gro]; rose [ro:z], chose [$o:z], 
 
XIV INTRODUCTION 
 
 grosse [grois], fosse [fos], position [pozisjo], etc. 2. 6 = [o] in 
 few words: hotel [otel], roti [roti], etc. 
 
 u, ft has no English counterpart; the tongue position is the same i 
 for [i], but with tense lip rounding, without protrusion; be 
 acquired by prolonging the [i] sound, meanwhile rounding tl 
 lips, or by rounding the lips and bringing the tongue to t] 
 [i] position Symbol [y] : tu [ty], mur [myir], miir [myi] 
 vu [vy], rue [ry], utile [ytil], fut [fy], sur [syr]. 
 EXCEPTION : For u = [q], see Semi- Vowels, below. 
 
 y when not beginning a syllable, y has the same sound as i - 
 
 Symbol [i]: syllabe [silab]. 
 
 EXCEPTION : For y beginning a syllable, see Semi-Vowe" 
 below. 
 
 7. Combinations denoting Vowel Sounds 
 
 ai, ai usually = [e], see e, above; ai always thus: mais [me], fai 
 [feir], j'aimais [erne], j'aimerais [emre], maitre [meitr]. 
 
 EXCEPTIONS: 1. ai = [e], as in etc, when final in verb-en 
 ings: je donnai [done], je donnerai [donre], j'ai [e]; also 
 gai [ge], and usually in je sais [se], il salt [se], maison [mez; 
 2. ai = [a], as in le, in -ais- of certain forms of the verb fair 
 nous faisons [fazo], je faisais [faze], faisant [foza], etc. 
 
 au, eau regularly = [o], see 6, above: autre [oitr], aux [o], eau [o], ch 
 vaux [$avo], sauter [sote], tableau [tablo], beau [bo]. 
 
 EXCEPTIONS : au = [o], see o above, in the future and co 
 ditional of avoir, and in a few other words: j'aurai [or< 
 j'aurais [ore], etc., Paul [pol], mauvais [move], etc. 
 
 ay, ey when a final sound = [e]: je paye [pe], Cambray [kabre], N 
 [ne] ; but a or e in this combination = [e] when the y belon 
 to the next syllable: ayez [eje], payer [peje], grassey 
 [graseje]. 
 EXCEPTIONS: pays [pei], paysan [peiza]. 
 
 ei always = [e]: reine [rein], Seine [se:n]. 
 
 eu, eu (1) a sound which has no English counterpart; the tongue p 
 oeu sition is the same as for [e], as in ete, with tense lip roundii 
 
 and protrusion, as for whistling; to acquire the sound, pr 
 long [e] and round the lips, or round the lips and bring t] 
 tongue to the [e] position Symbol [0]. Thus pronoun 
 eu, ceu as a final sound, and also eu before s and sometim 
 t within a word: peu [p0], feu [f0], il veut [v0], heuret 
 
INTRODUCTION XV 
 
 [oero], boeufs [b0], creuser [kr0ze], meute [m0:t]; also, eft in 
 jeune [30:n], jeuner [30ne]; further, dejeuner [de30ne]. 
 
 EXCEPTIONS: eu, eu in tenses of avoir = [y], e being regarded 
 as silent: eu [y], nous eumes [ym], ils eurent [y:r]. 
 
 (2) also a sound which has no English counterpart; the tongue 
 position is the same as for [e], as in pres, with definite lip 
 rounding; best acquired by combining the two positions as 
 explained for (1) above Symbol [ce]. Thus pronounce eu, 
 ceu before a final consonant sound (not s), and before il, ill: 
 neuf [noef], neuve [nceiv], fleur [flceir], leur [Iceir], boeuf 
 [beef], feuille [fceij]. 
 
 ue, ce the same sound as eu (2), above: orgueil [orgoeij], cueillir 
 [koejiir], ceil [ceij]. 
 
 ou, oft regularly like oo in 'boot/ but with much tenser lip rounding 
 oft and protrusion, as for whistling Symbol [u] : tout [tu], 
 
 doux [du], tour [tuir], ou [u], ou [u], gout [gu], gouter [gute], 
 rouge [ruisl; observe aout [u], a being silent. 
 
 NOTE. For ou, oi, oi, oe, oe, see also Semi-Vowels, below. 
 
 K. The Nasal Vowels 
 
 These sounds are quite foreign to English, and are formed 
 by uttering the French vowel sounds [a], [e], [o], [oe], and at the 
 same time allowing the soft palate to hang freely as in breath- 
 ing, thus causing the breath to escape partly through the nose. 
 Control of the soft palate may be acquired by prolonging the 
 first part of the sound of ang as in 'sang/ but carefully avoiding 
 the completion of the sound. It must be especially noted that 
 there is absolutely no sound of n, m or ng, in French nasal 
 vowels, and hence great care must be taken neither to raise 
 the tongue nor close the lips until the sound is complete. 
 
 The sign of nasality orthographically is a single n or m in 
 the same syllable with the vowel; thus, nasal are: tant, sem- 
 bler, fin, peindre, plein, legon, bon, tomber, chacun; but if n or 
 m is followed by a vowel, or is doubled, or if mn occurs, there 
 is regularly no nasality; thus, non-nasal are: fine, commune, 
 pleine, ennemi, innocent, inutile, bonne, condamner. 
 
 NOTE. The rule does not apply to certain words having en-, enn-, emm-, for 
 which see note, below. ' 
 
XVI INTRODUCTION 
 
 an, am like nasalized [a] as described above Symbof [a] : tant [taj, 
 en, em tante [tait], gant [ga], an [a], riande [vjaid], champ [$a], en 
 
 [a], encre [a:kr], temps [ta], sembler [sable]. 
 EXCEPTIONS: en = [e], see ain, etc., below, in some forms 
 
 of tenir, venir, as a final sound, and in some other words: 
 
 vient [vje], tiendrai [tjedre], bien [bje], examen [egzame], 
 
 chien [$je], Benjamin [became]. 
 
 NOTE. Observe ennui [anqi], emmener [dmne], with doubled n, m, 
 and enivrer [anivre]. 
 
 ain, aim like nasalized [e] as explained above Symbol [e] : pain [pe], 
 ein, eim f aml [fg^ p i em [ p \^ } pe indre [peidr], Reims [res], pin [pe], 
 
 yn/ym P rince [preis], jardin fearde], simple [seipl], impossible 
 [eposibl], syntaxe [setaks], symbole [sebol]. 
 
 NOTE. Observe also the same sound in tinmes [term], vinmes [ve:m]. 
 
 on, om like nasalized [o] as explained above Symbol [5] : bon [bo], 
 oncle [5:kl], mon [mo], ont [o], leon [bso], tomber [tobe], 
 ombre [oibr], compter [kote]. 
 
 EXCEPTION: on in monsieur = [o] : monsieur [masj0]. 
 un, um like nasalized [oe] as explained above Symbol [oe] : un [de], 
 eun chacun [Jakoa], emprunter [aproste], parfum [parfce], a 
 
 jeun [a see]. 
 
 oin for the sound of oin, see Semi-Vowels, below. 
 
 L. Semi- Vowels 
 
 When i, y, ou do not of themselves form a syllable, but 
 come before another vowel sound in the same syllable, they are 
 pronounced with greater rapidity and tenseness of the vocal 
 organs concerned, thus assuming a partially consonantal value, 
 as described below, thus: 
 
 i, y like very brief and forcible y in 'yes' Symbol [j]: viande 
 
 [vjaid], hier [jeir], fier [fjeir], bien [bje], faience [fajais], 
 yeux [j0], ayez [eje], payer [peje], Lyon [Ijo]. 
 
 ou like very brief and tense w in 'we/ with close lip rounding 
 
 and protrusion, as for whistling Symbol [w] : oui [wi], 
 jouer [3we], louer [Iwe], Louis [Iwi]. 
 
 NOTE. When u of gu, qu (usually silent) is pronounced, as it 
 sometimes is, it has the sound [w] before a in some words: lingual 
 [legwal], Squateur, [ekwatoe:r]. 
 
 oi, oi have the sound of [w]+[a] or [a], the latter usually after r, 
 and in a few other words: moi [mwa], voici [vwasi], boite 
 
INTRODUCTION XVli 
 
 [bwait], froid [frwa], roi [rwa], trois [trwa], croire [krwair], 
 le bois [bwa], le mois [mwa], pois [pwa], etc. 
 
 oe, oe in a few words = [w] -f [a] : poele [pwal], moelle [mwal], etc. 
 oin has the sound of [w] + [e]: loin [Iwe], joindre [s 
 
 u has no counterpart in English; best acquired by substituting 
 
 [y] for it (as in tu, etc.), and gradually increasing the 
 speed and force of utterance: lui [lip], suis [sip], puis 
 [pip], fruit [frqi], pluie [php], tuile [tqil], cuisine [kipzin], 
 nuance [nqais], aiguille [egqiij or egipij], questeur [kqestceir], 
 Quirinal [kiprinal]. 
 
 NOTE. When u of gu, qu (usually silent) is pronounced, as it some- 
 times is, it commonly has this sound before e, i, as in the last three 
 examples. 
 
 M. Consonants 
 
 The sounds of the consonants can be sufficiently described, 
 for the most part, by noting the differences between their mode 
 of formation and that of the nearest English sounds, and by 
 observing the following general rules: 
 
 1. The movements of the vocal organs are more prompt, 
 definite and vigorous in uttering French consonants than for 
 the corresponding English sounds. 
 
 2. Note the distinction of "voice," which means the hum- 
 ming or droning sound produced by the vibration of the vocal 
 chords (as observed in the v of 'vine' as compared with f of 
 'fine'), and remember 'that French voiced consonants are 
 much more fully voiced than corresponding English sounds. 
 
 3. Final consonants are more usually silent, but final c, f, 
 1 and r in monosyllables are more usually sounded. 
 
 4. With slight exceptions, French doubled consonants have 
 only a single sound. 
 
 NOTE. The doubling of consonant sounds is characteristic of very careful speech, 
 and only some of the more striking cases are mentioned below. 
 
 b regularly like b. in 'bit/ 'tub/ fully voiced Symbol [b]: bean 
 [bo], robe [rob], bon [bo], table [tabl], l&-bas [laba], tomber 
 [tobe], abbe [abe]. 
 
 EXCEPTION : b has the sound of p when next before a voice- 
 less consonant: absolument [apsolyma], obtenir [optaniir], etc. 
 
Xvill INTRODUCTION 
 
 c (1) like k in Hake' Symbol [k]. Thus c before a, o, u or a 
 consonant, or when final: car [kar], ecole [ekol], ecouter [ekute], 
 cure [kyre], craie [kre], classe [klais], avec [avek], sec [sek]. 
 (2) c has the same sound as s (1) below when standing before e, 
 i, y Symbol [s] : ce [so], ceci [sosi], avancer [avase], ces 
 [se], bicyclette [bisiklet]. 
 
 EXCEPTION: c = [g] in second [sago] and its derivatives. 
 c always like s (1), below Symbol [s]: j'avancais [avase], avan- 
 cons [avaso], lecon [laso], recu [rosy]. 
 
 NOTE. The letter Q is used only before a, o, u in order to denote the 
 [s] sound. 
 
 ch usually like sh in 'show/ but is more energetically uttered 
 Symbol [$]: chou [$u], vache [va$], chaise [$eiz], chercher [$er$e], 
 architecte [ar$itekt]. 
 
 EXCEPTION: ch = [k], in some words from Greek: cholera 
 [kolera], choeur [kce:r], etc. 
 
 d like d in 'did/ fully voiced, with the point of the tongue thrust 
 against the lower teeth, its upper surface forming a closure 
 with the upper teeth, gums and palate; or with the tongue so 
 far advanced that its point forms a closure with the upper 
 teeth and gums Symbol [d] : dame [dam], malade [malad], 
 dans [da], donner [done], devant [dava], viande [vjaid], addi- 
 tion [adisjo], sud [syd]. 
 
 NOTE. It must be observed that in forming English d (as also English 
 1, n, t) the point of the tongue touches the roof of the mouth some little 
 distance from the teeth, and that for corresponding French sounds the point 
 of the tongue must be brought down and advanced to the teeth. 
 
 f like f in 'fife' Symbol [f]: fort tfoir], neuf [noef], ceuf [cef], 
 fine [fin], frere [freir], affaire [afeir]. 
 
 g (1) like g in 'gig,' fully voiced Symbol [g]. Thus g before a, 
 o, u (but see gu) or a consonant : gare [gair], gant [ga], Gobelin 
 [goble], gout [gu], aigu [egy], grand [gra], glace [glas]. 
 (2) like s in 'measure,' but more energetically uttered and fully 
 voiced Symbol [3]. Thus g before e, i, y: gens [50], rouge 
 [101:3], agir [asiir], manger [mase], gymnase [simnasz]. 
 
 gu before e, i, regularly like g (1) : guerir [geriir], longue [lo:g], langue 
 [la:g], guide [gid], languir [lagiir], guere [geir]. 
 
 ge always = [3]: je mangeais [mase], mangeons [maso], je mangesi 
 [mase], Georges [3013]. 
 
 NOTE. ge must be used to denote this sound before a or o in the con- 
 jugation of verbs in -ger- 
 
INTRODUCTION xix 
 
 gn regularly somewhat like ni in ' opinion ' ; it is formed by pressing 
 the upper middle surface of the tongue against the roof of the 
 mouth, the tip being at the same time thrust against the back 
 surface of the lower front teeth Symbol [ji] : agneau [ajio] > 
 digne [diji], campagne [kapaji], gagner [gajie], accompagner 
 [akopajie], magnifique [majiifik], regne [reiji]. 
 
 EXCEPTION: gn = [g] + [n] in some learned words: cognition 
 [kognisjo], etc. 
 
 h when heard at all, which occurs only in hiatus, has a sounc 
 much weaker than h in 'hat 7 Symbol [h] : aha! [a(h)al. 
 
 NOTE. The letter h is known as h mute (h muet) when it gives rise to 
 elision and liaison (cf. N, O, below), e.g. 1'homme [lorn], les hommes [lez 
 om], and h aspirate (h aspire) when it does not, e.g. le h6ros [la ero], les h6ros 
 [le ero]. The learner should regard h as absolutely silent. 
 
 j always has the same sound as g (2), above Symbol [3]: je [30], 
 jeu [30], jour [3u:r]; so also je (e being regarded as silent); Jean 
 
 k, ck always like k in Hake' Symbol [k]: kilogramme [kilogram], 
 bifteck [biftek]. 
 
 NOTE. k is a rare letter in French. 
 
 I regularly like 1 in 'law/ fully voiced, but with the tongue ad- 
 
 vanced as for [d] Symbol [1]: la [la], cale [kal], aller [ale], 
 table [tabl], oncle [5:kl], ils [il], village [vilais], fil [fil]. 
 
 NOTES. 1. The sound of 1 is frequently doubled when written double-. 
 in initial syllable: illegal [illegal], illustre [illystr]; and by some in words likt 
 intelligent. 
 
 2. The 1 is silent in fils [fis]. 
 
 II the letters 11 after i (not initial), and il or ill after other vowels, 
 *H1) have the same sound as that described for i as a semi- vowel 
 
 (cf. L, above) Symbol [j]: fille [fiij], billet [bije], briller [brije], 
 soleil [soleij], feuille [fceij], fauteuil [fotceij], ecureuil [ekyrceij], 
 bataille [bataij], travail [travaij], travailler [travaje]. 
 
 NOTE. This sound of 1 is called I mouille. 
 
 EXCEPTIONS: mille [mil], millier [milje], million [miljo], ville 
 [vil], village [vilais], tranquille [trakil], etc. 
 
 m regularly like m in 'maim/ fully voiced Symbol [m]: meme 
 [me:m], mot [mo], dame [dam], plume [plym], mon [mo], 
 homme [om], femme [fam]. 
 
 EXCEPTIONS : m is silent in automne [oton], condamner [kodcme]. 
 
XX INTRODUCTION 
 
 n regularly like n in 'none/ fully voiced, and with the tongue ad- 
 vanced as for [d] Symbol [n] : non [no], ni [ni], lunettes [lynet], 
 bonne [bon], donner [done]. 
 
 EXCEPTION: n is silent in the 3d plural of verbs: ils parlent 
 [parl], ils vendaient [vade]. 
 
 p regularly like p in 'pat/ 'rap' Symbol [p]: patte [pafc], at- 
 trape [atrap], pere [pe:r], papier [papje], plume [plym], appor- 
 ter [aporte]. 
 
 EXCEPTIONS: p is silent in some words: sept [set], compter 
 [kote], sculpter [skylte], etc. 
 
 ph always like f Symbol [f]: philosophe [filozof], Sophie [son]. 
 
 q, qu the letter q always and qu regularly = [k] : cinq [sek], coq [kok], 
 qui [ki], que [ka], quand [ka]. 
 
 r the sound of r has no English counterpart; it is formed by trill- 
 ing the tip of the tongue against the upper gums, or eyen 
 against the upper front teeth. The tongue must, of course, be 
 well advanced, and never retracted or turned upward. The 
 sound may be best practised at first in combinations with d, 
 e.g. dry, drip, drop (as in Scotch or Irish dialect) and after- 
 wards in combinations in which it is less easily pronounced 
 Symbol [r]: drap [dra], tres [tre], pret [pre], rare [rair], frere 
 [freir], sceur [sceir], sur [syr], encre [aikr], erreur [erceir]; r is 
 doubled in the irregular future and conditional of certain 
 verbs: je courrai [kurre], il mourrait [murre]. 
 
 NOTE. The above r is called "lingual" r (r lingual). Another r sound 
 (called in French r uvulaire =" uvular" r), used especially in Paris and in 
 other large cities and towns of France, is formed by drawing the tongue 
 backward and elevating its root so as to cause a trilling of the uvula, but 
 this r is usually more difficult for English-speaking people to acquire. 
 
 S (1) like s in 'see/ but with the tongue advanced; sometimes the 
 tip of the tongue is thrust against the lower teeth Symbol 
 [s]. Pronounce s thus when it begins a word (or a word in a 
 compound) and in general when not between vowels; ss al- 
 ways: si [si], pense [pars], son [so], sceur [sceir], vraisemblable 
 [vresablabl], classe [klais], laisser [lese], mars [mars], ours [urs], 
 fils [fis]. 
 
 (2) like z in 'zone/ s in 'rose' with the tongue as for s (1), 
 fully voiced Symbol [z]. Pronounce s thus regularly be- 
 tween vowels: rose [ro:z], chaise [$e:z], maison [mezo], cousin 
 [kuze], amuser [amyze]. 
 
INTRODUCTION xxi 
 
 sc always like s (1): science [sjais], scene [se:n]. 
 
 t (1) regularly like t in 'time/ but with the tongue advanced as 
 
 for [d] Symbol [t]: ta [ta], patte [pat], ton [to], tes [te], tante 
 
 [tait], e"couter [ekute], lettre [letr], sept [set], huit [in't]. 
 
 (2) but in words whose English forms have the sh or cy sound 
 
 t = [s]: nation [nasjo], patience [pasjais], proph6tie [profesi], etc. 
 
 NOTE. t is always silent in et (conjunction). 
 
 th always like t (1): the [te], theatre [teaitr]. 
 
 v always like v in 'five/ fully voiced Symbol [v]: va [va], cave 
 [kav], voila [vwala], vous [vu], pauvre [poivr], trouver [truve]. 
 
 w (1) like [v], in some English and German words: wagon [vago], 
 
 Wagram [vagram], etc. 
 (2) like [w], in some English words: tramway [tram we], etc. 
 
 x (1) usually = [ks] : extreme [ekstreim], excellent [eksela]. 
 
 (2) in ex- followed by a vowel x = [gz]: exemple [egzaipl or 
 egzaipl], exercice [egzersis or egzersis]. 
 
 EXCEPTIONS: 1. x = [s] in dix [dis], six [sis], soixante [swasait] 
 and rarer words. 2. x = [z] in deuxieme [d0zjem], sixieme 
 [sizjem], dixieme [dizjem], dix-huit [diz qit], dix-neuf [diz ncef], 
 etc. 
 
 z Hke s (2) above: onze [oiz], zone [zoin], gaz [gaiz]. 
 
 N. Liaison 
 
 In a group of words closely connected grammatically, a final 
 consonant sound is usually joined in pronunciation with a follow- 
 ing word beginning with a vowel or h mute (liaison = "linking," 
 "joining"): 
 
 1 . Certain consonants change their sound in liaison, thus : d = t, f (in 
 neuf) =v, g = k, s or x = z; moreover, the n of a nasal is joined, and the 
 nasal sometimes loses its nasality. 
 
 2. The groups requiring liaison are: 
 
 (a) Article, noun, adjective: un homme [ce nom], les autres plumes 
 [le zoitr plym], bon ami [bo nami]. 
 
 (6) Adjective, noun: petit enfant [poti tafa], petit s enfants [poti 
 zafa], dix ans [di za], sang humain [sa kyme], des hommes aimables [de 
 zom zemabl]. 
 
 (c) Adverb, adjective or adverb: tres age [tre zase], fort habilement 
 [for tabilma]. 
 
XXll INTRODUCTION 
 
 (d) Pronoun, verb: vous avez [vu zave], sont-ils [so til], vend-il [va 
 til], nous y sommes [nu zi som]. 
 
 (e) Preposition and governed word: sans eux [sa z0], chez un ami [$e 
 zee nami]. 
 
 (/) The d of quand (not interrogative): quand il parle [ka til parl]. 
 (g) Forms of etre and avoir, especially as auxiliaries: ils sont ici [il 
 so tisi], ils etaient arrives [il zete tarive]. 
 
 (h) A few common phrases, e.g. de temps en temps [da to. za ta], etc. 
 
 3. The t of et, and the m of a nasal are never joined: lui et elle [Iqi 
 e el], le champ est a moi [b $a e ta mwa]. 
 
 NOTE. The sounds joined belong in pronunciation to the following word, as 
 shown above, but, for simplicity, they will be indicated in the transcriptions as final 
 of the preceding word, e.g. les hommes [lez om]. 
 
 O. Elision 
 
 The letters a, e, i are silent in certain cases before a vowel 
 or h mute, and are replaced by an apostrophe (apostrophe) : 
 
 1. Thus a of la (article or pronoun): Famie (=la amie), Fhuile (=la 
 huile), nous 1'avons (=la avons). 
 
 2. Thus e of le (article or pronoun), of je, me, te, se, de, ce, ne, que 
 (and some of its compounds): 1'ami ( = le ami), j'aime (=je aime), il 
 m'ecoute ( = me ecoute), d'un ( = de un), c'est ( = ce est), n'a-t-il ( = ne 
 a-t-il), qu'est-ce ( = que est-ce), jusqu'a (=jusque a), etc. 
 
 3. Thus i of si before il or ils (not elsewhere) : s'il ( =si il). 
 
 P. Punctuation 
 
 The same punctuation marks are used in French as in Eng- 
 lish. 
 
 1. Their French names are: 
 . point - trait d'union [ ] crochets 
 
 virgule tiret, or tiret de f 
 
 J accolade 
 
 point et virgule separation 
 
 : deux points . . . points suspensifs * aste*risque 
 
 ? point d'interrogation " " guillemets t croix de renvoi 
 
 ! point d' exclamation ( ) parenthese 
 
 2. They are used as in English, but the tiret (dash) commonly 
 serves to denote a change of speaker: Qui est la? dis-je. Personne. 
 Quoi ! personne ! Personne. 
 
INTRODUCTION XXlll 
 
 Q. Capitals 
 
 Capitals (lettres majuscules or capitales) are used much as in 
 English. Note however the following: 
 
 Un livre frangais. A French book. 
 
 Get Anglais parle frangais. That Englishman speaks French. 
 
 II arrivera le mardi 10 mai. He will come on Tuesday the 10** 
 
 of May. 
 Je dis ce que je pense. I say what I think. 
 
 EXERCISES ON PRONUNCIATION 
 
 NOTE. These exercises contain, for the most part, words chosen from the first 
 twelve lessons, and should be frequently practised, selecting a paragraph or two at a 
 time for this purpose, with a review of the phonetic principles involved. Pronouncing 
 in unison, either for the whole class, or in groups, will be found of great advantage. 
 
 1. [a] and [a] : la, ta, il a, la, avec, table, classe, pas, pate, 
 nous avons, Marie, fernme, quatre, arbre, la-bas, dame, papa, 
 nioi, trois, ami, village, boite, voila, donnat, donnames, occa- 
 sion, ecraser. 
 
 2. [e] and [e] : ecole, et, eleve, chaise, crayon, Seine, fenetre, 
 papier, j'ai, avez, craie, eglise, rnes, ses, elle, tu es, il est, ca- 
 hier, vous etes, derriere, grammaire, jouer, mere, mais, rneme, 
 lunettes, francais, lettre, donnai, il sait, abeille. 
 
 3. [0] and [03] : deux, peu, monsieur, sceur, leur, professeur, 
 feu, il veut, heureux, neuf, bceuf, fleur, facteur, creuser, oeuf s, 
 ceil, il cueille. 
 
 4. [a]: le, me, te, se, fenetre, devant, maintenant, cheval, 
 ceci, mercredi, monsieur, que, petit, promenade, legon, donnes- 
 tu, faisant, je faisais, faisons, venir, tenir, appeler. 
 
 5. [i] and [y]: livre, ils, Marie, une, plume, sur, ici, oui, qui, 
 lunettes, amuser, etudier, eglise, diligent, fille, jolie, petite, 
 amie, style, mur, il fut, ile, nous etimes, ils eurent, eu. 
 
 6. [o] and [o]: ecole, porte, homme, nos, vos, gros, encore, 
 fort, joli, aussi, pauvre, chapeau, votre, votre, beau, alors, 
 cocher, autre, bonne, donner, pomme. 
 
 7. [u]: nous, vous, cour, sous, ou, ou, pour, cousin, tout, 
 beaucoup, rouge, gout, gouter, le mois d'aout. 
 
 8. [a] and [a]: bas, an, tas, tant, tate, tante, encre, dans, 
 
xxiv INTRODUCTION 
 
 Jean, devant, ensemble, sembler, enfant, gant, champ, encore, 
 content, grande, viande. 
 
 9. [e] and [e]: pret, pere, fait, fin, paix, pin, lait, lin, mais, 
 main, jardin, plein, simple, peintre, plaindre, besoin, loin. 
 
 10. [o] and [o]: bonne, bon, personne, son, donne, done, 
 crayon, oncle, mon, ton, onze, maison, content, legon, monter, 
 accompagner, compter, tomber. 
 
 11. [ce] and [OB]: leur, un, peur, chacun, quelqu'un, parfum, 
 emprunter. 
 
 12. [i] and [j]: vie, viande, si, sienne, vienne, fille, pice, bille, 
 papier, cahier, e*tudier, crayon, monsieur, ayez, travailler, tra- 
 vail, billet, abeille, vieil, ceil, yeux. 
 
 13. [y] and [q]: su, suis, lu, lui, tulle, tuile, saluer, nuage, 
 pluie, cuisine, celui, minuit, juin, juillet. 
 
 14. [u] and [w]: ou, oui, loue, louer, bout, boite, Louis, voi- 
 ture, mademoiselle, histoire, poire, moi, tramway. 
 
 15. [p] and [b]: pas, bas, papa, baba, pere, peur, bon, bonne, 
 porte, papier, pu, bu, pain, bain, obtenir, apporter, appeler. 
 
 16. [t] and [d]: ton, don, tant, dans, tout, doux, quatre, jar- 
 din, lettre, mettre, admettre, dame, diligent. 
 
 17. [f] and [v]: fin, vin, feu, il veut, livre, elve, frre, en- 
 fant, avec, affaire, geographic, devant, pauvre. 
 
 18 [k] and [g]: canne, gant, coup, gout, que, quatre, gargon, 
 langue, craie, grand, grammaire, qui, expliquer, exemple. 
 
 19. [s] and [z]: son, sa, zone, onze, sous, sur, chaise, e*glise, 
 ici, gargon, dix, six, six homines, dixieme, sixieme, maison, 
 classe, passer, legon, pice, expliquer, examen- 
 
 20. [$] and [3]: champ, gens, chaise, joli, riche, image, poche, 
 chapeau, chercher, jardin, Jean, Georges. 
 
 21. [1] and [n]: le, la, les, nous, notre, nos, leur, plume, table, 
 non, canne, bonne, oncle, village, ville, tranquille, annee, an- 
 noncer, automne, aller, allons, semblable. 
 
 22. [b] and [m]: bon, mon, bas, ma, homme, femme, Marie, 
 madame, meme, mere, grammaire, nous sommes. 
 
 23. [r]: drap, trs, trois, pres, grand, craie, crayon, porte, 
 forte, riche, arbre, encre, derrifcre, jardin, sur, fleur, cour, sceur. 
 
 NOTE. As an additional exercise, writing \rnrds chosen from the above, in pho- 
 netic symbols, is recommended. 
 
INTRODUCTION XXV 
 
 PHONETIC TRANSCRIPTION OF LESSONS I-X 
 
 I 
 
 A. 1. yn sceir. 2. ce freir. 3. ce liivr. 4. ce krejo. 5. yn plym. 
 6. yn tabl. 7. yn $eiz. 8. yn faneitr. 9. yn port. 10. yn ekol. 
 
 11. yn plym e oe krejo. 12. yn tabl e yn $e;z. 
 
 II 
 
 A. 1. la kre. 2. laikr. 3. la klais. 4. lorn. 5. la profesoeir. 
 6. 1 oikl. 7. la fam. 8. la tait. 9. la papje. 10. cen (or cen) om e yn 
 fam. 11. lez om e le fam. 12. cen eleiv e oe profesceir. 13. lez eleiv e 
 le profesceir. 14. 1 aikr e la papje. 15. yn bwait. 
 
 Ill 
 
 A. 1. 3 e yn bwait. 2. vuz ave do krejo. 3. lez eleiv ot ce pro- 
 fesceir. 4. nuz avoz oen oikl e yn ta:t. 5. 3a a le d0 plym daz yn bwait. 
 6. mari a trwa liivr syr la tabl. 7. la klais a katr faneitr. 8. la pro- 
 fesceir a la kre e osi 1 aikr. 9. la freir e la sceir 5 d0 liivr. 10. ty az ce 
 freir e osi yn sceir. 11. 3<i e mari 5 trwa freir. 12. le fam 5 le d0 
 bwait. - 13. nuz avo le d0 kle. 
 
 IV 
 
 A. 1. le liivr so syr la tabl; il so syr la tabl. 2. la profesceir e lez 
 eleiv so da la klais. 3. la kuir e derjeir 1 ekol. 4. la klais a yn port; el 
 a osi d0 faneitr. 5. nu som da la klais. 6. vuz eit da la kuir. 7. 1 arbr 
 e dava la port. 8. il e dava la port. 9. 33 stn' dava la faneitr. 10. ty 
 e derjeir la tabl. 11. 1 oikl e su 1 arbr. 12. la tait et avek 1 oikl. 13. il 
 sot asaibl. 14. le fam so da la sarde. 15. el sot asabl su lez arbr. 
 16. la grameir e la diksjoneir so syr la tabl. 
 
 V 
 
 A. 1. la liivr da 30. e la plym da mari. 2. la papje dy profesceir e 
 la liivr da 1 eleiv. 3. la meir dez afa. 4. lez afa da la fam. 
 
 C. 1. 3& a t il le plym? 2. ki a le krejo? 3. ave vu le liivr dy pro- 
 fesceir? 4. no, masj0, il so syr la tabl. 5. lez afa sot il isi? 6. u so le 
 plym dez eleiv? 7. mari, e ty la? 8. u som nu metna? 9. mari et el 
 da la kuir? 10. ei 3 la plym da 1 eleiv? 11. lez eleiv ot il le krejS? 
 
 12. la peir da 1 afa et il isi? 13. wi, madam, il et isi. 14. u so le meir 
 dez afa? 15. a ty la kan dy masj0? 16. ki a le ga da la dam? 17. avo 
 nu le ga? 18. u eit vu? 19. u sqiis? 20. k a t el da la bwait. 
 
XXVI INTRODUCTION 
 
 VI 
 
 A. Continue the following throughout the singular and plural: 1. 39 
 n e pa la liivr do 1 eleiv, ty n a pa la liivr da 1 eleiv, etc. 2. 30 na sqi 
 paz a 1 ekol osurdqi, ty n e paz, etc. 3. ei 3 1 aikr e le plym? etc. 
 
 B. 1. lez eleiv na s5 paz a 1 ekol; u sot il? 2. il s5t o $a. 3. la mezo 
 dy profesoeir n e paz isi. 4. el e la ba o vilais. 5. vu n ave pa le liivr; 
 u sot il? 6. il sot a la mezo. 7. nu n avo pa le liivr. 8. le dam na s5 
 paz a 1 egliiz. 9. mari, ty n e paz a 1 ekol osurdtn'. 10. 30 na sui paz 
 o sarde. 11. la tait n e paz a la kapaji metna. 12. el et a la vil avek 
 lez afa. 13. 1 eleiv n a pa la plym, mez il a la krejo. 14. 33 n e pa d0 
 liivr. 15. lez afa n o paz akoir 1 aikr. 
 
 VII 
 
 A. Continue, as in Exercise VI, A: 1. 33 sin' kota (or kotait), ty e, 
 etc. 2. 33 sui gra (or graid) e foir (or fort). 3. sqii 3 
 4 na sin': 3 pa ri$? 5. n ei 3 paz yn graid 
 
 B. Turn into negative interrogative: 1. et el ri$? 2. soit il isi? 3. 1 oikl 
 a t il yn soli mezo? 4. lez afa sot il kota? 5. purkwa e:t vu kotait, 
 madam? 6. ave vuz yn graid mezo? 7. ei 3 ce soli liivr? 8. a ty le 
 ga da la dam? 
 
 C. Answer in the affirmative and also in the negative: 1. n eit vu pa 
 lez afa da masj0 ribo? 2. na sin'i 3 pa graid e fort? 3. masj0 ribo n et il 
 pa ri$? 4. n ave vu pa do patit sceir? 5. madam ladyk n a t el paz 
 yn graid mezo? 6. le patit fiij na sot el paz isi? 7. le pati garso n ot 
 il pa le plym? 8. n ei 3 pa la papje? 
 
 VIII 
 
 A. Continue: 1. 3 e mo livir, ty a to, etc. 2. u e mon aikr? u e ton 
 aikr? etc. 3. 33 n e pa ma plym, ty n a pa ta, etc. 4. n ei 3 pa me 
 krejo? n a ty pa te? etc. 
 
 C. 1. 33 sui la fiij da masj0 lanwair. 2. la mezo da mo peir et a 
 kote da la mezo da masj0 ribo. 3. sa mezo e tre soli. 4. notr mezo e 
 3oli osi. 5. no mezo so preska sablabl. 6. notr mez5 a di pjes. 7. loer 
 mezo a oiz pjes. 8. masj0 ribo e m5n o:kl. 9. il e la freir da ma meir. 
 10. sa fam e ma tait. 11. el e la sceir da mo peir. 12. Icerz afa so no 
 para. 13. mari ribo e ma patit kuzin. 14. so freir e mo kuze. 15. nuz 
 avo le meimz ami. 16. kleir ladyk e moj^ ami. 17. el et osi 1 ami da 
 ma kuzin. 18. $arl ladyk e mon ami. 19. il et osi 1 ami da 35 ribo. 
 
INTRODUCTION XXV11 
 
 D. (Oral.): I. ue lamezoda votrpeir? 2. votr mezoet el soli? 3. ki 
 e masj0 ribo? 4. do ki et il la freir? 5. madam ribo et el votr tait? 
 6. ki so vo d0 kuze? 7. ki e votr ami? 8. ki e 1 ami da votr freir? 
 9. u e mon oitr plym? etc. 
 
 IX 
 
 A. Continue: 1. 39 1 e, ty 1 a, etc. 2. 33 lez e, etc. 3. 30 na I e 
 pa, etc. 4. 3 e ma kan, ty a ta kan, etc. 5. 3 e me ga, ty a te, etc. 
 
 6. n e : 3 pa mo pardasy? n a ty pa to? etc. 
 
 B. (masj0 dypo e Iwi) 1. Iwi, u e to pardasy? 2. 33 1 e, mo peir. 
 3. a ty to $apo osi? 4. wi, mo peir, la vwasi. papa, a ty te ga? 
 5. wi, mo afa, 30 lez e da ma po$. 6. e to $apo? 7. la vwala syr 
 la tabl la ba. 8. me ty n a pa te lynet. u sot el? 9. le vwasi su 
 mo $apo. aloir nuz avo tut noz afeir? e la vwatyir et el preit? 10. wi, 
 papa, la vwala a la port. 11. e la ko$e et il la? 12. la vwala osi a 
 kote da la vwatyir. 13. metna nu som pre pur notr promnad. 
 
 C. (Oral.) 1. u e votr pardasy? 2. ave vu votr $apo? 3. ave vuz 
 osi vo ga? 4. u so le lynet da votr peir? 5. ave vu tut voz afeir? 
 6- eit vu pre metna? 7. u e la vwatyir? 8. u e la ko$e? etc. 
 
 X 
 
 A. Continue: 1. sa leer don me plym, ty . . . te plym, etc. 2. e s ka 
 33 Iqi don mo kaje? e s ka ty . . . to . . .? etc. 3. 33 na hn* (or leer) 
 parl pa, etc. 4. e s ka 33 na travaij pa? na travaij ty pa? etc. 5. sa 
 la (or le) ragard, etc. 6. 33 na 1 (or lez) ekut pa, etc. 
 
 B. 1. s ka vu travaje, mez afa? 2. wi, madmwazel, nu travajo. 
 3. parl ty Iwi? 4. e s ka ty parl, mari? 5. 30, ty parl? 6. wi, mad- 
 mwazel, nu parlo. 7. mari don la liivr a la dam. 8. el lui don la papje 
 osi. 9. lez afa ragard le 3oliz imais. 10. 1 estitytris leer don ce gro 
 Ihvr. 11. 33 travaij boku. 
 
 C. 1. nu somz a 1 ekol. 2. 1 estitytris don le kaje oz eleiv. 3. nu 
 travajo. 4. el eksplik la laso. 5. nu 1 ekuto. 6. el parl boku oz eleiv. 
 
 7. nu Iqi parlo osi kalkafwa. 8. le -pati garso 3U a preza da la kuir. 
 9. il parl e kri boku. 10. le patit fi:j so su lez arbr. 11. el ragard lez 
 imai3 daz ce gro liivr. 12. lez imais lez amyiz boku. 13. lez imais 
 amyiz le pati garsoz osi. 14. el loer don la liivr. 
 
LESSON I . 
 1. Indefinite .Article 
 
 MASCULINE FEMININE 
 
 un [OB] une [yn] a, an, (as numeral, one) 
 
 Un frere et une soeur. x A brother and (a) sister. 
 
 Un livre, une plume. A book, a pen. 
 
 1. There are only two genders in French, the masculine and 
 feminine, as seen in the examples above. 
 
 2. Un is used before masculine nouns and une before femi- 
 nine nouns. 
 
 3. The indefinite article is repeated before each noun. 
 
 EXERCISE I 
 
 une chaise [$eiz], a chair un livre [liivr], a book 
 
 un crayon [krejo], a pencil une plume [plym], a pen 
 
 une ecole [ekol], a school une porte [port], a door 
 
 et [e], and une soeur [sceir], a sister 
 
 une fenetre [faneitr], a window une table [tabl], a table 
 un frere [freir], a brother 
 
 A. 1. Une sceur. 2. Un frere. 3. Un livre. 4. Un crayon. 
 5. Une plume. 6. Une table. 7. Une chaise. 8. Une fenetre. 
 9. Une porte. 10. Une e"cole. 11. Une plume et un crayon. 
 12. Une table et une chaise. 
 
 B. 1. A book and (a) 1 pencil. 2. A school. 3. A pen and (a) 
 book. 4. A chair and (a) table. 5. A window. 6. A door. 
 7. One pen. 8. A door and (a) window. 9. A table. 10. One 
 book. 11. A brother and (a) sister. 
 
 i English words in parenthesis to be expressed in French. 
 
 1 
 
LESSON II [2 
 
 LESSON II 
 2. Definite Article 
 
 MASCULINE SINGULAR FEMININE SINGULAR PLURAL 
 
 le,P [b, 1] la, P [la, 1] les [le] the 
 
 Le frere et la soeur. The brother and (the) sister. 
 
 L'ami, Phomme, Pecole. The friend, the man, the school. 
 
 Les livres et les plumes. The books and (the) pens. 
 
 Les amis, les homines, les e*coles. The friends, the men, the schools. 
 
 1. Le is used before a masculine singular, and la before a 
 feminine singular, beginning with a consonant; P is used before 
 any singular beginning with a vowel or h mute, i.e. the e or 
 the a is elided (cf. Introd., 0); les is used before any plural. 
 
 2. The definite article is repeated before each noun. 
 
 3. The plural of nouns is regularly formed by adding s to 
 the singular. 
 
 EXERCISE II 
 
 NOTE. The gender of nouns beginning with a vowel or h. mute is indicated in the 
 vocabularies by m. or /.; the gender of all other nouns is known by the article, which 
 should be carefully learned along with the noun; for the gender of nouns denoting inani- 
 mate objects the rules in the Appendix may be found useful. 
 
 la boite [bwait], box Phomme [om], man 
 
 la classe [klais], classroom Poncle [5:kl], uncle 
 
 la craie [kre], chalk le papier [papje], paper 
 
 Peieve [eleiv], m. f., pupil le professeur 1 [profesceir], teacher 
 
 Pencre [aikr], f., ink la tante [tait], aunt 
 
 la femme [fam], woman, wife 
 
 A. 1. La craie. 2. L'encre. 3. La classe. 4. L'homme. 
 5. Le professeur. 6. L'oncle. 7. La femme. 8. La tante. 9. Le 
 papier. 10. Un homme et une femme. 11. Les hommes et les 
 femmes. 12. Un eleve et un professeur. 13. Les eleves et les 
 professeurs. 14. L'encre et le papier. 15. Une boite. 
 
 1 A teacher in a secondary school, a college or university professor. 
 
5] LESSON III 3 
 
 B. 1. The school. 2. The chairs. 3. The table. 4. The doors 
 and (the) windows. 5. The teachers and (the) pupils. 6. The 
 paper and (the) ink. 7. The uncles and (the) aunts. 8. The 
 pencil and (the) chalk. 9. A man and (a) woman. 10. An uncle 
 and (an) aunt. 
 
 C. 1. One sister and one brother. 2. The books and paper. 
 3. The pens and ink. 4. The school and classroom. 5. The 
 women and men. 6. The tables and boxes. 7. The man and the 
 pupil. 8. The schools and the classrooms. 9. A box and a table. 
 10. The brothers and sisters. 11. The schools and the teachers. 
 12. The pupils, the women, the uncles, the aunts. 
 
 NOTE. For the use in classes of this and following English exercises, 
 see Preface. 
 
 LESSON III 
 
 3. Present Indicative of avoir, 'have* 
 
 j'ai [3 e], I have nous avons [nuz avo], we have 
 
 tu as [ty a], thou hast, you have vous avez [vuz ave], you have 
 il a [il a], he (it) has ils ont [ilz 5], they (m.) have 
 
 elle a [el a], she (it) has elles ont [elz 5], they (f.) have 
 
 NOTE. Observe the elision of e in je (cf. Introd., 0). A knowledge 
 of this principle will be taken for granted henceforth. 
 
 4. Verb and subject agree in number and person: 
 L'61ve a un livre. The pupil has a book. 
 Les eleves ont les plumes. The pupils have the pens. 
 
 5. Pronouns in Address. 1. In ordinary formal address 
 vous = you, whether singular or plural. 
 
 2. But you = tu in familiar or affectionate address, as usu- 
 ally between members of a family, very intimate friends, 
 children; usually also by grown persons to children, and 
 always in addressing animals and things. 
 
 NOTE. Vous is to be used in the exercises, unless rule 2 is clearly ap- 
 plicable. Foreigners in speaking French will rarely require *to use &vy 
 other form than vous. 
 
4 LESSON IV [6 
 
 EXERCISE III 
 
 aussi [osi], too, also Marie [mari], Mary 
 
 la clef [kle], key quatre [katr], four 
 
 dans [da], in, within sur [syr], on, upon 
 
 deux [d0], two trois [trwa], three 
 Jean [35], John 
 
 A. 1. J'ai une boite. 2. Vous avez deux crayons. 3. Les eleven 
 ont un professeur. 4. Nous avons un oncle et une tante. 5. Jean 
 a les deux plumes dans une boite. 6. Marie a trois livres- sur la 
 table. 7. La classe a quatre fenetres. 8. Le professeur a la craie 
 et aussi 1'encre. 9. Le frre et la soeur ont deux livres. 10. Tu as 
 un frere et aussi une soeur. 11. Jean et Marie ont trois freres. 
 12. Les femmes ont les deux boites. 13. Nous avons les deux 
 clefs. 
 
 B. 1. The teacher has three pupils. 2. We have the ink ard 
 (the) pens. 3. I have the chalk in a box. 4. You have the books 
 and papers. 5. The school has three doors. 6. You have the paper 
 and the pen. 7. John and Mary have the pencils. 8. The women 
 have four chairs and two tables. 9. We have two boxes on the 
 table. 10. Mary has an uncle and an aunt. 
 
 C. 1. She has also a brother and two sisters. 2. The men have 
 three brothers. 3. The classroom has two doors and four windows. 
 4. He has one uncle and one aunt. 5. The teachers have the books. 
 6. The pupils have three teachers. 7. They (ra.) have the pen and 
 the ink. 8. You (tu) have four pens in the box. 9. I have also 
 four pens on the table. 10. We have the pencils and the chalk. 
 11. The women have the keys. 
 
 LESSON IV 
 
 6. Present Indicative of etre, 'be* 
 
 je suis [38 sqi], I am nous soihmes [nu som], we are 
 
 tu es [ty e], thou art, you are vous etes [vuz e':t], you are 
 
 il est [i e], he (it) is ils sont [il so], they (m.) or* 
 
 elle est [el e], she (it) is elles sont [el so], they (f.) are 
 
7] LESSON IV 5 
 
 7. Agreement. 1. The personal pronoun regularly agrees 
 with its antecedent in gender, number and person; hence, in the 
 third person il(s) and elle(s) will stand both for persons and 
 things : 
 Ou est la plume? Elle est sur Where is the pen? It is on the 
 
 la table. table. 
 
 2. A pronoun referring to two or more antecedents of dif- 
 ferent gender is masculine plural: 
 
 Ils ( = Jean et Marie) sont la. They ( = John and Mary) are there. 
 Ils ( = livre et plume) sont ici. They* ( = book and pen) are here. 
 
 EXERCISE IV 
 
 Parbre [arbr], m., tree le dictionnaire [diksjoneir], dictionary 
 
 avec [avek], with ensemble [osaibl], adv., together 
 
 la cour [kuir], yard, court(yard) la grammaire [grameir], grammar 
 
 derriere [derjeir], behind le jardin fearde], garden 
 
 devant [dava], before, in front of sous [su], under, below 
 
 A. 1. Les livres sont sur la table; ils sont sur la table. 2. Le 
 professeur et les eleves sont dans la classe. 3. La cour est derriere 
 Fecole. 4. La classe a une porte; elle a aussi deux fenetres. 5. Nous 
 sommes dans la classe. 6. Vous etes dans la cour. 7. L'arbre est 
 devant la porte. 8. II est devant la porte. 9. Je suis devant la 
 fenetre. 10. Tu es derriere la table. 11. L'oncle est sous 1'arbre. 
 12. La tante est avec 1'oncle. 13. Ils sont ensemble. 14. Les 
 femmes sont dans le jardin. 15. Elles sont ensemble sous les arbres. 
 16. La grammaire et le dictionnaire sont sur la table. 
 
 A 
 
 B. 1. The tree is in front of the door. 2. The pupils are in the 
 yard. 3. The yard has three trees. 4. We are in the garden. 
 5. It is in front of the school. 6. The chair is behind the door. 
 7. The pupils are together under the trees. 8. You are in the class- 
 room. 9. The aunt is with the uncle. 10. They are together in 
 the garden. 11. The grammars are on the table. 
 
 C. 1. You (tu) are a pupil. 2. I am with the teacher. 3. We 
 have three books and you have two books. 4. They are on the 
 table. 5. I am the teacher; I am with the pupils. 6. I have three 
 
6 LESSON V [8 
 
 sisters; they are in the classroom. 7. The teacher has a pen; it 
 is on the table. 8. The pens are on the table; they are in a box. 
 9. John and Mary are in the yard. 10. They are under the trees. 
 11. The dictionary is on the chair. 
 
 LESSON V 
 
 8. Present Indicative Interrogative of avoir and etre 
 
 ai-je? [e: 3], have If suis-je? [sijii 3], am I? 
 
 as-tu? [a ty], have you? es-tu? [e ty], are you? 
 
 a-t-il? [a t il], has he? est-il? [et il], is he? 
 
 a-t-elle? [a t el], has she? est-elle? [et el], is she? 
 
 avons-nous? [av5 nu], have we? sommes-nous? [som nu], are we? 
 
 avez-vous? [ave vu], have you? etes-vous? [eit vu], are you? 
 
 ont-ils? [ot il], have they? sont-ils? [sot il], are they? 
 
 ont-elles? [ot el], have they? sont-elles? [sot el], are they? 
 
 1. In a question the personal pronoun subject follows the 
 verb and is joined to it by a hyphen. 
 
 2. When the third person singular ends in a vowel, -t- is in- 
 serted. 
 
 9. Remarks on Interrogation. 1. When the subject of an 
 interrogative sentence is a noun, this noun usually comes be- 
 fore the verb, and is repeated after it in the form of a pronoun: 
 
 L'eleve a-t-il les plumes? Has the pupil (lit. the pupil has he) 
 
 the pens? 
 
 2. Questions may also be asked by means of interrogative 
 words, as in English: 
 
 Qui a 1'encre et les plumes? Who has the ink and the pens? 
 Oft sont les plumes? Where are the pens? 
 
 3. These two forms of interrogation may be combined: 
 Ou le professeur est-il? Where is the teacher? 
 
 4. What? = que, as direct object or predicate: 
 Qu'avez-vous la? What have you there? 
 
10] LESSON V 7 
 
 10. Possessive. 1. Possession is denoted by de = of: 
 Le livre de Marie. Mary's book. 
 
 2. De is repeated before each noun: 
 
 Les amis de Jean et d'Albert. The friends of John and Albert. 
 
 3. De 4- le (article) is always contracted to du, and de -f- les 
 to des, but de la, de 1' are not contracted: 
 
 La plume du frere. The brother's pen. 
 
 Les plumes des soeurs. The pens of the sisters. 
 
 But: La plume de la soeur, de Peleve, etc. 
 
 EXERCISE V 
 
 la canne [kan], cane, stick le monsieur [m9sj0], gentleman, 
 
 la dame [dam], lady Sir, Mr. 
 
 Fenfant [afa], m. f., child, boy, girl non [no], no 
 
 le gant [ga], glove oft [u], where? 
 
 ici [isi], here oui [wi], yes 
 
 la' [la], there le pere [pe:r], father 
 
 madame [madam], madam, Mrs. qui [ki], invar., who? whom? 
 
 maintenant [metna], now que, qu' [ka, k], invar., what? 
 
 la mere [mp:r], mother 
 
 A. 1. Le livre de Jean et la plume de Marie. 2. Le papier du 
 professeur et le livre de 1'eleve. 3. La mre des enfants. 4. Les 
 enfants de la femme. 
 
 B. 1. John's father. 2. Mary's mother. 3. The windows of 
 the school. 4. The child's father. 5. The children's mother. 
 
 C. 1. Jean a-t-il les plumes? 2. Qui a les crayons? 3. Avez-vous 
 les livres du professeur? 4. Non, monsieur, ils sont sur la table. 
 5. Les enfants sont-ils ici? 6. Ou sont les plumes des eleves? 
 7. Marie, es-tu la? 8. Ou sommes-nous maintenant? 9. Marie 
 est-elle dans la cour? 10. Ai-je la plume de Thieve? 11. Les 
 Sieves ont-ils les crayons? 12. Le pere de 1'enfant est-il ici? 13. Oui, 
 madame, il est ici. 14. Ou sont les meres des enfants? 15. As-tu 
 la canne du monsieur? 16. Qui a les gants de la dame? 17. Avons- 
 
8 LESSON VI [ 11 
 
 nous les gants? 18. Ou etes-vous? 19. Ou suis-je? 20. Qu'a-t-elle 
 dans la boite? 
 
 D. 1. Turn orally into interrogative form all the sentences in 
 Exercises III, A, and IV, A. 2. Form answers to the questions in 
 part C of this exercise. 
 
 E. 1. Have you the teacher's cane? 2. What have you there? 
 3. Is Mary here now? 4. Where is she? 5. Where is Mary's 
 mother? 6. Are the boy's pens and pencils in the box? 7. Yes, 
 madam, and the box is on the chair. 8. Have the pupils (m. or /.) 
 the books? 
 
 F. 1. Have we the pupils' books now? 2. Who has the lady's 
 gloves? 3. Mary, have you the child's box? 4. Have I the gentle- 
 man's paper? 5. John, where are you (tu)! 6. Are you the teacher's 
 uncle? 7. No, sir, I am the teacher's brother. 8. Are the ladies' 
 gloves here? 
 
 LESSON VI 
 
 11. Present Indicative Negative of avoir and etre 
 
 I have not, etc. I am not, etc. 
 
 je n'ai pas [30 n e pa] je ne suis pas [39 na sqi pa] 
 
 * tu n'as pas [ty n a pa] tu n'es pas [ty n e pa] 
 
 il n'a pas [il n a pa] il n'est pas [il n e pa] 
 
 nous n'avons pas [nu n avo pa] nous ne sommes pas [nu no som pa] 
 
 vous n'avez pas [vu n ave pa] vous n'e'tes pas [vu n e:t pa] 
 
 ils n'ont pas [il n 5 pa] ils ne sont pas [il na so pa] 
 
 NOTE. Elle(s) will henceforth be omitted from the paradigms. 
 
 1. With verbs, not = ne . . . pas, the verb being placed 
 between them. 
 
 12. Place. 1. The preposition a = to, at, in, often denotes 
 place, and must be repeated before each noun: 
 
 II est a Paris ou a Rome. He is in Paris or (in) Rome. 
 
12] LESSON VI 9 
 
 2. A + le (article) is always contracted to au and & + les 
 to aux, but & la, a P are not contracted: 
 
 Les enfants sont au jardin. The children are in the garden. 
 
 Les hommes sont aux champs. The men are in the fields. 
 But: & la porte, & Pecole, etc. 
 
 NOTE. The preposition dans, in, within, denotes place in a more defi- 
 nite and restricted sense than a. 
 
 EXERCISE VI 
 
 aujourd'hui [osurdqi], to-day la-bas [la ba], over there, yonder 
 
 la campagne [kapan], country mais [me], but 
 
 le champ [$a], field la maison [mezo], house 
 
 Feglise [egliiz], f., church le village [vilais], village 
 
 encore [okoir], yet, still/again la ville [vil], town, city 
 
 & la campagne, in the country; & Pecole, at (the) school; a Feglise, at (the) 
 church; la maison, at the house, at home, home; & la ville, at or in the 
 town, in town, in the city 
 
 A. Continue the following throughout the singular and plural: 
 
 1. Je n'ai pas le livre de Feleve, tu n'as pas le livre de Feleve, etc. 
 
 2. Je ne suis pas a Fe*cole aujourd'hui, tu n'es pas, etc. 3. Ai-je 
 Fen ere et les plumes? etc. 
 
 B. 1. Les Sieves ne sont pas a Fcole; ou sont-ils? 2. Us sont 
 aux champs. 3. La maison du professeur n'est pas ici. 4. Elle 
 est la-bas au village. 5. Vous n'avez pas les livres; ou sont-ils? 
 6. Us sont a la maison. 7. Nous n'avons pas les livres. 8. Les 
 dames ne sont pas a l^glise. 9. Marie, tu n'es pas a Fcole au- 
 jourd'hui. 10. Je ne suis pas au jardin. 11. La tante n'est pas a 
 la campagne maintenant. 12. Elle est a la ville avec les enfants. 
 13. L'eleve n'a pas la plume, mais il a le crayon. 14. Je n'ai pa&| 
 deux livres. 15. Les enfants n'ont pas encore Fencre. 
 
 C. Turn into negative form: 1. Us sont aux champs. 2. Elle 
 est au village. 3. Les dames sont a la maison. 4. L'e"cole a trois 
 portes. 5. Les Sieves ont les papiers. 6. Nous sommes a la cam- 
 pagne. 7. Vous etes a Fecole. 8. Tu as les crayons. 9. Vous 
 avez les livres. 10. Les enfants sont au jardin. 
 
10 LESSON VII [ 13 
 
 D. 1. Mary is not at home; she is at school. 2. The uncle and 
 aunt are not in the country. 3. I haven't (have not) the pen- 
 cils. 4. You haven't the book, but you have the paper. 5. I am 
 not yet at home. 6. You are not at church to-day. 7. You 
 haven't the lady's gloves. 8. The teacher's house is not in the 
 village. 9. We are not yet home. 10. John hasn't the teacher's 
 chalk. 11. Who is at the door? 12. The man is at the door. 
 
 E. 1. We haven't the children's boxes. 2. The pupils haven't 
 the chairs. 3. The children are not in the city. 4. They are in 
 the country to-day. 5. Are the pupils at school? a 6. No, sir, they 
 are not at school. 7. I haven't the books; they are not here. 
 8. We are not yet in the country. 9. The children are not yet here. 
 10. John, have you (tu) not the teacher's chalk? 11. The teacher's 
 chalk is in the box. 
 
 LESSON VII 
 
 13. Present Indicative Interrogative Negative of 
 
 avoir and &tre 
 
 Have I not? etc. Am I not? etc. 
 
 n'ai-je pas? [n ei 3 pa] ne suis-je pas? [na sin': 3 pa] 
 
 n'as-tu pas? [n a ty pa] n'es-tu pas? [n e ty pa] 
 
 n'a-t-il pas? [n a t il pa] n'est-il pas? [n et il pa] 
 
 n'avons-nous pas? [n avo nu pa] ne sommes-nous pas? [no som nu pa] 
 n'avez-vous pas? [n ave vu pa] n'tes-vous pas? [n e:t vu pa] 
 
 n'ont-ils pas? [n ot il pa] ne sont-ils pas? [no sot il pa] 
 
 14. Agreement of Adjectives. 1. The feminine of adjec- 
 tives is regularly formed by adding e to the masculine, but 
 adjectives in -e do not change; the plural is regularly formed 
 by adding s to the singular, as for nouns: 
 
 MASC. FEM. MASC. PLUB. FEM. PLUB. 
 
 petit petite petits petites small 
 
 riche riche riches riches rich 
 
14] LESSON VII 11 
 
 2. The adjective agrees in gender and number with the 
 word qualified: 
 
 Un petit livre; une petite maison. A small book; a small house. 
 
 Les livres sont jolis. The books are pretty. 
 
 Les maisons sont jolies. The houses are pretty. 
 
 Ils (elles) sont jolis (jolies). They are pretty. 
 
 3. An adjective qualifying two (or more) words must be 
 plural masculine if both words are masculine or of different 
 gender, and plural feminine if both are feminine: 
 
 Le pere et le fils sont forts. The father and son are strong. 
 
 La sceur et le frere sont grands. The sister and brother are tall. 
 La mere et la fille sont jolies. The mother and daughter are pretty. 
 
 4. Agreement with je, tu, nous, vous is according to sense: 
 Nous sommes contents (or con- We are satisfied. 
 
 tentes). 
 
 EXERCISE VII 
 
 content [kota], satisfied, pleased, grand [gra], great, large, tall 
 
 glad joli [30!!], pretty 
 
 diligent [dilisa], diligent," 'indus- pauvre, [poivr], poor 
 
 trious - petit [poti], small, little 
 
 la fille [fiij], daughter, girl pourquoi [purkwa], why? 
 
 fort [fo:r], strong riche [ri$], rich 
 
 le garden [garso], boy tres [tre], very 
 
 A. Continue, as in Exercise VI, A: 1. Je suis content (e), tu es, 
 etc. 2. Je suis grand(e) et fort(e). 3. Suis-je diligent(e)? 4. Ne 
 suis-je pas riche? 5. N'ai-je pas une grande maison? 
 
 B. Turn into negative interrogative: 1. Est-elle riche? 2. Sont-ils 
 ici? 3. L'oncle a-t-il une jolie maison? 4. Les enfants sont-ils 
 contents? 5. Pourquoi etes-vous contente, madame? 6. Avez- 
 vous une grande maison? 7. Ai-je un joli livre? 8. As-tu les gants 
 de la dame? 
 
 C. Answer in the affirmative and also in the negative: 1. N'etes- 
 vous pas les enfants de M. ( = monsieur) Ribot? 2. Ne suis-je pas 
 grande et forte? 3. M. Ribot n'est-il pas riche? 4. N'avez-vous 
 pas deux petites sceurs? 5. M me ( = madame) Leduc nVt-elle 
 
12 LESSON VIII [ 15 
 
 pas une grande maison? 6. Les petites filles ne sont-elles pas ici? 
 7. Les petits gardens n'ont-ils pas les plumes? 8. N'ai-je pas le 
 papier? etc. 
 
 D. 1. Are you not satisfied? 2. Why is she not satisfied? 3. The 
 little girls are not very industrious. 4. Are John's aunts not 
 rich? 5. Are you (tu) not Mrs. Ribot's little daughter? 6. Hasn't 
 Mr. Leduc a large house in the village? 7. Haven't you the little 
 boy's pencil? 8. Haven't Mr. and Mrs. Ribot a pretty house in the 
 country? 9. Haven't I a large garden? 10. Mary, haven't you 
 the pbor girl's book? 
 
 E. 1. The women are very poor. 2. Mr. Ribot's wife is very 
 rich. 3. Isn't Mary's sister very tall? 4. She is tall and strong. 
 5. Why are you not satisfied, madam? 6. Are the ladies not sat- 
 isfied? 7. They are satisfied now. 8. Are we not industrious? 
 9. You are not very industrious. 10. Isn't Mary's little box very 
 pretty? 
 
 LESSON VIII 
 
 15. The Possessive Adjective 
 
 MASC. SING. FEM. SING. MASC. OR FEM. PLUB. 
 
 mon [mo] ma [ma] mes [me] my 
 
 ton [to] ta [ta] tes [te] thy, your 
 
 son [so] sa [sa] ses [se] his, her, its, one's 
 
 notre [notr] notre [notr] nos [no] our 
 
 votre [votr] votre [votr] vos [vo] your 
 
 leur [loeir] leur [loeir] leurs [loeir] their 
 
 16. Agreement. 1. The possessive adjective agrees in gen- 
 der and number with the noun denoting the object possessed, 
 and must be repeated before each noun: 
 
 Mon oncle et ma tante. My uncle and (my) aunt. 
 
 Votre plume et vos crayons. Your pen and (your) pencils. 
 
 2. Mon, ton, son are used instead of ma, ta, sa before fem- 
 inines beginning with a vowel or h mute: 
 
 Mon amie (/.); ton histoire (/.). My friend; your history. 
 Son autre plume. His (her) other pen. 
 
16] LESSON VIII 13 
 
 3. Since son (sa, ses) = his,, her, its, it can be known only 
 from the context which is meant: 
 
 Jean (Marie) a son livre. John (Mary) has his (her) book. 
 
 Chaque jour a ses peines. Each day has its troubles. 
 
 EXERCISE VIII 
 
 Pami [ami], m., friend dix [dis], ten 
 
 Pamie [ami], f ., friend meme [me:m], same 
 
 autre [o:tr], adj., other onze [oiz], eleven 
 
 Charles [$arl], Charles les parents [para], relatives, rela- 
 Claire [kleir], Clara, Claire tions, parents 
 
 le c6te [kote], side la piece [pjes], room 
 
 le cousin [kuze], m., cousin presque [presk], almos* 
 
 la cousine [kuzin], f., cousin semblable [sablabl], like, alike 
 a cote de, by the side of, beside; de qui? whose? of whom? 
 
 A. Continue: 1. J'ai mon livre, tu as ton, etc. 2. Ou est mon 
 encre? ou est ton encre? etc. 3. Je n'ai pas ma plume, tu n'as pas 
 ta, etc. 4. N'ai-je pas mes crayons? n'as-tu pas tes? etc. 
 
 B-. Make the possessive adjectives agree: 1. Le professeur a son 
 canne (craie, papiers). 2. Les Sieves ont leur livres (plumes). 
 
 3. J'ai mon plume (encre, papier). 4. Nous avons noire gants 
 (chaises, tables). 5. Vous avez wire plumes (canne, papier). 
 6. Marie a son boite (boites). 7. As-tu ton plume (encre, livres)? 
 
 C. 1. Je suis la fille de M. Lenoir. 2. La maison de mon pere 
 est a cote de la maison de M. Ribot. 3. Sa maison est tres jolie. 
 
 4. Notre maison est jolie aussi. 5. Nos maisons sont presque 
 semblables. 6. Notre maison a dix pieces. 7. Leur maison a 
 onze pieces. 8. M. Ribot est mon oncle. 9. II est le frere de ma 
 mere. 10. Sa femme est ma. tante. 11. Elle est la sceur de mon 
 pere. 12. Leur s enfants sont nos parents. 13. Marie Ribot est 
 ma petite cousine. 14. Son frere est mon cousin. 15. Nous avons 
 les memes amis. 16. Claire Leduc est mon amie. 17. Elle est 
 aussi ramie de ma cousine. 18. Charles Leduc est mon ami. 
 19. II est aussi I'ami de Jean Ribot. 
 
 D. (Oral.) 1. Ou est la maison de votre pere? 2. Votre maison 
 est-elle jolie? 3. Qui est M. Ribot? 4. De qui est-il le frere? 
 
14 LESSON IX [ 17 
 
 5. M me Ribot est-elle votre tante? 6. Qui sont vos deux cousins? 
 7. Qui est votre amie? 8. Qui est Fami de votre frere? 9. Ou est 
 mon autre plume? etc. 
 
 E. 1. Our house is in the country. 2. Your house is beside our 
 house. 3. Is their house not very large? 4. Are our houses not 
 very pretty? 5. His house has ten rooms. 6. My house has eleven 
 rooms. 7. Your (thy) aunt has a house in the village. 8. Our 
 relatives are in (the) town. 9. My mother's brother is my uncle. 
 10. My little sisters have the same books. 
 
 F. 1. Your father's sister is your aunt. 2. John Ribot is my 
 cousin. 3. Charles Leduc is my friend's (/.) brother. 4. Who is 
 your friend? 5. Are your friends not yet here? 6. Mary Ribot 
 is my cousin. 7. Where is your (thy) ink? 8. Where is her other 
 pen? 9. Where are their other pens? 10. The two rooms are 
 almost alike. 
 
 
 
 LESSON IX 
 
 17. Void, voil&. When objects are pointed out by look, 
 gesture or the like, here is, here are = void [vwasi], and there is, 
 there are = voil& [vwala], here and there being stressed: 
 
 Voici mon' ami. Here is my friend. 
 
 Voila mes plumes. There are my pens. 
 
 NOTE. Voici ( = vois 4- ici) means literally see here, voila ( = vois + 
 la), see there. 
 
 18. Some Personal Pronoun Objects 
 
 MASC. SING. FEM. SING. MASC. OR FEM. PLUR. 
 
 le, P [la, l] } him or it la, P [la, 1], her or it les [le], them 
 
 Je le blame; je Padmire. / blame him; I admire him (her). 
 
 Je la donne; nous Pavons. / give it; we have it (e.'g. pen). 
 
 Vous ne les avez pas. You haven't them (e.g. books, pens). 
 
 Ou est Marie? La voila. Where is Mary? There she is. 
 
 1. These pronouns denote the direct object in the third per- 
 son, and have the same forms as the definite article. 
 
 2. They are placed before the verb (but see 72), and be- 
 fore voici and voila. 
 
18] LESSON IX 15 
 
 EXERCISE IX 
 
 Paffaire [afeir], f., affair, business, le pardessus [pardosy], overcoat 
 
 thing la poche [po$], pocket 
 
 alors [aloir], then pour [pur], for 
 
 le chapeau [$apo], hat pret [pre], ready 
 
 le cocker [ko$e], coachman, driver la promenade [promnad], walk, 
 
 Louis [Iwi], Louis drive 
 
 les lunettes [lynet], f., spectacles, tout [tu], f . toute, aZZ, every 
 
 glasses la voiture [vwatyir], carriage 
 
 papa [papa], 
 
 A Continue: 1. Je Fai, tu Fas, etc. 2. Je les ai, etc. 3. Je ne 
 Fai pas, etc. 4., J'ai ma canne, tu as ta canne, etc. 5. J'ai mes 
 gants, tu as tes, etc. 6. N'ai-je pas mon pardessus? n'as-tu pas 
 ton, etc. * 
 
 B. (Monsieur Dupont et Louis) 1. Louis, ou est ton pardessus? - 
 2. Je Fai, mon pere. 3. As-tu ton chapeau aussi? 4. Oui, mon 
 pere, le voici. Papa, as-tu tes gants? 5. Oui, mon enfant, je les 
 ai dans ma poche. 6. Et ton chapeau? 7. Le voil& sur la 
 table la-bas. 8. Mais tu n'as pas tes lunettes. Ou sont-elles? 
 9. Les voici sous mon chapeau. Alors nous avons toutes nos 
 affaires? Et la voiture est-elle prete? 10. Oui, papa, la voila & 
 la porte. 11. Et le cocher est-il la? 12. Le voila aussi & cote de 
 la voiture. 13. Maintenant nous sommes prets pour notre pro- 
 menade. 
 
 C. (Oral.) 1. Ou est votre pardessus? 2. Avez-vous votre 
 chapeau? 3. Avez-vous aussi vos gants? 4. Ou sont les lunettes 
 de votre pere? 5. Avez-vous toutes vos affaires? 6. tes-vous 
 prets maintenant? 7. Ou est la voiture? 8. Ou est le cocher? 
 etc. 
 
 D. 1. Have you my overcoat? 2. Yes, sir, here it is. 3. Where 
 are my gloves? 4. There they are on the table. 5. Have you your 
 hat? 6. Yes, sir, I have it. 7. Where are your glasses? 8. I haven't 
 them. 9. Where is the carriage? 10. There it is at the door. 
 11. Where is the coachman? 12. There he is beside the carriage. 
 13. Have we all our things? 14. Yes, papa, we have them. 15. Are 
 we ready for our drive? 16. We are ready. 
 
16 
 
 LESSON X 
 
 [19 
 
 E. 1. Who has my ink? 2. Haven't you it? 3. I haven't it. 
 4. John hasn't it. 5. Here it is; I have it now. 6. Where are 
 your books? 7. Haven't you them here? 8. We haven't them 
 here to-day. 9. There they are on the table. 10. The teacher's 
 chalk is here; here it is. 11. There is his cane; there it is. 12. My 
 pens are in my box; here they are. 
 
 19. 
 
 LESSON X 
 
 Present Indicative of donner, 'give* 
 
 1. AFFIRMATIVE 
 
 
 
 I give, am giving, do give, etc. 
 
 je donne [39 don] 
 
 tu donnes [ty don] 
 
 il donne [il don] 
 
 nous donnons [nu dono] 
 
 vous donnez [vu done] 
 
 ils donnent [il don] 
 
 3. INTERROGATIVE 
 Am I giving? do I give? etc. 
 donne- je? [done: 3] 
 
 donnes-tu? [don ty] 
 donne-t-il? [don t il] 
 donnons-nous? [dono nu] 
 donnez-vous? [done vu] 
 donnent-ils? [dont il] 
 
 2. NEGATIVE 
 
 / do not give, am not giving, etc. 
 
 je ne donne pas [39 na don pa] 
 
 tu ne donnes pas [ty na don pa] 
 
 il ne donne pas [il na don pa] 
 
 nous ne donnons pas [nu na dono pa] 
 
 vous ne donnez pas [vu na done pa] 
 
 ils ne donnent pas [il na don pa] 
 
 4. NEGATIVE INTERROGATIVE 
 Am I not giving? do I not give? etc. 
 ne donne-je pas? [no done: 3 pa] 
 
 ne donnes-tu pas? [no don ty pa] 
 ne donne-t-il pas? [no don t il pa] 
 ne donnons-nous pas? [no dono nu pa] 
 ne donnez-vous pas? [na done vu pa] 
 ne donnent-ils pas? , [na dont il pa] 
 
 1. Conjugate as above all regular verbs in -er. 
 
 2. Observe particularly that, .most English tenses have va- 
 rious forms, e.g. / give, I am giving, I do give, while French 
 tenses have only one form (in this case, je, donne); so also for 
 interrogative and negative forms, e.g. does he give? is he giving? 
 ( = donne-t-il), they are not giving, they do not give ( = ils ne 
 donnent pas). 
 
LESSON X 
 
 17 
 
 20. Interrogation. 1. By prefixing est-ce que [e s ke] (lit. 
 is it that?), any statement may be turned into a question: 
 
 II a ses gants. He has his gloves. 
 
 Est-ce qu'il a ses gants? Has he his gloves f 
 
 NOTE. This form usually replaces the 1st sing, interrog., e.g. est-ce 
 que je donne? = donne-je? 
 
 2. An interrogative word, if used, precedes est-ce que: 
 Qu'est-ce qu'il desire? What does he wish? 
 
 Oft est-ce qu'ils demeurent? Where do they live? 
 
 3. Inflection of the voice may serve to indicate interrogation: 
 Vous demeurez ici? Do you live here? 
 
 21. Indirect Object. 1. The indirect object is denoted by : 
 Je donne une plume a Jean. / give John a pen (a pen to John). 
 Je parle aux eleves. / am speaking to the pupils. 
 
 2. With a verb, to him, to her = lui [Iqi], to them = leur [lce:r]; 
 they precede the verb : 
 
 Je lui (leur) parle. / speak to him or her (to them). 
 
 EXERCISE X 
 
 amuser [amyze], amuse 
 beaucoup [boku], much, very 
 
 much, a great deal 
 le cahier [kaje], exercise book 
 crier [krie], cry out, shout 
 donner [done], give, give away 
 ecouter [ekute], listen (to) 
 expliquer [eksplike], explain 
 gros [gro], large, big 
 
 Pimage [imais], f., image, picture 
 Pinstitutrice [estitytris], f., teacher 
 jouer fewe], play 
 la lecon [laso], lesson 
 mademoiselle [madmwazel], Miss 
 parler [parle], speak 
 quelquefois [kelkofwa], sometimes 
 regarder [ragarde], look at 
 travailler [travaje], work 
 
 a present [preza], at present, now 
 
 A. Continue: 1. Je leur donne mes plumes, tu . . . tes plumes, 
 etc. 2. Est-ce que je lui donne mon cahier? est-ce que tu . . . ton 
 . . .? etc. 3. Je ne lui (or leur) parle pas, etc. 4. Est-ce que je ne 
 travaille pas? ne travailles-tu pas? etc. 5. Je le (or les) regarde, 
 etc. 6. Je ne F (or les) 6coute pas, etc. 
 
18 LESSON X [ 21 
 
 B. 1. Est-ce que vous travaillez, mes enfants? 2. Oui, made- 
 moiselle, nous travaillons. 3. Parles-tu, Louis? 4. Est-ce que tu 
 paries, Marie? 5. Jean, tu paries? 6. Oui, mademoiselle, nous 
 parlons. 7. Marie donne le livre a la dame. 8. Elle lui donne le 
 papier aussi. 9. Les enfants regardent les jolies images. 10. L'in- 
 stitutrice leur donne un gros livre. 11. Je travaille beaucoup. 
 12. Turn sentences 1-11 into negative form. 
 
 C. 1. Nous sommes a 1'ecole. 2. L'institutrice donne les cahiers 
 aux eleves. 3. Nous travaillons. 4. Elle explique la legon. 5. Nous 
 Fecoutons. 6. Elle parle beaucoup aux Sieves. 7. Nous lui parlons 
 aussi quelquefois. 8. Les petits gargons jouent a present dans la 
 cour. 9. Us parlent et crient beaucoup. 10. Les petites filles sont 
 sous les arbres. 11. E lies regardent les images dans un gros livre, 
 12. Les images les amusent beaucoup. 13. Les images amusent les 
 petits gargons aussi. 14. Elles leur donnent le livre. 
 
 D. 1. I am speaking. 2. You are not working. 3. John is 
 not listening. 4. Doesn't the pupil listen? 5. The pupils speak 
 to the teacher; they speak to her. 6. She speaks to them. 7. Are 
 you not working? 8. We work a great deal. 9. We give the little 
 boys our book. 10. Where are you? 11. What are you looking 
 at? 12. We are looking at our exercise books. 13. What are 
 the little girls looking at? 14. They are looking at the pictures. 
 15. We are listening to the children. 16. They are playing in 
 the yard. 
 
 E. 1. Who is speaking to the pupils? 2. The teacher (/.) is 
 speaking to them. 3. Are the children playing in the yard now? 
 4. Yes, miss, they are playing under the trees. 5. The teacher is 
 explaining our lessons. 6. We are listening to her. 7. Are the boys 
 not shouting a great deal? 8. We are amusing the little boys. 
 9. We give them our pictures. 10. Are the little boys not working? 
 11. No, sir, they are not working. 12. Do the men work much? 
 13. Yes, sir, they work in the fields. 14. Are the grammars not 
 on the table? 15. Yes, they are on the table with the dic- 
 tionary. 
 
123] 
 
 LESSON XI 
 
 19 
 
 22. 
 
 LESSON XI 
 
 Conjunctive Personal Pronouns 
 
 SINGULAR 
 
 me [ma], me, (to) me 
 
 PLUBAL 
 nous [mi], us, (to) us 
 
 te [ta], thee, you, (to) thee, (to) you vous [vu], you, (to) you 
 
 le [la], m., him, it 
 
 la [la], f., her, it 
 
 lui [Iqi], m. f., (to) him, (to) her 
 
 les [le], m. f ., them 
 
 leur [loeir], m. f., (to) them 
 
 ], m. f., himself, herself, it- se [sa], m. f., themselves, (to) them- 
 
 self, (to) himself, etc. 
 
 selves 
 
 (a) These forms are called "conjunctive" because they are used along 
 with verbs as objects. 
 
 (6) Le, la, les ( 18), lui, leur ( 21, 2) are repeated here for completeness. 
 
 23. Use of Conjunctive Objects 
 
 II me (te, nous, vous) frappe. He strikes me (you, us, you). 
 
 II me' (te, nous, vous) parle. He speaks to me (to you, etc.). 
 
 Ma mere nVaime (t'aime). My mother loves me (loves you). 
 
 II se coupe; il se dit. He cuts himself; he says to himself. 
 
 1. Me, te, se, nous, vous serve both as direct and as indirect 
 objects of verbs. 
 
 2. All conjunctive personal pronoun objects precede the verb, 
 unless it be an imperative affirmative ( 72). 
 
 EXERCISE XI 
 
 accompagner [akopajie], accom- 
 pany, go (come) with 
 
 aimable [emabl], amiable, kind 
 
 apporter [aporte], bring 
 
 la bonne [bon], servant, maid 
 
 la carte [kart], map 
 
 chercher [$er$e], seek, look 
 for 
 
 le facteur [faktceir], postman, 
 letter-carrier 
 
 laisser [lese], let, leave 
 la lettre [letr], letter 
 montrer [motre], show 
 preter [prete], lend 
 quand [ka], when 
 remercier [romersje], thank 
 rencontrer [rakotre], meet 
 saluer [salije], salute, bow to, etc*. 
 souvent [suva], often 
 trouver [truve], find 
 
20 LESSON XI [23 
 
 A. Continue: 1. II me cherche, il te, etc. 2. Les images m'a- 
 musent, . . . t'amusent, etc. 3. Mon frere me prete ses livres, . . . 
 te prete ses livres, etc. 4. Mes amis m'accompagnent a 1'ecole, 
 . . . t'accompagnent, etc. 5. Le professeur m'explique la lec.on, 
 . . . t'explique, etc. 
 
 B. 1. Mon frere m 'apporte le gros livre. 2/ II me montre les 
 images. 3. Les images du livre t'amusent-elles? 4. Elles m'a- 
 musent beaucoup. 5. Votre pere nous cherche. 6. II nous accom- 
 pagne a Fecole. 7. Le professeur vous montre la carte. 8. Je 
 salue le professeur quand je le rencontre. 9. II me salue aussi. 
 
 10. Louis me prete souvent ses livres. 11. II est tres aimable. 
 12. Vous prete-t-il ses livres aussi? 13. Oui, et je lui prete mes 
 plumesVet mon encre. 14. Le facteur apporte les lettres. 15. II 
 les laisse dans la boite a la porte. 16. La bonne les trouve dans 
 la boite et les apporte a mon pere. 17. II la remercie. 18. Les 
 enfants s'amusent dans le jardin. 
 
 C. (Oral.) 1. Qui m'apporte le gros livre? 2. Qui nous montre 
 les images? 3. Qu'est-ce qu'il vous montre? 4. Saluez-vous votre , 
 professeur? 5. Quand est-ce qu'il nous salue? 6. Qu'est-ce que 
 tu pretes a Louis? 7. Qui m'apporte les lettres? 8. A qui les 
 donne-t-elle? 9. Votre pere la remercie-t-il? 10. Est-elle contente? 
 
 11. Ou les enfants s'amusent-ils? etc. 
 
 D. 1. I bring him the big book. 2. Who is showing us the pic- 
 tures? 3. Don't the pictures amuse you? 4. Yes, Miss Bibot, they 
 amuse me [very] 1 much. 5. My brother is looking for you (thee). 
 6. The teacher is explaining the map to us. 7. He explains the map 
 
 ' to them also. 8. I bow to him when I meet him. 9. He bows to 
 me when he meets me. 
 
 E. 1. I am lending you (thee) my books. 2. What does the 
 postman bring us? 3. He brings the letters and leaves them on 
 the table at the door. 4. Here are your letters on the table. 5. The 
 maid brings us the letters. 6. We thank her. 7. Are the children 
 not amusing themselves? 8. Do we not bring her the book? 
 9. There are our sisters; we bring them the pictures, 
 
 i Words in brackets to be omitted in translating. 
 
25] LESSON XII 21 
 
 LESSON XII 
 
 24. The General Noun. A noun used in a general sense 
 regularly takes the definite article in French, though not usu- 
 ally in English: 
 
 La vie est courte. Life is short. 
 
 L'homme est mortel. Man is mortal. 
 
 J'aime les Frangais. / like Frenchmen (the French). 
 
 Le fer est dur. Iron is hard. 
 
 Le cheval est trs utile. The horse is very useful. 
 
 25. The Partitive Noun. 1. /Some, any, either expressed or 
 understood with a noun = de + the definite article: 
 
 J'ai de la craie, du papier. / have (some) chalk, (some) paper. 
 
 Avez-vous de Pencre? Have you (any) ink? 
 
 A-t-il des freres (amis)? H as he any brothers .(friends)? 
 
 2. Thus is formed the plural of a noun with un(e) : 
 Un livre; des livres. A book; (some) books. 
 
 3. The general and partitive sense must be distinguished: 
 
 Les arbres ont des feuilles. Trees (gen.) have leaves (part.). 
 
 Les chiens sont des animaux. Dogs are animals. 
 
 EXERCISE XII 
 
 aimer [erne], love, like, be fond of la geographic feeografi], geography 
 
 Pamusement [amyzma], m., Phistoire [istwair], f., history, story 
 
 amusement la langue [la:g], tongue, language 
 
 Pargent [arsa], m., silver, money la lecture [lektyir], reading 
 
 la bille [biij], marble (plaything) la poire [pwair], pear 
 
 etudier [etydje], study la pomme [pom], apple 
 
 facilement [f asilma], easily, readily la toupie [tupi], top 
 
 le francais [frase], (the) French la viande [vjaid], meat 
 
 (language) 
 
 j'aime le francais, 7 am fond of (like) French; but note: parlez-vous 
 francais? do you speak French? 
 
22 LESSON XII [25 
 
 A Continue: 1. J'aime la lecture, tu . . . etc. 2. Est-ce que je 
 parle frangais? parles-tu . . . etc. 3. Je ne parle pas frangais, tu 
 ne . . . etc. 4. Je leur donne des cahiers et des plumes, tu leur 
 donnes . . . etc. 5. J'aime les pommes et les poires, tu . . . etci 
 6. J'ai de 1'encre et du papier, tu as . . . etc. 7. J'aime 1'argent, tu 
 aimes . . . etc. 8. J'ai de 1'argent dans ma poche, tu as . . . dans 
 ta, etc. 
 
 B. 1. J'aime la viande. 2. Avez-vous de la viande? 3. Aimez- 
 vous les pommes? 4. Je les aime beaucoup. 5. Les hommes aiment- 
 ils 1'argent? 6. Us raiment. 7. Avez-vous de 1'argent dans votre 
 poche? 8. Je lui prete de 1'argent. 9. Les enfants etudient-ils 
 la geographic et 1'histoire? 10. N'aiment-ils pas la lecture? 11. Ils 
 1'aiment beaucoup. 12. Avez-vous des pommes? 13. Non, mon- 
 sieur, mais nous avons des poires. 
 
 C. Complete the partitive form: 1. J'ai d . . . encre, d . . . plumes 
 et d . . . papier. 2. A-t-il d . . . craie et d . . . crayons? 3. Nous 
 avons d . . . freres et d . . . sceurs. 4. Elle ad... argent. 5. Ils 
 ont d . . . pommes. 6. A-t-elle d . . . viande? 7. Nous avons d . . . 
 arbres dans notre cour. 
 
 D. 1. Mes freres et mes so3urs e*tudient leurs legons. 2. Ils 
 aiment beaucoup Fhistoire et la geographic. 3. Ils aiment aussi le 
 frangais. 4. A l'cole nous parlons frangais. 5. Les enfants parlent 
 facilement les langues quand le professeur les parle. 6. Les eleves 
 ont des amusements a 1'ecole. 7. Les petits gargons ont des billes 
 et des toupies. 8. Les petites filles ont des livres. 9. Elles aiment 
 beaucoup la lecture. 10. Elles trouvent aussi des images dans les 
 livres. 11. Les images amusent les enfants. 
 
 E. 1. Have you any apples? 2. Do you like apples? 3. I don't 
 like them. 4. We like reading. 5. We are studying history and 
 geography. 6. I have some money in my pocket. 7. Are you 
 fond of money? 8. I am giving them some money. 9. Children 
 like apples. 10. Has John any apples? 11. Has he any ink? 12. No, 
 madam,, but I am lending him some paper and ink. 
 
 F. 1. We like reading. 2. Little boys like marbles. 3. They 
 have marbles and tops. 4. Our teacher speaks French. 5. Do you 
 speak French? 6. Don't you like French? 7. Have you any amuse- 
 
27] LESSON XIII 23 
 
 ments at school? 8. Little girls like books. 9. The little girls have 
 books. 10. Books amuse them. 11. Do not men love money? 
 12. Have you any money in your pocket? 13. Are you studying 
 history and the languages? 
 
 LESSON XIII 
 
 26. Quantity. 1. The word limited by a noun or adverb of 
 quantity is preceded by de, usually without article: 
 
 Une livre de viande. A pound of meat. 
 
 Beaucoup de the. A great deal of tea (much tea). 
 
 Beaucoup de pommes (d'amis). A great many apples (friends). 
 Un peu de pain; trop de pain. A little bread; too much bread. 
 Assez d'argent. Enough (of) money or money 
 
 enough. 
 
 2. But observe the following expressions: 
 La plupart des hommes. (The) most (of the) men. 
 
 J'ai bien des amis ici. / have many friends here. 
 
 Desire-t-il encore des pommes? Does he wish some more apples? 
 
 27. Use of en. 1. Some or any, as a pronoun = en [a] (lit. 
 of ~it, of them) ; it must be used to replace a partitive noun, even 
 though some, any, be omitted in English: 
 
 A-t-il de 1'encre? II en a. Has he any ink? He has (some). 
 
 Desire-t-il du the? II en desire. Does he wish tea? He does. 
 
 2. Similarly en must replace a noun preceded by a numeral, 
 or the governed word of an expression of quantity: 
 
 A-t-elle une plume? Has she a pen? 
 
 Elle en a une (deux, etc.). She has one (two, etc.). 
 
 Elle en a beaucoup. She has a great many. 
 
 3. Besides the above uses, observe that en in general has the 
 force of de ( = of, from, with, etc.) + a noun or pronoun: 
 
 J'en suis content. / am pleased with (glad of) it or 
 
 them. 
 
 4. En has the same position as a conjunctive pronoun object 
 (cf. 23, 2). 
 
24 LESSON XIII [27 
 
 EXERCISE XIII 
 
 assez [ase], enough la livre fliivr], pound 
 
 1'automne [oton], m. or f ., autumn ramasser [ramase], pick up, gather 
 
 cent [sa], a hundred tester [reste], remain, stay 
 
 combien [kobje], how much (many)'! le sac [sak], bag, sack 
 
 desirer [dezire], desire, wish, want souffier [sufle], blow 
 
 Pecureuil [ekyroeij], m., squirrel le the [te], tea 
 
 en [a], in tomber [tobe], fall 
 
 la faine [fern], beechnut le vent [va], wind 
 
 la feuille [foeij], leaf le verger [verse], orchard 
 
 (un) peu [p0], (a) little, few; en automne [an oton], in autumn 
 
 NOTE. Forms like / do, I have, with a verb understood, must not be 
 used in French; the sentence must be complete. 
 
 A. Continue: 1. J'ai beaucoup de pommes, tu, etc. 2. J'en ai 
 beaucoup, etc. 3. Je n'en ai pas beaucoup, etc. 4. J'en ai dix, etc. 
 5. J'ai peu d'argent,' etc. 6. J'en ai peu, etc. 7. J'ai encore de 
 1'argent, etc. 8. J'ai bien de 1'argent, etc. 9. J'en ai encore beau- 
 coup, etc. 10. J'ai bien des amis, etc. 
 
 B. 1. Avez-vous assez d'argent? 2. J'en ai assez. 3. Que de*- 
 sirez-vous? 4. Je desire une livre de the. 5. Avez-vous beaucoup 
 de pommes? 6. Nous n'en avons pas beaucoup. 7. Nous avons 
 peu de pommes. 8. Nous en avons tres peu. 9. Combien en avez- 
 vous? 10. J'en ai trois. 11. Desirez-vous encore des pommes? 
 12. J'en desire encore. 
 
 C. 1. Nous sommes en automne. 2. Peu de feuilles restent sur 
 les arbres. 3. Le vent souffle et beaucoup de faines tombent. 
 4. Les ecureuils en ramassent beaucoup. 5. Les enfants aiment 
 les faines et en ramassent aussi. 6. Dans son verger M. Dupont 
 a cent sacs de pommes. 7. II en donne dix sacs a son frere. 8. Son 
 frere en donne a ses enfants. 9. La plupart des enfants aiment les 
 pommes. 10. Les autres enfants en desirent aussi. 11. Les en- 
 fants de M. Dupont en donnent & leurs petits amis. 
 
 D. (Oral.) 1. Quand les feuilles tombent-elles? 2. Qu'est-ce 
 que les ecureuils ramassent? 3. Est-ce que les enfants ramassegt 
 des faines? 4. Qu'est-ce que vous avez dans votre verger? 5. En 
 avez-vous beaucoup? 6. A qui en donnez-vous? 7. fites-vous con- 
 tents de votre verger? 8. Combien de pommes avez-vous? etc. 
 
29] LESSON XIV 25 
 
 E. 1. Have you many apples? 2. We have a great many. 
 3. Have you any more apples? 4. Yes, sir, we have some more. 
 5. What do the squirrels pick up in autumn? 6. They pick up a 
 great many beechnuts. 7. Our friends have four sacks of apples. 
 8. We have a great many also. 9. Have your friends much money? 
 10. They have (= they have much of it). .11. Has the little boy 
 any pears? 12. He has. 13. We are picking up pears in the 
 orchard. 14. Are you picking up any? 15. Do you give any 
 [away] to your relatives? 16. We give some away to our cousins. 
 
 F. 1. Do you wish any money? 2. No, sir, I have some. 3. Have 
 you much? 4. I have enough. 5. Has Louis enough? 6. He has 
 
 (enough of it). . 7. How many apples have you? 8. How many 
 has John? 9. I have one; 'John has two. 10. You haven't enough; 
 you have very few. 11. Here are some more. 12. Here are some 
 on the table. 13. Do most men love money? 14. They do ( = they 
 love it). 
 
 LESSON XIV 
 
 28. Omission of Article. With a partitive noun ( 25) the 
 definite article is omitted, and de alone is used : 
 
 1. In a general negation, complete absence of the object in 
 question being implied: 
 
 Je n'ai pas de pain. I have no (haven't any) bread. 
 
 II n'a pas d'amis ici. He has no friends here. 
 
 Je n'ai pas de plume. I have no pen. 
 
 . 2. When an adjective precedes the noun, and likewise when a 
 noun is understood after an adjective: 
 
 Marie a de jolies fleurs. Mary has (some) pretty flowers. 
 
 J'ai de votre argent. 7 have some of your money. 
 
 De grands arbres et de petits. Large trees and small (ones). 
 
 But: Des pommes mures. Ripe apples (adj. following). 
 
 NOTE. For exceptions and special cases, see Lesson LXXX. 
 
 29. Observe the omission of a partitive sign in the following: 
 II n'a ni pommes ni poires. He has neither apples nor pears. 
 Sans amis et sans argent. Without friends and without money. 
 Le panier est plein de pommes. The basket is full of apples. 
 
26 LESSON XIV [30 
 
 30. Observe the use of de in the following expressions: 
 Une robe de soie. A silk dress (dress of silk). 
 Une legon de frangais. A French lesson. 
 
 Une salle de classe. A classroom. 
 
 31. II y a. There is, there are, are rendered thus when no 
 stress rests on the word there, and when the expression is not 
 accompanied by look or gesture (cf . 17) : 
 
 II y a un livre sur la table. There is a book on the table. 
 
 Y a-t-il des livres ici? Are there any books here? 
 
 II n'y a pas de plumes ici. There are no pens here. 
 
 N'y a-t-il pas de plumes ici? Are there no pens here? 
 
 II y en a. There is (are) some. 
 
 II n'y en a pas. There is (are) none. 
 
 Y en a-t-il? 7s (are) there any? 
 
 N'y en a-t-il pas? 7s (are) there none (not any)? 
 
 (a) Observe that en follows y. 
 
 EXERCISE XIV 
 
 brouter [brute], browse, crop partout [partu], everywhere 
 
 deja [desa], already plein [pie], full (of, de) 
 
 la fleur [floeir], flower pousser [puse], grow 
 
 la glace [glas], ice le printemps [preta], spring 
 
 1'herbe [erb], f ., grass la salle [sal], hall, room 
 
 la joie fewa], .joy, happiness sans [sa], without 
 
 meme [meim], adv., even le sud [syd], south 
 
 le mouton [muto], sheep la vache [va$], cow 
 
 la neige [neis], snow vert [ve:r], green 
 
 le pain [pe], bread 
 
 ne . . . ni . . . ni [no ni ni], neither . . . nor; au printemps, in spring 
 
 A. Continue: 1. Je n'ai ni plumes ni encre, tu, etc. 2. J'ai de 
 jolis livres, etc. 3. Je n'ai pas d'argent, etc. 4. Je suis sans gants 
 et sans chapeau, etc. 5. J'etudie ma legon de frangais, tu . . . ta, 
 etc. 6. Je suis dans la salle de classe, etc. 7. II y a de grands 
 arbres dans ma cour, . . . dans ta, etc. 8. Y a-t-il de jolies fleurs 
 dans mon jardin? . . . dans ton, etc. 9. II y en a dans mon jardin, 
 . . . dans ton, etc. 10. N'y en a-t-il pas dans mon jardin?.. . . dans 
 ton, etc. 
 
31] LESSON XIV 27 
 
 B. 1. Avez-vous du pain? 2. Je n'ai pas de pain. 3. Nous 
 n'avons ni pain ni viande. 4. Vous avez la de jolies fleurs. 5. Nous 
 avons beaucoup de jolies fleurs. 6. A la ville il y a de grandes mai- 
 sons et de petites. 7. Avez-vous beaucoup d'amis? 8. Nous n'en 
 avons pas ici. 9. Y a-t-il de jolies maisons a la campagne? 10. As-tu 
 de inon papier? 11. J'en ai. 12. Y a-t-il des livres sur la table? 
 13. N'y en a-t-il pas? 14. II n'y en a pas. 
 
 C. 1. Voici maintenant le printemps. 2. II n'y a ni neige ni 
 glace. 3. Le vent du sud souffle. 4. Les arbres sont de*ja verts. 
 
 5. L'herbe pousse aux champs. 6. Les vaches et les moutons la 
 broutent. 7. Partout il y a de jolies fleurs. 8. Nous en trouvons 
 dans les champs et dans les jardins. 9. Les arbres des vergers en 
 sont pleiris. 10. II y a de la joie partout. 11. Meme sans amis et 
 sans argent les homines sont contents. 
 
 D. (Oral.) 1. Y a-t-il de la neige au printemps? 2. Ou trouvons- 
 nous de jolies fleurs? 3. Y a-t-il de la joie partout? 4. Les arbres 
 sont-ils pleins de fleurs? 5. Ou sont les moutons et les vaches?' 
 
 6. Qu'est-ce qu'ils broutent? 7. N'avez-vous pas de fleurs? 8. Qui 
 a de jolies fleurs? 9. Qui nous donne une leg. on de frangais? 10. Ou 
 nous donne-t-il notre legon de frangais? 11. Qu'est-ce qu'il y a 
 sur la table? 12. Y a-t-il des plumes dans votre boite? etc. 
 
 E. 1. I have no flowers. 2. We have no French lesson to-day. 
 
 3. Have you no large trees in your yard? 4. John has some of my 
 paper. 5. There are some pretty flowers in our garden. 6. There 
 are large houses and small houses in the city. 7. I have neither 
 ink' nor pens here. 8. The poor boy is without money. 9. The 
 teacher is giving us a French lesson in the classroom. 10. There 
 are a great many books on the table. 11. Are there any large houses 
 in the village? 12. There are some very large [ones]. 
 
 F. 1. Are there any pretty flowers in the fields? 2. There are 
 already some in the fields and gardens. 3. Do the cows crop grass? 
 
 4. Yes, sir, and the sheep crop it too. 5. Sheep and cows like grass. 
 6. Sometimes there is snow in spring. 7. But there isn't much. 
 8. We have neither ice nor snow now. 9. The grass is already 
 green. 10. The south wind is blowing. 11. There is no ice to-day. 
 12. Flowers grow in spring. 13. The gardens are full of them. 
 
28 LESSON XV [32 
 
 LESSON XV 
 
 32. Irregular Plurals. Observe the following exceptions to 
 the general rule of adding s to the singular (cf . 2, 3) : 
 
 1. Nouns in -s, -x, -z, and adjectives in -s, -x, are un- 
 changed: 
 
 bois, wood(s) nez, nose(s) bas bas, low 
 
 voix, voice(s) heureux, heureux, happy 
 
 2. Nouns in -au, -eu, and a few in -ou, add x: 
 
 chapeau(x), hat(s) jeu(x), game(s) bijou(x), jewel(s) 
 
 (a) Also in -ou: caillou(x), pebble, chou(x), cabbage, genou(x), knee^ 
 hibou(x), owl, joujou(x), toy, but sou(s), cent, halfpenny, etc. 
 
 3. Adjectives in -eau also add x: 
 
 beau(x), fine nouveau(x), new 
 
 . 4. Nouns, and the commoner adjectives, in -al take -aux: 
 
 animal animaux, animal e"gal egaux, equal 
 
 (a) Bal(s), ball, carnaval(s), carnival, and some rarer nouns are regular. 
 
 5. Seven nouns in -ail take -aux; the commonest are: 
 travail travaux, work(s) corail coraux, coral(s) 
 
 6. Note also: 
 
 ceil yeux, eye(s) ciel cieux, sky, skies, heaven(s) 
 
 33. Position of Adjectives. Qualifying adjectives, used with 
 nouns, regularly follow, especially when denoting: 
 
 1. Physical quality, such as colour, shape, heat, cold, etc.: 
 De Pencre noire; de Peau froide. Black ink; cold water. 
 Une pierre dure (ronde). A hard (round} stone. 
 
 Du vin doux (aigre). Sweet (sour) wine. 
 
 2. Nationality, religion and the like: 
 
 Le droit anglais; Feglise catho- (The) English law; the Catholw 
 lique. church. 
 
 3. So also participles used as adjectives: 
 
 La cruche cassee. The broken pitcher. 
 
 Un tableau frappant. A striking picture. 
 
33] LESSON XV 29 
 
 4. But certain adjectives of frequent use generally precede: 
 beau, fine long, long jeune, young 
 
 joli, pretty court, short vieux, old 
 
 vilain, ugly gros, big nouveau, new 
 
 bon, good grand, large 
 
 mauvais, bad petit, small 
 
 NOTES. 1. Adjectives used figuratively, unemphatically or when 
 merged in sense with the noun, often precede, irrespective of the above 
 rules, e.g. une Stroite amitie, an intimate (lit. narrow) friendship; but une 
 rue etroite, a narrow street. 
 
 2. Many adjectives vary in meaning, before or after the noun, e.g. mon 
 cher enfant, my dear child; une robe chere, a costly dress. 
 
 EXERCISE XV 
 
 abondant [aboda], abundant le feuillage [fcejais], leaves, foliage 
 
 Panimal [animal], m., animal la fraise [freiz], strawberry 
 beau [bo], fine, beautiful, hand- habiter [abite], inhabit, live in 
 
 some, good-looking interessant [eteresa], interesting 
 
 bleu [b!0], blue mur [myir], ripe, mature 
 
 le bois [bwa], wood noir [nwair], black 
 
 le bruit [brui], sound, noise 1'ceil [oeij], m., pi. yeux [j0], eye 
 
 la cerise [sariiz], cherry Poiseau [wazo], m., bird 
 
 le chant [$a], song, singing la paille [paij], straw 
 
 charge [$ar5e], laden le pommier [pomje], apple tree 
 
 le cheval Roval], horse la sole [swa], silk 
 
 le clou [klu], nail tendre [taidr], tender 
 Pete [ete], m., summer 
 
 en ete [an ete], in summer 
 
 A. Continue: 1. Je regarde les beaux chevaux noirs, tu, etc. 
 2. J'ai deux chapeaux de paille, etc. 3. Je n'en ai pas de soie, etc. 
 4. Je suis sous les beaux arbres, etc. 5. J'ai deux gros livres in- 
 teressants, etc. 6. J'ai un sac de pommes mures, etc. 7. J'ai des 
 yeux bleus, etc. 8. J'ai deux gros clous, etc. 
 
 B. 1. En e"te nous sommes souvent aux bois. 2. Us sont beaux 
 et tres interessants. 3. Nous regardons souvent les beaux arbres. 
 
 4. Nous e*coutons aussi le bruit des feuilles et le chant des oiseaux. 
 
 5. Beaucoup de petits oiseaux habitent les bois. 6. Nous aimons 
 leur chant. 7. II y a aussi de petits animaux dans le feuillage. 
 
30 LESSON XV [33 
 
 8. Us nous amusent quand ils jouent ensemble. 9. Aux champs 
 Fherbe est tendre et abondante. 10. Les vaches et les chevaux 
 Taiment beaucoup. 11. Dans le verger les pommiers sont charges 
 de petites pommes. 12. Elles ne sont pas encore mures. 13. Mais 
 les cerises et les fraises sont presque mures. 14. II y a deux beaux 
 enfants sous les pommiers. 15. Ils ont de tres beaux yeux bleus. 
 16. Ils ont de beaux chapeaux de paille. 17. Mon pere a un chapeau 
 de soie. 
 
 C. (Oral.) 1. Qu'est-ce que vous regardez dans les bois? 
 2. Qu'est-ce que nous e*coutons aux bois? 3. Que' trouvez-vous 
 aux bois? 4. Est-ce que les petits animaux vous amusent? 5. Y 
 a-t-il beaucoup de fraises mures au jardin? 6. Ou trouvons-nous 
 de Fherbe tendre? 7. Combien d 'enfants y a-t-il sous les arbres? 
 8. Avez-vous un joli chapeau de paille? etc. 
 
 D. 1. Beautiful woods. 2. Interesting books. 3. A pretty blue 
 bird. 4. Beautiful blue eyes. 5. Fine black horses. 6. The little 
 animals of the woods. 7. The ten'der and abundant grass. 8. Ripe 
 apples; green apples. 9. A straw hat; a silk hat. 10. Black ink; 
 blue paper. 11. A strong man; strong men. 12. Ripe cherries; 
 
 ripe strawberries. (For 13 and 14, see 32.) 13. Games, jewels, 
 works, pebbles, voices. 14. New books, toys and games, pretty 
 corals. 
 
 E. 1. How many hats have you? 2. I have two. 3. I have a 
 straw hat and a silk hat. 4. Do you like straw hats? 5. I do ( = I 
 like them), in summer. 6. There are three beautiful children under 
 the apple trees. 7. The children's eyes are blue. 8. They are 
 playing together. 9. We like the singing of the birds. 10. When 
 the little animals play they amuse us very much. 11. Do the 
 horses like the tender grass? 12. They do. 
 
 F. 1. Are there many apples in the orchard? 2. The apple trees 
 are laden with (de) apples. 3. But they are still small. 4. There 
 are no ripe apples yet. 5. Most men like fine horses. 6. My uncle 
 has two beautiful apple trees in his garden. 7. We listen to the 
 singing of the little birds in the woods. 8. When the wind blows 
 there is a sound in the leaves. 9. The sounds of the woods are very 
 interesting. 10. Many interesting little animals live in the woods. 
 
34] LESSON XVI 31 
 
 LESSON XVI 
 
 34. Irregular Feminine Adjectives. The stem of certain ad- 
 jectives is modified on adding the ending -e (cf. 14), thus: 
 
 1. By change of final consonant (f = v, g = gu, x = s, c = 
 ch, sometimes qu) : 
 
 actif active, active blanc blanche, white 
 
 long longue, long public publique, public 
 
 heureux heureuse, happy 
 (a) But observe: doux, douce, sweet; faux, fausse, false. 
 
 2. By doubling the final consonant of -el, -eil, -en, -on, and 
 commonly also final -s and -t: 
 
 cruel cruelle, cruel bon bonne, good 
 
 pareil pareille, like gros grosse, big 
 
 ancien ancienne, ancient, former muet muette, dumb 
 (a) Similarly gentil, gentille, nice. 
 
 (6) Regular are: gris(e), grey, pret(e), ready, and some others; six in -et 
 have -etc, e.g. complet, complete, complete; observe also frais, fralche, fresh, 
 cool. 
 
 3. Adjectives in -er, and a few others, change e to e: 
 
 leger legere, light sec seche, dry (cf. 1, above) 
 
 cher chere, dear complet complete, complete (cf. 
 
 bref breve, brief (cf. 1, above) 2, b, above) 
 
 4. Five adjectives have two masculine forms in the singular, 
 the form in -1 standing always before a vowel or h mute, and 
 serving to form the feminine, like 2 above: 
 
 beau or bel belle, fine nouveau or nouvel nouvelle, new 
 
 f ou or f ol f olle, foolish vieux or vieil vieille, old 
 
 mou or mol molle, soft 
 
 EXERCISE XVI 
 
 la branche [bra:$], branch jaune fooin], yellow 
 
 la cave [ka:v], cellar nu [ny], bare 
 
 couper [kupe], cut, cut down rouge [mis], red 
 
 court [kuir], short le traineau [treno], sleigh 
 
 le flocon [floko], flake (of snow) transporter [trasporte], bring 
 
 Phiver [iveir], m., winter 
 
 en hiver [an iveir], in winter 
 NOTE. The adjectives of 34, above, are not given in the vocabulary. 
 
32 LESSON XVI [34 
 
 A. Turn the English words into French with proper order and agree- 
 ment: 1. Nous avons (good) poires. 2. Aimez-vous (fine, sweet) 
 pommes? 3. Avez-vous (good, red) pommes? 4. Je leur donne 
 (big, sweet) pommes. 5. Nous avons (fine, white) chevaux. 6. II 
 y a (little, blue) oiseaux aux bois. 7. II y a (good) vaches aux 
 champs. 8. Le monsieur a (a fine, silk) chapeau. 
 
 B. 1. Voici maintenant Phiver. 2. Le bel arbre qui (which) est 
 devant notre maison n'a pas de feuilles vertes. 3. II en a de jaunes. 
 4. Mais ses longues branches sont presque nues. 5. II n'y a pas 
 de pommes au verger. 6. Mais nous avons de grosses belles pommes 
 rouges a la cave. 7. II y a aussi de jolies poires douces a la cave. 
 8. Peu de petits animaux sont aux bois. 9. II y a de la neige par- 
 tout. 10. Les champs sont blancs. 11. Les maisons sont blanches. 
 12. De gros flocons de neige tombent encore. 13. Deux hommes 
 forts coupent de gros arbres la-bas. 14. Us ont un traineau et 
 deux chevaux. 15. Avec le traineau ils transportent le bois a la 
 maison. 
 
 C. 1. The big flakes of white snow are falling. 2. The branches 
 of the fine tree are almost bare. 3. We find no little animals in 
 the woods. 4: There are no squirrels in the woods. 5. They do 
 not like the winter. 6. Are the fields white in winter? 7. The 
 fields are white, and the houses are white too. 8. There is white 
 snow everywhere. 9. What are the men cutting yonder? 10. They 
 are cutting big trees. 11. They bring home the wood with the 
 sleigh. 
 
 D. 1. A long letter; long letters. 2. Are you happy, (my) chil- 
 dren? 3. Mary is not happy; the other little girls are happy. 
 4. Our house is very old. 5. Are the ladies not yet ready? 6. Clara 
 is a dear little girl; is she not very nice? 7. Mr. Dupont is a hand- 
 some man. 8. His wife is a fine-looking lady. 9. There is an old 
 tree before the old house. 10. Old trees; old houses. 11. We have 
 a new lesson to-day. 12. Public affairs are interesting. 13. My 
 letter is short. 
 
37] LESSON XVII 33 
 
 LESSON XVII 
 
 35. Use of ce. Observe the English use of it, with the 
 verb to be, to anticipate a real subject following the verb, e.g. 
 it is my brother, it is they. The indeclinable demonstrative 
 ce is similarly used with etre when the real subject follows, 
 and stands not only for it, but also for he (she, they), this (that, 
 these, those), according to the context: 
 
 C'est Marie, et sa mere. It is Mary, and her mother. 
 
 C'est une jolie dame. She (that) is a pretty lady. 
 
 Ce sont des amis de Jean. They (these) are friends of John. 
 
 36. Some Relative Pronouns. 1. The relative pronouns of 
 most frequent use are qui [ki] = who, which, that, as subject, 
 and que [ka] = whom, which, that, as direct object of a verb: 
 
 La dame qui parle. The lady who is speaking. 
 
 Les livres qui sont ici. The books which are here. 
 
 Les parents que nous aimons. The relatives whom we love. 
 Les lettres que j'apporte. The letters that I bring. 
 
 (a) All relative pronouns are considered as having the gender, number 
 and person of the antecedent. 
 
 2. The relative pronoun (direct object), often omitted in 
 English, is never omitted in French: 
 Le papier qu'il me donne. The paper he gives me. 
 
 37. Observe the following interrogative forms involving the 
 use of a relative pronoun: 
 
 Qui est-ce qui parle? Who (is it who) speaks? 
 
 Qui est-ce que vous desirez? Whom do you wish? 
 Qu'est-ce qui vous amuse? What amuses you? 
 
 Qu'est-ce que vous desirez? What do you wish? 
 (a) The use of qu'est-ce qui is obligatory; the use of the others is op' 
 tional (cf. 91). 
 
 EXERCISE XVII 
 
 demeurer [damcere], live, dwell George (s) foors], George 
 
 difficile [difisil], difficult, hard interesser [eterese], interest 
 
 facile [fasil], easy le tableau noir [tablo nwair], 
 
 frapper [frape], strike, knock toujours [tusuir], always, still 
 
34 LESSON XVII [37 
 
 A. 1. C'est une longue legon; elle n'est pas facile; elle est sur le 
 tableau noir. 2. Qui est la? Est-ce Marie? 3. Non, c'est sa soeur. 
 
 4. C'est le facteur qui nous apporte toujours les lettres. 5. Ou 
 sont les lettres qu'il nous apporte? 6. Les voila. 7. Qu'y a-t-il (or 
 qu'est-ce qu'il y a) sur la table? 8. Ce sont nos lettres. 9. Les 
 pommiers de notre verger sont grands. 10. Us sont tres grands. 
 11. Ce sont de grands pommiers. 12. Est-ce votre ami qui frappe 
 a la porte? 13. Non, c'est un monsieur qui cherche M. Leduc. 
 14. Qui demeure ici? 15. C'est M. Dupont. 16. Ce n'est pas 
 M. Dupont que je cherche, c'est M. Leduc. 
 
 B. 1. Marie et Claire sont tres diligentes. 2. Ce sont des Sieves 
 diligentes. 3. Ce sont des amies de ma sceur. 4. Qu'est-ce qui 
 vous int^resse dans ce livre? 5. Ce sont les jolies images qui 
 m'inte*ressent. 6. Qu'est-ce que vous de*sirez? 7. Je desire les 
 fleurs que vous avez la. 8. La maison de mon oncle est tres vieille. 
 
 9. Elle est tres vieille, mais c'est une maison que j'aime beaucoup. 
 
 10. Qui est-ce qui nous explique la legon au tableau noir? 11. C'est 
 notre professeur. 12. Qui est-ce que vous accompagnez a 1'ecole? 
 13. J'accompagne Georges et Louis. 14. Ce sont des amis que 
 j'aime beaucoup. 
 
 C. 1. Our French lesson is difficult. 2. It is a very difficult lesson. 
 3. What do you wish? 4. I wish the pens that are in your box. 
 
 5. Is Mrs. Dupont very old? 6. She is a very old lady. 7. Are 
 your friends at the door? 8. No, sir, those are some friends of my 
 brother. 9. Who lives here? 10. It is Mr. Leduc who lives here. 
 
 11. The trees which are in our garden are large. 12. They are 
 very large trees. 13. The flowers you have there are pretty. 14. Our 
 lesson is on the blackboard. 
 
 D. 1. What is amusing you now? 2. It is the little animals 
 playing (which play) in the trees. 3. What is the postman giving 
 to your father? 4. He is giving him some letters. 5. Here are the 
 letters which he brings us. 6. The lessons we have to-day are not 
 easy. 7. This is a book which I do not like. 8. These are the books 
 which interest us. 9. Who is knocking at the door? 10. They are 
 some friends (/.) of my mother. 11. It is George Dupont who always 
 goes with me to school. 12. We are good friends. 13. He is a 
 friend whom I like very much. 14. The teacher is at the blackboard. 
 
[40] LESSON XVIII 35 
 
 LESSON XVIII 
 
 38. An Indefinite Pronoun. 1. The form on = one, some 
 one, we, you, they, people; its verb is always third singular: 
 
 On [5] parle de Jean. We (you, they, etc.) speak of John. 
 
 2. When following a verb with final vowel, on is joined to it 
 by -t-, like il, etc. (cf . 8) : 
 
 Que desire-t-on? What do they (etc.) wish? 
 
 3. A construction with on often corresponds to an English 
 passive, especially when the agent is not mentioned: 
 
 Ici on parle frangais. French (is) spoken here, 
 
 (a) on = Pon optionally after certain words, e.g. et, ou, si, que, etc., to 
 avoid hiatus. 
 
 39. Use of y. 1. The pronominal adverb y [i] = (dans, 
 sur, etc.) + a noun or pronoun and means to (at, in, on, etc.) it 
 or them: 
 
 Je laisse la lettre sur la table. / leave the letter on the table. 
 J'y laisse la lettre. I leave the letter on it. 
 
 2. Y = there, of a place previously referred to; it is less em- 
 phatic than la, which regularly denotes a place not previously 
 referred to: 
 
 II est au jardin. He is in the garden. 
 
 II y est encore. He is still there (in it). 
 
 But: Qu'avez-vous la? What have you there? 
 
 3. Y precedes the verb like a conjunctive pronoun (cf. 23). 
 
 40. Tout. Every, all, whole = tout, which serves either as 
 an adjective or a pronoun; its forms are: 
 
 m. s, tout [tu], f. s. toute [tut], m. pi. tous [tu(s)], f. pi. toutes [tut] 
 
 Tout homme, toute femme. Every man, every woman. 
 
 Tous les livres, toutes les plumes. All the books, all the pens. 
 
 Toute la journe*e. The whole (all the) day. 
 
 Je les ai tous [tus]. / have them all. 
 
 (a) The article, when present, always follows tout. 
 (6) The s of tous, used pronominally, is sounded. 
 
36 LESSON XVIII [40 
 
 EXERCISE XVHI 
 
 admirer [admire], admire remarquer [ramarke], remark, ob- 
 anime [anime], animated, lively serve, notice 
 danser [dase], dance representer [roprezate], represent 
 le groupe [grup], group le salon [salo], drawing-room, par- 
 joy eux [3waj0], joyous, merry lour 
 
 le merite [merit], merit sembler [sable], seem, appear 
 
 le monde [moid], world, people surtout [syrtu], above all, especially 
 
 patiner [patine], skate le tableau [tablo], picture, paint- 
 
 le paysage [peizais], landscape ing 
 
 le pin [pe], pine tree, pine tout [tu], absol., everything 
 plusieurs [plyzjoeir], pi. adj. or tranquille [trokil], tranquil, quiet 
 pron., invar., several 
 
 on voit [vwa], irreg., one sees; tout le monde [tu 1 moid], everybody 
 
 A. Continue: 1. On admire tous mes tableaux, . . . tous tes, etc. 
 (also interrogatively). 2. Toutes mes fleurs sont jolies, toutes tes, 
 etc. 3. Je suis au jardin, j'y suis, tu es au jardin, tu y es, etc, 
 4. Est-ce que j'y suis? etc. 5. Je les admire tous, tu, etc. 
 
 B. 1. Dans notre salon il y a plusieurs tableaux. 2. On en 
 admire surtout deux qui repre*sentent des paysages. 3. Dans Fun 
 on trouve des vaches qui broutent 1'herbe. 4. On y remarque aussi 
 plusieurs moutons. 5. Tous les animaux semblent tranquilles et 
 contents. 6. On y voit aussi des enfants qui dansent sous les 
 arbres. 7. C'est un tableau de beaucoup de merite. 8. L'autre 
 tableau represente un paysage d'hiver. 9. Presque tout y est 
 blanc. 10. Mais il y a un groupe de pins qui sont tres verts. 11. A 
 c6te des pins on voit des enfants joy eux qui patinent sur la glace. 
 12. D'autres enfants y jouent avec leurs traineaux. 13. C'est un 
 tableau tres arume*. 14. Tout le monde Taime. 
 
 C. (Oral.) 1. Qu'y a-t-il dans le salon? 2. Admire-t-on vos 
 tableaux? 3. Tous vos tableaux sont-ils beaux? 4. Y voit-on des 
 vaches? 5. Y remarque-t-on d'autres animaux? 6. Les animaux 
 qu'on y voit sont-ils tous tranquilles? 7. Ou dansent les enfants 
 qu'or^y voit? 8. Est-ce un beau tableau? etc. 
 
 D. 1. Here are two pictures. 2. We have several pictures in 
 our drawing-room. 3. Everybody admires two of them especially. 
 
42] LESSON XIX 37 
 
 4. The pictures that they (on) admire are landscapes. 5. In (the) 
 one we (you, etc.) observe many trees. 6. You notice in it also 
 cows and sheep. 7. All the animals that one sees in it are quiet 
 and they seem happy. 8. We observe also children dancing (who 
 dance). 9. (Some) other children are playing under the trees. 
 10. Those (ce) are my little sisters who are playing there. 
 
 E. 1. In the other picture we (you, etc.) see snow. 2. Every- 
 thing is white (m.). 3. There is snow everywhere. 4. There is 
 some snow even on the green pines. 5. Almost the whole landscape 
 is white. 6. All the houses are white. 7. We observe yonder some 
 children (who are) skating. 8. Several other children are there 
 also. 9. They are playing there with their sleighs. 10. People 
 play a great deal on the ice in winter. 11. The pictures are much 
 admired (use on). 12. Everybody admires good pictures. 
 
 LESSON XIX 
 
 41. The Regular Conjugations. 1. French verbs are con- 
 veniently divided into three conjugations, according to the in- 
 finitive endings -er, -ir, -re : 
 
 i ii in 
 
 Donner, to give ' Finir, to finish Yendre, to sell 
 
 2. Like these are conjugated all regular verbs with corre- 
 sponding infinitive endings. 
 
 42. Present Indicative of donner, finir, vendre 
 
 I give, I am giving, I finish, I am finish- I sell,' I am selling, 
 
 I do give, etc. ing, I do finish, etc. I do sell. etc. 
 
 je donne [don] finis [fini] vends [va] 
 
 tu donnes ^don] finis [fini] vends [va] 
 
 il donne [don] finit [fini] vend 1 [va] 
 
 nous donnons [dono] finissons [finiso] vendons [vado] 
 
 vous donnez [done] finissez [finise] vendez [vade] 
 
 ils donnent [don] finissent [finis] vendent [vaid] 
 
 Learn also negative and interrogative forms (cf. 19). 
 
 1 Vendre is irregular in this single form ; the only wholly regular v^rb of this conju- 
 gation is rompre, which has rompt, but vendre is here given as beo :nore useful for 
 practice. 
 
38 LESSON XIX [43 
 
 43. The Demonstrative Adjective 
 
 SINGULAR PLURAL 
 
 m. ce [so], cet [set] 1 ,, . 
 
 f \ this or that m. or L ces [se], these or those. 
 
 f. cette [set] J 
 
 Ce livre, cet ami, cet homme. This book, this friend, this man. 
 
 Cet autre livre. This (that) other book. 
 
 Cette plume et cette encre. This pen and (this) ink. 
 
 Ces plumes, ces homines. These pens, these men. 
 
 Cet arbre-ci et cet arbre-la. This tree and that tree. 
 
 1. Ce becomes cet before a vowel or h mute. 
 
 2. The demonstrative adjective is repeated before each noun. 
 
 3. For emphasis, or to distinguish this (these) from that (those), 
 -ci, -1, respectively, are added to the noun. 
 
 EXERCISE XIX 
 
 les benefices [benefis], m., profit(s) perdre [perdr], lose 
 
 le bout [bu], end pourrir [puriir], decay 
 
 fleurir [flceriir], blossom, be in le public [pyblik], the public 
 
 bloom quelque [kelk(a)], adj., some 
 
 grossir [grosiir], grow larger rendre [raidr], render, do, make 
 
 longtemps [lota], a long time, long le service [servis], service 
 
 le marchand [mar$a], merchant, le temps [ta], time 
 
 dealer tirer [tire], draw, derive, get 
 
 murir [myriir], ripen trop [tro or tro], too much, too 
 pendant [pada], prep., during 
 
 en meme temps, at the same time; au bout de quelque temps, after some 
 time 
 
 A. Continue: 1. Je vends ces pommes au marchand, tu, etc. 
 2. Je n'en vends pas beaucoup, tu, etc. 3. Je finis cette longue 
 legon, tu, etc. 4. Je ne finis pas la legon d'histoire, tu, etc. 
 (also interrogatively). 5. Est-ce que je perds du temps? est-ce que 
 tu? etc. 
 
 B. Supply the proper form of ce: 1. C . . . marchand; c . . . mar- 
 chands. 2. C . . . <leve (m.) ; c . . . eleve (/.) ; c . . . Sieves. 3. C . . . 
 autre livre; c . . . autres hommes. 4. C . . . autre plume; c . . . 
 autres amies. 5. C . . . arbre-ci; c . . . arbres-la. 
 
43] LESSON XIX 39 
 
 C. 1. Mon pere a beaucoup de pommiers dans son verger. 2. Les 
 pommiers fleurissent au printemps. 3. Au bout de quelque temps 
 on voit de petites pommes sur les branches. 4. Pendant Te*te les 
 pommes grossissent. 5. En automne elles murissent. 6. Quand 
 on les laisse trop longtemps sur les pommiers elles tombent. 7. Alors 
 elles pourrissent. 8. Quand nos pommes sont mures nous les ven- 
 dons aux marchands. 9. Les marchands les transportent a la ville. 
 10. Et la on les vend au public. 11. Mon pere et les marchands en 
 tirent des benefices, et en meme temps ils rendent un grand service 
 au public. 
 
 D. (Oral.) 1. Quand ces pommiers fleurissent-ils? 2. Que voit- 
 on sur les branches des pommiers? 3. Quand est-ce que les petites 
 pommes grossissent? 4. Quand murissent-elles? 5. Les pommes 
 tombent-elles en automne? 6. A qui vendons-nous les pommes? 
 7. Ces marchands vendent-ils beaucoup de pommes? 8. A qui 
 en vendent-ils? 9. Qui en tire des benefices? etc. 
 
 E. 1. When do apples ripen? 2. Are these apples already ripe? 
 
 3. No, those apples are still green, but these apples are ripe. 4. Those 
 apples are growing larger. 5. They are ripening already. 6. The 
 ripe apples are falling. 7. The apples which fall decay. 8. I sell 
 my apples to the dealer. 9. He derives profit (pi.) from them. 10. I 
 do (render) him a service. 11. He does the public a service. 12. We- 
 do the public a great service. 13. Are my father and the dealer 
 not doing the public a service? 14. They are. 
 
 F. 1. These pupils often lose (lose often) their books. 2. Do 
 you often lose your books? 3. This little girl often loses her gloves. 
 
 4. We lose our time when we do not listen to the teacher. 5. I am 
 finishing this French lesson. 6. Mary. is finishing a long letter. 
 7. Why do you not finish your lessons? 8. We are finishing them 
 now. 9. Those "dealers sell us apples. 10. Are you selling those 
 apples? 11. I am not; they are not yet ripe. 12. We sell our apples 
 when they are ripe. 13. Our cherries and strawberries ripen in 
 summer. 
 
40 LESSON XX [ 44 
 
 LESSON XX 
 
 44. Past Participles 
 
 Given Finished Sold Had Been 
 
 donne [done] fini [fini] vendu [vady] eu [y] ete [ete] 
 
 45. Compound Tenses. The compound tenses of a verb are 
 formed by adding its past participle to the various simple tenses 
 of an auxiliary verb (usually avoir, sometimes etre, cf. 51). 
 
 46. The Past Indefinite 
 
 / have given (finished, etc.} or I gave (I finished ', etc.) 
 
 j'ai donne (fini, vendu, eu, ete) 
 
 tu as donne (fini, vendu, eu, e"te") 
 
 il a donne (fini, vendu, eu, e*te) 
 
 nous avons donne* (fini, vendu, eu, e*te") 
 
 vous avez donne* (fini, vendu, eu, etc") 
 
 ils ont donne (fini, vendu, eu, e*te*) 
 
 47. Use of Past Indefinite. It denotes not ,only what has 
 happened or has been happening, as in English, but also what 
 happened ( = English past tense) : 
 
 J'ai fini mon ouvrage. 7 have finished my work. 
 
 II a travaille au jardin. . He has been working in the garden. 
 
 Elle a ete ici hier. She was here yesterday. 
 
 Nous avons quitte Paris en hiver. We left Paris in (the) winter. 
 
 NOTE. The past indefinite is the ordinary past tense of French. For 
 the past tense of narrative in the literary style, see 152. 
 
 48. Word-Order. 1. In compound tenses,^ rules of word- 
 order (cf. 8, 11, 23) regularly apply to the auxiliary: 
 
 Nous ne Pavons pas fini. We have not finished it. 
 
 N'a-t-elle pas ete diligente? Has she not been industrious? 
 
 2. No adverb (except ne) may come between the subject and 
 the verb: 
 
 Je perds souvent mon temps. 7 often lose my time. 
 
48] LESSON XX 41 
 
 3. As may be learned from observation, certain adverbs, 
 such as bien, deja, pas, plus, jamais, etc., regularly come be- 
 tween the auxiliary and the participle: 
 
 II a bien parle. He has spoken well. 
 
 (a) But aujourd'hui, hier, demain, autrefois, tard, ici, la, may not come 
 between auxiliary and participle. 
 
 NOTE. Great variety is found in the position of adverbs and adverbial 
 phrases, but the above rules should be observed in the following exercises. 
 
 EXERCISE XX 
 
 abord (d*) [d aboir], (at) first labourer [labure], plough 
 
 battre [batr], beat, thresh manger [mase], eat 
 
 bien [bje], well, very, very well le meunier [m0nje], miller 
 
 bientot [bjeto], soon le moissonneur [mwasonoeir], har- 
 
 le ble [ble], wheat vester 
 
 le boulanger [bulase], baker la plupart [plypair], the most part 
 
 ensuite [asin't], then, next, after- pour [pur], prep., for, in order to, 
 
 wards to 
 
 Pepi [epi], m., ear (of grain), head puis [pin*], then, next, afterwards 
 
 la farine [farm], flour la recolte [rekolt], harvest, crop 
 
 la grange [grais], barn semer [some], sow 
 
 jaunir [soniir], grow (become) yel- vite [vit], quickly 
 
 low vu [vy], p. part, of voir (irreg.), seen 
 
 A. Continue: 1. J'ai de*ja coupe* mon ble*, tu . . . ton, etc. 2. Je 
 1'ai deja coupe", etc. 3. Je n'ai pas encore laboure mon champ, tu 
 . . . ton, etc. 4. Je n'ai pas e*te a Fecole aujourd'hui, etc. 5. Je n'y 
 ai pas ete, etc. 6. Est-ce que j'ai vendu du pain? as-tu vendu? etc. 
 7. Je n'en ai pas vendu, etc. 8. Je n'en ai pas eu, etc. 
 
 B. 1. D'abord on a laboure les champs. 2. Puis on y a sem le 
 ble*. 3. Les oiseaux n'en ont pas beaucoup mange (or mange beau- 
 coup). 4. Pour la plupart il a bien pousse. 5. Bientot on a vu les 
 beaux e*pis. 6. Ensuite les champs ont jauni. 7. Au bout de 
 quelque temps les moissonneurs ont coupe le ble*. 8. Us Font trans- 
 porte* a la grange, et puis ils Font battu. 9. Nous avons eu une 
 bonne recolte. 10. On a vendu beaucoup de ble* au meunier. 11. Le 
 meunier a vendu sa farine au boulanger. 12. Le boulanger a vendu 
 son pain au public. 13. Et tout le monde a e*te* content. 
 
42 LESSON XXI [49 
 
 C. (Oral.) 1. Avez-vous dejiUaboure votre champ? 2. Qu'est-ce 
 que vous y avez seme? 3. Les oiseaux en ont-ils mange? 4. Le 
 ble* a-t-il bien pousse? 5. Les champs ont-ils jauni tres vite? 6. Jau- 
 nissent-ils au printemps? 7. Qui a coupe le ble? 8. Quand Fa-t-on 
 coupe? 9. Ou IVt-on transported 10. Qui Fa battu? 11. A qui 
 1'avez-vous vendu? 12. A qui le meunier a-t-il vendu la farine? etc. 
 
 D. 1. We ploughed our fields in spring. 2. Then we sowed 
 wheat in them. 3. Did the birds eat much of it? 4. They didn't 
 eat much of it. 5. The wheat grew well. 6. It grew very quickly. 
 7. And we admired the fine heads. 8. Soon these heads became 
 yellow. 9. They became yellow during the summer. 10. Wheat 
 becomes yellow when it ripens. 11. The harvesters have cut all 
 our wheat. 12. They have been threshing it to-day. 
 
 E. 1. The wheat has been taken (use on) to the barn. 2. We 
 had a great deal of it (put beaucoup last). 3. After some time it 
 was threshed (use on). 4. The harvesters threshed it. 5. Then 
 we sold some of it to the miller. 6. But he didn't get (= have) all 
 our wheat. 7. We left some of it in the barn. 8. We gave the 
 straw to the cows and sheep. 9. The miller sold his flour to the 
 baker. 10. The baker sold good bread to the public. 11. Every- 
 body ate some of it. 12. Did you have some of it? 
 
 LESSON XXI 
 
 49. Agreement of Past Participle. 1. When a direct object, 
 noun or pronoun, precedes the auxiliary avoir in a compound 
 tense, the past participle agrees in gender and number with 
 that direct object: 
 
 Quels livres a-t-il achetes? What books has he bought f 
 
 J'ai vendu mes pommes. / have sold my apples. 
 
 Je les ai vendues. . / have sold them. 
 
 La viande que j'ai achetee. The meat that I have bought. 
 
 En avez-vous achete? Have you bought any (of it)? 
 
 (a) En is not a direct object; hence, no agreement. 
 
50] LESSON XXI 43 
 
 2. When used as an adjective, the past participle agrees like 
 an adjective (cf. 14). 
 
 L'annee passee. Last year. 
 
 50. Interrogative Adj ective 
 
 SINGULAR PLURAL 
 
 m. quel? [kel], f. quelle? [kel] m. quels? [kel], f. quelles? [kel] 
 
 which? what? which? what? 
 
 Quel livre? Quelle plume? Which (what) book? Which (what) 
 
 Quels sont vos livres? Which are your books? 
 
 (a) In exclamations quel = what a! (sing.), what! (plur.). 
 
 Quelle belle vue! Quels crimes! What a fine view! What crimes! 
 
 EXERCISE XXI 
 
 acheter [a$te], buy Pespece [espes], f., species, kind 
 
 aigre [e:gr], sour Pheure [oe:r], f., hour 
 
 Pan [a], m., year le panier [panje], basket 
 
 Pannee [ane], f., year passer [pase], pass, spend (time) 
 le client [klia], client, customer, la perte [pert], loss 
 
 patient le poirier [pwarje], pear tree 
 
 cueillir [kcejiir], pluck, gather revendre [ravaidr], sell again 
 
 donner [done], yield tard [tair], late 
 Pechelle [e$el], f., ladder 
 
 Pannee passee, last year; de bonne heure, early; tous les ans (jours), 
 
 every year (day) 
 
 A. Continue: 1. Voici les livres que j'ai achetes, . . . que tu . . ., 
 etc. 2. Quelles sont les langues que j'ai etudiees? . .. . que tu . . ., 
 etc. 3. Voila la maison que j'ai vendue, . . . que tu . . ., etc. 4. Les 
 legons que j'ai finies, . . . que tu . . ., etc. 5. Le livre qui m'a amu- 
 se(e), . . . qui t'a . . ., etc. 
 
 B. 1. Dans notre verger il y a cent poiriers. 2. Us nous ont 
 donne beaucoup de poires cette annee. 3. Us en donnent beau- 
 coup tous les ans. 4. Quelles especes de poires avez-vous? 5. Nous 
 en avons plusieurs. 6. Nous en avons de douces et d'aigres. 7. Nous 
 en avons qui murissent de bonne heure et d'autres qui murissent 
 
44 LESSON XXI [ 50 
 
 tard. 8. On les a de*ja toutes cueillies sans perte. 9. Pour les 
 cueillir on a des echelles et des paniers. 10. Nous les avons toutes 
 vendues dans la ville. 11. M. Liard les a achetees. 12. C'est le 
 meme marchand qui a achete* nos poires Tannee passee. 13. Les 
 poires sont chores cette anne*e. 14. M. Liard les a re vendues a ses 
 clients. 15. II en a tire de gros benefices. 
 
 C. (Oral.) 1. Combien de poiriers avez-vous? 2. Est-ce qu'ils 
 ont donne* beaucoup de poires? 3. Quelles especes de poires avez- 
 vous? 4. Murissent-elles de bonne heure? 5. Les avez-vous de*ja 
 cueillies? 6. Qu'a-t-on pour les cueillir? 7. En avez-vous perdu 
 beaucoup? 8. A-t-on cueilli les poires vertes? 9. Ou a-t-on vendu 
 les poires? 10. A qui les avez-vous vendues? 11. Qui est M. 
 Liard? 12. A qui vend-il des poires? etc. 
 
 D. 1. Our pear trees yield us a great many pears. 2. We have 
 a good crop of them every year. 3. We have had many kinds of 
 pears this year. 4. We have gathered them already. 5. They were 
 gathered (use on) in autumn. 6. We didn't lose any of them. 
 7. The pears ripened early this year. 8. Last year they ripened 
 late. 9. We have sold them all. 10. We sold them to our customers. 
 11. What pears did you not sell? - 12. We didn't sell the pears which 
 ripened late. 13. The pears we didn't sell are in the cellar. 
 14. Dealers make large profits from our apples and pears. 
 
 E. 1. Where are the letters which the postman brought me? 
 2. I have found the pen which you lost. 3. Here are the gloves I 
 bought you. 4. The lessons we had to-day are too long. 5. What 
 lessons have you been studying? 6. What books have you brought 
 me? 7. What pens have you given him? 8. What pupils went 
 with you to school? 9. What trees have been cut down (use on)? 
 
 10. John has found the papers which you have been looking for. 
 
 11. These are interesting books which you have given me. 12. These 
 apples that I have bought are very sour. 13. We have baskets 
 and ladders for gathering pears. 
 
151] LESSON XXII 45 
 
 LESSON XXII 
 
 51. Compound Tenses with etre. 1. From etre -f- the past 
 participle are formed the compound tenses of some intransitive 
 verbs denoting motion or change of condition; such are: 
 
 aller, go monter, go up retourner, go back 
 
 arriver, arrive mourir, die revenir, come back 
 
 descendre, descend naitre, be born sortir, go (come) out 
 
 devenir, become partir, set out tomber, fall 
 
 entrer, enter rentrer, go in again venir, come 
 
 (a) Irregular past participles: mort (mourir), n (naitre), venu (venir), 
 e.g. II est mort, He died (or is dead) ; II est n<, He was born. 
 
 2. The past participle of such verbs must agree with the sub- 
 ject, like an adjective (cf. 14): 
 
 I have arrived (I arrived), etc. 
 
 je suis arrive or ee nous sommes arrives or ees 
 
 tu es arrive or ee vous etes arrives or ees 
 
 il est arrive ils sont arrives 
 
 elle est arrivee elles sont arrivees 
 
 (a) The auxiliary is to be translated by have. 
 
 EXERCISE XXII 
 
 arriver [arive], arrive, come le magasin [magaze], shop, store 
 
 la beaute [bote], beauty, fine magnifique [majiifik], magnificent 
 
 sight (thing) le matin [mate], morning 
 
 chez [$e], at the house (etc.) of par [par], by, through 
 
 la chose [$o:z], thing le pare [park], park 
 
 entrer [atre] dans, enter, go into partir [partiir], set out, start, leave 
 
 faire [feir], do, make rentrer [ratre], go (come) in again, 
 fait [fe], p. part, of faire go (come) home 
 
 hier [je:r], yesterday la rue [ry], street 
 
 lointain [Iwete], distant le soir [swair], evening 
 
 Louise [Iwiiz], Louisa sortir [sortiir], go (come) out 
 
 chez mon pere, at the house (place of business, etc.) of my father, at my 
 father's; faire une promenade, take a walk (drive, etc.). 
 
46 LESSON XXII [51 
 
 A. Continue: 1. Je suis arrive* (e) ce matin, etc. 2. Je suis par- 
 ti (e) hier, etc. 3. Je ne suis pas entre(e) dans la salle, etc. 4. Je 
 n'y suis pas entre*(e), etc. 5. Est-ce que je suis sorti(e) de 1'eglise? 
 es-tu . . . etc. 6. Je n'en suis pas sorti(e), etc. 
 
 B. Put into the past indefinite, supplying proper auxiliary and 
 past participle: 1. Ces dames . . . sortir. 2. Quand . . . -vous arriver, 
 mademoiselle? 3. Je ... arriver hier. 4. Est-ce que vos sceurs 
 . . . partir? 5. Form additional examples employing the verbs in 51. 
 
 C. 1. Nous sommes arrives hier soir chez nos cousins qui de- 
 meurent dans une ville lointaine. 2. Ce matin nous sommes partis 
 de bonne heure pour faire une promenade. 3. Nos cousins nous 
 ont accompagne*s pour nous montrer les beautes de la ville. 4. II y 
 a un tr&s beau pare dans cette ville. 5. Nous y avons passe quelque 
 temps, et ensuite nous sommes entry's dans une belle eglise qui 
 nous a beaucoup interesse*s. 6. Quand nous sommes sortis de 
 l^glise nous sommes entres dans un grand magasin. 7. Nous n'y 
 avons pas achete beaucoup de choses. 8. Mais nous avons admir6 
 les belles choses que nous y avons vues. 9. Puis nous sommes 
 sortis du magasin et nous sommes rentre*s chez nos cousins par une 
 rue magnifique. 
 
 D. (Oral.) 1. Ou demeurent vos cousins? 2. Quand etes-vous 
 partis? 3. Quand etes-vous arrives? 4. Est-ce une belle ville que 
 vous avez vue? 5. fites-vous sortis? 6. Pourquoi? 7. Qui vous 
 a accompagnes? 8. fites-vous partis de bonne heure? 9. Les rues 
 de cette ville sont-elles belles? 10. Les avez-vous admires? 11. Ou 
 etes-vous entres? 12. Qu'est-ce que vous avez fait ensuite? 13. Et 
 alors qu'avez-vous fait? etc. 
 
 E. 1. Our cousins arrived this morning. 2. This morning they 
 went out to (pour) take a walk. 3. My brother accompanied them. 
 4. They set out together. 5. He showed them the fine sights of the 
 city. 6. First they went into a magnificent park. 7. They didn't 
 spend much time there. 8. Then they went into the old church 
 which you (on) see beside the park. 9. It is a very beautiful church. 
 10. My cousins admired it very much. 11. When they came out of 
 the church they went into one of the fine stores. 12, Afterwards 
 they went home. 
 
53] LESSON XXIII 47 
 
 F. 1. Have your cousins arrived? 2. Louisa arrived yesterday, 
 but Charles and his brother haven't come yet. 3. My mother has 
 gone out with my cousin (/.) to show her the city. 4. They went 
 out together this morning. 5. They set out early. 6. They went 
 into one of the large stores. 7. Have they come home yet (deja)? 
 
 8. Yes, they returned home through one of our magnificent streets. 
 
 9. My mother has been showing us the fine things that they bought. 
 t 10. We admired them very much. 11. Charles and his brother are 
 
 here now. 12. They arrived this evening very late. 13. We are 
 all glad to (de) see them. 14. My aunt was born and she died in 
 this city. 
 
 LESSON XXIII 
 62. Disjunctive Personal Pronouns 
 
 SINGULAB PLURAL 
 
 moi [mwa], I, me nous [nu], we, us 
 
 toi [twa], thou, thee, you vous [vu], you 
 
 lui [Iqi], he, him eux [0], they (m.), them (m.) 
 
 elle [el], she, her elles [el], they (f.), them (f.) 
 
 soi [swa], oneself, himself, etc. 
 
 (a) These forms regularly denote persons, and are called "disjunctive" 
 because they may be used apart from the verb. 
 
 (6) The ordinary rule of agreement applies (cf. 7). 
 
 5,3. Disjunctives with Prepositions. A personal pronoun 
 governed by a preposition takes the disjunctive form: 
 
 II parle de moi (toi, eux, etc.). He speaks of me (you, them, etc.). 
 
 EXERCISE XXIII 
 
 Alice [alis], Alice avant [ava], prep., before (of time) 
 
 apres [apre], prep., after le voisin [vwaze], neighbour 
 
 a qui est cette maison? to whom does that house belong? or whose house 
 'is that? elle est a mon pere, it belongs to my father (is my father's) ; 
 elle est a lui, it belongs to him (it is his) ; mon cousin est chez nous, 
 my cousin is at our house; notre voisin n'est pas chez lui (or a la 
 maison) aujourd'hui, our neighbour is not at home to-day; je suis arrive 
 tard chez moi (or a la maison), / arrived home late; tout le monde 
 est chez soi, everybody is at home 
 
48 LESSON XXIV [54 
 
 A. Continue: 1. Mes amis sont chez moi, . . . chez toi, etc. 2. Je 
 ne suis pas chez moi, tu . . . toi, etc. 3. Ce livre est-il a moi, ... a 
 toi? etc. 4. II n'est pas a moi, ... a toi, etc. 5. Ce matin on a parle 
 de moi, . . . de toi, etc. 6. Charles est arrive avant moi, . . . toi, etc. 
 
 B. 1. Our neighbours are not at home to-day. 2. My mother is 
 not at home. 3. Our cousins are at our house. 4. My little sisters 
 are playing with them. 5. Alice is playing with Louisa. 6. She is 
 playing with her. 7. Why do you not play with me? 8. This pic- 
 ture is for you (thee). 9. This pencil is mine. 10. Those pencils 
 are theirs (/.). 11. Have you been at your uncle's? 12. We haven't 
 been at his house this summer. 13. Whose keys are these? 
 
 C. 1. There is our teacher. 2. We have been speaking of him. 
 3. He spoke of you (thee) and me in school to-day. 4. He is not 
 pleased with (de) me. 5. Charles arrived before me. 6. I arrived 
 after him. 7. We arrived after them (/.). 8. Are these letters for 
 them? 9. Do these pens belong to Louisa? 10. Yes, they are 
 hers. 11. They are not mine. 12. Does Mr. Liard live here? 
 13. He does, but he is not at home. 
 
 LESSON XXIV 
 
 54. Disjunctives continued. In addition to their use after 
 prepositions ( 53), they are employed as follows: 
 
 1. As the real (or logical) subject with ce (cf. 35): 
 
 C'est moi (toi, lui, elle, nous, It is I (thou, he, she, we, you), it is 
 
 vous), ce sont eux (elles). they. 
 
 Est-ce moi (toi, lui, elle, nous, 7s it I (thou, he, she, we, you), is it 
 
 vous), sont-ce eux (elles)? they? 
 
 (a) In the third plural c'est eux (elles), est-ce eux (elles)? are often found. 
 
 2. When a verb is implied, but not expressed: 
 
 Qui est la? Moi (eux, elle). Who is there? I (they, she). 
 Qui as-tu vu? Lui (elles). Whom did you see? Him (them), 
 
 3. In comparisons, and after ne . . . que: 
 
 II est plus grand que moi. He is taller than 7. 
 
 II ne chante pas comine eux. He does not sing as they do. 
 
 Je n'ai vu que lui. 7 saw him only. 
 
55] LESSON XXIV 49 
 
 4. In appositions, often with the emphatic addition of meme : 
 Moi je 1'ai entendu aussi. I heard it too. 
 
 Vous Favez vu vous-meme(s). You saw it your self (-selves). 
 
 5. When the subject or object is compound: 
 
 Vous et lui (vous) Pavez fait. You and he have done it. 
 
 Son ami et lui sont ici. His friend and he are here. 
 
 Je vous vois, toi et ton frere. / see you and your brother. 
 
 6. Soi regularly has indefinite or general force: 
 Chacun pour soi. Everybody for himself. 
 But: II est content de lui (-meme). He is satisfied with himself . 
 
 55. Present Indicative of voir (irreg.), 'see' 
 
 7 see, 7 am seeing, I do see, etc. 
 
 je vois [vwa] nous voyons [vwajo] 
 
 tu vois [vwa] vous voyez [vwaje] 
 
 il voit [vwa] ils voient [vwa] 
 
 EXERCISE XXIV 
 
 Pauteur [otoeir], m., author oh [o], oh 
 
 bien [bje], indeed, truly , penser [pase], think 
 
 le colonel [kolonel], colonel la piece [pjes], play (theatre) 
 
 comme [kom], as, like pres de [pre da], near 
 
 la comtesse [kotes], countess le rdle [roil], role, part 
 
 la connaissance [konesais], ac- le theatre [teaitr], theatre 
 
 quaintance vrai [vre], true 
 la'loge [bis], box (theatre) 
 
 en effet [efe], in fact, indeed, it is true; de Pautre c6te, on the other side, 
 over there; c'est vrai, it (that) is true; c'est votre ami, n'est-ce pas? 
 it is your friend, is it not? mais non, no, no! 
 
 A. Continue: 1. C'est moi qui 1'ai trouve*, c'est toi qui Fas . . . 
 -etc. 2. Est-ce moi qui 1'ai perdu? etc. 3. Ce n'est pas moi, ce 
 n'est pas toi, etc. 4. N'est-ce pas moi? etc. 
 
 B. (Un frere et une so3ur au theatre) 1. C'est une pice de (by) 
 Labiche, n'est-ce pas? 2. Oui, c'est lui qui en est Tauteur. 
 3. C'est Coquelin qui joue le role de M. Perrichon? 4. Oui, c'est 
 lui. 5. Y a-t-il de nos connaissances au theatre ce soir? 6. Oh 
 oui; voil& la-bas deux de mes amies. 7. En effet ce sont elles. 
 
50 LESSON XXV [56 
 
 8. Et voila de 1'autre cote* trois de tes amis. 9. C'est vrai; ce 
 sont eux. Us nous regardent. Us nous saluent. Derriere eux dans 
 une loge on voit [le] colonel D. 10. Oui, c'est bien lui. Pres de 
 lui dans cette autre loge je vois la comtesse de B. 11. Mais non, 
 ce n'est pas elle, je pense. 12. Qui est-ce alors? 13. C'est la 
 dame que nous avons rencontre*e chez la comtesse. 14. Son frere 
 est avec elle, n'est-ce pas? 15. Oui, elle et lui sont toujours en- 
 semble comme toi et moi. 
 
 C. (Oral on B, above.) 
 
 D. 1. Is Augier the author of this play? 2. He is not ( = it is 
 not he). 3. It is Labiche. 4. It is not he who plays the role of 
 Perrichon. 5. That is Coquelin. 6. Is it (the) countess (of) B. 
 whom we (on) see in that box? 7. It is. 8. Who is that lady beside 
 her? 9. It is Mrs. D. whom we saw at her house. 10. Did I not 
 see her at your house? 11. It was (is) her sister whom you saw at 
 my house. 12. (The) Colonel B. is in the other box. 13. His wife 
 is with him. 14. It is they who live near us. 
 
 E. 1. It is I. 2. It is they (ra.). 3. It is they (/.) isn't it? 4. Is 
 it they (ra.)? 5. Is that you? 6. It is. 7. I was there myself. 
 8. You saw him yourselves. 9. This book is mine. 10. It belongs 
 to me. 11. I bought it myself in the city. 12. Mary and her 
 brother are here. 13. She and her brother are playing with us. 
 14. She and he are always together. 15. It is they who are going 
 with us. 16. Who has seen that play by Labiche? 17. I [have]. 
 
 LESSON XXV 
 
 56. Comparatives. 1. To form comparatives, plus = more, 
 moins = less, or aussi = as, is placed before the adjective, and 
 que = than or as after it: 
 
 II est plus grand que Jean. He is taller than John. 
 
 II est moins grand que moi. He is not so tall as I. 
 
 II est aussi grand qu'elle. He is as tall as she. 
 
 2. With a negative, aussi generally becomes si: 
 
 II n'est pas si grand (or il est He is not so tall as I. 
 moins grand) que moi. 
 
59] LESSON XXV 51 
 
 57. Superlatives. 1. To form superlatives, the definite 
 article or a possessive adjective precedes plus, moins: 
 
 Elle est la plus (moins) aimable. She is the most (least) amiable. . 
 C'est mon meilleur ami. He is my best friend. 
 
 OBSERVE. La plus jeune des deux. The younger of the two. 
 
 2. The definite article must not be omitted when the adjective 
 follows the noun: 
 
 La Ie9on la plus difficile. The most difficult lesson. 
 
 3. After a superlative, in = de in such sentences as: 
 
 La plus jeune de la classe. The youngest (girl) in the class. 
 
 58. Irregular Comparison. Observe the following: 
 bon, good meilleur, better le meilleur, the best 
 mauvais, bad pire, worse le pire, the worst 
 petit, small moindre, less le moindre, the least 
 
 (a) Pire is less common than plus mauvais, and serves also as a compara- 
 tive to mechant, bad, evil, wicked. 
 
 (b) In general, moindre = less (in importance), plus petit = smaller, less 
 (in size). 
 
 5&. Comparison of Adverbs. 1. They are regularly com- 
 pared like adjectives, but le of the superlative is invariable: 
 Plus (moins, aussi) facilement. More (less, as) easily. 
 Le plus (moins) souvent. (The) most (least) frequently. 
 
 2. But observe the irregular forms: 
 
 bien, well mieux, better beaucoup, much plus, more 
 
 1 badl I P * S r plUS mal ' pCU ' ^ e moins, less 
 
 ' y \ worse 
 
 3. Plus (moins), as adverb of quantity, requires de (= than) 
 before a numeral: 
 
 II en a plus de dix livres. He has more than ten pounds of it* 
 
 EXERCISE XXV 
 
 A. Continue: 1. Je suis plus grand que Jean, tu . . . etc. 2. II 
 est moins fort que moi, . . . toi, etc. 3. Est-ce que je suis plus petite 
 qu'elle? es-tu . . .? etc. 4. Je suis la meilleure eleve de la classe, 
 tu, etc. 5. N'ai-je pas la legon la plus difficile? etc. 6. J'ai vendu 
 
52 LESSON XXVI [60 
 
 mes meilleures pommes, tu . . . tes, etc. 7. Est-ce que j'aime 
 mieux les fleurs rouges? aimes-tu . . . ? etc. 8. J'en ai moins de 
 deux livres, tu, etc. 
 
 B. 1. I am as tall as you. 2. But I am not so strong as you. 
 3. You are taller than your brother, are you not? 4. John is as 
 tall and as strong as he. 5. The pears are not so ripe as the apples. 
 6. John's lesson is very difficult. 7. He has the most difficult les- 
 son. 8. His lesson is the most difficult of all the lessons. 9. Alice 
 is the most industrious pupil in our class. 10. George skates better 
 than I. 11. He doesn't skate as well as you. 12. He skates very 
 badly, in fact. 13. But we skate oftener than he. 14. He skates 
 very little. 
 
 C. 1. The grass is less abundant in this field. 2. Your house is 
 the oldest house in the town. 3. Our house is much better; we 
 like iu better. 4. Our neighbours' house is larger. 5. This picture 
 is still worse than the other. 6. It is a picture without the least 
 merit. 7. Charles always arrives at school later than I. 8. Here is 
 the most interesting of my books. 9. These pens are very bad. 
 10. Those pens are still worse. 11. I have bought more than four 
 pounds of meat. 12. I wish two pounds of your best tea. 13. You 
 always arrive later than the others. 14. And you work still less 
 than they. 15. I have more friends than you. 16. I have fewer 
 { = less) friends, but I have more money. 
 
 LESSON XXVI 
 
 60. The Infinitive. The commoner uses of the infinitive 
 
 are: 
 
 1. Following directly after certain verbs, such as: 
 aller, go faire, make, cause savoir, know how to 
 
 desirer, desire falloir, be necessary voir, see 
 
 devoir, owe laisser, let vouloir, will, wish 
 
 esperer, hope pouvoir, be able, can 
 
 Pouvez-vous me preter de 1'encre? Can you lend me some ink? 
 
 Nous aliens acheter du the*. We are going to buy some tea. 
 
 Desire-t-il nous parler? Does he wish to speak to us? 
 
 II faut acheter de la viande. We (you, etc.) must buy some meat. 
 
62] LESSON XXVI 53 
 
 2. Preceded by de after many verbs, such as: 
 cesser, cease ordonner, order refuser, refuse 
 dire, tell prier, beg, request tacher, attempt, try 
 eviter, avoid 
 
 Elle a cesse de chanter. She has ceased singing. 
 
 Je vous prie de m'ecouter. I beg you to listen to me. 
 
 3. Preceded by de after nouns and some adjectives: 
 Le crime de voler. The crime of stealing. 
 Je suis content de vous voir. 7 am glad to see you. 
 
 4. Preceded by a after many verbs, such as: 
 
 aimer, like enseigner, teach reussir, succeed 
 
 apprendre, learn inviter, invite 
 Je les ai invites a rester. / invited them to stay. 
 
 J'aime (a) patiner. I like to skate, 
 
 (a) a after aimer is sometimes omitted. 
 
 5. Preceded by after some adjectives: 
 
 Je suis prt a partir. 7 am ready to set out (go). 
 
 Get ouvrage est facile & faire. That work is easy to do. 
 
 6. Preceded by prepositions other than de or a: 
 
 J'ai parle sans penser. 7 spoke without thinking. 
 
 II ecoute pour apprendre. He listens in order to learn. 
 
 7. Observe its use to render English forms in -ing: 
 II parle de partir. He speaks of going. 
 
 II est parti sans nous parler. He went without speaking to us. 
 
 61. Present Indicative of alter (irreg.) 
 
 7 go, I am going, I do go, etc. 
 je vais [ve] nous aliens [alo] 
 
 tu vas [va] , vous allez [ale] 
 
 il va [va] ils vont [vo] 
 
 62. Present Indicative of pouvoir (irreg.) 
 
 7 am able to, I can, I may, etc. 
 
 je peux or puis [p0, pqi] nous pouvons [puvo] 
 
 tu peux [p0] vous pouvez [puve] 
 
 il peut [p0] ils peuvent [pceiv] 
 
 (a) In questions: puis-je? or est-ce que je peux (puis)? 
 
54 LESSON XXVI [62 
 
 EXERCISE XXVI 
 
 diner [dine], vb., dine le morceau [morso], piece, bit 
 le diner [dine], dinner Poeuf [cef], m., pi. oeufs [0], egg 
 il faut [fo], pres. indie, of falloir, offrir [ofriir], offer- 
 it is necessary Pomelette [omlet], f., omelet 
 le fruit [frqi], fruit orner [orne], ornament, decorate 
 Pintention [etasjo], f., intention reussir [reysiir], succeed 
 inviter [evite], invite six [sis], six 
 le legume [legym], vegetable tacher [ta$e], attempt, try 
 le marche [mar$e], market venir [voni:r], come 
 
 avoir Pintention de, intend to; il faut acheter, one (we, you, they, etc.) 
 must buy; il lui (nous, etc.) faut acheter, he (we, etc.) must buy 
 
 A. Continue: 1. Je vais acheter de bons legumes, tu . . ., etc. 
 2. Je ne peux pas en trouver. 3. Je suis rentre(e) sans en ache- 
 ter. 4. Puis-je trouver des fruits au marche*? 5. J'ai re*ussi a en 
 trouver de tres bons. 6. Je tache de faire une bonne omelette. 
 7. J'ai Fintention d'inviter des amis a diner. 8. Je suis con- 
 tent(e) de les voir. 9. Je ne suis pas pret(e) a partir. 10. Je les 
 vois venir. 
 
 B. (Madame X. et sa bonne) 1. Nous avons invite des amis a 
 diner ce soir. 2. Nous allons en avoir six. 3. Je vais au marche 
 et vous allez m'accompagner, Louise. 4. Bien, madame, j'ai mon 
 pariier. 5. Je suis prete a partir. 6. Pouvons-nous trouver main- 
 tenant de bons legumes au marche? 7. Oh, oui, on peut en avoir 
 (get) de tres bons, je pense. 8. J'ai aussi 1'intention d'acheter des 
 ceufs pour faire une omelette. 9. Les bons oeufs sont souvent 
 difficiles a trouver, mais on reussit quelquefois a en avoir. 10. II 
 faut chercher aussi un bon morceau de viande. 11. Les bons mor- 
 ceaux ne sont pas tou jours faciles a trouver. 12. Mais nous allons 
 tacher d'en avoir. 13. II faut acheter des fruits et aussi des fleurs 
 pour orner la table. 14. Nous sommes contents de voir nos amis 
 quand nous avons un bon diner a leur offrir. 
 
 C. (Oral.) 1. Votre mere invite-t-elle des amis a diner? 2. Com- 
 bien d'amis va-t-elle avoir a table ce soir? 3. Qui va Taccompagner 
 au marche? 4. Sont-elles pretes a partir? 5. Sont-elles dej a parties? 
 6. Que cherchent-elles d'abord au marche? 7. Peut-on trouver de 
 
63] LESSON XXVII 55 
 
 bons legumes au marche? 8. Potirquoi va-t-elle acheter des ceufs? 
 9. Les bons ceufs sont-ils faciles a trouver? 10. A-t-elle reussi & 
 en trouver? 11. Pourquoi va-t-elle acheter des fleurs? etc. 
 
 Z). 1. I am going to invite some friends to dinner (to dine). 
 2. Are you going to the market? 3. Yes, I am (going there). 4. You 
 can go with me, can't you? 5. Here is my basket; I am ready to go. 
 6. Can we (on) find good vegetables in the market to-day? 7. Yes, 
 I saw some very good ones. 8. Do you not intend to buy some eggs? 
 9. Are you going to make an omelet? 10. An omelet is easy to 
 make when one has good eggs. 11. Good eggs are not always easy 
 to find. 12. I am trying to find some. 13. I have succeeded in 
 finding some. 14. We must buy a good piece of meat. 15. I 
 intend to have cherries or strawberries. 
 
 E. 1. Good meat is hard to find. 2. You (on) can always find 
 good meat at Mr. Liard's. 3. Have you bought the flowers? 4. We 
 must have some to decorate the table. 5. I am not going to buy 
 any. 6. Can we not gather some in the garden? 7. Now we are 
 going to look for some fruit (plur.). 8. We must buy some fruit. 
 9. I intend to buy a great deal of it. 10. Are you glad to see your 
 friends? 11. Yes, I am glad to see them. 12. Have you a good 
 dinner to offer them? 13. Yes, we are going to give (offrir) them a 
 good dinner. 14. We have invited them to come early. 15. We ' 
 see them coming. 16. You can't speak French without studying a 
 great deal. 
 
 LESSON XXVII 
 
 63. Imperfect Indicative of donner,finir, vendre 
 
 I was giving, etc. I was finishing, etc. I was setting, etc. 
 
 je donnais [done] finissais [finise] vendais [vade] 
 
 tu donnais [done] finissais [finise] vendais [vade] 
 
 il donnait [done] finissait [finise] vendait [vade] 
 
 nous dpnnions [don jo] finissions [finis jo] vendions [vadjo] 
 
 vous donniez [donje] finissiez [finisje] vendiez [vadje] 
 
 ils donnaient [done] finissaient [finise] vendaient [vade] 
 
56 LESSON XXVII [64 
 
 64. Imperfect Indicative of avoir and etre 
 
 I had, used to have, etc. I was, used to be, etc. 
 
 j 'avais [ave] j'e*tais [ete] 
 
 tu avais [ave] tu etais [ete] 
 
 il avait [ave] il etait [ete] 
 
 nous avions [avjo] nous e*tions [etjo] 
 
 vous aviez [avje] vous e*tiez [etje] 
 
 ils avaient [ave] ils etaient [ete] 
 
 65. Use of Imperfect. 1. It denotes what used to happen 
 or continued to happen: 
 
 Nous parlions souvent de vous. We often used to speak oj you. 
 II perdait souvent sa plume. He would often lose his pen. 
 Mon oncle etait tres vieux. My uncle was very old. 
 
 2. It denotes what was happening when something else hap- 
 pened (cf. 47) or was happening: 
 
 On chantait quand je suis venu. They were singing when I came. 
 II parlait pendant que nous He was speaking while we sang 
 chantions. (were singing). 
 
 66. Present and Imperfect Indicative of faire (irreg.) 
 
 / do, am doing, etc. I was doing, etc. 
 
 je fais [fe] je faisais [faze] 
 
 tu fais [fe] tu faisais [faze] 
 
 ilfait [fe] il f aisait [faze] 
 
 nous faisons [fazo] nous faisions [fazjo] 
 
 vous faites [fet] vous faisiez [fazje] 
 
 ils font [f 5] ils faisaient [faze] 
 
 67. The Pluperfect. The pluperfect of a verb is formed 
 by adding its past participle to the imperfect of avoir or etre 
 (cf. 45, 51), thus: 
 
 I had given, etc. I had arrived, etc. 
 
 j 'avais donne* j'e*tais arrive" (e) 
 
 tu avais donne", etc. tu etais arrive* (e), etc. 
 
1 67] LESSON XXVII 57 
 
 EXERCISE XXVII 
 
 Pabeille [abeij], f., bee le miel [mjel], honey 
 
 arracher [araje], tear out (up) la mouche [mu$], fly 
 
 attraper [atrape], catch, capture le nid [ni], nest 
 
 chanter Rate], sing la nuance [nqais], shade (of colour) 
 
 clair [kleir], clear, bright Pouvrage [uvrais], m., work 
 
 commencer [komase], begin pendant que [padd ka], while, 
 couler [kule], run (of liquids) whilst 
 
 Peau [o], f ., water le poisson [pwaso], fish 
 
 hors de [oir do], prep., out of le ruisseau [rqiso], brook, stream 
 
 jamais [same], ever sauter [sote], leap, jump 
 
 le jour [suir], day sauvage [sovais], wild 
 
 ne . . . jamais [n9 , . . same], terminer [termine], finish, complete 
 
 never voler [vole], fly 
 
 etre en fleur(s), be in flower, blossom, bloom; de branche en branche, 
 from branch to branch; de temps en temps, from time to time t now and 
 then, occasionally; il y avait, there was, there were. 
 
 A. Continue: 1. Je jouais et chantais tout le temps, tu, etc. 2. Je 
 faisais souvent une promenade. 3. Est-ce que je ne finissais pas 
 mes legons? 4. J'etais chez moi alors. 5. J'etais arrive* avant lui. 
 6. Je vendais mes pommes aux marchands. 7. J'avais termine mon 
 ouvrage quand ils sont arrives. 8. N'y avait-il pas de plumes dans 
 ma boite? 9. Qu'est-ce qfue je fais (faisais)? 
 
 B. 1. J'ai fait 1'autre jour une promenade aux bois. 2. C'e'tait 
 un beau jour de printemps. 3. Les feuilles avaient commence a. 
 pousser. 4. Elles e*taient de toutes les nuances. 5. II y avait 
 meme des arbres qui e*taient en fleur(s) . 6. Les e*cureuils sautaient 
 de branche en branche. 7. Les oiseaux volaient d'arbre en arbre. 
 8. Ils chantaient pendant qu'ils faisaient leurs nids. 9. J'ai trouvd 
 de jolies petites fleurs sauvages. 10. Je n'en ai pas cueilli. 11. Je 
 n'arrache jamais les fleurs sauvages. 12. II y avait aussi des abeilles 
 qui cherchaient du miel de fleur en fleur. 13. L'eau du ruisseau 
 coulait claire et abondante. 14. Les poissons y jouaient et sautaient 
 hors de Feau de temps en temps pour attraper les mouches. 
 
 C. (Oral exercise on B, above.) 
 
58 
 
 LESSON XXVIII 
 
 [68 
 
 (Be careful to distinguish between the imperfect and past indefinite in D 
 and E.) 
 
 D. 1. What were you doing the other day? 2. I was taking a 
 walk in the woods. 3. I spent some (quelque) time in the fields also. 
 4. It was a beautiful spring day. 5. I saw many little animals. 
 
 6. The squirrels were playing in the trees. 7. They were jumping 
 from tree to tree. 8. The woods were full of wild flowers. 9. There 
 were flowers of all (the) shades. 10. The birds were very merry. 
 11. They had begun to make their nests. 12. And they sang while 
 they were building (faire) them. 13. The bees were flying from 
 flower to flower. 14. The clear water was flowing in the streams. 
 15. Now and then a fish would jump out of the water. 16. It was 
 trying to catch the flies. 
 
 E. 1. When I was at school I used to play a great deal. 2. I 
 was very fond of skating. 3. We were speaking of you this morning. 
 4. I had finished my work when the postman came. 5. I had com- 
 pleted it already. 6. We used to sell all our apples to Mr. Liard. 
 
 7. He made large profits from them. 8. But we didn't sell him any 
 apples this autumn. 9. We were at the door of the house when you 
 were passing in the street. 10. You were playing while we were 
 working. 11. The apples were ripening, but the pears were still 
 green. 12. Robert never used to lose his books. 13. He would 
 never come (arriver) late to school. 14. The teacher was not pleased 
 with him. 15. Did you arrive before the others? 16. No, sir, they 
 arrived before me. 
 
 LESSON XXVIII 
 
 68. Position of Pronoun Objects. 1. Conjunctive personal 
 pronoun objects ( 23) and pronominal adverbs (namely en and 
 y) come next before the verb, unless it be imperative affirmative 
 ( 72). 
 
 2. When two of these forms come together before the verb, 
 their relative position is as follows: 
 me 
 te 
 
 before 
 
 se 
 
 nous 
 
 vous 
 
 before 
 
 le 
 la 
 les 
 
 lui 
 leur 
 
 before y 
 
 before en 
 
68] LESSON XXVIII 59 
 
 II me (te, nous, vous) les donne. He gives them to me (you, us, etc.). 
 Elle se les achete. She buys them for herself. 
 
 Je ne les lui (leur) donne pas. / don't give them to him (them). 
 Je Py ai envoye pour le lui dire. / sent him there to tell him it. 
 II y en avait au marche. There was (were) some at the mar- 
 
 ket. 
 
 (a) Pronouns of the first and second persons (me, te, nous, vous) and 
 se of the third person precede all others. 
 
 (b) The direct object of the third person precedes the indirect (except 
 se, as above). 
 
 (c) Y and en come last, y preceding en. 
 
 (d) Ne precedes all pronoun objects. 
 
 NOTE. When the conjunctive direct object is me, te, nous, vous, se, 
 the indirect object with a follows the verb, e.g. II me presente b vous, He 
 introduces me to you; II vous presente & lui, He introduces you to him. 
 
 EXERCISE XXVIII 
 
 Particle, m., article, thing ordinaire, ordinary 
 
 autrefois, formerly ou, or 
 
 le besoin, need, necessity 1'outil, m., tool 
 
 certain, certain le patin, skate 
 
 constamment, constantly quelconque, adj., some, any (what- 
 
 different, different ever) 
 
 emprunter, borrow (from, a) raconter, relate, tell 
 
 le fils, son la reception, reception 
 
 Intelligence, f., intelligence, un- la vaisselle, dishes (collectively) 
 
 derstanding ' la vie, life, living 
 
 le lait, milk vivre, live 
 mener, lead, take, bring 
 
 avoir besoin de, to have need of, need; en bonne intelligence, on good 
 terms. 
 
 A. Continue: 1. II me les donne, il te, etc. 2. II ne me Tavait 
 pas donne, ... te ... etc. 3. Ne me les a-t-il pas pretes? ne te les 
 . . . ? etc. 4. Je lui en ai prete* quelquefois, tu, etc. 5. J'y en ai 
 cherche", tu, etc. 6. Je les leur ai emprunte*s, tu, etc. 7. Je ne 
 peux pas la leur preter, tu, etc. 8. Je vais lui en acheter, tu, etc. 
 
 B. Substitute pronouns for the expressions in italics: 1. On me 
 raconte Vhistoire. 2. Je prete mes plumes a Louise. 3. Les avez- 
 vous rencontre's dans la rue? 4. J'ai apporte" la lettre a mon pere. 
 
60 LESSON XXVIII [68 
 
 5. Pourquoi n'a-t-il pas donn6 de I 'argent aux pauvres? 6. Je vais 
 preter mes livres aux eleves. 7. Je ne trouve pas de plumes dans cette 
 boite. 
 
 C. 1. II faut vivre en bonne intelligence avec ses (one's) voisins. 
 2. Nous habitions autrefois a la campagne et nous pretions constam- 
 ment a nos voisins les differents articles de la vie ordinaire. 3. Ma 
 mere avait souvent besoin d'un article quelconque et M me Lebrun 
 le lui pretait. 4. Moi je pretais a son fils mes patins ou mon trai- 
 neau. 5. Quand les filles de M me Lebrun n'avaient pas un certain 
 livre mes sceurs le leur pretaient. 6. Quelquefois nous n'avions pas 
 de vache pour nous donner du lait; alors nos voisins nous en don- 
 naient. 7. Quand nous avions besoin d'outils pour travailler au jar- 
 din nous leur en empruntions. 8. Quand M me Lebrun n'avait 
 pas assez de vaisselle pour son jour de reception, ma mere lui en 
 pretait. 9. Quand il y avait du monde chez eux et quand il n'y en 
 avait pas chez nous ils nous invitaient a danser. 10. Quand M. 
 et M me Lebrun de"siraient aller a la ville mon pere les y menait 
 souvent. 
 
 D. (Oral.) 1. Qui e*taient vos voisins a la campagne? 2. fitaient- 
 ce de bons voisins? 3. Votre mere leur pretait-elle beaucoup 
 d'articles? 4. Leur en empruntait-elle souvent? 5. Est-ce que 
 Charles LebrunVous pretait jamais ses patins? 6. Lui pretiez-vous 
 souvent votre traineau? 7. Votre pere empruntait-il des outils a 
 M. Lebrun? 8. Vos sceurs de*sirent-elles aller a la ville? 9. Qui 
 va les niener a la ville? 10. Pouvez-vous les accompagner a la 
 ville? etc. 
 
 E. 1. We had good neighbours in the country. 2. They used to 
 lend us many articles. 3. And we often lent them some. 4. They 
 used to borrow many things from us. 5. Can you lend me your 
 skates? 6. I cannot lend them to you to-day. 7. Robert Lebrun 
 has borrowed them from me. 8. I lent them to him this morning; 
 he needed them. 9. My mother has lent some dishes to Mrs. 
 Lebrun. 10. She often lends her some. 11. Does your father 
 often borrow tools or nails from (a) Mr. Lebrun? 12. He borrows 
 some from him sometimes. 13. When we wished to go to the city 
 our neighbour took us there in his carriage. 
 
S72] LESSON XXIX 61 
 
 F. 1. Charles often lends me books. 2. Does he lend you (thee) 
 any? 3. He doesn't lend me any. 4. He cannot lend me any to-day. 
 5. He has lent them to George; he has lent them to him. 6. He 
 has lent him some. 7. He cannot lend you any. 8. We met our 
 friends at the church door. 9. We met them there. 10. Here are 
 some pretty flowers; we are going to give her them. 11. Who 
 brought us the letters? 12. The postman brought them to us. 
 13. He used to bring us some every day. 
 
 LESSON XXIX 
 
 69. Imperative Mood of donner, finir, vendre 
 
 Give, let us give, etc. Finish, let us finish, etc. Sell, let us sell, etc. 
 2d Sing, donne finis vends 
 
 1st Plur. donnons finissons vendons 
 
 2d Plur. donnez finissez vendez 
 
 (a) The second person singular of the first conjugation adds s before y 
 or en, e.g. donnes-en. 
 
 70. Imperative of avoir and etre 
 2d Sing, aie, have sois, be 
 
 1st Plur. ayons, let us have soyons, let us be 
 
 2d Plur. ayez, have soyez, be 
 
 71. Imperative Negative 
 
 ne donne pas ne donnons pas ne donnez pas 
 
 72. Pronominal Objects. 1. Conjunctive personal pronoun 
 objects and pronominal adverbs follow the imperative affirma- 
 tive, and are joined to it and to one another by hyphens: 
 
 Donnez-lui la plume. Give him the pen. 
 
 Donnez-la-lui. Give it to him. 
 
 Donnons-leur-en. Let us give them some (of it). 
 
 2. But if the imperative be negative, the general rules of posi- 
 tion ( 68) hold good: 
 
 Ne me la donnez pas. Do not give it to me. 
 
62 LESSON XXIX [ 73 
 
 3. Moi for me and toi for te are used after an imperative, un- 
 less before en, in which case an apostrophe replaces the hyphen: 
 
 Donnez-moi P argent. Give me the money. 
 
 Donnez-le-moi ; donnez-m'en. Give me it; give me some. 
 
 Amuse-toi ; va-t'en. Enjoy yourself; go away. 
 
 4. After an imperative, the direct object precedes the indi- 
 rect; y and en come last, y preceding en: 
 
 Donnez-les-moi (leur). - Give them to me (to them). 
 
 Menez-nous-y. Take us there. 
 
 73. Imperative of aller (irreg.) and fail e (irreg.) 
 
 2d Sing, va 1st Plur. aliens 2d Sing, fais 1st Plur. faisons 
 
 2d Plur. allez 2d Plur. faites 
 
 (a) Before y, va becomes vas, e.g. Vas-y, Go there. 
 
 EXERCISE XXIX 
 
 attendre, wait for la minute, minute 
 
 le biscuit, biscuit Pobligeance, f., kindness 
 
 cela, invar., that plait, from plaire, irreg., (it) pleases 
 
 Pemploye, m., employee, clerk le prix, price 
 envoyer, send quinze, fifteen 
 
 Pepicier, m., grocer le sou, sou ( = one cent) 
 
 le fromage, cheese le sucre, sugar 
 
 gouter (a), taste la suite, continuation 
 
 mesdames, pi. of madame, ladies 
 
 et avec cela? what next? (lit. and with that?}] tout de suite, at once, 
 immediately; s'il vous plait, if you please; trois sous la livre, three cents 
 a pound 
 
 A. Give orally the imperative affirmative and negative of: 1. Parler. 
 2. Finir. 3. Vendre. 4. Attendre. 5. fitre. 6. Aller. 7. Avoir. 
 8. Faire. 9. Turn into the negative form: donnez-la-moi; parlez- 
 leur-en; vendez-les-lui; allez-y. 
 
 B. (Chez I'epicier) Je vais chez Fe*picier. J'y vais aussi tout de 
 suite. Attendez-moi. Oui, je vais vous attendre a la porte du 
 magasin. Soyez-y dans quinze minutes. Ne perdons pas de temps. 
 (On y arrive) Entrons. Parlons a cet employe'-la.^Vous de*sirez, mes- 
 
73] LESSON XXIX 63 
 
 dames? Du sucre, s'il vous plait. Oui, mesdames. Montrez- 
 nous-en. En voila, mesdames, et du bon. Quel en est le prix? 
 Six sous la livre. Donnez-m'en quatre livres, et donnez-en 
 deux livres a mon amie. Et avec cela, mesdames? Montrez- 
 moi du the*. En voila. Ce the n'est pas bon, je pense. Ne m'en 
 donnez pas. Ayez 1'obligeance d'attendre une minute, madame ; 
 en voici du bon. Vous avez du fromage? Oui, mesdames. 
 Montrez-le-nous. II est tres bon. Goutez-y. Ou peut-on trou- 
 ver des biscuits? La-bas, mesdames. Menez-nous-y, monsieur, 
 s'il vous plait. Bien, mesdames. 
 
 C. (1) Translate the following sentences; (2) substitute pronouns for 
 the italics; (3) turn into negative form: 1. Bring me the cane, please. 
 2. Explain the lesson to them. 3. Let us give him some money. 
 4. Pass me the bread. 5. Lend us your books. 6. Let us speak to 
 him of his school. 7. Pick up the pencils for her. 8. Show me some 
 tea. 9. Accompany us to the city. 10. Go and buy (imperative + 
 infinitive) some fruit. 11. Notice the beauty of the landscape. 
 12. Take us to the city. 
 
 D. 1. Are you going to the grocer's? 2. We are going (there) at 
 once. 3. Wait for us at the door. 4. Come in, please; what do 
 you wish, ladies? 5. Have you any good tea? 6. Show me some. 
 7. Give me two pounds of it, please. 8. My friend (/.) wishes some 
 too. 9. Give her a pound of it. 10. What next, ladies? 11. I 
 wish some good cheese. 12. Here is some good cheese. 13. Taste 
 it (see B, I. 12). 14. I don't like it. 15. Don't give me any of it. 
 16. Have the kindness to wait a little, madam, here is some of 
 another kind. 
 
 E. Translate both affirmatively and. negatively: 1. Speak to that 
 clerk; speak to him. 2. Show me some sugar, please; show me 
 some. 3. Give my friend some; give her four pounds of it. 4. Give 
 me some also; give me two pounds. 5. Show me the tea, please; 
 show me it. 6. Show me some biscuits. 7. Send these articles to 
 my father's. 8. Send them there before (the) dinner. 9. Let us go 
 home at once. 10. Go (thou) there at once. 11. Let us be satisfied. 
 12. Let us wait for her. 13. Make me an omelet, please. 
 
64 LESSON XXX [74 
 
 LESSON XXX 
 
 74. Future Indicative of donner, finir, vendre 
 
 I shall give, etc. I shall finish, etc. I shall sell, etc. 
 
 je donnerai finirai vendrai 
 
 tu donneras finiras vendras 
 
 il donnera finira vendra 
 
 nous donnerons finirons vendrons 
 
 vous donnerez finirez vendrez 
 
 ils donneront finiront vendront 
 
 75. Future Indicative of avoir and &tre 
 
 I shall have, etc. I shall be, etc. 
 
 j'aurai nous aurons je serai nous serons 
 
 tu auras vous aurez tu seras vous serez 
 
 il aura ils auront il sera ils seront 
 
 76. Use of the Future. It is used in general as in English, 
 but must also be employed when futurity is implied, e.g. after 
 quand or lorsque, when, aussitdt que, as soon as: 
 
 Quand il arrivera je partirai. When he comes I shall go. 
 
 77. Future Indicative of aller (irreg.) and fair e (irreg.) 
 
 / shall go, etc. I shall do, etc. 
 
 j'irai nous irons je ferai nous ferons 
 
 tu iras vous irez tu feras vous ferez 
 
 il ira ils iront il f era ils f eront 
 
 78. Future Anterior. It is formed by adding the past 
 participle to the future of avoir or etre: 
 
 j'aurai donne*, I shall have given, etc. 
 
 je serai arrive* (e), / shall have arrived, etc. 
 
78] LESSON XXX 65 
 
 EXERCISE XXX 
 
 Parchitecte, m., architect la menuiserie, woodwork 
 
 le bain, bath le menuisier, joiner, carpenter 
 
 batir, build mince, thin 
 
 la bibliotheque, library le mur, wall 
 
 la boiserie, wainscoting neuf , new 
 
 la chambre, room Pouvrier, m., workman 
 
 choisir, choose, select le parquet, floor 
 
 coucher, lie down, sleep peindre, paint 
 
 la cuisine, kitchen le peintre, painter 
 
 epais, thick le plan, plan 
 
 esperer, hope prochain, next 
 
 Petage, m., story, flat, flow que, conj., that 
 
 etroit, narrow la semaine, week 
 
 large, wide, broad surveiller, superintend 
 
 le macon, mason le terrain, (building) lot 
 la chambre a coucher, bedroom; la salie a manger, dining room; la salle 
 de bains, bathroom; etre bien, be comfortable; il y aura, there will be 
 
 A. Continue: 1. J'aurai une belle maison dans cette rue, tu, etc. 
 2. J'y serai bien. 3. J'habiterai cette maison au printemps. 4. Je 
 ne perdrai pas de temps. 5. Je ne sortirai pas ce matin. 6. II y 
 aura dix pieces dans ma maison,, . . . ta. 7. Je ferai de bons plans. 
 8. Je n'irai pas les voir. 
 
 B. 1. Nous aurons une maison neuve Pannee prochaine. 2. Elle 
 sera dans une belle rue. 3. Nous avons deja choisi le terrain. 
 4. Nous aurons un bon architecte qui fera les plans. 5. II sur- 
 veillera les ouvriers. 6. II y en aura beaucoup. 7. Les magons 
 batiront les murs. 8. Les murs seront tres epais; mon pere n'aime 
 pas les murs minces. 9. Les menuisiers feront les portes, les fe- 
 netres, les parquets et la boiserie. 10. Les peintres peindront la 
 menuiserie. 11. La maison aura trois Stages. 12. Elle aura dix 
 pieces. 13. II y aura le salon, la salle a manger, la cuisine, la 
 bibliotheque, la salle de bains et plusieurs chambres a coucher. 
 14. EspeVons que nous y serons bien. 
 
 C. (Oral.) 1. Aurez-vous bientot une maison neuve? 2. Qui 
 choisira le terrain? 3. Ou sera votre maison? 4. Ferez-vous les 
 plans vous-meme? 5. Que fera Tarchitecte? 6. Combien dotages 
 
66 LESSON XXXI [79 
 
 y aura-t-il? 7. Combien de pieces aurez-vous? 8. La salle & 
 manger sera-t-elle & cote de la cuisine? 9. Que feront les menui- 
 siers? 10. Qui batira les murs? 11. Quelles sont les differentes 
 pieces d'une maison? etc. 
 
 D. 1. You will soon have a new house. 2. It will be in a fine 
 street. 3. We shall soon choose the lot. 4. My father will select 
 the plan next week. 5. There will be many workmen. 6. There 
 will be masons, joiners and painters. 7. The masons will build the 
 walls. 8. When the doors and windows are ready, the joiners will 
 bring them. 9. The painters will paint them. 10. How many 
 rooms will there be? 11. We shall have ten or eleven of them. 
 12. We shall have a kitchen, a dining room and a library. 13. There 
 will also be several large bedrooms. 14. The cellar too will be 
 very large. 15. Shall you be comfortable in your new house? 
 16. Let us hope so (le). 17. You will be very comfortable in it, I 
 think. 
 
 E. 1. I shah 1 go out when my sister is ready. 2. Let us go to 
 town when we have (the) time (for it) . 3. We shall go to the grocer's 
 at once. 4. The architect will make the plans. 5. When he has 
 made (fut. ant.) them, he will bring them to us. 6. We shall show 
 them to you when he brings them. 7. When you go to the grocer's 
 bring me some good tea. 8. I shall do so (le). 9. When you take 
 a walk I shall go with you. 10. Shall we go to see you when you are 
 in the country? 11. They will go to skate when they have finished. 
 12. When the house is ready we shah 1 live in it. 13. The dining 
 room will be wider than the parlour. 14. The bedrooms are nar- 
 rower. 
 
 LESSON XXXI 
 
 79. Demonstrative Pronouns 
 
 ce, invar., this, that, it, etc. 
 ceci, invar., this 
 cela, invar., that 
 
 celui, m., celle, f., this or that (one), the one, he (she) 
 ceux, m. plur., celles, f. plur., these, those, the ones 
 (a) Cela is sometimes contracted to ga [sa], colloquially. 
 
82] LESSON XXXI 67 
 
 80. Use of ce. 1. For its use as anticipatory subject with 
 etre, see 35, 54. 
 
 2. Ce = this (that), it, is also used as the real subject of etre: 
 C'est facile (vrai, bien). It (that) is easy (true, well). 
 
 81. Use of ceci, cela. Ceci = this (the nearer) and cela = 
 that (the more remote) are used to denote something indicated 
 but not named: 
 
 Cela est joli mais j'aime ceci. That is pretty, but I like this. 
 
 J'ai parle de cela. I spoke of that. 
 
 (a) If the object referred to has been named, or if the name is fully implied, 
 celui-ci (-la) must be used. 
 
 82. Use of celui. 1. The form celui (celle, etc.) = this or 
 that (one), the one, he, refers to persons or things: 
 
 Get ami et celui qu'il cherche. This friend and the one he seeks. 
 
 Mes plumes et celles de Marie. My pens and Mary's (those of M .). 
 
 Celles que vous aimez. The ones (e.g. flowers) you like. 
 
 Celui qui cherche trouve. He who seeks finds. 
 
 2. The particles -ci and -li are added to celui (celle, etc.) to 
 contrast the nearer with the more remote, of persons or things 
 already mentioned: 
 
 Voici les deux chaines; gardez Here are the two chains; keep this 
 
 celle-ci et donnez-moi celle-la. (one) and give me that (one). 
 
 3. Celui-ci = the latter and celui-li = the former: 
 
 Ciceron et Virgile etaient celebres; Cicero and Virgil were celebrated? 
 celui-ci etait poete et celui-la the former was an orator and the 
 orateur. latter a poet. 
 
 (a) The order is reversed as compared with English. 
 
 EXERCISE XXXI 
 
 aller, fit, suit, become (of clothing) le fond, bottom, back part, end (of a 
 le carton, cardboard box room, etc.). 
 
 la cravate, necktie merci, thank you, thanks 
 
 demander, ask prendre, take, get, catch 
 
 essayer, try, try on le rayon, shelf, department (of a 
 
 la main, hand store), counter 
 
 monsieur desire? what do you wish (sir)? ce chapeau me va bien, this 
 hat fits (suits, becomes) me; avoir a la main, to have (hold) in one's hand 
 
68 LESSON XXXI [ 82 
 
 A. Supply a suitable demonstrative pronoun: 1. Ces pommes-ci 
 sont mures; c . . . sont vertes. 2. Donnez-moi ceci; ne me donnez 
 pas c . . . 3. Ces gants-ci sont trop grands; c . . . sont trop petits. 
 4. Nos plumes et c . . . des autres eleves. 5. Cette poire-la est 
 douce, mais c ... est aigre. 6. C . . . qui nous salue est ma cousine. 
 
 7. C ... est Robert qui arrive. 
 
 B. J'ai perdu ma canne et celle de mon frere. Je vais a un 
 grand magasin pour en acheter deux. (Un employe demande) 
 Monsieur desire? Des Cannes, s'il vous plait. Vous les trouverez 
 la-bas au fond. (J'y vais) Montrez-moi des Cannes. En voila. 
 Aimez-vous celles-ci ou celles-la? Je prendrai deux de celles-cL 
 (Je vais an rayon des gants) Je de*sire des gants. De ceux 
 qu'on vous a monfcres hier? Oui. Des gants blancs, n'est-ce 
 pas? Essayez ceux-ci. Us ne me vont pas. Montrez-moi ceux 
 qui sont dans ce carton-la. Ceux-ci vous vont bien. (Je cherche 
 une cravate) Avez-vous de jolies cravates bleues? En voici. 
 Prendrez-vous celle-ci ou celle-la? Je prendrai celle que vous avez 
 a la main. Et avec $a? Merci, c'est tout pour aujourd'hui. 
 
 C. (Oral.) 1. Quelles Cannes avez-vous perdues? 2. Qui vous 
 montre des Cannes? 3. Ou sont celles que vous cherchez? 4. Aimez- 
 vous mieux celle-ci ou celle-la? 5. Prendrez-vous celle-ci? 6. Vous 
 de*sirez des gants, n'est-ce pas? 7. Ceux-ci vous vont-ils bien? 
 
 8. Ceux-la sont-ils trop grands? 9. De*sirez-vous une cravate 
 blanche? 10. Celle qui est dans le carton vous plait-elle? 11. Celle- 
 ci est tres jolie, n'est-ce pas? etc. 
 
 D. 1. I have lost my gloves and my brother's also. 2. The ones 
 I lost were very fine. 3. The glove department is at the back of the 
 store. 4. The clerk shows us some gloves. 5. He asks: "Do you 
 wish these gloves or those?" 6. These don't fit me. 7. These are 
 too large. 8. Those are not too small. 9. Give me the ones you 
 have in your hand. 10. Have you tried on these? 11. You are 
 going to try them on, are you not? 12. Do you like black gloves or 
 white gloves? 13. We like the latter. 14. What pretty neckties! 
 15. Robert's is pretty too. 16. You are speaking of the one he 
 bought last week, are you not? 17. The one he bought is blue: 
 this one is white. 18. Those I bought yesterday have come. 
 
85] LESSON XXXII 69 
 
 E. 1. Which necktie do you wish? 2. Don't you like the one 
 I have in my hand? 3. No, I like the one which I see in that box. 
 4. I shall take that one. 5. I shall not take this one. 6. Is that 
 (ce) aU? 7. Thanks, that is all. 8. Those who seek find. 9. I 
 like this; I don't like that. 10. Did you speak of that to the teacher? 
 11. Gather up all this; leave all that on the table. 12. Our house 
 is beside Mr. Leduc's. 13. Our house is very old; Mr. Leduc's is 
 new. 14. Do you like to play with John or with Robert? 15. With 
 the latter. 16. Give me two pounds of this tea and one pound of 
 that. 17. Did you buy this picture yesterday? 18. No, it isn't 
 this one; it is the one which you see near the window. 
 
 LESSON XXXII 
 
 83. The Possessive Pronouns 
 
 SINGULAR PLURAL 
 
 le mien, m. les miens, m. 1 
 
 la mienne, f. les miennes, L\ n 
 
 le tien, m. les tiens, m. 1 ., 
 
 , ,. ,. t > thine, yours 
 
 la tienne, f. les tiennes, f . j 
 
 le sien, m. les siens, m. 1 . 
 
 la sienne, f . les siennes, f . j hls > kers ' lts > ones 
 
 le notre, m. 1 
 
 lanAtreif. J les notres, m., f., OM r S 
 
 le vdtre, m. ] 
 
 lavotre, f. j les votres, m., f., f/owrs 
 
 le leur, m. ] 
 
 la leur, f. s > m> > '' theirs 
 
 Contractions: de + le = du, de + les = des; a + le = au, a + les = 
 aux, e.g. du mien, des siennes, au votre, aux leurs, etc. 
 
 84. Agreement. They agree in gender and number with the 
 noun denoting the object possessed: 
 
 Ses amis et les miens (i.e. amis). His friends and mine. 
 
 85. Use of Possessive Pronouns. 1. With etre, the prepo- 
 sition a + a disjunctive pronoun denotes mere ownership 
 
70 LESSON XXXII [86 
 
 (cf. Lesson XXIII), whereas the use of a possessive pronoun de- 
 notes distinction of ownership: 
 
 Cette plume est a moi. This pen belongs to me (is mine). 
 
 Cette plume est la mienne. This pen is mine (not yours, etc.). 
 
 2. Since le sien (la sienne, etc.) = his, hers, its, 'one's, the 
 meaning is determined by the context: 
 
 J'ai mes livres; elle a les siens. I have my books; she has hers. 
 
 3. Observe the idioms: 
 
 Un de mes amis. A friend of mine (one of my friends). 
 
 Un Fran^ais de mes amis. A Frenchman, a friend of mine. 
 
 86. Present Indicative of vouloir (irreg.), 'will, 1 
 'wish/ 'like/ etc. 
 
 I mil, wish, desire, want (to), etc. 
 je veux nous voulons 
 
 tu veux vous voulez 
 
 il veut ils veulent 
 
 EXERCISE XXXII 
 
 la brosse, brush propre, clean 
 
 les cheveux, m., hair le savon, soap 
 
 la dent, tooth la serviette, towel, napkin 
 
 eh bien! well then la toilette, toilet 
 
 enfin, at last toucher a, touch, meddle with 
 
 la maman, mamma vouloir, irreg., will, wish, want 
 
 oublier, forget to, etc. 
 
 le peigne, comb 
 
 faire sa toilette, make one's toilet, dress (intr. vb.); brosse a dents, tooth- 
 brush 
 
 A. Substitute possessive pronouns for the expressions in italics: 
 1. Voulez-vous voir mes lettresf 2. Veux-tu me preter tes livres f 
 3. Je veux chercher ma brosse. 4. Je parle de votre tableau. 5. Je 
 parlais a vos soeurs. 6. A-t-il fait sa toilette? 7. J'admire leur 
 maison. 8. Marie a perdu ses patins. 9. Nous avons cueilli nos 
 pommes. 10. Ils ont vendu leurs pommes. 11. Voici mon chapeau; 
 voila ton chapeau. 12. Elle veut etudier son lime. 
 
 B. (Deux . freres font leur toilette) As-tu vu ma serviette? 
 Oui, la voila. Mais non, ce n'est pas la mienne, c'est la tienne. 
 
86] LESSON XXXII 71 
 
 Oui, c'est vrai. Celle-ci est & moi et celle-la est a toi. Et ou est 
 le savon? Voici mon savon, voila le tien. Donne-moi un mor- 
 ceau du tien, s'il te plait; le mien n'est pas bon. Eh bien, je t'en 
 donne. Je ne trouve pas ma brosse a dents. La voila. Mais 
 non, c'est celle de papa. Et celle-la est a maman. Les leurs sont 
 meilleures que les notres. Mais il ne faut pas y toucher. Enfin 
 voici la mienne. Maintenant ma toilette est faite. Et tes che- 
 veux? C'est vrai. J'ai oublie cela, mais ou est mon peigne? 
 Veux-tu me preter le tien? Je ne peux pas trouver le mien. On 
 ne prete pas ses articles de toilette. Ce n'est pas propre. 
 
 C. (Oral.) 1. Que voulez-vous faire? 2. Que vont faire les 
 deux~freres? 3. Cette serviette est-elle la mienne? 4. Est-elle a 
 vous? 5. N'est-elle pas a moi? 6. Ou est la mienne? 7. Quel 
 peigne est celui-la? 8. De quel peigne parlez-vous? 9. Les brosses 
 de papa sont-elles meilleures que les miennes? 10. Les notres 
 sont-elles moins bonnes que les siennes? 11. .Ce peigne-ci est-il le 
 mien? 12. A qui est celui-la? 13. Votre toilette est-elle de*ja 
 faite? etc. 
 
 D. 1. We are dressing. 2. Have you found your towel? 3. I 
 have not. 4. What towel have you in your hand? 5. Is it mine? 
 6. This one is not yours, it is mine. 7. Yours is larger, isn't it? 
 8. Have you my soap or your own (= yours)? 9. I haven't seen 
 yours; I have my own. 10. Will you give me a piece of yours? 
 11. Papa's brushes are better than ours. 12. Yes, but don't touch 
 his. 13. Lend me your comb, please; I can't find mine. 14. .Look 
 for yours; look for it everywhere. 15. Here it is, at last i have 
 found it. 16. We are dressed (see B, I. 9). 
 
 E.-l. This house is ours. 2. That one is our neighbour's. 3. His 
 is larger than ours. 4. My uncle has his gloves and my aunt 
 has hers. 5. Have you forgotten yours? 6. Here is your tooth- 
 brush, but where is mine? 7. We speak of our lessons, he speaks 
 of his. 8. Have you Mary's pens? 9. Here are hers. 10. The 
 other pupils have lost theirs. 11. This necktie is mine. 12. Those 
 are John's; he bought them yesterday. 13. Our lessons are longer 
 than theirs. 14. Theirs are easier than ours. 15. Mrs. Dupont is a 
 friend of ours. 16. I lend my friends money; do you lend yours any? 
 
72 LESSON XXXIII [87 
 
 LESSON XXXIII 
 
 87. Interrogative Pronouns 
 SINGULAR PLURAL 
 
 qui? invar., who, whom? 
 
 que? invar., what? 
 
 quoi? invar., what? 
 
 lequel? m. lesquels? m. 1 which? which or 
 
 laquelle? f . lesquelles? f. J what one(s}? 
 
 Contractions: duquel, desquel(le)s, auquel, auxquel(le)s 
 
 88. Qui? 1. This form regularly denotes persons only: 
 
 Qui parle? Qui a-t-il vu? Who speaks? Whom did he see? 
 
 De qui (a qui) parle-t-il? Of (to) whom is he speaking? 
 
 Dites-moi de qui il parle. Tell me of whom he is speaking. 
 
 2. With etre, quel? is often used for qui? 
 
 Quelle est cette dame? Who is that lady (what lady is that}? 
 
 3. Whose? denoting ownership = qui? otherwise de qui?: 
 
 A qui est cette maison? Whose house is this? 
 
 De qui 6tes-vous (le) fils? Whose son are you? 
 
 89. Que? and quoi? 1. What? as direct object or predicate 
 of a verb = que? but only in direct questions: 
 
 Qu'avez-vous trouve"? What have, you found? 
 
 Que sont-ils devenus? What has become of them? 
 
 2. What? as a subject is regularly qu'est-ce qui?: 
 Qu'est-ce qui fait ce bruit? What is making that noise? 
 
 3. What? after a preposition, or absolutely - quoi? : 
 
 De quoi parlez-vous? Of what are you speaking? 
 
 II a repondu. Quoi? He has answered. What? 
 
 90. Quel? and lequel? 1. Distinguish the adjective quel? 
 = which, what? immediately preceding its noun (cf. 50) from 
 
91] 
 
 LESSON XXXIII 
 
 73 
 
 the pronoun lequel ? = which (one) f what (one) ? used apart from 
 a noun : 
 
 Quelle dame est arrivee ? 
 
 Laquelle des dames est arrivee ? 
 
 Auxquelles parle-t-il ? 
 
 Quels livres a-t-il? 
 
 Je demande lesquels il cherche. 
 
 Which (what) lady has come ? 
 Which of the ladies has come ? 
 To which (ones) is he speaking f 
 What (which) books has he f 
 I ask which (ones) he seeks. 
 
 91. Interrogative Locutions. Certain expressions formed 
 with est-ce + qui or que are frequently used instead of the 
 simpler interrogative forms, thus: 
 
 Qui est-ce qui parle ? 
 Qui est-ce que vous saluez ? 
 A qui est-ce que vous parlez ? 
 Qu'est-ce que cela montre? 
 Qu'est-ce que c'est? 
 Qu'est-ce que c'est que cela? 
 De quoi est-ce qu'il parle? 
 
 for Qui parle ? 
 
 Qui saluez- vous ? 
 
 A qui parlez-vous ? 
 
 Que montre cela ? 
 " Qu'est-ce? 
 
 Qu'est-ce que cela? 
 
 De quoi parle-t-il? 
 
 (a) Observe the use of que to introduce the real subject : Qu'est-ce que 
 c'est que cela? What is that? Qu'est-ce que c'est que la gloire? What 
 is glory ? 
 
 EXERCISE XXXIII 
 
 Pair, m., air, atmosphere 
 
 ancien, old, ancient, former 
 
 anglais, English 
 
 le cours, course of lectures, lecture 
 
 couter, cost 
 
 entendre, hear 
 
 la Trance, France 
 
 Guignol, m., Punch and Judy 
 
 important, important 
 
 le jar din, garden(s), park 
 
 loin, adv., far, distant 
 
 Luxembourg, m., Luxembourg 
 
 Marie de Medicis [medisisj, Marie 
 
 le marronnier, chestnut [de' Medici 
 
 la musique, music 
 
 le palais, palace, large edifice 
 
 Paris, Pans 
 
 la partie, part, portion 
 
 la place, place, seat 
 
 le senat, senate 
 
 la Sorbonne, Sorbonne 
 
 le tambour, drum 
 
 les Tuileries, f., Tuileries 
 
 Puniversite, f., university 
 
 faire son cours, deliver his lecture; chevaux de bois, merry-go-round; en 
 plein air, in the open air; qu'est-ce que cela veut dire? what does thai 
 mean? 
 
74 LESSON XXXIII [91 
 
 A. (Au jardin du Luxembourg) Qu'est-ce que c'est que le 
 Luxembourg? C'est 1'ancien palais de Marie de Medicis. C'est 
 aujourd'hui le palais du Senat de France. Lequel est le plus beau, 
 le jardin des Tuileries ou le jardin du Luxembourg? J'aime mieux 
 celui-ci. Qui avez-vous salue? C'est un professeur de mes amis 
 qui va faire son cours a la Sorbonne. Qu'est-ce que c'est que la 
 Sorbonne? C'est une partie importante de 1'Universite de Paris. 
 Elle n'est pas loin d'ici. Quelle est la musique que nous enten- 
 dons? C'est la musique des chevaux de bois. Et maintenant, 
 qu'est-ce que c'est que ga? Quoi? Ce bruit qu'on entend la-bas. 
 Qa, c'est le tambour de Guignol. C'est le theatre des enfants. 
 C'est un theatre en plein air. C'est le theatre le moins cher de Paris. 
 Les bonnes places coutent deux sous. 
 
 B. (Oral.) 1. Auquel des jardins allez-vous? 2. Quel palais est 
 celui-la? 3. Lequel de ces deux jardins aimez-vous le mieux? 
 4. Qui est-ce que vous avez salue*? 5. Qui est-ce qui nous a salues? 
 6. Ou va-t-il? 7. Qu'est-ce qu'il va faire? 8. De quelle univer- 
 site la Sorbonne fait-elle partie? 9. Quelle musique entendons- 
 nous? 10. Qu'est-ce que veut dire en anglais " chevaux de bois"? 
 11. Qu'est-ce que c'est que Guignol? 12. Combien les places 
 coutent-elles? etc. 
 
 C. 1. What park is this? 2. What is the Luxembourg? 3. Whose 
 palace was it formerly? 4. What beautiful trees! 5. What trees 
 are these? 6. They are chestnuts. 7. Which is the more important 
 of the two parks? 8. Who was (is) that gentleman who saluted us? 
 9. He is a professor of the Sorbonne. 10. He is going to deliver his 
 lecture. 11. What sound is that? 12. It is music, isn't it? 13. What 
 is that yonder? 14. It is (are) the merry-go-round. 15. What 
 (how much) do the seats cost in the children's theatre? 16. You 
 can have good seats in it for two sous. 17. Of which ancient palace 
 are you speaking? 
 
 D. 1. What lady is that? 2. Whose children are those? 3. Whose 
 daughter are you? 4. What are you speaking of? 5. What are you 
 listening to? 6. What do I hear? 7. I hear Punch and Judy's 
 drum. 8. What has fallen? 9. Whose garden is this? 10. For 
 whom are you waiting? 11. For what are you waiting? 12. Which 
 
94] LESSON XXXIV 75 
 
 seats cost the least? 13. Which of the children is your brother? 
 14. Which of those ladies are your aunts? 15. Which part of the 
 field do you wish to buy? 16. What books have you there? 17. To 
 which of the dealers did your father sell his vegetables? 18. From 
 which of your friends did you borrow the money? 19. What pic- 
 tures do you want to buy? 20. Ask (a) the dealer which ones he 
 wants to sell. 
 
 LESSON XXXIV 
 
 92. The Relative Pronouns 
 
 qui, invar., who, which, that; (after prep.) whom 
 
 que, invar., whom, which, that 
 
 dont, invar., whose, of whom, of which 
 
 ou, invar., to (in, at, etc.) which; where 
 
 lequel, m. sing., lesquels, m. plur. 1 , , 
 
 ' . . , - who, whom, which, that 
 
 laquelle, f. smg., lesquelles, f. plur.j 
 
 quoi, invar., what, which 
 
 Contractions: duquel,desquel(le)s, auquel, auxquel(le)s 
 (a) For agreement and rule regarding omission, see 36. 
 
 93. Qui, que. 1. For the general use of these forms, see 36. 
 2. Qui = whom may stand after a preposition: 
 
 L'ami de (a) qui je parle. The friend of (to) whom I speak. 
 
 94. Dont. 1. This form is much used with the force of de 
 -f- a relative = of or from whom (which), whose: 
 
 Les amis dont je parle. The friends of whom I speak. 
 
 L/eglise dont je vois la tour. The church whose tower I see. 
 
 2. But whose, depending on a noun governed by a preposi- 
 tion, must be rendered by duquel, etc., or de qui, placed after 
 the governed noun: 
 
 La dame au fils de laquelle (or de The lady to whose son I give lessons. 
 qui) je donne des legons. 
 
76 LESSON XXXIV [95 
 
 95. Lequel. 1. In general, this form is rather sparingly 
 used, except for emphasis, or to avoid ambiguity: 
 
 Le livre lequel (que) jetemontre. The book which I show you. 
 
 L'ami auquel (a qui) je parle. The friend to whom I speak. 
 
 La lettre de laquelle (dont) , etc. The letter of which, etc. 
 
 Une edition de ce livre, laquelle An edition of this book, which (sc. 
 on vend fort bon marche. edition) is sold very cheap. 
 
 2. After a preposition, however, a lequel form should be 
 used if the antecedent is an animal or thing : 
 Le chien auquel je donne 1'os. The dog to which I give the bone. 
 La salle dans laquelle il est. The room in which he is. 
 
 96. Oil. The adverb ou, where, has the value of dans (a, 
 etc.) + a relative, to denote place or time : 
 
 La maison ou (dans laquelle) je The house in which(where) I lodge. 
 
 loge. 
 
 Le siecle ou nous vivons. The age in which we live. 
 
 L'endroit d'ofc il vient. The place from which he comes. 
 
 97. Quoi. This form = what, which, without definite ante- 
 cedent, stands after a preposition, rarely otherwise: 
 
 Voila de quoi j'avais besoin. That is what I needed. 
 
 98. 1. What meaning that which = ce -f- a relative: 
 
 Ce qui m' amuse. What (subj.) amuses me. 
 
 Ce que je dis; ce dont je parle. What (obj.) / say; what I speak of. 
 
 2. Similarly which summing up a sentence: 
 
 H est pauvre, ce qui est triste. He is poor, which is sad. 
 
 3. Observe the recapitulatory use of ce : 
 
 Ce que je crains c'est sa colere. What I fear is his anger. 
 (a) For indefinite relative pronouns, see Lesson LXXXVIII. 
 
 99. Conjunction que. That (conjunction) = que, is never 
 omitted in French, as that often is in English: 
 
 Je crois que cela est vrai. I think (that) that is true. 
 
99] LESSON XXXIV 77 
 
 EXERCISE XXXIV 
 
 chasser, hunt remarquable, remarkable 
 
 le cours d'eau, stream rendre, render, make 
 
 frais, fresh, cool la riviere, river 
 
 Pombre, f., shade la source, spring 
 
 par, for traverser, cross, go (run, etc.) 
 
 la peche, fishing through 
 
 la perdrix, partridge la truite, trout 
 
 la propriete, property, estate . venu, p. part, of venir, came 
 
 aller a la peche, go fishing; chasser la perdrix, hunt partridges 
 
 A. Supply suitable relative pronoun forms: 1. L'eglise . . . nous 
 sommes entres. 2. La table . . . il laisse les lettres. 3. L'eleve . . . 
 j 'ai prete ce livre. 4. Ce . . . nous avons besoin. 5. Les marchands 
 . . . je vendais mes pommes. 6. Ce . . . nous a amus6s. 7. L'oncle 
 chez . . . je demeurais. 8. La lettre de mon ami . . . est arrivee ce 
 matin. 9. La ville de . . . nous sommes venus. 10. Voila ce . . . 
 il demande. 11. La maison ... on voit les fenetres. 12. Nous 
 aimons ceux . . . nous aiment. 
 
 B. 1. Aimez-vous la peche? 2. Oui, ou voulez-vous aller a la 
 peche? 3. II y a une petite riviere pres d'ici ou on prend de bons 
 poissons. 4. C'est la jolie petite riviere dont je vous ai de"ja parle*. 
 5. C'est un cours d'eau qui traverse la propriete de M. Durand 
 laquelle est remarquable par sa beaute". 6. M. Durand est le mon- 
 sieur dont nous avons vu le fils bier. 7. C'est le monsieur dans les 
 bois duquel nous avons chassS la perdrix. 8. C'est une riviere de 
 laquelle 1'eau est claire et fraiche. 9. C'est une eau de source, et 
 ce qui la rend encore plus fraiche c'est qu'elle coule toujours a 
 1' ombre. 10. Voila ce qui fait que les truites y sont abondantes. 
 
 C. (Oral.) 1. Quel amusement aimez-vous le mieux? 2. Que 
 voulez-vous faire ce matin? 3,. Ou est la riviere dont vous par- 
 liez hier? 4. De qui traverse-t-elle la propriety? 5. Qui est ce 
 M. Durand dont vous parlez? 6. Est-ce le monsieur dans les bois 
 duquel nous avons chass6 la perdrix? 7. La riviere de laquelle vous 
 parlez est-elle belle? 8. Qu'est-ce qui en rend 1'eau bien fraiche? 
 9. Est-ce un cours d'cau ou on trouve beaucoup de truites? etc. 
 
78 LESSON XXXV [ 100 
 
 D. 1. There is a small stream yonder which crosses our prop- 
 erty. 2. It is the stream of which I have often spoken to you. 
 
 3. Mr. Durand's house which you saw this morning is near the river. 
 
 4. He is the gentleman whose daughter dined at our house yesterday. 
 
 5. We hunt partridges sometimes in his woods, where there are a 
 great many of them. 6. Here is a little river which runs in the shade. 
 7. That is (voila or c'est) what makes the water so cool. 8. It is 
 a river in which one can always catch trout. 9. It is also a 
 river which is remarkable for its beauty. 10. What makes it so 
 beautiful (it) is the clear (and) cool water and the abundant shade. 
 
 11. It is there that we shall go fishing. 12. Very well, that is what 
 we shall do. 
 
 E. 1. What I spoke of is true. 2. What amuses you? 3. This 
 is what amuses me. 4. That is what the postman has brought. 
 5. John has studied well, which pleases (plait a) his teacher. 6. The 
 house in which we were living last year. 7. The park in which I 
 am going to take a walk. 8. The bird to which I give the piece of 
 sugar. 9. The letter of which I was speaking. 10. The friends to 
 whom I have lent my books. 11. The books which I have lent them. 
 
 12. The lady whose daughter is at my mother's. 13. The neigh- 
 bours with whose child we often play. 14. The spring from which 
 this river flows is cool. 15. Have you any of the thin paper of which 
 I was speaking? 
 
 LESSON XXXV 
 
 100. Indefinite Adjectives and Pronouns. In the following 
 sections are explained the uses of the commoner words of this 
 class. For the use of on, see 38; for the use of tout, see 
 40. 
 
 101. Autre and autrui. 1. The various senses of other, (an-) 
 other, (the) other, others are regularly rendered by autre : 
 
 Une autre fois; d'autres arbres. Another time; other trees. 
 
 D'autres sont arriv6(e)s. Others have come. 
 
 Les autres ne sont pas ici. The others are not here. 
 
104] LESSON XXXV 79 
 
 2. L'un, Pautre (as also the feminine and plural) are com- 
 bined into various phrases: 
 
 Elles se flattent Tune Pautre. They flatter each other. 
 
 Us parlent les uns des autres. They speak of one another. 
 
 Ils sont morts Pun et Pautre (or They are both dead. 
 tous deux or tous les deux). 
 
 3. Distinguish un autre from encore un: 
 
 Une autre plume. Another (a different) pen. 
 
 Encore une plume. Another (an additional) pen. 
 
 4. Autrui = others, other people, stands regularly after a prepo- 
 sition, and is somewhat rarely used: 
 
 Les biens d'autrui (or des autres). Other people's goods. 
 
 102. Quelqu'un. The singular = somebody , some (any) one; 
 the plural = some, some people, any, a few: 
 
 II y a quelqu'un(e) a la porte. There is somebody at the door. 
 
 Voila quelques-unes de vos amies. There are some of your friends. 
 J'en ai quelques-uns (e.g. livres). / have some (a few). 
 
 103. Quelque chose = something, anything: 
 
 Quelque chose est tombe. Something has fallen. 
 
 J'ai vu quelque chose de beau. r have seen something fine. 
 
 (a) This form is masculine, though chose as a noun is feminine. 
 
 104. Negative Forms. 1. Personne, rien, aucun, mil, pas 
 un, have negative force when the verb is preceded by ne, or 
 when no verb is expressed. 
 
 2. Thus used, personne = nobody, no one, not anybody, and 
 rien =- nothing, not anything: 
 
 Personne n'est venu; je n'ai vu Nobody has come; I saw nobody; 
 
 personne ; ne parlez a personne. don't speak to anybody. 
 
 Rien ne me fait peur; je n'ai rien Nothing frightens me; I have seen 
 
 vu. nothing (not anything). 
 
 Que dit-il? Rien (de nouveau). What does he say? Nothing (new). 
 
 Personne ici! Personne. Nobody here! Nobody. 
 
 (a) Observe that personne as a pronoun is masculine, while personne ae 
 a noun is feminine. 
 
80 LESSON XXXV [ 105 
 
 3. Similarly aucun, mil, pas un = no, not any (as adjectives), 
 and none, no one, not one (as pronouns) : 
 
 Aucun auteur ne dit cela. No author says that. 
 
 A-t-il de Tespoir? Aucun. Has he any hope? None. 
 
 Nulle esperance ne me reste. No hope remains to me. 
 
 4. If, however, the context contains or implies a negative, 
 personne, rien, aucun (not nul or pas un) are rendered in Eng- 
 lish by an affirmative: 
 
 II n'a rien dit a personne. He said nothing to anybody. 
 
 II refuse de rien dire. He refuses to say anything. 
 
 Sans aucune cause. Without any cause. 
 
 Sans rien faire. Without doing anything. 
 
 5. Observe the following summary of negative forms and 
 note that in these, as well as in the indefinites used negatively, 
 the negation is expressed by ne + a completing word : 
 
 ne . . . pas, not ne . . . jamais, never ne . . . plus, no longer 
 
 ne . . . point, not ne . . . guere, hardly ne . . . que, only 
 
 105. Tel. Such a = t un tel (observe the word-order) : 
 Une telle maison. Such a house. 
 
 EXERCISE XXXV 
 
 attacher, attach, tie la loutre, otter 
 
 auparavant, before mauvais, bad 
 
 la bete, animal, beast mechant, wicked, cross 
 
 bon, kind (to = pour), gentle parce que, because 
 
 le castor, beaver la plante, plant 
 
 le chameau, camel porter, bear, carry; wear 
 
 le dos, back refuser, refuse 
 
 Pelephant, m., elephant le rhinoceros, rhinoceros 
 
 exister, exist, live taquiner, tease 
 la fois, time (repeated) 
 jardin des plantes, Botanical (in Paris also Zoological) Gardens 
 
 A. Continue: 1. Je n'ai guere vu de betes sauvages, tu. 2. Je 
 n'ai jamais rien vu de si bon. 3. Je lui donnais quelque chose de 
 bon. 4. Je n'y ai vu personne. 5. Je n'y ai rien vu. 6. Est-ce 
 que j'y ai jamais e*te? 7. Je ne lui ai rien donne* de mauvais. 
 
105] LESSON XXXV 81 
 
 B. 1. Nous avons e*te* hier au jardin des plantes avec nos cousins. 
 
 2. II y a la beaucoup d'animaux aussi bien que beaucoup de plantes. 
 
 3. Nous n'y avions jamais etc* auparavant. 4. Et nous n'avions 
 guere vu de betes sauvages. 5. Nous n'avons jamais rien vu de 
 plus interessant. 6. II y avait plusieurs elephants. 7. On en avait 
 attache quelques-uns, parce qu'ils etaient mechants. 8. D'autres 
 taient tres bons et portaient des enfants sur leur dos. 9. Quand 
 on leur donnait quelque chose de bon a manger ils etaient tres 
 contents. 10. Ils refusaient de rien manger de mauvais. 11. Mais 
 personne ne les taquinait. 12. Tout le monde etait bon pour eux. 
 13. L'anne*e passee mes cousins y avaient vu un rhinoceros, mais il 
 n'existait plus. 14. Un vieux chameau etait mort aussi. 15. II 
 n'y en avait que deux petits. 16. II n'y avait plus ni castors ni 
 loutres. 17. Mais il y avait beaucoup d'autres animaux interessants. 
 
 C. (Oral.) 1. Ou avez-vous e*te hier? 2. Que veut dire "jardin 
 des plantes"? 3. Y aviez-vous ete auparavant? 4. Qu'avez-vous 
 vu d'interessant? 5. Pourquoi avait-on attache* quelques-uns des 
 elephants? 6. Pourquoi les elephants 6taient-ils contents? 7. Leur 
 a-t-on donne* quelque chose de mauvais? 8. Quelqu'un les taqui- 
 nait-il? 9. Pourquoi n'avez-vous pas vu le rhinoceros? 10. Avez- 
 vous vu beaucoup d'autres betes sauvages? etc. 
 
 D. 1. Do you never go to the Botanical Gardens? 2. I go there 
 sometimes. 3. I have been there several tunes this summer. 
 
 4. Some of my cousins went with me. 5. It is something very in- 
 teresting. 6. There is nothing more interesting for children. 7. Yes- 
 terday we saw some elephants that we hadn't seen before. 8. Some 
 of these elephants had been tied [up] (use on), because they were 
 cross. 9. Others were very gentle (bon), and were carrying children 
 on their backs. 10. Let us give the beavers something good to eat. 
 11. Let us not give them anything bad. 12. They will refuse to 
 eat anything bad. 13. Did anybody tease them? 14. Nobody. 
 15. The otters were no longer in existence. 16. We saw only two 
 camels. 17. There were no others. 18. We didn't see any other 
 animals. 
 
82 LESSON XXXVI [ 106 
 
 E. 1. A certain author relates this story. 2. We have a few good 
 friends, but not (pas) many. 3. The others have not come yet. 
 4. Somebody is knocking at the door; who is it? 5. It is Mr. Du- 
 rand's son; he has brought you something. 6. I haven't seen any- 
 body. 7. We have not spoken to anybody. 8. Nobody has spoken 
 to us. 9. Has the postman brought me no letters? 10. Not one. 
 11. I have seen none (aucuri) of our neighbours to-day. 12. Who 
 told you such a story? 13. Has anybody ever caught trout in 
 that stream? 14. Yes, I have caught some in it. 
 
 F. 1. Give me my other spectacles, because these are not good. 
 2. Others can do the same thing. 3. This pen is bad; give me an- 
 other. 4. I have never liked (de) such amusements. 5. Nobody 
 met us in the street. 6. There was nobody at home when I arrived. 
 7. We haven't done anything wrong (mauvais). 8. Do you wish 
 anything? 9. Nothing, thank you. 10. No letter for me to-day! 
 11. None. 12. Nobody can paint (de) such pictures. 13. Such is 
 the story he has told us. 14. Is your soap not as good as mine? 
 15. My brother's toothbrush is much better than my sister's. 
 
 LESSON XXXVI 
 
 106. Orthographical Peculiarities. Verbs of the first con- 
 jugation in -cer, -ger and -yer, as also those with e or e in the 
 syllable next before the infinitive ending, are conjugated like 
 donner, but have certain peculiarities of orthography which 
 may best be observed by referring to Appendix, D, where all 
 these irregularities are shown. 
 
 (a) The models avancer, manger, payer, mener, esperer, appeler, Jeter, 
 acheter, should be studied before doing the following exercise. 
 
 107. Present Indicative of dire (irreg.), 'say,' 'tell' 
 
 / say, etc. 
 
 je dis nous disons 
 
 tu dis vons dites 
 il dit iis disent 
 
107] LESSON XXXVI 83 
 
 EXERCISE XXXVI 
 
 amener, bring, take habilement, cleverly 
 
 appeler, call jeter, throw (away) 
 
 avancer, advance, go on lancer, throw, fling, toss 
 
 avidement, greedily libre, free 
 
 les bonbons, m., sweetmeats, candy le lion, lion 
 
 la carotte, carrot le moment, moment, time 
 
 le chat, cat Pours, m., bear 
 
 comment, how? payer, pay (for) 
 
 Pentree, f., entrance, admission ressembler a, resemble 
 
 (fee) le roi, king 
 
 la fosse, ditch, pit le rugissement, roar (ing) 
 
 le gardien, keeper le singe, monkey 
 
 habile, clever vers, towards 
 
 dormer a manger a, to feed; fosse aux ours, bear pit; palais des singes, 
 monkey house 
 
 A. Continue: 1. Je ne paie (paye) rien, tu. 2. J'achete (ach&- 
 terai)des bonbons. 3. J'avance (avangais) vers 1'entree. 4. Je jette 
 (jetterai) du pain aux ours. 5. J'espere qu'il arrivera bientot. 6. Je 
 mange (mangeais) de la viande. 7. J'appelle (appellerai) les autres. 
 
 B. (Au jar din des plantes suite) 1. Ce sont tou jours nos cousins 
 qui nous y amenent. 2. L'entree est libre. 3. On ne paie rien. 
 
 4. A rentre*e on achete plusieurs choses pour donner aux animaux. 
 
 5. Puis nous avangons vers la fosse aux ours. 6. On leur jette du 
 pain et des carottes. 7. Us les attrapent tres habilement. 8. On 
 avance encore et on arrive au palais des singes. 9. Nous mangeons 
 des bonbons et noua leur en langons. 10. Us les mangent tres 
 avidement. 11. Ensuite nous entrons chez les lions. 12. C'est au 
 moment ou on leur donne a manger. 13. Les gardiens leur jettent 
 de gros morceaux de viande. 14. Us les attrapent avec des rugisse- 
 ments. 15. Le lion ressemble beaucoup a un gros chat sauvage. 
 16. On Tappelle sou vent le roi des animaux. 
 
 C. (Oral.) 1. Qui est-ce que vous amenez avec vous? 2. Com- 
 bien paie-t-on a ] 'entree? 3. Qu'est-ce que vous achetez a Fentre*e? 
 4. Pourquoi achete-t-on ces choses? 5. Vers quelle partie du jar- 
 din avangons-nous? 6. Que ferons-nous des (with the) carottes? 
 7. L'ours est-il tres habile? 8. Pourquoi dites-vous cela? 9. Qu'est-ce 
 
84 LESSON XXXVII [ 108 
 
 que c'est que le palais des singes? 10. Que jetez-vous aux singes? 
 11. Que faisaient les gardiens des lions? 12. Comment appelle-t-on 
 le lion? etc. 
 
 D. 1. Here we are again (encore une fois) in the home of (chez) 
 the animals. 2. Our cousins take us there. 3. They pay [for] the 
 price of admission. 4. The entrance is not free to-day. 5. Every- 
 body buys something to feed the animals. 6. I am buying candy for 
 the monkeys. 7. I shall buy some bread and carrots for the bears. 
 8. Let us go on now towards the bears. 9. Here is what they call 
 the bear pit. 10. We shall throw the bears some carrots. 11. Let 
 us toss some candy to the monkeys. 12. They catch it (les) cleverly 
 and eat it greedily. 13. What were the lions doing when you saw 
 them? 14. They were eating big pieces of meat which the keepers' 
 were throwing them. 15. What (how) do people call the lion? 
 16. Do lions resemble cats? 17. I hope to see these interesting 
 animals another day. 
 
 E. 1. We are beginning to speak French. 2. I was beginning my 
 lessons when you came. 3. He will bring his brother. 4. Who is 
 calling me? 5. John, call your (thy) brother. 6. Throw [away] 
 that apple; it isn't ripe. 7. Very well, I shall throw it away. 8. Give 
 me another (of them). 9. Let us go on now, we are losing our time. 
 10. I was advancing towards the entrance of the park. 11. The 
 children were eating candy. 12. Let us not eat this candy; I don't 
 like it. 13. Let us go in; I shall pay [for] the seats. 14. How much 
 do we pay (use on)? 15. I shall buy this picture because I like it 
 (it pleases me). 16. The lions were eating the meat greedily. 
 
 LESSON XXXVII 
 
 108. Article with Place-Names. 1. Names of continents, 
 countries, provinces, and of most large islands near Europe, 
 regularly take the definite article, and always so as subject or 
 direct object of a verb: 
 
 L'Asie est un grand continent. Asia is a large continent. 
 
 Us habitent le Mexique. They live in Mexico. 
 
 Nous parlons de la France. We are speaking of France. 
 
109] LESSON XXXVII 85 
 
 2. With such names en denotes where, to where, and the arti- 
 cle is omitted; but if the name be plural, or be the masculine 
 name of a country outside of Europe, & + the definite article is 
 used: 
 
 II est en (va en) Europe. He is in (is going to) Europe. 
 
 II voyage en France (Portugal, m.) He travels in France (Portugal). 
 
 II est aux Etats-Unis. He is in the United States. 
 
 II est au (va au) Japon. He is in (goes to) Japan. 
 
 3. The article is usually omitted in adjectival phrases formed 
 with de, unless the name of the country be plural or be that of 
 a masculine country outside of Europe; and similarly for de 
 denoting mere point of departure: 
 
 Les vins d'ltalie; le roi d'Espagne. Italian wines; the king of Spain. 
 
 II revient d'ltalie (de Portugal). He returns from Italy (Portugal). 
 
 But : La faience des Indes (du Ja- Indian (Japanese) porcelain. 
 
 pon), 
 
 II est revenu du Canada. He has returned from Canada. 
 
 4. To, at, in = , without article, before names of cities, 
 towns, villages: 
 
 A Rome (Berlin, Sevres). To, at or in Rome (Berlin, Sevres). 
 
 5. Any place-name having a qualifying adjunct requires the 
 definite article: 
 
 Dans PAmerique du Nord. In North America. 
 
 La Rome de ce siecle. Rome of this century. 
 
 (a) The definite article forms a part of some names of cities, e.g. le 
 Caire, Cairo, le Havre, Havre, la Nouvelle-Orleans, New Orleans, la Havane, 
 Havana. 
 
 6. Names of mountains always, and names of rivers regu- 
 larly, have the definite article: 
 
 Les Alpes; le Nil; le mont Blanc. The Alps; the Nile; Mt. Blanc. 
 
 109. Present Indicative of partir (irreg.), 'set out,' 'start/ 
 'leave/ 'go' 
 
 / set out, go, etc. 
 
 je pars nous partons 
 
 tu pars vous partez 
 
 il part fls partent 
 
86 
 
 LESSON XXXVII 
 
 [109 
 
 EXERCISE XXXVII 
 
 1'Americain, 1 m., American 
 
 P Anglais, 1 m., Englishman 
 
 PAngleterre, f., England 
 
 le Canadien, 1 Canadian 
 
 la capitale, capital 
 
 le fleuve, river (falling into the sea) 
 
 haut, high 
 
 importer, import 
 
 le lac, lake 
 
 les lainages, m., woollen goods, 
 
 woollens 
 la Loire, Loire 
 Londres, London 
 Lyon, Lyons 
 la Manche, English Channel 
 
 la mer, sea 
 
 le Mississipi, the Mississippi 
 
 la montagne, mountain 
 
 le nord, north 
 
 Fouest, m., west 
 
 le pays, country 
 
 le port, port, wharf 
 
 le Rhdne, Rhone 
 
 le Saint-Laurent, St. Lawrence 
 
 la Seine, Seine 
 
 separer, separate 
 
 situer, situate 
 
 la Tamise, Thames 
 
 le vin, wine 
 
 A. Continue: 1. Je suis en France, tu. 2. Je demeure aux fitats- 
 Unis. 3. J'irai en Europe T6te prochain. 4. Je passerai quelques 
 jours a Paris. 5. Je ne vais pas au Canada. 6. J'aime le the du 
 Japon. 7. J'habite TAm^rique du Nord. 8. Je pars du Havre. 
 
 B. 1. La France est un pays situe* dans Touest de FEurope. 
 2. Paris est la capitale de la France. 3. Quelques grands fleuves de 
 la France sont la Seine, le Rhone et la Loire. 4. Paris est sur la 
 Seine. 5. Lyon est sur le Rhone. 6. La plus haute montagne de 
 la France c'est le mont Blanc. 7. II n'y a pas de grands lacs en 
 France. 8. On en trouve dans 1'Amerique du Nord. 9. Les fleuves 
 des fitats-Unis et du Canada sont tres importants. 10. Le Saint- 
 Laurent et le Mississipi sont plus grands que le Rhone et la Loire. 
 11. L'Angleterre n'est pas loin de la France. 12. Londres, sur la 
 Tamise, en est la capitale. 13. La Manche s6pare les deux pays. 
 14. Les Anglais vont souvent en France et les Frangais en Angle- 
 terre. 15. On trouve des Anglais a Paris et des Frangais & Londres. 
 16. Les Anglais importent les vins de France (or frangais) ; les Fran- 
 gais importent les lainages d'Angleterre (or anglais). 17. Le Havre 
 est un port de mer sur la Manche. 18. C'est du Havre qu'on part 
 
 1 Adjectives of nationality used as proper nouns require a capital. 
 
109] LESSON XXXVII 87 
 
 pour les fitats-Unis et le Canada. 19. II y a beaucoup de Frangais 
 aux fitats-Unis et an Canada. 20. Les Americains et les Canadiens 
 vont souvent en France. 
 
 C. (Oral Exercise on B.) 
 
 D. Supply the prepositional form: 1. Nos parents demeurent 
 . . . France, . . . Paris, . . . Europe, . . . fitats-Unis, . . . Canada, 
 . . . Angleterre, . . . TAm^rique du Nord. 2. Je suis alle* . . . Europe, 
 . . . Londres, . . . Angleterre, . . . fitats-Unis, ... la Nouvelle- 
 Orleans, . . . Paris. 
 
 E. 1. Where is France? 2. France is in the west of Europe. 
 
 3. The Seine is one of the great rivers of France. 4. The Rhone ie 
 another of its great rivers. 5. Paris is on the former. 6. Lyons 
 is on the latter. 7. Mt. Blanc is in France. 8. It is the high- 
 est mountain in Europe. 9. There are no large lakes in France. 
 10. Some of the largest lakes are in North America. 11. England 
 is near France. 12. Have you ever been in London? 13. It is a 
 seaport and the capital of England. 14. The English Channel 
 separates France from England. 15. Englishmen cross the 
 English Channel to go to France. 16. Frenchmen cross it to go 
 to England. 17. They sometimes start from Havre. 
 
 F. 1. There are many Englishmen in Paris. 2. We (on) find 
 also many Frenchmen in London. 3. Englishmen like French wines. 
 
 4. Frenchmen like English woollens. 5. Have you ever been hi 
 Havre? 6. People (on) start from Havre to go to the United States 
 and Canada. 7. Canada and the United States are very large 
 countries. 8. The rivers of North America are much longer than 
 those of Europe. 9. The St. Lawrence is larger than the Seine. 
 10. Americans like to pass the winter in Europe. 11. They set 
 out in autumn to pass the winter in England or in France. 12. There 
 are many Frenchmen in the United States. 13. There are many 
 Americans and Canadians in Paris. 14. Are you not going to Paris 
 this winter? 15. Have you any of the thick paper I gave you? 
 
88 LESSON XXXVIII [ 110 
 
 LESSON XXXVIII 
 110. The Conditional of donner, finir, vendre 
 
 I should give, etc. 
 
 / should finish, etc. 
 
 / should sell, etc. 
 
 je donnerais 
 tu donnerais 
 il donnerait 
 
 finirais 
 finirais 
 finirait 
 
 vendrais 
 vendrais 
 vendrait 
 
 nous donnerions 
 vous donneriez 
 ils donneraient 
 
 finirions 
 finiriez 
 finiraient 
 
 vendrions 
 vendriez 
 vendraient 
 
 (a) In all verbs the conditional has the same stem as the future (cf . 74) ; 
 the conditional endings are the same as those of the imperfect indicative 
 (cf. 63). 
 
 111. The Conditional of avoir and etre 
 
 I should have, etc. 
 
 j'aurais nous aurions 
 
 tu aurais vous auriez 
 
 il aurait ils auraient 
 
 / should be, etc. 
 
 je serais nous serions 
 
 tu serais vous seriez 
 
 il serait ils seraient 
 
 112. Conditional Anterior. It is formed by adding the past 
 participle to the above as auxiliaries (cf . 44) : 
 
 j 'aurais vendu, etc., / should have sold, etc. 
 
 je serais arrive(e), etc., / should have arrived, etc. 
 
 113. Conditional Sentences. 1. The conditional is used to 
 express what would happen (result) in case something else were 
 to happen (condition): 
 
 S'il avait le temps (condition} il // he had time, he would play. 
 jouerait (result). 
 
 (a) si elides the i only before il or ils. 
 
113] LESSON XXXVIII 89 
 
 2. A result clause in the conditional (English should or would) 
 regularly has the if clause in the imperfect indicative, whatever 
 be the corresponding English form: 
 
 Si j'etudiais bien (condition), mon // / studied (if I were to study , were 
 pere serait content (result). I to study, if I should study, 
 
 should I study) well, my father 
 would be glad. 
 
 3. A result clause in the present, the imperative, or the fu- 
 ture, requires the if clause to be in the present indicative, what- 
 ever be the corresponding English form: 
 
 II joue s'il a le temps. He plays if he has time. 
 
 Jouez si vous avez le temps. Play if you have time. 
 
 S'il est ici demain, je lui parlerai. // he is (be, should be, should he be) 
 
 here to-morrow, I shall (or will) 
 
 speak to him. 
 
 (a) Contrast the tense after si in the last example with 76: Quand il 
 arrivera, je partirai, but s'il arrive, je partirai. 
 
 4. The auxiliary is considered as the verb in compound 
 tenses, and the above rules apply to it : 
 
 Si j'avais fini plus tot, j'aurais If I had finished sooner, I should 
 fait une promenade. have taken a walk. 
 
 5. The tense following si = whether (if), is not restricted as 
 above : 
 
 Je demande s'il partira. / ask whether (if) he will go. 
 
 J'ai demande s'il partirait. / asked whether he would go. 
 
 EXERCISE XXXVIII 
 
 la cascade, cascade, waterfall monter, go up, ascend, get into (car- 
 le col, (mountain) pass riage, etc.) 
 
 demain, to-morrow la saison, season 
 
 descendre, descend, go down le sapin, fir, spruce 
 
 Petat, m., state, condition la scierie, sawmill 
 
 P excursion, f., excursion le sentier, path(way) 
 
 la foret, forest si, if, whether 
 
 le glacier, glacier la station, station 
 
 la gorge, gorge, ravine tant, so much, so many 
 
 jusqu'a, as far as, to le torrent, torrent. 
 la station d'ete, summer resort; je voudrais (bien), I should like to 
 
90 LESSON XXXVIII [ 113 
 
 IMPERFECT INDICATIVE OF aller, pouvoir, vouloir 
 j'allais je pouvais je voulais 
 
 tu allais, etc. tu pouvais, etc. tu voulais, etc. 
 
 FUTURE INDICATIVE OF pouvoir, vouloir 
 je pourrai je voudrai 
 
 tu pourras, etc. tu voudras, etc. 
 
 CONDITIONAL OF aller, fake, pouvoir, vouloir 
 j'irais je ferais je pourrais je voudrais 
 
 tu irais, etc. tu ferais, etc. tu pourrais, etc. tu voudrais, etc. 
 
 A. Continue: 1. Si j'ai le temps, je ferai une promenade, si tu 
 ... tu ... 2. J'aurais fait une promenade si j 'avals eu le temps, 
 tu . . . si tu . . . 3. S'il etait arrive*, je serais parti, ... tu ... 4. Je 
 lui preterais le livre si je 1'avais, tu . . . si tu . . . 5. Je ne vendrais 
 pas mes pommes a ce marchand, tu . . . tes . . . 6. J'irai au lac si 
 je peux, tu . . . si tu . . . 7. Je voudrais y aller si je pouvais, tu . . . 
 si tu . . . 8. Je pourrai y aller si je veux, tu . . . si tu . . . 
 
 B. 1. Nous sommes arrives de bonne heure au village de Beau- 
 lieu. 2. C'est une jolie petite station d'ete. 3. S'il n'y a pas trop 
 de neige aux cols et aux bois, nous ferons bientot des excursions. 
 4. Si les sentiers e*taient assez bons, nous prendrions celui qui passe 
 par la foret de sapins. 5. II nous menerait jusqu'a la cascade. 
 6. Si nous pouvions, nous irions jusqu'au petit lac. 7. Nous vou- 
 drions bien le voir en cette saison. 8. Si nous etions arrives plus 
 tard, les sentiers auraient e'te' en meilleur etat. 9. Nous serions 
 alles jusqu'au glacier. 10. Nous aurions vu le torrent qui en coule. 
 11. Et nous serions descendus dans ia gorge ou il passe. 12. Si 
 nous voulions, nous pourrions monter demain jusqu'a la scierie. 
 
 C. (Oral.) 1. Qu'est-ce que c'est que le village de Beaulieu? 
 2. Que veut dire en anglais "station d'e*t6"? 3. Qu'allez-vous faire 
 si les sentiers sont en bon e"tat? 4. Ou irait-on s'il n'y avait pas 
 tant de neige? 5. Si on prend ce sentier-ci ou arrivera-t-on? 6. Et 
 celui-la ou nous menerait-il? 7. Pourrait-on y aller ce matin? 
 8. Ou voudriez-vous aller? 9. fites-vous monte jusqu'au glacier? 
 10. Qu'est-ce que vous auriez vu si vous y 6tiez monte? 11. De- 
 scendrez-vous dans la gorge si vous pouvez? 12. Pourrait-on monter 
 aujourd'hui jusqu'a la scierie? etc. 
 
113] LESSON XXXVIII 91 
 
 D. Change the infinitives into the proper forms: 1. Si vous (avoir) 
 ma plume donnez-la-moi. 2. Si vous voulez ce livre je vous le 
 (donner). 3. Si je (pouvoir), j'irai patiner. 4. S'ils (etre arriver) 
 je serais de*ja parti. 5. J'irais au marche* si je (pouvoir). 6. Vou- 
 driez-vous y aller si vous (pouvoir)^ 7. Nous jetterons ces pommes 
 si elles ne (etre) pas bonnes. 8. 3' (avoir acheter) ce tableau s'il 
 n'avait pas etc" si cher. 
 
 E. 1. Are you going to the summer resort near the village of 
 Beaulieu? 2. Are you going there if you have tune enough and 
 money enough? 3. If we were at Beaulieu, we should make an 
 excursion in the mountains. 4. If there were not so much snow, 
 we should go as far as the spruce forest. 5. If this path led to 
 the forest, I should take it. 6. Our friends would accompany us 
 there. 7. I should go as far as the pass if I could. 8. Should you 
 like to see the little lake at this season? 9. Yes, I should like to 
 go there if the paths were in good condition. 10. They would be 
 in better condition if there were less snow. 11. If you had gone 
 as far as the glacier, you would have seen something very beauti- 
 ful. 12. If we should be able, we shall go down into the gorge or 
 to the waterfall. 13. Had we gone down there, we should have 
 seen the torrent. 14. You can go up to the sawmill now if you 
 like. 15. Ask (a) your friend if he will be here eariy to-morrow. 
 
 F. 1. If you wish to see the letter, here it is. 2. If he is here 
 to-morrow, show it to him. 3. We shall wait if we can. 4. I 
 should have waited for him had I had time. 5. We should have 
 lent him some money if we had had any. 6. Had I not left my books 
 at school, I should study this evening. 7. If I were to leave my 
 books at school, my father would not be pleased at it (en). 8. Had 
 he been there, I should have spoken to him of it. 9. Should he be 
 there to-morrow, I shall speak to him. 10. I should be very glad 
 if you went with me. 11. We should be glad if he were to arrive 
 before us. 12. If you should go to the market, buy me some flowers, 
 if you please. 13. If there are any flowers at the market, I shall 
 buy you some. 14. When you find any, bring me some. 
 
92 LESSON XXXIX [ 114 
 
 LESSON XXXIX 
 
 114. Impersonal Verbs. 1. Such verbs are conjugated in 
 the third person singular only, with the subject il = it: 
 
 H faut (fallait, faudra). It is (was, will be) necessary. 
 
 (a) II is omitted in certain phrases, e.g. N'importe ( = il n'importe), 
 It doesn't matter. 
 
 2. Many verbs may be used both personally and imperson- 
 ally, some having a special meaning as impersonals: 
 
 Nous arriverons de bonne heure. We shall arrive early. 
 II arrive souvent que, etc. It often happens that, etc. 
 
 3. Conditions of the weather, etc., are denoted by imper- 
 sonal verbs, and by faire used impersonally: 
 
 II neige; il pleuvra. It is snowing; it will rain. 
 
 II fait beau (temps). It is fine (weather). 
 
 II fait chaud; il fait du vent. It is hot; it is windy, 
 
 (a) Distinguish from constructions with a personal subject, e.g. Le temps 
 est beau (froid) , The weather is fine (cold) . 
 
 4. For impersonal il y a (avait, etc.), see 31; for il faut 
 
 (fallait, etc.), see 60, l. 
 
 5. Observe il y a = ago: 
 
 II est arrive il y a une heure. He arrived an hour ago. 
 
 6. Further, an indirect object with il faut denotes (1) the 
 person who lacks, needs ( = avoir besoin de), or (2) the person 
 concerned in the action expressed by an infinitive: 
 
 II faut un chapeau a Jean. John needs a hat. 
 
 II leur faudra cent francs. They will need a hundred francs. 
 
 II lui faudra etudier davantage. He will have to (must) study more, 
 
 EXERCISE XXXIX 
 
 assez, rather, quite geler, freeze 
 
 la boue, mud malade, ill, sick 
 
 le cas, case neiger, snow 
 
 le climat, climate pleuvoir, irreg., rain 
 
 davantage, more, still more sec, dry 
 
 degeler, thaw le soleil, sun 
 
 doux, soft, mild le sport, sport 
 
 fort, adv., heavily, hard superbe, superb, splendid 
 
 froid, cold le temps, weather 
 
114] LESSON XXXIX 93 
 
 quel temps fait-il? what kind of weather is it? il fait beau (temps), it is 
 fine (weather) ; le temps est tres beau, the weather is very fine; il fait 
 du soleil (du vent, de la bpue), it is sunny (windy , muddy); il pleut 
 (a plu, pleuvait, pleuvra, pleuvrait, etc.), it is raining (rained , was 
 raining, will rain, would rain, etc.) 
 
 A. (Station d'hiver) 1. II a neige il y a quelques jours. 2. Puis 
 il a plu un peu. 3. Ensuite il a gele assez fort. 4. Ce matin il 
 gele encore, mais il fait beau (temps). 5. II fait du soleil et presque 
 pas de (hardly any) vent. 6. II fait un temps superbe. 7. II y 
 aura bientot beaucoup d'amusements sur la montagne. 8. S'il 
 neigeait et s'il gelait encore plus fort, il y en aurait davantage. 
 9. On est ici pour les sports d'hiver, et on ne serait pas content s'il 
 faisait trop doux. 10. S'il faisait moins froid, il degelerait. 11. II 
 y aurait de 1'eau et de la boue partout. 12. En ce cas on ne pourrait 
 pas patiner. 13. Ce qu'il faut dans les stations d'hiver c'est un air 
 sec et froid. 14. Un tel climat est bon pour les malades et aussi 
 pour ceux qui aiment les sports. 
 
 B. (Oral.) 1. Neige-t-il? 2. Neigeait-il hier? 3. Quand a-t-il 
 neige"? 4. Qu'est-ce qu'il a fait ensuite? 5. Quel temps fait-il ce 
 matin? 6. Le temps n'est-il pas beau pour la saison? 7. Faisait-il 
 du vent hier? 8. Fera-t-il du soleil aujourd'hui? 9. Pourrions- 
 nous sortir s'il neigeait? 10. Y aurait-il beaucoup d'amusements 
 s'il gelait bien fort? 11. Pourquoi n'etes-vous pas venu a la station 
 d'hiver? 12. Seriez-vous content s'il faisait doux? 13. Qu'est-ce 
 qui arriverait s'il faisait un temps plus doux? 14. Y aurait-il de 
 la boue? 15. Ne pouvons-nous pas patiner quand il degele? 
 16. Quel temps nous faut-il dans les stations d'hiver? etc. 
 
 C. 1. We are here for the winter sports. 2. We arrived two 
 days ago. 3. The weather is splendid. 4. Last week it snowed 
 heavily. 5. Then it rained. 6. This morning it is freezing quite 
 hard, but it is fine. 7. It is windy, but at the same time it is sunny. 
 8. There will be a great many people (monde) on the mountain to- 
 day. 9. We should not be pleased if the weather were mild. 10. If 
 it snowed still more, we should be better (more) pleased. 11. If it 
 should rain, we shall have no ice. 12. Then it will be muddy. 
 13. There will be mud on all the paths. 14. Should we be able to 
 
94 LESSON XL [ 115 
 
 skate if it thawed? 15. To (pour) skate we must have good ice. 
 16. What we need (it) is a cold climate. 
 
 D. 1. What kind of weather will it be this evening? 2. Is it 
 not going to rain? 3. It will not rain; it is too windy. 4. It 
 would rain if it were not so (use tant) windy. 5. It was very cold 
 yesterday. 6. It will be milder to-day. 7. In that case, we shall 
 take a walk. 8. We can't go out when it is raining. 9. The weather 
 is always bad at this season. 10. If it were fine to-day, we should 
 be glad. 11. It has been raining, but it is dry at present. 12. If it 
 freezes, we are going to skate. 13. It was mild yesterday, but now 
 we have (a) cold weather. 14. It was muddy because it had rained. 
 15. We shall have to (use faudra) wait for him. 16. He hasn't 
 come yet. 
 
 LESSON XL 
 
 115. Reflexive Verbs. A reflexive verb is one whose sub- 
 ject is represented as acting on itself. Some verbs are always 
 reflexive, but any transitive verb may be so used. 
 
 116. Present Indicative and Imperative of se cacher 
 
 I hide myself, etc. 
 
 je me cache nous nous cachons 
 
 tu te caches vous vous cachez 
 
 il (elle) se cache ils (elles) se cachent 
 
 (a) These same pronoun forms (me, te, etc.) are used also as indirect 
 objects, e.g. Je me rappelle cela, I remember that (lit. recall that to myself). 
 
 (6) Observe the imperative: cache-toi, cachons-nous, cachez-vous, and 
 negatively: ne te cache pas, ne nous cachons pas, ne vous cachez pas. 
 
 117. Use of Reflexives. 1. A French reflexive often renders 
 an English non-reflexive (generally intransitive) : 
 
 II s'arrete; il s' eerie. He stops; he exclaims. 
 
 2. Or a reflexive + a preposition has the value of an English 
 transitive verb: 
 
 Je m'approchais de la ville. I was approaching the town. 
 Vous souvenez-vous de cela? Do you remember that? 
 
117] LESSON XL 95 
 
 3. The reflexive often translates the English passive, es- 
 pecially when the agent is not specified: 
 
 Ce livre se public & Paris. This book is published in Paris. 
 
 Cela se dit partout. That is said everywhere. 
 
 4. When the verb is plural, the meaning may be either re- 
 flexive or reciprocal, ambiguity being avoided, where necessary, 
 by some modifying expression: 
 
 Nous nous flattens. We flatter ourselves (or each other). 
 
 Us se font mal Pun & Pautre. They hurt one another. 
 
 5. Observe the use of the definite article along with an indi- 
 rect reflexive object to denote possession, especially of parts of 
 the body, clothing, etc. : 
 
 Je me lave les mains. I am washing my hands. 
 
 EXERCISE XL 
 
 Pabri, m., shelter Pendroit, m., place 
 
 s'amuser, enjoy oneself excellent, excellent 
 
 s'approcher (de), approach, gener, restrain, confine, etc. 
 
 come near, go near nager, swim 
 
 la bale, bay le pied, foot 
 
 se baigner, bathe (intr.) la plage, beach 
 
 balneaire, bathing (as adj.) plonger, plunge, dive 
 
 le bateau, boat se promener, take a walk, etc. 
 
 le bord, border, shore se rappeler, remember 
 
 le cafe-restaurant, restaurant la route, way, road 
 
 le casino, casino le trottoir, sidewalk, pavement 
 
 le concert, concert se trouver, find oneself, be 
 
 deranger, disturb - la vapeur, steam 
 s'embarquer, go on board 
 
 bains de mer, sea-bathing; station balneaire, seaside resort; & Pabri de, 
 sheltered from; se promener or fake une promenade & pied (& cheval, 
 en voiture, en bateau, etc.), to take or go for a walk (ride, drive, sail, 
 row, etc.)', bateau a vapeur, steamer, steamboat; se donner la main, 
 shake hands; comment vous appelez-vous? what is your name? com- 
 ment vous portez-vous? how are you? je me porte bien, merci, I am 
 well, thank you; ne vous derangez pas, don't disturb yourself; ne vous 
 genez pas, make yourself at home 
 
96 LESSON XL [ 117 
 
 A. (La station balneaire) 1. C'est une ville qui se trouve au 
 bord de la mer. 2. On s'y amuse beaucoup. 3. On y trouve des 
 bains de mer excellents. 4. La plage ou on se baigne est trs belle. 
 
 5. Tout (quite) pres se trouve une jolie petite baie a 1'abri des vents. 
 
 6. La on peut se promener en bateau. 7. II y a aussi un endroit 
 ou on peut nager et plonger. 8. Au port nous nous embarquons 
 sur le bateau a vapeur pour faire des excursions. 9. Pres de la 
 plage il y a une rdute avec un trottoir ou on se promene a pied, 
 a cheval ou en voiture. 10. Le casino se trouve au bout du trottoir. 
 11. Des concerts s'y donnent tous les jours. 12. Les salons de 
 lecture et le cafe-restaurant s'y trouvent aussi. 
 
 B. Continue: 1. Je me trouve tres bien ici, tu. 2. Je m'amusais 
 beaucoup. 3. Est-ce que je me baignerai aujourd'hui? te baigneras- 
 tu? 4. Je ne m'embarquerai pas sur le bateau. 5. Je ne vais pas 
 m'y embarquer. 6. Je me porte bien. 7. Je ne me rappelle pas 
 cela. 8. Give the imperative affirmative and negative of: se promener, 
 s'embarquer, se rappeler. 
 
 C. (Oral.) 1. Qu'est-ce que c'est qu'une station balneaire? 
 2. Ou se trouve la station dont vous parlez? 3. Esperez-vous vous 
 y amuser beaucoup? 4. Ou allez-vous vous baigner? 5. Aimez- 
 vous a vous promener en bateau? 6. Ou peut-on s'embarquer? 
 
 7. Voulez-vous vous embarquer a present? 8. Ou se promene-t-on 
 a pied? 9. N'allez-vous pas vous promener a cheval ce matin? 
 10. Ne vous portez-vous pas bien? 11. Ou se donnent les con- 
 certs? etc. 
 
 D. 1. We are going to an excellent seaside resort. 2. It is 1 on the 
 seashore near a village. 3. It is 1 on a pretty little bay. 4. I shall 
 enjoy myself very much there. 5. Don't you admire the beautiful 
 beach? 6. We are going to bathe there this morning. 7. Do you 
 like to go boating sometimes? 8. Let us go boating. 9. We can 
 swim and dive here if we wish. 10. Let us go on board the steamer 
 now. 11. I shall take a walk first. 12. I am not very well. 13. If 
 you wish to go for a ride, I will accompany you. 14. A concert 
 will be given in the casino this evening. 15. The reading room 
 was 1 formerly in the casino at the end of the road. 16. Shall you 
 
 1 Use se trouver. 
 
118] LESSON XLI 97 
 
 be in the reading room when we arrive there? 17. Will you take 
 my chair? 18. Don't disturb yourself, I'll take this one. 
 
 E. 1. Let us not hide (ourselves). 2. We shall not hide. 3. We 
 salute each other when we meet (each other). 4. We always shook 
 hands when we met (each other). 5. What is his name? 6. What 
 is your name? 7. How are you to-day? 8. What is the name of 
 that village to which the sidewalk leads? 9. It is called Belleroche. 
 10. Do you remember that story? 11. People are telling it at all 
 the seaside resorts. 12. Don't go near the water. 13. Don't cut 
 yourself (2d sing.). 14. I shall buy myself a fine house. 15. These 
 two sisters love one another very much. 16. This is my chair; 
 take it; make yourself at home. 
 
 LESSON XLI 
 
 118. The Passive Voice. 1. The passive voice of a transi- 
 tive verb is formed by adding its past participle to the aux- 
 iliary verb etre, thus: 
 
 PRESENT INDICATIVE PAST INDEFINITE INDICATIVE 
 
 / am loved, etc. . I have been lovedj etc. 
 
 je suis aime(e) j'ai e"te* aime*(e) 
 
 tu es aime(e) tu as ete aime(e) 
 
 il (elle) est aime(e) il (elle) a ete aime(e) 
 
 nous sommes aim(e)s nous avons e*te aime*(e)s 
 
 vous etes aime(e)s vous avez e*te aime(e)s 
 
 ils (elles) sont aime(e)s ils (elles) ont ete aime(e)s 
 
 (a) The past participle te is always invariable, but the participle of 
 the passive verb agrees with the subject in gender and number, like an 
 adjective (cf . 14) ; for other tenses of the passive, see Appendix, C, 4. 
 
 2. After a passive, by = par, usually when a definite inten- 
 tion on the part of the agent is implied; otherwise by de: 
 
 Elle a e*te" tuee par les voleurs. She was killed by the robbers. 
 La dame etait suivie de son fils. The lady was followed by her son. 
 Ils seront aimes de tous. They will be loved by everybody. 
 
 3. The English passive is frequently translated into French 
 by using on (cf . 38, 3) with an active verb, or by a reflexive con- 
 
98 LESSON XLI [ 118 
 
 struction (cf. 117, 3), unless the agent is specified (cf. 2, above), 
 or unless the passive denotes merely a resultant condition: 
 
 On m'a trompe". I have been deceived. 
 
 On a re*pondu & ma question. My question has been answered. 
 
 Ce livre se publie & Paris. This book is published in Paris. 
 
 But: Les salles sont fermees. The halls are closed. 
 
 EXERCISE XLI 
 
 celebre, celebrated, famous Marc-Aurele, Marcus Aurelius 
 
 le chateau, castle les meubles, m., furniture 
 
 la decoration, decoration Napoleon, Napoleon 
 
 s'elever, rise, stand ouvert, p. part, of ouvrir, open 
 
 equestre, equestrian la reine, queen 
 
 executer, execute restaurer, restore 
 
 fermer, close, shut la scene, scene 
 
 generalement, generally la statue, statue 
 
 Pinterieur, m., interior la tapisserie, tapestry 
 
 italien, Italian visiter, visit 
 
 de nos jours, in our day(s), nowadays 
 
 A. 1. Nous avons visite* aujourd'hui un chateau celebre. 2. II 
 a e*te* bati par un des rois de France et restaure* par Napoleon. 3. La 
 decoration a e*te* exe*cutee par des peintres italiens et frangais. 4. La 
 plus grande partie du chateau est ouverte au public. 5. Mais il y 
 a des salles qui sont toujours fermees. 6. Une des cours s'appelle 
 la cour du Cheval-Blanc. 7. Une statue Equestre de Marc-Aurele 
 s'y elevait autrefois. 8. A Tinterieur se voient beaucoup de tableaux 
 et de tapisseries. 9. Les scenes de ces tableaux sont quelquefois 
 emprunte*es aux vies des rois et des reines. 10. On y voit aussi de 
 beaux meubles. 11. Us sont generalement plus beaux que ceux qui 
 se font de nos jours. 
 
 B. (Oral.) 1. Qu'avez-vous fait ce matin? 2. Le public peut-il 
 voir ce chateau? 3. Par qui ce chateau a-t-il e*t6 bati? 4. Par qui 
 a-t-il e*te restaure*? 5. La grande salle est-elle ferm^e aujourd'hui? 
 6. Comment s'appelle cette cour-la? 7. Pourquoi s'appelle-t-elle 
 comme cela? 8. Qu'est-ce qu'on voit a rinterieur de cette salle? 
 9. Fait-on de beaux meubles de nos jours? 10. Sont-ils aussi beaux 
 que ceux qui se faisaient autrefois? etc. 
 
119] LESSON XLII 99 
 
 C. 1. The castles that we have visited are very famous. 2. We 
 visited one yesterday. 3. By whom was it built? 4. By whom was 
 it restored? 5. It was built by an ancient French king and restored 
 by Napoleon. 6. Some of the halls are closed to the public. 7. They 
 will be open next week. 8. The decoration of this castle is much 
 admired. 9. By whom was it executed? 10. What is the name of 
 this courtyard? 11. It is called the court of the White Horse. 
 
 12. Many tapestries are [to be] seen in the halls of the castle. 
 
 13. The scenes of the most part of the tapestries have been borrowed 
 from the lives of the kings. 14. The furniture which is made in 
 our days is not always beautiful. 
 
 D. 1. This castle was formerly inhabited by the kings of France. 
 2. It was built when there were kings and queens in France. 3. There- 
 are none now (plus). 4. The decoration was done by Italian 
 painters. 5. Italian painters have always been famous. 6. Their 
 pictures are to be seen (use on) in all the cities of Europe. 7. Such 
 pictures are not [to be] found nowadays. 8. The most important 
 halls of the castle are closed. 9. These halls are generally open 
 to the public. 10. They are closed now because the walls are 
 being restored. 11. They can be seen next week. 12. The beau- 
 tiful statue no longer stands in the court. 13. Did you find the- 
 nails you lost? 14. Do you remember where you left the keys? 
 
 LESSON XLII 
 
 119. Reflexive Compound Tenses. They are always formed 
 with the auxiliary etre + the past participle, thus: 
 
 PAST INDEFINITE 
 I have hidden myself, etc. 
 
 je me suis cache* (e) nous nous sommes cache" (e)s 
 
 tu t'es cache" (e) vous vous etes cache* (e)s 
 
 il (elle) s'est cache (e) ils (elles) se sont cache (e)s 
 
 (a) For other tenses and for s'en aller, see Appendix, C, 5. 
 
100 LESSON XLII [ 120 
 
 120. Agreement of Past Participle. 1. In compound tenses 
 the past participle agrees only with a preceding direct object, 
 whether such object be the reflexive object or not: 
 
 Elle s'est excusee. She excused herself. 
 
 Elle s'est achete des gants. She bought herself some gloves. 
 
 Les gants qu'il s'est achetes. The gloves that he bought himself. 
 
 Elles se le sont rappele. ) 
 
 en, , They remembered it. 
 
 Elles s'en sont souvenues. J 
 
 (a) The principle of agreement is the same as that of the past participle 
 in tenses formed with avoir (cf . 49) . 
 
 2. If me, te, nous, vous refer to a feminine noun, the agree- 
 ment will be feminine: 
 
 Vous vous etes trompee, madame. You were mistaken, madam. 
 
 EXERCISE XLII 
 
 s'en aller, go away s'habiller, dress (oneself) 
 
 s'arreter, stop se laver, wash oneself 
 
 le billet, ticket, note se lever, rise, get up ^. 
 
 le branle, movement mettre, irreg., put, place 
 
 le cafe, coffee, (first) breakfast mis, p. part, of mettre 
 
 se coucher, lie down, go to bed, le paquebot, packet, steamer 
 
 retire (to rest) se precipiter, rush 
 
 debarquer, disembark, go on prendre, irreg. take, get, buy 
 
 shore, land pris, p. part, of prendre 
 
 se depecher, make haste, hasten reveiller, waken (tr.) 
 
 s'ecrier, exclaim se reveiller, waken (intr.) 
 
 la figure, figure, face se souvenir de, irreg., remember 
 
 la gare, station (railway), depot le train, train 
 
 se mettre en branle, begin to move, get started; de grand matin, very early 
 (in the morning) 
 
 PRESENT INDICATIVE OF prendre, take; venir, come 
 je prends nous prenons je viens nous venons 
 
 tu prends vous prenez tu viens vous venez 
 
 il prend ils prennent il vient ils viennent 
 
 A. Continue: 1. Je me suis couche*(e) de bonne heure, tu. 2. Je 
 ne me suis leve*(e) que trs tard. 3. Si je m'e*tais habill^(e), si tu, 
 etc. 4. Je ne me serais pas arrete*(e) pour cela. 5. Est-ce que je 
 ne me suis pas vite habille*(e)? 6. Je voulais m'en aller de grand 
 
120] LESSON XLIJL 101 
 
 matin. 7. Je m'en suis allege) avanc iui. 8. Je m'en suis 
 souvenu(e). 
 
 B. Turn into the past indefinite: 1. Elles s'y amusent beaucoup. 
 2. Us se couchent toujours de bonne heure. 3. Ne vous couchez- 
 vous pas de bonne heure? 4. Les gants qu'elle s'achete. 5. Elle 
 ne s'achete pas de gants. 6. Vous en allez-vous? 7. Mon frere et 
 ma soeur s'arretent. 8. Nous nous lavons les mains. 9. N'y 
 vont-elles pas? 10. Us se donnent la main. 
 
 C. 1. Mon frere et moi nous nous sommes couches de bonne 
 heure hier (au) soir. 2. Nous voulions nous en aller de bonne heure 
 ce matin. 3. Si nous ne nous etions pas couches de bonne heure, 
 nous nous serions reveilles trop tard pour partir aujourd'hui. 4. Je 
 me suis reveille de grand matin. 5. J'ai reveille mon frere. 
 6. Nous nous sommes leves tout de suite. 7. Nous nous sommes 
 lave la figure et les mains. 8. Nous nous sommes vite habilles. 
 9. " Mon frere s'est 6crie* : " Dpechons-nous." 10. Nous nous sommes 
 pr^cipites dans la salle a manger. 11. Nous prenons notre cafe et 
 nous partons. 12. A la gare nous prenons nos billets et nous voila. 
 dans le train. 13. Le train s'est mis en branle. 14. II ne s'arrete 
 qu'au port de mer. 15. Nous nous sommes embarques sur le 
 paquebot. 16. Dans quelques jours nous debarquerons en Amerique. 
 
 D. (Oral.) 1. Votre frere s'est-il deja couche*? 2. Vous etes-vous 
 couches tard? 3. Pourquoi pas (not}! 4. Vos freres se sont-ils 
 ^eveilles tard? 5. Qui vous a reveilles? 6. Vous etes-vous leve*s 
 tout de suite? 7. fites-vous deja habille? 8. Votre frere s'est-il 
 deja lave les mains? 9. Pourquoi vous etes-vous depeches? 
 10. Pourquoi etes-vous alles dans la salle a manger? 11. Ou avez- 
 vous pris vos billets? . 12. Ou le train s'est-il arrete? 13. Ou vous 
 tes-vous embarques? 14. Ou avez-vous d^barque? etc. 
 
 E. 1. Have your brothers gone to bed yet (deja)! 2. Yes, they 
 wanted to rise early to-morrow. 3. Waken your brothers. 4. They 
 woke [up] an hour ago. 5. They have risen. 6. They have dressed 
 (themselves). 7. They are coming now. 8. Let us make haste. 
 9. We hastened. 10. They rushed into the dining room. 11. Their 
 coffee was ready. 12. They took it at once. 13. They get their 
 tickets at the station. 14. We are getting our tickets. 15. They 
 
102 
 
 LESSON XLIII 
 
 [121 
 
 went on board (mont&f) at once. 16. The train has begun to move. 
 17. After some days they landed in America. 
 
 F. 1. The gloves that I have bought myself are too small. 2. All 
 our friends are going away. 3. They have gone away. 4. We 
 remember our friends. 5. We don't forget them. 6. My brothers 
 are washing their hands. 7. They have washed their hands. 8. My 
 sisters have dressed (themselves). 9. They (/.) rushed into the 
 carriage. 10. They (/.) went on board the steamer. 11. The train 
 is coming. 12. Has the train stopped? 13. It has not stopped yet. 
 14. We went on board the steamer. 15. Let us go on shore now. 
 
 121. 
 
 LESSON XLIII 
 Cardinal Numerals 
 
 1 un, une 
 
 [ce, yn 
 
 2 deux 
 
 [d0] 
 
 3 trois 
 
 [trwa] 
 
 4 quatre 
 
 [katr] 
 
 5 cinq 
 
 [seik] 
 
 6 six 
 
 [sis] 
 
 7 sept 
 
 [set] 
 
 8 huit 
 
 fait] 
 
 9 neuf 
 
 [ncef] 
 
 10 dix 
 
 [dis] 
 
 11 onze 
 
 [oiz] 
 
 12 douze 
 
 [duiz] 
 
 13 treize 
 
 [treiz] 
 
 21 vingt et un 
 
 22 vingt-deux 
 
 30 trente 
 
 31 trente et un 
 40 quarante 
 50 cinquante 
 60 soixante 
 
 70 soixante-dix 
 
 71 soixante et onze 
 
 80 quatre-vingts 
 
 81 quatre-vingt-un 
 
 90 quatre- vingt-dix 
 
 91 quatre-vingt-onze 
 
 100 cent 
 
 101 cent un 
 
 200 deux cents 
 
 201 deux cent un 
 
 1000 mille 
 
 1001 mille un 
 2000 deux mille 
 
 un million; 2,000,000 
 
 14 quatorze [katorz] 
 
 15 quinze [keiz] 
 
 16 seize [seiz] 
 
 17 dix-sept [dis set] 
 
 18 dix-huit [diz in't] 
 
 19 dix-neuf [diz ncef] 
 
 20 vingt [ve] 
 
 NOUNS OF NUMBER: 1,000,000 
 1,000,000,000 = un milliard. 
 
 Et serves as a connective in 21, 31, 41, 51, 61, 71; otherwise, com- 
 pounds under 100 take hyphens, whether standing alone or forming 
 part of a larger number. 
 
 [vet e ce] 
 [vend d0] 
 [trait] 
 [trait e ce] 
 [karait] 
 [sekait] 
 [swasait] 
 [swasait dis] 
 [swasait e 5:z] 
 [katra ve] 
 [katro ve ce] 
 [katra ve dis] 
 [katra ve oiz] 
 [sa] 
 [sa ce] 
 [d0 sa] 
 [d0 sa ce] 
 [mil] 
 [mil ce] 
 [d0 mil] 
 deux millions; 
 
124] LESSON XLIII 103 
 
 From 61 to 99 counting is by twenties. 
 
 Quatre-vingt and multiples of cent (200, etc.) require a plural -s, 
 except (1) when followed by a numeral (not a noun of number), e.g. 
 deux cent quatre-vingt-six francs; (2) in dates, e.g. Fan quatre cent; 
 (3) as ordinals, e.g. page trois cent. 
 
 Cent = a (or one) hundred; mille = a (or one) thousand. 
 
 Million and milliard take -s, if plural, and require de before a noun: 
 deux millions de francs. 
 
 NOTES ON PRONUNCIATION: 1. The final consonant of 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 
 17, 18, 19, is silent before initial consonant or h aspirate of a word multi- 
 plied by them, not elsewhere: 'Cinq livres' [se liivr] but 'le cinq mai' [te 
 se:k me]. 
 
 2. No elision or liaison occurs before huit, onze : Le huit [la m't] ; les huit 
 livres [le qi liivr]; le onze [la o:z]; les onze francs [le o:z fra]. 
 
 3. The t is sounded in vingt in 21, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, becomes d 
 in 22, is silent from 81 to 99, is silent in cent un, deux cent un, etc. 
 
 122. Multiplicative s. Once = une fois (lit. time), twice = 
 deux fois, three times = trois fois, etc. : 
 
 Deux fois deux font quatre. Twice two are four. 
 
 Dix fois dix font cent. Ten times ten make a hundred. 
 
 123. Money, Weights, Measures. In France these are all 
 according to the decimal system; observe the following: 
 
 le franc = about 20 cents, or 10 pence (English money), 
 le centime = rfrtf franc (100 centimes = 1 fr.). 
 le gramme = about -$ ounce avoirdupois (454 gr. = 1 lb.). 
 le kilogramme (1000 gr.) = about 2-g Ibs. (J kg. = slightly over 1 lb.). 
 le metre = 3ft. 3f in. (about 40 inches), 
 le centimetre = T^TT metre (5 cm. = about 2 inches), 
 le kilometre (1000 m.) = about f mile. 
 
 le litre = about If pints (4J litres = about 1 imperial gallon), 
 (a) Popularly un sou is used for 5 centimes; un kilo for un kilogramme; 
 une livre for i kilogramme (un demi-kilo) . 
 
 124. Article Distributively. 1. The English a, an, used with 
 a weight, measure or number, in referring to price, is rendered 
 by the French definite article; elsewhere generally by par: 
 
 Deux francs la livre (le metre). Two francs a pound (a metre). ' 
 
 Dix sous la douzaine (la piece). Ten cents a dozen (apiece). 
 
 Trois francs par jour (legon). Three francs a day (a lesson). 
 
 Cent kilometres par or a Pheure. A hundred kilometres an hour. 
 
104 LESSON XLIII [ 124 
 
 2. The definite article is also used distributively with ex- 
 pressions of time: 
 
 II vient le dimanche. He comes on Sunday (s) 
 
 Le vapeur part tous les lundis. The steamer starts every Monday. 
 
 Tous les mois. Every month or once a month. 
 
 EXERCISE XLIII 
 
 les asperges, f., asparagus Petoffe, f., stuff, material, cloth 
 
 Pautomobile, f ., automobile la femme de chambre, housemaid 
 
 la botte, bunch se figurer, imagine, fancy 
 
 le chou, cabbage les gages, m., wages 
 
 la comparaison, comparison gagner, gain, earn 
 
 compter, count le mois, month 
 
 la cuisiniere, cook la pomme de terre, potato 
 
 depenser, spend la robe, dress 
 
 la douzakie, dozen le veau, calf, veal 
 economiser, save 
 
 je les ai payes cher, / paid dear for them; figurez-vous! just imagine 
 (fancy) I (a) bon marche, cheap or cheaply; (a) meilleur marche, 
 cheaper 
 
 A. 1. La vie est trs chere a present. 2. On vivait a meilleur 
 marche* il y a trente ans. 3. Maintenant on gagne plus et on de- 
 pense plus. 4. Regardez ce morceau de veau. 5. Je Tai paye" 
 quatre francs vingt (centimes) (4 fr. 20) le kilo (-gramme). 6. Ces 
 ceufs m'ont coute un franc soixante-quinze (centimes) la douzaine. 
 7. En comparaison les legumes se vendent bon marche. 8. J'ai 
 paye les pommes de terre dix centimes (or deux sous) le demi-kilo 
 (or la livre). 9. Les asperges coutent maintenant trente centimes 
 (or six sous) la botte. 10. Je paie les choux vingt-cinq centimes (or 
 cinq sous) la pi&ce. 11. Et les gages des bonnes! 12. Je donne 
 a ma cuisiniere quatre-vingts francs et a ma femme de chambre 
 soixante-dix francs par mois. 13. Elles pourraient (could) bien 
 Economiser de quatre a cinq cents francs par an. 14. Mais elles 
 ne veulent plus porter de robes bon marche*. 15. Elles paient 
 cher tout ce qu'elles achetent. 16. Figurez-vous! Ma cuisiniere 
 porte une robe dont l^toffe a coute dix francs le mtre. 17. Tout 
 va vite de nos jours. 18. C'est comme les automobiles qui vont 
 (a) cinquante kilometres a Fheure. 
 
124] LESSON XLIII 105 
 
 B. (Oral) 1. Count in French from 1 to 10; from 10 to 20; from 
 20 to 35; from 60 to 70; /rora 70 to 80. 2. #eod a&md m French: 
 40, 41, 42, 45, 50, 51, 53, 55, 60, 61, 64, 65, 70, 71, 75, 80, 81, 85, 
 86, 90, 91, 92, 95, 97, 98, 99, 100, 101, 102, 112, 115, 119, 189, 200, 
 201, 225, 1000, 2002, 80,025, 2,000,990. 3. Recite the multiplication 
 table (or parts of it), thus: Deux fois un font deux; deux fois deux 
 font quatre, etc. 4. Combien font 2 fois 7; 8 fois 6? etc. 
 
 C. (Oral.) 1. Le veau est-il bon marche? 2. Combien avez-vous 
 paye* ce morceau-la? 3. Les oeufs sont-ils chers? 4. Combien 
 coutent-ils a present? 5. Combien paie-t-on le kilo de pommes de 
 terre? 6. Peut-on en avoir a meilleur marche*? 7. M. Liard a-t-il 
 de belles asperges? 8. Combien coutent-elles chez lui? 9. Combien 
 est-ce qu'il vend ses choux? 10. Comptez jusqu'a vingt. Etc. 
 
 'D. 1. Everything cost less (dear) thirty years ago. 2. People 
 used to live cheaply formerly. 3. We used to buy veal [at] one 
 franc seventy-five centimes a kilo. 4. Now it costs from four francs 
 twenty centimes to four francs fifty. 5. Ten years ago eggs used 
 to cost 85 centimes a dozen. 6. Now we pay (from) 1 franc 15 to 
 1 franc 75 for them. 7. Vegetables are (sold, reflex.) cheaper. 8. A 
 half kilo of potatoes costs two or three sous. 9. One can buy cab- 
 oage(s) [at] 25 or 30 centimes apiece. 10. Our cook earns 85 francs 
 a month. 11. That makes 1020 francs a year. 12. How much 
 did the material for (de) your dress cost you? 13. I paid 5 francs 
 25 a metre for it. 14. You paid too dear for it. 15. Mr. DupomVs 
 automobile goes 60 kilometres an hour. 
 
 E. Give in francs and centimes the equivalents of: 1. One cent; 
 5, 7, 10, 12, 15, 17, 20, 25, 35, 50, 75, 85, 90 cents. 2. One doUar, 
 $1.25, $1.35, $1.70, $1.85, $2 V 00, $75.00, $1500.00, $400,000.00. 
 3. Give in dollars and cents in English the equivalents of: 1 fr., fr. 
 85, fr. 75, 1 fr. 25, 1 fr. 55, 65 fr., 55 fr. 15, 1000 fr., 2,000,000 fr. 
 
 F. 1. Living was not so dear formerly. 2. People spend twice 
 as much (plus) now. 3. Here is a piece of veal which cost me 
 4 francs 80 a kilo. 4. There are 3 kilos of it, and I paid 14 francs 
 40 centimes. 5. Asparagus costs 35 centimes a bunch. 6. In 
 France you buy potatoes by (a) the pound. 7. You pay 2 or 3 
 cents a pound for them when they are cheap. 8. They were dear 
 
106 LESSON XLIV [ 125 
 
 last winter, but they are cheaper now. 9. Wages too are much 
 higher (plus eleves). 10. A good housemaid earns from 60 to 75 
 francs a month. 11. She can save 300 or 400 francs a year. 
 12. People earn a great deal and spend a great deal. 13. Our cook 
 bought cloth for a dress the other day. 14. Just imagine! She paid 
 9 francs 80 a yard (metre) for it. 15. The cloth was very heavy 
 (= thick). 
 
 LESSON XLIV 
 
 125. Ordinal Numerals 
 
 1st premier [pcsmje] 7th septieme [set j em] 
 
 9 , f second [sago] 8th huitieme fait j em] 
 
 \ deuxieme [d0zjem] 9th neuvieme [noevjem] 
 
 3d troisieme [trwazjem] 10th dixieme [dizjera] 
 
 4th quatrieme [katriem] llth onzieme [ozjem] 
 
 5th cinquieme [sekjem] 21st vingt et unieme [vet e ynjem] 
 
 6th sixieme [sizjem] 22d vingt-deuxieme [vend d0zjem] 
 
 (a) Except premier and second, they are formed by adding -ieme to the 
 
 last consonant of the corresponding cardinal, cinq adding u, and f of neuf 
 
 becoming v before -ieme. 
 
 (6) The use of deuxieme for second generally implies a series of more than 
 
 two, but it is always used in compounds. 
 
 126. Fractions 
 
 1 | un demi i un cinquieme 
 
 2 1 une moitie* i*r un onzieme 
 A f un tiers T\ trois seizimes 
 
 3 1 un troisieme Totf sept ceiitiemes 
 
 ! J un quart iW dix cent-uniemes 
 
 * 1 un quatrieme liis onze milliemes, etc. 
 
 Une demi-heure. Half an hour. 
 
 Une heure et demie. An hour and a half. 
 
 La moitie (les trois quarts) du temps. Half (three quarters of) the' time. 
 
 (a) For denominators above 4 ordinals only are used, but note the special 
 forms in J, ^, ; fractional expressions with partie (part) are also com- 
 mon: la troisieme partie = \. 
 
 (fe) Demi before a noun is invariable and joined to it by a hyphen, but 
 elsewhere agrees. 
 
 (c) Note the use of the article in the various examples. 
 
131] LESSON XLIV 107 
 
 127. Numeral Adverbs. They are formed from the ordi- 
 nals by -ment, according to rule (cf . 216) : 
 
 premierement, first, firstly troisiemement, thirdly 
 
 secondement ) etc. etc. 
 
 , [ secondly 
 deuxiemement J 
 
 128. Collectives. Certain nouns are used with collective 
 force : 
 
 Une paire de gants. . A pair of gloves. 
 
 Tine trentaine d'eleves. Some thirty (about 30) pupils, 
 
 (a) Those ending in -aine, added to the last consonant of a cardinal, 
 denote usually an approximate number: Une huitaine, dizaine (dix becomes 
 diz), douzaine, quinzaine, vingtaine, centaine, etc. = about 8, 10, 12, 15, 20 
 (a score), 100, etc.; so also un millier = about 1000. 
 
 129. Year Dates. The year in dates is expressed by a cardi- 
 nal, as in English, but mil replaces mille : 
 
 L'an quatre cent. The year four hundred. 
 
 En (or Fan) mil neuf cent onze. 1 T ,., N -,^-.1 
 
 ' In (the year) 1911. 
 
 En dix-neuf cent onze. J 
 
 (a) For the year 1000, A.D., and for dates other than those of the Chris- 
 tian era, mille is commonly used. 
 
 130. Numerical Titles. 1. Titles of rulers are denoted by 
 cardinal numerals, except premier = first: 
 
 Napoleon premier (trois). Napoleon the First (Third), 
 
 (a) The in such titles is untranslated. 
 
 2. Other numerical titles are expressed as in English: 
 
 La sixieme scene du second acte. The sixth scene of the second act. 
 
 Acte deux(-ieme), scene six(-ieme). Act two (2d), scene six (Qth). 
 
 Tome troisieme (trois). Volume third (three). 
 
 Au vingtieme (XX e ) sie v cle. In the 20th century. 
 
 131. Dimensions. The following are some typical expres- 
 sions: 
 
 Cette salle est longue de 8 m. This room is 8 metres long. 
 
 Elle a 8 m. de longueur (or de long) It is 8 metres long by 5 metres wide. 
 
 sur 5 m. de largeur (or de large). 
 
 Elle est plus longue de 2 m. It is longer by 2 metres, 
 
 (a) By = sur or de according to meaning; see examples. 
 
108 LESSON XLIV [ 131 
 
 EXERCISE XLIV 
 
 appris, p. part., learned Guillaume, William 
 
 la Bible, Bible Luc, Luke 
 
 calculer, calculate le nombre, number 
 
 carre, square le passage, passage 
 
 le chapitre, chapter la planche, board, plank 
 
 le cceur, heart le pouce, inch 
 
 la composition, composition la prise, taking, capture 
 
 la conquete, conquest le probleme, problem 
 
 contenu, p. part., contained la retraite, retreat 
 
 la date, date le saint, saint 
 
 le devoir, dwZ?/, exercise, lesson selon, according to 
 
 le dollar, dollar le siecle, century 
 
 ecrire, write suivant, following 
 
 egaler, equal le sujet, subject 
 
 entourer, surround la surface, surface 
 
 PEvangile, m., gospel le verset, verse (e.g. Bible) 
 apprendre par coeur, learn by heart; a peu pres, nearly, about 
 
 A. 1. Mon frere et moi nous faisons nos devoirs pour la semaine 
 prochaine. 2. Nous sommes dans la bibliotheque de mon pere, 
 entoures de milliers de livres. 3. Premierement nous apprendrons 
 par coeur un passage de la Bible. 4. Ce passage se trouve dans le 
 neuvieme chapitre de I'Evangile selon saint Luc du onzieme au dix- 
 septieme verset (or saint Luc, ix, 11-17; read: chapitre neuf, versets 
 onze a dix-sept). 5. Deuxiemement, nous avons une composition 
 a Ecrire sur un des sujets suivants: "La retraite des Dix-Mille," 
 "La conquete de FAngleterre en 1066 (read: mil soixante-six) par 
 Guillaume I," "La prise de la Bastille en 1789" (read: dix- 
 sept cent quatre-vingt-neuf). 6. Troisiemement, nous avons deux 
 petits problemes: (1) Calculer (cf. 191) le nombre de metres car- 
 res contenus dans une surface longue de 6 m. 40 (read: six metres 
 quarante centimetres) et large de 4 m. 75; (2) Un centieme de 
 metre s'appelle un centimetre et = (read: e"gale), a peu pres, f (read: 
 deux cinquiemes) de pouce anglais. Combien de centimetres en 
 20 pouces? 
 
 B. (Oral.) 1. Qu'avez-vous fait ce matin? 2. Combien de livres 
 y a-t-il dans la bibliotheque de votre pere? 3. Qu'avez-vous appris 
 par cceur? 4. Ou se trouve ce passage? 5. Et ensuite qu'avez- 
 
132] LESSON XLV 109 
 
 vous fait? 6. Quel est le premier sujet qu'on vous a donne"? 7. Et 
 le deuxieme? 8. Et le troisieme? 9. Combien de problemes avez- 
 vous faits? 10. Quel 6tait le premier? 11. Et le second? etc. 
 
 C. 1. Have you done your lessons (devoirs)*? 2. I have done some 
 of them. 3. I learned a passage in (de) the Bible by heart. 4. It 
 was (a) part of the 15th chapter of the gospel according to St. 
 John, verses 1 to 9. 5. We had already learned the 14th chapter. 
 6. What subject have you chosen for your composition? 7. The 
 life of Napoleon III. 8. Why didn't you choose the life of William I, 
 or the retreat of the Ten Thousand? 9. Those subjects were too 
 difficult. 10. The date of the taking of the BastiUe is 1789. 11. Na- 
 poleon I was born in 1769 and died in 1821. 
 
 D. Read in French and write in full: 1. Les TQ d'un franc; la 
 i d'un doUar; \ de A; les f du temps. 2. L'an 485; en 1616; 
 Tan 1000; I'Amerique a e*te* decouverte (discovered) en 1492; 
 Guillaume III est mort en 1702 et Louis XIV en 1715. 3. Le 
 15 e (quinzieme) verset du 20 e chapitre. 4. Aux XV e , XVP, et 
 XVII 6 siecles. 5. Nous vivons au XX e siecle. 
 
 E. 1. There are about 100 pupils in our school. 2. There are 
 thousands of books in my father's library. 3. He bought 200 books 
 last week. 4. John loses three quarters of his time. 5. This gentle- 
 man gives a third of his money to the poor. 6. Our cook saves 
 half of her wages and spends the other half. 7. About thirty of our 
 friends were at the station when the train arrived. 8. This room 
 (salle) is 5 metres long by 4 metres wide. 9. That makes 20 
 square metres. 10. Edward (Edouard) VII, king of England, was 
 born in 1841 and (lied in 1910. 11. Louis XIV was king of France 
 in the XVII century. 12. 'This board is three centimetres thick. 
 13. We have a ladder four metres long. 
 
 LESSON XLV 
 
 132. Days of the Week. They are as follows (all masculine) : 
 dimanche, Sunday mercredi, Wednesday vendredi, Friday 
 
 lundi, Monday jeudi, Thursday samedi, Saturday 
 
 mardi, Tuesday 
 
110 LESSON XLV [ 133 
 
 133. Months. The names of the months (all masculine) 
 may be conveniently learned from the following rhyme : 
 
 Trente jours ont septembre, 
 Avril, juin, novembre; 
 Trente et un ont mars et mai, 
 Aout, octobre, puis juillet, 
 Et decembre et Janvier; 
 De vingt-huit est fevrier. 
 
 134. Date of Month. 1. Cardinal numerals are employed 
 to denote days of the month, except the first = premier : 
 
 Le premier (deux, dix) mai. (On) the first (second, tenth) of May 
 
 Us sont arrives le six. They arrived on the 6th. 
 
 Us arrivent tou jours le lundi. They always come on Monday (s). 
 
 (a) On in such expressions remains untranslated. 
 
 2. Observe the following date idioms: 
 
 Quel jour du mois est-ce (sommes- What day of the month is it to-day? 
 
 nous) aujourd'hui? 
 
 C'est aujourd'hui le dix. To-day is the tenth. 
 
 Ce sera demain le onze. To-morrow will be the eleventh. 
 
 D'aujourd'hui en huit. A week from to-day (future). 
 
 D'aujourd'hui en trois semaines. Three weeks from to-day. 
 
 II y a quinze jours. A fortnight (two weeks) ago. 
 
 Lundi prochain; lundi dernier. Next Monday; last Monday. 
 
 135. Age. Observe the following expressions denoting age: 
 Quel age avez-vous (a-t-elle)? How old are you (is she)*! 
 
 J'ai vingt ans. T , 7 -,. 
 
 T . f , , / am twenty (years old). 
 
 Je sins age de vingt ans. J 
 
 Elle a dix ans et son frere en a She is ten (years old) and her bro- 
 
 huit. ther is eight. 
 
 Elle est plus &ge*e de deux ans. She is older by two years. 
 A 1'age de dix ans. At ten years of age. 
 
 (a) An(s) may not be omitted in specifying age. 
 
 (b) By = de, after a comparison. 
 
 136. Holidays. The principal holidays (jours de fete) in 
 France are: les dimanches, le jour de TAn (New Year's Day), le 
 lundi de Paques (Easter Monday), le lundi de la Pentecote 
 (Whit Monday), la Fete Nationale (14 juillet), la Toussaint 
 (All Saints' Day), le jour de Noel (Christmas Day). 
 
136] LESSON XLV 111 
 
 EXERCISE XLV 
 
 Page, m., age fonder, found, establish 
 
 age, old se marier, marry, get married 
 
 PAtlantique, m., Atlantic Marseille, Marseilles 
 
 le bureau, office le navire, vessel, ship 
 
 le college, college, school la place, position 
 
 le conge, leave, holiday le regne, reign 
 
 considerable, considerable sortir, irreg., go out, leave 
 
 dernier, last le succes, success 
 
 devenir, irreg., become la traversee, crossing, passage 
 
 durer, last voyager, travel 
 riche d'un million, worth a million 
 
 A. 1. Mon pere est ne a Lyon le lundi 8 mars 1825. 2. C'etait 
 sous (in) le regne de Charles X. 3. Quand il avait pres de huit 
 ans, en 1833, son pere Fa envoye ail college. 4. II y a passe* neuf 
 ans. 5. Chaque semaine il avait deux jours de conge, le jeudi 
 et le dimanche. 6. Les autres jours il travaillait pendant dix heures. 
 7. Au sortir (in fin. as noun) du college il entre dans un bureau ou 
 il passe, trois ans. 8. Un jour son pere lui dit: "D'aujourd'hui en 
 quinze tu partiras pour FAmerique." 9. II s'embarque a Marseille 
 le mercredi 20 juin 1845. 10. Le navire a fait la traversee en six 
 semaines. 11. II arrive a la Nouvelle-Orleans au mois d'aout. 
 
 12. En septembre il trouve une place dans un bureau. 13. Au 
 bout de dix-huit mois il fonde un magasin a lui (of his own). 14. II 
 s'est marie en 1848. 15. II a eu un succes considerable. 16. II 
 est devenu riche de deux millions et demi de francs. 17. II a beau- 
 coup voyage. 18. II a fait la traversee de FAtlantique une tren- 
 taine de fois, la premiere fois en six semaines, la derniere fois en 
 six jours. 19. II est mort le vendredi 25 novembre 1910, a Fage de 
 85 ans. 
 
 B. (Oral.) 1. En quelle annee est ne votre pere? 2. En quel 
 mois? 3. Quel jour du mois? 4. Sous le regne de quel roi? 5. Ra- 
 contez-moi sa vie de college. 6. Quand est-il parti pour FAmerique? 
 7. Quel age avait-il? 8. Combien de temps a dure* la traversee? 
 9. Ou a-t-il debarque"? 10. Qu'a-t-il fait ensuite? 11. Quand 
 s'est-il marie? 12. Combien de fois a-t-il traverse* FAtlantique? 
 
 13. Quand est-il mort? 14. De combien tait-il riche? etc. 
 
112 LESSON XLV [ 136 
 
 C. (Oral.) Read the following aloud in French: 1. Paris, le 2 
 fe*vrier, le 15 Janvier, le 6 avril, le 14 juillet, le 21 juin, le 25 mai, 
 le 4 mars, le 17 octobre, le 25 decembre, le 8 novembre, le 5 aout. 
 2. C'est aujourd'hui dimanche, ce sera demain lundi; c'est aujour- 
 d'hui lundi, ce sera demain . . . (throughout the week). 3. Repeat the 
 rhyme in 133. 
 
 D. 1. I was born on the 15th of May, 1873. 2. I began to go to 
 school at the age of eight. 3. My brother, who was older than I 
 by two years, went with me. 4. We had a holiday every Saturday. 
 5. [On] the other days we worked 6 or 7 hours. 6. When I was 17 
 my father found me a position in an office. 7. When I was 21 my 
 brother and I set out for America. 8. The vessel left Havre on 
 the 1st of August, 1894. 9. We arrived in New York in a week. 
 10. We found English very difficult. 11. But after a few months 
 we spoke (impf.) it very well. 12. In the month of December we 
 established a small store. 13. We have had considerable success, 
 and we have become rich. 14. My brother has married, and 
 has a house of his own. 15. He travels a good deal. 16. He has 
 crossed the Atlantic a score of times. 
 
 E. 1. There. are 12 months in a year (annee). 2. The first is 
 called January, the second February, etc. 3. The month of Janu- 
 ary has 31 days, the month of February has 28 days, etc. 4. The 
 first day of the week is called Sunday, the second Monday, etc. 
 5. A year has 365 days, but a leap-year (annee bissextile) has 366 
 days. 6. What day of the month is it to-day? 7. To-day is the 
 15th, to-morrow will be the 16th. 8. Last Saturday was the 17th. 
 9. Next Saturday will be the 24th, will it not? 10. Christmas day 
 comes (falls) [on] the 25th of December, and New Year's day on the 
 1st of January. 11. It will come on a Sunday this year. 12. We 
 shall go to see our relations a week from to-day. 13. We shall 
 spend a week with them. 14. A fortnight ago my aunt fell ill. 
 15. She is more than 75 years old. 
 
137] LESSON XLVI 113 
 
 ^LESSON .JXLVI 
 
 137. Time of Day. Observe the following expressions : 
 
 Quelle heure est-il? What time (o'clock) is it? 
 
 II est une heure. It is one o'clock. 
 
 II est deux heures et demie. It is half past two. 
 
 Trois heures (et) un quart. 1 
 
 m . , > A quarter past three. 
 
 Trois heures et quart. J 
 
 Six heures moms un (or le) quart. A quarter to six. 
 
 Trois heures trois quarts. A quarter to four. 
 
 Trois heures dix (minutes) . Ten minutes past three. 
 
 Six heures moins cinq (minutes). Five minutes to six. 
 
 Six heures quinze. Six fifteen. 
 
 II etait midi et demi. It was half past twelve (noon). 
 
 II est minuit (et) un quart. It is a quarter past twelve (night), 
 
 A huit heures du soir. At eight o'clock in the evening. 
 
 A quelle heure? At what o'clock? 
 
 A dix heures precises. At ten o'clock precisely (exactly). 
 
 Vers (les) deux heures. About two o'clock. 
 
 (a) Do not omit heure (s) . 
 
 (6) Et is essential only at the half hour. 
 
 (c) Minutes is usually omitted. 
 
 (d) Twelve o'clock is never douze heures. 
 
 EXERCISE XLVI 
 
 avancer, be too fast la messe, mass 
 
 le dejeuner, breakfast, lunch la minute, minute 
 
 Pemplette, f ., purchase la montre, watch 
 
 la journee, day preparer, prepare 
 
 le mari, husband retarder, be too slow 
 
 la menagere, housewife la tasse, cup 
 
 je Pai vu le premier (la premiere), / saw it first or / was the first to see 
 
 it; se mettre & table, sit down (to dinner, etc.)', faire des emplettes, 
 
 make purchases, go shopping 
 
 PRESENT INDICATIVE OF mettre, sortir 
 
 je mets nous mettons je sors nous sortons 
 
 tu mets vous mettez tu sors vous sortez 
 
 il met UK mettent il sort ils sortent 
 
114 LESSON XLVI [137 
 
 A. (La journee de la bonne menagere) 1. Je me suis leve*e a six 
 heures moins le quart. 2. J'ai reveille* mes bonnes a six heures dix; 
 je me leve toujours la premiere. 3. Je sors a six heures un quart 
 pour aller a la messe de six heures et demie. 4. Je suis sortie de 
 Feglise a sept heures vingt. 5. J'arrive au marche a huit heures 
 moins vingt. 6. Je rentre chez moi a huit heures precises. 7. La 
 bonne, qui e*tait sortie pour faire des emplettes, arrive dix minutes 
 plus tard. 8. Je prends mon cafe un quart d'heure apres. 9. A 
 dix heures et demie nous commengons a preparer le dejeuner. 
 10. Mon mari arrive de la campagne par le train de onze heures 
 trente-cinq. 11. Nous nous mettons a table a midi precis. 12. Mes 
 filles rentrent de leur promenade vers quatre heures. 13. Nous 
 prenons une tasse de the* a cinq heures. 14. Nous dinons a six 
 heures trois quarts. 15. Nous allons au concert a huit heures et 
 quart. 16. Nous rentrons a onze heures moins un quart. 17. Nous 
 nous couchons une demi-heure plus tard. 
 
 B. (Oral exercise on A.) 
 
 C. (Oral.) Read A aloud, substituting in each case a time five 
 minutes later, excep^ in sentence 12. 
 
 D. Write out in words, in two ways where possible, e.g.: Trois 
 heures et demie or trois heures trente; midi (minuit) un quart or 
 midi (minuit) quinze. 
 
 1. 1 h. 30. 4. 2 h. 25. 7. minuit 30. 10. 5 h. 35. 
 
 2. midi 20. 5. 4 h. 50. 8. 1 h. 5. 11. 6 h. 48. 
 
 3. 1 h. 55. 6. 9 h. 3. 9. 11 h. 45. 12. 5 h. 15. 
 
 E. Write out the time in words, at intervals of five minutes, from 
 11 o'clock A.M. to half past twelve (noon). 
 
 F. 1. The good housewife rose at 6 o'clock precisely; she is al- 
 ways the first to rise. 2. The servant's day began at a quarter to 
 seven. 3. What time is it by (a) your watch? 4. It is exactly noon. 
 5. Your watch is too slow by (de) two minutes. 6. Yours is too 
 fast by a minute and a half. 7. Mine is right (d, Vheure). 8. The 
 concert begins at 8.25. 9. We shall be home, I hope, before 10.30. 
 10. My mother has gone to the seven o'clock mass. 11. Then she 
 will go shopping. 12. The coffee will be ready in (dans) a quarter 
 
140] LESSON XLVII 115 
 
 of an hour. 13. Give me a cup of coffee, please. 14. My husband 
 is in the country; he will arrive by the 10.12 train. 15. The cook 
 is preparing the lunch. 16. The lunch is ready; we sit down. 
 17. At what time do you dine? 
 
 LESSON XLVII 
 
 138. Present and Perfect Participle 
 
 Giving Finishing Selling 
 
 PRES. dormant finissant vendant 
 
 Having Being 
 
 ayant e*tant 
 
 PERF, ayant donne (fini, vendu, eu, e*te, etc.), having given, etc. 
 
 etant arrive (e), having arrived. 
 (a) For verbs in -cer, -ger, see Appendix, D. 
 
 139. Use of Present Participle. 1. When used as an ad- 
 jective it agrees like an adjective: 
 
 Une scene charmante. A charming scene. 
 
 Une soiree dansante. A dancing party. 
 
 2. With verbal force it is invariable: 
 
 Pleurant elle continue son recit. Weeping she continues her story. 
 
 Une boite contenant de 1'argent. A box containing money. 
 Generalement parlant. Generally speaking. 
 
 3. After en it is used as in English, en = in, on, by,' while, 
 when, etc., and is invariable: 
 
 (En) disant ceci elle est sortie. (While) saying this she went out. 
 
 En rentrant j'ai trouve la lettre. On returning I found the letter. 
 
 En lisant on apprend & lire. By reading one learns to read. 
 
 (a) Thus used, the participle regularly refers to the subject, but: L'ap- 
 petit vient en mangeant, lit. One's appetite comes while eating, i.e. Desire comes 
 with success, etc. 
 
 140. Perfect Participle. The forms ayant, etant are invari- 
 able, but the past participle agrees like an adjective: 
 
 Etant arrives de bonne heure, nous Having arrived early, we rested a 
 nous sommes reposes un peu. little. 
 
 (a) Etant is often omitted, and the past participle becomes appositive or 
 absolute: Arrives de bonne heure, etc., Having arrived (or arriving) early, etc ; 
 L'honneur perdu, que me reste-t-il? Honour (being) lost, what remains to met 
 
116 LESSON XLVII [ 141 
 
 141. English -ing. 1. After a preposition (except en, cf. 
 139), an -ing form is regularly translated by an infinitive: 
 
 II parle de partir. He speaks of going. 
 
 Sans dire un seul mot. Without saying a single word. 
 
 Apres avoir dine. After dining (or having dined). 
 
 Jean a ete puni pour avoir perdu John has been punished for losing 
 
 ses livres. (having lost) his books, 
 
 (a) The perfect infinitive is obligatory after apres and after other prepo- 
 sitions when having is, or may be, expressed in English. 
 
 2. An -ing form as subject or object of a verb is rendered by 
 an infinitive, a noun or a clause: 
 
 Voir c'est croire. Seeing is believing. 
 
 J'aime a pecher (or la peche). 7 like fishing. 
 II est facile de parler. Talking is easy. 
 
 3. After verbs of seeing, hearing, etc., the -ing form is com- 
 monly translated by a relative clause or an infinitive, sometimes 
 by a participle: 
 
 Je les vois venir (or qui viennent, 7 see them coming. 
 
 or venant). 
 Je 1'entendis parler (or qui 7 heard him speaking. 
 
 parlait). 
 
 EXERCISE XLVII 
 
 Pappetit, m., appetite la fin, end 
 assis, p. part, of asseoir, seated fumer, smoke 
 
 le bonheur, happiness le gout, taste, liking 
 
 causer, chat jeune, young 
 
 cependant, however lire, irreg., read 
 
 craindre, irreg., fear la mort, death 
 
 deregle, irregular ' la pipe, pipe 
 
 dire, irreg., say, tell le plaisir, pleasure 
 
 Pennui, m., tedium, sorrow le proverbe, proverb 
 
 s'ennuyer, be bored, be sad, be repondre, reply, answer 
 
 lonesome, etc. seul, single, alone, only 
 
 la fa$on, fashion, way tromper, deceive, beguile 
 
 le feu, fire la vieillesse, old age 
 
 assis devant le feu, sitting (seated) before the fire; couche dans son lit, 
 lying (while lying) in bed; debout & la porte, standing at the door 
 
141] LESSON XLVII 117 
 
 NOTE. The imperfect indicative regularly has the same stem as the 
 present participle, e.g. prendre, prenant, je prenais, etc., lire, lisant, je 
 lisais, etc., dire, disant, je disais, etc. 
 
 A. 1. Les vieux amis, assis devant le feu, fument leur pipe. 
 2. S'amusant comme cela ils passent leur temps. 3. Us trompent 
 leur ennui en causant de leur vie passee. 4. A les ecouter (or en 
 les ecoutant) on dirait qu'ils ont e*te des hommes remarquables. 
 
 5. fitant jeunes les plaisirs les interessaient. 6. Arrives a Fage 
 mur ils trouvaient leur plaisir a travailler. 7. Ils reussissaient et 
 en reussissant ils prenaient gout au succes. 8. Ils trouvaient que 
 le proverbe dit vrai: "L'appe*tit vient en mangeant." 9. Apres 
 avoir eu beaucoup de succes la vieillesse leur arrive. 10. N'ayant 
 pas mene* une vie deregle"e ils en voient venir la fin sans rien craindre. 
 11. Mais laisses presque seuls par la mort de leurs amis ils s'ennuient 
 un peu. 12. G6n6ralement parlant cependant ils sont heureux. 
 
 B. (Oral.) 1. Comment les vieux amis passent-ils leur temps? 
 2. De quelle f agon (= comment) trompent-ils leur ennui? 3. Est-ce 
 qu'ils aimaient les plaisirs? 4. En quoi trouvaient-ils leur plaisir 
 plus tard? 5. Expliquez le proverbe qu'on trouve dans la legon. 
 
 6. Est-ce qu'on voit venir la vieillesse avec plaisir? 7. Quand 
 est-ce qu'on s'ennuie? etc. 
 
 C. 1. Sitting (seated) near the fire my old friend smokes his pipe. 
 2. He is chatting of his past life with another friend. 3. (While) 
 listening to him you would say that he is a young man. 4. But he 
 is old and he has seen remarkable men. 5. He amuses himself by 
 chatting about them. 6. When he was young he beguiled the tedium 
 of life in (dans) pleasures. 7. When he came ( 140, a) to mature 
 age he found his pleasure in working. 8. He found more pleasure 
 in working than in amusing himself. 9. He used to say that the 
 proverb I'appetit, etc., is true. 10. After working with much suc- 
 cess, old age comes to -him. 11. But he sees it coming without 
 losing his happiness. 12. He has nothing to fear, not having led 
 an irregular life. 13. He has lost his friends; however, he is not 
 lonesome. 14. Generally speaking he leads a happy life. 
 
 D. 1. These books are very amusing. 2. Think well before 
 (avant de) answering. 3. Being ill, my mother cannot go out to-day. 
 
118 LESSON XL VIII [142 
 
 4. On rising I found that it was already nine o'clock. 5. Our friends 
 having arrived, we can now go on board [the ship]. 6. While waiting 
 for the train, we shall take a cup of coffee. 7. One can't live without 
 eating. 8. I thank you for (de) showing me your library. 9. Fish- 
 ing is an amusement which I like very much. 10. We found our 
 friends waiting for us (rel. clause). 11. I saw the children playing 
 in the garden. 12. Lying in (my) bed I was reading an amusing 
 book. 13. Standing at the window he looked (impf.) at the children 
 playing. 
 
 LESSON XLVIII 
 
 142. Present Subjunctive of donner, finir, vendre 
 
 I (may) give, etc. I (may) finish, etc. I (may) sell, etc. 
 
 je donne finisse vende 
 
 tu donnes finisses vendes 
 
 il donne finisse vende 
 
 nous donnions finissions vendions 
 
 vous donniez finissiez vendiez 
 
 ils donnent finissent vendent 
 
 (a) Learn the subjunctive with que, e.g. que je donne, etc., since a sub- 
 junctive is usually preceded by que = that. 
 
 (&) The English meanings above are only approximate; observe that 
 the subjunctive corresponds to various English constructions, see examples 
 below. 
 
 143. Present Subjunctive of avoir and etre 
 
 I (may) have, etc. I (may) be, etc. 
 
 j' aie nous ayons je sois nous soyons 
 
 tu aies vous ayez tu sois vous soyez 
 
 il ait ils aient il soit ils soient 
 
 (a) A past participle is added to form the perfect subjunctive (cf . 45) : 
 {que) j'aie donne, etc.; (que) je sois arrive(e), etc. 
 
 144. Use in Noun Clauses. The subjunctive is required in 
 a noun clause (introduced by que) after expressions denoting: 
 
145] LESSON XLVIII 119 
 
 1. Will, desire, command, consent, prohibition, etc.: 
 
 Je desire (veux) que vous restiez. I desire (wish) you to remain. 
 Je consens & ce que vous restiez. / consent that you should remain. 
 
 2. Necessity: 
 
 II faut que vous restiez. You must remain. 
 
 II est necessaire qu'il soit pret. It is necesssary that he should be 
 
 ready. 
 
 3. Opinion (e.g. approval, etc., or the contrary) : 
 
 J'approuve que vous Tachetiez. / approve of your buying it. 
 II est bon qu'il soit ici. It is well that he is here. 
 
 4. Emotion (e.g. joy, sorrow, surprise, anger, fear, etc.): 
 Je regrette qu'il soit parti. / regret that he has gone. 
 
 5. Doubt, denial, ignorance, improbability, etc.: 
 
 Je doute (nie) que cela soit vrai. / doubt (deny) that that is true. 
 
 6. Que ( = that) is never omitted in French: 
 
 Je suis content qu'il soit ici. I am glad (that) he is here. 
 
 145. Tense Sequence. If the verb of the governing clause 
 is in the present, imperative, future, or future perfect, the gov- 
 erned subjunctive regularly has the following tenses: 
 
 1. To denote incomplete action, the present subjunctive: 
 
 II faut que vous parliez. You must speak. 
 
 ' II ne faut pas que vous parliez. You must not speak. 
 
 Ordonnez qu'il parte. Order him to go. 
 
 II faudra que vous partiez. You mill have to go. 
 
 2. To denote completed action, the perfect subjunctive: 
 Je doute qu'il Fait vendu. / doubt that he (has) sold it. 
 
 3. A governing condition of deferential statement (cf. 190, 1) 
 commonly also follows the same rules: 
 
 Je voudrais (bien) qu'il parte. / should like him to go. 
 
120 LESSON XLVIII [ 145 
 
 EXERCISE XLVIII 
 
 approuver, approve fache, angry, sorry 
 
 le corsage, waist, bodice garnir, trim, adorn 
 
 coudre, irreg., sew la garniture, trimming 
 
 la coupe, cut, cutting il importe, it is important 
 
 courir, irreg., run la jupe, skirt 
 
 cousu, p. part, of coudre, sewn necessaire, necessary 
 
 la couture, sewing richement, richly 
 
 la couturiere, dressmaker savoir, irreg., know (how to), can 
 
 doubler, line simple, simple,, plain 
 
 douter, doubt tellement, so much 
 
 courir les magasins, go shopping, shop; tout de meme, all the same, 
 also; je veux bien, I will (do so), very well, all right, etc.; que voulez- 
 vous que je fasse? what shall I do? what am I to do? 
 
 PRESENT INDICATIVE OF savoir 
 je sais nous savons 
 
 tu sais vous savez 
 
 il sait ils savent 
 
 PRESENT SUBJUNCTIVE OF aller, partir, faire, savoir 
 
 j 'aille je parte je fasse je sache 
 
 tu ailles tu partes tu f asses tu saches 
 
 il aille il parte il fasse il sache 
 
 nous allions nous partions nous fassions nous sachions 
 
 vous alliez vous partiez vous f assiez vous sachiez 
 
 ils aillent ils partent ils fassent ils sachent 
 
 A. Continue: 1. II faut que j 'arrive a midi, . . . que tu . . . 2. II 
 Teut que je sois pret. 3. Elle desire que j'aie une robe neuve. 4. II 
 est necessaire que je choisisse Fetoffe. 5. II sera bon que j'attende 
 un peu. 6. II ne faut pas que je fasse cela. 7. II voudrait bien que 
 j'y aille. 8. II est content que je sache le frangais. 9. II est fache* 
 que je parte. 
 
 B. 1. II faut que j 'aille chez la couturiere ce matin avec ma 
 mre, et elle desire que tu m'accompagnes. 2. Je veux bien. 
 3. J'aime tellement (a) courir les magasins. 4. A quelle heure 
 veux-tu que nous partions? 5. II faut que nous soyons chez la 
 couturiere vers dix heures. 6. D'abord nous de*sirons que tu 
 choisisses, avec nous, de l'e*toffe pour ma robe. 7. Ma mre veut 
 qu'elle soit tre"s simple. 8. Elle n'approuve pas que les jeunes filles 
 
145] LESSON XLVIII 121 
 
 soient richement habille*es. 9. Elle est contente que les jupes et 
 meme les corsages soient tres simples cette anne*e, mais il faut tout 
 de mme que nous ayons un peu de garniture sur nos robes, n'est-ce 
 pas? 10. II est tres important qu'une robe soit bien garnie et 
 doublee. 11. Mais il importe surtout qu'elle soit bien coupee et 
 bien cousue. 12. II est n^cessaire qu'une couturire sache bien la 
 coupe et la couture. 13. La notre sait bien couper et coudre. 
 14. Je doute qu'il y en ait de plus habiles. 
 
 C. (Oral.) 1. Ou allez-vous ce matin? 2. Veux-tu que je t'ac- 
 compagne? 3. Qu'est-ce que ta mere voudrait que je fasse? 4. A 
 quelle heure faut-il que je sois chez la couturiere? 5. Quelle espece 
 de robe ta mere veut-elle que tu aies? 6. Approuve-t-elle que les 
 robes soient riches? 7. Est-elle contente que les corsages soient 
 richement garnis? 8. Qu'y a-t-il d'important en faisant (making) 
 une robe? (answer with il faut). 9. Sais-tu coudre? etc. 
 
 D. 1. We must go to the dressmaker's to-day. 2. I wish you to 
 go with me. 3. Very well; I will (fut.) go with you. 4. Do you like 
 to go shopping? 5. Very much; when shall we start? 6. The dress- 
 maker desires us to be at her shop at nine. 7. First we must choose 
 cloth for my dress. 8. I wish it to be good and not (pas) too dear. 
 9. My mother likes young girls to wear simple dresses. 10. I am 
 glad that skirts are plain this year. 11. But one must have trim- 
 ming on the waists. 12. It is important that dresses should be well 
 cut and well trimmed. 13. Can you cut and sew? 14. Not (pas) 
 very well. 15. Do you like sewing? 16. I do; my mother ap- 
 proves of young girls knowing how to sew. 
 
 E. 1. My father wishes the architect to make the plans. 2. I 
 am sorry that they have gone. 3. I am glad that our neighbour's 
 sons have dome. 4. The fields must be sown. 5. We wish the har- 
 vesters to cut the wheat. 6. The baker must make the bread. 
 7. Little girls must not be richly dressed. 8. It is not necessary 
 that you should go away to-morrow. 9. I should like my dress to 
 fit me well. 10. Little children must not tease animals. 11. It 
 is important that dresses should be well lined. 12. I wish you 
 (tu) to do your exercises. 13. Children must always do their ex- 
 ercises. 14. We shall have to begin our lessons at once. 15. We 
 are always the first to begin. 
 
122 LESSON XLIX [ 146 
 
 LESSON XLIX 
 
 146. Subjunctive in Adjectival Clause. The subjunctive is 
 used in such clauses (introduced by a relative pronoun) : 
 
 1. To express, regarding the antecedent, something which is 
 implied as being still unattained or in doubt: 
 
 Je cherche un chapeau qui m'aille / am looking for a hat that will 
 bien. (may, such as mill) fit me. 
 
 (a) If the English can be turned by may + verb, or such as, etc., use the 
 subjunctive; otherwise the indicative, e.g. J'ai trouve un chapeau qui me va 
 bien, I have found a hat that fits me. 
 
 2. After a negative: 
 
 II n'y a personne qui sache cela. There is nobody who knows that. 
 
 3. When the antecedent is qualified by a superlative, or by 
 seul, unique, premier, dernier: 
 
 C'est le meilleur ami que j'aie. He is the best friend I have. 
 
 C'est le seul ami que j'aie. He is the only friend I have. 
 
 (a) But the indicative is used (1) if what is said is merely explanatory, 
 e.g. M on meilleur ami qui 6tait malade, etc., or (2) states a fact unreservedly, 
 e.g. C'est la seule chose qu'il a dite, or (3) if the superlative be used as a 
 noun, e.g. C'est la meilleure des maisons que j'ai vues. 
 
 t 4. In clauses translating whoever, whatever, however: 
 Qui que tu sois, parle. Whoever you are, speak. 
 
 Quoi que vous fassiez. Whatever you do. 
 
 Quelles que soient vos raisons. Whatever (may) be your reasons. 
 Quelque bons qu'ils soient. However good they are (may be). 
 
 147. Subjunctive in Adverbial Clause. It is thus used after 
 many conjunctions, like the following, expressing: 
 
 TIME: avant que (. . . ne), before CONDITION: au cas que, in case 
 
 PURPOSE : afin que or pour que, that; a moins que . . . ne, unless 
 
 in order that CONCESSION : quoique or bien que, 
 
 FEAR: de peur que . . . ne, for although 
 
 fear that NEGATION: sans que, without (that) 
 
 Parlez avant qu'il (ne) parte. Speak before he goes. 
 
 De peur que vous ne tombiez. For fear that you should fall. 
 
 Bien que je ne sois pas riche. Though I am not rich, 
 (a) For the complete list, see 224. 
 
148] 
 
 LESSON XLIX 
 
 123 
 
 148. Subjunctive in Principal Sentence. 1. Thus used, que 
 + the third singular and third plural present subjunctive serves 
 to complete the imperative, thus: 
 
 SINGULAR PLURAL 
 
 donnons, let us give 
 
 donne, give donnez, give 
 
 qu'il donne, let him give qu'ils donnent, let them give 
 
 (a) Similarly for all verbs; for word-order of pronouns, see 68. 
 
 2. It is also sometimes used without que to denote what is 
 wished or desired: 
 
 Ainsi soit-il! Vive le roi! So be it! Long live the king! 
 
 Plut (impf.) a Dieu qu'il fut ici! Would to God he were here! 
 
 EXERCISE XLIX 
 
 accepter, accept 
 
 assister a, be present at, attend 
 
 le bal, ball } dance 
 
 le bouton, button, stud 
 
 la famille, family 
 
 frais, fresh, unsoiled 
 
 les geng, pi., people 
 
 le gilet, waistcoat, vest 
 
 Phabit, m., dress coat 
 
 Pinvitation, f., invitation 
 
 la jaquette, morning coat 
 
 se mettre, irreg., dress (intr.). 
 le mouchoir, handkerchief 
 la nacre, mother-of-pearl 
 s'occuper de, occupy oneself with, 
 
 see about 
 
 quant a, as to (for) 
 la redingote, frock coat 
 la soiree, evening 
 le tailleur, tailor 
 le veston, sack coat 
 
 les jeunes gens, young men; les jeunes filles, young ladies; en toilette de 
 bal (or de soiree), in evening dress; une soiree dansante, a dancing 
 party 
 
 PRESENT SUBJUNCTIVE OF pouvoir 
 
 je puisse 
 tu puisses 
 il puisse 
 
 nous puissions 
 vous puissiez 
 ils puissent. 
 
 A. Continue: 1. Avant que je parte, . . . tu. 2. Quoique je sois 
 malade, je partirai, . . . tu . . . tu. 3. Ce sont les seuls gants que 
 
124 LESSON XLIX' [148 
 
 j'aie. 4. Quoi que je fasse je n'y russirai pas. 5. De peur que je 
 ne tombe. 6. Give in full the imperative of finir, vendre, avoir, etre. 
 
 B. 1. Mes sceurs, mon frere et moi (nous) sommes invites a une 
 soire*e dansante chez ma tante. 2. Toutes les jeunes filles seront en 
 toilette de bal (or de soire*e). 3. Bien que nous soyons presque tous 
 de la famille, ma tante ne voudrait pas que les jeunes gens qui y 
 assistent soient en veston ou en jaquette. 4. II faut qu'on se 
 mette en habit pour danser chez elle. 5. Mon frere, quoiqu'il ne 
 soit pas beaucoup plus age* que moi, a deja un habit et une redin- 
 gote. 6. N'en ayant pas moi-meme, il faut que j'aille chez le 
 tailleur avant qu'il soit trop tard. 7. A moins que je n'aie un 
 habit, il faut que je refuse 1'invitation. 8. Quant aux gants blancs 
 j'en ai, mais quelque bons qu'ils soient ils ne sont plus frais. 
 
 9. La seule chose que je puisse faire c'est d'en acheter de neufs. 
 
 10. Et le gilet blanc, la cravate blanche, les boutons de nacre et le 
 mouchoir de soie blanche, il faut que je m'en occupe tout de 
 suite. 
 
 C. (Oral on B.) 
 
 D. 1. My aunt will give a dancing party next week. 2. Although 
 I am invited, I don't know whether I can be present (there). 3. She 
 does not wish us to wear our (the) sack coat[s]. 4. We must be in 
 dress coat[s] if we wish to dance at her house. 5. The young ladies 
 must be in evening dress. 6. My brother has a dress coat, though 
 he is younger than I. 7. Before (avant d') accepting the invitation 
 I must go to the tailor's. 8. It is the only thing I can do. 9. I 
 cannot go to my aunt's unless I have a dress coat and a white tie. 
 10. However good a frock coat may be, one can't wear it at the 
 ball. 11. Although these gloves are good, they are no longer un- 
 soiled. 12. I must buy others. 13. Though I have mother-of-pearl 
 buttons, I have no white tie. 14. You must see about these things 
 at once. 15. Let young men dress well, especially when they are 
 going to a (the) ball. 
 
 E. 1. My brother knows how to swim, though he is still young. 
 2. Unless you know how to swim, don't bathe here. 3. Whatever 
 you do, don't do that. 4. However large the Seine is (is the Seine), 
 it is not so large as the St. Lawrence. 5. Let us begin our work 
 
151] LESSON L 125 
 
 before it is too late. 6. Let the maid bring me a pocket handker- 
 chief. 7. Let the children play now if they wish. 8. I am looking 
 for a house in which (oit,) I shall be comfortable (bieri). 9. I have 
 found some gloves that fit me. 10. The only ship which leaves 
 Havre this week is "La Lorraine." 11. It is the only thing I can 
 offer you. 12. Unless I have a morning coat before Tuesday, I 
 cannot go to the reception. 13. Mr. L. is the best friend we have 
 in Paris. 14. As to our family, we never dance. 15. Let the tailor 
 bring me my white waistcoat when it is ready. 
 
 LESSON L 
 
 149. Past Definite of donner, finir, vendre 
 
 I gave, etc. I finished, etc. I sold, etc. 
 
 je donnai finis . vendis 
 
 tu donnas finis vendis 
 
 il donna finit vendit 
 
 nous donnames finimes vendimes 
 
 vous donnates finites vendites 
 
 ils donnerent finirent vendirent 
 
 (a) The first and second plural have the circumflex accent in all verbs. 
 (6) Certain verbs (all irregular) have the endings -us, -us, -ut, -umes, 
 -utes, -urent (see courir below) . 
 
 (c) For the past definite of verbs in -cer, -ger, see Appendix, D. 
 
 150. Past Definite of avoir and etre 
 
 I had, etc. I was, etc. 
 
 j'eus nous eumes je fus nous fumes 
 
 tu eus vous eutes tu fus vous futes 
 
 il eut ils eurent il f ut ils furent 
 
 151. Past Anterior. It is formed by adding the past parti- 
 ciple to the past definite of avoir or etre, thus: 
 
 j'eus donne, etc., I had given, etc. 
 je fus arrive (e), 7 had arrived, etc. 
 
126 LESSON L [ 152 
 
 152. Use of Past Definite. 1. It is used to denote what 
 happened (completed past action), or what happened next (suc- 
 cessive events) : 
 
 La guerre dura sept ans. The war lasted seven years. 
 
 On f ore a le palais, les scelerats The palace was forced, the villains 
 n'oserent pas resister et ne did not dare to resist and only 
 
 songerent qu'a fuir. thought of fleeing. 
 
 (a) The past definite is almost wholly confined to literary or 'book' 
 French narrative and formal public address (cf. Note to 47). 
 
 (o) In such a narrative the past definite denotes the principal events, while 
 the imperfect denotes accompanying events; or, as is sometimes said, the 
 past definite narrates and the imperfect describes. 
 
 2. Observe the special force of the following: 
 
 Avoir; j'eus, to have; I received (obtained, got, etc.). 
 Savoir; je sus, to know; I found out (learned, etc.). 
 
 153. Pluperfect and Past Anterior. Both these tenses are 
 used to translate the English pluperfect, but the past anterior 
 denotes only what had happened immediately before another 
 event, and is rarely employed except after certain conjunctions 
 of time: 
 
 Apres qu'il eut dine, il partit. After he had dined, he set out. 
 (a) Such conjunctions are: lorsque, quand, when, apres que, after, aussitot 
 que, as soon as, and others rarer. 
 
 EXERCISE L 
 
 arreter, arrest, stop la hate, haste 
 
 aupres de, with, as regards joindre, irreg., join 
 
 bas, low lorsque, when 
 
 le baton, stick, club le paysan, peasant, countryman 
 
 la boutique, shop remplacer, take the place of 
 
 le bras, arm rude, severe 
 
 casser, break saisir, seize 
 
 le coup, blow a travers, through 
 la devanture, front (shop) window le trou, hole 
 
 la difficulte, difficulty violent, violent 
 
 se disposer, prepare, get ready voler, steal 
 
 dur, hard le voleur, thief 
 emporter, carry off (away) 
 en bas age, at an early age; joindre les deux bouts, make (both) ends meet 
 
153] LESSON L 127 
 
 PAST DEFINITE OP courir, mourir, faire, voir 
 
 je courus je mourus je fis je vis 
 
 tu courus tu mourus tu fis tu vis 
 
 il courut il mourut il fit il vit 
 
 nous courumes nous mourumes nous flmes nous vfmes 
 
 vous courutes vous mourutes vous fites vous vites 
 
 ils coururent ils moururent ils firent ils virent 
 
 IMPERFECT INDICATIVE OF joindre: je joignais/ etc. 
 
 A. Continue: 1. J'emportai le pain. 2. Je saisis le voleur. 3. Je 
 sortis en hate. 4. J'entendis un coup violent. 5. Je fus arrete* 
 par lui. 6. Je courus apres lui. 7. Lorsque j'eus arrete le voleur. 
 8. Aussitot que je fus arrive (e). 
 
 B. Jean Valjean 6tait d'une pauvre famille de paysans. II avait 
 perdu en bas age son pere et sa mere. II ne lui restait qu'une sceur 
 qui etait mariee et qui avait sept enfants. Mais un jour le mari 
 mourut. Jean le remplaga auprs des enfants. Sa sceur et lui en 
 travaillant dur joignaient les deux bouts avec difficult^. Mais il 
 arriva qu'un hiver fut rude. Jean n'eut pas d'ouvrage. Les enfants 
 n'eurent pas de pain. Un dimanche soir un boulanger du village se 
 disposait a se coucher lorsqu'il entendit un coup violent dans la 
 devanture de sa boutique. II arriva a temps pour voir un bras 
 passe a travers le trou fait dans la devanture. Le bras saisit un 
 pain (loaf) et Temporta. Le boulanger sortit en hate, courut apres 
 le voleur et Tarreta. C'etait Jean Valjean. 
 
 Adapted from Les Miserables by VICTOR HUGO. 
 
 C. (Oral) Read Exercise XX, B> using past definite for past in- 
 definite. 
 
 D. 1. Jean Valjean's father and mother were peasants. 2. He 
 lost them at an early age. 3. Then he had only his sister with her 
 family. 4. When her husband died Jean took his place and began 
 to work for her and the children. 5. He used to work hard, and he 
 made both ends meet without difficulty. 6. A severe winter came. 
 7. Jean got no work. 8. One evening, as the baker Vas getting 
 ready to go to bed, he heard a violent blow. 9. He saw an arm 
 passing through the shop window. 10. Seizing a loaf the arm 
 carried it off. 11. The baker and his wife came out of the shop 
 in haste. 12. He ran after the thief and caught him. 
 
128 LESSON LI [ 154 
 
 E. 1. Jean Valjean struck the shop window with a stick and 
 broke it. 2. He got a loaf of bread by passing his arm through the 
 hole. 3. Did the baker see Jean taking the loaf? 4. No, he did 
 not see him, but he heard the blow. 5. When he heard the blow 
 he dressed in haste. 6. He called his wife and rushed into the shop. 
 7. He saw the hole in the window. 8. Then he rushed into the 
 street. 9. He ran in haste after Jean Valjean. 10. Jean threw 
 away the loaf he had stolen. 11. The poor children did not get 
 the loaf. .12. They ate no bread that evening. 
 
 LESSON LI 
 
 154. Imperfect Subjunctive of donner, finir, vendre 
 
 I gave, might I finished, might I sold, might 
 
 give, etc. finish, etc. sell, etc. 
 
 je donnasse finisse vehdisse 
 
 tu donnasses finisses vendisses 
 
 il donnat finit vendit 
 
 nous donnassions finissions vendissions 
 
 vous donnassiez finissiez vendissiez 
 
 ils donnassent finissent vendissent 
 
 (a) The third singular in all verbs has the circumflex accent. 
 
 155. Imperfect Subjunctive of avoir and etre 
 
 I had, might have, etc. I was, were, might be, etc. 
 
 j'eusse nous eussions je fusse nous fussions 
 
 tu eusses vous eussiez tu fusses vous fussiez 
 
 il eut ils eussent il fut ils fussent 
 
 (a) A past participle is added to form the pluperfect subjunctive: 
 (que) j'eusse donne", etc. 
 (que) je fusse arrive (e), etc. 
 
 156. Tense Sequence. If the verb of the governing clause 
 be in any other tense than those mentioned in 145, the gov- 
 erned subjunctive regularly takes the following forms: 
 1. To denote incomplete action, the imperfect subjunctive: 
 Je desirais qu'il le vendit. 1 / wished that he might sell it or / 
 
 J'ai desire qu'il le vendit. J wished him to sell it. 
 
 J'avais desire qu'il le vendit. I had wished him to sell it. 
 
156] LESSON LI 129 
 
 2. To denote completed action, the pluperfect : 
 Je doutais qu'il refit vendu. / doubted that he had sold it. 
 J'aurais doute qu'il f fit parti. / should have doubted that he had gone, 
 (a) For the sequence after conditional of deferential statement, see 
 145, 3. 
 
 NOTES. 1. An infinitive construction is often used instead of the sub- 
 junctive, even where the latter is possible, e.g. II nous ordonne de partir (for 
 II ordonne que nous portions), He orders us to go; Je le ferai avant de partir 
 (for avant que je parte), I shall do it before I go. 
 
 2. In ordinary language the present subjunctive is often used instead of 
 the imperfect, particularly in the case of the first conjugation, e.g. II de- 
 sirait que nous arrivions a temps (for que nous arrivassions) , He desired us to 
 arrive in time. This tendency is less strongly marked, however, in the case 
 of the third person singular imperfect. 
 
 3. Other exceptions to the general rules are beyond the scope of an ele- 
 mentary text-book. 
 
 EXERCISE LI 
 
 agreablement, agreeably le mal de mer, seasickness 
 les bagages, m., luggage, baggage la malle, trunk 
 
 la cabine, cabin, stateroom ordonner, order, prescribe 
 
 la cale, hold (of a ship) il prit, 3d sing. p. def. of prendre 
 
 le chemin, way, road recemment, recently 
 
 Cherbourg, Cherbourg remis, p. part, of remettre, recovered 
 
 completement, completely rouler, roll 
 
 descendre, tr., take down, lower le roulis, rolling 
 
 empecher, hinder le vaisseau, vessel, ship 
 
 le fer, iron la valise, valise 
 
 habitue, accustomed (to, &) le voyage, journey, trip 
 
 lourd, heavy le wagon-lit, sleeping car 
 chemin de fer, railway; en pleine mer, in the open sea', il fallut (p. def. 
 of falloir), it was necessary, had to, etc.; il faudrait (condl. of falloir), 
 would have to, etc. 
 
 IMPERFECT SUBJUNCTIVE OF prendre, pouvoir, mettre, faire 
 
 je prisse 
 tu prisses 
 ilprlt 
 
 je pusse 
 tu pusses 
 ilput 
 
 je misse 
 tu misses 
 ilmit 
 
 je fisse 
 tu fisses 
 ilfft 
 
 nous prissions 
 vous prissiez 
 ils prissent 
 
 nous pussions 
 vous pussiez 
 ils pussent 
 
 nous missions 
 vous missiez 
 ils missent 
 
 nous fissions 
 vous fissiez 
 ils fissent 
 
 NOTE. For the u throughout in pusse, etc., see 149, 6. 
 
130 LESSON LI [ 156 
 
 A. Continue: 1. II fallait que je vendisse ma maison. 2. II fau- 
 drait que je finisse bientot. 3. Bien que je fusse habitue (e) a voya- 
 ger. 4. Avant que j'eusse debarque. 5. II dSsirait que je fisse un 
 voyage. 6. II doutait que je pusse le faire. 
 
 (The following passage is given in literary style to afford practice in the 
 verb-forms.) 
 
 B. 1. Un de mes amis fit recemment un voyage en Europe. 2. II 
 fallut qu'il allat d'abord a la gare et qu'il prit son billet de chemin 
 de fer. 3. Pour qu'il put voyager agreablement il prit une place 
 dans le wagon-lit. 4. Arrive* a New York il fallut qu'il s'occupat de 
 ses bagages. 5. II ordonna qu'on descendit sa grande malle, qui 
 e*tait tres lourde, dans la cale et qu'on mit ses valises dans la cabine. 
 6. En pleine mer le vent soufflait et le vaisseau roulait. 7. Bien 
 que mon ami fut assez habitue au roulis il fallut qu'il se couchat 
 pour empecher le mal de mer. 8. Avant qu'on eut fait la moiti6 
 de la traversed il e"tait completement remis. 9. II debarqua a 
 Cherbourg d'ou il partit pour Paris. 
 
 C. 1. My father recently had to take (make) a journey to 
 Europe. 2. He had to get (take) his railway ticket. 3. He went 
 early to the station. 4. He went (there) early in order that he 
 might have a good place in the sleeping car. 5. When he arrived at 
 New York he had to see after his trunk. 6. He had his other luggage 
 with him in the train. 7. But he ordered his trunk, which was 
 heavy, to be lowered (use on) into the hold. 8. Although the wind 
 was blowing the ship didn't roll much. 9. As he was not accus- 
 tomed to travelling he had to lie down. 10. He lay down in order 
 not to be (avoir) seasick. 11. Before he arrived at Cherbourg he 
 had (was) completely recovered. 
 
 D. 1. Before my friend started he took his ticket. 2. He had to 
 take his ticket at the station. 3. He had to be there early in order 
 to do that. 4. Although he arrived there early, he hadn't much 
 time. 5. I wished him to get a ticket for me also. 6. I should HKO 
 you to see about my luggage. 7. We should like you to put our 
 valises into the stateroom. 8. Although our friends hadn't arrived 
 we couldn't (impf.) wait. 9. We regretted that they had been 
 hindered. 10. Although my uncle was ill, he was able to travel. 
 11. We had arrived before the train left for Paris. 
 
157] 
 
 LESSON LII 
 
 131 
 
 LESSON LII 
 
 157. Principal Parts. 1. The whole conjugation of any regu- 
 lar verb, and of most irregular verbs, may be known from five 
 forms of the verb, called "principal parts," as shown below for 
 ecrire, write. These parts are the infinitive, the present par- 
 ticiple, the past participle, the present indicative 1st singular 
 and the past definite 1st singular; from each is formed the mood 
 or tense in the column below. 
 
 1. INFIN. 
 
 2. PRES. PART. 
 
 3. PAST PART. 
 
 4. PRES. IND. 1 SG. 
 
 5. P. DBF. 1 So. 
 
 ecrire 
 
 crivant 
 
 ecrit 
 
 j'ecris 
 
 j'ecrivis 
 
 Future 
 
 Impf. Ind. 
 
 Comp. Tenses 
 
 Imperative 
 
 Impf. Subj. 
 
 j'ecrirai, etc. 
 
 j'ecrivais, etc. 
 
 j'ai ecrit, etc. 
 
 6cris, etc. 
 
 j'ecrivisse,etc. 
 
 Conditional 
 
 Pres. Subj. 
 
 
 
 
 j'ecrirais, etc. 
 
 j'ecrive, etc. 
 
 
 
 
 RULE: Add 
 
 RULE : Drop 
 
 RULE: Add 
 
 RULE: Form 
 
 RULE: Form 
 
 to the Infini- 
 
 -ant and add 
 
 the Past Par- 
 
 the Impera- 
 
 the Imperfect 
 
 tive (dropping 
 
 the endings 
 
 ticiple to the 
 
 tive by drop- 
 
 Subjunctive 
 
 final -e) 
 
 
 proper auxil- 
 
 ping the sub- 
 
 by substitut- 
 
 
 
 iary ( 45) to 
 
 ject pronoun 
 
 ing 
 
 -ai -ons 
 
 -ais -ions 
 
 form the Com- 
 
 of the 2d sing- 
 
 -sse -ssions 
 
 -as -ez 
 
 -ais -iez 
 
 pound Tenses, 
 
 ular, 1st and 
 
 -sses -ssiez 
 
 -a -ont 
 
 -ait -aient 
 
 and also the 
 
 2d plural of 
 
 - A t -ssent 
 
 
 
 Passive Voice 
 
 the Present 
 
 
 to form the 
 
 to form the 
 
 of transitive 
 
 Indicative ( s 
 
 for the final 
 
 Future, and 
 
 Imperf ., and 
 
 verbs ( 118). 
 
 of the 2d sing- 
 
 letter of the 
 
 
 
 
 ular 1st con- 
 
 1st singular 
 
 -ais -ions 
 
 -e -ions 
 
 
 jugation being 
 
 Past Definite, 
 
 -ais -iez 
 
 -es iez 
 
 
 also dropped, 
 
 placing a cir- 
 
 -ait -aient 
 
 -e -ent 
 
 
 except before 
 
 cumflex ac- 
 
 
 
 
 
 cent over the 
 
 to form the 
 Conditional. 
 
 to form the 
 Pres.Subjunct. 
 
 
 en, y, 
 e.g. paries-en, 
 vas-v^ 
 
 last vowel of 
 the 3d sing- 
 
 
 (a) The 1st and 2d Plural 
 
 VdO J J . 
 
 ular. 
 
 
 Present Indicative and Im- 
 
 
 
 
 perative may also be formed 
 
 
 
 
 by changing -ant into -ons, 
 
 
 
 
 -ez. 
 
 
 
132 LESSON LII | 158 
 
 2. A condensed form of the above is used in the Alphabetical 
 List of the Irregular Verbs (see Appendix), thus: 
 
 e*crire crivant e*crit e"cris ecrivis 
 
 (write) ecrivais e*crivisse 
 
 e"crirai(s) derive 
 PRESENT INDICATIVE: 
 
 e"cris, ecris, ecrit, ecrivons, e*crivez, ecrivent. 
 
 158. Remarks on Irregular Verbs. 1. The infinitive stem 
 of some verbs is phonetically modified in the future and condi- 
 tional, e.g. venir, viendrai(s). 
 
 2. The stem-vowel of the present participle is phonetically 
 modified in the present subjunctive of some verbs, where 
 stressed (1st, 2d, 3d singular and 3d plural), e.g. venant, vienne, 
 viennes, vienne, viennent; usually also in the same persons of 
 the present indicative, e.g. viens, viens, vient, viennent. 
 
 3. Many verbs have the present indicative singular in -s, -s, 
 -t, others in -x, -x, -t, e.g. sais, sais, sait (savoir), veux, veux, 
 veut (vouloir); the-t is omitted after c, d, t, e.g. vainc (vaincre), 
 vend (vendre), met (mettre). 
 
 4. Some verbs have the past definite in -us, -us, -ut, -times, 
 -utes, -urent, and the imperfect subjunctive in -usse, -usses, 
 -ut, -ussions, -ussiez, -ussent, e.g. courus, etc. (courir), cou- 
 russe, etc. 
 
 5. All verbs with the past definite in -is continue the tense 
 like finis, e.g. pris, pris, prit, primes, prites, prirent. 
 
 6. Verbs in -oir (a separate conjugation in some grammars) 
 are treated as irregular verbs. 
 
 7. Exceptions to the rules of 157 will be indicated in the 
 Alphabetical List; avoir and etre are not included under the rules. 
 
 8. The present indicative of each verb should be learned in 
 fuU. 
 
 159. Exercise Form. For exercises and tests the following 
 tabular form is suggested; the form may be ruled large enough 
 to contain several verbs, the different verbs being indicated by 
 numerals, as shown in the margin: 
 
159] 
 
 LESSON LII 
 
 133 
 
 INFIN. 
 
 PRES. PART. 
 
 PAST PART. 
 
 PRES. IND. 1 So. 
 
 P.DEF.ISG. 
 
 (1) savoir, know 
 (2) connaltre, know 
 (3) naitre, be born 
 
 sachant 
 connaissant 
 naissant 
 
 su 
 connu 
 ne 
 
 je sais 
 je connais 
 je nais 
 
 je sus 
 je connus 
 je naquis 
 
 FUT. 1 SG. 
 
 IMPF. IND. 1 SG. 
 
 P. IND. 1 SG. 
 
 IMPVE. 2 So. 
 
 IMP.SUB.1SO. 
 
 (1) je saurai 
 (2) je connaitrai 
 (3) je naitrai 
 
 je savais 
 je connaissais 
 je naissais 
 
 j'ai su 
 j'ai connu 
 jesuisne(e) 
 
 sache 
 connais 
 nais 
 
 je susse 
 je connusse 
 je naquisse 
 
 CONDL. 1 SG. 
 
 (1) je saurais 
 
 (2) je connaltrais 
 
 (3) je naltrais 
 
 PRES. SUB j. (in full, using abbreviations if necessary} 
 
 je sache, tu saches, il sache, nous sachions, vous sa- 
 
 chiez, ils sachent. 
 je connaisse, tu -s, il -e, nous connaissions, vous -iez, 
 
 ils ent. 
 je naisse, tu naisses, il naisse, nous naissions, voua 
 
 -iez, ils -ent. 
 
 PRES. INDIC. (in full, underlining forms common to the Imperative) 
 
 (1) je sais, t. sais, 1 i. sait, n. savons, v. savez, i. savent. 
 
 (2) je connais, t. connais, i. connait, n. connaissons, v. connaissez, i. con- 
 
 naissent. 
 
 (3) je nais, t. nais, i. nait, n. naissons, v. naissez, i. naissent. 
 
 i Imperative: sache, sachons, sachez. 
 
 NOTE. Printed forms, ruled as above, and with space for writing out 
 five verbs, may be obtained from the Publishers for classroom use. 
 
 EXERCISE LII 
 
 NOTE. Before doing this and similar exercises, study the verbs required 
 in detail in the Alphabetical List. 
 
 Like connaitre is reconnaitre, recognize. 
 
 Distinguish savoir, know (what has been learned, or is realized by the 
 mind), know how to, can, from connaitre, know (be acquainted with, recog- 
 nize by the perceptions) : 
 
 Je connais cette dame de vue. I know that lady by sight. 
 
 Je ne sais pas ou elle demeure. I don't know where she lives. 
 
 Usually was born = est ne, of persons still living; otherwise etait ne 
 or naquit, but with numerous exceptions. 
 
134 LESSON LIII [ 160 
 
 A. (Oral.) Continue: 1. Je ne saurai (connaitrai) pas. 2. Je 
 connaitrais (saurais). 3. Je n'en savais rien. 4. Je n'y connaissais 
 personne. 5. Je suis ne(e) au 19 e siecle. 6. Je sais faire cela. 7. Je 
 ne connais pas cet endroit. 8. II est content que je sache ma lee. on, 
 . . . tu . . . ta. 9. Je ne les ai pas reconnus. 
 
 B. 1. What do you know of that affair? 2. I know nothing of it. 
 3. Do you not know me? 4. I do, but I didn't recognize you at 
 first. 5. They didn't know the date. 6. Would you know my 
 brother? 7. I am glad that you know your verses. 8. They didn't 
 know the city very well. 9. It is necessary that we should know 
 him. 10. In what year were you born? 11. I was born in the last 
 year of the 19th century. 
 
 C. 1. I was acquainted with that lady. 2. My mother knew her 
 very well. 3. They will not know where we are. 4. He would 
 not know where to find us. 5. I wish you to know your lessons for 
 to-morrow. 6. I knew nobody at the concert. 7. William I was 
 born in 1027. 8. Do you know at what o'clock the train arrived? 
 9. My uncle knows America well. 10. I didn't know whether you 
 would recognize me. 11. I was the first to recognize you. 12. He 
 didn't know how to do his work. 13. The teacher was glad that 
 we knew our lessons to-day. 
 
 LESSON LIII 
 
 160. Agreement of Verb and Subject. Review 4 and ob^ 
 serve : 
 
 1. The agreement of the verb with a simple subject: 
 
 Le peuple frangais est vif . The French people are lively. 
 
 La plupart du monde le croit. Most people believe it. 
 
 La plupart (des hommes) le croient. Most men believe it. 
 
 (a) A collective noun singular requires a verb singular; so also for col- 
 lectives in general, if limited by de + a singular. 
 
 (6) Otherwise the agreement is usually with the sense as in English, ex- 
 ample 3. 
 
161] LESSON LIU 135 
 
 2. The agreement of the verb with a compound subject: 
 Toi et moi (nous) le croyons. You and I believe it. 
 
 Vous et lui (vous) Favez vu. You and he have seen it. 
 
 Sa sceur et lui sont venus. His sister and he have come. 
 
 L'un ou Fautre Faura. One or the other will have it. 
 
 Ni Fun ni Fautre ne sont bons. Neither are good. 
 
 (a) The verb is regularly plural, unless, as in Ex. 4, one subject excludes 
 the other; for agreement when the subjects are of different persons* observe 
 Ex. 1 and 2, usually with redundant nous, vous. 
 
 161. Position of Subject. Apart from interrogations (cf. 
 8), the subject often follows the verb, as in the following: 
 
 Fais comme moi, dit-il. Do as I do, said he. 
 
 Que veux-tu? demanda le fils. What do you wish? asked the son. 
 
 A peine le jour fut-il arrive. Hardly had the day arrived. 
 
 Aussi mon ami est-il venu. Hence my friend came. 
 
 Peut-etre a-t-il raison. 1 
 
 -r, A ,., . Perhaps he is right. 
 
 Peut-etre qu'il a raison. J 
 
 II fera ce que peut faire un homme He will do what a man who re- 
 
 qui se respecte. spects himself can do. 
 
 Je ne sais pas oft est ma mere. / don't know where my mother is. 
 
 C'est en lui qu'espere son ami. It is in him that his friend hopes. 
 
 But: C'est en lui qu'elle espere. It is in him that she hopes. 
 
 (a) In remarks explanatory of quotation, as in English, Ex. 1 and 2. 
 
 (6) Often when an adverb heads the clause, Ex. 3, 4 and 5; always so for 
 aussi, hence, Ex. 4, but never for peut-etre que, Ex. 6. 
 
 (c) A subject (not a personal pronoun) often follows the verb in a relative 
 clause or after c'est que, Ex. 7, 8 and 9. 
 
 EXERCISE LIII 
 
 A. 1. The American people like winter sports. 2. A part of 
 our family live in the country. 3. This kind of pears is always 
 dear. 4. You and he are always together. 5. You and I have 
 always been good friends. 6. Neither (the one nor the other) of 
 the pictures has been sold. 7. Few people (gens) know Paris better 
 than he. 8. If I do this, answered he, I shall lose my time. 9. Per- 
 haps we shall catch the train; let us hasten. 10. He will do for 
 (pour) me all that a good friend can do. 11. My mother is kind to 
 everybody; hence she is loved by all. 12. This dealer makes large 
 
136 LESSON LIV [ 162 
 
 profits; hence he is becoming rich. 13. Where is your hat? I asked. 
 14. I know where my hat is, he replied, but I don't know where my 
 gloves are. 
 
 B. 1. The French people love the theatre. 2. How is your 
 father? my mother asked him. 3. He is not very well, he replied. 
 
 4. The man was running very fast; perhaps he had stolen something. 
 
 5. Do you remember what they were doing? 6. Does not everybody 
 love his country? 7. The architect will oversee what the workmen 
 are doing. 8. You and he were present at the ball, were you not? 
 9. He and I were there and also many of our acquaintances. 10. Will 
 you and your friend not come to see us when you are in town? 
 11. Do you know what I wish? 12. Do you know what that man 
 wants who is knocking at the door? 13. Do you know where the 
 reading room is? 14. Is it in this house that your uncle and aunt 
 live? 
 
 LESSON LIV 
 
 162. Principal Parts of pouvoir, 'be able,' etc.; vouloir, 
 'wish/ 'will/ 'like,' etc.; voir, 'see' 
 
 pouvoir pouvant pu peux or puis pus 
 
 vouloir voulant voulu veux voulus 
 
 voir voyant vu vois vis 
 
 EXERCISE LIV 
 
 (The irregular verbs in this and following exercises should be written out 
 in full or practised orally according to the model at 159.) 
 
 A. (Oral.) Continue throughout the tense: 1. Je pourrai (voudrai). 
 
 2. Je voudrais (pourrais). 3. Je verrai (verrais). 4. Je voulais 
 (pouvais, voyais). 5. Je peux (veux, vois). 6. Je pus (voulus, vis). 
 7. Que je pusse (voulusse, visse). 8. Que je puisse (voie). 
 
 B. 1. I am not able to do that. 2. If I (you, he, we) were able. 
 
 3. Have you been able? 4. He (you, they) would be able. 5. What 
 do they wish? 6. I (he, we, you, they) did not wish to travel. 
 7. He (they) would like to remain here. 8. What books have 
 
165] LESSON LV 137 
 
 you seen? 9. Shall I see you to-morrow? 10. What do you see? 
 11. I see nothing. 12. If they had been here, I should have seen 
 them. 
 
 C. 1. He (you, they) would like to study. 2. What have you 
 seen? 3. He wishes me to see his pictures. 4. I wish them to see 
 my garden. 5. He would see you if he were not ill. 6. They will 
 see you if they can. 7. I wished to start yesterday, but I was not 
 able. 8. They will not be able to sell their house. 9. Shall we 
 be able to catch the train? 10. Do what you wish (Jut.). 11. The 
 carpenter wasn't able to carry the board; it was too heavy. 
 
 LESSON LV 
 
 163. Auxiliary Function. Several verbs, when followed di- 
 rectly by an infinitive, have a sort of auxiliary function, and 
 serve to form verb-phrases of an idiomatic character. 
 
 164. Vouloir, 'will,' 'wish (want, desire) to,' etc. 
 
 II ne veut pas vous voir. He will not (doesn't wish) to see you. 
 
 II vous parlera demain. He will speak to you to-morrow. 
 
 II ne voulait pas partir. He was unwilling to (wouldn't) go. 
 
 II voudrait (bien) le savoir. He would like to know it. 
 
 II aurait voulu venir. He would have liked to come. 
 
 (a) Distinguish will of futurity, Ex. 2, from will of purpose, Ex. 1. 
 
 (b) Distinguish would of the imperfect, Ex. 3, from would of the condi- 
 tional, Ex. 4 and 5. 
 
 165. Pouvoir, ' can,' 'be able to,' 'be permitted to,' 'may,' etc. 
 
 Je peux faire cela moi-me'me. / can do that myself. 
 
 Est-ce que je puis entrer? May I come (go) in? 
 
 Je ne pouvais pas lire la lettre. / couldn't read the letter. 
 
 Je n'ai pas pu le faire. I could not (was unable to) do it. 
 
 II pourrait venir s'il voulait. He could come if he would. 
 
 Aurait-il pu venir ce soir? Could he have come this evening? 
 
 Pourrais-je' vous demander ceci? Might (could) I ask you this? 
 
 (a) Pouvoir = can or may, Ex. 1 and 2. 
 
 (b) Distinguish could = was able in a past tense, Ex. 3 and 4, from could 
 = would be able of the conditional, Ex. 5 and 6. 
 
 (c) Note the English rendering of the conditional in Ex. 7. 
 
138 LESSON LV [ 166 
 
 166. Savoir, i know,' ' know how to,' ' can,' etc. 
 
 II salt ecrire. He can (knows how to) write. 
 
 II est malade et ne peut pas He is ill, and cannot write this 
 
 ecrire ce soir. evening. 
 
 Je ne saurais le croire. I cannot believe it. 
 
 (a) .distinguish can = know how to, has learned how to, Ex. 1, from can of 
 physical ability, Ex. 2. 
 
 (6) Note the English rendering of the conditional in Ex. 3. 
 
 EXERCISE LV 
 
 aider, help la fourchette, fork 
 
 Parmoire, f., cupboard intelligent, intelligent 
 
 arranger, arrange Jeanne, Jane 
 
 Passiette, f ., plate le menage, household 
 
 le couteau, knife la nappe, tablecloth (white) 
 le convert, cover (dishes, etc., la peur, fear 
 
 for one i^erson) le tiroir, drawer 
 la cuiher, spoon 
 
 de peur de, for fear 'of; mettre la nappe, lay the table (cloth),- ^. the 
 table; faire le menage, keep house; cafe au lait, coffee with milk; 
 arranger les converts, arrange the dishes (in setting the table) 
 
 A. Continue: 1. Je sais compter jusqu'a cent, tu. 2. Je voudrais 
 bien y aller. 3. J'aurais voulu y aller si j'avais pu, tu . . . tu. 4. Je 
 pourrais y aller si je voulais, tu . . . tu. 5. Je ne pouvais pas sortir. 
 6. Je ferai ce que je voudrai, tu . . . tu. 7. Aurais-je pu faire cela? 
 8. Je ne peux pas ecrire parce que je suis malade, tu . . . tu. 
 
 B. 1. Jeanne est une petite fille habile et intelligente. 2. Elle 
 sait deja lire et e'crire, mais elle ne peut pas aller tous les jours a 
 1'ecole. 3. Elle voudrait savoir faire le menage. 4. Et sa mere 
 voudrait aussi qu'elle sache cela. 5. Tous les matins elle se leve 
 de bonne heure pour qu'elle puisse aider sa mere. 6. Elle sait mettre 
 la nappe et arranger les converts. 7. Elle sait dans quels tiroirs se 
 trouvent les serviettes, les couteaux, les fourchettes et les cuillers. 
 8. Si elle etait plus grande, elle pourrait prendre les asjsiettes et les 
 tasses qui sont dans la grande armoire. 9. Sa mere ne veut pas 
 qu'elle y touche de peur de les casser. 10. Son pere lui dit 
 quelquefois: "Jeanne, si tu savais me faire un bon cafe au lait, tu 
 serais une bonne petite menagere." 
 
167] LESSON LVI 139 
 
 C. (Oral.) 1. Savez-vous parler frangais? 2. Savez-vous 1'ecrire 
 aussi? 3. Pourriez-vous ecrire line lettre en frangais? 4. Sauriez- 
 vous me dire si votre frere est deja leve? 5.. Pourquoi Jeanne se 
 leve-t-elle de bonne heure? 6. Que sait-elle f aire ? 7. Quepourrait- 
 elle faire si elle etait plus grande? 8. Pourquoi sa mere ne veut- 
 elle pas qu'elle touche a la vaisselle? etc. 
 
 D. 1. I cannot go to school to-day. 2. I should like to go (there) 
 every day. 3. I can read, but I cannot write yet. 4. If I could go 
 to school every day, I should soon learn to write. 5. My mother 
 would like me to know how to keep house. 6. I know how to lay 
 the table. 7. I cannot get the cups and plates in the cupboard. 
 8. My mother doesn't want me to touch them. 9. But I can get 
 the knives, forks and spoons. 10. I know in which drawer they are. 
 
 11. If I were older, I could make a cup of coffee for my father. 
 
 12. I can't make the coffee yet; I am too young. 13. My mother 
 says that if I could make the coffee, I sho Id be a g )d i: ttle house- 
 wif 14. I should like to learn to make it. 
 
 j. 1. My sister can sing very well. 2. But she is ill and can't 
 sing this evening. 3. She would like to sing if she could. 4. She 
 helps her mother to (a) arrange the dishes. 5. She can't get the 
 dishes (vaisselle) in the cupboard for fear of breaking them. 6. We 
 cannot always do what we should like. 7. But we shall do what 
 we can (fut.) . 8. I tried to learn my lesson, but I couldn't. 9. Could 
 you tell me what time it is? 10. I cannot; my watch is broken. 
 11. If I had my dress coat, I could go to the ball. 12. But the tailor 
 couldn't bring it; it wasn't ready. 13. He would have brought it 
 if he had been able. 14. We should like to go to Europe this summer 
 if we could. 15. Couldn't you go with us? 
 
 LESSON LVI 
 
 167. Aller, 'go'; devoir, 'owe,' 'be obliged'; 
 venir, 'come' 
 
 aller allant alle vais allai 
 
 devoir devant du (/. due) dois dus 
 
 venir venant venu viens vins 
 
140 LESSON LVII [ 168 
 
 
 
 EXERCISE LVI 
 
 A. (Oral.) Continue: 1. J'irai (irais) le voir. 2. J'allais et venais 
 tout le temps. 3. Je ne lui dois (devais, devrai) rien. 4. Je vien- 
 drai les voir. 5. Je m'en suis alle(e). 6. Je suis venu(e) a pied. 
 
 7. J'y vais tout de suite. 8. J'irai 1 (irais) avec plaisir. 9. Vas-y. 
 10. Viens. 11. II faut que j'y aille (vienne). 12. J'y allai. 13. Je 
 vins ici tout seul. 14. II fallait que j'y allasse (vinsse). 15. II est 
 fache que je doive partir, . . . tu. 
 
 B. 1. Where are you going? 2. I am going home. 3. He owes 
 me ten francs. 4. You owe me nothing. 5. Come (2d sing.) 
 with me. 6. Do not go there. 7. We shall go to the concert. 
 
 8. They will come to see us. 9. I should go if I could. 10. Come 
 next week. 11. Go there at once. 12. Go away (s'en aller). 13. I 
 desired him to go to the market. 14. They came early. 15. They 
 have come. 
 
 C. 1. We are going to have some friends to dinner. 2. Whom 
 are you going to invite? 3. We shall owe them much money. 4. I 
 owed you nothing. 5. When will they come? 6. When did they 
 (/.) come? 7. Pay me what you owe me. 8. Come at once. 9. I 
 must (use ilfaut) go away. 10. He must come to see us. 11. Owe 
 nothing to anybody. 12. They (/.) have gone away. 13. They 
 came in [a] carriage. 14. It was necessary for him to come. 15. He 
 didn't owe me anything. 
 
 LESSON LVII 
 
 168. Devoir = owe, but observe also its force in various tenses 
 when followed directly by an infinitive: 
 
 PRESENT: Je dois parler. / am to (have to, must) speak. 
 
 IMPF. : Je devais parler. / was (had, was obliged) to speak. 
 
 FUTURE : Je devrai parler. 7 shall have (be obliged) to speak. 
 CONDL. : Je devrais parler. / ought to (should) speak. 
 
 PAST INDEP. : J'ai dti. parler. 7 have had (been obliged) to speak, 
 
 had to speak, must have spoken. 
 
 PAST DEF. : Je dus parler. 7 had (was obliged} to speak. 
 
 CONDL. ANT. : J'aurais dti. parler. 7 ought to have (should have) spoken. 
 
 i Aller regularly requires a complement, but y so used is omitted before irai, etc., 
 irais, etc. 
 
170] LESSON LVII 141 
 
 169. Aller. The present and imperfect + a direct infinitive 
 give a sort of immediate future, like go, etc., in English: 
 
 II va Facheter. He is going (is about) to buy it. 
 
 Nous allions partir. We were (just) about to start. 
 
 II allait se noyer. He was on the point of drowning. 
 
 Allez le voir demain. Go to (go and) see him to-morrow. 
 
 170. Venir. Observe its force when followed by an infini- 
 tive (1) without a preposition, (2) with de, (3) with &, the two 
 latter in the present and imperfect: 
 
 II est venu me voir. He came to see (came and saw) me. 
 
 Je viens de les voir. I have just seen them. 
 
 Je venais de les voir. I had just seen them. 
 
 S'il venait & voir le livre. // he happened to see the book. 
 
 EXERCISE LVII 
 
 apres-demain, the day after to- le menu, menu, bill of fare 
 
 morrow la noix, walnut 
 
 avant-hier, the day before yesterday la personne, person 
 
 boire, irreg., drink le potage, soup 
 
 car, for les preparatifs, m., preparations 
 
 s'enrhumer, catch (take) cold le radis, radish 
 
 Pentree, f., entree le rdti, roast 
 
 la fete, festivity, holiday la salade, salad 
 
 la glace, ice (cream) la sardine, sardine 
 
 la grand'mere, grandmother servir, irreg., serve 
 
 le grand-pere, grandfather la sorte, sort, kind 
 
 le hors-d'oeuvre, side dish, relish t6t, soon 
 
 Lucie, Lucy la visite, visit, call 
 d'ici 1, from now till then 
 
 A. Continue: 1. Je venais de diner chez eux, tu. 2. Je dois m'oc- 
 cuper du menu. 3. J'aurais du commencer plus tot. 4. Je devais 
 y aller mais je ne pouvais pas, tu . . . tu. 5. J'ai du partir de bonne 
 heure. 6. Je devrais faire mes preparatifs, tu . . . tes. 7. Je 
 viens de leur parler. 8. Je vais m'occuper de cette affaire. 9. Je 
 suis venu(e) le voir. 10. Si je venais a le voir. 
 
 B. 1. Nous venons de diner chez mon grand-pere et ma grand' 
 mere. 2. Toute la famille devait y etre, mais quelques-uns des 
 
142 LESSON LVII [ 170 
 
 parents ne pouvaient pas venir. 3. Mon pere s'etait enrhume et a 
 du partir avant la fin. 4. Avant-hier ma tante Lucie, a qui nous 
 devions line visite, a donne* une reception. 5. Comme c'est la saison 
 des fetes de famille, tous nos parents viendront diner chez nous 
 mardi prochain. 6. D'ici la ma mere et mes soeurs vont avoir beau- 
 coup a faire. 7. Demain ou apres-demain elles doivent commencer 
 leurs preparatifs. 8. Si on venait a oublier quelque chose, ma mere 
 serait tres fachee. 9. Elles auraient du peut-etre commencer plus 
 tot, car il va y avoir (to be) une vingtaine de personnes au diner. 
 10. Ma mere doit s'occuper du menu. 11. Pour un bon diner on 
 devrait servir d'abord un hors-d'oeuvre de radis, de sardines ou quel- 
 que chose de la sorte, et puis un bon potage. 12. Apres le potage 
 on devrait avoir une entree, des legumes, un bon roti et de la salade. 
 13. Ensuite on devrait servir des glaces, des fruits, des noix, et une 
 tasse de cafe noir. 
 
 C. (Oral on B.) 
 
 D. 1. My grandfather and grandmother have just dined with 
 us. 2. It (ce) was to be a family dinner. 3. The sons, daughters 
 and their children were to be there. 4. Some of our relatives had 
 to refuse the invitation. 5. My uncle had caught cold and was 
 obliged to stay at home. 6. We are all to go to my aunt Lucy's 
 reception the day after to-morrow. 7. One should attend these 
 family festivities, you know. 8. The whole family is to dine at my 
 aunt's next Monday. 9. She is going to see about the menu at once. 
 10. My mother was to help her, but she can't. 11. She fell while 
 taking a walk. 12. She ought to have gone to bed at once. 13. You 
 ought to take a little of this salad, it is very good. 14. May I offer 
 you some fruit or walnuts? 15. One shouldn't drink too much 
 black coffee. 
 
 E. 1. We have invited twenty people (personne) to dinner. 
 2. We shall first have radishes or sardines and then a soup. 3. The 
 roast will come after the entree. 4. There will be several sorts of 
 fruits. 5. The ices and coffee will be served at the end. 6. He ought 
 to come sooner. 7. He ought to have come sooner. 8. Here is a 
 twenty-five franc note which I have just found. 9. It must be 
 yours, 10. Yes, it is mine, I must have lost it yesterday. 11. We 
 
171] LESSON LVIII 143 
 
 were to start for the country the day before yesterday. 12. Come 
 and dine with us next Sunday. 13. You owe us a visit. 14. You 
 ought not to have spoken of it. 15. You ought to begin your prep- 
 arations at once. 16. What are we to do now? The train has gone. 
 17. It has just gone. 18. It had just gone when I arrived at the 
 station. 19. We shall have to wait for another train. 
 
 LESSON LVIII 
 
 171. Dire, 'say,' 'tell'; faire, 'do,' 'make'; mettre, 'put,' 
 ' place ' ; prendre, ' take ' 
 
 dire disant dit dis dis 
 
 faire faisant fait fais fis 
 
 mettre mettant mis mets mis 
 
 prendre prenant pris prends pris 
 
 EXERCISE LVIII 
 adieu or au revoir, good-bye 
 
 A. (Oral.) Continue: 1. Je mets (prends, dis). 2. Je disais 
 (faisais, mettais, prenais). 3. Je prendrai (mettrai, ferai, dirai). 
 4. Je fis (mis, pris, dis). 5. Je mettrais (dirais, ferais, prendrais). 
 6. Je me suis mis(e) a table. 7. Je lui ai dit adieu (au revoir). 
 8. Que je mette (dise, fasse, prenne). 9. Que je disse (fisse, misse, 
 prisse). 10. Prends. 11. Dis. 12. Mets. 13. Fais. 
 
 B. 1. What do you (will you, would you) say? 2. What have you 
 said (done, taken)? 3. The others will take (say) that. 4. Would 
 they say (do) the same thing? 5. I was taking a walk. 6. What was 
 he saying? 7. He has put [on] his overcoat. 8. Tell me what he 
 has said (done, taken). 9. What have you done? 10. Take my 
 stick; don't take John's. 11. We wish you to say (do, take) what 
 you wish (fut.). 12. Do you wish me to set the table? 
 
 C. 1. Say what you will (fut.). 2. They have said (done, taken) 
 that. 3. Have you put the plates on the table? 4. Saying that, 
 he went away. 5. I shall take some salad. 6. They would say the 
 
144 LESSON' LIX [ 172 
 
 same thing. 7. They were saying good-bye. 8. They wouldn't 
 take any wine. 9. Take my pen. 10. Put the cups and plates on 
 the table. 11. Let us take a walk. 12. Let us tell them that. 
 13. I wished him to tell me all (tout). 14. I wished him to take my 
 place. 
 
 LESSON LIX 
 
 172. Faire causatively. 1. This .verb + an infinitive cor- 
 responds to a great variety of expressions in English which may 
 be explained by the meaning cause to do or be done: 
 
 J'ai fait ecrire les enfants. / have made the children write. 
 
 II les fera e"couter. He will make them listen. 
 
 La robe qu'elle s'est fait faire. The dress she got made for herself. 
 
 (a) The past participle fait thus used is invariable. 
 
 2. A governed substantive follows the infinitive, but a gov- 
 erned conjunctive personal pronoun goes with faire: 
 
 Faites venir la domestique. Have the servant (get the servant to) 
 
 come. 
 Faites-la venir. Have her come (send for her). 
 
 3. If the infinitive with faire has a direct object, its per- 
 sonal object must be indirect: 
 
 Je fis lire mon fils. / made my son read. 
 
 Je fis lire ce livre a mon fils. I made my son read this book. 
 
 Faites-le-lui lire. Make him (get him to) read it. 
 
 (a) Possible ambiguity is sometimes avoided by par, e.g. II fit porter 
 le sac par le guide, He had the sack carried by the guide. 
 
 (b) The infinitive of certain reflexives (s'asseoir, se souvenir, se taire, 
 etc.) regularly omits se, e.g. Faites asseoir vos amis, Have your friends 
 sit down. 
 
 (c) Laisser, let, entendre, hear, voir, see, sometimes have the same 
 construction as faire: Laissez-leur (or -les) faire cela, Let them do that; 
 J'ai entendu dire cela a mon frere or J'ai entendu mon frere dire cela, I 
 heard my brother say that. 
 
172] LESSON LIX 145 
 
 EXERCISE LIX 
 
 blanchir, whiten, wash (linen) mis, p. part, of mettre, dressed 
 
 brosser, brush la mise, dress, manner of dressing 
 
 le coiffeur, barber, hairdresser la negligence, carelessness 
 
 le complet, suit (of clothes} la pake, pair 
 
 le cordonnier, shoemaker le pourboire, gratuity, tip 
 
 le faux col, collar (detachable) la proprete, cleanliness, neatness, 
 
 le garcon coiffeur, journeyman tidiness 
 
 barber respecter, respect 
 
 les habits, m., clothes soigner, take care of ^ 
 
 Julien, Julian soigneusement, carefully 
 
 le linge, linen le soulier, shoe 
 
 la manchette, cuff le vetement, sing., garment, suit, 
 la mesure, measure pi. clothes 
 
 faire payer, charge; faire voir, show; laisser a desirer, leave (something) 
 
 to be desired, not be satisfactory; se laisser aller a, yield to, give way to 
 
 A. Continue: 1. Je me fais respecter. 2. Je ferai travailler 
 les ouvners. 3. Je vais me faire faire une robe, tu . . . te. 4. Je 
 me suis fait faire un complet, tu . . . t'. 5. Je devrais me faire 
 couper les cheveux, tu . . . te. 6. Je leur ai fait payer le prix. 7. Je 
 me suis fait payer, tu . . . t'. 8. Fais-les (impve.) travailler. 9. Je 
 vais leur faire voir les beautes de la ville. 
 
 B. 1. Tout jeune homme devrait etre bien mis. 2. On ne se 
 fait pas respecter en se laissant aller a la negligence. 3. II faut 
 qu'on fasse blanchir soigneusement son linge. 4. Les faux cols et 
 les manchettes font voir tout de suite si on aime la proprete. 5. Mon 
 frere Julien soigne assez bien ses vetements. 6. Cependant sa mise 
 laisse un peu a desirer, et sa mere lui a dit d' aller chez le tailleur se 
 faire faire un complet. 7. Le tailleur lui a fait voir des etoffes, et 
 puis il a pris sa mesure. 8. Le tailleur lui fera payer le complet 
 cent dix francs. 9. Ensuite, chez le cordonnier, il s'est fait prendre 
 mesure pour une paire de souliers. 10. Le cordonnier se la (or 
 les) fera payer vingt francs. 11. Entrant chez le coiffeur il s'est 
 fait couper les cheveux. 12. II paie la coupe de cheveux dix sous. 
 13. Apres s'etre fait brosser ses habits il donne quatre sous de pour- 
 boire au gargon coiffeur. 
 
 C. (Oral on B.) 
 
146 LESSON LX [ 173 
 
 D. 1. That young man is not well dressed. 2. He is going to 
 get himself a suit made. 3. He will have his measure taken at the 
 tailor's, 4. Have you had your measure taken? 5. I have had 
 (myself) a suit made. 6. I didn't like the- materials the tailor 
 showed me. 7. He is going to charge me 125 francs. 8. Here is 
 the pair of shoes which I have had made (for myself). 9. You 
 ought to get your hair cut; it is too long. 10. I shall get it cut to- 
 morrow. 11. After having my clothes brushed, I shall give the 
 barber a tip. 12. Everybody should be well dressed. 13. One must 
 make oneself respected in this world. 14. Get these collars and 
 cuffs washed. 15. I have had our linen washed. 
 
 E. 1. Take good care of (soigner bien) your clothes. 2. Your 
 dress (mise) is not very satisfactory. 3. Go to the shoemaker's to 
 get yourself a pair of shoes made. 4. How much am I to pay? 
 5. He will charge you 25 francs, but it (ce) is cheap. 6. I shall make 
 them study. 7. I shall make them write their exercises. 8. Get the 
 tailor to come. 9. Get these collars washed carefully. 10. Your 
 cuffs are not clean. 11. Cleanliness causes a young man to be re- 
 spected. 12. Show me some (de) of your best cloths. 13. How 
 much will you charge me [for] the suit? 14. This dress which I 
 got (myself) made in Paris doesn't fit me. 15. I shall get myself 
 another made as soon as I arrive in New York. 
 
 LESSON LX 
 
 173. Envoy er, 'send'; recevoir, 'receive'; mouvoir, 'move'? 
 mourir, 'die' 
 
 envoyer envoyant envoye envoie envoyai 
 
 recevoir recevant regu regois regus 
 
 mouvoir mouvant mti (/. mue) meus mus 
 
 mourir mourant mort incurs mourus 
 
 Like recevoir: s'apercevoir (de), perceive. 
 
 EXERCISE LX 
 
 le cadeau, present, gift la poste, post office 
 
 les nouvelles, f., news la soif, thirst 
 
 mourir de soif, be very thirsty 
 
174] LESSON LXI 147 
 
 A. (Oral.) Continue: 1. Je m'en apergois. 2. Je lui enverrai 
 (enverrais) la lettre. 3. Je recevrai quelque chose. 4. Je meurs 
 (mourais) de soif. 5. Je recevais de bonnes nouvelles. 6. II veut 
 que je regoive de bons gages. 7. II faudra que je meure. 8. Que 
 je regusse. 
 
 B. 1. I send (shall send) my son to school. 2. He (you, they) 
 will receive a gift. 3. What news have you received? 4. My poor 
 aunt died yesterday. 5. All men will die. 6. They (we) were very 
 thirsty. 7. They (/.) would have died. 8. Do you wish me to 
 send the letters to the post office? 9. They (we, I) perceive (of) 
 nothing. 10. If he dies, his family will have nothing. 11. I wished 
 him to receive good wages. 
 
 C. 1. They receive news every day. 2. Put the letters you have 
 received into this drawer. 3. My father will send me money. 4. I 
 shall receive it soon. 5. All men are born and die. 6. His family 
 knew he was dying. 7. They said he would die. 8. Many persons 
 have died. 9. Napoleon III died in 1873. 10. I wish him to re- 
 ceive this letter to-day. 11. I should like Mr. Liard to send me a 
 good roast. 
 
 LESSON LXI 
 
 174. Additional Verb-Phrases. Observe the following: 
 
 faire savoir, inform, let one know entendre parler de, hear (spoken) 
 entendre dire, hear (say or said) of 
 
 aller chercher, go for, go and get faire attendre, keep (one) waiting 
 
 envoyer chercher, send for venir chercher, come for 
 
 venir prendre, come for, come and faire venir, send for 
 get 
 
 EXERCISE LXI 
 
 1'accident, m., accident Marcel, Marcellus 
 
 Papres-midi, f., afternoon le neveu, nephew 
 
 aussitot que, as soon as la niece, niece 
 
 changer, change Renee, Renee (name, /.) 
 
 le courrier, courier, post, mail retard (en), late 
 
 se demander, ask oneself, wonder telegraphier, telegraph 
 
 exact, exact, precise telephoner, telephone 
 j'ai rec.u de ses nouvelles, I have heard from (received news of) him 
 
148 LESSON LXI [ 174 
 
 A. Continue: 1. Je regois souvent de ses nouvelles. 2. Je vais 
 le lui faire savoir. 3. J'en ai souvent entendu parler. 4. J'en- 
 tends dire que le train est en retard. 5. Je me demande si c'est vrai. 
 6. Fais-les (impve.) attendre. 7. Je ferai venir une voiture. 8. J'en- 
 verrai chercher mes neveux, tu . . . tes. 9. Je suis venu(e) les cher- 
 cher. 10. Je vais les chercher tout de suite. 
 
 B. 1. J'ai regu des nouvelles de mon neveu Marcel il y a quelques 
 semaines. 2. J'ai regu encore de ses nouvelles par le courrier de 
 ce matin. 3. II me fait savoir par sa lettre, et il me telegraphic 
 aussi, qu'il arrivera avec ma ni&ee Renee cette apres-midi. 4. Mais 
 on entend tellement parler d'accidents! 5. On ne sait jamais ce 
 qui peut arriver. 6. J'entends dire que leur train, celui de 5 h. 45 
 du soir, est presque tous les jours en retard. 7. Je me demande 
 s'il va arriver a 1'heure exacte aujourd'hui. 8. Je ne voudrais pas 
 qu'on me fasse attendre, car je vais les chercher a la gare. 9. J'ai 
 entendu dire que Marcel et Renee sont beaucoup changes. 10. Je 
 ne les reconnaitrai plus peut-etre. 11. Mais je telephonerai a mon 
 mari de venir nous chercher a la gare. 12. II pourra envoyer cher- 
 cher une voiture qui ira le prendre a son bureau. 13. II m'aidera a 
 les reconnaitre. 14. Aussitot que nous les aurons trouves nous les 
 amenerons chez nous et nous ferons venir leurs bagages plus tard. 
 
 C. (Oral.) 1. Quand avez-vous regu des nouvelles de votre 
 neveu et de votre niece? 2. Avez-vous regu de leurs nouvelles 
 aujourd'hui? 3. Quand vont-ils arriver? 4. De quel train parlez- 
 vous? 5. Arrive-t-il generalement a 1'heure exacte? 6. Qui allez- 
 vous chercher a la gare? 7. Votre niece est-elle beaucoup changee? 
 8. La reconnaitrez-vous sans difficulte? 9. Qui doit envoyer cher- 
 cher une voiture? 10. Que ferez-vous quand vous aurez trouve* 
 votre niece? 11. Quand enverrez-vous chercher ses bagages? etc. 
 
 D. 1. We have just received news of my nephew and niece. 
 2. We don't often get (receive) news of them. 3. Their letter ar- 
 rived by this morning's mail. 4. They inform us that they are 
 going to arrive this afternoon. 5. If the train is not late, they will 
 be here at 5.25 P.M. 6. I wonder if the train will arrive on time 
 to-day. 7. I have heard that it is almost always late. 8. My 
 husband and I (we) are going to get them at the station. 9. They 
 have telegraphed us that they will be late. 10. If they are much 
 
175] LESSON LXII 149 
 
 changed, we shall not recognize them perhaps. 11. I wonder if 
 they will recognize us. 12, Your father has gone to get a carriage. 
 13. It will come and get us here. 14. We shall start as soon as it 
 comes. 15. First we shall bring my niece here, and then we shall 
 send for her baggage. 
 
 E. 1. Our friends heard from their brother six weeks ago. 2. They 
 heard from him again by yesterday evening's mail. 3. He is going 
 to arrive by the 6.00 P.M. train. 4. His sister will come with him. 
 5. . We have heard of a great many accidents, have we not? 6. The 
 trains are often late. 7. We were wondering whether their train 
 would be late. 8. We should not like to be kept (use on) waiting. 
 9. We are going to get our nephew and niece at the station. 10. We 
 have heard that they are much changed. 11. We can't (Jut.) recog- 
 nize them perhaps. 12. Let us telephone to our father. 13. He 
 will come and get us. 14. He will send for a carriage. 15. The 
 carriage will come and get us. 
 
 LESSON LXII 
 
 175. Crozre, 'believe,' 'think'; lire, 'read* 
 
 croire croyant cru crois cms 
 
 lire lisant lu lis lus 
 
 Like lire: elire, elect. 
 
 EXERCISE LXII 
 le journal, newspaper lentement, slowly 
 
 A. (Oral.) Continue: 1. Je ne crois pas cette nouvelle. 2. Je ne 
 lis (lisais) pas bien. 3. Je serai elu. 4. II faut que je lise d'autres 
 livres. 5. Je lirais plus si j'avais le temps, tu . . . tu. 6. Je ne croi- 
 rais pas tout cela. 7. Les journaux que j'ai lus. 8. Crois-y (believe 
 in it). 9. Lis beaucoup. 10. II voulait que je crusse cette histoire, 
 . . . tu. 11. Je lus la moitie du chapitre. 
 
 B. 1. Read more slowly. 2. They (you, we) read too fast. 
 3. By reading we learn to read. 4. What do you wish me (tiiem, 
 him) to read? 5. I (we) shall read those newspapers. 6. They 
 would read better if they read more slowly. 7. Believe me. 8. Let 
 
150 LESSON LXIII [ 176 
 
 us not believe them. 9. Would you believe it? 10. You don't 
 believe what I say. 11. We (I) shall never believe that story. 
 C. 1. He read (p. def.) the whole chapter. 2. They read (p. def.) 
 the half of it. 3. I wished him to read good books. 4. What 
 books have you read? 5. Charles used to read badly. 6. He reads 
 much better now. 7. What were you reading when I came in? 
 8. I was reading the newspaper. 9. I think it is going to rain. 
 10. They thought we were not coming. 11. I thought they would 
 be elected. 12. You thought I had gone away, didn't you? 
 
 LESSON LXIII 
 
 176. Infinitive for Noun Clause. After verbs of declaring, 
 intending, thinking, hoping, the verb of a that clause in English 
 may often be rendered in French by a direct infinitive, but only 
 when both verbs in the sentence have the same subject: 
 
 Je croyais le voir passer. I thought (that) I saw him pass. 
 
 J'avoue 1'avoir oublie". / confess (that) I forgot it. 
 
 J'espere reussir. 7 hope (that) I shall succeed. 
 
 J'ai cru devoir rester. / thought (that) I ought to stay. 
 
 Je compte y e"tre. 7 expect (that) I shall be there. 
 
 But: Je crois qu'il est venu. / think (that) he has come. 
 
 (a) Such verbs are: affirmer, avouer, compter, croire, declarer, espe"rer, 
 
 3tC. 
 
 EXERCISE LXIII 
 
 avouer, declare, confess V election, f., election 
 
 bonjour, good morning, good day Pexamen, m., examination 
 
 le bulletin (de vote), ballot paper la majorite, majority 
 
 le candidat, candidate municipal, municipal 
 
 le citoyen, citizen occupe, busy 
 
 la commune, municipality se passer, be happening, be going on 
 
 compter, count, reckon, purpose, a propos (de), with regard (to), by 
 
 intend, expect the way 
 
 le conseiller, councillor Purne, L, urn, ballot box 
 
 deposer, deposit, cast (vote) le vote, voting 
 
 Pelecteur, m., elector voter, vote 
 
 & moins d'etre, if one (etc.) is net; je Pespere, 7 hope so; etre refuse, 
 fail (to pass an examination)^ il compte etre recu, he expects to pass 
 (at an examination) 
 
176] LESSON LXIII 151 
 
 A. Continue: 1. J'avoue 1'avoir oublie*. 2. Je comptais partir 
 ce soir. 3. J'ai cru 1'avoir vu passer. 4. Je crois pouvoir passer 
 Fexamen. 5. J'espere y reussir cette fois. 6. Je n'ai pas cru devoir 
 voter pour M. Liard. 7. Je ne compte pas etre e*lu. 8. Je crois 
 qu'il sera elu. 
 
 B. 1. Bonjour, Raymond, d'ou viens-tu? 2. Je viens du vil- 
 lage. 3. Je croyais t'avoir vu passer il y a une heure. 4. Qu'est-ce 
 qui se passe au village? 5. C'est le jour des elections. 6. On 
 e*lit les conseillers municipaux. 7. J'avoue avoir oublie cette 
 affaire importante. 8. J'etais si occupe a me preparer pour mes 
 'examens. 9. A moins d'etre bien prepare* on n'y re*ussit pas. 
 10. J'y ai deja e*te refuse. 11. J'espere y etre regu la prochaine 
 fois. 12. Mais a propos des elections, est-ce qu'il y a beaucoup de 
 candidats? 13. Oui, il y en a plusieurs; mon pere en est un, et 
 il compte etre elu cette fois. 14. Je Tespere bien. 15. Est-ce 
 que beaucoup des electeurs ont vote? 16. Oui, la majorite des 
 citoyens de la commune ont cru devoir deposer leurs bulletins 
 de vote dans Turne. 17. Alors Raymond dit "au revoir" et 
 s'en va. 
 
 C. (Oral.) 1. D'ou vient Raymond? 2. Quand 1'avez-vous vu 
 passer? 3. Qu'est-ce qui se passait au village? 4. Pourquoi aviez- 
 vous oublie les elections? 5. Avez-vous re*ussi aux examens? 
 6. Pourquoi? 7. Combien de candidats y avait-il aux examens? 
 8. Y ont-ils reussi tous? 9. Avez-vous deja vote aux elections? 
 10. Croyez-vous devoir toujours voter? 11. Ou depose-t-on son 
 bulletin de vote? etc. 
 
 D. 1. I saw many citizens going to the village yesterday to 
 (pour) vote. 2. We thought we saw you passing [by]. 3. We confess 
 we had forgotten the elections. 4. We were preparing (ourselves) 
 for our examinations. 5. If we are not well prepared (see B, 9), we 
 shall fail. 6. My brother has failed twice. 7. I hope he will succeed 
 this time. 8. He hopes he will succeed at his examinations. 9. Does 
 your uncle expect that he will be elected? 10. He does. 11. I 
 think I can vote to-morrow. 12. I think my uncle will have a con- 
 siderable majority. 13. How many municipal councillors are there 
 in this municipality? 
 
152 LESSON LXIV [ 177 
 
 E. 1. The thief confessed that he had stolen the money. 2. We 
 were very busy yesterday. 3. While the electors were voting we 
 were preparing (ourselves) for the examinations. 4. Vote for Mr. 
 Liard if you think you ought to do so (le). 5. He expects to be 
 elected. 6. I hope he will be elected. 7. I hope I shall be able to 
 take a trip next summer. 8. I hope you can (fut.) go with me. 
 9. Where do you expect to embark? 10. I expect I shall embark 
 at Havre. 11. With regard to your examinations, do you expect 
 to pass? 12. I do. 13. I expected to pass the last time, but I 
 failed. 14. I believe you will succeed this time. 15. Let us hope 
 so (le). 
 
 LESSON LXIV 
 
 177. Boire, 'drink'; coudre, 'sew'; moudre, 'grind'; 
 resoudre, 'resolve,' 'solve' 
 
 boire buvant bu bois bus 
 
 coudre cousant cousu couds cousis 
 
 moudre moulant' moulu mouds moulus 
 
 resoudre resolvant rSsolu rSsous rsolus 
 
 EXERCISE LXIV 
 le medecin, doctor le verre, glass 
 
 A. (Oral.) Continue: 1. Je bois (j'ai bu) du lait. 2. Bois un 
 verre d'eau. 3. Est-ce que je re*soudrai les problemes? 4. Je<ne 
 boirai (boirais) pas de vin. 5. Je buvais du the* ou du cafe au lait. 
 6. Je mouds (moulais) le ble*. 7. Je coupe et couds bien. 8. J'ai 
 resolu les problemes. 9. Je bus un verre de lait. 10. II faut que 
 je couse la robe. 
 
 B. 1. We (you, they) drink water. 2. Let him drink a glass of 
 milk.' 3. What were they drinking? 4. He never drank any wine. 
 5. The doctor wished him to drink a little wine. 6. The miller 
 grinds (has ground, will grind) the wheat. 7. Let him grind it. 
 
178] LESSON LXV 153 
 
 8. He (I) was grinding it. 9. We (you, they) sew and cut well. 
 
 10. Solve your problems. 11. I have solved mine. 12. Let us 
 drink a cup of coffee and milk before starting. 
 
 C. 1. I (we) shall not drink wine. 2. It is not necessary for us 
 to drink wine. 3. I should not drink wine if I were not ill. 4. If 
 you drank wine, you would be ill. 5. Don't drink wine; don't 
 drink any. 6. The dressmaker sews (has sewn, will sew) all day. 
 7. She (I) was sewing while you were reading. 8. Have the pupils 
 solved their problems? 9. The problems that they have solved 
 were not easy. 10. The miller ground the wheat to make flour. 
 
 11. The wheat was ground by the miller. 12. The dressmakers 
 sewed (p. def.) the ladies' silk dresses. 
 
 LESSON LXV 
 
 178. Use of Infinitive. 1. Review Lesson XXVI and observe 
 the following: 
 
 II a fini par m'insulter. He ended by insulting me or He 
 
 finally insulted me. 
 
 Je commencerai par apprendre / shall begin by. learning (or / shall 
 
 ma legon de frangais. first learn) my French lesson. 
 
 Je suis venu (pour) le consulter. I came (in order) to consult him. 
 
 II est trop fache pour ecouter. He is too angry to listen. 
 
 II est assez riche pour voyager. He is rich enough to travel. 
 
 (a) Par = by usually only with commencer and finir, Ex. 1 and 2. 
 
 (b) Pour emphasizes the purpose, with a verb of motion, Ex. 3 (cf. 170). 
 
 (c) To = pour, regularly after assez and trop, Ex. 4 and 5. 
 
 2. The infinitive often stands after prepositional phrases, of 
 which the last word is de or : 
 
 Je me depe 1 che de peur d'etre en I am hastening for fear of being late 
 
 retard. (for fear I shall, etc.). 
 
 Agissez de fagon a reussir. Act so as to succeed. 
 
 3. Observe the idiomatic distinctions in the infinitive con- 
 structions at the head of the Exercise below. 
 
154 LESSON LXV [ 178 
 
 EXERCISE LXV 
 
 afin de, in order to fatigue, tired 
 
 Palgebre, f ., algebra la jambe, leg 
 
 autant, as much latin, Latin 
 
 boiter, limp, be lame manquer, fail, miss 
 
 la cause, cause ordinairement, generally 
 
 egal, equal precedent, preceding 
 
 1'exemple, m., example probablement, probably 
 
 faillir, fail le vers, verse, line (of poetry) 
 
 a cause de, because (on account) of; cela m'est egal, that is all the same to 
 me, I don't care, etc.; aimer autant, like as well, just as soon; aimer 
 mieux, like better or prefer (to do), rather (do) ; j'ai fini de lire, / have 
 finished reading 
 
 j'ai failli tomber 
 
 j'sa pense tomber > I came very near (was on the point of) falling 
 
 j'ai manque de tomber J 
 
 A. Continue: 1. Je me suis d^peche" afin de finir. 2. Je suis trop 
 fatigue pour finir. 3. Je commengai par apprendre les vers. 4. J'ai- 
 merais autant partir tout de suite. 5. J'aimerais mieux rester a la 
 maison. 6. Je n'ai pas manque* le train. 7. Je finirai par resoudre 
 mes problemes. 8. J'ai fini de travailler pour ce soir. 9. Depeche- 
 toi de peur d'arriver en retard. 10. J'ai pense (or failli) tomber. 
 
 B. 1. A notre ecole les classes commencent a neuf heures. 2. Afin 
 de pouvoir preparer tous nos devoirs nous en faisons une partie le 
 soir precedent. 3. Quelquefois nous sommes trop fatigues pour les 
 faire tous. 4. Nous commengons generalement par preparer la 
 legon de latin. 5. J'aimerais autant commencer par resoudre nos 
 problemes d'algebre. 6. Mais mon frre aime mieux, faire d'abord 
 le latin. 7. Tout cela m'est 6gal si je prepare mes autres lemons. 
 8. L'autre jour par exemple nous n'avons pas pu terminer nos pro- 
 blemes a cause du latin. 9. Nous finissons ordinairement par notre 
 legon d'anglais. 10. On finit de travailler chez nous a dix heures. 
 11. Mon pere s'amuse quelquefois a lire les journaux jusqu'a onze 
 heures. 12. Nous nous reveillons souvent tard. 13. Et de peur 
 d'etre en retard a 1'ecole nous nous depechons. 14. L'autre jour 
 je suis tombe en me depechant et j'ai failli me casser une jambe. 
 15. Je boite encore. 
 
179] LESSON LXVI 155 
 
 C. (Oral on B.) 
 
 D. 1. I am too tired this evening to do all the lessons. 2. Let 
 us begin by preparing our Latin. 3. On account of my algebra, 
 I would rather not do my Latin. 4. I generally do my prob- 
 lems first. 5. But my brothers like best to do the easy lessons 
 first. 6. Let us finish by learning something easy, for example, 
 our verses. 7. I don't care, but I would just as soon learn them 
 first. 8. I missed my history lesson yesterday. 9. We must finish 
 working at ten. 10. We must go to bed now for fear of wakening 
 too late. 11. We were very near being late yesterday, you know. 
 12. Yes, and I came very near breaking my leg. 13. I was hastening 
 in order not to be late. 14. You see I am limping yet. 
 
 E. 1. We are too tired to prepare all our exercises this evening. 
 2. Has your brother finished preparing his? 3. Yes, and he is 
 amusing himself now reading the newspaper. 4. Let us hasten for 
 fear of being late. 5. We have hastened in order not to be late at 
 the station. 6. My father rose late, and (he) missed the train. 
 7. He had to wait for the next train. 8. He came near missing 
 that one too. 9. Would you prefer to go to the concert or the 
 theatre? 10. It is all the same to us. 11. As for me, I would 
 rather see a good play. 12. We shall probably end up by staying at 
 home. 13. Most people like best to begin by doing something 
 easy. 14. Those who work will finally succeed. 
 
 LESSON LXVI 
 
 179. Battre, 'beat,' 'thresh'; dormir, 'sleep'; servir, 
 ' serve ' ; nettoyer, ' clean ' 
 
 battre 
 
 battant 
 
 battu 
 
 bats 
 
 battis 
 
 dormir 
 
 dormant 
 
 dormi 
 
 dors 
 
 dormis 
 
 servir 
 
 servant 
 
 servi 
 
 sers 
 
 servis 
 
 nettoyer 
 
 nettoyant . 
 
 nettoye* 
 
 nettoie 
 
 nettoyai 
 
 Like dormir and servir: s'endormir, go to sleep; se servir de, make use 
 f use. 
 
156 LESSON LXVII [ 180 
 
 EXERCISE LXVI 
 
 le beurre, butter le (la) malade, sick person, 
 
 cruel, cruel patient 
 
 mal, badly la nuit, night 
 
 battre le beurre, churn 
 
 A. (Oral.) Continue: 1. Je bats le ble" dans la grange. 2. Je 
 dors toujours bien. 3. Est-ce que je me sers d'un crayon bleu? 
 4. Je n'ai pas bien dormi cette (last) nuit. 5. Dors bien. 6. Je 
 dormis (dormirai) longtemps. 7. Bats le beurre. 8. Je me suis 
 endormi(e) avant minuit. 9. Sers-toi de ces livres-la. 10. Sers le 
 diner. 11. Je nettoie les souliers. 12. Je nettoierai la vaisselle. 
 
 B. 1. Good morning, have you slept well? 2. Very well, thank 
 you; and you? 3. Oh, I always sleep well now. 4. I am glad you 
 are sleeping better. 5. The maid is churning. 6. The harvesters 
 are threshing the wheat. 7. Let us thresh the wheat. 8. Serve the 
 lunch, if you please. 9. Madam, the lunch is served (cr Madam is 
 served). 10. I wish you to serve these ladies. 11. They are served 
 already. 12. He was cleaning (would clean) the shoes. 
 
 C. 1. My father always slept badly. 2. At what time did you go 
 to sleep? 3. I went to sleep before twelve. 4. I slept very badly 
 last night. 5. The children haven't gone to sleep yet. 6. That 
 cruel mother is beating her child. 7. George was beaten for stealing 
 apples. 8. Let us make use of these books. 9. Use my pen if you 
 wish. 10. I have been using it. 11. The doctor wishes the patient 
 to sleep. 12. I should like the maid to clean the kitchen. 13. That 
 is no use (use servir a). 
 
 LESSON LXVII 
 
 180. Government of Verbs. 1. An English transitive verb 
 is sometimes rendered in French by a verb with de or a: 
 II s'approchait de la ville. He was approaching the town. 
 
 Je me souviens de vous. I remember you. 
 
 II obeit a son pere. He obeys his father. 
 
 Je lui obeirai. / shall obey him. 
 
180] LESSON LXVII 157 
 
 2. A French transitive verb sometimes has the force of an 
 English verb + a preposition: 
 
 J'attends le train. / am waiting for the train. 
 
 3. De and are sometimes not translated literally: 
 Cela depend de vous. That depends on you. 
 Pensez a votre devoir. Think of your duty. 
 
 4. Compare the French and English constructions: 
 Je paie le the. / pay for the tea. 
 
 Je le paie a Fepicier. / pay the grocer for it. 
 
 Je le lui ai paye. / have paid him for it. 
 
 Je lui prends le fusil. / take (away) the gun from him. 
 
 II demande du pain a son pere. He asks his father for bread. 
 
 (a) Further examples: acheter quelque chose a quelqu'un, buy something 
 from somebody; emprunter . . . a . . ., borrow . . . from . . .; oter . . . a . . ., 
 take away . . . from . . .; voler . . . a . . ., steal . . . from . . .; pardonner . . . 
 a . . ., pardon somebody for . . . 
 
 5. In many verbs the meaning varies with the preposition: 
 Us jouent aux cartes. They play (at) cards. 
 
 Elle joue du piano. She plays (on) the piano. 
 
 (a) Further examples: penser a, think of, think about (turn over in one's 
 mind)', penser de, think of (have an opinion about); servir, serve; servir a, 
 serve as or for; se servir de, make use of, use. 
 
 EXERCISE LXVII 
 
 ainsi, thus, so pardonner, pardon 
 
 la baratte, churn le piano, piano 
 
 dependre, depend poser, place, put, ask (question) 
 
 employer, employ le pre, meadow 
 
 Petable, f., stable (for cattle) la qualite, quality 
 
 la faute, fault la question, question 
 
 former, form sage, wise, well-behaved, good (of 
 
 les grands-parents, grandparents children) 
 
 la laiterie, dairy le seau, pail 
 
 marcher, march, go, run tirer or traire, irreg., milk 
 
 Marguerite, Margaret Pustensile, m., utensil 
 
 obeir, obey 
 
 et ainsi de suite, and so forth, and so on; faire marcher, make or cause 
 to go, work (of machines) ; battre des mains, clap one's hands 
 
158 LESSON LXVII [180 
 
 A. Continue: 1. J'ob&s a mon pere, tu . . . ton. 2. Je lui obe*is. 
 3. Je lui prends son livre. 4. Je me sers d'encre noire. 5. Je m'en 
 sers. 6. J'emploie de 1'encre noire. 7. Je m'approche du feu. 
 8. Je lui demande de 1'argent. 9. Je m'apergois de cela. 10. Je 
 m'en suis apergu(e). 11. Je pensais a elles. 12. Je ne m'en suis 
 pas servi. 13. Je n'y ai pas pense". 
 
 B. 1. Paul et Marguerite sont chez leurs grands-parents a la cam- 
 pagne. 2. Us sont sages et ob&ssent a leur grand'mere. 3. Elle leur 
 pardonne facilement leurs petites fautes. 4. Us s'amusent beau- 
 coup a la regarder travailler et 1'aident aussi. 5. Quelquefois elle 
 leur dit d'aller au pre" chercher les vaches. 6. Us amenent les vaches 
 a ratable et grand'mere les tire. 7. Grand-pere lui prend les seaux 
 pleins de lait et les emporte a la laiterie. 8. Deux fois par semaine 
 on fait du beurre. 9. On se sert d'une baratte pour battre le beurre. 
 
 10. On nettoie soigneusement la baratte, car la qualite du beurre 
 depend beaucoup de la proprete* des ustensiles qu'on emploie. 
 
 11. Grand-pere fait marcher la baratte et les enfants s'approchent 
 de lui pour voir. 12. Us lui posent (or font) beaucoup de questions. 
 
 13. Us lui demandent: "Grand-pere, tu ne dis rien; a quoi penses-tu? 
 
 14. Combien le marchand te paie-t-il le beurre? 15. Combien as-tu 
 paye* la baratte? " 16. Et ainsi de suite. 17. Bientot on s'apergoit 
 que le beurre se forme et les enfants battent des mains. 
 
 C. (Oral.) 1. Ou e"taient les deux enfants? 2. Comment s'ap- 
 pellent-ils? 3. A qui obe*issaient-ils? 4. Que leur pardonnait-elle? 
 5. A quoi s'amusaient-ils? 6. Qu'est-ce que la grand'mere leur 
 disait quelquefois? 7. Qui tirait les vaches? 8. A qui le grand-pere 
 prenait-il les seaux? 9. De quoi se servait-on pour faire le beurre? 
 10. A quoi sert la baratte? 11. Qui faisait marcher la baratte? 
 
 12. Dites-moi les questions que les enfants posaient a leur grand- 
 pere. 13. Pourquoi battaient-ils des mains? etc. 
 
 D. 1. Children be good; obey your parents. 2. Obey them al- 
 ways. 3. These children go to the meadow for the cows. 4. They 
 have brought them to the stable. 5. Grandmother will milk the 
 cows. 6. Grandfather will take from her the pails of milk. 7. I 
 work the churn in the dairy. 8. Clean the churn. 9. The quality of 
 the butter will depend on cleanliness. 10. The dairy and the uten- 
 
181] LESSON LXVIII 159 
 
 sils must be clean. 11. We ask our grandparents many questions. 
 
 12. What are you thinking of? 13. I am not thinking about any- 
 thing. 14. How much did the dealer pay you for the butter? 
 15. The butter has come. 16. We clapped our hands because the 
 work was finished. 17. What use is a churn? 
 
 E. 1. Did you perceive that he didn't obey his father? 2. I 
 didn't perceive it. 3. What do you think of this book? 4. Use my 
 pen, yours is bad. 5. I shall use it with pleasure. 6. He took the 
 pail from me. 7. I took the pail from him. 8. Think of your lessons. 
 9. We were thinking of them. 10. Pay the tailor for your clothes. 
 11. I have paid him for them. 12. Ask your friend for some money. 
 
 13. I have borrowed some from him already. 14. My little brothers 
 are playing marbles. 15. Can your sister play the piano? 16. It 
 is very cold; draw near the fire. 17. Pardon me for this fault. 
 18. Twice two make four, twice three make six, and so forth. 
 
 LESSON LXVIII 
 
 181. Partir. * set out,' etc.; sentir, 'feel/ 'smell,' etc.; 
 suivre, 'follow* 
 
 partir partant parti pars partis 
 
 sentir sentant senti sens sentis 
 
 suivre suivant suivi suis suivis 
 
 Like partir: sortir, go out. 
 
 EXERCISE LXVIII 
 
 le chien, dog le maitre, master 
 
 le facteur, porter se sentir, feel (of health) 
 
 le froid, cold sortir, tr., take (get) out 
 
 A. (Oral.) Continue: 1. Je ne sens (sentais) pas le froid. 2. Je 
 pars (partirai) de grand matin. 3. Je partis sans dire adieu. 4. Pars 
 avant midi. 5. Sens ces fleurs. 6. Sors d'ici. 7. Je suis mon 
 maitre, tu . . . ton. 8. Je les ai suivis. 9. Je suivais .le colonel. 
 10. Que je suivisse (partisse, sentisse). 
 
160 LESSON LXIX [ 182 
 
 B. 1. She is leaving (has left) for France. 2. My sisters set out 
 yesterday. 3. He is going out to take a walk. 4. Let him not go 
 out now. 5. Let him stay at home if he doesn't feel well. 6. Do 
 you feel the cold? 7. They didn't feel the cold. 8. These flowers 
 smell sweet (bori). 9. The dog follows his master. 10. He was fol- 
 lowed by his dog. 11. Let him follow us. 12. Don't follow me. 
 13. Let us not go out this morning. 14. Let the others go out 
 if they wish. 
 
 C. 1. They (/.) have gone out. 2. Let us go out [for] a little. 
 3. Don't go away without saying good-bye. 4. Go away from here 
 at once. 5. If I were to follow him he would be angry. 6. We 
 followed (p. def.) our parents. 7. The parents were followed by their 
 children. 8. They will not feel well to-morrow. 9. They felt well. 
 10. Don't you feel well? 11. Let the porter get out our luggage. 
 12. Porter, please get out our luggage. 13. When you have got 
 it out, bring it to the carriage. 
 
 LESSON LXIX 
 
 182. C'est and il est. Observe the following typical sen- 
 tences: 
 
 C'est facile (clair, bien). It (that) is easy (clear, well). 
 
 C'est a desirer. It (that) is to be desired. 
 
 C'est facile a faire. It (that) is easy to do. 
 
 ^ll est facile de parler. It is easy to talk. 
 
 II est clair que j'ai raison. It is clear that I am right. 
 H est a desirer que la guerre finisse It is to be desired that the war 
 bientot. should soon end. 
 
 (a) In Ex. 1, 2 and 3, ce = it or that, is the real subject. 
 
 (b) But when the real subject follows etre in such constructions it is ex- 
 pressed by de + infinitive, as in Ex. 4, or by a que clause, Ex. 5 and 6, and 
 il = it regularly stands as anticipatory subject. 
 
 NOTE. Colloquially, c'est is somewhat freely used for il est, e.g. C'est 
 clair que j'ai raison, and is always found in certain phrases, e.g. c'est dom- 
 mage, c'est pitie, etc. 
 
183] LESSON LXIX l61 
 
 183. Ce and i7(s), elle(s\ etc. Care must be taken to dis- 
 tinguish constructions of the following types: 
 
 Elle est Frangaise. She is French (a Frenchwoman). 
 
 Ils sont Allemands. They are German (Germans). 
 
 Sa femme est couturiere. His wife is a dressmaker. 
 
 C'est une Frangaise. She is a Frenchwoman. 
 
 C'est une couturiere. She is a dressmaker. 
 
 Ce sont des Allemands. They are Germans. 
 
 Quel Frangais est-ce? What Frenchman is it? 
 
 (a) Observe in Ex. 1, 2 and 3 that the noun of nationality, calling or 
 description omits the article; in such case a personal subject must precede 
 tre. 
 
 (b) But if the predicate noun, as in Ex. 4, 5, 6 and 7, has un, des or any 
 other determinative (definite article, partitive, possessive adjective, demon- 
 strative, interrogative adjective), it becomes the real subject, and ce precedes 
 etre (cf. 35, 80). 
 
 EXERCISE LXIX 
 
 agreable, agreeable, pleasant la medecine, medicine 
 
 brave, brave, worthy nombreux, numerous 
 
 la clientele, customers, practice normand, Norman 
 
 consequent (par), consequently la Normandie, Normandy 
 
 le dommage, damage, pity observer, observe 
 
 se fournir, buy or get one's la reputation, reputation 
 
 provisions (supplies, etc.) le rez-de-chaussee, ground floor 
 
 heureux, happy, fortunate superieur, superior, upper 
 
 c'est pourquoi, that is why; faire de bonnes affaires, do a good business 
 (trade) ; a partir de deux heures, beginning at two o'clock; c'est dom- 
 mage que (+ subjunctive), it is a pity that 
 
 A. Complete by supplying ce or il and the correct preposition: 
 1. ... est difficile . . . faire. 2. ... sera difficile . . . faire cela. 
 3. ... est a desirer qu'il parte bientot. 4. ... facile . . . apprendre. 
 5. ... est clair que la legon est difficile. 6. ... est interessant de 
 voyager. 7. ... serait mieux . . . ne rien dire. 8. ... serait mieux. 
 9. ... est tres bon; j'aime cela. 
 
 B. Complete by supplying c'est, ce sont, il (elle) est, ils 
 (elles) sont, as required: 1. ... des Anglaises. 2. ... cordonniers. 
 3. ... une Franchise. 4. ... Americains. 5. ... couturieres. 
 
162 LESSON LXIX [ 183 
 
 6. ... mdecin. 7. . . . un medecin habile. 8. ... des Normands. 
 9. ... une vieille Normande. 
 
 C. 1. II est tres interessant d'observer les nombreux voisins que 
 nous avons dans cette maison. 2. Au rez-de-chaussee il y a un 
 epicier. 3. C'est chez lui que nous nous fournissons souvent. 4. II 
 est Normand, et vend de bon beurre et de bon fromage qui lui 
 viennent de Normandie. 5. C'est un tres brave homme. 6. C^st 
 pourquoi il a tant de clients, 7. II est facile de faire de bonnes x 
 affaires si on a une bonne reputation. 8. C'est facile a expliquer. 
 9. Notre voisin du premier (e*tage) est medecin. 10. C'est un 
 homme tres agreable. 11. II a une clientele importante. 12. C'est 
 aujourd'hui mercredi et il va recevoir beaucoup de malades. 13. II 
 n'est que neuf heures, mais on commence deja a arriver. 14. C'est 
 jeudi qu'il fait son cours a Fecole de medecine. 15. Par consequent 
 il ne recevra demain qu'a partir de deux heures. 16. II est heureu^f 
 que nous ayons deux si bons voisins. 17. C'est dommage que nous 
 en ayons de moins bons aux etages superieurs. 
 
 D. (Oral.) 1. Qui est votre voisin du rez-de-chausse*e? 2. Est-il 
 Frangais? 3. Qu'est-ce qu'il vend? 4. Est-ce un brave homme? 
 5. Pourquoi a-t-il une bonne clientele? 6. Est-il facile d'avoir beau- 
 coup de clients? 7. Qui est votre voisin du premier? 8. Est-ce un 
 bon medecin? 9. Quel jour de la semaine est-ce? 10. Quelle heure 
 est-il? 11. Quand est-ce que votre voisin fait son cours? 12. Quand 
 regoit-il ses malades? etc. 
 
 E. 1. It is pleasant to have good neighbours. 2. Our neighbour 
 on (of) the ground floor is a Norman. 3. He is a grocer. 4. His 
 wife is a Norman also. 5. They are very worthy people. 6. Is it 
 at his shop that you get your provisions? 7. Why is it that he has 
 so many customers? 8. It is because he has a f good reputation. 
 9. It is easy to have plenty (beaucoup) of customers if one sells 
 cheap. 10. That is very true. 11. Who is it who has just come in? 
 12. It is our neighbour of the first flat. 13. He is a clever doctor 
 who has a large practice. 14. It is to-day that he sees (receives) 
 his patients. 15. It is a pity that there are so many sick people this 
 winter. 16. It is fortunate that you have such (de si) good neigh- 
 bours. 
 
184] LESSON LXX 163 
 
 F. 1. That gentleman is one of our numerous neighbours. 2. His 
 wife is French. 3. Are you an American, madam? 4. No, sir, I 
 am an Englishwoman. 5. It is interesting to study medicine. 6. It 
 is difficult to learn French. 7. It is easier to read it than to write it. 
 8. It is a very difficult language. 9. Should we not start now? 
 10. I don't know; it is a pity we didn't start yesterday. 11. That 
 is true; it is raining so much to-day. 12. There is the lady who lives 
 in one of the upper stories. 13. Yes, it is she. 14. It is easy to 
 see that she is not a Frenchwoman. 15. What day is it to-day? 
 16. What time is it? 
 
 LESSON LXX 
 184. Traduire, 'translate'; construire, 'construct,' 'build' 
 
 traduire traduisant traduit traduis traduisis 
 construire construisant construit construis construisis 
 Like construire: instruire, instruct, educate. 
 
 EXERCISE LXX 
 le poeme, poem le poete, poet 
 
 A. (Oral.) Continue: 1. Je traduis (traduisais) de F anglais en 
 frangais. 2. Je construisais (construis) une maison. 3. Les mor- 
 ceaux que j'ai traduits. 4. Les maisons que j'ai construites. 5. Tra- 
 duis ces vers en frangais. 6. Ne les traduis pas en anglais. 7. Je 
 traduisis un gros livre. *8. Le maitre voudrait que je traduise beau- 
 coup, . . . tu. 9. J'instruisis mes neveux. 
 
 B. 1. We learn much by translating. 2. I wish you to translate 
 this poem. 3. Let us translate our exercises. 4. Which verses 
 have you translated? 5. Architects build houses. 6. What houses 
 has this architect built? 7. He (they) built (p. def.) many houses in 
 this city. 8. The children whom I was instructing have learnt much. 
 
 C. 1. The master has wished John to translate a piece of Latin. 
 2. What pieces have you translated? 3. That poet translated 
 (p. def.) many poems into English. 4. Translate these verses for 
 me. 5. Mr. Potin was building a fine castle in Normandy. 6. We 
 were building fine houses. 7. Let him translate this French poem. 
 8. They (m.) are well educated. 9. She is a very [well] educated lady. 
 
164 LESSON LXXI [ 185 
 
 LESSON LXXI 
 
 185. Impersonal Verbs. 1. Review 114. 
 
 2. Many verbs may stand in the third person singular with 
 impersonal il anticipating a real subject, singular or plural, fol- 
 lowing the verb : 
 
 n etait tombe de la neige. Some snow had fallen. 
 
 H en reste trois livres. There remain three pounds of it. 
 
 n est arrive des lettres. Some letters have arrived. 
 
 H est arrive des accidents. Some accidents have happened. 
 
 (a) Observe that the past participle is invariable. 
 
 3. n est (e"tait, etc.) may be used for il y a: 
 
 H est des hommes qui le croient. There are some men who believe it. 
 
 4. Y avoir is often used to form expressions of time reckoned 
 backwards, or of distance: 
 
 II y a trois ans (de cela). Three years ago. 
 
 Combien y a-t-il d'ici a Paris? How far is it to Paris? 
 
 5. Observe the following: 
 
 De quoi s'agit-il? What is the matter? etc. 
 
 II s'agit de 1'acheter. It is a question of buying it. 
 
 II se peut qu'il vienne. It may be that he will come. 
 
 EXERCISE LXXI 
 
 s'agir de, be a question of 1'hdpital, m., hospital 
 Vaide-macon, m., mason's helper, les materiaux, m., materials) 
 
 hodman outre, in addition to 
 
 la chute, fall parmi, among 
 
 la construction, building la pierre, stone 
 
 se detacher, get loose la pluie, rain 
 
 Pechafaudage, m., scaffolding reparer, repair 
 
 s'en falloir, be near la tete, head 
 
 glissant, slippery le toit, roof 
 
 grave, serious se tuer, kill oneself, be killed 
 
 guerir, get well, recover la tuile, tile 
 heureusement, fortunately 
 
 se faire, take place; faire glissant, be slippery; se faire mal, hurt oneself^ 
 
 get hurt; peu s'en est fallu . . . ne, came very near, almost happened 
 
185] LESSON LXXI 165 
 
 A. Continue: 1. Je me suis fait mal, tu t'. 2. Peu s'en est fallu 
 que je ne fisse cela, ... tu ... 3. Je m'en suis detache(e), tu t'. 
 
 4. J'ai failli tomber. 
 
 B. Supply the proper past indefinite forms: 1. II (tomber) 
 
 de la pluie. 2. La pluie (tomber). 3. II (arriver) 
 
 des lettres. 4. Des lettres (arriver). 5. II s' (de- 
 tacher) une tuile. 6. Une tuile s' (detacher). 
 
 C. 1. On a construit cette maison il y a trois ans. 2. II est ar- 
 rive un certain nombre d'accidents pendant la construction. 
 3. II s'est fait plusieurs chutes parmi les ouvriers. 4. Un jour il 
 e*tait tombe* de la neige et Fechafaudage e*tait glissant. 5. A cause 
 de cela deux aides-magons, qui apportaient des materiaux aux 
 magons, sont tombes. 6. Heureusement ils ne se sont pas fait 
 beaucoup de mal. 7. Un autre jour il a fallu qu'un ouvrier montat 
 sur le toit. 8. II s'agissait d'une tuile qui s'etait detachee. 9. Mais 
 il etait tombe de la neige et en reparant la tuile F ouvrier est tombe. 
 10. Peu s'en est fallu qu'il ne se tuat. 11. II lui a fallu deux mois 
 d'hopital pour gurir. 12. Une autre fois un ouvrier a regu sur la 
 tete une tuile qui tombait. 13. II a failli en mourir. 14. Outre ces 
 trois cas il n'y a pas eu d'accidents graves. 
 
 D. 1. This house was built (use on) five years ago. 2. Many 
 accidents happened (there happened, etc.). 3. Several falls oc- 
 curred. 4. Many masons fell who were working on the scaffolding. 
 
 5. Some of the masons hurt themselves [very] much. 6. One day 
 a workman was to repair the roof. 7. What was the trouble (use 
 s'agir)? 8. It was a matter of a tile which had fallen. 9. Snow had 
 fallen and it was slippery. 10. He fell and he had to stay three 
 months in the hospital. 11. It may be that he will stay there four 
 months. 12. Another workman got hurt also. 13. A stone fell 
 (see C, 12) on his head. 
 
 E. 1. Fortunately not many serious accidents happened among 
 the workmen. 2. Several tiles had become loose. 3. In repairing 
 them a workman fell, and came near being killed. 4. It had rained. 
 5. Much rain had fallen that summer. 6. There were several acci- 
 dents but no one was killed. 7. Amongst the workmen two hodmen 
 hurt themselves. 8. They recovered, but they had to stay a month 
 
166 LESSON LXXII [ 186 
 
 in the hospital. 9. The building of that castle lasted ten years. 
 
 10. In addition to the masons, there were painters and other 
 workmen. 
 
 LESSON LXXII 
 
 186. Cuire, 'cook,' 'bake,' etc.; courir, 'run'; 
 
 valoir, 'be worth' 
 
 cuire cuisant cuit cuis cuisis 
 
 courir courant couru cours courus 
 
 valoir valant valu vaux valus 
 
 EXERCISE LXXII 
 
 cuire (or faire cuire), cook (tr.); cuire, cook (intr.); valoir la peine, be 
 worth while; valoir mieux, be better 
 
 A. (Oral.) Continue: 1. Je fais cuire la viande. 2. Je cuis du 
 pain. 3. Je cuirai des poissons. 4. Cours vite. 5. J'ai couru. 
 6. Je vaux (valais, valus, vaudrai) autant que lui. 7. Je cours 
 (courais, courrai) en toute hate. 8. Que je vaille (valusse). 9. II 
 faut que je cuise les legumes. 10. II fallait que je courusse. 
 
 B. 1. He was running. 2. We were cooking. 3. If they had 
 fish, they would cook them. 4. The horse ran fast. 5. That cow 
 will be worth five hundred francs. 6. That is no good ( = is worth 
 nothing). 7. He wishes us to run. 8. Bake the bread. 9. That 
 was better. 10. They will (would) run. 11. He wished me to cook 
 the vegetables. 12. They have not run. 13. The blackboard was 
 no good. 
 
 (7. 1. The horses will run. 2. That is not worth while. 3. If 
 you had baked the bread, it would be worth five cents a pound. 
 4. He wishes us not to run. 5. Do not run so fast. 6. It would 
 be better [to] go slowly. 7. The baker has baked the bread. 8. That 
 bread will not be worth six cents a pound. 9. I am sorry that that 
 is worth nothing. 10. You must cook the meat. 11. This meat is 
 not well cooked. 12. We did not wish them to run fast. 13. We 
 were running. 14. The vegetables were cooking. 
 
190] LESSON LXXIII 167 
 
 LESSON LXXIII 
 
 [In 187-191 are explained some uses of tenses and moods not dealt 
 with in the more elementary lessons.] 
 
 187. Present Indicative. 1. Observe its use with depuis, 
 since: depuis quand? since when? il y a . . . que, voici (voila) . . . 
 que, to denote how long an action has been continuing : 
 
 Depuis quand etes-vous ici? How long have you been here? 
 
 Je suis ici depuis dix jours. / have been here for ten days (past). 
 
 II y a (or voici, voila) deux mois / have been expecting a letter fo f , 
 que j 'attends une lettre. two months. 
 
 2. But if the action is denoted as being entirely past, a past 
 tense must be used: 
 
 Combien de temps a-t-il attendu? How long did he wait? 
 II a attendu (pendant) dix jours. He waited for ten days, 
 (a) Pendant emphasizes the duration of the time. 
 
 3. Observe: 
 
 C'est la que je Pai vu. It was (is) there that I saw him. 
 
 188. Imperfect Indicative. Observe its use to denote what 
 had been continuing (cf . 187) : 
 
 Depuis quand etiez-vous la? How long had you been there? 
 
 (a) The imperfect stands occasionally for the conditional anterior in a 
 result clause, e.g. Si je ne 1'avais pas saisi, il tombait du train, If I hadn't 
 seized him, he would have fallen from the train. 
 
 189. Future. This tense, as also the future anterior, some- 
 times denotes probability, possibility, supposition, or the like: 
 
 Ce seront nos amis qui viennent Those are (I suppose, no doubt) 
 d'arriver. our friends who have just come. 
 
 Je me serai trompe. 7 must have made a mistake. 
 
 190. Conditional. 1. It is used in deferential statement or 
 request: 
 
 Je le croirais du moins. 7 should think so at lea*st. 
 
 Auriez-vous la bonte de rester? Would you kindly stay? 
 
 2. It sometimes denotes probability, etc. (cf. 189): 
 Serait-il vrai? Can (could) it be true? 
 
168 LESSON LXXIII [ 191 
 
 3. It sometimes denotes concession ( = even, even if, though), 
 after quand, quand meme, or with que : 
 
 Quand (meme) il me tuerait. Even if he should kill me. 
 
 II me le dirait que je ne le croirais Even though he told me so, I should 
 pas. not believe it. 
 
 4. It may denote implied futurity (cf. 76) : 
 
 Je prendrais ce qui resterait. / should take what remained. 
 
 5. It is sometimes used in giving the substance of hearsay 
 information, or the like: 
 
 A ce qu'on dit le roi serait malade. By what they say the king is ill. 
 
 191. Infinitive. Observe its exceptional uses: 
 
 1. In brief phrases with imperative force: 
 S'adresser a cote*. Apply next door. 
 Repondre aux questions suivantes. Answer the following questions. 
 
 2. With de = a finite verb (historical infinitive) : 
 
 Et Pennemi de s'enfuir. And the enemy fled (or flees). 
 
 EXERCISE LXXHI 
 
 Parrivee, f ., arrival la pate, paste, dough 
 
 la cuisson, cooking, baking le petrin, kneading trough 
 
 le four, oven petrir, knead 
 
 impatiemment, impatiently Pierre, Peter 
 
 le lendemain, day after, next day rassis, stale (of bread) 
 
 le levain, yeast la servante, servant 
 
 lever, rise la tartine, slice 
 
 oser, dare la veille, evening before 
 
 le pain de menage, homemade bread; une tartine de beurre, a slice oj 
 bread and butter; etre en visite, be on a visit; etre dans la joie, be in 
 (great) glee; cela ne fait rien, that makes no difference, doesn't matter; 
 au moins, at least; mais si, yes (it does, yes, yes, etc.) 
 
 A. Continue: 1. J'attends depuis dix jours. 2. J'y tais depuis 
 trois semaines. 3. II y a (voici or voila) un mois que j'attsnds une 
 lettre. 4. J'ai travaille pendant toute la soiree. 5. C'est a Londres 
 que je Pai vu pour la premiere fois, . . . tu. 6. Je me serai tromp(e), 
 peut-etre. 7. Je ne saurais le croire. 
 
191] LESSON LXXIII 169 
 
 B. (Pain de menage) 1. Pierre et Jacqueline sont en visite chez 
 tante Julie depuis quelques jours. 2. Depuis le moment de leur 
 arrive*e ils sont dans la joie. 3. Le lendemain de leur arrivee ils ont 
 vu faire du beurre. 4. Un jour ils ont assiste* a la cuisson du pain. 
 5. Ils attendaient impatiemment depuis la veille. 6. Le moment 
 arriva. 7. La vieille servante Celestine avait mis la farine et le 
 levain dans le petrin. 8. La pate commengait a lever. 9. Les 
 enfants voulaient tout voir. 10. " Laissez-nous approcher; nous n'y 
 toucherons pas. 11. Mais non, mes enfants. 12. Quand meme 
 vous n'y toucheriez pas je n'oserais pas vous laisser approcher. 
 13. Je crois, dit Pierre, que cela ne ferait rien. 14. Mais si r 
 mon petit homme, cela ferait beaucoup. 15. Tu ne dois pas y 
 regarder." 16. Plus tard Celestine petrit la pate. 17. Elle en fait 
 des pains qu'elle met au four pour les faire cuire. 18. Et apres cela 
 elle les sort du four. 19. Les enfants en voudraient pour faire 
 des tartines de beurre. 20. Mais le pain frais est moins bon 
 que le pain rassis. 21. II vaudrait mieux attendre au moins vingt- 
 quatre heures. 
 
 C. (Oral on B.) 
 
 D. 1. The two children are on a visit at their aunt's. 2. They 
 have been in [great] glee for several days. 3. Since their arrival 
 they have been very happy. 4. They wanted to be present at the 
 baking of the homemade bread. 5. The old servant had brought 
 the kneading trough into the kitchen. 6. The flour and yeast had 
 been in it since the evening before. 7. The next day the dough 
 had begun to rise. 8. The children had waited impatientty. 
 9. Celestine, why won't you let us come near? 10. You may 
 come near (reflex.), but you mustn't touch the dough. 11. That 
 will make no difference, said Pierre. 12. We should like to have 
 a slice of, bread and butter. 13. Give us a piece when you take 
 the bread out of the oven. 14. It will be too fresh; I shouldn't 
 dare to give you it. 15. Yes, do; give it to us now. 16. No, no, 
 not now. 17. Stale bread is better for children. 
 
 E. 1. They had long been saying that that would happen. 2. We 
 have been wondering for some days where you were. 3. This castle 
 
17C LESSON LXXIV [ 192 
 
 has existed since the 14th century. 4. It was in that century that 
 it was built. 5. It had been freezing for three days. 6. It froze 
 for three days. 7. It had been snowing, which was very good for 
 the sports. 8. How long had you been there when we came? 
 9. More than three weeks. 10. How long did your uncle remain in 
 America? 11. He remained there more than ten years. 12. Could 
 you tell me what time (I'heure qu') it is? 
 
 F. Turn the following into the ordinary form of conditional sen- 
 tence (cf. 113): 1. II le dirait que je ne le croirais pas. 2. La 
 maison serait dix fois plus belle que je ne Facheterais pas. 
 
 LESSON LXXIV 
 
 192. Asseoir, 'seat'; suffire, 'suffice,' 'be sufficient' 
 
 asseoir asseyant assis assieds assis 
 
 suffire suffisant suffi suffis suffis 
 
 Like asseoir : s'asseoir, sit, sit down, be seated. 
 
 EXERCISE LXXIV 
 
 le fauteuil, armchair suffisant, conceited 
 
 prier, pray, beg, ask 
 
 A. (Oral.) Continue: 1. Je m'assieds (assois). 2. Je me suis 
 assis(e). 3. Assieds-toi pres du feu. 4. Je m'assierai pres de la 
 fenetre. 5. II desire que je m'asseye (assoie), . . . tu. 6. Je suffis 
 (suffisais). 7. Je suffirai a cet ouvrage. 8. II ne croit pas que j'y 
 suffise. 9. Que je suffisse. 
 
 B. 1. How conceited he is! 2. That is sufficient (pres.). 3. Let 
 that suffice. 4. That will be sufficient. 5. We shall be sufficient 
 for everything. 6. Sit down (or be seated) if you please. 7. I used 
 to sit there. 8. We often sit there. 9. They will not sit there. 
 10. He sat down in the armchair. 11. Let us sit down. 12. The 
 ladies have not sat down. 13. She was sitting in an armchair. 
 
193] LESSON LXXV 171 
 
 C. 1. It was necessary that we should sit down. 2. We shaD 
 not sit down. 3. Two francs will be sufficient. 4. Mary sat down 
 beside the fire. 5. That had to (use fallait) suffice. 6. The children 
 will sit down on those chairs. 7. Ask the ladies to sit down. 8. We 
 were asked to sit down. 9. When you (tu) are in the room you will 
 sit down. 10. Let no one sit there. 11. Do not sit beside the win- 
 dow. 12. Everybody is seated. 
 
 LESSON LXXV 
 
 193. Remarks on Subjunctive. 1. Review 142-148, and 
 note that many expressions, ordinarily followed by the indica- 
 tive, require the subjunctive whenever doubt is implied (usu- 
 ally by interrogation, negation or condition) : 
 
 Je ne crois pas que ce soit lui. / don't think it is Tie. 
 
 Esperez-vous qu'il reussisse? Do you expect he will succeed? 
 
 Si je pretendais qu'il cut tort. % // / asserted that he was wrong. 
 
 But: Je crois que c'est lui. / think it is he. 
 
 J'espere qu'il reussira. I hope he will succeed. 
 
 (a) Such are: s'apercevoir, sentir, voir (perceiving); croire, esperer, penser, 
 trouver (thinking) ; etre certain, etre probable, savoir (knowing) ; avouer, 
 dire (declaring), etc. 
 
 (b) After questions, the indicative usually stands if the answer yes is 
 expected, and the subjunctive if no is expected. 
 
 (c) Also, when the statement of the subordinate clause is assumed to be 
 a fact, the indicative is used, e.g. S'il savait que tu es ici, // he knew that 
 you are here; Savez-vous qu'il est arrive? Do you know that he has come? 
 
 2. II semble (more or less doubt being implied) regularly re- 
 quires the subjunctive, while il me (te, etc.) semble ( = je crois, 
 je pense) takes the indicative: 
 
 II semble qu'elle ait tort. It seems that she is wrong. 
 
 II me semble qu'elle a tort. It seems to me she is wrong, 
 
 (a) H me semble also comes under 1, above. 
 
 3. The present subjunctive of savoir is sometimes used to 
 denote deferential statement in a principal sentence: 
 
 Je ne sache rien He ci bon. I know of nothing so good. 
 
172 LESSON LXXV [193 
 
 4. The pluperfect subjunctive stands exceptionally for the 
 pluperfect indicative in an if clause, and for the conditional an- 
 terior in a result clause (cf. 113): 
 
 S'il cut ( = avait) su cela, il ne // he had known that, he would not 
 Feut ( = aurait) pas dit. have said it. 
 
 5. The subjunctive is used after que replacing a conjunction 
 requiring the subjunctive (cf. 147), and also after que replac- 
 ing si = if: 
 
 Venez que ( = afin que, pour que) Come, in order that I may see you. 
 
 je vous voie. 
 Si j'y vais et que je le voie. // I go, and if I see him. 
 
 EXERCISE LXXV 
 
 la bibliotheque, bookcase la mode, fashion 
 
 le (la) camarade, comrade, com- probable, probable 
 
 panion le rideau, curtain 
 
 commander, order sjerrer, press, put away 
 
 la commode, chest of drawers, bu- le store, (window) blind 
 
 reau le tapis, carpet, tablecloth (coloured) 
 
 Pebeniste, m., cabinet-maker la toilette, dressing table 
 
 la gravure, engraving le travail, work 
 le miroir, mirror 
 
 a la mode, in fashion, fashionable; faire visite a, to visit; de sorte que, so 
 that 
 
 A. Continue: 1. Je crois que cela est vrai. 2. Je ne crois pas 
 que ce soit vrai. 3. II est certain que j'en aurai besoin. 4. Est-il 
 certain que j'en aie besoin? 5. II croit que c'est moi, . . . toi. 6. S'il 
 espere que je reussisse. 7. II est probable que je partirai demain. 
 8. Est-il probable que je le sache? 9. II semble que j'aie besoin 
 d'un tapis. 10. II me semble que j'en ai besoin. 
 
 B. Give the correct form of the verb in italics: 1. Je ne dis pas que 
 ce etre vrai. 2. Espe*rez-vous qu'ils y etre demain? 3. J'espere 
 qu'ils y etre. 4. Je n'espere pas qu'il venir. 5. N'espe*rez-vous pas 
 qu'il venir? 6. II leur semble que cela etre ainsi. 7. II semble qu'il 
 avoir besoin de meubles. 8. Attendez que je le faire. 
 
193] LESSON LXXV 173 
 
 C. 1. Paul croit avoir besoin de meubles pour sa chambre. 2. Sa 
 mere et lui vont chez 1'ebeniste en commander. 3. Paul croit qu'il 
 lui faut un lit neuf. 4. "Mais, crois-tu, dit sa mere, que cela te 
 soit necessaire? 5. Oui, maman, 1'ancien n'est plus a la mode. 
 6. II me semble aussi que j'ai besoin d'un fauteuil. 7. Tu crois? 
 Moi, je ne pense pas que tu en aies besoin. 8. Nous mettrons trois 
 ou quatre chaises dans ta chambre, de sorte que tes camarades 
 puissent s'asseoir quand ils te feront visite, et cela suffira. 9. J'es- 
 pere au moins que j'aurai une table de travail et une petite biblio- 
 theque. 10. Oui, mon enfant. 11. II est clair quq tu as besoin 
 de ces choses-la. 12. Je crois qu'il te faudra aussi une commode 
 pour serrer ton linge. 13. Mais je ne crois pas que tu aies besoin 
 d'une toilette. 14. II faut aussi que nous garnissions ta chambre 
 de quelques gravures et d'un miroir. 15. Ne trouves-tu pas aussi 
 que j'ai besoin d'un tapis pour le parquet et d'un autre pour ma 
 table? 16. C'est vrai. 17. II te faut aussi un store et des rideaux 
 pour ta fenetre." 
 
 D. (Oral on C.) 
 
 E. 1. We think we need new furniture. 2. These chairs are not 
 fashionable now. 3. I do not think you need a new bed. 4. It 
 seems to us that we need a bookcase to put our books in (use y). 
 5. I hope you will have an armchair. 6. We shall order one, so 
 that you may sit down when you visit us. 7. It is not certain that 
 we need a carpet for the floor. 8. Do you think you need a table- 
 cloth for your table? 9. I hope my mother will adorn my room 
 with a few engravings. 10. I think you will need a mirror. 11. I 
 shall need a window blind and curtains also. 12. Put away your 
 linen in the drawers. 13. We shall put our books in the bookcase. 
 
 F. 1. Sit down that I may be able to speak to you. 2. We hope 
 our comrades will come by the first train. 3. I do not think they 
 will come early. 4. Is it not probable that the train will be late? 
 5. All the trains have been late for several days. 6. Is it certain 
 that you leave this afternoon? 7. It is probable that I shall. 8. But 
 perhaps I shall not leave before to-morrow. 9. You don't think I 
 need a dressing table, do you? 10. Yes, I do (mais si), and I think 
 you need a bureau and a study table. 11. I must order them at the 
 
174 LESSON LXXVI [ 194 
 
 cabinet-maker's. 12. If they knew I was (am) here, they would 
 pay me a visit. 13. Don't they know you have come? 14. Draw 
 near that I may hear you better. 15. Do you know who has just 
 come? 
 
 LESSON LXXVI 
 
 194. Offrir, c offer'; souffrir, ' suffer/ * endure' 
 
 offrir offrant offert offre offris 
 
 souffrir souffrant souffert souffre souffris 
 
 EXERCISE LXXVI 
 lo malheur, misfortune souffrant, ailing, not (very) well 
 
 A. (Oral.) Continue: 1. Je souffre (souffrais) beaucoup. 2. Je 
 ne souffrirai pas cela. 3. Je lui offre de 1'argent. 4. II faut que 
 je souffre cela. 5. Souffre que cela se fasse. 6. II fallait que je lui 
 offrisse la main. 7. J'en ai beaucoup souffert. 8. Offre-lui ce que 
 tu as, ... nous. 9. Les malheurs que j'ai soufferts, . . . tu. 
 
 B. 1. He is always ailing. 2. They have suffered a great deal. 
 3. We will not endure that. 4. Let us offer to (de) help them. 
 5. Suffer us to say that. 6. He had to endure it. 7. He offered 
 (p. def.) me his hand. 8. We have offered them money. 9. Let 
 them offer us that. 10. I have suffered a great misfortune. 
 11. We shall offer them what we have. 12. We offer you every- 
 thing. 13. What place have you offered him? 
 
 C. 1. Nobody can suffer him. 2. I did not offer (p. def.) him any 
 wine. 3. Have you offered them bread? 4. Offer him a cup of 
 tea. 5. You had to suffer that, hadn't you? 6. Do not suffer him 
 to speak. 7. Do not offer them what you have. 8. They suffer 
 their misfortunes without saying anything. 9. Our friends suf- 
 fered nothing. 10. We offered (p. def.) them all (that which) we 
 had. 11. We used to suffer a great deal because of that. 12. You 
 will never suffer for that. 13. If you knew the misfortunes I have 
 suffered. 
 
195] LESSON LXXVII 175 
 
 LESSON LXXVII 
 
 195. Infinitive or Subjunctive. The subjunctive is often 
 avoided by the use of an infinitive (cf. 156, note 1), thus: 
 
 1. With verbs taking an indirect personal object: 
 
 Je conseille & ma fille de lire ces / advise my daughter to read these 
 
 livres-ci. books. 
 
 Je lui defends de lire ceux-la. I forbid her to read those. 
 
 (a) Such verbs are: conseiller, defendre, demander, dire, ecrire, ordonner, 
 permettre, reprocher, etc. 
 
 2. With verbs taking a direct personal object: 
 
 Je Fai priee de monter. / asked her to go up. 
 
 Cela les empeche de sortir. That prevents them from going out. 
 
 (a) Such verbs are: empecher, prier, remercier, etc. 
 
 3. Observe also the construction with two objects: 
 
 Je le lui reproche. / reproach him (her) for it. 
 
 Je le lui demande. / ask him (her) for it. 
 
 Je le remercie de sa bonte\ / thank him for his kindness. 
 
 Je Fen remercie. / thank him for it. 
 
 Je vous en prie. I beg you to do (etc.) so. 
 
 EXERCISE LXXVII 
 
 s'adresser, apply ennuyer, annoy, trouble 
 
 Pardeur, f., ardour , warmth le jeu, game, play 
 
 Pattention, f., attention la loi, law 
 
 attirer, attract, call mechant, bad, naughty 
 
 le bien, good (noun) moderer, moderate 
 
 se conduire, irreg., conduct one- permettre, irreg., permit 
 
 self peut-etre, perhaps 
 
 la condtiite, conduct la police, police 
 
 conseiller, advise preferer, prefer 
 
 corriger, correct proteger, protect 
 
 defendre, defend, forbid reprocher, reproach, tax 
 
 elever, bring up sinon, if not, otherwise 
 
 mal eleve, rude, impolite, ill-mannered; pere de famille, father (of a 
 family) 
 
176 LESSON LXXVII [ 195 
 
 A. Continue: 1. Le roi ordonne que je fasse cela. 2. Le roi 
 m'ordonne de faire cela. 3. Elle me Fa conseille. 4. La loi defend 
 que je fasse cela. 5. La loi me le defend. 6. II est dfendu que je 
 fasse cela. 7. II m'est de*fendu de faire cela. 
 
 B. 1. Notre voisin a des enfants tres mal Sieves. 2. Je vais lui 
 demander de les corriger. 3. Je devrais lui reprocher de manquer 
 a son devoir. 4. Un bon pere empeche ses enfants de se conduire 
 mal. 5. Tout le monde devrait conseiller aux enfants d'etre sages. 
 
 6. On ne devrait jamais permettre a personne d'etre mechant. 
 
 7. Le bon pere de famille ordonne a ses enfants de faire toujours 
 le bien. 8. Si je disais a notre voisin de moderer 1'ardeur de ses 
 enfants dans leurs jeux, le ferait-il? 9. Peut-etre. Sinon, dois-je 
 e*crire a la police de me proteger? 10. La police defend aux enfants 
 d'ennuyer le public, mais je n'aime pas m'adresser a elle. 11. Je 
 prefere prier encore une fois mon voisin de corriger ses enfants. 
 12. II me remerciera peut-etre d'avoir attire* son attention sur leur 
 conduite. 
 
 C. (Oral on B.) 
 
 D. 1. Are your friend's children ill-mannered? 2. Yes, and we 
 have often asked him to correct them. 3. We "have taxed him 
 with failing in his duty. 4. A good father does not permit his 
 children to be naughty. 5. Everybody should advise them to do 
 good. 6. Does not a good father always order his children to be 
 good? 7. Does your friend moderate his children's ardour in their 
 games? 8. Did you tell that little boy to be good? 9. Shall I 
 write to the police to protect you? 10. I shall ask my friend to 
 correct his children. 11. I beg you not to apply to the police. 
 
 E. 1. I thanked her for having called my attention to (sur) 
 their conduct. 2. I thanked her for it. 3. It is forbidden to annoy 
 the public. 4. You should not conduct yourself badly. 5. Ask 
 your father to come with you. 6. Permit me to say to you that 1 
 do not like your conduct. 7. Do you advise your brother to go 
 away? 8. No, I advise him to stay. 9. He has conducted himself 
 badly, but he will not be naughty any more (plus). 10. If you are 
 ill-mannered, you will attract (the) attention to yourself. 11. Take 
 some of these pears, I beg of you. 12. I thank you for them. 
 
196] LESSON LXXVIII 177 
 
 LESSON LXXVIII 
 
 196. Agreement of Past Participle. All cases of agreement 
 of the past participle depend on the general principles already, 
 stated ( 49, 120), but observe the following: 
 
 La belle journee qu'il a fait! What a fine day' we have had! 
 
 La lettre que j'ai voulu e"crire. The letter I unshed to write. 
 
 La dame que j'ai entendue chan- The lady that I heard sing. 
 
 ter. 
 
 La chanson que j'ai entendu The song that I heard sung. 
 
 chanter. 
 
 Les medecins qu'il a fait venir. The doctors he sent for. 
 
 (a) The past participle of an impersonal verb is invariable, Ex. 1. 
 (6) In verbal phrases when an infinitive governs a preceding direct object, 
 the past participle is invariable, Ex. 2; but note II nous a pries d'y aller. 
 
 (c) Entendu, vu, laisse agree if the following infinitive has active force, 
 but are invariable if it has passive force, Ex. 3 and 4. 
 
 (d) Fait + infinitive is invariable, Ex. 5 (cf. 172, i,a). 
 
 NOTE. When the direct object is an expression of quantity or a collec- 
 tive, the past participle regularly agrees with the prevailing sense (cf. 
 160), but it has been thought unnecessary to include examples in an ele- 
 : mentary text-book. 
 
 EXERCISE LXXVIII 
 
 la chanteuse, singer la piece, piece (of money) 
 
 embrasser, embrace, kiss le pouls, pulse 
 
 exquis, exquisite, delicious ravissant, charming 
 
 femme docteur, woman doc- le regime, regimen, diet 
 
 tor, lady physician le remede, medicine 
 
 le gateau, cake la sante, health 
 
 s'informer (de), inquire (about) sonner, ring 
 
 la merveille, wonder tater, feel 
 
 la patisserie, pastry tirer, put out (the tongue) 
 
 le pharmacien, chemist, druggist la voix, voice 
 le (la) pianiste, pianist 
 
 mettre au regime, prescribe diet for, put on diet; faire entrer, show in; 
 merveille, marvellously, wonderfully; comment trouvez-vous cela? 
 what do you think of that? 
 
178 LESSON LXXVIII [196 
 
 A. Supply the proper form of the past participle of the infinitive 
 in italics: 1. Voila mes cousines; je les ai prier de venir. 2. La belle 
 saison qu'il &faire. 3. Les morceaux qu'elle a vouloir jouer. 4. C'est 
 ma soeur; nous ne 1'avons pas laisser partir. 5. C'est la maison que 
 j'ai voir batir. 6. Ce sont les personnes que j'ai entendre sonner. 
 "7. La servante que j'ai envoy er chercher le remede. 
 
 B. 1. Genevieye est souffrante. 2. Elle s'est enrhumee au con- 
 cert. 3. Sa cousine Denise vierft la voir. 4. Genevieve l'a envoye* 
 chercher ce matin. 5. La femme de chambre l'a entendue sonner, 
 et elle l'a fait entrer. 6. Denise embrasse sa cousine et s'informe 
 de sa sante. 7. "On a fait venir le me*decin j'espere. 8. Oh 
 oui, c'est M me Lecomte, la femme docteur, que ma mre a fait 
 venir. 9. Elle m'a tate le pouls et m'a fait tirer la langue. 10. Puis 
 elle m'a ordonne un remede que la servante a pris (got) ensuite chez 
 le pharmacien. 11. Outre cela elle m'a mise au regime. 12. Je ne 
 dois prendre que du pain et du lait. 13. Pas de gateaux, pas de 
 patisserie pendant trois ou quatre jours. 14. A propos, comment 
 as-tu trouve la chanteuse que nous avons entendue chanter au con- 
 cert? 15. Elle chante a merveille. 16. Elle a une voix exquise, 
 n'est-ce pas? 17. Et les deux morceaux que nous avons entendu 
 jouer par le pianiste? 18. Us e*taient ravissants." 
 
 C. (Oral on B.) 
 
 D. 1. We caught cold at the theatre. 2. We (/.) are not very 
 well to-day. 3. Our cousins Denise and Jeanne have come to see 
 us; we sent for them. 4. The housemaid heard them ring. 5. She 
 has shown them in. 6. They inquired about our health. 7. They 
 asked us if we had had the doctor. 8. It was a woman doctor that 
 my mother sent for. 9. Did she feel your pulse? 10. Yes, and she 
 made me show my tongue. 11. The old servant went to the chem- 
 ist's to get the medicine. 12. The doctor has prescribed a diet for 
 me (/.). 13. I am not to have either cakes or pastry for several 
 days. 14. The singer whom you heard singing at the concert sang 
 wonderfully, did she not? 15. Yes, and the pieces of music we 
 heard played were charming. 
 
 E. 1. There are the housos that we saw being built last year. 
 2. By the way, where are the medicines you sent for? 3. Is it my 
 
197] LESSON LXXIX 179 
 
 cousin (/.) whom you have shown in? 4. It is (she) ; I have shown 
 her upstairs (faire monter) . 5. Who is the lady whom I heard sing at 
 your house yesterday evening? 6. She is an Englishwoman with 
 an exquisite voice. 7. What did you think of the songs she sang? 
 8. They were charming. 9. She and her sister are still here; we 
 didn't let them go away. 10. We begged them to stay another week 
 (still eight days). 11. My aunt has been put on diet because she 
 has caught a cold. 12. Here is a two-franc piece which you dropped 
 (let fall) when (en) going out. 13. I saw it fall, and I picked it up. 
 
 LESSON LXXIX 
 
 197. Ecrire, * write'; vivre, 'live' 
 
 ecrire e'crivant ecrit ecris e"crivis 
 
 vivre vivant vecu vis vecus 
 
 Like ecrire: decrire, describe. 
 
 EXERCISE LXXIX 
 
 le mot, word, note le roman, novel 
 
 la paix, peace le volume, volume 
 
 A. (Oral.) Continue: 1. J'ecris des lettres. 2. Je decrivais mon 
 voyage, tu . . . ton. 3. Je lui ecrirai un mot. 4. Je vis de peu. 
 
 5. Je ne lui ecris pas. 6. II faut que je leur ecrive. 7. Decris ce 
 que tu as vu. 8. II fallait que je vecusse seul. 9. Je vivrai de mon 
 travail. 10. Je vivais en paix. 11. J'ecrivis des romans. 
 
 B. 1. That novel will live. 2. Describe the play to me. 3. I 
 was writing a letter. 4. I wrote him a note. 5. They lived on little. 
 
 6. They have to write. 7. We live by (from) our work. 8. If he 
 had a pen, he would write. 9. He had to write. 10. They will 
 describe their travels. 11. Here are the letters I have written. 
 La viator Hugo wrote (p. def.) this poem in 1840. 
 
 0. 1. He livea annosi, ninety years. 2. He wrote seventy vol- 
 umes. 3. She is still living (lives ^till). 4. You have to write. 
 5. 1 do not think he will live long. 6. He thinks that novel will 
 
180 LESSON LXXX [ 198 
 
 live. 7. He has described his travels. 8. The poems that he 
 wrote are exquisite. 9. Let us live in peace. 10. They were living 
 in peace with everybody. 11. I wish you may live a long time. 
 12. Victor Hugo was still living when I was born. 
 
 LESSON LXXX 
 
 198. Partitives. 1. Review 25, 28, 29, and observe the fol- 
 lowing : 
 
 N'a-t-il pas des amis? Has he no friends? 
 
 Pas du lait mais du the". Not milk but tea. 
 
 II n'a que des dettes. He has nothing but debts. 
 
 C'etaient des grands hommes. They were great men. 
 
 Des petits-fils; des petits pois. Grandsons; green peas. 
 
 (a) With negatives the article remains when the existence of the object 
 referred to is implied, Ex. 1; in contrasts, Ex. 2; with ne . . . que = only, Ex. 3; 
 .and when adjective and noun form a real or virtual compound, Ex. 4 and 5, 
 
 2. When de forms part of a phrase governing a partitive, the 
 partitive sign is wholly omitted: 
 
 II vit de pain. He lives on bread. 
 
 II se sert d'encre noire. He uses black ink. 
 
 Un arbre couvert de feuilles. A tree covered with leaves. 
 
 199. Article with Titles. 1. A title before the name of a 
 person takes the definite article, except in direct address: 
 
 La reine Victoria fut aimee. Queen Victoria was beloved. 
 Le docteur Bibot est arrive. Doctor Ribot has come. 
 But: Bon jour, docteur Ribot. (rood morning, Dr. Ribot. 
 
 2. If the title is preceded by a title of courtesy (e.g. mon- 
 sieur, etc.), it keeps the article in all cases: 
 
 Bon jour, monsieur le docteur. Good morning, doctor. 
 
 Son altesse le prince Pa dit. His Highness the prince said so. 
 
 ,(a} For other titles, see 211. 
 
200] LESSON LXXX 181 
 
 200. Apposition. 1. Appositive nouns used in parenthetical 
 explanation regularly take no article: 
 
 L'Avare, comedie de Moliere. The Avare, a comedy by Moliere. 
 
 Paris, fils de Priam. Paris, (the or a) son of Priam. 
 
 2. Apparent apposition is frequent in expressions like: 
 L'eglise (sc. de) Saint-Pierre. St. Peter's (the church of, etc.). 
 
 Des meubles (sc. du temps de) Louis XV furniture. 
 
 Louis XV. 
 
 EXERCISE LXXX 
 
 1'appartement. m., suite of rooms, dejeuner, take lunch, lunch 
 
 flat le dessert, dessert 
 
 1'argenterie, f., silverware le (la) domestique, servant 
 
 le beau-frere, brother-in-law a droite (sc. main), to or on the 
 
 le boeuf, ox, beef right. 
 
 la bonne chere, good cheer, good Pescalier, m., stairway 
 
 living a gauche, to or on the left . 
 
 le bon vivant, 'jolly fellow,' etc. meubler, furnish 
 le buffet, sideboard moderne, modern 
 
 le capitaine, captain Notre-Dame, Notre Dame 
 
 le caviar, caviare r6tir, roast 
 
 le confort, comfort le siege, seat, chair 
 
 le corridor, passage, hall la verrerie, glassware 
 
 decorer, decorate, adorn 
 
 etre en train de, be occupied in, be busy (Eng. + -ing form) ; mettre le 
 couvert, set (lay) the table; (en) robe de chambre, in their jackets or 
 skins (of potatoes) ; les petits pains, breakfast rolls, rolls; les petits pois, 
 green peas 
 
 A. Continue: 1. Je me sers de farine pour faire du pain. 2. J'em- 
 ploie de la farine. 3. Je le fais avec de la farine. . 4. Je le fais de 
 farine. 5. Je vis de pain. 6. Je ne mange que du pain. 7. N'ai-je 
 pas des amis ici? 8. J'ai achete* des meubles Louis XVI. 
 
 B. 1. Ma sceur et mon beau-frere habitent un appartement, 125 
 rue Notre-Dame, a droite de 1'eglise Saint-Pierre. 2. C'est une 
 belle maison avec tout le confort m6derne. 3. Meme les escaliers 
 et les corridors sont beaux a voir. 4. Mon beau-frere est capitaine 
 et le capitaine Pictet lui fait visite de temps en temps. 5. Tous les 
 deux (or 1'un et Pautre) aiment la bonne chere, quoiqu'ils ne soient 
 pas des bons vivants. 6. Le capitaine Pictet vient dejeuner au- 
 
182 LESSON LXXX [200 
 
 jourd'hui. 7. On est en train de mettre le couvert dans la salle a 
 manger. 8. Cette piece est meublee avec gout et de*coree de jolies 
 gravures du XVIII 6 siecle. 9. Les sieges et le buffet sont "des 
 meubles Louis XVI. 10. Quand le buffet est garni de vaisselle, 
 d'argenterie et de verrerie il est tres beau. 11. Les assiettes et les 
 verres sont sur la table. 12. On va servir du caviar, du bceuf roti, 
 des pommes de terre (en) robe de chambre, des petits pois et des 
 petits pains. 13. Au dessert on aura du fromage et du cafe. 
 
 C. (Oral.) 1. Ou habitez-vous? 2. Decrivez-moi votre apparte- 
 ment. 3. Qui est 1'ami de votre beau-frere? 4. Sont-ils des bons 
 vivants? 5. Qui vient dejeuner chez vous aujourd'hui? 6. Que 
 fait-on dans la salle a manger? 7. Decrivez les meubles de cette 
 piece. 8. Qu'est-ce qu'on va servir au dejeuner? 9. Qu'est-ce 
 que vous prendrez au dessert? 
 
 D. 1. We used to live [at number] 75 Lafayette Street. 2. The 
 house was on the left of St. Paul's church. 3. We lived in a flat 
 which hadn't all the modern comfort[s]. 4. The stairway wasn't 
 beautiful. 5. My father was a colonel. 6. Colonel Henri used to 
 visit him from time to time. 7. They are not 'jolly fellows/ but 
 they like good living. 8. The servants are busy setting the table. 
 9. When the table is adorned with glassware and silverware it is 
 very beautiful. 10. We have some Louis XVI chairs and a side- 
 board of the same century. 11. At the lunch they will have first a 
 hors-d'oeuvre. 12. They will be served (use on) with roast beef and 
 green peas. 13. At dessert they will have good cheese and black 
 coffee. 
 
 E. 1. We use flour to make bread. 2. Use my pen to write your 
 letter. 3. The passages are adorned with engravings of the XVII 
 century. 4. We have Louis XVI furniture in our dining room. 
 5. We are looking for a house which is well furnished. 6. Queen 
 Victoria was born in 1819. 7. When Captain Lesage used to come 
 to see us he would often lunch with us. 8. My brother-in-law and 
 he liked good living. 9. People use glasses to drink wine. 10. They 
 use cups to drink coffee. 11. Both rose early and took some rolls and 
 coffee with milk. 12. Give me some of the black coffee. 13. This 
 cup is full of coffee. 14. We didn't have any of the good cheese 
 which we bought at Potin's. 
 
t 201] LESSON LXXXI 183 
 
 LESSON LXXXI 
 
 201. Plaire, ' please ' ; rire, ' laugh ' 
 
 plaire plaisant plu plais plus 
 
 rire riant ri ris ris 
 
 Like plaire : se plaire, be pleased ', enjoy oneself, like it, etc. 
 
 EXERCISE LXXXI 
 
 je vous demande pardon, monsieur, or pardon, monsieur, I beg your 
 pardon, sir 
 
 A. (Oral.) Continue: 1. Je plais (plairai, plus) a tout le monde. 
 2. Je ne plaisais (plairais) a personne. 3. Je ne lui plais pas. 4. Je 
 m'y plaisais beaucoup. 5. II ne croit pas que je leur plaise. 
 6. Pourquoi est-ce que j'en ris? 7. Ne ris pas des malheureux. 
 
 8. II faut que je rie. 9. J'ai beaucoup ri. 10. Je riais souvent en 
 classe. 
 
 B. 1. That pleases (will please) him. 2. The play pleased (would 
 please) nobody. 3. Do you like it in the country? 4. I do. 5. Come 
 when it pleases you. 6. At what are you laughing? 7. I beg your 
 pardon, I didn't laugh. 8. Don't laugh at the misfortunes of others. 
 
 9. They always laughed at us. 10. We shall laugh if it (that) 
 pleases us. 11. They laughed very much at it. 
 
 C. 1. The architect desired the plan to please you. 2. We never 
 liked it in the country. 3. I don't think you will enjoy it there. 
 4. He tries to please everybody. 5. He will please nobody. 6. That 
 child was always laughing and singing. 7. Why do you laugh at 
 that? 8. I don't wisri you to laugh at it. 9. Why did you laugh a 
 moment ago? 10. It wasn't necessary that he should laugh. 11. I 
 always have to laugh when I see that. 
 
184 LESSON LXXXII [202 
 
 LESSON LXXXII 
 
 202. Omission of Article. 1. The article is omitted in 
 many expressions made up of a verb + a noun: 
 
 J'ai soif ; il a bien faim. / am thirsty; he is very hungry. 
 
 Je vous demande pardon. I beg your pardon. 
 
 (a) Examples are: avoir besoin, need; avoir chaud (froid), be warm (cold); 
 avoir faim (soif, sommeil), be hungry (thirsty, sleepy); avoir raison (tort), be 
 right or be in the right (wrong) ; f aire chaud (froid) , be warm (cold) ; f aire 
 attention, pay attention; prendre garde, take care; very, quite, are expressed 
 commonly by bien (sometimes tres). 
 
 (b) Compare also the omission of the article in prepositional phrases like 
 apres (le) diner, after dinner; avec plaisir, with pleasure, and many others. 
 
 2. Contrary to English usage, un (une) stands before an ab- 
 stract noun adjectivally modified: 
 
 II montra un soin extreme. He showed extreme care. 
 
 Une patience a toute epreuve. Patience equal to anything. 
 
 (a) Compare also expressions like J'ai une soif ardente, I have (a) burning 
 thirst; II fait un froid terrible, It is terribly cold. 
 
 203. Article for Possessive Adjective. 1. The definite arti- 
 cle is frequently so used when no ambiguity results, but is not 
 always obligatory: 
 
 Donnez-moi la main. Give me your hand. 
 
 II a perdu la vie. He has lost his life. 
 
 Elle s'est dechire la main. She has torn her hand. 
 
 Son (le) bras lui fait mal. His arm hurts him. 
 
 2. So also with avoir mal (froid, chaud, etc., cf. 202), and 
 in phrases of description with avoir : 
 
 J'ai mal a la tete (aux dents). I have a headache (toothache). 
 Avez-vous froid aux mains? Are your hands cold? 
 
 H a le nez long (or un long nez). He has a long nose. 
 
 3. When the object possessed is singular as regards each pos- 
 sessor, it regularly remains singular, even though more than one 
 possessor is denoted: 
 
 Us ont perdu la vie. They have lost their lives. 
 
 Us ont ote leur chapeau. They took off their hats. 
 
 Us sont entre*s, le chapeau sur la They came in with their hats on 
 
 tete. their heads. 
 
204] LESSON LXXXII 185 
 
 204. Observe the constructions in the following: 
 
 II fait froid. It (the weather) is cold. 
 
 Il*fait froid ce matin. It's a cold morning. 
 
 II fait froid dans cette salle. It is cold in this hall (this hall is 
 
 cold). 
 
 J'ai froid. / am cold. 
 
 L'eau est froide. The water is cold. 
 
 J'ai froid aux mains. My hands are cold. 
 
 Vous avez les mains froides. Your hands are cold. 
 
 EXERCISE LXXXII 
 
 ardent, ardent, burning Pordonnance, f., prescription 
 
 bonsoir, good evening (night) le pore, pore 
 
 le corps, body retaWi, restored (in health), well 
 
 la douleur, pain again 
 
 eleve, high le rhume, cold 
 
 eternuer, sneeze secouer, shake 
 
 garder, keep le sejour, sojourn, stay 
 
 la gorge, throat la temperature, temperature 
 
 gravement, gravely terrible, terrible 
 
 la grippe, l grippe,' influenza le thermometre, thermometer 
 
 humide, damp tousser, cough 
 
 le midi, south transpirer, perspire 
 
 cette dent me fait mal, this tooth pains (hurts) me; j'ai un .mal de dents 
 terrible, / have a dreadful toothache; comment allez-vous? how are 
 you? comment ca va-t-il? (fam.), how are you? ca va mal (fam.), / 
 am not (very) well; prenez garde a vous, take care of yourself; faire 
 une ordonnance, write (give) a prescription; qu'avez-vous? what is 
 the matter with you? 
 
 A. 1. Depuis quelque temps il fait trop froid et trop humide. 
 2. Beaucoup de gens ont des rhumes. 3. Moi j'ai pris la grippe. 
 4. J'ai mal a la tete et a la gorge. 5. Je tousse et eternue beau- 
 coup. 6. J'ai des douleurs par tout le corps. 7. Les bras et les 
 jambes me font bien mal. 8. J'ai un mal de dents terrible. 9. Je 
 n'ai pas tres faim, mais j'ai une soif ardente. 10. J'ai tellement 
 chaud que je transpire par tous les pores. 11. Mon pere a envoy e* 
 chercher le medecin. 12. Le voila qui sonne. 13. "Bonsoir, mon- 
 sieur le docteur. 14. Bonsoir, Pierre, comment Qa va-t-il? 
 15. Qa va mal, docteur. 16. Je souffre partout." 17. En me ta- 
 
186 LESSON LXXXII [204 
 
 tant le pouls il me dit que j'ai les mains bien chaudes. 18. II me 
 met un thermometre sous la langue. 19. II regarde son thermometre 
 et secoue gravement la tete. 20. " Vous avez la temperature ^ien 
 eleve*e. 21. Prenez garde a vous. 22. Vous garderez le lit quelques 
 jours, n'est-ce pas? 23. Je vous ferai une ordonnance. 24. Quand 
 vous aurez pris le remede vous irez mieux. 25. Puis le temps 
 changera; il fera plus beau. 26. Vous serez bientot completement 
 retabli. 27. Vous pourrez peut-etre aussi faire un petit sejour dans 
 le Midi. 28. On guerit souvent en changeant d'air." 
 
 B. (Oral on A.) 
 
 C. 1. The weather has been very damp. 2. You have a cold, 
 haven't you? 3. Yes, and .my head is aching. 4. My sister has a 
 sore throat. 5. Everybody is sneezing and coughing. 6. My father 
 is ill. 7. What is the matter with him? 8. He has taken the 
 'grippe/ 9. He has pains all over his body. 10. These children 
 are very cold. 11. They were playing in the yard and their hands 
 and feet are cold. 12. They are very hungry and very thirsty too. 
 
 D. 1. How are you? 2. What is the matter with you? 3. The 
 doctor will put a thermometer under your tongue. 4. Take care 
 of yourself. 5. You must keep to your bed. 6. You will be better 
 to-morrow. 7. Your hands are hot, but your temperature is not 
 very high. 8. Here is a prescription I have written (faire) for you. 
 9. This medicine will do you good (du bien). 10. Make a short 
 (petit) stay in the south and you will be completely restored [to 
 health]. 11. You are quite right; I shall do so (it). 12. I shall get 
 well by changing climate. 
 
 E. 1. It is warm in winter in the south of France. 2. When I 
 was skating my feet were very cold. 3. I suffered a great deal from 
 it. 4. But I am quite warm now. 5. I have a bad (use bien) 
 headache, and I have a toothache also. 6. Our professor has a sore 
 throat and must keep [to] the house. 7. Are you too warm? 8. No, 
 I am too cold. 9. When we are hungry we eat slices of bread and 
 butter. 10. If we are thirsty, we like water better than wine. 11. I 
 am terribly thirsty. 12. Give me a glass of water, if you please. 
 
 F. 1. It was so cold that I had to put on warmer clothes. 2. If 
 you are cold, take a cup of hot coffee. 3. You said it was warmer 
 
205] LESSON LXXXIII 187 
 
 to-day, but I think you are wrong. 4. It is colder. 5. I beg your 
 pardon; I am right. 6. Monkeys have long arms and small heads. 
 7. Those bad boys entered the classroom with their hats on their 
 heads. 8. My father almost lost his life in a railway accident. 
 9. He has (is) not completely recovered yet. 10. His arm hurts 
 him still. 
 
 LESSON LXXXIII 
 
 205. Tenir, 'hold' 
 
 tenir tenant tenu tiens tins 
 
 (a) Tenir is conjugated precisely like venir (cf. 167). 
 Like tenir: appartenir, belong; obtenir, obtain; contenir, contain. 
 Like venir: devenir, become (of). 
 
 EXERCISE LXXXIII 
 
 la permission, permission tenir de, take after 
 
 le porte-monnaie, purse 
 
 A. (Oral.) Continue: 1. Qu'est-ce que je deviendrai (devien- 
 drais)? 2. Je suis devenue heureuse. 3. Je devenais tres riche. 
 4. Ma mere desire que je devienne plus sage, . . . tu. 5. J'obtiens 
 (obtins) ainsi un bon prix. 6. J'obtiendrai (obtiendrais) la permis- 
 sion d'y entrer. 7. J'appartiens a cet endroit. 
 
 B. 1. The boxes contained pencils and pens. 2. A glass con- 
 taining milk was on the table. 3. This purse contains all my money. 
 4. They have become very poor. 5. What has become of him 
 (her)? 6. What has become of my pens? 7. To whom did that 
 castle belong? 8. I ask [for] what belongs to me. 9. Some pictures 
 belonging to this artist have been stolen. 10. What price will you 
 obtain? 
 
 C. 1. This young man has become [a] doctor. 2. What will 
 (would) become of us? 3. This field belonged to my father's prop- 
 erty. 4. It will become my property when my uncle dies. 5. They 
 say that living will become dearer. 6. We shall obtain (the) per- 
 mission to stay. 7. He held the letter in his hand. 8. I wish that 
 you may become happier. 9. The son takes after his father. 10. I 
 hope the letter will contain money. 11. Don't hold your pen like 
 that. 
 
188 LESSON LXXXIV [206 
 
 LESSON LXXXIV 
 
 206. Adjectives and Nouns. 1. Review 34, and observe: 
 causeur, m., causeuse, f., chatty (adj.), a chatty person (noun) 
 flatteur, m., flatteuse, f., flattering (adj.), a flatterer (noun) 
 createur, m., creatrice, f., creative (adj.), a creator (noun) 
 
 (a) When a corresponding present participle exists, -eur of nouns and 
 adjectives becomes -euseinthe feminine, Ex. 1 and 2 (cf. causant, flattant); 
 otherwise -teur becomes -trice in the feminine, Ex. 3. 
 
 2. The feminine of many nouns is formed like that of adjec- 
 tives of the same ending: 
 
 ecolier, -ere, schoolboy instituteur, -trice, teacher 
 
 paysan, -anne, peasant citadin, -e, inhabitant of the town 
 
 207. Agreement of Adjectives. Review 14, and observe 
 the following special cases: 
 
 1. Adjectives used as adverbs are regularly invariable: 
 Ces roses sentent bon. These roses smell sweet. 
 
 2. Nouns serving as adjectives of colour are invariable: 
 Des robes lilas (citron) . Purple (lemon-coloured) dresses, 
 (a) But rose, cramoisi, pourpre, agree like adjectives. 
 
 3. A very few adjectives are always invariable: 
 Vingt livres sterling. Twenty pounds sterling. 
 
 4. With avoir 1'air, the adjective agrees either with air (m.), 
 or with the subject (d'etre being expressed or implied): 
 
 Elle a 1'air doux. She has a gentle air (appearance). 
 
 Elle a 1'air (d'etre) douce. She seems or looks gentle. 
 
 (a) Either expression may be used without distinction. 
 
 5. The peculiar agreement with gens : 
 
 Les vieilles gens sont positifs. Old people are practical. 
 
 Toutes les vieilles gens. All the old people. 
 
 Tous les (ces) habiles gens. All the (those) clever people. 
 
 Les gens sont tous ici. The people are all here. 
 
208] LESSON LXXXIV 189 
 
 (a) All forms agreeing with gens are plural. 
 
 (6) An adjective is feminine before gens and masculine after it, Ex. 1 
 and 2, but cf. c. 
 
 (c) All = toutes only when separated from gens by an adjective vari- 
 able for the feminine, Ex. 2; otherwise tous, Ex. 3 and 4. 
 
 NOTE. Jeunes gens = young men, young people, is always masculine, 
 and also gens used as an antecedent, e.g. Les gens qui sont venus. 
 
 208. Comparatives. 1. Review 56, and contrast the 
 French and English forms of the following: 
 
 De plus en plus violent. More and more violent. 
 
 Plus il devient riche moins il est The richer he becomes the less gen- 
 
 genereux. erous he is. 
 
 II en sera d'autant plus riche. He will be the richer for it. 
 
 Le carnage fut d'autant plus grand The carnage was the greater because 
 
 qu'ils etaient plus nombreux. they were more numerous. 
 
 2. A finite verb completing a comparison is preceded by ne, 
 unless the preceding verb is negative: 
 
 C'est meilleur que je ne croyais. It is better than I thought. 
 Ce n'est pas si mal que je croyais. It is not so bad as I thought. 
 
 3. When aussi (or si) is omitted, comme (not que) is used: 
 Un r6i riche comme Cresus. A king as rich as Croesus. 
 
 EXERCISE LXXXIV 
 
 agricole, agricultural gai, gay, merry, cheerful 
 
 Pair, m., air, appearance horticole, horticultural 
 
 le bouquet, bouquet, nosegay Pinstituteur, m., f. -trice, teacher 
 
 la bouquetiere, flower girl le lilas, lilac; adj., purple 
 
 la boutonniere, buttonhole nouveau, new, novel 
 
 charmant, charming le parterre, flower garden 
 
 le citadin, f . -e, townsman le produit, product 
 
 coiffer, dress the hair (head) promener, lead or take about 
 
 le concours, competition, show la prosperite, prosperity 
 
 doux, gentle, mild la rose, rose 
 
 Pecolier, m., f. -ere, schoolboy serieux, serious 
 
 (girl) le signe, sign 
 
 les environs, m., neighbourhood la tente, tent 
 
 coup d'oail, glance, prospect, sight, view; a la (sc. mode) francaise, in the 
 French style or fashion; neuf, new (not old), nouveau, new, fresh, 
 novel 
 
190 LESSON I/XXXIV [208 
 
 A. (Concours agricole et horticole) 1. Tous les braves gens des 
 environs y arrivent a pied ou en voiture. 2. Les paysans y ap- 
 portent les produits des champs, les paysannes ceux du verger et du 
 parterre. 3. On y amene aussi lee boeufs et les vaches. 4. Us sont 
 au pare a Tombre. 5. Les vaches ont Fair tres douces, n'est-ce 
 pas? 6. Les paysans sont bons pour leurs betes et leur donnent a 
 manger. 7. On met les fleurs et les fruits sous des tentes. 8. Les 
 fleurs sentent bon et offrent un" coup d'ceil charmant. 9. Les 
 pommes ont Fair d'etre mures. 10. II fait beau et il y a beaucoup 
 de monde. 11. Les citadins, hommes d'affaires, observent les 
 signes de la prosperite du pays. 12. Les citadines cherchent de 
 nouvelles especes de fleurs ou de fruits. 13. Un instituteur et une 
 institutrice promenent leurs ecoliers et leurs ^coheres pour les ins- 
 truire. 14. Une jolie bouquetiere en robe lilas et coiffee a Tita- 
 lienne vend des fleurs. 15. Tous les jeunes gens en achetent pour 
 mettre a leur boutonniere. 16. Toutes les vieilles gens s'occupent 
 d'affaires serieuses. 
 
 B. (Oral.) Read A aloud, turning present tenses into the imperfect. 
 
 C. 1. The country people of the neighbourhood are coming to 
 the agricultural show. 2. They will bring to it the products of the 
 fields. 3. The oxen and cows will be brought too. 4. And they 
 do not forget the products of the orchard and flower garden. 5. The 
 animals look so gentle. 6. Look at the flowers in ( = under) the 
 tents. 7. What a pretty sight! 8. And they smell so sweet! 
 9. Smell this bouquet. 10. These pears look ripe. 11. It is a new 
 kind of pear. 12. These are business men. 13. They are townsmen. 
 
 14. The townswomen hope to find new kinds of roses or of fruits. 
 
 15. The teachers (/.) will bring their schoolgirls here. 16. All the 
 young men will buy flowers from the flower girls. 17. Do you see 
 that young countrywoman dressed in the Italian fashion? 18. I 
 mean the young woman in [a] purple dress. 
 
 D. 1. All the young people are merry. 2. All the old people are 
 more serious. 3. The older you are the more serious you become. 
 4. These worthy people are kind to everybody. 5. Everybody is 
 kind to them. 6. We observed many signs of prosperity at the hor- 
 ticultural show. 7. The teachers (m.) were taking their scholars 
 about (there). 8, They wanted to show them something new. 
 
209] LESSON LXXXV 191 
 
 9. The schoolboys asked their teachers many questions. 10. The 
 schoolgirls admired the flowers. 11. They have bought some pretty 
 ones for their teachers (/.). 12. Old people are more serious than 
 young people. 13. 1 am more serious than I used to be (I') . 14. This 
 young countrywoman looks very intelligent. 15. She sold a good 
 many flowers to the young men. 16. The younger one is the more 
 one spends. 17. We become wiser and wiser as we become old. 
 18. My old friend has become as rich as Croesus in South America. 
 
 LESSON LXXXV 
 
 209. Cueillir, * pluck,' * gather'; ouvrir, 'open'; 
 tressaillir, 'start,' 'Ifgqfifif* 
 
 cueillir cueillant cueilli cueille cueillis 
 
 ouvrir ouvrant ouvert ouvre ouvris 
 
 tressaillir tressaillant tressailli tressaille ,tressaillis 
 Like ouvrir: couvrir, cover; decouvrir, discover; s'ouvrir, open (intr.). 
 
 EXERCISE LXXXV 
 Colomb, Columbus Pexposition, f., exhibition 
 
 A. (Oral.) Continue: 1. Je tressaille (tressaillais, tressaillis) de 
 joie. 2. J'ouvre (ouvrais, ouvris) la malle. 3. Ouvre la porte. 
 
 4. Couvre-toi la tete, . . . nous. 5. Je cueille (cueillais, cueillis) 
 des fleurs pour en faire un bouquet. 6. Leslettres que j'ai ouvertes. 
 7. J'ouvrirai les fenetres. 8. II faut que je les ouvre. 
 
 B. 1. She starts when she hears a noise. 2. They were trem- 
 bling with fear. 3. Open the door, please. 4. I have opened it. 
 
 5. The door opens (reflex.). 6. I was opening my letters when he 
 came. 7. I am (was) gathering flowers to make a bouquet. 8. Here 
 are the flowers I have gathered for the exhibition. 9. Let her gather 
 the prettiest flowers. 10. When will you pick your apples? 11. The 
 fields were covered with snow. 
 
 C. 1. The windows are not open; open them. 2. I wish him to 
 open his valise. 3. The king in person opened (p. def.) the exhi- 
 bition. 4. On opening the letter she trembled. 5. Cover your head 
 or you will catch cold. 6. The table was covered 1 with papers. 
 
192 LESSON LXXXVI [210 
 
 7. She trembles (trembled) with joy. 8. They started at the noise 
 of the train. 9. We are covering the apples with straw. 10. Where 
 are the flowers that you were gathering? 11. Columbus .discovered 
 America in 1492. 
 
 LESSON LXXXVI 
 
 210. Personal Pronoun. The following special cases of 
 agreement should be noted : 
 
 1. The invariable forms il (subject) and le (direct object) are 
 used when the antecedent is indefinite or absent: 
 
 Y en a-t-il? Je le crois. Is there any? / think so. 
 
 Je le ferai si vous le desirez. / shall do so if you wish (it). 
 
 Nous Pavons emporte. We have carried the day. 
 
 2. So also the pronominal adverbs en and y: 
 
 Voyons! oil en etions-nous? Let me see! where were wef 
 
 Quoiqu'il en soit. However it may be. 
 
 Votre pere y est-il? 7s your father in (at home)? 
 
 3. Le (la, les) sometimes has predicative force: 
 Etes-vous sa mere? Je la suis. Are you his mother? / am. 
 Etes-vous M me B.? Je la suis. Are you Mrs. B.f I am. 
 Etes-vous fatiguee? Je le suis. Are you tired? / am. 
 Sont-ils soldats? Us le sont Are they soldiers? They are. 
 Soyez braves et je le serai. Be brave and I shall be so. 
 
 (a) If le refers to a determinate substantive (not partitive), it agrees, 
 Ex. 1 and 2; otherwise it is invariable, Ex. 3, 4 and 5. 
 
 211. Possessives. Review 15, 16, 83-85, and observe: 
 
 1. The use of the possessive adjective in polite address: 
 Bon jour mon pere (mon colonel). Good morning, father (colonel). 
 Mademoiselle votre soeur y est- 7s your sister at home? 
 
 elle? 
 
 (a) In direct address mon (ma, etc.) commonly precedes a noun of re- 
 lationship (but not papa, maman) or the title of a superior officer; votre (vos) 
 is often preceded by monsieur (madame, etc.). 
 
 2. Own = propre, or is expressed by a+ a pronoun: 
 
 Je Pai fait de mes propres mains. I did it with my own hands. 
 C'est mon opinion a moi. It is my own opinion. 
 
 II a une maison a lui. He has a house of his own. 
 
212] LESSON LXXXVI 193 
 
 3. Ambiguity is sometimes avoided by using &, thus: 
 Son pere & lui (a elle). His (her) father. 
 
 4. The possessive pronoun may be used absolutely: 
 Je ne demande que le mien. / ask only what is mine. 
 
 Les miens. My family (friends, party, etc.). 
 
 212. Relative Pronoun. 1. For the general rules, see 92- 
 98. 
 
 2. Qui without antecedent means he who, the one(s) who, 
 those who, and when repeated some . . . others: 
 
 Qui s'excuse s'accuse. He who excuses himself accuses 
 
 himself. 
 Qui d'un cote qui de Fautre. Some on one side some on the other. 
 
 3. Observe de quoi = " ce qui est necessaire pour": 
 II a de quoi vivre. He is well off. 
 Donnez-moi de quoi ecrire. Give me something to write with. 
 Merci! II n'y a pas de quoi. Thanks! Don't mention it (e(c.). 
 
 EXERCISE LXXXVI 
 
 Pachat, m., purchase faible, weak 
 
 Pavoine, f ., oats la ferme, farmhouse 
 
 la basse-cour, farmyard le foin, hay 
 
 la charrue, plough Phectare, m., about 2% acres 
 
 comprendre, irreg., understand le labour, ploughing 
 le cultivateur, farmer la moissonneuse, reaping machine 
 
 le cure, parish priest, cure nommer, name, appoint 
 
 le droit, right Porge, f., barley 
 
 Pecurie, f., (horse) stable pareillement, equally, likewise, also 
 
 enchante, charmed, delighted le proprietaire, proprietor, landlord 
 
 Pexistence, f ., existence le republican!, republican 
 
 exploiter, exploit, work la terre, earth, land 
 
 ils se serrent la main, they shake hands; c'est la ma maison, that is my 
 house (there)', il m'en veut, he has a grudge against me; je n'y com- 
 prends rien, I don't understand it at all; oft en etes-vous de . . .? 
 how far are you on with . . .? j'en ai pour . . ., 7 have . . . worth of it; 
 ils Pont emporte, they have won, have carried the day; il y va de ma vie, 
 my life is at stake; e'en est fait de moi, it is all over (all up) with me; 
 que voulez-vous que j'y fasse? what am I to do? hoy> can I help it? 
 what can you expect? etc. 
 
194 LESSON LXXXVI [212 
 
 A. Continue: 1. Je ne lui en veux pas. 2. Je n'y ai rien compris. 
 3. Ou en suis-je de mes preparatlfs? . . . tu . . . tes. 4. Est-ce que 
 j'y comprends quelque chose? 5. Je Femporterai sur eux. 6. C'en 
 est fait de mqi, . . . toi. 7. II y va de ma vie, . . . ta. 8. J'ai une 
 maison a moi, tu . . . a toi. 9. Je ne demande que le mien, tu . . . 
 le tien. 
 
 B. (Dans la basse-cour) 1. "Bonjour, monsieur le cure. 2. Bon- 
 jour, mon enfant. Monsieur votre pere y est-il? 3. Je vais Fap- 
 peler." 4. M. Legrand, gros cultivateur, arrive. 5. Le cure, 
 recemment nomine, et lui se serrent la main. 6. "Vous etes 
 monsieur le cure? 7. Et vous, monsieur Legrand? Je suis en- 
 chante de faire votre connaissance. 8. Moi pareillement, mon- 
 sieur le cure. 9. C'est la votre maison? 10. Oui, c'est la la 
 ferme. 11. Et plus loin c'est le chateau du proprietaire. 12. J'ex- 
 ploite quatre-vingts hectares dont la moitie est a lui et Fautre 
 moitie a moi. 13. C'est de la bonne terre. 14. Les miens et moi 
 sommes tres heureux. 15. Mais depuis Fachat de mes quarante 
 hectares notre proprietaire nous en veut. 16. Je n'y comprends 
 
 rien. 17. Quoi! je n'aurais pas le droit d'acheter des terres? 
 18. Mais ou en etes-vous de votre re*colte, dit le cure. 19. Nous 
 en sommes aux trois quarts. 20. Le foin, Favoine et Forge sont 
 tres bons. 21. J'en aurai pour dix mille francs. 22. Voici Fe*curie. 
 23. Les chevaux n'y sont pas. 24. Us font marcher la moissonneuse 
 dans les bles, et les boeufs sont au labour. 25. Nous labourons en 
 ce moment avec trois charrues. 26. A propos, avez-vous des nou- 
 velles des elections d'hier? 27. Les republicans Font emporte* 
 sur les notres. 28. Quel dommage! 29. II y va de Fexistence de 
 Feglise, et peut-etre de la France. 30. C'en est fait de nous. 
 31. Mais que voulez-vous que nous y fassions? 32. Nous sommes 
 les plus faibles." 
 
 C. (Oral on B.) 
 
 D. Supply the proper form of le: 1. fites-vous Anglais? Nous 
 . . . sommes. 2. fites-vous Finstitutrice? Je . . . suis. 3. Sont-ils 
 heureux? Us ... sont. 4. Sont-ce de braves gens? II , . . sont. 
 5. fites-vous fatigue*es? Nous . . . sommes. 6. fites-vous la femme 
 du cultivateur? Je . . . suis. 
 
213] LESSON LXXXVII 195 
 
 E. 1. The new parish priest met the boy in the barnyard. 2. He 
 asked him if his father was in. 3. He went to get his father. 4. The 
 big farmer and the priest shook hands. 5. The priest was delighted 
 to make his acquaintance. 6. That is the farmhouse behind the 
 trees. 7. That is my landlord's castle. 8. The farmer had land of 
 his own. 9. Half the land he worked belonged to him. 10. He 
 and his [family] were well off. 11. But their landlord had a grudge 
 against them. 12. They couldn't understand it at all. 13. The 
 priest asked him how far he was on with his harvest. 14. The 
 hay, oats and barley were already cut. 15. He had 5000 francs' 
 worth of them. 16. Some of the harvesters were cutting the wheat 
 (plur.). 17. We use reaping machines for that. 18. Other men are 
 ploughing the fields with two ploughs. 19. To plough they use 
 oxen. 20. The republicans won at the elections. 21. Our party 
 ( 211, 4) was beaten, said the priest. 22. But what can you 
 expect? 
 
 F. 1. However it may be, I am not satisfied. 2. I shall accom- 
 pany you if you wish (it). 3. I should be delighted if you did so. 
 4. He is wrong, but I will not tell him so. 5. I have made this 
 bread with my own hands. 6. Have you a house of your own, or 
 do you live with your relations? 7. You have been very kind to me 
 and mine. 8. I thank you for it. 9. Don't mention it. 10. Our 
 party will carry the day at the elections, I am certain (of it). 11. Are 
 you republicans? 12. We are. 13. Good evening, aunt; are you 
 ready to (a) go? 14. I am; let us go. 15. You seem to have a 
 grudge against me. 16. We have read this work (ouvrage), but 
 we don't understand it at all. 17. If you don't change [your] 
 manner-of -living (vie), it is all up with you. 
 
 LESSON LXXXVII 
 
 213. Craindre, i fear ' ; joindre, i join ' ; peindre, ' paint ' 
 
 craindre craignant craint crains craignis 
 
 joindre joignant joint joins joignis 
 
 peindre peignant peint peins peignis 
 
 (a) Note the similarity of these verbs in conjugation. 
 
 Like craindre: plaindre, pity; se plaindre, complain. 
 
196 LESSON LXXXVIII (214 
 
 EXERCISE LXXXVH 
 
 Partiste, m. or f., artist le portrait, portrait 
 
 malheureux, unfortunate 
 
 A. (Oral.) Continue: 1. Je crains (craignais) de tomber. 2. Ne 
 crains rien. 3. Ne te plains pas de cela. 4. Je peins (peignais) un 
 paysage. 5. Les paysages que j'ai peints . . . que tu. 6. II voudrait 
 que je lui peigne un tableau, . . . tu. 7. Je joignis les bouts et les 
 cousis ensemble. 8. Je peignis la boiserie. 9. Je plaignais les pau- 
 vres par (in) ce temps d'hiver. 
 
 B. 1. You paint very well. 2. Which (plur.) of the pictures have 
 you painted? 3. Pity my misfortunes. 4. I pity you; you are very 
 unhappy. 5. We do not complain. 6. Join the ends of this piece 
 of cloth and sew them together. 7. They feared to miss the train. 
 8. Would you fear to arrive too late? 9. The fortunate do not al- 
 ways pity the unfortunate. 
 
 C. 1. Where is the portrait you were painting? 2. I should like 
 you to paint my portrait. 3. Who painted this landscape? 4. That 
 artist painted (p. def.) many landscapes. 5. Let us pity the unfor- 
 tunate. 6. What does he fear? 7. He will fear to meet us. 8. We 
 feared to say a single word. 9. They were always complaining. 
 
 LESSON LXXXVIII 
 
 214. On. Review 38, and observe further: 
 
 On est triste quand on a faim. A man is sad when he is hungry. 
 
 On se demands si, etc. People wonder whether, etc. 
 
 On perdrait son temps. You would lose your time. 
 
 Lorsqu'on presse trop un poisson When you hold a fish too tightly it 
 il vous echappe. escapes you. 
 
 (a) On as subject is repeated if necessary, Ex. 1. 
 
 (6) The reflexive pronoun corresponding to on is se and the possessive 
 is son, Ex. 2 and 3. 
 
 (c) Since on serves only as subject, the corresponding objective forms 
 are borrowed from vous, etc., Ex. 4. 
 
215] LESSON LXXXVIII 197 
 
 215. Whoever, whatever. Observe the following: 
 Qui que tu sois (vous soyez). Whoever you are (= may be). 
 
 Quiconque parlera sera puni(e). Whoever speaks will be punished. 
 Une plume quelconque. Any pen whatever (some, any kind 
 
 of a pen, some pen or other). 
 Quelques efforts qu'il fasse. Whatever efforts he makes (may 
 
 make) . 
 
 Quelle qu'en soit la cause. Whatever (may) be the cause of it. 
 
 Quoi que ce soit. Whatever it be (is, may be). 
 
 Quoi que vous fassiez. Whatever you (may) do. 
 
 (a) Whoever = qui que with etre (subjunctive), Ex. 1, and elsewhere qui- 
 conque, Ex. 2; other equivalents are: celui qui (cf. 82), or qui (cf. 212, 2). 
 
 (6) Any . . . whatever = quelconque, which follows its noun and agrees 
 like an ordinary adjective, Ex. 3. 
 
 (c) Whatever, preceding a noun = quelque(s) . . . que + subjunctive, 
 Ex.4. 
 
 (d) Whatever, preceding to be = quel que + subjunctive, Ex. 5. 
 
 (e) Whatever, absolutely = quoi que + subjunctive, Ex. 6 and 7. 
 
 (f) Observe also : Lequel desirez-vous? N'importe lequel, . . . Any one 
 at all (whatever); Qui doit lire? N'importe qui . . . Any one at all (what- 
 ever) . 
 
 EXERCISE LXXXVIII 
 
 < 
 
 allumer, light, kindle le fluide, fluid 
 
 Pavenir, m., future le gaz, gas 
 
 la bougie, wax candle Phabitation, f ., habitation, dwelling 
 
 bruler, burn Phuile, f., oil 
 
 la chaleur, warmth, heat humain, human 
 
 la chandelle, candle inflammable, inflammable 
 
 le charbon, coal la lampe, lamp 
 
 le chauffage, heating la lumiere, light 
 
 chauffer, warm, heat la maniere, manner, way 
 
 echapper (a), escape (from) mysterieux, mysterious 
 
 Peclairage, m., lighting Pobscurite, f., darkness 
 
 eclairer, light, illuminate ^observation, f., observation 
 
 Pelectricite, f., electricity le petrole, petroleum 
 
 electrique, electric 
 
 lampe a petrole, petroleum lamp; a Pavenir, in the future 
 
 A. Continue: 1. Qui que je sois j'ai besoin cTamis, . . . tu . . . tu. 
 2. Quelques remedes que je prenne je ne gueris pas, . . . tu . . . tu. 
 
198 LESSON LXXXVIII [215 
 
 3. Quelle que soit mon habitation il faut la chauffer, . . . ton, etc. 
 
 4. Quoi que je fasse je ne reussirai pas, . . . tu . . . tu, 5. Je pourrai 
 me servir de n'importe quel livre, tu . . . te. 
 
 B. 1. Quelles que soient les habitations humaines, il faut les 
 chauffer et les eclairer. 2. Qui que vous soyez vous avez besoin de 
 chaleur et de lumiere. 3. Dans 1'obscurite il faut allumer quelque 
 chose d'inflammable. 4. Quoi qu'on fasse il faut un chauffage 
 quelconque par le temps froid. 5. Pour se chauffer on brule du 
 bois ou du charbon. 6. De ce dernier on tire aussi le gaz dont on 
 e*claire les maisons et les rues. 7. On se sert aussi de lampes a 
 ptrole. 8. On peut se demander ce qu'on ferait si le petrole venait 
 a manquer. 9. De quelle esp&ce d'huile se servirait-on dans ce 
 cas? 10. De n'importe quelle espece, car toutes les especes servent 
 a l'clairage. 11. On pourrait employer aussi des chandelles et des 
 bougies. 12. Les unes et les autres ont souvent servi a e*clairer les 
 maisons. 13. II y a aussi la lumiere electrique. 14. Qu'est-ce que 
 c'est que relectricite*? 15. C'est un fluide remarquable qui echappe 
 a notre observation. 16. De quelque maniere qu'on 1'emploie elle 
 reste toujours mysterieuse. 17. Nous ne savons pas ce que c'est 
 que relectricite. 
 
 C. (Oral.) 1. Pourquoi faut-il que nos habitations soient chauf- 
 fe*es et 6clairees? 2. Que nous faut-il pour cela? 3. Que nous faut-il 
 faire dans 1'obscurite? 4. D'ou tirons-nous le gaz? 5. Qu'est-ce que 
 nous faisons pour nous chauffer? 6. Qu'est-ce que nous faisons 
 du gaz? 7. A quoi servent les lampes a petrole? 8. Que ferions- 
 nous s'il n'y en avait pas? 9. De quelle autre lumiere nous servons- 
 nous? 10. Que dit-on ici de 1'electricite? etc. 
 
 D. 1. One must heat the houses in cold climates. 2. Whoever 
 we are we must have light. 3. In darkness we must have some kind 
 of a lamp. 4. Whatever the dwellings of men may be they must 
 be lighted. 5. Whatever you do you must have fire in cold weather. 
 6. We use wood and coal to heat our houses. 7. We use coal to 
 make gas. 8. We light our houses with (de) gas. 9. Do you use 
 petroleum lamps in your house? 10. I wonder what people would do 
 without petroleum. 11. Could they use any sort of oil whatever? 
 12. Yes, and they could use electric light. 13. Do you know what 
 
217] LESSON LXXX1X 199 
 
 electricity is? 14. They call it a mysterious fluid, but nobody knows 
 what it is. 15. In whatever way it may be employed (use on), it 
 will probably remain mysterious. 
 
 E. 1. Heating is necessary in cold climates. 2. Lighting is 
 necessary everywhere. 3. The ancients used oil lamps or candles. 
 4. Light the gas. 5. Do not light the fire yet. 6. We used to burn 
 wood formerly, but we burn coal now. 7. In the future we shall 
 use electricity to give us heat. 8. We use it now to give us light. 
 9. Whoever you are, you must work in this country. 10. You can't 
 escape work here. 11. You can't use any wood whatever (use 
 riimporte) to make furniture. 12. Whoever comes to see me is well 
 received. 13. Whatever you have to say, say it at once. 14. What- 
 ever be the cause of it, they don't come to see us now. 
 
 LESSON LXXXIX 
 
 216. Adverbs from Adjectives. Adverbs of manner are 
 formed from many adjectives by adding -ment, thus: 
 
 1. Added directly to adjectives ending in e, e, i, u: / 
 
 facilement, decidement, poliment, absolument 
 
 2. Otherwise added to the feminine of the adjective: 
 
 pur, purement, doux, doucement, actif, activement 
 (a) Exceptionally -e changes to -6 on adding -ment, e.g. enorme, enorme'- 
 
 ment, precise, precisement. 
 
 (6) Most adjectives in -ant, -ent change -nt to -m, and add -ment, 
 
 e.g. constant, constamment, prudent, prudemment; but not lentement and 
 
 some others. 
 
 (c) Observe gentiment (gentil), brievement (bref), impunement (impuni). 
 
 217. Adverbial Distinctions. 1. Si = yes implies contra- 
 diction of or dissent from a negative assertion or question: 
 
 Je n'irai pas. Si, si, venez. / shall not go. Yes, yes, come. 
 
 II ne s'en va pas? Mais si. He is not going? Yes, certainly, 
 
 2. Observe the following expressions: 
 
 Je dis que oui (non). I say yes (no\ 
 
 Je crois que oui (non). I think so (not}. 
 
200 LESSON LXXXIX [217 
 
 3. Autant = as much (many) ; tant = so much (many) : 
 
 J'ai tant d'amis; j'en ai autant / have so many friends; I have as 
 que n'importe qui. many as anybody. 
 
 4. Only = seulement (1) when no verb is present, (2) when 
 only refers to the subject, (3) or to the verb, (4) or to a que 
 clause, and (5) it may be used to strengthen ne . . . que ; other- 
 wise only = ne . . . que or seulement : 
 
 Seulement les braves. Only the brave. 
 
 Seulement mon frere le sait. Only my brother knows it. 
 
 Ecoutez seulement. Only listen. 
 
 II dit seulement qu'il vient. He only says he is coming. 
 
 II n'a seulement qu'a venir. He has only to come. 
 
 But: Je n'ai que dix francs (or j'ai seulement dix francs); II n'a 
 qu'a demander (il a seulement a demander), etc. 
 
 (a) Only referring to the subject, may be turned also by il n'y a que, 
 ce n'est que; only referring to the verb may be turned by the help of faire: 
 II n'y a que les morts qui ne reviennent pas, The dead only do not come back; 
 Elle ne fait que pleurer, She does nothing but weep. 
 
 (6) Observe also the frequent use in modern French of ne . . . pas que, 
 not only, e.g. II n'y a pas que les pauvres qui aient besoin d'etre aides, It 
 isn't only the poor that need to be helped. 
 
 5. Certain adverbs of place are used like en, y (cf. 27, 39) as 
 equal to a preposition + a pronoun (of things) : 
 
 Voyez sur la table, cherchez des- Look on the table, search on it and 
 sus et dessous. under it. 
 
 (a) Thus: dedans, dehors, dessus, dessous, devant, derriere, etc. 
 
 6. Que has adverbial force in exclamations: 
 
 Que vous etes heureux! How happy you are! 
 
 \ 
 
 7. Tout used adverbially agrees like an adjective when im- 
 mediately preceding a feminine adjective beginning in a con- 
 sonant or h aspirate, but is elsewhere invariable: 
 
 Elles e*taient toutes pales et tout They were quite pale and very 
 agitees. much excited. 
 
217] LESSON LXXXIX 201 
 
 8. Observe the following renderings of however, wherever, 
 whenever: 
 
 Quelque riche qu'il soit. However rich he is (may be). 
 
 Quelque bien que vous parliez. However well you (may) speak. 
 
 Toutes bonnes qu'elles sont. However kind they are (may be). 
 
 Si (Pour) bonne qu'elle soit. However kind she is (may be)* 
 
 Partout oil je le vois. 
 
 En quelque lieu que je le voie. Wherever I see him. 
 
 Ou que je le voie. 
 
 Toutes les fois que je le vois. Whenever I see him. 
 
 EXERCISE LXXXIX 
 
 Paiguille, f., needle oisif, idle 
 
 aise, easy, comfortable, well- Poisivete, f., idleness 
 
 to-do paraitre, irreg., appear 
 
 le canard, duck la paresse, laziness 
 
 les ciseaux, m., scissors paresseux, lazy 
 
 le de, thimble la poule, hen 
 
 dehors, outside pourtant, however 
 
 enseigner, teach la richesse, wealth 
 
 Strange, strange la tdche, task 
 
 le fil, thread utile, useful 
 
 Helene, Helen le vice, vice 
 
 Inoccupation, f., occupation la volaille, poultry 
 
 je ne saurais qu'en faire, I don't know what to do with it 
 
 A. Continue: 1. Je crois que non. 2. J'ai autant d'amis que n'im- 
 porte qui. 3. J'ai tant de foin que je ne saurais qu'en faire, tu . . . 
 tu. 4. Je n'aurai qu'a demander. 5. Je n'avais que peu d'argent. 
 
 6. Je Pai cherche* sur la table et dessous. 7. Quelque habile que je 
 sois. 8. Toute fatigue*e que je parais. 9. Je ne suis pas paresseux. 
 
 B. 1. L'oisivete est (la) mere de tous les vices. 2. Tout aise*e 
 qu'elle est M me Legrand de*sire que sa fille Helene apprenne a faire 
 les choses utiles. 3. II n'y a pas que les pauvres qui aient besoin 
 d'apprendre a travailler. 4. Quelque etrange que cela puisse paraitre 
 les riches en ont autant besoin que les pauvres. 5. Les pauvres 
 n'ont qu'a gagner leur vie. 6. Les riches ont une tache encore plus 
 difficile, celle d'employer leur richesse pour le bien d'autrui. 
 
 7. Que la petite Helene est heureuse! 8. Elle n'a pas que des 
 
202 LESSON LXXXIX [217 
 
 amusements pourtant. 9. Elle a ses devoirs, son ouvrage. 10. Elle 
 a deja son de, son aiguille, son fil et ses ciseaux. 11. Sa mere, si 
 occupe'e qu'elle soit, trouve le temps de lui montrer a faire des 
 vetements. 12. Elle coupe, coud, garnit. 13. Elle a tant a faire 
 qu'elle n'a pas le temps d'etre oisive. 14. Non seulement elle a des 
 occupations dans la maison, elle en a aussi dehors. 15. Elle s'occupe 
 de la volaille de la basse-cour. 16. Elle donne a manger aux poules 
 et aux canards. 17. Elle cherche des ceufs partout ou il y en a. 
 
 C. (Oral) 1. Que dit-on ici de 1'oisivete*? 2. Que desirait 
 M me Legrand? 3. La tache des riches est-elle difficile? 4. Pour- 
 quoi dites-vous cela? 5. Que dit-on ici des pauvres? 6. La petite 
 Helene est-elle oisive? 7. Decrivez ses occupations, etc. 
 
 D. 1. The mother would like her daughter to learn useful things. 
 2. Laziness is a vice. 3. If we (m.) are idle we shall learn nothing 
 useful. 4. It is not children only who need lessons. 5. However 
 stra-nge it may seem, everybody needs them. 6. You have as 
 much need of them as I. 7. You and I have only to earn our liv- 
 ing. 8. The task of the rich man is still more difficult. 9. He must 
 work as much as we. 10. He must learn to use his wealth for the 
 good of others. 
 
 E. 1. How fortunate we are! 2. He who has work to do is for- 
 tunate. 3. Little girls should have needles, thread, thimbles and 
 scissors. 4. They must have plenty of duties and occupations. 
 5. However busy I am, I have time to teach my little sister. 6. I 
 teach her [how] to make clothes. 7. We have so much to do that 
 we haven't time to be idle. 8. We are busy not (nori) only at school 
 but at home. 9. We have tasks in the house and outside [of it]. 
 10. We feed the poultry every morning. 11. Whenever we feed 
 the hens and ducks we look for eggs. 
 
 F. 1. Is it going to rain? 2. I think so. 3. I think not, for it 
 is windy. 4. Mr. Legrand has as much land as his neighbour. 5. He 
 has never had so much hay as he has (of it) this year. 6. If you 
 need anything, you have only to ask [for it]. 7. Only ask for that 
 and you shall have it. 8. The patient only said that he was tired 
 and that he wanted to sleep. 9. He had been ill for a few days only. 
 10. I had only five francs, but I gave him the half of it. 
 
218] LESSON XC 203 
 
 G. I.I looked for my pen on the table and under it, but without 
 finding it. 2. You haven't electric lighting in your house? 3. Oh 
 yes, we have had it for two years. 4. Those boys are lazy; they 
 will not work. 5. However well-to-do you are, you must work. 
 6. Whenever I meet Mr. Brunot he asks after your health. 7. Wher- 
 ever you are, never forget that you are a Frenchman. 8. It isn't 
 only my Latin that I find difficult. 9. Only work, and you will 
 finally succeed. 10. I have done nothing but work all my life. 
 
 LESSON XC 
 
 218. Negation. 1. Apart from a verb, no, not = non: 
 
 L'avez-vous dit? Non (pas). Did you say so? No. 
 Non content de cela. Not satisfied with that. 
 
 Peut-etre que non. Perhaps not. 
 
 (a) Observe also pas du tout, not at all. 
 
 2. Along with a verb a negation consists regularly of two 
 parts, ne + some other word or words, thus: 
 
 ne . . . pas, not ne . . . aucunement 1 not at ne . . . rien, nothing 
 
 ne . . . point, not ne . . . nullement J all ne . . . ni . . . ni, 
 
 ne . . . guere, hardly ne . . . aucun 
 
 neither . . . nor 
 
 ne . . . jamais, never ne . . . nul 
 
 ne . . . plus, no more ne . . . pas un 
 
 ne . . . que, only ne . . . personne, nobody 
 
 (a) Point is usually more emphatic than pas, and is less common in ordi- 
 nary language. 
 
 (6) Negation is often denoted by pas without ne, in familiar language: 
 Ai-je pas dit cela? ( = n'ai-je pas dit cela?). 
 
 3. Ne always precedes the verb, and pas, etc., regularly fol- 
 lows it: 
 
 Je ne le leur ai pas dit. I did not tell them so. 
 
 Je n'en ai guere eu. / hardly had any of it. 
 
 (a) But pas (point), usually, and plus, often, precede a simple infinitive; 
 they may precede or follow avoir, etre, either when alone or in the infini- 
 tive perfect: II parle de ne pas y aller; J'etais fache de ne vous avoir pas vu 
 (or de ne pas vous avoir vu) . 
 
204 LESSON XC [219 
 
 4. If the verb is omitted, but implied, ne is omitted: 
 Qui est venu? Personne. Who has come? Nobody. 
 
 Est-il venu? Pas encore. Has he come? Not yet. 
 
 (a) Pas (point) so used may not stand alone. 
 
 219. Omission of pas, etc. Ne alone serves as a negative : 
 
 1. In a que clause after negation: 
 
 II n'y a rien qu'il ne sache. There is nothing he doesn't know. 
 
 (a) So also after prendre garde que, take care lest (that not), and similar 
 expressions. 
 
 2. Sometimes in an if clause with si : 
 
 Si je ne me trompe. // 7 am not mistaken. 
 
 3. Sometimes in questions, such as: 
 
 Que ne ferais-je pour lui? What wouldn't I do for him? 
 
 Que n'attendez-vous? Why don't you wait? 
 
 4. Always in je ne saurais, etc., Je ne sais quoi: 
 
 Ne sauriez-vous m'aider? Can't you help me? 
 
 Un je ne sais quoi de noble. Something indefinably noble. 
 
 (a) Pas is sometimes omitted with pouvoir and with other tenses of 
 savoir. 
 
 5. In a few set expressions, such as: 
 
 N'importe; n j avoir garde. It matters not; not to care. 
 
 220. Redundant ne. In a que clause (subjunctive) ne is 
 often redundant, as compared with English, thus: 
 
 1. After expressions of fearing (but see a, 6, below): 
 Je crains qu'il ne vienne. 7 fear he will come. 
 
 (a) But after not fearing, expressed or implied, ne is omitted: Je ne 
 crains pas qu'il vienne, 7 do not fear he will come; Craignez-vous qu'il 
 vienne? Do you fear he will come (surely not) ? 
 
 (b) When the not happening is feared, the full negative form stands in 
 the que clause: Je crains qu'il ne vienne pas, 7 fear he will not come; Je ne 
 crains pas qu'il ne vienne pas, 7 do not fear he will not come. 
 
 2. With compound tenses after il y a, etc. : 
 
 II y a dix jours que je ne 1'ai vu. 7 haven't seen him for ten days. 
 Depuis que je ne vous ai vu. Since I saw you. 
 
220] LESSON XC 205 
 
 3. After s'en falloir, negatively, interrogatively, or with peu, 
 guere, etc.: 
 
 Peu s'en est f allu que je ne partisse. I came very near starting. 
 
 4. After empecher, eviter, & moins que, avant que (the latter 
 optionally) : 
 
 Empejchez qu'il ne sorte. Prevent him from going out. 
 
 J'eviterai qu'on ne me voie. 7 shall avoid being seen. 
 
 A moins qu'il ne soit malade. Unless he is ill. 
 
 Avant qu'il (ne) parte. Before he goes. 
 
 (a) This ne is not infrequently omitted after empecher and e>iter; 
 after empecher mostly when negative or interrogative. 
 
 5. After expressions of doubt or denial, used negatively or 
 with implied negation: 
 
 Je ne doute pas que ce ne soit lui. 7 don't doubt that it is he. 
 Niez-vous que ce ne soit lui? Do you deny, etc. (surely not)? 
 
 (a) But: Je doute que ce soit lui; Doutez-vous que ce soit lui? (question 
 as to a presumed fact) . 
 
 NOTE. Rules 4 and 5 are less strictly observed than 1-3, but always 
 use a moins que . . . ne; for ne with comparatives, see 208, 2. 
 
 EXERCISE XC 
 
 Pagent (de police), m., policeman eviter, avoid 
 
 d'avance, beforehand, too soon la locomotive, locomotive, engine 
 
 la bicyclette, bicycle le moyen, means, way 
 
 le (la) bicycliste, bicyclist le pas, step 
 
 caser, put in place, settle rarement, rarely, seldom 
 
 la collision, collision sain, healthy, sound 
 
 le compartiment, compartment sauf , safe 
 
 depasser, exceed siffler, whistle 
 
 derailler, go off the track timide, timid 
 
 ecraser, crush le tramway, tramway, tram(car) 
 
 escorter, escort la vitesse, speed 
 
 avoir peur de, be afraid of; faire peur a, frighten; avoir peur que, be 
 afraid that, fear that; de peur que, for fear that; faire collision, collide; 
 sain et sauf, safe and sound; se faire ecraser, get crushed (run over) 
 
206 LESSON XC [ 220 
 
 A. 1. Tante Clemence habite la campagne. 2. Elle regoit 1'invi- 
 tation (Taller voir ses amis de la ville. 3. II y a des annees qu'elle ne 
 les a vus. 4. Ayant rarement voyage elle est assez timide. 5. Elle 
 a peur de tout. 6. En partant elle a peur de manquer le train et elle 
 arrive a la gare une demi-heure d'avance. 7. Une fois casee dans 
 le compartiment elle a peur que quelque accident n'arrive en route. 
 8. II n'y a rien qui ne lui fasse peur. 9. Toutes les fois que siffle la 
 locomotive elle tressaille. 10. Elle craint que le train ne deraille, 
 qu'il ne fasse collision avec un autre, qu'il ne s'arrete pas a la gare 
 ou elle doit descendre. 11. Mais elle arrive saine et sauve. 12. Dans 
 les rues ses amis 1'accompagnent de peur qu'elle ne se fasse ecraser 
 par les tramways. 13. Elle ne sort guere a moins qu'une autre 
 personne ne 1'escorte. 14. En sortant seul on ne saurait toujours 
 eViter qu'une voiture vous attrape. 15. Et les bicyclettes, n'y a-t-il 
 pas moyen d'empecher qu'elles marchent si vite? 16. Je doute qu'on 
 puisse empecher les bicyclistes de de*passer la vitesse permise par la 
 police, a moins d'avoir des agents a chaque pas. 17. II est defendu 
 d'aller vite, mais que voulez-vous qu'on y fasse? 
 
 B. (Oral on A.) 1. Read aloud sentences 2-13, turning the nar- 
 rative into the past. 2. Give the rule for all cases where ne is used 
 alone with a verb. 
 
 C. 1. Our friends haven't seen us for a long time. 2. I haven't 
 travelled much, but I am not timid. 3. I am not afraid of every- 
 thing. 4. You are not afraid of anything. 5. We were afraid of 
 missing the train. 6. We were afraid you would miss (pres.) the 
 train. 7. I fear that an accident has happened. 8. There was 
 nothing that frightened me. 9. Are you afraid the train will run 
 off the track? 10. Do not go out unless your friends escort you. 
 11. Take care that you do not get run over by the tramway. 
 
 D. 1. We are bicyclists. 2. The police can't prevent us- from 
 going (infin.) fast. 3. It is against the law (see A, 17) to exceed a 
 speed of more than five kilometres an hour. 4. Not satisfied with 
 the speed allowed by the police, you want to go faster and faster. 
 5. Unless there is a policeman at every step, that can't be pre- 
 vented (use on). 6. There is nobody who doesn't go fast some- 
 times. 7. What bicyclist obeys the police? None. 8. There 
 
221] LESSON XCI 207 
 
 was a collision on the railway, but nobody was killed. 9. Every- 
 body arrived safe and sound. 
 
 E. 1. It is months since I was in the country; I rarely go there. 
 2. I shall pay you a visit to-morrow, unless the weather should be 
 bad. 3. In any (tout) case you must pay us a visit before you go. 
 
 4. If I am not mistaken, the engine of our train has just whistled. 
 
 5. I am afraid we shall not be comfortable in this compartment. 
 
 6. Let us find (chercher) another, no matter what one. 7. Do you 
 fear the train will not stop at your station? 8. I am not afraid it 
 will not stop. 9. Take care that your aunt doesn't get run over by 
 the tramway. 
 
 F. 1. The police can't prevent automobiles from running too 
 fast. 2. There is not one of them that doesn't exceed the speed 
 limit (see A, 16). 3. If we go too fast, we can't avoid the police 
 catching us now and then. 4. I do not doubt that the policemen 
 are in the right. 5. There is nothing that that young man cannot 
 learn. 6. Nobody doubts that he will finally succeed. 7. I am 
 afraid you are cold; draw near the fire. 8. It is years since we 
 had a winter like this one, if I am not mistaken. 
 
 LESSON XCI 
 
 221. Observe the use of , de, en, sur, in forming adjectival 
 phrases, often rendered in English by compound nouns, or by 
 nouns used as adjectives: 
 
 1. De, en, denoting material: 
 
 Une maison en (de) brique(s). A brick house. 
 Une robe de (en) soie. A silk dress. 
 
 Un collier de perles. A pearl necklace. 
 
 2. De denoting source, purpose, destination, etc. : 
 
 La porcelaine de Sevres. Sevres porcelain. 
 
 Les vins d'Espagne. Spanish wines. 
 
 La salle de bains. . The bathroom. 
 
 Le train de Paris. The Paris train. 
 
208 LESSON XCI [222 
 
 3. A denoting purpose for which, or characteristic: 
 Une salle a manger. A dining room. 
 
 Une tasse a the. A teacup. 
 
 Un coffret a bijoux. A jewel case. 
 
 Un ver a sole. A silkworm. 
 
 Une porte a deux battants. A folding door (i.e. with two leaves). 
 
 Un bateau a vapeur. A steamboat. 
 
 L'homme au chapeau noir. The man with a black hat. 
 
 4. A and sur describing processes in art: 
 
 Une peinture a Phuile. An oil painting (painting in oils). 
 
 Une gravure sur acier. A steel engraving (engraving on steel). 
 
 222. Observe the following prepositional distinctions : 
 
 1. Environ = about (of quantity) ; vers, towards, about (of time) : 
 Environ dix kilometres (cent francs); vers (les) dix heures; vers 
 
 1830. 
 
 2. Entre, between, among (also distributively and recipro- 
 cally); parmi, among (in the midst of): 
 
 Une station entre Paris et Rouen; entre dix et douze heures; 
 partagez-le entre vos amis; il fut trouve entre les morts; entre (in) 
 les mains de mon ami; ils parlaient entre eux; une brebis parmi les 
 loups. 
 
 3. Avant, before (of time, order, rank); devant, before (in front 
 of, in presence of): 
 
 Avant midi; mettez 1'article avant le nom; devant le feu: devant le 
 roi. 
 
 4. Vers, towards (physical tendency): envers, towards (moral 
 tendency) : 
 
 Levez les yeux vers le ciel; il est juste envers tous. 
 
 5. Au-dessous de, under, underneath (more specific than 
 sous); au-dessus de, over, above, higher than: 
 
 Au-dessous du tableau; au-dessous de la valeur; au-dessus de la 
 porte; les nombres au-dessus de cent. 
 
 6. Pres de, near (physical) : aupres de, near, with, as regards, 
 etc. ' (moral) : 
 
 Pres du feu; aupres de sa famille. 
 
222] LESSON XCI 209 
 
 EXERCISE XCI 
 
 Pacajou, m., mahogany le musee, museum 
 
 Pacier, m., steel le noyer, walnut 
 
 le battant, part of a double or Pobjet, m., object 
 
 folding door Por, m., gold 
 
 le bijou, jewel la parure, adornment 
 
 la brique, brick le pastel, pastel 
 
 le chene, oak la peinture., painting 
 
 le cocon, cocoon la perle, pearl 
 
 le coffret, casket, case la porcelaine, porcelain 
 
 le collier, necklace la princesse, princess 
 
 le cuivre, copper sculpter, carve 
 
 Peau-forte, f., aquafortis; etching la soierie, silk (collect.) 
 
 forge, forged, wrought la taille, cutting 
 
 Jllustrer, illustrate le vase, vase 
 
 Pindustrie, f., industry . vaste, vast 
 
 Pivoire, m., ivory Venus, Venus 
 
 le marbre, marble le ver, worm 
 le mobilier, furniture (collect.) 
 
 K boit dans un verre, he drinks from (out of) a glass; je mange dans une 
 assiette, / eat from a plate; je Pai pris dans un tiroir (sur la table), / 
 took it from a drawer (from the table) 
 
 A. 1. Hier nous avons visits un grand muse*e. 2. II se trouve 
 dans un ancien chateau bati en brique et en pierre de taille (free- 
 stone). 3. Nous entrons par la belle porte en chene a deux battants. 
 4. Au rez-de-chaussee on trouve les objets qui illustrent Thistoire 
 de Pindustrie. 5. Dans la salle des soieries on voit le cocon du ver 
 a soie aussi bien que les belles robes de soie et les tapisseries des 
 Gobelins. 6. Dans une autre salle se voient des tasses a the et a 
 cafe qui ont passe par des mains de reines. 7. Nous montons au 
 premier par le bel escalier en marbre. 8. On entre dans la pre- 
 miere piece par une porte magnifique en fer forge. 9. Cette salle 
 s'appelle le "Salon des Fleurs." 10. Le gardien appelle notre atten- 
 tion sur le mobilier en acajou a tapisseries de Beauvais. 11. II 
 nous mohtre de beaux vases en porcelaine de Sevres. 12. Nous ad- 
 mirons un coffret a bijoux en ivoire. 13. Le gardien prend dans le 
 coffret un collier de perles, autrefois la parure d'une princesse. 14. II 
 y a ici en outre un beau tableau nomme " Venus aux cheveux d'or." 
 
210 LESSON XCII [223 
 
 15. Ensuite nous entrons dans la vaste ancienne salle a manger a 
 boiseries sculptees en noyer. 16. On y voit beaucoup de tableaux: 
 des peintures a 1'huile et des portraits au pastel. 17. II y a aussi des 
 gravures sur cuivre (copperplate), sur acier et a 1'eau-forte (etching). 
 
 B. (Oral on A.) 
 
 C. 1. My grandfather lives in an old stone house. 2. There is 
 a beautiful oak table in his dining room. 3. The chairs and side- 
 board are also of oak. 4. Silk is the product of the silkworm. 
 5. The product of thousands of silkworms is required (use il faut) 
 to make a silk dress. 6. In the museum we admired especially the 
 Gobelin tapestries and the Sevres porcelain. 7. The tapestries are 
 to be seen in the silk room. 8. We use teacups to drink tea. 9. We 
 don't drink (the) tea from coffee cups. 10. Kings and queens have 
 drunk from these wineglasses. 11. Give me a wineglass. 12. Give 
 me another glass of wine. 13. At the entrance to (of) the " Flower 
 Hall" we observed a fine wrought-iron door. 14. My mother has 
 a jewel casket of carved ivory. 15. Among the queen's jewels was 
 a pearl necklace. 16. The London train arrived half an hour ago. 
 
 D. 1. We are going to have a brick house built. 2. The castle 
 was built half in brick, half in freestone. 3. All the stairways 
 are of marble. 4. The entrance doors are large folding doors of oak. 
 
 5. Permit me to call your attention to this fine mahogany furniture. 
 
 6. Don't you admire these Beauvais tapestries? 7. Frenchmen 
 think that Sevres porcelain is the finest in the world. 8. The vases 
 of Sevres porcelain are the finest objects in the museum. 9. I keep 
 my jewels in a little casket of carved walnut. 10. The gentleman 
 with the straw hat is Mr. Brunot. 11. The artist showed us the 
 portrait of a charming little girl with golden hair. 12. This artist 
 is very clever at (a) painting in oils. 13. Most people prefer oil 
 paintings to steel engravings or etchings. 
 
 LESSON XCII . 
 
 223. Conjunctions. 1. Que = that is followed by the in- 
 dicative or subjunctive according to the context: 
 
 Je vois qu'il est malade. / see that he is ill. 
 
 Je suis faclie" qu'il soit malade. I am sorry he is ill. 
 
223] LESSON XCII 211 
 
 2. Que, standing for another conjunction, regularly takes the 
 same construction as the conjunction it replaces: 
 
 Quand vous aurez fini et que vous When you have finished and (when 
 aurez le temps. you) have time. 
 
 Venez que ( = afin que, pour que) Come that I may see you. 
 je vous voie. 
 
 (a) For que = si, if, see 193, 5. 
 
 3. When = quand or lorsque (the latter never interroga- 
 tively) : 
 
 Quand (lorsque) je Pai vu. When I saw him. 
 
 Dites-moi quand il arrivera. Tell me when he will arrive. 
 
 4. Pendant que = while, whilst; tandis que = while, whilst, 
 whereas, on the contrary: 
 
 Lisez le journal pendant que Read the newspaper while I am 
 
 j'ecris ce billet. writing this note. 
 
 Tandis que vous etes ici. Whilst (while) you are here. 
 
 Le pere travaille, tandis que le The father works, while (whereas) 
 
 fils est tou jours oisif. , the son is always idle. 
 
 5. Depuis que denotes time; puisque denotes cause assigned: 
 
 Je suis bien seul depuis que mon / am very lonely since my brother 
 
 frere est parti. went away. 
 
 II faut que je reste puisqu'il n'y a I must remain, since there is no 
 
 p#s de train ce soir. train this evening. 
 
 6. Certain prepositions and prepositional phrases, governing 
 an infinitive, correspond to conjunctional forms in que; the 
 prepositional construction is usually employed when one sub- 
 ject is common to two verbs, but if not, the que form must be 
 used: 
 
 Je partis de peur de le voir. I left for fear of seeing him. 
 
 Je partis de peur qu'il ne me vit. / left for fear he might see me. 
 
 (a) Other examples: afin de (afin que); de crainte de (de crainte que); 
 & moins de (a moins que); avant de (avant que);.apres de (apres que); de 
 peur de (de peur que); pour (pour que); sans (sans que); jusqu'a (jusqu'& 
 ce que), etc. 
 
212 
 
 LESSON XCII 
 
 [224 
 
 224. Reference list of conjunctions requiring the subjunctive: 
 
 a (la) condition que 1 
 
 afin que 
 
 a moins que . . . ne 
 
 au cas ou 2 
 
 au cas que 
 
 avant que 
 
 bien que 
 
 ce n'est pas que 
 
 dans le cas ou 2 
 
 de crainte que . . . n 
 
 de facon que 3 
 
 de maniere que 3 
 
 de peur que . . . ne 
 
 de (telle) sorte que 3 
 en attendant que 
 en cas que 
 encore que 
 en sorte que 3 
 en supposant que 
 jusqu'a ce que 4 
 loin que 
 malgre que 
 nonobstant que 
 non (pas) que 
 pour peu que 
 pour que 
 
 pourvu que 
 
 quand meme 5 
 
 que 6 
 
 quoique 
 
 sans que 
 
 si 7 
 
 si bien que 3 
 
 si peu que 
 
 soit que . . . soit que 
 
 soit que . . . ou que 
 
 suppose que 
 
 tellement . . . que 3 
 
 i Also indie, or condl. 2 More usually condl. 3 Subj. of purpose, but not of result. 
 * Sometimes indie, of completed past event. 6 Condi, ant. or plupf. subj. 6 See 223, l f 
 above. 1 See 193, 5. 
 
 EXERCISE XCII 
 
 les ancetres, m., ancestors 
 
 augmenter, increase 
 
 le bailment, building 
 
 le bucheron, woodcutter 
 
 la civilisation, civilization 
 
 la consommation, consumption 
 
 contmuer, continue 
 
 defricher, clear (land) 
 
 Penclume, f., anvil 
 
 exagerer, exaggerate 
 
 la faucille, sickle 
 
 la fonte, cast iron 
 
 le forgeron, blacksmith 
 
 la hache, axe 
 
 imaginer, imagine, conceive 
 
 inventer, invent, find out 
 
 cela va en augmentant, 
 
 le laboureur, ploughman 
 
 la marche, march 
 
 le marteau, hammer 
 
 a mesure que, in proportion as 
 
 la moisson, harvest, crop 
 
 moissonner, harvest 
 
 le perfectionnement, improvement 
 
 le pont, bridge 
 
 pour que, in order that, so that 
 
 la poutre, beam 
 
 le precede, process 
 
 realiser, realize, effect 
 
 soit que . . ., whether 
 
 tant que, so (as) long as 
 
 utiliser, utilize 
 
 that keeps increasing 
 
 A. 1. Que la figure du forgeron est inte*ressante! 2. Depuis que 
 la civilisation existe il aide les hommes par ses travaux. 3. Jusqu'a 
 ce qu'il eut fait une hache le bucheron ne pouvait pas couper les 
 
224] LESSON XCII 213 
 
 arbres. 4. Apres que le Mcheron eut defriche la terre le laboureur 
 eut besoin de la charrue. 5. Aussitot qu'il y eut une moisson il 
 fallut faire une faucille pour la moissonner. 6. A mesure que la 
 civilisation avangait on imaginait de nouveaux precedes d'utiliser 
 le fer. 7. Pour que la hache et la faucille coupassent bien on inventa 
 Facier. 8. Puisqu'il fallait travailler vite et a bon marche on inventa 
 la fonte. 9. Du moment qu'on a realise ces perfectionnements le 
 fer a commence a remplacer le bois et la pierre. 10. Dans les 
 batiments nous employons des poutres d'acier tandis que nos an- 
 cetres ne se servaient que de poutres de bois. 11. Les nouveaux 
 chemins meme sont des chemins de fer. 12. Mais soit qu'on fasse 
 des routes ou des ponts ou des na vires, la consommation du fer va 
 en augmentant. 13. On pourrait dire sans exagrer que tant que 
 continuera la marche de la civilisation elle sera accompagn6e de la 
 musique du marteau et de renclume. 
 
 B. (Oral on A.) 
 
 C. 1. What an interesting figure that (que celle) of the blacksmith! 
 2. His work has helped civilization very much. 3. The woodcutter 
 could not cut trees until he had an axe. 4. The ploughman needs a 
 plough as soon as the ground is cleared. 5. The harvester cannot 
 cut his wheat until he has a sickle. 6. People invent new processes 
 in proportion as civilization advances. 7. Steel is used to make 
 axes. 8. Cast iron was invented so that people could work faster 
 and cheaper. 9. Many improvements have been effected. 10. Iron 
 must take the place of wood and stone. 11. Steel beams are used 
 in our days, whilst formerly wooden beams were used. 12. The 
 consumption of iron keeps increasing. 13. Whether we make ships 
 or bridges, we need iron. 14. We shall need iron as long as civiliza- 
 tion continues. 15. The march of civilization is accompanied by the 
 music of the anvil. 16. Man cannot advance without new processes 
 being invented. 
 
 D. 1. When Captain Pictet arrives I shall ask him to come in. 
 
 2. Since our relatives arrived we have been (pres.) very busy. 
 
 3. Since you need money I shall lend you some. 4. We started at 
 eight o'clock in order not to be late. 5. I heard from my sister 
 before she left (quitter) London. 6. Do not run for fear you may 
 
214 LESSON XCII [ 224 
 
 fall. 7. If he had ploughed the ground and if (que) he had sown the 
 wheat, the crop would have been abundant. 8. Unless we are 
 diligent we shall not succeed. 9. I shall be busy until you come. 
 10. They will not finish early without your helping them. 
 
 E. 1. Before we had electric light we used gas. 2. Our neigh- 
 bours still have (the) gas, whilst we have electric light. 3. Wait 
 until we have (the) time to see you. 4. He will wait until his 
 brother comes. 5. While we were taking a cup of coffee the train 
 started. 6. I work in order to become rich. 7. You work that your 
 children may be rich. 8. Do not speak without thinking. 9. Do 
 nothing without telling me what you are going to do. 10. We shall 
 be glad when we have finished. 
 
. MATERIAL FOR CONVERSATION 
 
 NOTE. This "Material for Conversation" is placed after the Lessons for the 
 sake of convenience, and not to suggest that the Lessons should be mastered before 
 conversation is begun. Conversation should begin early, and certain parts of the 
 "Material," such, for example, as the "Fundamental Expressions," should be learned 
 and used as soon as possible. 
 
 The classroom and its activities will naturally furnish the first topics for conversa- 
 tion. Hence the teacher should provide his class early with the vocabulary necessary 
 for speaking about the objects, studies, etc., which pertain to the classroom. The 
 vocabulary necessary for other topics should be furnished as the needs of the class 
 demand. 
 
 1. Fundamental Expressions 
 
 (a) When pointing to objects: 
 
 Qu'est-ce que c'est que cela (ga)? What is that? 
 
 C'est un crayon. It's a pencil. 
 
 Comment appelle-t-on cela (ga)? What is that called? 
 
 On appelle cela (ga) un livre. That's called a book. 
 
 (b) When speaking of objects, actions, ideas, etc.: 
 Comment dit-on ' house' en fran- How do you say 'house 1 in French? 
 
 gais? 
 
 En frangais on dit 'maison.' You say 'maison' in French. 
 
 Comment dit-on 'run' en fran- How do you say 'run' in French f 
 
 gais? 
 
 On dit 'courir' en frangais. You say 'courir' in French. 
 
 Que veut dire le mot 'pain'? What does the word 'pain' mean? 
 
 Le mot 'pain' veut dire 'bread.' The word ( pain } means 'bread' 
 
 (c) When speaking of spelling, pronunciation, etc.: 
 Comment ecrivez-vous (ecrit-on) 
 
 le mot ' livre ' ? RQW ^ u ^ word ( Rvre , f 
 
 Quelle est 1 orthographe du mot 
 
 'livre'? 
 On ecrit le mot 'livre' ainsi, You spell the word 'livre' thus. 
 
 1-i-v-r-e. 
 
 (For names of French letters, see Introd., A.) 
 
 Comment prononcez-vous (pro- 
 nonce-t-on) ce mot? 
 
 uwx this word? 
 Quelle est la prononciation de ce 
 
 mot? 
 
 On prononce ce mot ainsi. You pronounce this word thus. 
 
 215 
 
216 
 
 MATERIAL FOR CONVERSATION 
 
 2. Politer Forms 
 
 (a) In addressing people: 
 
 Monsieur, 
 selle. 
 
 Madame, Mademoi- Sir, Madam, Miss. 
 
 // you please or please. 
 
 Thank you or thanks. 
 
 No, thank you or no, thanks. 
 
 With pleasure. 
 
 I thank you very much. 
 
 Excuse me Sir, Madam, Miss. 
 
 What 
 
 (b) In asking and receiving: 
 S'il vous plait. 
 
 Merci (after accepting). 
 Merci (in declining). 
 Avec plaisir. 
 
 Je vous remercie beaucoup (bien, 
 mille fois, infiniment). 
 
 (c) When not understanding: 
 Monsieur? Madame? Mademoi- 
 
 selle? 
 
 Plait-il? or Pardon? or Je vous de- 
 mande pardon. (More familiar: 
 Comment? or Vous dites?) 
 
 (d) When desiring consent: 
 Voulez-vous (bien) . . .? or Veuillez. 
 Ayez la bonte (1'obligeance) de . . . 
 
 (e) Politeness is often increased by the use of the conditional: 
 Pourriez-vous me dire, madame, Could you tell me, madam, what 
 
 1'heure qu'il est? o'clock it is? 
 
 Voudriez-vous (bien) me dire ou Would you kindly tell me where we 
 nous en sommes aujourd'hui? begin to-day? 
 
 3. Model Conversation 
 
 I beg your pardon (What? 
 do you say?) 
 
 Will you kindly . . , 
 Be kind enough to . 
 
 On sonne (frappe) a la porte. J'ouvre 
 moi-meme et je dis: 
 
 Bon jour (bonsoir), mon cher 
 ami. Entrez done. Je suis en- 
 chante (charme) de vous voir. 
 
 Merci, je ne vous derange pas? 
 
 Oh non! pas du tout. Per- 
 mettez-moi de vous debarras- 
 ser de votre chapeau. 
 
 Merci, vous e'tes trop bon. 
 
 There's a ring (knock) at the door. 1 
 open the door myself and say: 
 
 Good day or good morning (good 
 evening) , my dear friend. Do come 
 in. I am delighted to see you. 
 
 Thank you, I hope I am not dis- 
 turbing you? , 
 
 Oh no, not at all. Allow me to 
 take your hat. 
 
 Thanks, you are too kind. 
 
MATERIAL FOR CONVERSATION 
 
 217 
 
 Ayez la bonte (donnez-vous la 
 peine) de vous asseoir (less for- 
 mal: asseyez-vous done); ici 
 dans ce fauteuil. 
 
 Merci beaucoup, mais j'ai peur 
 de vous deranger. 
 
 Pas du tout. Ne vous genez pas. 
 Et comment vous portez-vous 
 depuis si longtemps? (less formal: 
 Comment allez-vous? comment 
 c.a va-t-il? comment ga va?) 
 
 Tres bien (pas mal), merci, et 
 vous(-meme)? 
 
 J'ai ete un peu souffrant. 
 
 J'en suis desole ! Qu'est-ce que 
 vous aviez? 
 
 C'etait une espece de neuras- 
 thenic. Mais ga va deja mieux. 
 
 Tant mieux. J'espere que ga 
 passera vite. 
 
 Mais vous n'etes pas bien; ce 
 fauteuil n'est pas bon (com- 
 mode, confortable). 
 
 Si! si! 
 
 Mais non, permettez-moi. Je 
 vais vous donner ce coussin. 
 Levez-vous, s'il vous plait. La ! 
 maintenant, asseyez-vous. Vous 
 etes mieux, n'est-ce pas? 
 
 Oh, oui! mais vous etes trop 
 aimable. 
 
 Apres avoir cause un peu, mon ami s'ex- 
 cuse. II faut qu'il s'en aille. E dit: 
 
 Mes compliments a monsieur vo- 
 tre pere et amadame votremere. 
 
 Merci, je n'y manquerai pas. 
 
 Bien des choses (de ma part) a 
 
 votre frere. 
 Nous nous disons : * au revoir,' ' a ce soir,' 
 
 ' a demain matin,* ' a lundi (mardi, etc.) 
 
 prochain.' Nous nous serrons la main, 
 
 et le voila parti. 
 
 Kindly be seated; here in this 
 chair. 
 
 Thank you very much, but I am 
 afraid of disturbing you. 
 
 Not at all. Make yourself at 
 home. And how have you been 
 this long time? 
 
 Very well, thanks, and how are 
 
 / have not been very well. 
 
 / am very sorry. What was the 
 matter? 
 
 It was a sort of nervous exhaus- 
 tion. But I am better now. 
 
 7 am glad to hear it. I hope it 
 will soon disappear. 
 
 But you're not comfortable; that 
 chair doesn't suit you. 
 
 Oh yes, it does. 
 
 No, no, allow me. I'll give you 
 this cushion. Rise, please. Now 
 then, sit down. That's better, 
 isn't it? 
 
 Yes, indeed, but you are too kind. 
 
 After chatting a little my friend begs to 
 be excused. He must go. He says: 
 
 Remember me to your father and 
 mother. 
 
 Thanks, I shall (will) . Remem- 
 ber me to your brother. 
 
 We say to one another 'good-bye,' 'good- 
 bye till this evening,' 'till to-morrow 
 morning,' 'till Monday (Tuesday etc.), 
 next.' We shake hands and he's gone. 
 
REVIEW EXERCISES 
 
 NOTE. These sentences have been selected for the most part from 
 Harvard, Yale and other College Entrance Papers, and are grouped so as 
 to illustrate important points of grammar. 
 
 I. The Article 
 
 A. 1. I have no friends. 2. I have a great many flowers and 
 will give you some. 3. He has neither father nor mother. 4. They 
 haven't any money. 5. There were many houses in the town. 
 6. Here are some fine pears; do you wish any? 7. Are there any 
 pencils in that box? There are none now. 8. Here are some fine 
 apples. 9. They are all going to France to-morrow. 10. If you 
 are thirsty you may drink some cold water. 11. He wanted to 
 buy some apples but he didn't have any money. 12. You are 
 wrong in thinking so. 13. Have you any books? Give me some. 
 I have no books now. 14. We had a good deal of snow last winter. 
 
 15. There are many things we can learn by reading good books. 
 
 16. I beg your pardon; I am right and you are wrong. 17. I 
 am always cold [on] the days when it is cold. 18. Are you 
 warm? Yes, and I am thirsty also. 19. Is there any water here? 
 Yes, here is some good, cool water. 20. There are white hens and 
 black ones in the barn. 
 
 B. 1. Don't you need your hat when you go out? 2. Won't 
 you buy her some good red apples? 3. Have you good friends? 
 4. We saw pebbles and sand in the water of the river. 5. In 
 Canada people eat a great deal of fruit in autumn. 6. I am sure 
 he asked for ripe apples; these are green ones. 7. The weather has 
 been very warm and the flowers need water. 8. The little bird 
 said, "Open the window for me, I am very hungry." 9. When 
 horses are thirsty they need water and they go to the river. 
 10. There are good books and bad ones. 11. I have no friends in 
 this country, but I have some in America. 12. He has potatoes, 
 cabbage (s) and onions. He planted them on the second of May. 
 13. There were some very pretty flowers at the market this morn- 
 ing. 14. Perhaps you are right, but certainly I am too warm. 
 15. That pupil likes history better than grammar. 16. Children 
 
 218 
 
REVIEW EXERCISES 219 
 
 sometimes have wonderful courage. 17. The boys rushed in with 
 their hats on their heads. 18. I had my hair cut this morning. 
 19. Mrs. Brown is a Frenchwoman. 20. Queen Victoria was born 
 in 1819. 
 
 II. Numerals 
 
 1. I shall be eighteen years old in nineteen hundred and seven- 
 teen. 2. What time was it? It was half past ten. 3. When did 
 your brother return from Europe? He arrived last night at a quar- 
 ter past eight. 4. Write out in French 21, 63, 177, 46th, ^ f. 
 5. What day of the month is it? It is the fifteenth of May, 1911 
 (write date in full). 6. They were born on the same day, the 17th 
 of July, 1893 (write date in full). 7. I was born on the 15th of 
 August, 1895 (write date in full) . 8. What time was it when the 
 train left? 9. It was twenty minutes to eleven. 10. Can you tell 
 me the time? It is half past two. 11. I have here a box full of 
 cherries. How many are there? Ninety-one. 12. I have been in 
 Toronto a fortnight and I like the city. 13. We did not go there 
 yesterday at ten o'clock. 14. You say that he is twenty years old. 
 
 15. Is his oldest brother not ten years older? 16. Does the train 
 start for Boston at a quarter to nine? 17. We have been here 
 
 three weeks. 18. My grandfather is eighty years old. 1 19. During 
 the first two years he did not study. 20. Fifteen cents make sev- 
 enty-five centimes. 21. Victor Hugo was born in 1802 (write date 
 in full). 22. He died in 1885 (write date in full). 23. It is half past 
 eleven; we must go home. 
 
 III. Personal Pronouns 
 
 1. Will you introduce me to her? 2. Are you angry with me? 
 3. Give it to me. 4. I took him there a week ago. 5. We have 
 given the books back to them. 6. Show them to us, please. 
 7. Don't send them to him. 8. Hide yourself behind the door. 
 9. Will you kindly give me some? 10. Give it to us, do not give 
 it to them. 11. They have made fun of us all day. 12. He lends 
 it to me every Sunday. 13. Give us some, but do not give us so 
 many. 14. John's watch is [made] of (en) gold. His father gave it to 
 him. 15. I have your books, I shall finish one of them next week. 
 
 16. Did you sell that lady any sugar? 17. Yes, I sold her some, 
 but I sold none to her sister. 18. Don't sell her any. 19. Where 
 will he find a better neighbour than I? 20. We have none, but we 
 should like to have some to-morrow. 21. His coat does not fit 
 
220 REVIEW EXERCISES 
 
 him well; he has just been trying it on. 22. How many prizes have 
 you? I have only one. 23. I have given them to my sister; they 
 were hers. 24. Go away, we cannot be friends, but I have no 
 grudge against you. 25. You have taken my pen. Please give it 
 to her. 26. I saw him this morning, but I did not speak to him 
 about it. 27. Here are some also; keep them for me. 28. I do 
 not doubt it; he will win the day. 
 
 IV. Demonstratives 
 
 1. He who does not talk too much is wise. 2. Don't give me 
 this pencil, give me that one. 3. These cakes are not as good as 
 the ones we bought here yesterday. 4. It is easier to do this than 
 that. 5. This house and the one in which our cousins live will be 
 sold to-morrow. 6. This is worse than that. 7. Have you learned 
 to-day's lesson better than yesterday's? 8. Which of these pears 
 do you like the best? The one you have brought. 9. Is it you 
 who told him so? 10. This book is mine, but that is my sister's. 
 11. Those who leave will never return. 12. These little children 
 are the ones you met yesterday. 13. This pen and that one are 
 mine. Where is your brother's? 14. It is easy to do. 15. Those 
 are Germans.. 16. Victor Hugo and Michelet are Frenchmen, the 
 former is a poet, the latter an historian. 17. It was we who did 
 the work. 18. Those who are not killed will fight. 19. Here are 
 two books; give me this one and keep that one. 20. This man is 
 my friend, that one is my enemy. 
 
 V. Possessives 
 
 1. Is that your umbrella? No, this one is mine, that one is 
 yours. 2. This is my friend's watch. 3. Where do your parents 
 live? In Montreal. 4. Here are my pens. Where are yours? 
 5. I don't know where mine are. 6. Didn't your parents see our 
 friends and hers in England? 7. No, they saw only hers, because 
 yours had already gone to Paris. 8. My watch and his are on the 
 table, are they not? 9. Your party will not be stronger than ours. 
 10. This is my house; where is yours? 11. Mine is yonder behind 
 the church. 12. A friend of mine has come from Chicago. 13. A 
 relative of mine who lives in Chicago has become very rich. 
 14. An Englishman, a friend of mine, told me that. 15. Do you 
 know the difference between mine and thine? 16. Is that watch 
 yours? 17. No, sir, it is not mine, I think it is my brother's. 
 
REVIEW EXERCISES 221 
 
 18. My dress is not ready yet, but yours was ready yesterday. 
 
 19. Your harvest is better than ours this year. 20. My book is 
 on the table, yours is under it. 
 
 VI. Relatives and Interrogatives 
 
 A. 1. Do not forget what I told you. 2. I do not like the flow- 
 ers which she sold me. 3. Is the church of which you have spoken 
 near your house? 4. Here are two books, which is the more in- 
 teresting? 5. Your father told me what your brother had done. 
 
 6. Take what you need and leave the rest beside my table. 
 
 7. What is the matter with that little boy? 8. What have you 
 given back to him? 9. This is the boy whose father is in England. 
 10. I don't know what you have just said. 11. Which of those 
 horses do you like best? 12. Whom did you see? 13. Who is 
 your neighbour? 14. What have you written? 15. What is that 
 beside you? 16. What kind of weather is it? 17. The gentleman 
 for whose farm I offered $10,000 has not sold it yet. 18. What is 
 there in that box? 19. There is the book I spoke of to you last 
 week. 20. Is that the house you spoke to me about? 21. He who 
 has never suffered does not know what joy is. 
 
 B. 1. The king asked whose was the field where they were 
 reaping. 2. I cannot express to you my gratitude for (de) what 
 you have done. 3. What are you doing now? Have you not be- 
 gun yet? 4. There is the apple tree of which I have spoken so 
 often. 5. Why do people give the best things to those who do not 
 need them? 6. Have you finished the books I gave you last week? 
 7. Didn't you buy the pictures I saw in your room? 8. Tell me 
 what you want me to do. 9. Do you know what they thought? 
 They thought you had no friends. 10. He did not tell me what 
 the Louvre is. 11. Those are the flowers which I have bought. 
 12. There is a man whose son I know. 13. All that he has to do 
 is to tell you what he has seen. 14. What a big apple! Who gave 
 it to you? 15. What are you going to do to-day? I do not know 
 yet. 16. What is a pear tree? It is a tree which yields pears. 
 17. Whose is that house on the other side of the road? 18. My 
 brother owed me the half of what he had received. 19. Who is 
 she? Whose daughter is she? 
 
 C. 1. We are going to eat the fruit of the apple tree which is in 
 our garden. 2. You will send her a box of the coffee which I 
 brought from France. 3. What is a classroom? It is a room in 
 
222 REVIEW EXERCISES 
 
 which we tell the teacher what we know. 4. Who is it? It is my 
 father's friend, the general of whom I was speaking yesterday. 
 
 5. Tell me what you have been doing to-day. 6. Which of these 
 two towns is the larger? 7. Has he read the letter which she has 
 written him? 8. You see what it is to be a stranger. 9. Which of 
 these gentlemen is the one I want to speak to? 10. A dictionary 
 is a book which is used to explain the meaning of words. 11. Which 
 of your friends has gone to Europe? 12. I met two men last week 
 whose names I have forgotten. 13. That is the man whose son 
 lives in the United States. 14. Whose son was Alexander? What 
 did he do? 15. Can you tell me which is the largest lake in North 
 America? 16. Has he all the money he needs? He has all I had. 
 17. My two brothers who live in Germany will remain with me 
 until next Friday. 18. He would not tell me what he had said. 
 
 19. Do you need the books we have read this year? 20. We shall 
 need those you read and others also. 
 
 VII. Indefinites 
 
 1. I will say nothing about it to any one. 2. Nothing is the 
 matter with him. 3. Perhaps something better will be offered us. 
 4. I have seen no one to-day, but I saw everybody at church yes- 
 terday. 5. The old lady wishes to give the boy something good. 
 
 6. What do you need? I don't need anything. 7. You never saw 
 any one so contented. 8. Everybody was hungry, and yet nobody 
 wanted to make peace just to have bread. 9. Each of his fables 
 is the story of a day. 10. If one has books enough, one can amuse 
 himself reading. 11. There is never anybody at his house. 12. We 
 were informed that his ship was to leave at noon on Saturday. 
 13. None of my friends has gone this year. 14. Give them some- 
 thing good to drink. 15. Has your father anything good in his 
 garden? Nothing. 16. There is no fire in this room. How cold 
 it is! 17. We were told not to come. 18. Did you see anybody 
 you knew at the station? 19. I saw nobody there whom I knew. 
 
 20. -What did you give him? I gave him nothing. 
 
 VIII. Irregular Verbs 
 
 1. Give the future indicative, first person singular of valoir, faire 
 and cueillir. 2. Give the imperative, second person plural of 
 avoir, boire and conduire. 3. Give the present subjunctive, first 
 person singular of lever, plaire and acquerir. 4. Give the future 
 
REVIEW EXERCISES 223 
 
 indicative, first person singular of savoir, courir and venir. 5. Give 
 the present subjunctive, third person singular of avoir, envoy er and 
 jeter. 6. Give the past participle of prendre, dire and lire. 7. Give 
 the past definite in full of voir, vivre and tenir. 8. Give the im- 
 perfect subjunctive in full of savoir, taire and ecrire. 9. Give the 
 present indicative in full of vouloir, se taire and s'en oiler. 10. Give 
 the past definite in full of craindre, devoir and boire. 11. Give the 
 principal parts of suivre, plaindre and paraitre. 12. Give the prin- 
 cipal parts of aller, boire, venir and courir. 13. I have sat down. 
 14. It has opened. 15. They are sleeping. 16. They were eating. 
 
 17. Let us run. 18. He will run. 19. They are drinking. 20. He 
 is dying. 21. She died this morning. 22. Where was she born? 
 
 IX. Government of Verbs 
 
 1. Think of me when I am (fut.) not here. 2. I shall never be 
 able to use them. 3. Do you ever think of England when you are 
 in the United States? I never think of it. 4. I was going to ask 
 my brother for some tickets. 5. He always has some and I shall 
 ask him for two. 6. How much did you pay for the shoes you 
 bought? 7. I paid twenty francs ninety-five centimes for them. 
 8. Will you buy me some paper to-morrow? 9. I cannot wait for 
 you any longer; the breakfast is on the table. 10. Look in your 
 dictionary for the meaning of all the words. 11. Listen to her, 
 and when she makes mistakes, tell her. 12. I bought this hat at 
 your hatter's and I paid ten francs for it. 13. She bought several 
 hats in that shop and she paid very high for them. 14. He paid 
 twelve thousand francs for the automobile (motor-car) he bought in 
 London. 15. I have paid twenty-five francs for my hat. How 
 much did you pay for yours? 16. The children are looking for the 
 book. 17. How much did you pay for those beautiful red roses? 
 
 18. She has lost it, but I am going to look for it. 19. Did he ap- 
 proach the house? He did. 20. Did you remember what I told 
 you? I didn't. I forgot it. 21. What do you use when you write? 
 22. I use paper and ink. 
 
 X. The Infinitive 
 
 A.I. Tell your friend to come and see me. 2. I wish I were in 
 France now. 3. The teacher makes the boys study their lessons. 
 4. Where can he be? 5. He won't be long in arriving. 6. I saw 
 her leave the house half an hour ago. 7. Please send for him. 
 
224 REVIEW EXERCISES 
 
 8. Are you going to have a house built this year? 9. The ladies I 
 saw this morning have just set out for Paris. 10. I made him write 
 a letter to his brother. 11. Make them send us another box of 
 cakes. 12. Make them write slowly. 13. Make them write it 
 slowly. 14. Their teacher made them write their exercises. 
 15. We have just given him what he wanted. 16. We heard them 
 say that their friends had gone to Germany. 17. He stayed at 
 home all day, but his friends could not come to see him. 18. It 
 would be better to talk less and work more. 19. I still have sev- 
 eral pages to read before (the) evening. 20. I had a house built 
 for my son who has just married. 
 
 B. 1. I nearly fell on leaving your house. 2. You have only to 
 bathe in the river. 3. You have only one thing to do, that is to 
 confess everything to your father. 4. The king has just left the 
 palace, but he will be back to-morrow. 5. Don't try to tell the 
 whole story; it is too long. 6. How much water did I tell you to 
 put in? 7. They have just arrived from France, and will return 
 in the spring. 8. When are you coming to see us? 9. We shall 
 not go to see you this week. 10. After reading the letter I gave it 
 to him. 11. He has just left his friends in the street. 12. We do 
 not want to return home, we want to stay here. 13. He amuses 
 himself by describing to his family wJiat he has seen. 14. I shall 
 not fail to follow your advice. 15. It isn't worth doing (the 
 trouble of being done). 16. Make him do his work before he goes 
 away. 17. I see a gentleman at the door; will you be good enough 
 to show him in? 18. Be good enough to give me what you have 
 in your hand. 19. Could you tell me, sir, what the name of this 
 street is? 20. We shall not go on foot to-day; we prefer to drive. 
 
 C. 1. Where are you going to spend your holidays? In the 
 country. 2. Be good enough to tell me all you have seen and 
 heard. 3. I am having my house painted. It will be finished a 
 week from to-day. 4. We intended to go for a walk, but the 
 weather was bad. 5. Show the ladies up and make the children 
 be quiet. 6. Tell them to have it sent to her. 7. We cannot wait. 
 Something must be done. 8. My neighbour told me that he was 
 to leave [on] the next day. 9. I heard my name called three 
 times. 10. Do you not see those two men coming? 11. They 
 had the sick [man] carried into the other room. 12. Tell them to 
 go away; they are making too much noise. 13. He has tried to do 
 so twice already. 14. He is to set out for Germany to-morrow. 
 15. I was to meet my cousin here. She is to marry my friend to- 
 
REVIEW EXERCISES 225 
 
 morrow. 16. After the marriage, the newly married couple intend 
 to live in Boston. 17. I had just visited my old friend who lives 
 near the church. 18. I have had my boys read this book. 19. The 
 young girls had (out du) to read it the day before yesterday. 
 20. He finally accepted the conditions. 
 
 XI. The Imperfect, Past Definite and Past Indefinite 
 
 1. My brother was reading when they entered the room. 2. Did 
 they receive as much of them as you [did]? 3. We were translat- 
 ing our exercises when the professor entered the classroom. 4. Why 
 did he go downstairs a few minutes ago? He went to send for the 
 doctor. 5. When were you born? 6. On which chair did you 
 place my valise? 7. I placed it on the one beside the window. 
 8. I didn't hear the man who was talking. 9. Many children 
 have already gone to school, but tkere are some still at home. 
 10. Where did you go after breakfast? 11. Did you buy a pair of 
 shoes when you went for a walk? 12. I did not see him at the 
 station last night. 13. I did not buy (prendre) a ticket because 
 my friends had not come. 14. There were many people who were 
 going to take the train for Boston. 15. We drank some hot milk, 
 we went to bed and we slept all night. 16.' The river froze during 
 the winter and we skated every Saturday. 17. With whom were 
 they taking a walk when we met them? 18. I have not finished 
 those books yet. 19. Did you buy some pears yesterday? 20. No, 
 I didn't buy any, because I didn't have any money. 21. Didn't 
 we sell you any tickets? 22. I bought the four pictures you saw, 
 and my old aunt gave me the others. 23. Were there many boys 
 in the country when you went there? 24. No, there were not 
 many. 25. What were you doing when I entered? 26. When I 
 told him who I was and what I wanted, he came at once. 27. How 
 long has the king been reigning? 
 
 XII. The Future 
 
 1. When you come I will introduce you to them. 2. Come when 
 you please and I will help you. 3. When we come to see you we 
 shall tell you about it. 4. When I am in the country I shall have 
 him work for me. 5. I shall wear my dress coat when I go to the 
 theatre. 6. When I have no more money, I shall go and tell (it 
 to) my father. 7. As soon as you have read the book tell me how 
 you liked ( = found) it. 8. Give it him when next ( = the next 
 
226 REVIEW EXERCISES 
 
 time) you see him. 9. After we have dined we shall go back to 
 the town. 10. Will you go away when your brother arrives? 
 11. There are many interesting things which you will see when 
 you go to Paris. 12. When you enter the church you will see 
 your friend in front of the window. 13. I will give it to him when 
 I see him this evening. 14. When they have seen all the pictures 
 in the museum they are going to leave the town. 15. When you 
 come to Toronto, come and see me. 16.. As long as I live I shall 
 not forget you. 17. When you have been there a year or two, you 
 will know better what you should do. 18. As long as iron lasts 
 civilization will last. 19. I shall go when my father comes. 
 20. Come when you will. 
 
 XIII. The Conditional 
 
 A. 1. If I had met him I should have spoken to him. 2. Would 
 you not have sold it to them if they had offered you more money? 
 
 3. If I go, who will remain? if I remain, who will go? 4. That 
 (young) girl could write if she wished. 5. If I should say so, would 
 you believe me? 6. If I 'had been you (say: in (a) your place) I 
 would not have given him anything. 7. We shall take a long walk 
 to-morrow if it is pleasant (= fine). 8. He would speak to me if 
 he were here. 9. He would have spoken to me ten days ago if he 
 had been here. 10. If they worked they would not be poor. 11. If 
 you need money, will you not work for me? 12. If the door opens, 
 shut your book at once. 13. If that house were larger and (if it) 
 had more rooms I would buy it. 14. He would lend it me if I 
 asked him for it. 15. If he spoke more slowly I could understand 
 him. 16. A friend of mine told me that he would come to see 
 me at five o'clock, if it was not raining. 17. If he comes, I shall 
 go for a walk with him after dinner. 18. If they should give you 
 some white roses would you give them to your sister? 19. Per- 
 haps that man will give you some milk, if you ask him for it. 
 20. If he had gone home with me, I should have given him his 
 dinner. 
 
 B. 1. If you had called me, I should have got up at six o'clock. 
 2. If you have no money, how can you buy anything to eat? 3. If 
 I were he (see XI II, A, 6), I should tell them what B think of them. 
 
 4. I should be very much obliged to you if you would tell me what 
 you are thinking of. 5. You could have come earlier if you had 
 wanted to. 6. If people tried to learn that language they would 
 
REVIEW EXERCISES 227 
 
 not find it difficult. 7. Should you have been able to see us if 
 we had come here on Thursday? 8. If we had a great deal of 
 money we should not be much happier. 9. If he had seen his 
 friend he would have told us so. 10. If you will kindly lend me 
 your pencil I shall write all the words. 11. I asked him if he 
 would come to-day, but he would not answer. 12. If you give men 
 what they desire they are happy. 13. These children would have 
 gone to school if it had not rained. 14. Would his brother give 
 him the money if he were to ask for it? 15. The other could have 
 done so, if she had tried. 16. If I had spoken to him he would 
 have fallen. 17. Come if you wish. 18. Come if you please. 
 19. I should have been very thankful to them if they had prevented 
 me from doing that. 20. If he should be there tell him to come 
 at once. 
 
 XIV. The Imperative 
 
 1. Ask him whether he has bought them. 2. Do not be afraid. 
 3. Don't talk to me about it. 4. Help yourself (2d sing.) and 
 Heaven will help you. 5. Sit down here, you must be tired. 6. Let 
 us not go there at once. 7. Don't go there, John, you will hurt 
 yourself. 8. Don't send it to me yet. 9. My brother is not here 
 yet, but don't wait for him. 10. Permit me to thank you for it 
 (en). 11. Let him not go away, we need him. 12. Tell them to 
 come. 13. It is ten o'clock, let us write our letters. 14. Will you 
 kindly lend me your pen? 15. Lend me your pen, but do not lend 
 it to her. 16. Let them stay with us. 17. Let them not do what 
 you have forbidden. 18. Go away, dog, you are disturbing us. 
 19. You have bread; give me some. 20. I have some, don't give 
 me any. 
 
 XV. The Subjunctive 
 
 A. 1. Before you go I should like to see you. 2. I am sorry 
 you could not come. 3. I took care that she did not fall. 4. Un- 
 less they come I shall be at home until five o'clock. 5. I am glad 
 you are here. 6. They fear that you may believe it. 7. I am glad 
 he has read this book. 8. Do you wish me to return without see- 
 ing him? 9. I was astonished that he did not get up earlier. 10. It 
 would be a pity that that should happen. 11. I am anxious that 
 (a ce que) he should read this book. 12. The doctor is at home; 
 shall I send for him? 13. I am afraid they do not know the dif- 
 ference between him and me. 14. You must return before my 
 
228 REVIEW EXERCISES 
 
 father goes away. 15. I am afraid he is ill. 16. I did not think 
 it would rain. 17. I am sorry that she did not come early. 18. I 
 wish you would bring what I asked you to bring. 19. Whether 
 the weather is good (= fine) or bad we accept it. 20. You must 
 bring your books with you to-morrow. 
 
 B. 1. I am very much afraid your father is ill. 2. I am glad 
 you will be able to come. 3. Do you think it will rain? 4. I think 
 it will not rain to-day. 5. I do not know any one who is truly 
 happy. 6. Whatever his reasons were, he has been obliged to 
 change them. 7. Would. you like me to speak to him or to write 
 to him? 8. When did he come here? I want him to return home. 
 
 9. I don't want you to be unhappy. 10. Do you think he will 
 come? 11. I think he will come. 12. He is looking for some one 
 who may know him. 13. Take care that he does not see you. 
 14. He is very sorry that you have a grudge against him. 15. It 
 is necessary that you should not do it. 16. There is nothing in 
 these books which can interest you. 17. Do they want us to stay 
 in the country till the autumn? 18. I should like you to show me 
 the house which you have had built. 19. Your young friend has 
 painted a large picture, but I don't think he has succeeded well 
 this time. 20. He does not want you to tell him everything (tout 
 ce que) you know. 
 
 C. 1. My brother said that he wished me to write to him often. 
 2. I am glad that you were so well during my absence. 3. I wish 
 you to stay here until my return. I am not going far. 4. It is 
 necessary that you put out this lamp. It does not burn well. 
 5. I am sorry that you did not both go away before he came. 6. I 
 am not sure that I know what has become of him. 7. It is possible 
 that we may see him when he comes. 8. He is the richest man I 
 know. 9. Could you show me a grammar which has all the rules? 
 
 10. I am looking for a house which is large enough for seven peo- 
 ple. 11. Do you know a man who can build a better wall than he? 
 12. Whatever the conditions are I cannot accept them without 
 reflecting. 13. Whoever he is, I am sure that he is no gentleman. 
 
 14. Whenever we saw them they were always very busy. 
 
 15. Wherever one may be, one will always find that politeness is 
 useful. 16. I am glad that you have found your blue necktie. 
 17. My brothers must go to Europe next summer. 18. I am 
 afraid he will come before noon. 19. Wherever you go, remember 
 that I shall be thinking of you. 20. You must not waste your 
 money. 
 
REVIEW EXERCISES 229 
 
 XVI. Reflexives and Passives 
 
 A. 1. His mother has hurt her arm. 2. He is well to-day. 
 3. Did you go for a drive yesterday morning? No, I took a ride 
 in the park. 4. Don't be mistaken. What we say is true. 5. My 
 mother did not hurt herself. 6. What is your name? 7. My name 
 is Henry. 8. The French were very brave, they let themselves be 
 killed (se faire tuer) by thousands. 9. He never complains of the 
 weather. 10. We will go for a walk and we shall have a good time 
 all afternoon. 11. At what time did you get up this morning? 
 12. He was followed by a small yellow dog. 13. He is not at all 
 well this morning; he ought to take a walk. 14. She has cut her 
 finger. 15. It is late; get up quickly if you want to see the sun 
 rise. 16. Go with them and you will enjoy yourself a great deal. 
 
 17. What is the name of the lake which he has discovered? 
 
 18. Don't be angry with me. 19. This was the question which 
 people were asking of one another almost every day. 20. My 
 two sisters have always written each other long letters. 
 
 B. I.I think they are going to be married next week. 2. Which 
 amusement do you like best, to go riding on horseback or on (a) [a] 
 bicycle? 3. I went to the play last night, but I did not enjoy my- 
 self. 4. The two little girls bade each other good morning and 
 shook hands. 5. It is never hard to amuse oneself if one is well. 
 6. Come, make haste; it is half past nine and we are late. 7. When 
 they get up they wash their hands and face[s]. 8. These ladies 
 bowed to each other and shook hands. 9. Have you not washed 
 your face yet? I cannot wait for you. 10. How many letters 
 have these young men written to each other? 11. They have 
 written letters to each other, but they have not seen each other 
 yet. 12. Let us all sit down around this large table. 13. The two 
 armies fought well. 14. I do not like your conduct. Such things 
 are not done in (the) good society. 15. Men who build houses 
 and barns are called carpenters. 16. A robbery was committed in 
 the bank, but the thief was caught. 17. I remember all that he 
 said. 18. They will get up early to go to the station. 19. Have 
 these two (young) girls promised to write to each other? Yes, 
 every week. 20. Here are the two letters which they have written 
 to each other during ten months. 
 
230 REVIEW EXERCISES 
 
 XVII. Impersonate 
 
 1. When the weather is bad, we remain at home. 2. If it is 
 warm to-morrow we shall go into the forest. 3. It is very hot, but 
 not so hot as yesterday. 4. I think it will be fine to-morrow. We 
 are going for a drive. 5. It is impossible for you to know what I 
 am thinking of. 6. How warm it is! I think it will rain. 7. It is 
 very cold; it will snow perhaps before long. 8. Although it is 
 windy it is warmer than yesterday. 9. It was easy to shut the 
 gate when there was no wind. 10. What kind of weather is it 
 now? 11. It was fine a moment ago, but now it is raining. 12. In 
 winter it is dark at half past four. 13. It is not easy to read when 
 people are chatting about you. 14. It will be fine weather to-mor- 
 row, and our celebration will take place. 15. When it is warm, 
 horses and men are thirsty. 16. There has fallen much snow. 
 17. It froze last night; it is fine now. 18. There were many people 
 at the ball. 19. You must not go away. 20. You must do what I 
 tell you. 
 
 XVIII. Adverbs 
 
 1. I do not wish to read or write. 2. Perhaps he will remain at 
 home to-day. 3. There are some pencils in the box and a few 
 books under it. 4. Where do you live? I live opposite you. 5. In 
 Paris there are many children who have never seen anything but 
 poor people. 6. They have never been in France and they now 
 say they will not go there. 7. It was only a small thing. 8. I have 
 never seen such a fine picture. 9. It often happens that we prom- 
 ise to do what we can never do. 10. Neither you nor I sing. 
 11. We have no more paper, we cannot write any more. 12. I 
 speak neither English nor German, but I understand both a little. 
 13. How tired I am! I have been working hard. 14. He has 
 neither friends nor money. 15. She had only a few francs in her 
 pocket. 16. Have you ever read that play by Labiche? 17. Does 
 that woman sing as well as your sister? 18. He does not like the 
 languages at all, nor I either. 19. The books are not on the table 
 now. 20. Perhaps you are right, but one must go somewhere. 
 
 XIX. Conjunctions 
 
 1. Take him there yourself, that he may see what you are doing 
 for him. 2. Although he is not very strong, he has travelled every- 
 where. 3. Although we get up rather late we never miss the train. 
 4. Tell it to him before you forget it. 5. Unless one is ill one 
 
REVIEW EXERCISES 231 
 
 ought always to work. 6. I shall miss the train unless you arrive 
 on time. 7. Some of his pupils came to see him before he went 
 away. 8. It is a long time since I have seen you. 9. You should 
 not have done that without asking my permission. 10. He missed 
 his train because he would not get up early enough. 11. I shall not 
 give it to her unless she asks for it. 12. In order to make grain 
 grow, the farmer must plough the land. 13. The grandfather died 
 six months before John was born. 14. Remain here until your 
 brother returns. 15. I was wondering yesterday whether I should 
 be able to speak to you. 16. He spoke in such a way that one 
 could not understand him. 17. It is a long time since I spoke to 
 him. 18. We shall not leave until our father comes. 19. They 
 will not go away without speaking to you. 20. He went home for 
 fear of catching cold. 
 
 XX. Miscellaneous 
 
 A. 1. He had not seen him for three years. 2. After looking 
 at the two books I asked him which one he wanted. 3. I think he 
 is right. 4. The more he works the more I will give him. 5. That 
 poor little child must have been ill; he ought not to remain there 
 any longer. 6. I am not going to Canada unless I can make more 
 money there than at home. 7. I have a grudge against all those 
 who do not like French. 8. How long have you been reading 
 those old newspapers? For fifteen or twenty minutes. 9. Have 
 you been in Paris long? No, we have been here only two weeks. 
 10. You ought to know how that is done. 11. Where is my sister? 
 She has gone downstairs to get her books. 12. Although those 
 children can't read yet, they can play a little on the piano. 
 13. That gentleman must have been in Paris, for he speaks French 
 like a Parisian. 14. What is the matter with you? I have a terri- 
 ble toothache. 15. These are the poems I heard read when I was 
 in France. 16. He was sitting in front of the fire, thinking of all 
 he had suffered. 17. Do not say that you do not remember it, for 
 I told you about it two hours ago. 18. Have your friends come? 
 Oh, yes! They have been here several weeks. 19. Nearly all 
 Parisians are fond of the country and each Sunday every family 
 is eager to go and spend the whole day in the woods and fields. 
 20. He is the best pupil in the school, because he works better than 
 all the rest. 
 
 B. 1. One should sometimes read French newspapers to learn 
 the language. 2. I hope you will accept the sixteen francs I offer 
 
232 REVIEW EXERCISES 
 
 you. 3. I think you are right; he is far too lazy. 4. Your sister is 
 older than you, but she is not so tall. 5. We are Americans, but 
 we have been living in France for ten years. 6. We came here in 
 the spring, having brought with us only three trunks and little 
 money. 7. Are we not to meet our friends here? 8. We are going 
 to meet them to-morrow in London. 9. They must have been 
 very stupid; they never saw us. 10. Most of the students are un- 
 happy now. 11. It is the largest town in America. 12. She ought 
 not to have taken them so far from home. 13. Can you tell me 
 how long that man has been ill? 14. We enjoyed ourselves there; 
 the songs we heard sung were excellent. 15. When I used to 
 know Henry, he did not know how to write. 16. The poor fellow 
 had not eaten for two days; he was weak and hungry. 17. What 
 do you say when you ask for anything in French? 18. I like read- 
 ing very much. Do you wish me to read as many books as you 
 do? 19. It was last Saturday that I went to the theatre. 20. What 
 a pity that it is so late! 
 
 C. 1. They say that he died a few days ago, but few people be- 
 lieve it. 2. This is the oldest tree in the whole country. 3. That 
 gentleman had lived two years in France before he came to the 
 United States. 4. We had been living for two years in that house 
 at the time (moment, m.) of his arrival. 5. That boy is lazy; he 
 will often sleep (pres.) till ten o'clock. 6. I have been working 
 hard all day and I am tired. 7. The master tells the pupils that 
 they should not be so idle. 8. We ought not to have gone away 
 before the others arrived. 9. When do you begin? We begin as 
 soon as my brother has finished. 10. Send for the doctor; my 
 cousin has hurt himself. 11. Do not get angry, but pardon your 
 enemies. 12. The doctor has gone out; he will return at a quarter 
 to eleven. 13. We had to sell our house cheap. 14. Never mind, 
 bring your sister if she wishes to come. 15. Take off your gloves 
 and sit down. 16. I did not answer because I was afraid. 17. I 
 like to go sleighing when the weather is fine. 18. Do you know 
 where Mr. T. lives? I know his father very well. 19. He is in the 
 country and will remain there. 20. My brother is rich and is very 
 fond of me. 21. There is a window which is open; tell John to 
 close it. 22. One ought not to sit down here; it is too cold. 23. She 
 ought to have come yesterday; I was expecting her. 24. The 
 train must have been two hours late. 25. I have been ill for a 
 week and I wish them to stay until I am better. 
 
APPENDIX 
 
 A. GENDER OF NOUNS 
 
 1. Gender by Derivation. French nouns from Latin are 
 regularly derived from the accusative form, and their gender 
 may usually be determined thus: 
 
 (a) Latin masculines and neuters give French masculines: 
 L. murum, w. mur, m. L. librum, m. livre, m. 
 
 L. corpus, n. corps, m. L. ferrum, n. fer, m. 
 
 EXCEPTIONS: Latin abstracts in -or, m. (ace. -orem) are all /. in French, except 
 honneur, labeur, amour; many neuter plurals in -a give a French feminine singular, 
 e.g. L. folia = feuille, L. opera = oeuvre, etc. 
 
 (6) Latin feminines give French feminines: 
 L. libram, /. livre, /. L. mansionem, /. maison, /. 
 
 2. Gender by Endings. The following general rules apply 
 to nouns denoting inanimate objects: 
 
 Masculine endings are: Feminine endings are: 
 
 (a) Vowels (not -e or abstracts (a) -e following a vowel or 
 
 in -te, -tie). double consonant; abstracts in 
 
 -te, -tie*. 
 
 (6) Consonants (not -son, -ion (6) -son, -ion and most ab- 
 
 or abstracts in -eur) . stracts in -eur. 
 
 (c) -acle, -age, -asme, -ege, (c) -ace, -ade, -ance, -ence, 
 
 -erne, -isme, -tere. -euse, -iere, -oire, -ude, -ure. 
 
 EXCEPTIONS: Numerous, especially for masculine rules (a) and (6); six nouns in 
 -age are feminine: cage, image, nage, page (book), plage, rage. 
 
 3. Double Gender. In some words the gender is deter- 
 mined by the sense; in others the sense by the gender, thus: 
 
 (a) Most nouns in -e (and adjectives so used) denoting persons 
 may be masculine or feminine : 
 
 un or une artiste un or une malade un or une enfant 
 
 (6) The meaning varies according to the gender: 
 un livre, book un voile, veil un manche, handle 
 
 une livre, pound une voile, sail une manche, sleeve 
 
 233 
 
234 APPENDIX 
 
 4. Formation of Feminine. Most nouns denoting living 
 beings distinguish the gender thus: 
 
 (a) By means of a different word: oncle, tante; boeuf, vache, etc. 
 
 (6) By adding -esse to the last consonant: abbe, abbesse, prince, 
 princesse, etc. 
 
 (c) A few by -ine: heros, heroine, etc. 
 
 (d) Most nouns of professions, and a few others, lack a feminine 
 form: docteur, ange, etc. 
 
 (e) Some nouns are feminine, whether denoting males or females: 
 une personne, a person, etc. 
 
 (/) Some names of lower animals are masculine only, and some 
 feminine only: un elephant, une fourmi, etc.; male or femelle is added 
 to avoid ambiguity: un elephant male, un elephant femelle. 
 
 (g) Most other nouns follow the analogy of adjectives. 
 
 B. PLURAL OF NOUNS AND ADJECTIVES 
 
 The following rules are given for reference; see also the gen- 
 eral rules, 2, 32: - 
 
 1. Seven nouns in -ou take -x: bijou(x), caillou(x), chou(x), genou(x), 
 hibou(x), joujou(x), pou(x); other nouns in -ou are regular: clou(s), 
 sou(s), etc. 
 
 2. Regular are: bal(s), carnaval(s), chacal(s) and rarer words. 
 
 3. The ending -ail becomes -aux in bail, baux, corail, coraux, tra- 
 vail, travaux and in rarer words; but detail(s), etc., are regular. 
 
 4. Most common adjectives in -al have a plural in -aux; for doubt- 
 ful cases consult dictionary. 
 
 5. Adjectives in -eu have the plural in -s, but observe .hebreu, he- 
 breux. 
 
 6. Some nouns have two plurals, mostly with varying meaning; ex- 
 amples are: ai'eul, pi. aieux, ancestors, ai'euls, grandfathers; ciel, pi. 
 cieux, skies, heavens, climates, but ciels, bed-canopies, etc. ; ceil, pi. yeux 
 but ceils in compounds, e.g. ceils-de-bceuf, oval windows; travail, pi. 
 travaux, works, but travails, reports, etc. ; ail, pi. ails or aulx, garlic. 
 
 7. In compound nouns, only a component which is a noun or an 
 adjective may take the plural sign. 
 
 8. Compounds without hyphen follow the general rules: porteman- 
 teau(x), grand'mere(s); but exceptionally: bon(s)homme(s), gentil(s)- 
 homme(s) and compounds of mon-, ma-: monsieur, messieurs, madame, 
 mesdames, etc. 
 
APPENDIX 235 
 
 9. In compounds with hyphen, both components usually vary: 
 grand (s) -pere (s) , chou (x) -fleur (s) . 
 
 10. In compounds with preposition and hyphen, the first component 
 is variable when the plural force belongs to it: chef(s)-d'ceuvre, etc.; 
 but tete-a-tete, singular or plural, where the plural idea belongs to 
 the expression as a whole. 
 
 11. When the first component is invariable, the compound follows 
 the general rule, but only when the plural idea belongs to the variable 
 component: vice-roi(s); but abat-jour, singular or plural, where the 
 plural idea belongs to the expression as a whole. 
 
 12. The word garde in compounds is variable only when denoting 
 persons: garde (s)-malades, sick-nurse(s) , but garde-robes, wardrobes. 
 
 13. Names of persons are regularly invariable: les deux Racine, les 
 Duval; but a few historic family names take a plural sign: les Cesars, 
 etc.; usage varies for names denoting ' persons like 7 : les Corneilles, 
 les Goethe, sont rares. 
 
 14. Invariable words used as nouns take no plural sign: les on dit, 
 etc.; so also foreign nouns, unless fully naturalized: les post-scriptum, 
 etc.; but: les biftecks, etc. 
 
 15. A few Italian words retain their plural in -i: dilettante, pi. 
 dilettanti, etc. 
 
 C. VERB PARADIGMS 
 1. THE REGULAR CONJUGATIONS 
 
 I II III 
 
 Infinitive Mood 
 
 PRESENT PRESENT PRESENT 
 
 donner, give finir, finish rompre, break 
 
 Participles 
 
 PRESENT PRESENT PRESENT 
 
 donnant, giving finissant, finishing rbmpant, breaking 
 
 PAST PAST PAST 
 
 donne, given fini, finished rompu, broken 
 
236 
 
 APPENDIX 
 
 
 Indicative Mood 
 
 
 PRESENT 
 
 PRESENT 
 
 PRESENT 
 
 / give, am giving, etc. 
 
 I finish, am finishing, 
 
 7 break,, am break- 
 
 
 etc. 
 
 ing, etc. 
 
 je donne 
 
 je finis 
 
 je romps 
 
 tu donnes 
 
 tu finis 
 
 tu romps 
 
 il donne 
 
 ilfinit 
 
 il rompt 
 
 nous donnons 
 
 nous finissons 
 
 nous rompons 
 
 vous donnez 
 
 vous finissez 
 
 vous rompez 
 
 ils donnent 
 
 ils finissent 
 
 ils rompent 
 
 IMPERFECT 
 
 IMPERFECT 
 
 IMPERFECT 
 
 7 was giving, used to 
 
 I was finishing, used 
 
 7 was breaking, 
 
 to give, etc. 
 
 to finish, etc. 
 
 used to break, etc. 
 
 je donnais 
 
 je finissais 
 
 je rompais 
 
 tu donnais 
 
 tu finissais 
 
 tu rompais 
 
 il donnait 
 
 il finissait 
 
 il rompait 
 
 nous donnions 
 
 nous finissions 
 
 nous rompions 
 
 vous donniez 
 
 vous finissiez 
 
 vous rompiez 
 
 ils donnaient 
 
 ils finissaient 
 
 ils rompaient 
 
 PAST DEFINITE 
 
 PAST DEFINITE 
 
 PAST DEFINITE 
 
 / gave, etc. 
 
 I finished, etc. 
 
 7 broke, etc. 
 
 je donnai 
 
 je finis 
 
 je rompis 
 
 tu donnas 
 
 tu finis 
 
 tu rompis 
 
 il donna 
 
 ilfinit 
 
 il rompit 
 
 nous donnames 
 
 nous finimes 
 
 nous rompimes 
 
 vous donnates 
 
 vous finites 
 
 vous rompites 
 
 ils donnerent 
 
 ils finirent 
 
 ils rompirent 
 
 FUTURE 
 
 FUTURE 
 
 FUTURE 
 
 / shall give, etc. 
 
 7 shall finish, etc. 
 
 7 shall break, etc. 
 
 je donnerai 
 
 je finirai 
 
 je romprai 
 
 tu donneras 
 
 tu finiras 
 
 tu rompras 
 
 il donnera 
 
 il finira 
 
 il rompra 
 
 nous donnerons 
 
 nous finirons 
 
 nous romprons 
 
 vous donnerez 
 
 vous finirez 
 
 vous romprez 
 
 ils donneront 
 
 ils finiront 
 
 ils rompront 
 
APPENDIX 
 
 237 
 
 CONDITIONAL 
 / should give, etc. 
 je donnerais 
 tu donnerais 
 il donnerait 
 nous donnerions 
 vous donneriez 
 ils donneraient 
 
 PRESENT 
 (That) I (may) give, 
 
 etc. 
 
 (que) je donne 
 (que) tu donnes 
 (qu')il donne 
 (que) nous donnions 
 (que) vous donniez 
 (qu')ils donnent 
 
 IMPERFECT 
 (That) I (might) give, 
 
 etc. 
 
 (que) je donnasse 
 (que) tu donnasses 
 
 (qu')il donnat 
 (que) nous donnassions 
 (que) vous donnassiez 
 (qu')ils donnassent 
 
 CONDITIONAL 
 
 CONDITIONAL 
 
 / should finish, etc. 
 
 / should break, etc. 
 
 je finirais 
 
 je romprais 
 
 tu finirais 
 
 tu romprais 
 
 il finirait 
 
 il romprait 
 
 nous finirions 
 
 nous romprions 
 
 vous finiriez 
 
 vous rompriez 
 
 ils finiraient 
 
 ils rompraient 
 
 Subjunctive Mood 
 
 PRESENT 
 (That) I (may) finish, 
 
 etc. 
 
 (que) je finisse 
 (que) tu finisses 
 (qu')il finisse 
 (que) nous finissions 
 (que) vous finissiez 
 (qu')ils finissent 
 
 IMPERFECT 
 (That) I (might) finish, 
 
 etc. 
 
 (que) je finisse 
 (que) tu finisses 
 
 (qu')il finit 
 (que) nous finissions 
 (que) vous finissiez 
 (qu')ils finissent 
 
 Imperative Mood 
 
 PRESENT 
 (That) I (may) break, 
 
 etc. 
 
 (que) je rompe 
 (que) tu rompes 
 (qu')il rompe 
 (que) nous rompions 
 (que) vous rompiez 
 (qu')ils rompent 
 
 IMPERFECT 
 (That) I (might) 
 
 break, etc. 
 (que) je rompisse 
 (que) tu rompisses 
 
 (qu')il rompit 
 (que) nous rompissions 
 (que) vous rompissiez 
 (qu')ils rompissent 
 
 PRESENT 
 
 PRESENT 
 
 PRESENT 
 
 Give, etc. 
 
 Finish, etc. 
 
 Break, etc. 
 
 donne 1 
 
 finis 
 
 romps 
 
 qu'il donne 
 
 qu'il finisse 
 
 qu'il rompe 
 
 donnons 
 
 finissons 
 
 rompons 
 
 donnez 
 
 finissez 
 
 rompez 
 
 qu'ils donnent 
 
 qu'ils finissent 
 
 qu'ils rompent 
 
 1 This form becomes 'donnes' when followed by -y or -en. 
 
238 
 
 APPENDIX 
 
 2. THE AUXILIARY VERBS 
 
 Infinitive 
 PRES. avoir, have PRES. tre, be 
 
 PRES. ay ant, having 
 PAST, eu, had 
 
 Participles 
 
 PRES. 6tant, being 
 PAST, et6, been 
 
 Indicative 
 
 PRESENT 
 / have, am having, etc. 
 
 J 7 ai 
 
 tu as 
 
 ila 
 
 nous avons 
 
 vous avez 
 
 ils ont 
 
 IMPERFECT 
 
 / had, was having, etc. 
 
 j'avais nous avions 
 
 tu avais vous aviez 
 
 il avait ils avaient 
 
 PAST DEFINITE 
 
 / had, etc. 
 
 j'eus nous eumes 
 
 tu eus vous eutes 
 
 il eut ils eurent 
 
 FUTURE 
 
 / shall have, etc. 
 j'aurai nous aurons 
 tu auras vous aurez 
 il aura ils 'auront 
 
 CONDITIONAL 
 
 7 should have, etc. 
 
 j'aurais nous aurions 
 
 PRESENT 
 
 7 am, am being, etc. 
 je suis nous sommes 
 
 tu es vous etes 
 
 il est ils sont 
 
 IMPERFECT 
 7 was, was being, etc. 
 j'e"tais nous etions 
 
 tu e"tais vous tiez 
 
 il e"tait ils etaient 
 
 PAST DEFINITE 
 
 7 was, etc. 
 
 je fus nous fumes 
 
 tu fus vous futes 
 
 il f ut ils f urent 
 
 FUTURE 
 
 7 shall be, etc. 
 
 je serai nous serons 
 
 tu seras vous serez 
 
 il sera ils seront 
 
 CONDITIONAL 
 7 should be, etc. 
 je serais nous serions 
 
 tu aurais 
 il aurait 
 
 vous aunez 
 ils auraient 
 
 tu serais 
 il serait 
 
 vous senez 
 ils seraient 
 
APPENDIX 
 
 239 
 
 Subjunctive 
 
 PRESENT 
 
 (That] I (may) have, etc. 
 (que) j'aie (que) nous ayons 
 (que) tu aies (que) vous ayez 
 (qu')il ait (qu')ils aient 
 
 IMPERFECT 
 
 (That) I (might) have, etc. 
 (que) j'eusse (que) nous eussions 
 (que) tu eusses (que) vous eussiez 
 (qu')il eut (qu')ils eussent 
 
 PRESENT 
 
 (That) I (may) be, etc. 
 (que) je sois (que) nous soyons 
 (que) tu sois (que) vous soyez 
 (qu')il soit (qu')ils soient 
 
 IMPERFECT 
 
 (That) I (might) be, etc. 
 (que) je fusse (que) nous fussions 
 (que) tu fusses (que) vous fussiez 
 (qu')il fut (qu')ils fussent 
 
 Imperative 
 
 aie 
 qu'il ait 
 
 PRESENT 
 
 Have, etc. 
 
 ayons 
 ayez 
 qu'ils aient 
 
 sois 
 qu'il soit 
 
 PRESENT 
 Be, etc. 
 
 soyons 
 soyez 
 qu'ils soient 
 
 3. THE 
 
 COMPOUND 
 Infinitive 
 
 PERFECT 
 
 To have given 
 avoir donne" 
 
 PERFECT 
 Having given 
 ayant donne 
 
 PAST INDEFINITE 
 I have given, etc. 
 
 j'ai donne 
 ifcu as donne 
 etc. 
 
 Participle 
 
 Indicative 
 
 TENSES 
 
 PERFECT 
 
 To have arrived 
 etre arrive (e)(s) 
 
 PERFECT 
 
 Having arrived 
 
 etant arrive (e)(s) 
 
 PAST INDEFINITE 
 7 have arrived, etc. 
 je suis arrive (e) 
 tu es arrive (e) 
 etc. 
 
240 APPENDIX 
 
 PLUPERFECT PLUPERFECT 
 
 I had given, etc. I had arrived, etc. 
 
 j 'avals donne, etc. j'e*tais arrive (e), etc. 
 
 PAST ANTERIOR PAST ANTERIOR 
 
 7 had given, etc. I had arrived, etc. 
 
 j'eus donne", etc. je fus arrive(e), etc. 
 
 FUTURE ANTERIOR FUTURE ANTERIOR 
 
 7 shall have given, etc. I shall have arrived, etc. 
 
 j'aurai donne, etc. je serai arrive(e), etc. 
 
 CONDITIONAL ANTERIOR CONDITIONAL ANTERIOR 
 
 7 should have given, etc. I should have arrived, etc. 
 
 j'aurais donne, etc. je serais arrive(e), etc. 
 
 Subjunctive 
 
 PERFECT PERFECT 
 
 (That) I (may) have given, etc. (That) I (may) have arrived, etc. 
 
 (que) j'aie donne, etc. que je sois arrive"(e), etc. 
 
 PLUPERFECT PLUPERFECT 
 
 (That) I (might) have given, etc. (That) I (might) have arrived, etc. 
 
 (que) j'eusse donne, etc. (que) je fusse arrive (e), etc. 
 
 4. THE PASSIVE VOICE 
 
 Infinitive 
 
 PRESENT PERFECT 
 
 etre aime(e)(s), to be loved avoir et6 aime(e)(s), to have been loved 
 
 Participle 
 
 PRESENT PERFECT 
 
 e*tant aime(e)(s), being loved ayant ete aime(e)(s), having been loved 
 
APPENDIX 
 
 241 
 
 Indicative 
 
 PRESENT 
 
 / am (being) loved, etc. 
 je suis aime*(e) 
 tu es aime(e) 
 
 il (elle) est aime"(e) 
 nous sommes aime(e)s 
 vous etes aime(e)s 
 ils (elles) sont aime(e)s 
 
 IMPERFECT 
 
 / was (being) loved, etc. 
 j'etais a-ime(e), etc. 
 
 PAST DEFINITE 
 
 I was loved, etc. 
 
 je fus aime(e), etc. 
 
 . FUTURE 
 
 7 shall be loved, etc. 
 je serai aime(e), etc. 
 
 CONDITIONAL 
 / should be loved, etc. 
 je serais aime(e), etc. 
 
 PRESENT 
 
 (That) I may be loved, etc. 
 (que) je sois aime(e), etc. 
 
 IMPERFECT 
 
 (That) I might be loved, etc. 
 (que) je fusse aime(e), etc. 
 
 sois aime(e) 
 qu'il (elle) soit aime(e) 
 
 PAST INDEFINITE 
 / have been (was) loved, etc. 
 j'ai ete aime(e) 
 tu as ete aime(e) 
 il (elle) a ete aime"(e) 
 nous avons ete aim6(e)a 
 vous avez ete aime(e)s 
 ils (elles) ont ete aime(e)s 
 
 PLUPERFECT 
 
 / had been loved, etc. 
 
 j'avais ete aime(e), etc. 
 
 PAST ANTERIOR 
 I had been loved, etc. 
 j'eus ete aime(e), etc. 
 
 FUTURE PERFECT 
 
 7 shall have been loved, etc. 
 
 j'aurai e*te aime(e), etc. 
 
 CONDITIONAL ANTERIOR 
 7 should have been loved, etc. 
 j'aurais ete* aime(e), etc. 
 
 Subjunctive 
 
 PERFECT 
 
 ( That) I may have been loved, etc. 
 (que) j'aie e"te aime(e), etc. 
 
 PLUPERFECT 
 
 (That) I might have been loved, etc. 
 (que) j'eusse e*te aime(e), etc. 
 
 Imperative 
 
 Be loved, etc. 
 
 soyons aime(e)s 
 
 soyez aim4(e)s 
 
 qu'ils (elles) soient aime(e)s 
 
242 
 
 APPENDIX 
 
 5. THE REFLEXIVE VERB 
 Infinitive 
 
 PRESENT 
 se couper, to cut oneself 
 
 PERFECT 
 s'etre coupe* (e)(s), to have cut oneself 
 
 Participle 
 
 PRESENT PERFECT 
 
 se coupant, cutting oneself s'etant coupe(e)(s), having cut oneself 
 
 Indicative 
 
 PRESENT 
 
 / cut (am cutting} myself, etc. 
 je me coupe 
 tu te coupes 
 il se coupe 
 nous nous coupons 
 vous vous coupez 
 ils se coupent 
 
 IMPERFECT 
 
 / was cutting (cut) myself, etc. 
 je me coupais, etc. 
 
 PAST DEFINITE 
 / cut myself, etc. 
 je me coupai, etc. 
 
 FUTURE 
 
 I shall cut myself, etc. 
 je me couperai, etc. 
 
 CONDITIONAL 
 I should cut myself, etc. 
 je me couperais, etc. 
 
 PRESENT 
 
 \That) I may cut myself, etc. 
 (que) je me coupe, etc. 
 
 PAST INDEFINITE 
 / have cut (cut) myself, etc. 
 je me suis coupe (e) 
 , tu t'es coupe (e) 
 il (elle) s'est coupe (e) 
 nous nous sommes coupe (e)s 
 vous vous etes coupe (e)s 
 ils (elles) se sont coupe (e)s 
 
 PLUPERFECT 
 
 I had cut myself, etc. 
 
 je m'etais coupe(e), etc. 
 
 PAST ANTERIOR 
 
 / had cut myself , etc. 
 
 je me fus coupe" (e), etc. 
 
 FUTURE PERFECT 
 
 7 shall have cut myself, etc. 
 
 je me serai coupe" (e) 
 
 CONDITIONAL ANTERIOR 
 
 7 should have cut myself, etc. 
 
 je me serais coupe* (e), etc. 
 
 Subjunctive 
 
 PERFECT 
 
 (That) I may have cut myself, etc. 
 (que) je me sois coupe* (e), etc. 
 
APPENDIX 
 
 243 
 
 IMPERFECT 
 
 (That) I might cut myself, etc. 
 (que) je me coupasse, etc. 
 
 PLUPERFECT 
 
 (That) I might have cut myself, etc. 
 (que) je me fusse coupe (e), etc. 
 
 Imperative 
 
 Cut thyself (yourself), etc. 
 
 coupons-nous 
 
 coupe-toi coupez-vous 
 
 qu'il se coupe qu'ils se coupent 
 
 NOTE. The reflexive verb s'en aller, go away, presents special difficulty in the 
 arrangement of the pronoun objects as seen in the following examples; in practice, 
 partir often takes its place. 
 
 Present Indicative 
 
 NEGATIVE 
 
 I do not go away, etc. 
 je ne m'en vais pas 
 tu ne t'en vas pas 
 il ne s'en va pas 
 
 AFFIRMATIVE 
 7 go away, etc. 
 je m'en vais 
 tu. t'en vas 
 il s'en va 
 nous nous en allons 
 vous vous en allez 
 Us s'en vont 
 
 INTERROGATIVE 
 Do I go away? etc. 
 m'en vais-je? 
 t'en vas-tu? 
 s'en va-t-il? 
 nous en allons-nous? 
 vous en allez-vous? 
 s'en vont-ils? 
 
 nous ne nous en allons pas 
 vous ne vous en allez pas 
 ils ne s'en vont pas 
 
 INTERROGATIVE NEGATIVE 
 
 Do I not go away? etc. 
 ne m'en vais-je pas? 
 
 ne t'en vas-tu pas? 
 
 ne s'en va-t-il pas? 
 ne nous en allons-nous pas? 
 ne vous en allez-vous pas? 
 
 ne s'en vont-ils pas? 
 
 Past Indefinite 
 
 NEGATIVE 
 
 7 have not gone away, etc. 
 je ne m'en suis pas allege) 
 tu ne t'en es pas alle(e) 
 
 il (elle) nes'en est pas alle*(e) 
 
 nous ne nous en sommes pas alle(e)s 
 vous ne vous en etes pas alle(e)s 
 ils (elles) ne s'en sont pas alle(e)s 
 
244 APPENDIX 
 
 INTERROGATIVE NEGATIVE 
 Have I not gone away? etc. 
 ne m'en suis-je pas alle(e)? 
 
 ne t'en es-tu pas alle(e)? 
 
 ne s'en est-il (elle) pas alle(e)? 
 ne nous en sommes-nous pas alle(e)s? 
 ne vous en ^tes-vous pas alle(e)s? 
 ne s'en sont-ils (elles) pas alle(e)s? 
 
 Imperative 
 
 AFFIRMATIVE NEGATIVE 
 
 Go away, etc. Do not go away } etc. 
 
 va-t'en ne t'en va pas 
 
 qu'il s'en aille qu'il ne s'en aille pas 
 
 allons-nous-en ne nous en allons pas 
 
 allez-vous-en ne vous en allez pas 
 
 qu'ils s'en aillent qu'ils ne s'en aillent pas 
 
 D. ORTHOGRAPHICAL PECULIARITIES FIRST CON- 
 JUGATION 
 
 1. Verbs ending in -cer, e.g. avancer [avase], advance, must 
 preserve the [s] sound of c throughout their conjugation, and 
 hence c becomes when it precedes a or o of an ending, but not 
 elsewhere; for the sounds of c and , see Introduction, p. xviii. 
 
 avanjant 
 
 ?RES. INDIC. 
 
 IMPF. INDIC. 
 
 PAST DBF. 
 
 IMPF. SUBJ. 
 
 avance 
 
 avanfais 
 
 avan^ai 
 
 avangasse 
 
 avances 
 avance 
 
 avangais 
 avan^ait 
 
 avanfas 
 avanga 
 
 avangasses 
 avangat 
 
 avanfons 
 avancez 
 avancent 
 
 avancions 
 avanciez 
 avangaient 
 
 avangames 
 avangates 
 avancerent 
 
 avanfassions 
 avan^assiez 
 avan^assent 
 
 NOTE. Pronoun subjects are omitted to save space. 
 
 2. Verbs ending in -ger, e.g. manger [mase], eat, must preserve 
 the [3] sound of g throughout their conjugation, and hence g 
 becomes ge when it precedes a or o of an ending, but not else- 
 where; for the sounds cf g and ge, see Introduction, p. xviii. 
 
 
APPENDIX 
 
 245 
 
 PRES. PART. 
 
 PRES. INDIC. 
 
 IMPF. INDIC. 
 
 PAST DBF. 
 
 IMPF. SUBJ. 
 
 mangeant 
 
 mange 
 
 mangeais 
 
 mangeai 
 
 mangeasse 
 
 
 manges 
 mange 
 
 mangeais 
 mangeait 
 
 mangeas 
 mangea 
 
 mangeasses 
 mangeat 
 
 
 mangeons 
 mangez 
 
 mangions 
 mangiez 
 
 mangeames 
 mangeates 
 
 mangeassions 
 mangeassiez 
 
 mangent mangeaient mangerent mangeassent 
 
 3. Verbs ending in -oyer and -uyer, 
 essuyer, wipe, change y to i whenever it 
 in conjugation, but not elsewhere; verbs 
 pay, may retain y throughout, or change 
 for e mute, see Introduction, p. xiii. 
 
 e.g. nettoyer, clean, 
 comes before e mute 
 
 in -ayer, e.g. payer, 
 y to i before e mute; 
 
 PRES. INDIC. 
 
 PRES. SUBJ. 
 
 FUTURE 
 
 CONDITIONAL 
 
 nettoie 
 
 nettoie 
 
 nettoierai 
 
 nettoierais 
 
 nettoies 
 
 nettoies 
 
 nettoieras 
 
 nettoierais 
 
 nettoie 
 
 nettoie 
 
 nettoiera 
 
 nettoierait 
 
 nettoyons 
 
 nettoyions 
 
 nettoierons 
 
 nettoierions 
 
 nettoyez 
 
 nettoyiez 
 
 nettoierez 
 
 nettoieriez 
 
 nettoient 
 
 nettoient 
 
 nettoieront 
 
 nettoieraient 
 
 essuie 
 
 essuie 
 
 essuierai 
 
 essuierais 
 
 etc. 
 
 etc. 
 
 etc. 
 
 etc. 
 
 paie 1 
 \ etc. 
 payej 
 
 paie 1 
 \ etc. 
 payej 
 
 paierai 1 
 . \ etc. 
 payerai J 
 
 paierais 1 
 etc. 
 payerais j 
 
 4. Verbs having the stem vowel e, e.g. mener, lead, change 
 this e to e wherever in conjugating the verb it is followed by 
 a syllable containing e mute (but for verbs in -eler, -eter, see 
 below). 
 
 PRES. INDIC. 
 
 PRES. SUBJ. 
 
 FUTURE 
 
 CONDITIONAL 
 
 mene 
 
 mene 
 
 menerai 
 
 menerais 
 
 menes 
 
 menes 
 
 meneras 
 
 menerais 
 
 mene 
 
 mene 
 
 menera 
 
 menerait 
 
 menons 
 
 menions 
 
 menerons 
 
 menerions 
 
 menez 
 
 meniez 
 
 menerez 
 
 meneriez 
 
 menent 
 
 menent 
 
 meneront 
 
 meneraient 
 
 NOTE. The principle involved here is that if e mute occurs in two successive 
 syllables, the first e takes the sound [e], indicated above by e. 
 
246 APPENDIX 
 
 5. Verbs having the stem vowel e followed by a consonant, 
 e.g. ceder, yield, change e to e in the present indicative and 
 subjunctive, but retain e in the future and conditional when 
 followed by a syllable containing e mute, e in the future and 
 conditional having exceptionally the [e] sound. 
 
 PRES. INDIC. PRES. SUBJ. FUTURE CONDITIONAL 
 
 cede, etc. cede, etc. cederai, etc. cederais, etc. 
 
 NOTE. Verbs with stem vowel e -f- vowel are regular, e.g. creer. 
 
 6. Verbs in -eler, -eter, e.g. appeler, call, Jeter, throw, usu- 
 ally double 1 or t before an e mute syllable in conjugation (but 
 with some important exceptions, see below). 
 
 PRES. INDIC. PRES. SUBJ. FUTURE CONDITIONAL 
 
 appelle appelle appellerai appellerais 
 
 appelles appelles appelleras appellerais 
 
 appelle appelle appellera appellerait 
 
 appelons appelions appellerons appellerions 
 
 appelez appeliez appellerez appelleriez 
 
 appellent appellent appelleront appelleraient 
 So also jeter: 
 
 jette, etc. jette, etc. jetterai, etc. jetterais, etc. 
 
 NOTE. The same principle is involved as that explained in the Note to 4, above, 
 but here the [e] sound of e is indicated by a doubled consonant. 
 
 7. A few verbs in -eler, -eter (the commonest being 
 acheter, buy, geler, freeze) take the grave accent like mener, 
 
 see 4, above. 
 
 PRES. INDIC. 
 
 achete, etc. 
 gele, etc. 
 
 PRES. SUBJ. 
 
 achete, etc. 
 gele, etc. 
 
 FUTURE 
 acheterai, etc. 
 gelerai, etc. 
 
 CONDITIONAL 
 acheterais, etc. 
 gelerais, etc. 
 
 E. LIST OF PRINCIPAL IRREGULAR VERBS 
 
 1. The rules for inferring the various moods and tenses from the principal parts 
 are given in 157, 158. 
 
 2. The pronoun subjects are omitted for brevity, but should be supplied in learning 
 or reciting the verbs. 
 
 3. The future and conditional are combined for brevity, e.g. j'acquerrai(s) = j'ac- 
 querrai and j'acquerrais. 
 
 4. Compounds are usually to be found under the principal verb. 
 
 5. The more difficult tenses are given in full. 
 
 6. The auxiliaries avoir and etre are not included. 
 
 7. For key to the list, see p. 259. 
 
APPENDIX 247 
 
 INFIN. PRES. PART. PAST PART. PRES. INDIC. PAST DBF. 
 
 Acquerir acquerant acquis acquiers acquis 
 
 (acquire) acquerais acquisse 
 
 acquerrai(s) acquiere 
 
 PRES. IND.: acquiers, acquiers, acquiert, acquerons, acquerez, ac- 
 
 quierent. 
 PRES. SUBJ.: acquiere, acquieres, acquiere, acquerions, acqueriez, 
 
 acquierent. 
 conquerir, conquer reconquerir, reconquer 
 
 Aller allant alle vais 2 allai 
 
 (go) allais allasse 
 
 irai(s) 1 aille 
 
 PRES. IND.: vais, 2 vas, 2 va, 2 aliens, allez, vont. 2 
 
 PRES. SUBJ.: aille, ailles, aille, allions, alliez, aillent. 
 
 1 From Lat. ire. 2 From Lat. vadere. 
 
 Assaillir assaillant assailli assaille assaillis 
 
 (assail) assaillais assaillisse 
 
 assaillirai(s) assaille 
 
 PRES. IND.: assaille, assailles, assaille, assaillons, assaillez, assaillent. 
 
 tressaillir, start saillir, jut out 
 
 Asseoir asseyant 2 assis f assieds assis 
 
 (seat) asseyais 3 \assois assisse 
 
 assierai (s) l assey e 
 
 p T . f assieds, assieds, assied, asseyons, assey ez, assey ent. 
 
 { assois, assois, assoit, assoyons, assoyez, assoient. 
 p ~ . f asseye, asseyes, asseye, asseyions, asseyiez, asseyent. 
 
 [ assoie, assoies, assoie, assoyions, assoyiez, assoient. 
 T m I assieds, asseyons, assey ez. 
 
 { assois, assoyons, assoyez. 
 
 i or asseyerai(s) or assoirai(s). 2 or assoyant. 8 or assoyais 
 
 s'asseoir, sit down rasseoir, reseat, calm se rasseoir, sit down again 
 
 Battre battant battu bats battis 
 
 (beat) battais battisse 
 
 battrai(s) batte 
 
 PRES. IND.: bats, bats, bat, battons, battez, battent. 
 
 abattro, fell debattre, debate rabattre, beat down 
 
 combattre, fight se debattre, struggle 
 
248 
 
 APPENDIX 
 
 PRES. PART. PAST PART. 
 buvant bu 
 
 buvais 
 boive 
 
 PRES. INDIC. PAST DBF. 
 bois bus 
 
 busse 
 
 INFIN. 
 Boire 
 
 (drink} 
 boirai(s) 
 
 PRES. IND.: bois, bois, boit, buvons, buvez, boivent. 
 PRES. SUBJ.: boive, boives, boive, buvions, buviez, boivent. 
 
 reboire, drink again 
 
 Bouillir bouillant bouilli bous bouillis 
 
 (boil) bouillais bouillisse 
 
 bouillirai(s) bouille 
 
 PRES. IND.: bous, bous, bout, bouillons, bouillez, bouillent. 
 
 ebouillir, boil away rebouillir, boil again 
 
 Conclure concluant conclu conclus conclus 
 
 (conclude) concluais conclusse 
 
 conclurai(s) conclue 
 
 PRES. IND.; conclus, conclus, conclut, concluons, concluez, concluent. 
 
 exclure, exclude inclure, 1 include 
 
 1 Past part, inclus. 
 
 Conduire conduisant conduit 
 (conduct) conduisais 
 conduirai(s) conduise 
 
 conduis conduisis 
 conduisisse 
 
 PRES. IND.: conduis, conduis, conduit, 
 duisent. 
 
 conduisons, conduisez, con- 
 
 econduiie, show out induire, induce 
 recondujr^, lead back introduire, introduce 
 deduire, deduct produire, produce 
 enduire, piaster reduire, reduce 
 
 reproduire, reproduce 
 seduire, mislead 
 traduire, translate 
 
 C onfire confisant confit 
 (preserve) confisais 
 connrtii(s) confise 
 
 conns confis 
 confisse 
 
 PRES. IND. confis, confis, confit, confisons, confisez, confisent. 
 
 suffire (p. part, suffi), suffice 
 
APPENDIX 249 
 
 INFIN. PRES. PART. PAST PART. PRES. INDIC. PAST DEF. 
 
 Connaitre connaissant connu connais connus 
 
 (know) connaissais connusse 
 
 connattrai(s) connaisse 
 
 PRES. IND.: connais, connais, connait, connaissons, eonnaissez, con- 
 naissent. 
 
 meconnaitre, not to know comparaitre, appear paltre, 1 graze 
 
 reconnaitre, recognize disparaitre, disappear repaitre, feed, feast 
 
 paraitre, appear reparaitre, reappear se repaitre, feed, feast 
 apparaltre, appear 
 
 1 Lacks the past part., past def., and impf. subj. 
 
 Construire construisant construit construis const ruisis 
 
 (construct) construisais construisisse 
 
 construirai(s) construise 
 
 PRES. IND.: construis, construis, construit, construisons, construisez, 
 construisent. 
 
 deconstruire, take apart reconstruire, reconstruct 
 
 instruire, instruct detruire, destroy 
 
 Coudre cousant cousu couds cousis 
 
 (sew) cousais cousisse 
 
 coudrai(s) couse 
 
 PRES. IND.: couds, couds, coud, cousons, cousez, cousent. 
 
 decoudre, rip, unsew recoudre, sew again 
 
 Courir . courant couru cours courus 
 
 (run) courais cours courusse 
 
 courrai(s) coure 
 
 PRES. IND.: cours, cours, court, courons, courez, courent. 
 
 accourir, run up encourir, incur secourir, help 
 
 concourir, concur parcourir, run over 
 
 discourir, discourse recourir, apply 
 
 Craindre craignant craint crains craignis 
 
 (fear) craignais craignisse 
 
 craindrai(s) craigne 
 
 PRES. IND.: crains, crains, craint, craignons, craignez, craignent. 
 
 contraindre, constrain plaindre, pity se plaindre, complain 
 
250 
 
 APPENDIX 
 
 INFIN. PRES. PART. PAST PART. PRES. INDIC. 
 
 Croire croyant cru crois 
 
 (believe) croyais 
 
 croirai(s) croie 
 
 PRES. IND.: crois, crois, croit, croyons, croyez, croient. 
 
 PRES. SUBJ.: croie, croies, croie, croyions, croyiez, croient. 
 
 PAST DBF. 
 crus 
 crusse 
 
 Croitre 
 
 (grow) 
 croitrai(s) 
 PRES. IND.: 
 
 cru 
 
 (f. crue) 
 
 crois 
 
 croissant 
 croissais 
 croisse 
 crois, crois, croit, croissons, croissez, croissent. 
 
 crus 
 crusse 
 
 cueilli 
 
 cueille 
 
 cueillis 
 cueillisse 
 
 Cueillir cueillant 
 
 (gather) cueillais 
 
 cueillerai(s) . cueille 
 
 PRES. IND.: cueille, cueilles, cueille, cueillons, cueillez, cueillent. 
 
 accueillir, welcome recueillir, gather, collect 
 
 Cuire cuisant cuit cuis cuisis 
 
 (cook) cuisais cuisisse 
 
 cuirai(s) cuise 
 
 PRES. IND.: cuis, cuis, cuit, cuisons, cuisez, cuisent. 
 
 recuire, cook again reluire, 2 glisten nuire, 3 injure 
 
 luire, 1 shine 
 
 1 Past part. lui. 2 Past part, relui. 3 Past part. nui. 
 
 Devoir devant du dois dus 
 
 (owe, must) devais (/. due, dusse 
 
 devrai(s) doive pi. du(e)s) 
 
 PRES. IND.: dois, dois, doit, devons, devez, doivent. 
 PRES. SUBJ.: doive, doives, doive, devions, deviez, doivent. 
 redevoir, still owe 
 
 Dire disant dit dis dis 
 
 (say) disais disse 
 
 dirai(s) dise 
 
 PRES. IND.: dis, dis, dit, disons, dites, disent. 
 
 contredire, 1 contradict interdire, 1 interdict predire, 1 predict 
 
 dedire, 1 retract medire, 1 slander redire, say again 
 
 1 The 2d pi. pres. indie, and impve. is -disez. 
 
APPENDIX 
 
 251 
 
 INFIN. 
 Dormir 
 
 (sleep) 
 dormirai(s) 
 
 PRES. PART. 
 dormant 
 dormais 
 dorme 
 
 PAST PART. PRES. INDIC. 
 dormi dors 
 
 PAST DEF. 
 
 dormis 
 
 dormisse 
 
 PRES. IND.: dors, dors, dort, dormons, dormez, dorment. 
 
 redormir, sleep again 
 
 endormir, put to sleep 
 s'endormir, fall asleep 
 
 rendormir, put to sleep again 
 se rendormir, go to sleep again 
 
 Ecrire ecrivant ecrit 6cris 
 
 (write) ecrivais 
 
 ecrirai(s) ecrive 
 
 PRES. IND.: cris, ecris, ecrit, e*crivons, ecrivez, ecrivent. 
 
 e*crivis 
 ecrivisse 
 
 circonscrire, circumscrib 
 decrire, describe 
 inscrire, inscribe 
 
 prescrire, prescribe 
 proscrire, proscribe 
 recrire, rewrite 
 
 souscrire, subscribe 
 transcrire, transcribe 
 
 Envoyer envoyant envoye envoie envoyai 
 
 (send) envoyais envoyasse 
 
 enverrai(s) envoie 
 
 PRES. IND.: envoie, envoies, envoie, envoyons, envoyez, envoient. 
 
 PRES. SUBJ. : envoie, envoies, envoie, envoyions, envoyiez, envoient. 
 
 renvoyer, send away 
 
 Faire faisant fait fais 
 
 (do, make) faisais 
 
 ferai(s) fasse 
 
 PRES. IND.: fais, fais, fait, faisons, faites, font. 
 
 PRES. SUBJ.: fasse, fasses, fasse, fassions, fassiez, fassent. 
 
 fis 
 fisse 
 
 contrefaire, imitate 
 defaire, undo 
 mefaire, harm 
 
 parfaire, complete 
 redefaire, undo again 
 refaire, do again 
 
 satisfaire, satisfy 
 surfaire, overcharge 
 
 Falloir (impers.) 
 
 (must) 
 
 il faudra(it) 
 
 il f allait 
 il faille 
 
 fallu 
 
 il f aut 
 
 il f allut 
 il f allftt 
 
 Fleurir 
 
 (flourish) 
 
 florissant 1 
 florissais 1 
 
 1 Has these irreg. forms when used of persons or collections of persons ; impf . fleu- 
 rissais, etc., is used of things; literally = blossom, bloom, it is regular throughout. 
 
252 APPENDIX 
 
 INFIN. PRES. PART. PAST PART. PRES. INDIC. PAST DBF. 
 
 Fuir fuyant fui fuis fuis 
 
 ( fly, flee) f uyais fuisse 
 
 fuirai(s) fuie 
 
 PRES. IND. : fuis, fuis, fuit, fuyons, fuyez, fuient. 
 PRES. SUBJ.: fuie, fuies, fuie, fuyions, fuyiez, fuient. 
 
 s'enfuir, escape 
 
 Gesir gisant il git 
 
 (lie buried) gisais 
 
 PRES. IND.: , , git, gisons, gisez, gisent. 
 
 Hair haissant hai hais hai's 
 
 (hate) haissais hai'sse 
 
 hairai(s) haisse 
 
 PRES. IND.: hais, hais, hait, haissons, haissez, haissent. 
 
 PAST DEF.: hai's, hais, hait, haimes, haites, hairent. 
 
 IMPF. SUBJ.: haisse, haisses, hait, haissions, haissiez, haissent. 
 
 Joindre joignant joint joins joignis 
 
 (join) joignais joignisse 
 
 joindrai(s) joigne 
 
 PRES. IND.: joins, joins, joint, joignons, joignez, joignent. 
 
 adjoindre, adjoin disjoindre, disjoin oindre, anoint 
 
 conjoindre, conjoin enjoindre, enjoin poindre, dawn 
 
 de joindre, disjoin re joindre, rejoin 
 
 Lire lisant lu lis lus 
 
 (read) lisais lusse 
 
 lkai(s) lise 
 
 PRES. IND.: lis, lis, lit, lisons, lisez, lisent. 
 
 elire, elect reelire, reeled relire, read again 
 
 Maudire maudissant maudit maudis maudis 
 
 (curse) maudissais maudisse 
 
 maudirai(s) maudisse 
 
 PRES. IND.: maudis, maudis, maudit, maudissons, maudissez, mau- 
 dissent. 
 
APPENDIX 253 
 
 INFIN. PRES. PART. PAST PART. PRES. INDIC. PAST DEF. 
 
 Mettre mettant mis mets mis 
 
 (put) mettais misse 
 
 mettrai(s) mette 
 
 PRES. IND.: mets, mets, met, mettons, mettez, mettent. 
 
 se mettre, begin emettre, emit remettre, put back, hand to 
 
 admettre, admit s'entremettre, interpose repromettre, promise again 
 
 commettre, commit omettre, omit soumettre, submit 
 
 compromettre, compromise permettre, permit transmettre, transmit 
 
 demettre, dismiss promettre, promise 
 
 Moudre moulant moulu mouds moulus 
 
 (grind) moulais moulusse 
 
 moudrai(s) moule 
 
 PRES. IND.: mouds, mouds, moud, moulons, moulez, moulent. 
 
 emoudre, whet remoudre, grind again remoudre, sharpen 
 
 Mourir mourant mort meurs mourus 
 
 (die) mourais mourusse 
 
 mourrai(s) meure 
 
 PRES. IND.: meurs, meurs, meurt, mourons, mourez, meurent. 
 PRES. SUBJ.: meure, meures, meure, mourions, mouriez, meurent. 
 
 se mourir, be dying (usually pres. indie, and impf. only) 
 
 Mouvoir mouvant mu meus mus 
 
 (move) mouvais (/. mue, musse 
 
 mouvrai(s) meuve pi. mu(e)s) 
 
 PRES. IND.: meus, meus, meut, mouvons, mouvez, meuvent. 
 PRES. SUBJ.: meuve, meuves, meuve, mouvions, mouviez, meuvent. 
 
 emouvoir, arouse (past part, emu) promouvoir, promote (past part, promu) 
 
 se mouvoir, move (intr.) 
 
 Naitre naissant ne nais naquis 
 
 (be born) naissais naquisse 
 
 naitrai(s) naisse 
 
 PRES. IND.: nais, nais, natt, naissons, naissez, naissent. 
 
 renaitre, revive 
 
254 
 
 APPENDIX 
 
 INFIX. 
 
 PRES. PART. 
 
 PAST PART. 
 
 PRES. INDIC. 
 
 PAST DBF. 
 
 Offrir 
 
 offrant 
 
 offert 
 
 offre 
 
 offris 
 
 (offer} 
 ofifrirai (s) 
 
 offrais 
 offre 
 
 
 
 offrisse 
 
 PRES. IND. : offre, offres, offre, offrons, offrez, offrent. 
 
 souffrir, suffer 
 
 Ouvrir ouvrant ouvert ouvre ouvris 
 
 (open) ouvrais ouvrisse 
 
 ouvrirai(s) ouvre 
 
 PRES. IND.: ouvre, ouvres, ouvre, ouvrons, ouvrez, ouvrent. 
 
 couvnr, cover 
 decouvrir, discover 
 
 entr'ouvrir, open slightly 
 recouvrir, cover again 
 
 rouvrir, open again 
 
 Partir partant parti pars partis 
 
 (set out) partais partisse 
 
 partirai(s) parte 
 
 PRES. IND.: pars, pars, part, partons, partez, partent. 
 
 departir, distribute repartir, set out again sortir, go out 
 
 se departir, desist 
 
 repartir, set out again 
 ressortir, go out again 
 
 Peindre peignant peint peins peignis 
 
 (paint) peignais peignisse 
 
 peindrai(s) peigne 
 
 PRES. IND.: peins, peins, peint, peignons, peignez, peignent. 
 
 enceindre, gird repeindre, paint again 
 
 enfreindre, infringe restreindre, restrain 
 
 eteindre, extinguish teindre, dye 
 
 etreindre, draw tight deteindre, fade 
 
 feindre, feign reteindre, dye again 
 geindre, groan 
 
 astreindre, subject 
 atteindre, attain 
 ceindre, enclose, gird, gird 
 
 on (a sword, etc.) 
 depeindre, depict 
 empreindre, imprint 
 
 Plaire plaisant plu plais 
 
 (please) plaisais 
 
 plairai(s) plaise 
 
 PRES. IND.: plais, plais, plait, plaisons, plaisez, plaisent. 
 complaire, humour deplaire, displease 
 
 plus 
 plusse 
 
 Pleuvoii(impers.) pleuvant 
 (rain) il pleuvait 
 
 il pleuvra(it) il pleuve 
 
 plu 
 
 il pleut 
 
 il plut 
 il plut 
 
APPENDIX 
 
 255 
 
 INFIN. PRES. PART. PAST PART. PRES. INDIC. PAST DEF. 
 
 Pourvoir pourvoyant pourvu pourvois pourvus 
 
 (provide) pourvoyais pourvusse 
 
 pourvoirai(s) pourvoie 
 
 PRES. IND,: pourvois, pourvois, pourvoit, pourvoyons, pourvoyez, 
 
 pourvoient. 
 PEES. SUBJ.: pourvoie, pourvoies, pourvoie, pourvoyions, pourvoyiez, 
 
 pourvoient. 
 
 depourvoir, strip, leave destitute 
 
 peuxorpuis pus 
 , pusse 
 
 Pouvoir pouvant pu 
 
 (be able) pouvais 
 
 pourrai(s) puisse 
 
 PRES. IND. : peux or puis, peux, peut, pouvons, pouvez, peuvent. 
 
 PRES. SUBJ.: puisse, puisses, puisse, puissions, puissiez, puissent. 
 
 Prendre prenant pris prends pris 
 
 (take) prenais prisse 
 
 prendrai(s) prenne 
 
 PRES. IND.: prends, prends, prend, prenons, prenez, prennent. 
 PRES. SUBJ. : prenne, prennes, prenne, prenions, preniez, prennent. 
 
 apprendre, learn 
 desapprendre, unlearn 
 comprendre, understand 
 
 entreprendre, undertake 
 s'eprendre, be taken with 
 se meprendre, be mistaken 
 
 rapprendre, learn again 
 reprendre, take back 
 surprendre, surprise 
 
 Recevoir recevant regu regois regus 
 
 (receive) recevais regusse 
 
 recevrai(s) receive 
 
 PRES. IND.: regois, regois, regoit, recevons, recevez, regoivent. 
 
 PRES. SUBJ.: regoive, regoives, regoive, recevions, receviez, regoivent. 
 
 apercevoir, perceive decevoir, deceive percevoir, perceive, levy 
 
 concevoir, conceive 
 
 Resoudre resolvant re*solu or resous r^solus 
 
 (resolve) resolvais resous resolusse 
 
 resoudrai(s) resolve 
 
 PRES. IND.: resous, resous, resout, resolvons, resolvez, resolvent. 
 
 absoudre, 1 absolve (p. part, absous) dissoudre, dissolve (p. part, dissous) 
 
 1 Lacks past def. and impf. subj. 
 
256 
 
 APPENDIX 
 
 INFIN. PRES. PART. PAST PART. PRES. INDIC. 
 
 Rire riant ri ris 
 
 (laugh) rials 
 
 rirai(s) rie 
 
 PRES. IND.: ris, ris, rit, rions, riez, rient. 
 
 PRES. SUBJ.: rie, ries, rie, riions, riiez, rient. 
 
 sourire, smile 
 
 PAST DEF. 
 ris 
 risse 
 
 Savoir sachant su sais sus 
 
 (know) savais susse 
 
 saurai(s) sache 
 
 PRES. IND.: sais, sais, sait, savons, savez, savent. 
 
 PRES. SUBJ.: sache, saches, sache, sachions, sachiez, sachent. 
 
 IMPVE.: sache, sachons, sachez. 
 
 Sentir sentant senti sens sentis 
 
 ( feel) sentais sentisse 
 
 sentirai(s) sente 
 
 PRES. IND.: sens, sens, sent, sentons, sentez, sentent. 
 
 consentir, consent ressentir, resent dementir, contradict 
 
 pressentir, forebode mentir, lie se repentir, repent 
 
 Servir servant servi sers servis 
 
 (serve) servais servisse 
 
 servirai(s) serve 
 
 PRES. IND.: sers, sers, sert, servons, servez, servent. 
 
 se servir, make use of desservir, clear the table 
 
 Suivre suivant suivi suis suivis . 
 
 (follow) suivais suivisse 
 
 suivrai(s) suive 
 
 PRES. IND.: suis, suis, suit, suivons, suivez, suivent. 
 
 s'ensuivre, it follows (impers.) poursuivre, pursue 
 
 Taire taisant tu tais 
 
 (be silent) taisais 
 
 tairai(s) taise 
 
 PRES. IND.: tais, tais, tait, taisons, taisez, taisent. 
 
 tus 
 tusse 
 
APPENDIX 
 
 257 
 
 INFIN. 
 
 PKES. PART. PAST PART. PRES. INDIC. PAST DEF. 
 
 tenu 
 
 tiens 
 
 tins 
 tinsse 
 
 Tenir tenant 
 
 (hold) tenais 
 
 tiendrai(s) tienne 
 
 PRES. IND.: tiens, tiens, tient, tenons, tenez, tiennent. 
 
 PRES. SUBJ.: tienne, tiennes, tienne, tenions, teniez, tiennent. 
 
 PAST DEF.: tins, tins, tint, tinmes, tintes, tinrent. 
 
 IMPF. SUBJ.: tinsse, tinsses, tint, tinssions, tinssiez, tinssent. 
 
 NOTE. Compare conjugation of venir. 
 
 s'abstenir, abstain detenir, detain obtenir, obtain 
 
 appartenir, belong entretenir, entertain retenir, retain 
 
 contenir, contain maintenir, maintain soutenir, sustain 
 
 Traire 
 
 (milk) 
 trairai(s) 
 PRES. IND.: 
 
 trait 
 
 trais 
 
 trayant 
 trayais 
 traie 
 trais, trais, trait, trayons, trayez, traient. 
 
 PRES. SUBJ.: traie, traies, traie, trayions, trayiez, traient. 
 
 soustraire, subtract 
 
 abstraire, abstract 
 attraire, attract 
 
 distraire, distract 
 extraire, extract 
 
 vaincs 
 
 vainquis 
 vainquisse 
 
 Vaincre vainquant vaincu 
 
 (conquer) vainquais 
 
 vaincrai(s) vainque 
 
 PRES. IND.: vaincs, vaincs, yainc, vainquons, vainquez, vainquent. 
 
 NOTE. The stem c becomes qu before any vowel except u. 
 convaincre, convince 
 
 Valoir valant valu vaux valus 
 
 (be worth) valais valusse 
 
 vaudrai(s) vaille 
 
 PRES. IND.: vaux, vaux, vaut, valons, valez, valent. 
 
 PRES. SUBJ.: vaille, vailles, vaille, valions, valiez, vaillent. 
 
 equivaloir, be equal to revaloir, pay back 
 
 prevaloir, prevail (pres. subj. prevale, etc.) 
 
 Vendre vendant vendu vends vendis 
 
 (sell) vendais vendisse 
 
 vendrai(s) ' vende 
 
 PRES. IND.: vends, vends, vend, vendons, vendez, vendent. 
 
 revendre, sell again 
 
258 APPENDIX 
 
 INFIN. PRES. PART. PAST PART. PRES. INDIC. PAST DBF. 
 Venir venant venu viens vins 
 
 (come) venais vinsse 
 
 viendrai(s) vienne 
 
 PRES. IND. : viens, viens, vient, venons, venea, viennent. 
 
 PRES. SUBJ. : vienne, viennes; vienne, venions, veniez, viennent. 
 
 PAST DBF.: vins, vins, vint, vinmes, vintes, vinrent. 
 
 IMPF. SUBJ.: vinsse, vinsses, vint, vinssions, vinssiez, vinssent. 
 
 NOTE. Compare conjugation of tenir. 
 
 advenir, happen intervenir, intervene se souvenir, recollect 
 
 convenir, agree, suit parvenir, attain subvenir, aid 
 
 contrevenir, violate prevenir, prevent survenir, occur 
 
 circonvenir, circumvent provenir, proceed (from, de) se ressouvenir, recoiled 
 
 devenir, become revenir, come back 
 
 disconvenir, be discordant redevenir, become again 
 
 Vetir vetant v^tu vets vetis 
 
 (clothe) vetais vetisse 
 
 vetirai(s) vete 
 
 PRES. IND.: vets, vets, vet, vetons, vetez, vetent. 
 
 devetir, divest revetir, invest se revetir, dress 
 
 se devetir, undress 
 
 NOTE. Instead of vetir use generally habiller. 
 
 Vivre vivant vecu vis ve*cus 
 
 (live) vivais ve"cusse 
 
 vivrai(s) vive 
 
 PRES. IND.: vis, vis, vit, vivons, vivez, vivent. 
 
 revivre, revive survivre, survive 
 
 Voir voyant vu vois vis 
 
 (see) voyais visse 
 
 verrai(s) voie 
 
 PRES. IND.: vois, vois, voit, voyons, voyez, voient. 
 
 PRES. SUBJ.: voie, voies, voie, voyions, voyiez, voient. 
 
 entrevoir, catch sight of revoir, see again prevoir, foresee (fut. pr6voirai) 
 
APPENDIX 
 
 259 
 
 INFIN. PRES. PART. PAST PART. PRES. INDIC. PAST DBF. 
 
 Vouloir voulant voulu veux voulus 
 
 (will) voulais voulusse 
 
 voudrai(s) veuille 
 
 PRES. IND. : veux, veux, veut, voulons, voulez, veulent. 
 
 PRES. SUBJ.: veuille, veuilles, veuille, voulions, vouliez, veuillent. 
 
 NOTE. The regular impve. veux, voulons, voulez is rare; veuillez, have the kindness 
 to, generally serves as 2d plur. impve. 
 
 F. KEY TO LIST OF IRREGULAR VERBS 
 
 [The references are to the pages of the Alphabetical List. For the orthographical 
 irregularities of verbs of the first conjugation, see pp. 244-246.] 
 
 A 
 
 
 C 
 
 
 coudre . . . . 
 
 249 
 
 abattre . . . 
 
 . 247 
 
 ceindre .... 
 
 254 
 
 courir . . . . 
 
 249 
 
 absoudre . . 
 
 . 255 
 
 circonscrire . . 
 
 251 
 
 couvrir .... 
 
 254 
 
 abstenir . . 
 
 . 257 
 
 circonvenir . . 
 
 258 
 
 craindre . . . 
 
 249 
 
 abstraire . . 
 
 . 257 
 
 combattre . . 
 
 247 
 
 croire . . . . 
 
 250 
 
 accourir . . 
 
 . 249 
 
 commettre . . 
 
 253 
 
 croitre . . . . 
 
 250 
 
 accueillir . . 
 
 . 250 
 
 comparaitre . . 
 
 249 
 
 cueillir . ' . . . 
 
 250 
 
 acquerir . . 
 
 .. 247 
 
 complaire . . 
 
 254 
 
 cuire 
 
 250 
 
 adjoindre . . 
 
 . 252 
 
 comprendre . . 
 
 255 
 
 
 
 admettre . . 
 
 . 253 
 
 compromettre . 
 
 253 
 
 D 
 
 
 advenir . . 
 
 . 258 
 
 concevoir . . . 
 
 255 
 
 de"battre . . . 
 
 247 
 
 aller .... 
 
 247 
 
 conclure . . . 
 
 248 
 
 decevoir . . . 
 
 255 
 
 apercevoir . 
 
 . 255 
 
 concourir . . . 
 
 249 
 
 deconstruire . 
 
 249 
 
 apparaitre . 
 
 . 249 
 
 conduire . . . 
 
 248 
 
 decoudre . . . 
 
 249 
 
 appartenir . 
 
 . 257 
 
 confire .... 
 
 248 
 
 decouvrir . . . 
 
 254 
 
 apprendre 
 
 . 255 
 
 conjoindre . . 
 
 252 
 
 decrire . . . . 
 
 251 
 
 assaillir . . 
 
 . 247 
 
 connaitre . . . 
 
 249 
 
 dedire . . . . 
 
 250 
 
 asseoir . . . 
 
 . 247 
 
 conquerir . . . 
 
 247 
 
 deduire . . . 
 
 248 
 
 astreindre . . 
 
 . 254 
 
 consentir . . . 
 
 256 
 
 defaire . . . . 
 
 251 
 
 atteindre . . 
 
 . 254 
 
 construire . . 
 
 249 
 
 dejoindre . . . 
 
 252 
 
 attraire . . 
 
 . 257 
 
 contenir . . . 
 
 257 
 
 dementir . . . 
 
 256 
 
 
 
 contraindre . . 
 
 249 
 
 demettre . . . 
 
 253 
 
 
 
 contredire . . 
 
 250 
 
 departir . . . 
 
 254 
 
 B 
 
 
 contrefaire . . 
 
 251 
 
 depeindre . . 
 
 254 
 
 battre . . v . 
 
 . 247 
 
 contrevenir . . 
 
 258 
 
 deplaire . . . 
 
 254 
 
 boire . . . 
 
 . 248 
 
 convaincre . . 
 
 257 
 
 depourvoir . . 
 
 255 
 
 bouillir . . . 
 
 . 248 
 
 convenir . . . 
 
 258 
 
 de*sapprendre . 
 
 255 
 
260 
 
 APPENDIX 
 
 desservir . . . 
 
 256 
 
 eteindre . . . 
 
 254 
 
 medire .... 
 
 250 
 
 deteindre . . . 
 
 254 
 
 4treindre . . . 
 
 254 
 
 mefaire . . . 
 
 251 
 
 detenir .... 
 
 257 
 
 exclure .... 
 
 248 
 
 mentir .... 
 
 256 
 
 detruire . . . 
 
 249 
 
 extraire . . . 
 
 257 
 
 meprendre . . 
 
 255 
 
 devenir . . . 
 
 258 
 
 
 
 mettre .... 
 
 253 
 
 devetir .... 
 
 258 
 
 F 
 
 
 moudre . . . 
 
 253 
 
 devoir .... 
 
 250 
 
 faire 
 
 251 
 
 mourir .... 
 
 253 
 
 dire . . 
 
 250 
 
 f 11 
 
 OKI 
 
 mouvoir . . . 
 
 253 
 
 disconvenir . . 
 
 258 
 
 lalloir .... 
 feindre .... 
 
 ZiOL 
 
 254 
 
 
 
 discourir . . . 
 
 249 
 
 fleurir .... 
 
 251 
 
 N 
 
 
 disjoindre . . 
 
 252 
 
 fuir . * . . . 
 
 252 
 
 
 
 disparaitre . . 
 
 249 
 
 
 
 naitre .... 
 
 253 
 
 dissoudre . . . 
 
 255 
 
 G 
 
 
 nuire .... 
 
 250 
 
 distraire . . . 
 
 257 
 
 
 
 
 
 dormir .... 
 
 251 
 
 geindre .... 
 
 254 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 
 scesir . 
 
 252 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 obtemr .... 
 
 257 
 
 E 
 
 
 
 
 offrir 
 
 254 
 
 bouillir . . . 
 
 248 
 
 H 
 
 
 oindre .... 
 
 252 
 
 
 
 hair 
 
 252 
 
 omettre. . . . 
 
 253 
 
 econduire . . . 
 
 248 
 
 
 
 
 
 ecrire .... 
 
 251 
 
 
 
 ouvrir .... 
 
 254 
 
 elire 
 
 252 
 
 I 
 
 
 
 
 6mettre . . . 
 
 253 
 
 inclure .... 
 
 248 
 
 P 
 
 
 emoudre . . . 
 
 253 
 
 induire .... 
 
 248 
 
 paitre .... 
 
 249 
 
 emouvoir . . . 
 
 253 
 
 inscrire .... 
 
 251 
 
 paraltre . . . 
 
 249 
 
 empreindre . . 
 
 254 
 
 instruire . . . 
 
 249 
 
 parcourir . . . 
 
 249 
 
 enceindre . . . 
 
 254 
 
 interdire . . . 
 
 250 
 
 parfaire . . . 
 
 251 
 
 encourir . . . 
 
 249 
 
 intervenir . . 
 
 258 
 
 partir .... 
 
 254 
 
 endormir . . . 
 
 251 
 
 introduire . . 
 
 248 
 
 parvenir . . . 
 
 258 
 
 enduire . . . 
 
 248 
 
 
 
 peindre . . . 
 
 254 
 
 enfreindre . . 
 
 254 
 
 J 
 
 
 percevoir . . . 
 
 255 
 
 enfuir .... 
 enjoindre . . . 
 
 252 
 252 
 
 joindre .... 
 
 252 
 
 permettre . . 
 plaindre . . . 
 
 253 
 249 
 
 ensuivre . . . 
 
 256 
 
 L 
 
 
 plaire .... 
 
 254 
 
 entremettre . . 
 
 253 
 
 
 
 pleuvoir . . . 
 
 254 
 
 
 
 lire 
 
 252 
 
 
 
 entreprendre . 
 entretenir . . 
 
 255 
 257 
 
 luire 
 
 250 
 
 poindre . . . 
 poursuivre . . 
 
 252 
 256 
 
 entrevoir . . . 
 
 258 
 
 
 
 pourvoir . . . 
 
 255 
 
 entr'ouvrir . . 
 
 254 
 
 M 
 
 
 pouvoir . . . 
 
 255 
 
 envoyer . . . 
 
 251 
 
 maintenir . . 
 
 257 
 
 predire .... 
 
 250 
 
 e"prendre . . . 
 
 255 
 
 maudire . . . 
 
 252 
 
 prendre . . . 
 
 255 
 
 e*quivaloir . . 
 
 257 
 
 me*connaftre . 
 
 249 
 
 prescrire . . . 
 
 251 
 
APPENDIX 
 
 261 
 
 pressentir . . 
 
 256 
 
 reluire . . . 
 
 . 250 
 
 sentir . . . 
 
 . 256 
 
 preValoir . . . 
 
 257 
 
 remettre . . 
 
 . 253 
 
 servir . . . 
 
 . 256 
 
 prevenir . . . 
 
 258 
 
 remoudre . . 
 
 . 253 
 
 sortir . . . 
 
 . 254 
 
 prevoir . . . . 
 
 258 
 
 re*moudre . . 
 
 . 253 
 
 souffrir . . . 
 
 . 254 
 
 produire . . . 
 
 248 
 
 renaitre . . 
 
 . 253 
 
 soumettre . 
 
 . 253 
 
 promettre . . 
 
 253 
 
 rendormir . 
 
 . 251 
 
 sourire . . . 
 
 . 256 
 
 promouvoir . . 
 
 253 
 
 renvoyer . . 
 
 . 251 
 
 souscrire . . 
 
 . 251 
 
 proscrire . 
 
 251 
 
 repaitre . . 
 
 . 249 
 
 soustraire 
 
 . 257 
 
 provenir . . . 
 
 258 
 
 reparaltre 
 
 . 249 
 
 soutenir . . 
 
 . 257 
 
 
 
 repartir . . 
 
 . 254 
 
 souvenir . . 
 
 . 258 
 
 R 
 
 
 repeindre . . 
 
 . 254 
 
 subvenir . . 
 
 . 258 
 
 rabattre 
 
 247 
 
 repentir . . 
 
 . 256 
 
 suffire . . . 
 
 . 248 
 
 rapprendre . . 
 rasseoir 
 
 255 
 
 247 
 
 reprendre . . 
 reproduire . 
 
 . 255 
 
 . .248 
 
 suivre . . . 
 surf aire . . 
 
 . 256 
 . 251 
 
 reboire 
 
 248 
 
 repromettre . 
 
 . 253 
 
 surprendre . 
 
 . 255 
 
 rebouillir 
 
 248 
 
 resoudre . . 
 
 . 255 
 
 survenir . . 
 
 . 258 
 
 
 
 ressentir . . 
 
 . 256 
 
 survivre . . 
 
 . 258 
 
 recevoir . . . 
 
 255 
 
 
 
 
 
 reconduire . . 
 
 248 
 
 ressortir . . 
 
 . 254 
 
 
 
 reconnaitre . . 
 reconquerir . . 
 reconstruire . . 
 
 249 
 
 247 
 249 
 
 ressouvenir . 
 restreindre . 
 reteindre . . 
 
 . 258 
 . 254 
 . 254 
 
 T 
 
 taire . . . . 
 teindre . . . 
 
 . 256 
 . 254 
 
 recoudre . . . 
 
 249 
 
 retenir . . . 
 
 . 257 
 
 tenir . . . . 
 
 . 257 
 
 recouvrir . . . 
 
 254 
 
 revaloir . . 
 
 . 257 
 
 traduire . . 
 
 . 248 
 
 recourir . . . 
 
 249 
 
 revendre . . 
 
 . 257 
 
 traire . . . 
 
 . 257 
 
 r^crire 
 
 251 
 
 revenir . . . 
 
 . 258 
 
 transcrire . . 
 
 . 251 
 
 recueillir . . . 
 
 250 
 
 revetir . . . 
 
 . 258 
 
 transmettre . 
 
 . 253 
 
 recuire . . . . 
 
 250 
 
 revivre . . . 
 
 . 258 ~ 
 
 tressaillir . . 
 
 . 247 
 
 redefaire . . . 
 
 251 
 
 revoir . . . 
 
 . 258 
 
 
 
 
 
 rire 
 
 256 
 
 
 
 redevenir . . . 
 
 258 
 
 
 
 V 
 
 
 redevoir . . . 
 
 250 
 
 rouvrir . . . 
 
 . 254 
 
 vaincre . . . 
 
 . 257 
 
 redire . . . . 
 
 250 
 
 
 
 valoir . . . 
 
 . 257 
 
 redormir . . . 
 
 251 
 
 S 
 
 
 vendre . . . 
 
 . 257 
 
 re*duire . . . . 
 
 248 
 
 saillir . . . 
 
 . 247 
 
 venir . . . 
 
 . 258 
 
 reelire 
 
 252 
 
 satisfairc 
 
 251 
 
 vctir 
 
 258 
 
 refaire . . . . 
 
 251 
 
 savoir . . . 
 
 . 256 
 
 vivre . . . 
 
 . 258 
 
 r6ioindr6 
 
 252 
 
 secourir . . 
 
 . 249 
 
 voir . . . . 
 
 258 
 
 relire . . . . 
 
 252 
 
 seduire . . . 
 
 . 248 
 
 vouloir . . . 
 
 . 259 
 
FRENCH-ENGLISH VOCABULARY 
 
 a, at, to, in; moi, mine; de- 
 main, good-bye (till to-morrow). 
 
 a, see avoir. 
 
 abeille, /., bee. 
 
 abondant, abundant, plentiful. 
 
 abord, ra., approach; d j , at first, 
 firstly. 
 
 abri, ra., shelter; a P de, shel- 
 tered from. 
 
 acajou, ra., mahogany. 
 
 accident, ra., accident. 
 
 accepter, accept. 
 
 accompagner, accompany, go with, 
 come with. 
 
 achat, ra., purchase. 
 
 acheter, buy. 
 
 acier, ra., steel; gravure sur , 
 steel engraving. 
 
 adieu, adieu, good-bye. 
 
 admirer, admire. 
 
 adresser, address; s' , apply. 
 
 affaire, /., affair, thing, business; 
 faire des s, do business. 
 
 afin, in order; de, que, in 
 order to, in order that. 
 
 age, ra., age. 
 
 age, aged, old. 
 
 agent, ra., agent, policeman. 
 
 agir, act; il s'agit de, it is about, 
 it is a question of. 
 
 agr cable, agreeable, pleasant. 
 
 agreablement, agreeably, com- 
 fortably. 
 
 agricole, agricultural. 
 
 ai, see avoir. 
 
 aide-mason, ra., mason's helper, 
 hodman. 
 
 aider, aid, help. 
 
 aigre, sharp, sour. 
 
 aiguille, /., needle. 
 
 aille, see aller. 
 
 aimable, amiable, kind, nice. 
 
 aimer, love, like, be fond of; 
 mieux, prefer; autant, like as 
 well. 
 
 ainsi, thus, so; et de suite, and 
 so forth. 
 
 air, ra., air, look; avoir P , look, 
 seem; en pi em , in the open 
 air. 
 
 aise, easy; at ease, well-to-do. 
 
 algebre, /., algebra. 
 
 aller, go, go on, fit; be; comment 
 allez-vous? how are you? s'en 
 , go away; y de, be at 
 stake. 
 
 allumer, light, kindle. 
 
 alors, then, so. 
 
 amener, take, bring. 
 
 ameficain, American. 
 
 Amerique, /., America; du 
 Nord, North America. 
 
 ami, -e, ra., /., friend. 
 
 amusement, ra., amusement. 
 
 amuser, amuse, interest, enter- 
 tain; s* , amuse (enjoy) one- 
 self, have a good time. 
 
 an, ra., year. 
 
 ancetre, ra. or/., ancestor. 
 
 ancien, ancient, old, former. 
 
 anglais, English. 
 
 Angleterre, /., England. 
 
 animal, ra., animal. 
 
 anime, animated, lively. 
 
 annee, /., year. 
 
 aout [u], ra., August. 
 
 263 
 
264 
 
 FRENCH-ENGLISH VOCABULARY 
 
 apercevoir, perceive; s* de (que), 
 perceive, notice. 
 
 appartement, m., suite of rooms, 
 flat. 
 
 appartenir, belong. 
 
 appeler, call; s* , be called, be 
 named. 
 
 appetit, m., appetite; P vient 
 en mangeant, desire comes with 
 success, etc. 
 
 apporter, carry to, bring. 
 
 apprendre, learn. 
 
 approcher, bring near; come near; 
 s* de, draw near, approach. 
 
 approuver, approve. 
 
 apres, after, later; que, after. 
 
 apres-demain, the day after to- 
 morrow. 
 
 apres-midi, m. or/., afternoon. 
 
 arbre, m., tree. 
 
 architecte [ar$itekt], m. y archi- 
 tect. 
 
 ardent, burning. 
 
 ardeur, /., ardour, warmth. 
 
 argent, m., silver; money. 
 
 argenterie, /., silverware. 
 
 armoire, /., cupboard. 
 
 arracher, tear (out), tear off. 
 
 arranger, arrange, place. 
 
 arreter, arrest, stop; s' , stop. 
 
 arrivee, /., arrival. 
 
 arriver, arrive, come; happen. 
 
 article, m., article. 
 
 artiste, m. or/., artist. 
 
 as, see avoir. 
 
 asperges, /. pi., asparagus. 
 
 asseoir, seat; s j , sit down. 
 
 assez, enough; rather, quite. 
 
 assiette, /., plate. 
 
 assis, p. part, of asseoir, seated, 
 sitting. 
 
 assister, be present (at = a). 
 
 Atlantique, m. or/., Atlantic. 
 
 attacher, tie, tie up. 
 
 attendre, wait, wait for; faire , 
 keep waiting. 
 
 attention, /., attention ; appeler P 
 sur, call attention to. 
 
 attirer, attract, call. 
 
 attraper, catch. 
 
 augmenter, increase. 
 
 aujourd'hui, to-day. 
 
 auparavant, before, formerly. 
 
 aupres de, with, as regards. 
 
 aurai, see avoir. 
 
 aussi, also, too; ... que, as ... 
 as. 
 
 aussitot que, as soon as. 
 
 autant, as much, as many. 
 
 auteur, m., author. 
 
 automne [oton], m. or/., autumn. 
 
 automobile [otomobil], m. or /., 
 motor-car, automobile. 
 
 autre, other; Pun et P , both. 
 
 autrefois, formerly, once. 
 
 autrui, others. 
 
 avance, /., advance; d' , before- 
 hand, too soon. 
 
 avancer, advance, go on; be too 
 fast. 
 
 avant, before; de, que, before. 
 
 avant-hier [ava(t)je:r], the day be- 
 fore yesterday. 
 
 avec [avek], with. 
 
 avenir, m., future. 
 
 avidement, eagerly, greedily. 
 
 avoine, /., oats. 
 
 avoir, have, get; y , be; il y a, 
 there is, there are; qu'avez-vous? 
 what is the matter with you? 
 
 avouer, confess. 
 
 avril [avri(l)], m., April. 
 
 ayons, ayez, see avoir. 
 
 B 
 
 bagages, m. pi, luggage, baggage. 
 baie, /., bay. \ 
 
 baigner, bathe; se , bathe. 
 bain, m., bath. 
 bal, m., ball, dance, 
 bameaire, bathing. 
 
FRENCH-ENGLISH VOCABULARY 
 
 265 
 
 baratte, /., churn. 
 
 bas, low; age, early age. 
 
 basse-cour, /., farmyard, poultry- 
 yard. 
 
 Bastille, /., Bastille (taken July 
 14, 1789). 
 
 bateau, m., boat. 
 
 batiment, m., building. 
 
 batir, build. 
 
 baton, m., stick. 
 
 battant, m., leaf (of door)] porte a 
 deux s, folding door. 
 
 battre, beat, thresh, churn; des 
 mains, clap (their) hands. 
 
 beau, bel, fine, beautiful, hand- 
 some; il fait , it is fine 
 (weather) . 
 
 beaucoup, much, very much, a 
 great deal; many, very many. 
 
 beau-frere, m., brother-in-law. 
 
 beaute, /., beauty, fine sight, beau- 
 
 tiful thing. 
 
 Beauvais, m., Beauvais, a town 
 some 50 miles n. w. of Paris, 
 where there is a government 
 tapestry manufactory. 
 
 benefices, m. pi., profit. 
 
 besoin, m., need; avoir , have 
 need, need. 
 
 bete, /., beast, animal. 
 
 beurre, m., butter. 
 
 Bible, /., Bible. 
 
 bibliotheque, /., library, bookcase. 
 
 bicyclette, /., bicycle. 
 
 bicycliste, m. or/., bicyclist. 
 
 bien [bje], well, very well; very; 
 much, many; really, indeed; 
 comfortable; que, although; 
 as n. m., good. 
 
 bientot [bjeto], soon. 
 
 bijou, m., jewel. 
 
 bille, /., marble (plaything). 
 
 billet, m., ticket. 
 
 biscuit, m., biscuit. 
 
 blanc, white. 
 
 blanchir, whiten; wash (linen). 
 
 ble, m. s. and pi., wheat. 
 
 bleu, blue. 
 
 boeuf [boef], m., ox; beef; pi. bceufs 
 
 boire, drink. 
 
 bois [bwa], m., wood. 
 
 boiserie, /., wainscoting. 
 
 boite, /., box. 
 
 boiter, limp. 
 
 bon, good, gentle; kind (to =pour) ; 
 right, suitable; sentir , smell 
 sweet. , 
 
 bonbons, m. pi., sweets, candy. 
 
 bonheur, m., good fortune, hap- 
 piness. 
 
 bonjour, m., good day, good morn- 
 ing. 
 
 bonne, /., servant, maid. 
 
 bonsoir, good evening. 
 
 bonte, /., kindness. 
 
 bord, m., bank, shore, edge, side. 
 
 botte, /., bunch. 
 
 boue, /., mud. 
 
 bougie, /., wax candle. 
 
 boulanger, m., baker. 
 
 bouquet, m., bouquet. 
 
 bouquetiere, /., flower girl. 
 
 bout, m., end; au de, at the end 
 of, after (of time) . 
 
 boutique, /., shop (small). 
 
 bouton, m., button, stud. 
 
 boutonniere, /., buttonhole. 
 
 branche, /., branch. 
 
 branle, m., swinging, moving, 
 movement, going. 
 
 bras, m., arm. 
 
 brave, brave; good, worthy. 
 
 brique, /., brick. 
 
 brosse,/., brush; a dents, tooth- 
 brush. 
 
 brosser, brush. 
 
 brouter, browse, crop, eat. 
 
 bruit, m., noise. 
 
 bruler, burn. 
 
 bucheron, m., woodcutter. 
 
 buffet, m., sideboard. 
 
266 
 
 FRENCH-ENGLISH VOCABULARY 
 
 bulletin, m., list; de vote, bal- 
 lot (paper). 
 bureau, m., office. 
 
 ca [sa], see cela. 
 
 cabine, /., cabin (on ship). 
 
 cacher, hide. 
 
 cadeau, m., present, gift. 
 
 cafe, m., coffee, (first) breakfast; 
 'cafe' ; au lait, coffee with milk. 
 restaurant, restaurant. 
 
 cahier, m., exercise book, copy- 
 book. 
 
 calculer, calculate. 
 
 cale, /., hold (of ship). 
 
 camarade, m. or /., comrade, com- 
 panion. 
 
 campagne, /., country. 
 
 Canada, m., Canada. 
 
 canadien [kanadje], Canadian. 
 
 canard, m., duck. 
 
 candidat, m., candidate. 
 
 canne, /., cane, walking-stick. 
 
 capitaine, m., captain. 
 
 capitale, /., capital. 
 
 car, con/., for. 
 
 carotte, /., carrot. 
 
 carre, square. 
 
 carte, /., card, map. 
 
 carton, m., cardboard, cardboard 
 box, box. 
 
 cas, m., case. 
 
 cascade, /., cascade, waterfall. 
 
 caser, put in place, settle. 
 
 casino, m., casino. 
 
 casser, break. 
 
 castor, m., beaver. 
 
 cause, /., cause; a de, on ac- 
 count of. 
 
 causer, chat. 
 
 cave, /., cellar. 
 
 caviar, m., caviar(e).. 
 
 ce, it, this, that, he, she, they, 
 these, those. 
 
 ce, cet, cette, ces, this, that, these, 
 those; ... -ci, ... -la, this, 
 that. 
 ceci, this. 
 
 cela, that, this; avec ? what 
 next? comment ca va-t-il? how 
 are you? ' how goes it? ' 
 celebre, celebrated, famous. 
 
 celui, celle, ceux, celles, this (one), 
 
 that (one), these, those; ci 
 
 . . . la, this one . . . that 
 
 one, the latter . . . the former. 
 
 cent, (a) hundred. 
 
 centieme, m., one one^hundredth. 
 
 centime, m., centime ( T ^-g- of a 
 franc, about j of a cent or half- 
 penny). 
 
 centimetre, m., centimetre ( T J^ 
 of a metre, about f of an inch) . 
 
 cependant, however, still, yet. 
 
 cerise, /., cherry. 
 
 certain, certain. 
 
 chaise, /., chair. 
 
 chaleur, /., heat. 
 
 chambre, /., room; a coucher, 
 bedroom. 
 
 chameau, m., camel. 
 
 champ, m., field. 
 
 chandelle, /., candle. 
 
 changer, change; d'air, change 
 air, take a change of air. 
 
 chant, m., singing, song. 
 
 chanter, sing. 
 
 chant euse, /., singer. 
 
 chapeau, m., hat. 
 
 chapitre, m., chapter. 
 
 chaque, each, every. 
 
 charbon, m., coal. 
 
 charge, loaded, laden. 
 
 charmant, charming. 
 
 charme, charmed, delighted, 
 
 charrue, /., plough. 
 
 chasser, chase, hunt. 
 
 chat, m., cat. 
 
 chateau, m., castle, mansion. 
 
 chaud, adj., warm; n. m., warmth; 
 
FRENCH-ENGLISH VOCABULARY 
 
 267 
 
 avoir , be warm; fake , be 
 warm (of weather). 
 
 chauffage, m., heating. 
 
 chauffer, warm, heat ; se , warm 
 oneself. 
 
 chernin, m., road; de fer, rail- 
 way. 
 
 chene, ra., oak. 
 
 cher, adj., adv., dear; le moins , 
 the cheapest. 
 
 Cherbourg [Jerbuir], m., Cher- 
 bourg. 
 
 chercher, look for, seek, search; 
 venir , come for; aller , go 
 for, go and get, go to meet. 
 
 chere, /., living, cheer. 
 
 cheval, m., horse; chevaux de 
 bois, merry-go-round; a , on 
 horseback. 
 
 cheveu, m., (a) hair; pi., hair. 
 
 chez, at the house (shop, etc.) of; 
 lui, at his house, with him. 
 
 chien [$je], m., dog. 
 
 choisir, choose, select. 
 
 chose, /., thing. 
 
 chou, m., cabbage. 
 
 chute, /., fall. 
 
 cinq [sek], five. 
 
 cinquante, fifty. 
 'cinquieme, m., fifth. 
 
 ciseaux, m. pi., scissors. 
 
 citadin, m., townsman. 
 
 citoyen [sitwaje], m., citizen. 
 
 civilisation, /., civilization. 
 
 clair, clear. 
 
 Claire, /., Claire, Clara. 
 
 classe, /., class, classroom. 
 
 clef [kle], /., key. 
 
 Clemence, /., Clementina. 
 
 client [klia], m., client, customer, 
 patient. 
 
 clientele, /., customers; practice. 
 
 climat, m., climate. 
 
 clou, m., nail. 
 
 cocher, m., coachman, driver. 
 
 cocon, m:, cocoon. 
 
 coeur, m., heart. 
 
 coffret, m., casket. 
 
 coiffer, dress the head (hair). 
 
 coiffeur, m., hairdresser, barber. 
 
 col, m., collar; pass (in mountains). 
 
 college, m., college, school. 
 
 collier, m., necklace. 
 
 collision, /., collision. 
 
 Colomb [kolo], m., Columbus. 
 
 colonel, m., colonel. 
 
 combien [kobje], how much, how 
 
 many. 
 
 commander, order, 
 comrne, like, as. 
 commencer, commence, begin; 
 
 par, begin by, firstly, 
 comment, how. 
 
 commode, convenient, comforta- 
 ble, 
 commode, /., bureau, chest of 
 
 drawers. 
 
 commune, /., municipality. 
 comparaison, /., comparison, 
 compartiment, m., compartment, 
 complet, m., suit (of clothes). 
 completement, completely, 
 compliment, m., compliment, 
 composition, /., composition, 
 comprendre, understand. 
 compter [k5te], count; expect, 
 
 hope. 
 
 comtesse, /., countess. 
 concert, m., concert, 
 concours, m., competition; 
 
 agricole, agricultural show, 
 conduire, conduct; se , conduct 
 
 oneself, behave, 
 conduite, /., conduct, 
 confort, m., comfort, 
 confortable, comfortable, 
 conge, m., leave, holiday, 
 connaissance, /., acquaintance, 
 connaitre, know, 
 conquete, /., conquest, 
 conseiller, m., councillor, 
 conseiller, counsel, advise. 
 
268 
 
 FRENCH-ENGLISH VOCABULARY 
 
 consequent, par , consequently. 
 
 considerable, considerable. 
 
 consommation, /., consumption. 
 
 constamment [kostama], constant- 
 ly, often. 
 
 construction, /., construction, 
 building. 
 
 construire, construct, build. 
 
 contenir, contain. 
 
 content, satisfied, pleased, glad. 
 
 contenu, p. part, of contenir. 
 
 continuer, continue. 
 
 cordonnier, ra., shoemaker. 
 
 corps, m., body. 
 
 corridor, m., corridor, hall, pas- 
 
 corriger, correct. 
 
 corsage, m., waist, bodice. 
 
 cote, m., side; a de, beside. 
 
 coucher, put to bed; sleep; se , 
 lie down, go to bed, retire. 
 
 coudre, sew. 
 
 couler, flow, run. 
 
 coup, m., blow; d'oeil, glance, 
 view, sight. 
 
 coupe, /., cutting, cut. 
 
 couper, cut, cut down. 
 
 cour, /., yard, court (yard). 
 
 courir, run. 
 
 counier, m., courier; mail. 
 
 cours, m., course (of lectures), lec- 
 ture; fake son , (deliver) his 
 lecture; d'eau, stream. 
 
 court, short. 
 
 cousin, -e, m., /., cousin. 
 
 coussin, m., cushion. 
 
 cousu, see coudre. 
 
 couteau, m., knife. 
 
 couter, cost. 
 
 couture, /., sewing. 
 
 couturier e, /., dressmaker. 
 
 couvert, m., cover (dishes, etc., for 
 one person)', tablecloth; mettre 
 le , lay (set) the table. 
 
 couvrir, cover. 
 
 craie, /., chalk. 
 
 craindre, fear. 
 
 cravate, /., necktie. 
 
 crayon, m., pencil. 
 
 crier [krie], cry (out), shout, yelL 
 
 croire, believe, think. 
 
 cruel, cruel. 
 
 cueillir, gather, pluck, pick. 
 
 cuiller [km'jeir], /., spoon. 
 
 cuire, cook, bake; faire , cook, 
 
 bake. 
 
 cuisine, /., kitchen, 
 cuisiniere, /., cook, 
 cuisson, /., cooking, baking. 
 cuivre, m., copper; gravure sur , 
 
 copperplate (engraving) . 
 cultivateur, m., farmer, 
 cure, m., parish priest, 'cureV 
 
 dame, /., lady. 
 
 dans, in, into. 
 
 danser, dance. 
 
 date, /., date. 
 
 davantage, more. 
 
 de, of, from. 
 
 de, m., thimble. 
 
 debarquer, disembark, land. 
 
 debarrasser, rid of. 
 
 debout, upright, standing. 
 
 decembre, m., December. 
 
 decoration, /., decoration. 
 
 decorer, decorate. 
 
 decouvrir, discover. 
 
 decrire, describe. 
 
 defendre, defend, forbid; il est 
 
 defendu, it is forbidden, it is 
 
 against the law. 
 defricher, clear (land). 
 degeler, thaw. 
 dehors [dao:r], outside, 
 deja, already, yet. 
 dejeuner, m., breakfast, lunch, 
 dejeuner, breakfast, lunch, take 
 
 lunch, 
 demain, to-morrow. 
 
FRENCH-ENGLISH VOCABULARY 
 
 269 
 
 demander, ask, ask for; se , ask 
 oneself, wonder. 
 
 demeurer, live, dwell. 
 
 demi, half. 
 
 demi-kilo, m. } pound, half -kilo- 
 gram. 
 
 dent, /., tooth. 
 
 depasser, exceed. 
 
 depecher, dispatch; se , hasten, 
 make haste. 
 
 dependre, depend. 
 
 depenser, spend. 
 
 deposer, deposit; cast. 
 
 depuis, since; que, since. 
 
 derailler, go off the track. 
 
 deranger, disturb; se , disturb 
 oneself. 
 
 deregle, irregular. 
 
 dernier, last. 
 
 derriere, behind. 
 
 descendre [desaidr], descend, go 
 down; get down, alight, get out; 
 take down, put down. 
 
 desirer, desire, wish; laisser a , 
 not be satisfactory. 
 
 desole, sorry. 
 
 dessert, m., dessert. 
 
 dessous [dasu], underneath. 
 
 detacher, detach, unfasten; se , 
 detach oneself, come loose. 
 
 deux, two; tous les , both. 
 
 deuxieine, second. 
 
 deuxiemement, secondly. 
 
 devant, before, in front of. 
 
 devanture, /., front (shop) win- 
 dow. 
 
 devenir, become. 
 
 devoir, owe; be to; ought, be one's 
 duty. 
 
 devoir, m., duty; exercise (school). 
 
 dictionnaire, m., dictionary. 
 
 different, different. 
 
 difficile, difficult. 
 
 difficulte, /., difficulty. 
 
 diligent, diligent, industrious. 
 
 dimanche, m., Sunday. 
 
 diner, m., dinner. 
 
 diner, dine. 
 
 dire, say, tell; se , say to oneself 
 
 (one another); be said; vouloir 
 
 , mean. 
 
 disposer, arrange; se , get ready, 
 dix [dis], ten. 
 docteur, m., doctor; femme , 
 
 woman doctor, lady physician. 
 dois, see devoir, 
 dollar, m., dollar, 
 domestique, m. or /., servant, 
 dommage, m., pity; c'est que, 
 
 it's a pity that. 
 done, then. 
 donner, give, give away; yield; se 
 
 la main, shake hands. 
 dont, of which, of whom, whose, 
 
 with which, etc. 
 dormir, sleep. 
 dos, m., back, 
 doubler, line (clothing). 
 douleur, /., pain, 
 douter, doubt. 
 
 doux, sweet; soft, gentle, mild, 
 douzaine, /., dozen, 
 droit [drwa], right; a e, to the 
 
 right. 
 
 du, see devoir, 
 dur, adj. or adv., hard, 
 durer, last. 
 
 E 
 
 eau, /., water. 
 
 eau-forte, /., aquafortis, etching; 
 gravure a P , etching. 
 
 ebeniste, m., cabinet-maker. 
 
 echafaudage, m., scaffolding. 
 
 echapper (a), escape. 
 
 echelle, /., ladder. 
 
 eclairage, m., lighting. 
 
 eclairer, light, illuminate, en- 
 lighten. 
 
 ecole, /., school. 
 
 e" cotter, -ere m., /., schoolboy, 
 schoolgirl. 
 
270 
 
 FRENCH-ENGLISH VOCABULARY 
 
 economiser, save. 
 
 ecouter, listen (to). 
 
 ecraser, crush; se faire , get 
 
 run over. 
 
 eerier (s') [ekrie], exclaim, 
 ecrire, write, 
 ecureuil, m., squirrel, 
 ecurie, /., stable (for horses). 
 effet, m.j effect; en , in fact, in- 
 deed, 
 egal, equal; cela m'est , that's 
 
 (all) the same to me, I don't 
 
 care. 
 
 egaler, equal, 
 eglise, /., church. 
 eh [e], bien! well! well then! 
 electeur, m., elector, 
 election, /., election, 
 electricite, /., electricity, 
 electrique, electric, 
 elephant, m., elephant, 
 eleve, m. or/., pupil, 
 eleve, high. 
 elever, raise, bring up; s* , rise, 
 
 stand; mal eleve, rude, impolite, 
 
 ill-mannered, 
 elire, elect. 
 elle, she, it, her. 
 elles, they, 
 embarquer, put on board; s' , 
 
 go (get) on board, take ship, 
 embrasser, embrace, kiss. 
 empecher, hinder, prevent, 
 emplette, /., purchase; faire des 
 s, buy things, go shopping. 
 employe, m., employee, clerk, 
 employer, employ, use. 
 emporter, carry off, take away; 
 
 P sur, win the day over, 
 emprunter, borrow. 
 en, of it, of them, some; from it, 
 
 from them. 
 en, in, at; meme temps, at the 
 
 same time; de . . . , from . . . 
 
 to. 
 enchante, delighted. 
 
 enclume, /., anvil. 
 
 encore, yet, still, again, more. 
 
 encre, /., ink. 
 
 endormir, put to sleep; s' , go to 
 sleep. 
 
 endroit, m., place. 
 
 enfant, m. or /., child, boy, girl. 
 
 enfin, at last, finally; in short. 
 
 ennui [anui], m., weariness, lone- 
 liness, tedium, sorrow. 
 
 ennuyer [anqije], weary, annoy; 
 s* , grow weary, feel lonely, be 
 bored, be sad. 
 
 enrhumer (s'), catch (a) cold. 
 
 enseigner, teach. 
 
 ensemble, together. 
 
 ensuite, then, next, afterwards. 
 
 entendre, hear; parler de, hear 
 of; dire, hear said; chan- 
 ter, hear sing (or sung). 
 
 entourer, surround. 
 
 entree, /., entrance, admission; 
 ' entree.' 
 
 entrer, go in, come in, enter; faire 
 , show in. 
 
 environ, around, about; n. pi., 
 surrounding parts, neighbour- 
 hood. 
 
 envoyer, send; chercher, send 
 for. 
 
 epais, thick. 
 
 epi, m., ear (of grain), head. 
 
 epicier, m., grocer. 
 
 equestre [ekwestr or ekestr], eques- 
 trian. 
 
 es, see etre. 
 
 escalier, m., stairway. 
 
 escorter, escort. 
 
 espece, /., kind, sort, species. 
 
 esperer, hope. 
 
 essayer, try, try on. 
 
 et, and. 
 
 etable, /., stable (for cattle). 
 
 etablir, establish. 
 
 etage, m., story, floor . 
 
 etais, see etre. 
 
FRENCH-ENGLISH VOCABULARY 
 
 271 
 
 etat, ra., state, condition. 
 
 Etats-Unis [etaz yni], ra. pi., 
 United States. 
 
 etc, ra., summer. 
 
 ete, see etre. 
 
 eternuer, sneeze. 
 
 etes, see etre. 
 
 etoffe, /., cloth, material. 
 
 etrange, strange. 
 
 etre, be; en de, the stage one 
 is at; y , be in, be at home. 
 
 etroit, narrow. 
 
 etudier, study. 
 
 eu, eus, eusse, see avoir. 
 
 Europe, /., Europe. 
 
 eux, them, they. 
 
 Evangile, ra., Gospel. 
 
 eviter, avoid. 
 
 exact [egzakt], exact; a Pheure 
 e, on time. 
 
 exagerer, exaggerate. 
 
 examen [egzame], ra., examination. 
 
 excellent, excellent. 
 
 excursion, /., excursion. 
 
 excuser, excuse; s* , excuse one- 
 self, offer excuses. 
 
 executer, execute. 
 
 exemple, ra., example. 
 
 existence, /., existence. 
 
 exister, exist, live. 
 
 expliquer, explain. 
 
 exploiter, work. 
 
 exposition, /., exhibition. 
 
 exquis, exquisite, delicious. 
 
 fache, sorry, angry, annoyed, 
 facile, easy. 
 facilement, easily, 
 facon, /., way, manner, 
 facteur, ra., postman; porter, 
 faible, weak, 
 faillir, fail; be near (ly). 
 faim, /., hunger; avoir , be hun- 
 gry. 
 
 faine, /., beechnut. 
 
 faire, do, make, take, cause; se 
 , be made, happen; se , 
 cause to be made for oneself; 
 il fait beau, it is fine; cela ne 
 fait rien, that makes no differ- 
 ence. 
 
 fait, p. part, of faire-; en etre de, 
 be all over with. 
 
 falloir, be necessary, must, have 
 to; il faut, it is necessary, we 
 (you, etc.) must; il ne faut pas, 
 we (you, etc.) must not; s'en 
 , be near. 
 
 famille, /., family. 
 
 farine, /., flour. 
 
 fasse, see faire. 
 
 fatigue, tired, weary. 
 
 fatiguer, fatigue, tire. 
 
 faucille, /., sickle. 
 
 faut, see falloir. 
 
 faute, /., fault, mistake. 
 
 fauteuil, ra., arm-chair. 
 
 faux col, ra., collar (detachable). 
 
 femme [fam], /., woman, wife; 
 de chambre, housemaid. 
 
 fenetre, /., window. 
 
 fer, ra., iron. 
 
 ferai, see faire. 
 
 ferme, /., farmhouse, farm. 
 
 fermer, close, shut. 
 
 fete, /., holiday, festivity. 
 
 feu, m., fire. 
 
 feuillage, m., foliage, leaves. 
 
 feuille, /., leaf. 
 
 fevrier, m., February. 
 
 figure, /., figure; face. 
 
 figurer (se), imagine. 
 
 fil [fil], m., thread. 
 
 fills [fiij], /., daughter, girl; jeune 
 , young girl, young lady. 
 
 fils [fis], m., son. 
 
 fin, /., end. 
 
 finir, finish, end; par, finish by, 
 lastly. 
 
 fis, fisse, see faire. 
 
272 
 
 FRENCH-ENGLISH VOCABULARY 
 
 fleur, /., flower, blossom, bloom, 
 fleurir, flower, bloom, blossom. 
 fleuve, ra., river (falling into the 
 
 sea). 
 
 flocon, m., flake, 
 fluide, m., fluid, 
 foin, m., hay. 
 fois, /., time; une , once; toutes 
 
 les que, whenever, 
 fond, m., bottom, back part, 
 fonder, found, establish, 
 font, see faire. 
 fonte, /., cast iron, 
 foret, /., forest. 
 forge, wrought, 
 forgeron, m., blacksmith, 
 former, form. 
 
 fort, adj., adv., strong; hard, sharp. 
 fosse [fois], /., ditch; grave; pit; 
 
 aux ours, bear pit. 
 four, m., oven, 
 fourchette, /., fork, 
 fournir, furnish, supply; se , 
 
 get one's supplies, buy (provi- 
 sions). 
 
 frais, fresh, cool; unsoiled. 
 f raise, /., strawberry, 
 franc, m., franc (about 20 cents or 
 
 ten pence) . 
 francais, French. 
 France, /., France, 
 frapper, knock, strike. 
 frere, m., brother. 
 froid [frwa], cold; faire , be cold 
 
 (of temperature)] avoir , be 
 
 (feel) cold, 
 fromage, m., cheese, 
 fruit, m., fruit, 
 fumer, smoke. 
 fus, see etre. 
 
 gages, m. pi., wages, 
 gagner, earn, gain. 
 gai [ge], gay, merry, cheerful, 
 gant, m., glove. 
 
 garcon, m., boy, waiter, journey- 
 man. 
 
 garde, /., care; prendre , take 
 care. 
 
 garder, keep. 
 
 gardien [gardje], m., keeper, care- 
 taker. 
 
 gare, /., station (railway). 
 
 garnir, trim, decorate, adorn; fill, 
 cover. 
 
 garniture, /., trimming. 
 
 gateau, m., cake. 
 
 gauche, left. 
 
 gaz [gaiz], m., gas. 
 
 geler, freeze. 
 
 gener, embarrass; restrain; se , 
 restrain oneself. 
 
 gene"ralement, generally. 
 
 Gene vie ve, /., Gene vie ve. 
 
 gens, m. or /., people; jeunes , 
 young men. 
 
 gentil feati], nice. 
 
 geographic, /., geography. 
 
 George(s), m., George. 
 
 gilet, m., waistcoat, vest. 
 
 glace, /., ice. 
 
 glacier, m., glacier. 
 
 glissant, slippery. 
 
 Gobelins, m. pi., Gobelins, gov- 
 ernment tapestry works in 
 Paris. 
 
 gorge, /., throat; gorge. 
 
 gout, m., taste. 
 
 gouter (a), taste. 
 
 grammaire, /., grammar. 
 
 grand, tall, large, reat; de ma- 
 tin, early in the morning. 
 
 grand'mere, /., grandmother. 
 
 grand-pere, m., grandfather. 
 
 grange, /., barn. 
 
 grands-parents, m. pi., grand- 
 parents. 
 
 grave, grave, serious. 
 
 gravement, gravely. 
 
 gravure, /., engraving. 
 
 grippe, /., 'grippe,' influenza. 
 
FRENCH-ENGLISH VOCABULARY 
 
 273 
 
 gros, big, large. 
 
 grossir [grosiir], grow larger. 
 
 groupe, m., group. 
 
 guere, ne . . . , hardly, scarcely. 
 
 guerir, get well, recover. 
 
 Guignol, m., Punch and Judy. 
 
 Guillaume, m., William. 
 
 H 
 
 h aspirate is indicated thus: 'h. 
 
 habile, clever. 
 
 habilement, cleverly. 
 
 habiller, dress, clothe; s* , dress 
 (oneself) . 
 
 habit, m., coat; dress coat; pi., 
 clothes. 
 
 habitation, /., habitation, dwell- 
 ing. 
 
 habiter, inhabit, live in. 
 
 habituer, accustom. 
 
 'hache, /., axe. 
 
 'hate, /., haste. 
 
 'haut, high. 
 
 'Havre, m., Havre. 
 
 hectare, m., hectare (about 2^ 
 acres). 
 
 Helene, /., Helen. 
 
 herbe, /., grass. 
 
 heure, /., hour; o'clock; time; de 
 bonne , early. 
 
 heureusement, fortunately. 
 
 heureux, happy, fortunate. 
 
 ,hier [je:r], yesterday. 
 
 jhistoire, /., history; story. 
 
 Shiver, m., winter. 
 
 }homme, m., man. 
 
 Mpital, m., hospital. 
 
 '*hors de, out of. 
 
 * 4 hor-d'ceuvre, m., side dish, relish. 
 
 ]horticole, horticultural. 
 
 ;huile,, /., oil. 
 
 l< huit hit], eight. 
 
 humain, .human. 
 
 ici, here; d la, till then. 
 
 il', he, it; (with impers. verbs), 
 there. 
 
 illustrer, illustrate. 
 
 ils, they. 
 
 image, /., image, picture. 
 
 imaginer, imagine, conceive. 
 
 impatiemment [epasjama], impa- 
 tiently. 
 
 important, important. 
 
 importer, import; be important; 
 n'importe quel, no matter what, 
 any . . . (whatever). 
 
 Industrie, /., industry. 
 
 infiniment, infinitely, very much. 
 
 inflammable, inflammable. 
 
 informer (s'), enquire about (de). 
 
 instituteur, m., teacher (primary). 
 
 institutrice, /., teacher. 
 
 instruire, instruct, teach. 
 
 intelligence, /., intelligence; un- 
 derstanding. 
 
 intelligent, intelligent. 
 
 intention, /., intention. 
 
 interessant, interesting. 
 
 interesser, interest. 
 
 interieur, adj., n. m., interior. 
 
 inventer, invent. 
 
 invitation, /., invitation. 
 
 inviter, invite. 
 
 irai, see aller. 
 
 italien, Italian. 
 
 ivoire, m., ivory. 
 
 jamais, ever; ne . . . , never, 
 jambe, /., leg. 
 Janvier, m., January. 
 Japon, m., Japan, 
 jaquette, /., morning coat, 
 jardin, m., garden, gardens; 
 des plantes, Botanical Gardens, 
 jaune, yellow. 
 
274 
 
 FRENCH-ENGLISH VOCABULARY 
 
 jaunir, become yellow. 
 
 je, j', I. 
 
 Jean [50], m., John. 
 
 Jeanne [sain],/., Jane, Joan(na). 
 
 jeter, throw, throw away. 
 
 jeu, m., game, play. 
 
 jeudi, m., Thursday. 
 
 jeune, young. 
 
 joie, /., joy, gladness, happiness. 
 
 joindre, join; les deux bouts, 
 
 make (both) ends meet, 
 joli, pretty, 
 jouer, fewe] play. 
 jour, m., day; de nos s, in our 
 
 day(s). 
 
 journal, m., newspaper, 
 journee, /., day. 
 joyeux, joyous, merry, 
 juillet fem'je], m., July, 
 juin [sqe], m., June. 
 Julie, /., Julia. 
 Julien, m., Julian, 
 jupe, /., skirt, 
 jusqu'a, as far as, to, up to; a 
 
 ce que, until. 
 
 kilogramme, m., kilogram (about 
 
 2 Ibs.). 
 kilometre, m., kilometre (about f 
 
 of a mile). 
 
 la, there. 
 
 la-bas, yonder, over there. 
 
 labour, m., ploughing. 
 
 labourer, plough. 
 
 laboureur, m., ploughman, hus- 
 bandman. 
 
 lac [lak], m., lake. 
 
 lainage, m., woollen goods. 
 
 laisser, leave, let; se aller, 
 yield. 
 
 lait, m., milk. 
 
 laiterie, /., dairy. 
 
 lampe, /., lamp. 
 
 lancer, throw, cast, toss. 
 
 langue, /., tongue, language. 
 
 large, wide, broad. 
 
 latin, Latin. 
 
 laver, wash; se , wash oneself. 
 
 le, la, 1', les, the. 
 
 le, la, P, les, him, her, it, them. 
 
 lecon, /., lesson. 
 
 lecture, /., reading. 
 
 legume, m., vegetable. 
 
 lendemain, m., day after, next 
 
 day. 
 
 lentement, slowly, 
 lequel, laquelle, etc., who, which 
 
 (one), what (one), 
 lettre, /., letter, 
 leur, leurs, their; le , theirs. 
 leur, to them, of them, them, 
 levain, m., leaven, yeast. 
 lever, raise, lift up; rise; se , 
 
 rise. 
 
 libre, free. 
 
 lilas [lila], m., lilac; adj., purple, 
 linge, m., linen. 
 lion, m., lion. 
 lire, read. 
 lit, m., bed. 
 livre, m., book, 
 livre, /., pound. 
 locomotive, /., locomotive. 
 loge, /., box (theatre). 
 loi, /., law. 
 loin, far. 
 lointain, distant. 
 Loire, /., Loire. 
 Londres, m., London. 
 long, long, 
 longtemps, long, a long time, a 
 
 long while. 
 lorsque, when. 
 Louis, m., Louis, Lewis. 
 Louise, /., Louise, Louisa, 
 lourd, heavy, 
 loutre, /., otter. 
 Luc [lyk], m., Luke. 
 
FRENCH-ENGLISH VOCABULARY 
 
 275 
 
 Lucie, /., Lucy. 
 
 lui, to him, to her, of him, of her, 
 him, her, he. 
 
 lumiere, /., light. 
 
 lundi, ra., Monday. 
 
 lunettes,/, pi., spectacles, glasses. 
 
 Luxembourg [lyksabuir], ra., Lux- 
 embourg, a palace and park in 
 Paris. 
 
 Lyon, ra., Lyons. 
 
 M 
 
 M. contr. of Monsieur. 
 
 mac on, ra., mason. 
 
 madame, /., madam, Mrs. 
 
 mademoiselle, /., Miss. 
 
 magasin, ra., shop, store; courir 
 les s, go shopping, shop. 
 
 magnifique, magnificent. 
 
 mai [me], ra., May. 
 
 main, /., hand. 
 
 maintenant, now. 
 
 mais, but; non, no, no; not at 
 all. 
 
 maison, /., house; a la , at 
 home, home. 
 
 maitre, ra., master. 
 
 majorite, /., majority. 
 
 mal, adv., badly; n. ra., evil, pain, 
 sickness; de mer, seasickness; 
 faire , hurt; se faire , hurt 
 oneself; a la tete, de tete, 
 headache. 
 
 malade, sick, ill; sick person, pa- 
 tient. 
 
 malheur, ra., misfortune. 
 
 malheureux, unhappy, unfortu- 
 nate. 
 
 malle, /., trunk. 
 
 maman, /., mamma. 
 
 manche, /., sleeve; la Manche, the 
 English Channel. 
 
 manche tte, /., cuff. 
 
 manger, eat; donner a a, feed. 
 
 maniere, /., manner, way. 
 
 manquer, miss, be lacking, fail; be 
 near. 
 
 marbre, ra., marble. 
 
 Marc-Aurele [mark oreil], ra., Mar- 
 cus Aurelius, Roman emperor 
 (A.D. 121-181). 
 
 Marcel, ra., Marcellus. 
 
 marchand, ra., merchant, dealer. 
 
 marche, /., march. 
 
 marche, ra., market; (a) bon , 
 cheap, cheaply. 
 
 marcher, march, go, run; faire , 
 drive, work. 
 
 mardi, ra., Tuesday. 
 
 Marguerite, /., Margaret. 
 
 mari, m., husband. 
 
 Marie,/., Mary, Marie, Maria. 
 
 marier, marry (of parents, clergy- 
 man, etc.)', se , get married. 
 
 marronnier, ra., chestnut. 
 
 mars [mars], ra., March. 
 
 Marseille, /., Marseilles. 
 
 marteau, ra., hammer. 
 
 materiaux, ra. pi., materials. 
 
 matin, ra., morning. 
 
 mauvais [move], bad. 
 
 me, m', me, to me. 
 
 mechant, bad, naughty, cross. 
 
 medecin, ra., doctor. 
 
 medecine, /., medicine; ecole de 
 , medical school. 
 
 Medicis (de) [medisis], de' Medici, 
 famous Florentine family, of 
 which two members, Catherine 
 (1519-1589) and Marie (1573- 
 1642), were queens of France. 
 
 meilleur, adj., better, best. 
 
 meme, adj., same, self; lui , 
 
 himself; as adv., even; tout de 
 , all the same; quand , even 
 if. 
 
 menage, ra., household, house- 
 keeping; pain de , homemade 
 bread. 
 
 menagere, /., housewife. 
 
 mener, lead, take, bring. 
 
276 
 
 FRENCH-ENGLISH VOCABULARY 
 
 menu, ra., menu, bill of fare. 
 
 menuiserie, /., woodwork, 
 
 menuisier, m., joiner, carpenter. 
 
 mer, /., sea; port de , seaport; 
 bord de la , seaside. 
 
 merci, thanks; no, thanks. 
 
 mercredi, m., Wednesday. 
 
 mere, /., mother. 
 
 merite, m., merit. 
 
 merveille, /., wonder; a , mar- 
 vellously, wonderfully. 
 
 mesdames, /. pi., ladies (only in 
 
 messe, /., mass (religious). 
 
 mesure, /., measure; a que, in 
 proportion as. 
 
 metre, ra., metre (about 40 in.). 
 
 mettre, put, place; se en 
 branle, begin to move; se a 
 table, sit down to dinner (etc.); 
 se , dress; mis, dressed; se 
 en habit, put on dress coat. 
 
 meuble, ra., piece of furniture; pi., 
 furniture. 
 
 meubler, furnish. 
 
 meunier, ra., miller. 
 
 midi, m., noon; South. 
 
 miel, ra., honey. 
 
 mien (le), mienne (la), etc., 
 mine. 
 
 mieux, adv., better, best; etre , 
 be better (more comfortable). 
 
 mil, thousand (in dates). 
 
 mille [mil], (a) thousand. 
 
 millier [milje], m., (a) thousand (ap- 
 proximately) . 
 
 million [miljo], m., million. 
 
 mince, thin. 
 
 minuit, m., midnight. 
 
 minute, /., minute. 
 
 miroir, m., mirror. 
 
 mis, misse, see mettre. 
 
 mise, /., dress. 
 
 Mississipi, ra., Mississippi. 
 
 M me , contr. of madame. 
 
 mobilier, m., furniture. 
 
 mode, /., fashion ; a la , in fashion, 
 fashionable. 
 
 moderer, moderate. 
 
 moderne, modern. 
 
 moi, me, to me, I. 
 
 moins, less, least; bon, worse; 
 a que . . . ne, unless; a de, 
 unless, except; au (du) , at 
 least. 
 
 mois [mwct], ra., month. 
 
 moisson, /., harvest. 
 
 moissonner, harvest. 
 
 moissonneur, ra., harvester. 
 
 moissonneuse, /., reaping-ma- 
 chine. 
 
 moitie, /., half. 
 
 moment, ra., moment, time; au 
 ou, when; en ce , now; du 
 que, as soon as. 
 
 mon, ma, mes, my. 
 
 monde, ra., world; people, com- 
 pany; tout le , everybody. 
 
 mont, m., mount; le Blanc, 
 Mt. Blanc. 
 
 monsieur [masj0], m., sir, gentle- 
 man, Mr. 
 
 montagne, /., mountain. 
 
 monter, mount, ascend, go up; get 
 in; put up. 
 
 montre, /., watch. 
 
 montrer, show. 
 
 morceau, m., bit, piece. 
 
 mort, /., death. 
 
 mort, see mourir. 
 
 mot, m., word; note. 
 
 mouche, /., fly. 
 
 mouchoir, m., handkerchief. 
 
 moudre, grind (mill). 
 
 mourir, die. 
 
 mouton, m., sheep. 
 
 mouvoir, move, drive. 
 
 moyen [mwaje], m., means, way; 
 il n'y a pas , there is no way. 
 
 municipal, municipal. 
 
 mur, m., wall. 
 
 mur, ripe, mature. 
 
FRENCH-ENGLISH VOCABULARY 
 
 277 
 
 murir, ripen, 
 musique, /., music, 
 musee, m., museum, 
 mysterieux, mysterious. 
 
 H 
 
 nacre, /., mother-of-pearl. 
 
 nager, swim. 
 
 naitre, be born. 
 
 Napoleon, Napoleon. 
 
 nappe, /., tablecloth (white} ; met- 
 tre la , lay the cloth, set the 
 table. 
 
 navire, m., ship. 
 
 ne, n', no, not; ... pas, no, not; 
 n'est-ce pas? aren't you? etc. 
 
 ne, see naitre. 
 
 necessaire, necessary. 
 
 negligence, /., negligence. 
 
 neige, /., snow. 
 
 neiger, snow. 
 
 nettoyer, clean. 
 
 neuf, new. 
 
 neuf, nine. 
 
 neurasthenic, /., nervous exhaus- 
 tion. 
 
 neveu, m., nephew. 
 
 ni, neither, nor; ne . . . ... , 
 neither . . . nor. 
 
 nid, m., nest. 
 
 niece, /., niece. 
 
 noir, black. 
 
 noix, /., walnut. 
 
 nombre, m., number. 
 
 nombreux, numerous. 
 
 nommer, name, call; appoint. 
 
 non, no, not. 
 
 nord, m., north. 
 
 normand, Norman. 
 
 Normandie, /., Normandy. 
 
 notre, nos, our. 
 
 Notre-Dame, /., Notre Dame. 
 
 n6tre (le), notre (la), etc., ours; 
 pi., our party, etc. 
 
 nous, we, us, to us. 
 
 nouveau, -el, new. 
 
 nouvelle, /., news; also pi. ; j'ai recu 
 
 de ses s, I have heard from 
 
 him. 
 
 Nouvelle-Orleans,/., New Orleans, 
 novembre, m., November. 
 noyer, m., walnut. 
 nu, naked, bare. 
 nuance, [nuxiis] /., shade, colour, 
 nuit, /., night. 
 
 obeir (a), obey. 
 
 objet, m., object. 
 
 obligeance, /., kindness. 
 
 obscurite [opskyrite], /., darkness. 
 
 observation [opservasjo], /., ob- 
 servation. 
 
 observer [opserve], observe, notice. 
 
 obtenir [optaniir], obtain. 
 
 occupation, /., occupation. 
 
 occupe, busy. 
 
 occuper, occupy, make busy; s' 
 de, be busy with, see about, at- 
 tend to. 
 
 octobre, m., October. 
 
 ceil [ceij], m., eye; pi., yeux [j0]. 
 
 oeuf [cef], m.. egg; pi., oeufs [0]. 
 
 offrir, offer. 
 
 oh [o], O, oh. 
 
 oiseau, m., bird. 
 
 oisif, idle. 
 
 oisivete, /., idleness. 
 
 ombre, /., shade. 
 
 omelette, /., omelet. 
 
 on, one, people, they, we, you, 
 some one, etc. 
 
 oncle, m., uncle. 
 
 ont, see avoir. 
 
 onze, eleven. 
 
 or, m., gold. 
 
 ordinaire, ordinary. 
 
 ordinairement, generally. 
 
 ordonnance, /., prescription. 
 
 ordonner, order, prescribe. 
 
278 
 
 FRENCH-ENGLISH VOCABULARY 
 
 orge, /., barley. 
 
 orner, decorate, adorn. 
 
 orthographe,/., orthography, spell- 
 ing. 
 
 oser, dare. 
 
 ou, or. 
 
 oft, where, in which; d* , whence, 
 from where. 
 
 oublier, forget. 
 
 ouest [west], ra., west. 
 
 oui, yes. 
 
 ours [urs], m., bear. 
 
 outil [uti], m., tool. 
 
 outre, beyond, in addition to; en 
 , also, moreover. 
 
 ouvert, see ouvrir. 
 
 ouvrage, ra., work. 
 
 ouvrier, ra., workman. 
 
 ouvrir, open; s* , open. 
 
 paille, /., straw. 
 
 pain, ra., bread; loaf; petit , roll. 
 
 pake, /., pair. 
 
 paix, /., peace. 
 
 palais, ra., palace; large (public) 
 building; des singes, mon- 
 key house. 
 
 panier, m., basket. 
 
 papa, ra., papa. 
 
 papier, ra., paper. 
 
 paquebot [pakbo], ra., packet, 
 steamer. 
 
 par, by, for, through, throughout, 
 per, in. 
 
 paraitre, appear, seem. 
 
 pare [park], ra., park. 
 
 parce que, because. 
 
 pardessus [pardesy], m., overcoat. 
 
 pardon, ra., pardon; je vous de- 
 mande , I beg your pardon. 
 
 pardonner, pardon, excuse. 
 
 pareillement, equally, also. 
 
 parent, ra., relation, relative, 
 parent. 
 
 paresse, /., laziness. 
 
 paresseux, lazy. 
 
 Paris, m., Paris. 
 
 parler, speak, talk. 
 
 parmi, among, amongst. 
 
 parquet, ra., floor. 
 
 part, /., share; de ma , from me. 
 
 parterre, ra., flower garden. 
 
 parti, m., party (political, etc.). 
 
 partie, /., part; faire de, be part 
 
 of. 
 partir, depart, leave, go, go away, 
 
 start; a de, from ... on (up). 
 partout, everywhere; oft, where- 
 
 ever. 
 
 parure, /., adornment, ornament, 
 pas, ra., step. 
 pas, not; ne . . . , no, not, not 
 
 any, none. 
 
 passage, ra., passage. 
 passe, past, last; Pannee , last 
 
 year, 
 passer, pass, go, run; spend (time); 
 
 go by, disappear; se , take 
 
 place, go on. 
 pastel, ra., pastel, 
 pate, /., dough. 
 patin, ra., skate. 
 patiner, skate, 
 patisserie, /., pastry. 
 Paul [pol], ra., Paul, 
 pauvre, poor, 
 payer, pay, pay for; faire , 
 
 charge. 
 
 pays [pei], ra., country, 
 paysage [peizais], ra., landscape. 
 paysan [peiza], ra., peasant, 
 peche, /., fishing. 
 peigne, ra., comb, 
 peindre, paint, 
 peine, /., trouble; valoir (etre) la 
 
 , be worth while, 
 peintre, ra., painter. 
 peinture, /., painting, 
 pendant, during, for; que, 
 
 while. 
 
FRENCH-ENGLISH VOCABULARY 
 
 279 
 
 penser, think; be near. 
 
 perdre, lose. 
 
 perdrix, /., partridge. 
 
 pere, ra., father; de famille, 
 father (of a family), citizen. 
 
 perfectionnement, m., improve- 
 ment. 
 
 perle, /., pearl. 
 
 permettre, permit, allow. 
 
 permission, /., permission. 
 
 personne, /., person; pi., people. 
 
 personne, anybody; ne . . . , no- 
 body. 
 
 perte, /., loss. 
 
 petit, little, small, short; young. 
 
 petrin, m., kneading trough. 
 
 petrir, knead. 
 
 petrole, m., petroleum. 
 
 peu, little, few; un , a little. 
 
 peur, /., fear; avoir , be afraid, 
 fear; fake a, frighten; de 
 que, for fear that; de de, for 
 fear of. 
 
 peut-etre, perhaps. 
 
 peut, peux [p0], see pouvoir. 
 
 pharmacien, m., druggist, chem- 
 ist. 
 
 pianiste, m. or /., pianist. 
 
 piano, m., piano. 
 
 piece, /., piece, room; play; la , 
 apiece. 
 
 pied, m., foot; a , on foot. 
 
 pierre, /., stone. 
 
 Pierre, m., Peter. 
 
 pin, m., pine. 
 
 pipe, /., pipe. 
 
 place, /., room, seat, place, posi- 
 tion, berth. 
 
 plage, /., beach. 
 
 plaindre, pity; se , complain. 
 
 plaire a, please; se , be pleased, 
 enjoy oneself, like it; s'il vous 
 plait, if you please, please; 
 plait-il? I beg your pardon. 
 
 plaisir, m., pleasure. 
 
 plan, m., plan. 
 
 planche, /., plank, board. 
 
 plante, /., plant. 
 
 plein, full; en e mer, in the open 
 sea. 
 
 pleuvoir, rain. 
 
 plonger, dive. 
 
 pluie, /., rain. 
 
 plume, /., pen. 
 
 plupart, /., majority, (the) most, 
 the most part. 
 
 plus, more; ne . . . , no more, no 
 longer, not now, 
 
 plusieurs [plyzjoeir], several, a 
 good many. 
 
 poche, /., pocket. 
 
 poeme, m., poem. 
 
 poete, m., poet. 
 
 poire, /., pear. 
 
 poirier, m., pear tree. 
 
 pois [pwa], m., pea; petits , 
 green peas. 
 
 poisson, m., fish. 
 
 police, /., police. 
 
 pomme, /., apple; de terre, po- 
 tato. 
 
 pommier, m., apple tree. 
 
 pont, m., bridge. 
 
 porcelaine, /., porcelain. 
 
 pore, m., pore. 
 
 port, m., port; wharf. 
 
 porte, /., door. 
 
 porte-monnaie, m., purse. 
 
 porter, bear, carry, wear; se , be 
 (of health). 
 
 portrait, m., portrait. 
 
 poser [poze], place; ask (questions).. 
 
 poste, /., post, post office. 
 
 potage, m., soup. 
 
 pouce, m., thumb; inch. 
 
 poule, /., hen. 
 
 pouls [pu], m., pulse. 
 
 pour, prep. } for, in order to, to; en 
 avoir , have so much worth 
 of; que, in order to, so that, 
 
 pourboire, m., gratuity, 'tip'. 
 
 pourquoi, why. 
 
280 
 
 FRENCH-ENGLISH VOCABULARY 
 
 pourrai, see pouvoir. 
 
 pourrir, rot, decay. 
 
 pourtant, however. 
 
 pousser, grow. 
 
 poutre, /., beam. 
 
 pouvoir, be able, can, may. 
 
 pre, ra., meadow. 
 
 precedent, preceding. 
 
 precipiter, hurl; se , rush. 
 
 precis, precise, exact. 
 
 preferer, prefer. 
 
 premier, first. 
 
 premierement, firstly. 
 
 prendre, take, take away, catch, 
 
 get, buy. 
 
 preparatifs, m. pi., preparation (s). 
 preparer, prepare; se , prepare 
 
 (oneself), get ready, 
 pres (de), near, close by; a peu , 
 
 nearly, almost, 
 present, present; a , at present, 
 
 now. % 
 
 presque, almost, nearly; pas, 
 
 hardly any. 
 presse, in haste. 
 pret, ready, 
 preter, lend. 
 
 prier [prie], pray, ask, beg (of), 
 princesse, /., princess, 
 printemps, m., spring, 
 pris, see prendre. 
 prise, /., taking. 
 prix, m., price, 
 probable, probable, 
 probablement, probably, 
 probleme, m., problem, 
 procede, m., process, 
 prochain, next) Pannee e, next 
 
 year. 
 
 produit, m., product, 
 professeur, m., professor, teacher, 
 promenade, /., walk, drive, etc. 
 promener, lead about; se , take 
 
 a walk (drive, etc.). 
 prononcer, pronounce. 
 prononciation, /., pronunciation. 
 
 propos, m., remark; 3. de , with 
 regard to; a , by the way. 
 
 propre, clean. 
 
 proprete, /., cleanliness. 
 
 proprietaire, m., landlord. 
 
 propriete, /., property, estate. 
 
 prosperite, /., prosperity. 
 
 proteger, protect. 
 
 proverbe, m., proverb. 
 
 public [pyblik], public; n. m.. 
 public. 
 
 puis, then, next, afterward. 
 
 puis, puisse, see pouvoir. 
 
 puisque [pin'sko], since. 
 
 pus, pusse, see pouvoir. 
 
 qualite, /., quality. 
 
 quand, when, whenever. 
 
 quant a, as to, as for. 
 
 quarante, forty. 
 
 quart, m., quarter. 
 
 quatre, four. 
 
 que, qu', pron., what, which, that, 
 
 whom; qu'est-ce c'est 
 
 cela? what is that? 
 que, qu', conj., that, than, as; how! 
 
 ne . . . , only; ne . . . pas , not 
 
 only; je crois oui, I think so. 
 quel, quelle, quels, quelies, which, 
 
 what; que, whatever, 
 quelconque, some, some or other, 
 quelque, some, any; ... que, 
 
 however, whatever, 
 quelqu'un, some one, any one. 
 quelquefois, sometimes. 
 question, /., question. 
 qui, who, which, that, whom; de 
 
 ? whose? ce , which, what; 
 
 que, whoever. 
 
 quinze, fifteen; jours, a fort- 
 night; d'aujourd'hui en , a 
 
 fortnight from to-day, 
 quoi, what; que, whatever, 
 quoique, although, though. 
 
FRENCH-ENGLISH VOCABULARY 
 
 281 
 
 raconter, relate, tell. 
 
 radis, w., radish. 
 
 raison, /., reason; avoir , be (in 
 the) right. 
 
 ramasser, gather, pick up. 
 
 rappeler, recall; se , remember. 
 
 rarement, rarely. 
 
 rassis, stale (of bread). 
 
 ravissant, charming, delightful. 
 
 rayon, m., shelf; department, 
 counter. 
 
 realiser, realize, effect. 
 
 recemment [resama], recently. 
 
 reception, /., reception. 
 
 recevoir, receive; etre recu, pass 
 (at examinations). 
 
 recolte, /., crop, harvest. 
 
 reconnaitre, recognize. 
 
 redingote, /., frock coat. 
 
 refuser, refuse; etre refuse, fail 
 (at examinations). 
 
 regarder, look (at). 
 
 regime, m., regimen, diet; mettre 
 au , put on diet. 
 
 regne, m., reign. . 
 
 reine, /., queen. 
 
 remarquable [ramarkabl], remark- 
 able. 
 
 remarquer, remark, notice, ob- 
 serve. 
 
 remede, m., remedy, medicine. 
 
 remercier, thank. 
 
 remettre, restore; se , recover 
 (from illness) ; remis, recovered. 
 
 remplacer, take the place of. 
 
 rencontrer, meet. 
 
 rendre, render, make. 
 
 rentrer, go back, go (come) in 
 again^ return home. 
 
 reparer, repair. 
 
 repondre, reply, answer. 
 
 representer, represent. 
 
 reprocher, reproach, tax. 
 
 republican!, m., republican. 
 
 reputation, /., reputation. 
 
 resoudre, resolve, solve. 
 
 respecter, respect. 
 
 ressembler [rasable], resemble. 
 
 restaurant, m., restaurant. 
 
 restaurer, restore. 
 
 rester, stay, remain. 
 
 retablir, restore. 
 
 retard, m., delay; en , late. 
 
 retarder, be too slow. 
 
 retraite, /., retreat. 
 
 reussir, succeed; pass (examination), 
 
 reveiller, waken; se , waken. 
 
 revendre, sell again. 
 
 revoir, see again; au , good-bye. 
 
 rez-de-chaussee [retjose], m. r 
 ground floor. 
 
 rhinoceros [rinoseros], m., rhino- 
 ceros. 
 
 Rhone, m., Rhone. 
 
 rhume, m., cold. 
 
 riche, rich; d'un million, worth 
 a million. 
 
 richement, richly. 
 
 richesse, /., wealth. 
 
 rideau, m., curtain. 
 
 rien [rje], anything; ne . . . > 
 nothing, not anything. 
 
 rire, laugh. 
 
 riviere, /., river. 
 
 robe,/., dress, gown; de cham- 
 bre, dressing-gown. 
 
 roi [rwa], m., king. 
 
 role, m., role, part. 
 
 roman, m., novel. 
 
 rose, /., rose. 
 
 rdti [roti], m., roast. 
 
 rotir [rotiir], roast. 
 
 rouge, red. 
 
 rouler, roll. 
 
 roulis, m., rolling (of ship). 
 
 route, /., road; en , on the way. 
 
 rude, harsh, severe. 
 
 rue, /., street. 
 
 rugissement, m., roar. 
 
 ruisseau, m., brook, stream. 
 
282 
 
 FRENCH-ENGLISH VOCABULARY 
 
 sac [sak], w., sack, bag. 
 
 sache, see savoir. 
 
 sage, well-behaved, good. 
 
 sain, healthy, sound. 
 
 saint, m., Saint. 
 
 Saint-Laurent, m., St. Lawrence. 
 
 sais [se], see savoir. 
 
 saisir, seize. 
 
 saison, /., season. 
 
 salade, /., salad. 
 
 salle, /., hall, room; de classe, 
 classroom; a manger, din- 
 ing-room; de bains, bath- 
 room. 
 
 salon, m., drawing-room, par- 
 lour; (salle) de lecture, read- 
 ing room. 
 
 saluer, salute, bow to, take one's 
 hat off to. 
 
 sans, without. 
 
 sante, /., health. 
 
 sapin, m., fir, spruce. 
 
 sardine, /., sardine. 
 
 sauf [soif], safe. 
 
 saurai, see savoir. 
 
 sauter, jump, leap. 
 
 sauvage, wild. 
 
 savoir, know, know how to; faire 
 , let one know; on ne saurait, 
 one cannot. 
 
 savon, m., soap. 
 
 scene, /., scene. 
 
 scierie [siri], /., saw mill. 
 
 sculpter [skylte], carve. 
 
 se, s', oneself, himself, herself, 
 themselves. 
 
 seau [so], m., pail 
 
 sec [sek], dry. 
 
 secouer, shake. 
 
 Seine, /., Seine. 
 
 sejour, m., stay. 
 
 selon, according to. 
 
 semaine, /., week. 
 
 semblable, similar, alike, like. 
 
 sembler, seem, appear, 
 
 semer, sow. 
 
 senat, m., senate. 
 
 sentier, m., path. 
 
 sentir, feel, smell; se , feel 
 (health). 
 
 separer, separate. 
 
 sept [set], seven. 
 
 septembre [septaibr], m., Septem- 
 ber. 
 
 serai, see etre. 
 
 serieux, serious. 
 
 serrer, press; put away; se la 
 main, shake hands. 
 
 servante, /., servant. 
 
 service, m., service. 
 
 serviette, /., towel, napkin. 
 
 servir, serve; a, be 'of use for; 
 se de, make use of. 
 
 seul, alone, only. 
 
 settlement, only. 
 
 Sevres, m., Sevres, a town some 
 five miles w. of Paris where 
 there is a government porcelain 
 manufactory. 
 
 si, if, whether. 
 
 si, so, such; however; yes (em- 
 phatic) ; mais , yes, it would. 
 
 siecle, m., century. 
 
 siege, m., seat, chair. 
 
 sien (le), sienne (la), etc., his, hers, 
 its. 
 
 siffler, whistle. 
 
 signe, m., sign. 
 
 simple, simple, plain. 
 
 singe, m., monkey. 
 
 sinon, if not, otherwise. 
 
 situe, situated. 
 
 six [sis], six. 
 
 soeur, /., sister. 
 
 soie, /., silk. 
 
 soieries, /. pi., silks. 
 
 soif [swaf], /., thirst; avoir , be 
 thirsty; mourir de , be very 
 thirsty. 
 
 soigner, take care of. 
 
FRENCH-ENGLISH VOCABULARY 
 
 283 
 
 soigneusement, carefully, 
 soir, ra., evening, afternoon, 
 soiree, /., evening, evening party; 
 
 dansante, dancing party, 
 sois, see etre. 
 
 soit que, whether. 
 
 soixante [swasait], sixty. 
 
 soleil, ra., sun. 
 
 sommes, see etre. 
 
 son, sa, ses, his, her, its, one's. 
 
 sonner, ring. 
 
 sont, see etre. 
 
 Sorbonne, /., Sorbonne (founded 
 A.D. 1257), now part of the Uni- 
 versity of Paris. 
 
 sorte, /., sort, kind; de que, so 
 that, in order that. 
 
 sortie, /., going out, leaving. 
 
 sortir, go out, come out; bring out, 
 take out. 
 
 sou, ra., cent, halfpenny. 
 
 souffler, blow. 
 
 souffrant, ailing, not very well. 
 
 souffrir, suffer, endure. 
 
 soulier, ra., shoe. 
 
 source, /., spring. 
 
 souvenir (se), remember. 
 
 sous, under, beneath, below, in. 
 
 souvent, often. 
 
 soyons, see etre. 
 
 sport [spoir], ra., sport. 
 
 station, /., station, stand; resort; 
 
 d'ete, summer resort, 
 statue, /., statue. 
 
 store, ra., (window) blind. 
 
 succes, ra., success. 
 
 sucre, ra., sugar. 
 
 sud [syd], ra., south. 
 
 suffire, suffice. 
 
 suffisant, conceited. 
 
 snis, see etre. 
 
 suite, /., sequel, what follows, con- 
 tinuation ; tout de , immediate- 
 ly, at once. 
 
 suivant, following. 
 
 suivre, follow. 
 
 sujet, m., subject. 
 
 superbe, superb, very fine. 
 
 superieur, upper. 
 
 sur, on, upon. 
 
 surface, /., surface. 
 
 surtout, above all, particularly. 
 
 especially, 
 surveiller, oversee. 
 
 table, /., table. 
 
 tableau, ra., picture; noir, 
 blackboard. 
 
 tache, /., task. 
 
 tacher, try. 
 
 taille, /., cutting; pierre de , free- 
 stone. 
 
 tailleur, ra., tailor. 
 
 tambour, ra., drum. 
 
 Tamise, /., Thames. 
 
 tandis que [tadi or tadis ka], whilst. 
 
 tant, so much, so many; que, as 
 long as; mieux, so much the 
 better, I am glad to hear it. 
 
 tante, /., aunt. 
 
 tapis, m., carpet; tablecloth (col- 
 oured) . 
 
 tapisserie, /., tapestry. 
 
 taquiner, tease. 
 
 tard, late; plus , later, after- 
 wards. 
 
 tartine, /., slice; de beurre, slice 
 of bread and butter. 
 
 tasse, /., cup. 
 
 tater, feel. 
 
 te, t', thee, to thee, you, to you. 
 
 telegraphier, telegraph. 
 
 telephoner, telephone. 
 
 tel, telle, tels, telles, such (a). 
 
 tellement, so, so much. 
 
 temperature, /., temperature. 
 
 temps, ra., time; weather; a 
 pour, in time to; de en , 
 now and then. 
 
 tendre, tender. 
 
284 
 
 FRENCH-ENGLISH VOCABULARY 
 
 tenir, hold, keep; de, take after. 
 
 tente, /., tent. 
 
 terminer, end, finish, complete. 
 
 terrain, m., ground, lot. 
 
 terre, /.. earth, land. 
 
 terrible, terrible. 
 
 tete, /., head. 
 
 the, m., tea. 
 
 theatre, m., theatre. 
 
 thermometre, m., thermometer. 
 
 tien (le), tienne (la), etc., thine, 
 
 yours. 
 
 timide, timid, 
 tirer, draw, derive; milk (cows)', 
 
 put out (of tongue). 
 tiroir, m., drawer, 
 toi, thee, to thee, thou, you, to 
 
 you. 
 
 toilette, /., toilet; dressing table; 
 faire sa , dress; de bal, 
 de soiree, evening dress (ladies). 
 toit, m., roof, 
 tomber, fall. 
 ton, ta, tes, thy, your, 
 torrent, m., torrent, stream. 
 tort, m., wrong; avoir , be (in the) 
 
 wrong. 
 t6t, soon. 
 toucher, touch; a, come close 
 
 to, meddle with, 
 tou jours, always, still, yet. 
 toupie, /., top (plaything). 
 tousser, cough. 
 
 tout, all, every (thing), every one; 
 tous les ans, every year; ce 
 que, whatever; pas du , not at 
 all; adv., quite; however, 
 traduire, translate. 
 train, m., train; en de, busy 
 
 at. 
 
 traire, milk, 
 traineau, m., sleigh, 
 tramway [tramwe], m., tramway, 
 
 tram (car). 
 
 tranquille [trokil], tranquil, quiet, 
 peaceful. 
 
 transpirer, perspire. 
 
 transporter, transport, carry, 
 bring. 
 
 travail, m., work; table de , 
 study table. 
 
 travailler, work. 
 
 travers (a), through. 
 
 traversee, /., crossing; passage, 
 voyage. 
 
 traverser, cross, run across 
 (through). 
 
 trentaine, /., about thirty. 
 
 trente, thirty. 
 
 tres, very. 
 
 tressaillir, start, jump, tremble. 
 
 trois [trwa], three. 
 
 troisiemement, thirdly. 
 
 tromper, deceive, cheat, beguile; 
 se , make a mistake, be mis- 
 taken; si je ne me trompe, if I 
 am not mistaken. 
 
 trop [tro or tro], too, too much, 
 too many. 
 
 trottoir, m., sidewalk, pavement. 
 
 trou, m., hole. 
 
 trouver, find, have; think; com- 
 ment trouvez-vous cela? what do 
 you think of that? se , be. 
 
 truite, /., trout. 
 
 tu, thou, you. 
 
 tuer [tiie], kill; se , kill oneself, 
 be killed. 
 
 tuile, /., tile (for roof). 
 
 Tuileries, /. pi, Tuileries (lit. 
 'tile-field'), a royal palace in 
 Paris, destroyed in 1871, of 
 which the gardens still exist. 
 
 U 
 
 un, une, a, an, one. 
 universite, /., university, 
 urne, /., urn, ballot box. 
 ustensile, m., utensil. 
 utile, useful. 
 utiliser, utilize. 
 
FRENCH-ENGLISH VOCABULARY 
 
 285 
 
 va, vas, see aller. 
 
 vache, /., cow. 
 
 vais, see aller. 
 
 vaisseau, ra., vessel, ship. 
 
 vaisselle, /., dishes. 
 
 valise, /., valise. 
 
 valoir, be worth, be good; 
 
 mieux, be better; ne rien, be 
 
 no good, 
 vapeur, /., steam; bateau a , 
 
 steamer, steamboat, 
 vase, ra., vase, 
 vaste, vast, large, 
 vaudrai, see valoir. 
 veau, ra., calf; veal, 
 veille, /., day (evening) before, 
 vendre, sell; se , sell, be sold, 
 vendredi, ra., Friday, 
 venir, come; a, happen to; 
 
 de, have just; faire , send for. 
 vent, ra., wind; il fait du , it is 
 
 windy. 
 
 venu, see venir. 
 Venus [venys], /., Venus, 
 ver, ra., worm; a sole, silk- 
 worm. 
 
 verger, ra., orchard, 
 verre, ra., glass. 
 verrerie, /., glassware. 
 vers, towards; about (of time). 
 vers, ra., verse, line (of poetry). 
 verset, ra., verse (of Bible). 
 vert, green. 
 
 veston, ra., sack coat, sacque. 
 vetement, ra., garment; suit; pi., 
 
 clothes, 
 veuillez (see vouloir), be so kind 
 
 as to. 
 
 veux, veut, see vouloir. 
 viande, /., meat. 
 vice, m., vi.se. 
 vie,/., life; living, 
 vieillesse, /., old age. 
 viens [vje], see venir. 
 
 vieux, vieil [vj0, vjeij], old. 
 
 village, [vilas] ra., village. 
 
 ville [vil], /., city, town; a la , in 
 
 (the) town. 
 vin, ra., wine, 
 vingt [ve], twenty, 
 vingtaine, /., about twenty, score, 
 violent, violent, 
 visit e, /., visit; en , visiting; 
 
 faire a, visit. 
 visiter, visit, inspect, examine, 
 vite, quickly, fast. 
 Vitesse, /., speed, 
 vivant, ra., living person; bon , 
 
 'jolly fellow.' 
 vivre, live, exist. 
 voici, see here, here is, here are, 
 
 this is. 
 voila, see there, there is, there are, 
 
 here is, this is, that is; nous , 
 
 here we are. 
 voir, see; se , be seen; faire , 
 
 show; venir , come to see; 
 
 aller , go to see, visit. 
 voisin, -e, ra., /., neighbour, 
 voiture, /., carriage. 
 voix, /., voice, 
 volaille, /., poultry, 
 voler, fly. 
 voler, steal, 
 voleur, ra., thief, 
 volume, ra., volume, 
 vont, see aller. 
 vote, ra., voting, 
 voter, vote, 
 votre, vos, your. 
 
 votre (le), v6tre (la), etc., yours, 
 vouloir, will, wish, want; je veux 
 
 bien, very well, all right; je 
 
 voudrais (bien), I should like; 
 
 en a, have a grudge against; 
 
 que voulez-vous (que j'y fasse)? 
 
 what can you expect? what can 
 
 be done about it? 
 vous, you, to you. 
 voyage, ra., journey, trip. 
 
286 FRENCH-ENGLISH VOCABULARY 
 
 voyager, travel. 
 vrai, adj., adv., true, truly. 
 
 vu, see voir. y, there, in it, at it, in them, etc.; 
 
 il a, there is, there are; ago; 
 
 il en a, there is (are) some, 
 wagon-lit, m., sleeping car. yeux [j0], see osil. 
 
ENGLISH-FRENCH VOCABULARY 
 
 h aspirate is indicated thus: 'h. 
 
 a, an, un, m., une, /. 
 able, be , pouvoir. 
 about, environ, vers, & peu 
 autour de; think , penser a; 
 speak , parler de. 
 absence, absence, /. 
 abundant, abondant. 
 accept, accepter, 
 accident, accident, ra. 
 accompany, accompagner. 
 according to, selon. 
 account, on of, a cause de. 
 accustomed, accoutume, habitue, 
 ache, n.j mal, m., douleur, /. 
 ache, v., faire mal, avoir mal; my 
 
 head aches, j'ai mal a la tete. 
 acquaintance, connaissance, /. 
 acquainted, be with, connaitre. 
 addition, addition, /.; in to, 
 
 outre. 
 
 admire, admirer, 
 admission, entree, /. 
 adorn, orner, decorer. 
 adornment, parure, /. 
 advance, avancer. 
 advice, conseil(s), m. 
 advise, conseiller. 
 affair, affaire, /. 
 afraid, be , avoir peur, craindre; 
 
 be much , avoir grand'- (bien) 
 
 peur, craindre beaucoup. 
 after, apres; apres que; some 
 
 tune, au bout de quelque temps. 
 afternoon, apres-midi, m. or f. 
 afterwards, apres, puis, ensuite. 
 
 again, encore (une fois). 
 
 age, age, m. 
 
 ago, il y a, voila . . . que. 
 
 agreeable, agreable. 
 
 agreeably, agreablement. 
 
 agricultural, agricole. 
 
 ailing, be, souffrir, etre souffrant. 
 
 air, air, m. 
 
 Alexander, Alexandre. 
 
 algebra, algebre, /. 
 
 Alice, Alice. 
 
 alike, semblable. 
 
 all, tout, tous, toute(s); that, 
 
 tout ce qui (que). 
 allow, permettre. 
 almost, presque, environ, pres de; 
 
 fall, manquer de tomber. 
 alone, seul. 
 
 already, deja. 
 
 also, aussi, pareillement. 
 
 although, bien que, quoique. 
 
 always, tou jours. 
 
 America, Amerique, /.; North , 
 
 F Amerique du Nord; South , 
 
 1 J Amerique du Sud. 
 American, americam. 
 amiable, aimable. 
 among, parmi. 
 amuse, amuser; oneself, s'amu- 
 
 ser. 
 
 amusement, amusement, m. 
 amusing, amusant. 
 ancestor, ancetre, m. or f. 
 ancient, ancien. 
 and, et. 
 angry, fache, en colere; be (get) 
 
 at, se facher contre. 
 
 287 
 
288 
 
 ENGLISH-FRENCH VOCABULARY 
 
 animal, animal, w., be"te, /. 
 
 animated, anime. 
 
 annoy, ennuyer. 
 
 another, un autre, encore un 
 
 (autre), un deuxieme. 
 answer, repondre, repliquer. 
 anvil, enclume, /. 
 anxious, inquiet; be to, tenir 
 
 beaucoup a; desirer beaucoup. 
 any, du, etc.; quelconque; en; of 
 
 them, en. 
 anybody, quelqu'un; not . . . , 
 
 ne . . . personne. 
 anything, quelque chose; not . . . 
 
 , ne . . . rien. 
 apiece, la piece, 
 appear, paraitre. 
 appetite, appetit, m. 
 apple, pomme, /.; tree, pom- 
 
 mier, m. 
 
 apply, s'adresser. 
 appoint, nommer. 
 approach, s'approcher (de). 
 approve, approuver. 
 architect, architecte, m. 
 ardour, ardeur, /. 
 are, see be. 
 arm, bras, m. 
 armchair, fauteuil, m. 
 army, armee, /. 
 around, autour de. 
 arrange, arranger, 
 arrival, arrivee, /. 
 arrive, arriver. 
 article, article, m., objet, m. 
 artist, artiste, m. or f. 
 as, comme, puisque, aussi, si, que; 
 - well , aussi bien que; 
 
 for, quant a; much , autant 
 
 que. 
 ask, demander (a), prier; a 
 
 question, poser (faire) une 
 
 question; he has only to , 
 
 il n'a qu'a demander; after, 
 
 s'informer de; for, demander; 
 
 of one another, se demander. 
 
 asparagus, asperges, /. pi. 
 astonished, etonne, surpris. 
 at, a; chez; not all, pas du tout 
 Atlantic, Atlantique, m. or f. 
 attend, assist er a. 
 attention, attention, /. ; call to, 
 appeler (attirer) F attention sur. 
 attract, attirer. 
 August, aout, m. 
 aunt, tante, /. 
 author, auteur, m. or f. 
 automobile, automobile, m. or f. 
 autumn, automne, m. or f. 
 avoid, eviter. 
 axe, 'hache, /. 
 
 back, fond, m. ; dos, m. ; be , etre 
 
 de retour. 
 bad, mauvais; be weather, 
 
 faire mauvais (temps). 
 badly, mal. 
 
 baggage, bagages, m. pi. 
 bake, cuire, faire cuire. 
 baker, boulanger, m. 
 baking, cuisson, /. 
 ball, bal, m. 
 ballot, box, urne, /.; paper, 
 
 bulletin (m.) de vote, 
 bank, banque, /. 
 barber, coiffeur, m. 
 bare, nu. 
 barley, orge, /. 
 barn, grange, /.; yard, basse- 
 
 cour, /. 
 
 basket, panier, m. 
 Bastille, Bastille, /. 
 bath, bain, m.; room, salle (/.) 
 
 de bains. 
 
 bathe, se baigner. 
 bay, baie, /. 
 be, sign of the progressive form 
 
 untranslated in French; etre, se 
 
 porter, aller, y avoir, se trou- 
 
 ver, faire (of weather), devoir; we 
 
ENGLISH-FRENCH VOCABULARY 
 
 289 
 
 are to stay, nous devons rester; 
 
 better, valoir inieux. 
 beach, plage, /. 
 beam, poutre, /. 
 bear, ours, ra.; pit, fosse (/.) 
 
 aux ours, 
 beast, bete, /. 
 beat, battre. 
 beautiful, beau, 
 beauty, beaute, /. 
 beaver, castor, m. 
 because, parce que; of that, a 
 
 cause de cela. 
 become, aller, convenir; devenir; 
 
 what has of her?, qu'est-elle 
 
 devenue? 
 
 bed, lit, m.; room, chambre 
 (/.) a Voucher; go to , se 
 coucher. 
 
 bee, abeille, /. 
 beechnut, faine, /. 
 beef, bceuf, m. 
 
 before, devant (of place), avant 
 
 (of time) ; auparavant; avant de, 
 
 avant que. 
 
 beforehand, d'avance. 
 beg, prier, demander; I of you, 
 
 je vous (en) prie. 
 begin, commencer. 
 beguile, tromper. 
 behind, derriere. 
 believe, croire. 
 belong, etre a, appartenir a. 
 beside, pres de, a cote de. 
 best, adj., le meilleur; adv., le 
 
 mieux. 
 
 better, adj., meilleur; adv., mieux. 
 between, entre. 
 Bible, Bible, /. 
 bicycle, bicyclette, /.; on a , a 
 
 bicyclette. 
 
 bicyclist, bicycliste, m. or f. 
 bid, good morning, dire bon- 
 
 jour. 
 
 big, gros. 
 bird, oiseau, m. 
 
 biscuit, biscuit, m. 
 
 black, noir. 
 
 blackboard, tableau (m.) noir. 
 
 blacksmith, forgeron, m. 
 
 bloom, fleur, /.; be in , tre en 
 
 fleur(s). 
 
 blossom, n., fleur, /. 
 blossom, v., fleurir. 
 blow, n., coup, m. 
 blow, v., souffler. 
 blue, bleu. 
 board, planche, /.; go on (ship), 
 
 s'embarquer; go on (train), 
 
 monter. 
 boat, bateau, m.; go boating, se 
 
 promener en bateau. 
 bodice, corsage, m. 
 body, corps, m. 
 book, livre, m. 
 bookcase, bibliotheque, /. 
 bore,.ennuyer. 
 born, be , naitre; he was , il 
 
 est ne, il naquit. 
 borrow, emprunter; from, 
 
 emprunter a. 
 Boston, Boston, m. 
 Botanical, Gardens, jardin (m.) 
 
 des plantes. 
 both, (tous) les deux, Fun (et) 
 
 Pautre. 
 
 bouquet, bouquet, m. 
 bow (to), saluer; to each 
 
 other, se saluer. 
 box, boite, /.; pasteboard , 
 
 carton, m.; (theatre) loge, /. 
 boy, enfant, m., gargon, m. 
 branch, branche, /. 
 brave, brave, courageux. 
 bread, pain, m. 
 break, casser. 
 breakfast, dejeuner, m. 
 brick, brique, /. 
 bridge, pont, m. 
 
 bring, apporter, amener, trans- 
 porter. 
 broad, large. 
 
290 
 
 ENGLISH-FRENCH VOCABULARY 
 
 brother, frere, m. ; in-law, beau- 
 
 frere. 
 
 brush, n., brosse, /. 
 brush, v., brosser. 
 build, batir, construire, faire. 
 building, construction, /., bati- 
 
 ment, m. 
 bunch, botte, /. 
 bureau, commode, /. 
 burn, bruler. 
 burning, ardent, 
 business, affaires, /. pi. ; man, 
 
 homme d'affaires, 
 busy, occupe*; en train de. 
 but, mais; que; ne . . . que. 
 butter, beurre, m. 
 button, bouton, m.; hole, bou- 
 
 tonniere, /. 
 
 buy, acheter; oneself, s'acheter. 
 by, par, de; sur; en. 
 
 cabbage, chou, m. 
 
 cabinet-maker, ebeniste, m. 
 
 cafe, cafe, m. 
 
 cake, gateau, m. 
 
 calculate, calculer. 
 
 call, appeler; attirer; be called, 
 
 s'appeler; what do you that? 
 
 comment appelez-vous cela? 
 camel, chameau, m. 
 can, pouvoir, savoir. 
 Canada, Canada, m. 
 Canadian, canadien. 
 candidate, candidat, m. 
 candle, (tallow) chandelle,/., (wax) 
 
 bougie, /. 
 
 candy, bonbons, m. pi. 
 cane, canne, /. 
 capital, capitale, /. 
 captain, capitaine. 
 capture, prise, /. 
 care, soin, m.; for, soigner; I 
 
 don't , cela m'est e*gal; take 
 
 , prendre garde; avoir som. 
 
 carefully, soigneusement. 
 carelessness, negligence, /. 
 carpenter, charpentier, m., menui- 
 
 sier, m. 
 
 carpet, tapis, m. 
 carriage, voiture, /. 
 carrot, carotte, /. 
 carry, porter, transporter; off, 
 
 emporter; the day, Fern- 
 porter. 
 
 carve, sculpter. 
 case, cas, m. 
 casino, casino, m. 
 casket, coffret, m. 
 cast, jeter, de*poser; (of metals) 
 
 fondre. 
 
 cast iron, fonte, /. 
 castle, chateau, m. 
 cat, chat, m. 
 catch, attraper, prendre; get (be) 
 
 caught, se laisser prendre, se 
 
 faire prendre. 
 cause, n., cause, /. 
 cause, v., faire. 
 caviare, caviar (e), m. 
 celebrated, celebre, fameux. 
 celebration, fete, /. 
 Celestine, Celestine. 
 cellar, cave, /. 
 
 cent, sou, m., cinq centimes, m. 
 centime, centime, m. 
 centimetre, centimetre, m. 
 century, siecle, m. 
 certain, certain, 
 certainly, certainement, sure- 
 
 ment. 
 chair, chaise, /., siege, m., fauteuil, 
 
 m. 
 
 chalk, craie, /. 
 change, changer (de). 
 Channel, English , la Manche, 
 chapter, chapitre, m. 
 charge, faire payer. 
 Charles, Charles. 
 charming, charmant, ravissant. 
 chat, causer. 
 
ENGLISH-FRENCH VOCABULARY 
 
 291 
 
 cheap, (a) bon marche*; cheaper, 
 
 a meilleur marche*. 
 cheaply, (a) bon marche". 
 cheese, fromage, m. 
 chemist, pharmacien, m. 
 Cherbourg, Cherbourg, m. 
 cherry, cerise, /. 
 chestnut, marronnier, m. 
 Chicago, Chicago, m. 
 child, enfant, m. or f. 
 choose, choisir. 
 Christmas, Noel, m.; day, le 
 
 jour de Noel, 
 church, eglise, /. 
 churn, n., baratte, /. 
 churn, t;., battre le beurre. 
 citizen, citoyen, m. 
 city, ville, /. 
 
 civilization, civilisation, /. 
 clap, battre; hands, battre des 
 
 mains. 
 
 Clara, Claire, Clara, 
 class, classe, /.; room, classe, 
 
 /., salle (/.) declasse, 
 clean, adj., propre. 
 clean, v., nettoyer. 
 cleanliness, proprete, /. 
 clear, adj., clair. 
 clear, v., de"fricher. 
 clerk, employe, m., commis, m. 
 clever, habile. 
 cleverly, habilement. 
 climate, climat, m. 
 close, fermer. 
 cloth, etoffe, /., drap, m. 
 clothes, habits, m. pi., vetements, 
 
 m. pi. 
 
 coachman, cocher, m. 
 coal, charbon, m. 
 coal-oil, petrole, m. 
 coat, habit, m. 
 cocoon, cocon, m. 
 coffee, cafe", m.; and (with) 
 
 milk, cafe au lait; cup, tasse 
 
 (/.) a cafe. 
 cold, adj., froid; n. t rhume, m.; 
 
 catch , s'enrhumer; be , (of 
 
 weather) faire froid, (of living 
 
 beings) avoir froid. 
 collar, col, m.; (detachable) faux 
 
 col, m. 
 
 college, college, m. 
 collision, collision, /. 
 colonel, colonel, m. 
 comb, peigne, m. 
 come, venir, arriver; out, sortir; 
 
 home, rentrer ; in, entrer ; 
 
 and (to) see, venir voir; near, 
 
 approcher, s'approcher; come! 
 
 voyons! with, venir avec, 
 
 accompagner. 
 comfort, confort, m. 
 comfortable, be , etre bien, etre 
 
 confortable. 
 commit, commettre. 
 comparison, comparaison, /. 
 compartment, compartiment, m. 
 complain, se plaindre. 
 complete, terminer, achever. 
 completely, completement, tout 
 
 fait. 
 
 composition, composition, /. 
 comrade, camarade, m. or f. 
 conceited, suffisant. 
 conceive, imaginer. 
 concert, concert, m. 
 condition, etat, m., condition, /. 
 conduct, n., conduite, /. 
 conduct oneself, se conduire. 
 confess, avouer. 
 conquest, conquete, /. 
 consequently, par consequent. 
 considerable, considerable. 
 constantly, const amment. 
 consumption, consommation, / c 
 contain, contenir. 
 contented, content, satisfait. 
 continue, continuer. 
 cook, n., cuisiniere, /. 
 cook, v., cuire, faire cuire. 
 cool, frais. 
 copper, cuivre, m. 
 
292 
 
 ENGLISH-FRENCH VOCABULARY 
 
 coral, corail, m. 
 
 correct, corriger. 
 
 cost, couter. 
 
 cough, tousser. 
 
 could, pouvais, pourrais; I 
 
 have, j'aurais pu. 
 councillor, conseiller, m. 
 count, compter. 
 countess, comtesse. 
 country, pays, m., campagne, /.; 
 
 people, paysans; man, pay- 
 
 san; woman, paysanne. 
 courage, courage, m. 
 court, courtyard, cour, /. 
 cousin, cousin, m., cousine, /. 
 'cover,' n., couvert, m. 
 cover, v., couvrir. 
 cow, vache. 
 Cro3sus, Cresus. 
 crop, n., recolte, /., moisson, /. 
 crop, v., brouter. 
 cross, adj., mechant. 
 cross, v., traverser. 
 cruel, cruel, 
 cuff, manchette, /. 
 cup, tasse, /. 
 cupboard, armoire, /. 
 curtain, rideau, m. 
 customer, client, m. 
 cut, cutting, n., coupe, /., taille, /. 
 cut, v., couper, tailler; down, 
 
 couper. 
 
 dairy, laiterie, /. 
 
 damp, humide. 
 
 dance, danser; dancing party, 
 soiree dansante. 
 
 dare, oser. 
 
 dark, obscur; it is , il fait obscur. 
 
 darkness, obscurite, /. 
 
 date, date, /. 
 
 daughter, fille, /. 
 
 day, jour, m., journee,/.; every , 
 tous les jours; in our , de nos 
 jours; all , toute la journee. 
 
 deal, a great (good) , beaucoup, 
 
 dealer, marchand, m. 
 
 dear, adj., adv., cher. 
 
 death, mort, /. 
 
 decay, pourrir. 
 
 deceive, tromper. 
 
 December, decembre, m. 
 
 decorate, decorer, orner. 
 
 decoration, decoration, /. 
 
 delighted, enchante. 
 
 deliver (a lecture), faire. 
 
 department, rayon, m. 
 
 depend, dependre. 
 
 deposit, deposer. 
 
 derive, tirer. 
 
 describe, decrire. 
 
 desire, desirer. 
 
 dessert, dessert, m. 
 
 dictionary, dictionnaire, m. 
 
 die, mourir; he died, il est mort, il 
 mourut. 
 
 diet, regime, m.', prescribe a , 
 mettre au regime. 
 
 difference, difference, /.; that 
 makes no , cela ne fait rien. 
 
 different, different. 
 
 difficult, difficile. 
 
 difficulty, difficulte, /. 
 
 diligent, diligent. 
 
 dine, diner. 
 
 dining room, salle (/.) a manger. 
 
 dinner, diner, m. 
 
 discover, decouvrir. 
 
 dish, plat, m. ; dishes, vaisselle, /. 
 
 distant, lointain. 
 
 disturb, deranger. 
 
 dive, plonger. 
 
 do, sign of emphatic form, untrans- 
 lated in French; faire, rendre; 
 be done, se faire. 
 
 doctor, medecin, m., docteur, m. 
 
 dog, chien, m. 
 
 dollar, dollar, m., piastre, /. 
 
 door, porte, /. 
 
 doubt, douter (de). 
 
 dough, pate, /. 
 
ENGLISH-FRENCH VOCABULARY 
 
 293 
 
 downstairs, en bas; go , des- 
 
 cendre (Fescalier). 
 dozen, douzaine, /. 
 draw near, s'approcher (de). 
 drawer, tiroir, m. 
 drawing-room, salon, m. 
 dress, n., mise, /.; robe, /. 
 dress, v., faire sa toilette; s'habil- 
 
 ler, se mettre. 
 dressed, mis, habille. 
 dress coat, habit, m. 
 dressing table, toilette, /. 
 dressmaker, couturiere, /. 
 drink, boire. 
 drive, n., promenade (/.) en voi- 
 
 ture; go for a , (aller) se pro- 
 
 mener en voiture. 
 drive, v., se promener en voiture, 
 
 aller en voiture. 
 drop, laisser tomber. 
 drum, tambour, m. 
 dry, sec. 
 
 duck, canard, m. 
 during, pendant, 
 duty, devoir, m. 
 dwelling, habitation, /. 
 
 E 
 
 each, chaque, chacun, tout, tous 
 les; other, Fun (a) Fautre. 
 
 eager, desirer beaucoup, tenir 
 beaucoup a. 
 
 early, de bonne heure; in the 
 morning, de grand matin; at an 
 age, en bas age; earlier, de 
 meilleure heure, plus tot. 
 
 earn, gagner. 
 
 earth, terre, /. 
 
 easily, facilement. 
 
 easy, facile. 
 
 eat, manger. 
 
 educated, instruit. 
 
 Edward, Edouard. 
 
 effect, v., realiser. 
 
 egg, ceuf, m. 
 
 eight, huit. 
 
 eighteen, dix-huit. 
 
 eighty, quatre-vingts. 
 
 eighty-five, quatre-vingt-cinq. 
 
 either, ou; ... or, ou ... ou; 
 not ... . : . or, ne . . . ni . . . 
 ni; nor I , ni moi non plus. 
 
 elect, elire. 
 
 election, election, /. 
 
 elector, electeur, m. 
 
 electric, electrique. 
 
 electricity, electricite, /. 
 
 elephant, elephant, m. 
 
 eleven, onze. 
 
 embark, s'embarquer. 
 
 employ, employer. 
 
 end, n., bout, m., fin, /. 
 
 end, v., finir. 
 
 endure, endurer, souffrir, suppor- 
 ter. 
 
 enemy, ennemi, m. 
 
 engine, locomotive, /. 
 
 England, Angleterre, /. 
 
 English, anglais; man, Anglais; 
 woman, Anglaise. 
 
 engraving, gravure, /. 
 
 enjoy, oneself, s'amuser; se 
 plaire. 
 
 enough, assez; time , assez de 
 temps. 
 
 enter, entrer (dans). 
 
 entrance, entree, /. 
 
 equal, adj., egal. 
 
 equal, v. f egaler. 
 
 equestrian, equestre. 
 
 escape, echapper (a). 
 
 escort, escorter. 
 
 especially, surtout. 
 
 establish, etablir, fonder. 
 
 etching, (gravure (/.) a) Feau-forte, 
 
 Europe, Europe, /. 
 
 even, meme. 
 
 evening, soir, m. ; dress, toilette 
 (/.) de soiree (bal); the be- 
 fore, la veille; good , bonsoir. 
 
 ever, jamais. 
 
294 
 
 ENGLISH-FRENCH VOCABULARY 
 
 every, tout, chaque; morning, 
 
 tous les matins, 
 everybody, tout le monde. 
 everything, tout, 
 everywhere, partout. 
 exact (ly), precis, exact, 
 exaggerate, exage"rer. 
 examination, examen, m. 
 example, exemple, m.; for , par 
 
 exemple. 
 
 exceed, depasser. 
 excellent, excellent, 
 exclaim, s'ecrier. 
 excursion, excursion, /. 
 execute, excuter. 
 exercise, devoir, m. 
 exercise book, cahier, m. 
 exhibition, exposition, /. 
 exist, exister. 
 existence, existence, /. 
 expect, espe*rer, compter, attendre, 
 
 s'attendre a; what can you ? 
 
 que voulez-vous qu'on (y) f asse? 
 explain, expliquer. 
 express, exprimer. 
 exquisite, exquis. 
 eye, ceil, m.; pi., yeux. 
 
 fable, fable, /. 
 
 face, figure, /. 
 
 fact, fait, m. ; in , en eff et. 
 
 fail, manquer; (at examination) 
 
 ne pas etre regu, etre refuse, 
 
 echouer. 
 fall, n., chute, /. 
 fall, v., tomber. 
 family, f amille, /. 
 famous, celebre. 
 far, loin; as as, aussi loin que; 
 
 how on is he? ou en est-il? 
 
 too, beaucoup trop. 
 farm, ferme, /., proprie'te, /. 
 farmer, cultivateur, m. 
 farmhouse, ferme, /. 
 
 fashion, mode, /. ; in the Italian , 
 , a 1'italienne. 
 
 fashionable, a la mode. 
 
 fast, vite; be too , avancer. 
 
 father, pere, m.; pere de famille. 
 
 fault, f aute, /. 
 
 fear, n., crainte, /., peur, /. ; for 
 of (that) de crainte de (que). 
 
 fear, v., cfaindre, avoir peur. 
 
 February, fevrier, m. 
 
 feed, donner a manger a. 
 
 feel, sentir, tater; (of health) se 
 sentir. 
 
 fellow, gargon. 
 
 festivity, fete, /. 
 
 few, peu, quelques. j 
 
 field, champ, m. 
 
 fifteen, quinze. 
 
 fifty, cinquante. 
 
 fight, se battre. 
 
 figure, figure, /. 
 
 finally, enfin, a la fin; finir par. 
 
 find, trouver. 
 
 fine, beau, bel, belle; it is (of 
 weather), il fait beau; look- 
 ing, beau. 
 
 finger, doigt, m. 
 
 finish, finir, terminer, achever. 
 
 fire, feu, m. 
 
 first, premier; (at) , d'abord; I 
 was the to see it, je 1'ai vu le 
 premier. 
 
 fish, poisson, m. 
 
 fishing, peche, /. ; go , aller a la 
 peche. 
 
 fit, aller. 
 
 five, cinq. 
 
 flake, flocon, m. 
 
 flat, etage, m., appartement, m. 
 
 floor, parquet, m.; 6tage, m. 
 
 flour, f arine, /. 
 
 flow, couler. 
 
 flower, fleur, /.; garden, par- 
 terre, m. 
 
 flower girl, bouquetiere. 
 
 fluid, fluide, m. 
 
ENGLISH-FRENCH VOCABULARY 
 
 295 
 
 - fly, n., mouche, /. 
 
 fly, v., voler. 
 
 folding door, porte (/.) a deux 
 battants. 
 
 foliage, feuillage, ra. 
 
 follow, suivre; following, suivant. 
 
 fond, be of, aimer. 
 
 foot, pied, m. ; on , a pied. 
 
 for, prep., pour, par, depuis, pen- 
 dant. 
 
 for, conj. f car. 
 
 forbid, defendre. 
 
 forest, foret, /. 
 
 forget, oublier. 
 
 fork, fourchette, /. 
 
 form, former, se former. 
 
 former, ancien; celui-la. 
 
 formerly, autrefois, anciennement. 
 
 forth, and so , et ainsi de suite. 
 
 fortnight, quinze jours, une quin- 
 zaine. 
 
 fortunate, heureux. 
 
 fortunately, heureusement. 
 
 forty, quarante. 
 
 four, quatre. 
 
 fourteen, quatorze. 
 
 fourth, quatrieme; a , un quart. 
 
 franc, franc, m. 
 
 France, France, /. 
 
 free, libre. 
 
 freeze, geler. 
 
 French, frangais; man, Fran- 
 gais. 
 
 fresh, frais. 
 
 Friday, vendredi, m. 
 
 friend, ami, ra., amie, /. 
 
 frighten, faire peur a. 
 
 frock coat, redingote, /. 
 
 from, de; them, en; a week 
 to-day, d'aujourd'hui en huit. 
 
 front, in of, devant. 
 
 fruit, fruit, m. 
 
 full, plein. 
 
 fun, make of, se moquer de, 
 rire de. 
 
 furnish, meubler. 
 
 furniture, meubles, m. pi., mobi- 
 
 lier, m. s. 
 future, avenir, m. 
 
 game, jeu, m. 
 
 garden, jardin, m. 
 
 garment, vetement, m. 
 
 gas, gaz, m. 
 
 gate, porte, /., barriere, /. 
 
 gather, cueillir; up, ramasser. 
 
 general, general, m. 
 
 generally, gene"ralement, ordinaire- 
 ment. 
 
 gentle, bon, doux. 
 
 gentleman, monsieur; homme(tres) 
 comme il faut; galant homme, 
 homme de bonne societe. 
 
 geography, geographic, /. 
 
 George, George (s). 
 
 German, allemand. 
 
 Germany, Allemagne, /. 
 
 get, avoir, prendre, recevoir, ob- 
 tenir, faire; himself . . . made, 
 se faire faire; them to come, 
 faites-les venir; go to (and) , 
 aller chercher; come to (and) 
 , venir chercher (trouver, pren- 
 dre); out, sortir; up, se 
 lever. 
 
 gift, cadeau, m. 
 
 girl, fille, jeune fille. 
 
 give (away), donner; (offer) offrir; 
 
 back, rendre. 
 glacier, glacier, m. 
 glad, heureux, content. 
 
 glass, verre, ra.; glasses, lunettes, 
 
 f.pl 
 
 glassware, verrerie, /. 
 glee, joie, /. 
 glove, gant, m. 
 go, aller, passer, marcher, partir; 
 
 away, s'en aller, partir; 
 with, accompagner; out, 
 sortir; in (into), entrer 
 (dans); home, rentrer, aller 
 
296 
 
 ENGLISH-FRENCH VOCABULARY 
 
 chez soi; on, avancer; 
 down, descendre; up, monter; 
 near, s'approcher (de) ; to 
 (and) see, aller voir; on, se 
 passer; for, aller chercher; 
 back, retourner. 
 
 Gobelin, Gobelins, m. pi. 
 
 going out, sortie, /., sortir, m. 
 
 gold, or, m.; golden, d'or. 
 
 good, n., bien, m. 
 
 good, adj., bon, sage; be no , 
 ne valoir rien; will you be 
 enough, be enough, veuillez, 
 voulez-vous bien. 
 
 good-bye, adieu, au revoir. 
 
 gorge, gorge, /. 
 
 gospel, Evangile, m. 
 
 grain, grain, m. 
 
 grammar, grammaire, /. 
 
 grandfather, grand-pere. 
 
 grandmother, grand'mere. 
 
 grandparents, grands-parents. 
 
 grass, herbe, /. 
 
 gratitude, reconnaissance, /. 
 
 gravely, gravement. 
 
 great, grand; a deal, beaucoup. 
 
 greedily, avidement. 
 
 green, vert. 
 
 grind, moudre. 
 
 'grippe,' grippe, /. 
 
 grocer, Spicier, m. 
 
 ground, terre, /. 
 
 ground floor, rez-de-chausse'e, m. 
 
 group, groupe, m. 
 
 grow, ppusser, croitre; large (r), 
 grossir. 
 
 grudge, have a against, en 
 vouloir a. 
 
 H 
 
 hair, cheveux, m. pi.', dress the 
 
 , (se) coiffer. 
 half, demi; moitie", /.; past one, 
 
 une heure et demie. 
 hall, salle, /. ; corridor, m. 
 hammer, marteau, m. 
 
 hand, main, /. 
 
 handkerchief, mou choir, m.\ 
 
 pocket , mouchoir de poche. 
 handsome, beau. 
 happen, arriver, se passer, avoir 
 
 lieu. 
 
 happiness, boisheur, m. 
 happy, heureux, content, 
 hard, dur; difficile; fort, 
 harvest, n., moisson, /., re*colte, /. 
 harvest, v., moissonner. 
 harvester, moissonneur, m. 
 haste, 'hate, /.; make , se de- 
 
 pe'cher. 
 
 hasten, se 'hater, se depecher. 
 hat, chapeau, m. 
 hatter, chapelier, m. 
 have, avoir, e^re, faire; to, 
 
 falloir, devoir; shall to, il 
 
 faudra; to made, faire faire; 
 
 you only to, vous n'avez qu'a. 
 Havre, le 'Havre. 
 hay, foin, m. 
 he, il, lui; celui. 
 head, tete, /. ; (of grain) e*pi, m. ; 
 
 ache, mal (m.) de tete, mal a la 
 
 tete. 
 
 health, sante", /. 
 hear, entendre; say (tell), 
 
 entendre dire; from, re- 
 
 cevoir des nouvelles de; of, 
 
 entendre parler de; we have 
 
 heard, nous avons entendu dire 
 
 or on nous a dit. 
 heart, coeur, m. 
 heat, n., chaleur, /. 
 heat, v., chauffer. 
 heating, n., chauffage, m. 
 heaven, ciel, m. 
 heavily, fort, 
 heavy, lourd; e*pais. 
 Helen, Helene. 
 
 help, aider; oneself, s'aider. 
 hen, poule,/. 
 
 hence, aussi, par consequent. 
 Henry, Henri. 
 
ENGLISH-FRENCH VOCABULARY 
 
 297 
 
 her, son, sa, ses; la, lui, elle; hers, 
 
 a elle, le sien (etc.). 
 here, ici; is, voici, voila; he 
 
 is, le voici, le voila. 
 hide, cacher; se cacher. 
 high, haut, eleve; cher. 
 him, le, lui. 
 hinder, empecher. 
 his, son, sa, ses; a lui, le sien (etc.). 
 historian, historien, m. 
 history, histoire, /. 
 hodman, aide-ma^on, m. 
 hold, n.j cale, /. 
 hold, v.j tenir. 
 hole, trou, m. 
 holiday, fete, /., (jour de) conge, 
 
 m. ; holidays, vacances, /. pi. 
 home, maison, /.; (at) , a la 
 
 maison, chez lui (etc.); make 
 
 yourself at , ne vous genez 
 
 pas. 
 homemade, bread, pain (m.) de 
 
 menage, 
 honey, miel, m. 
 hope, esperer, compter. 
 horse, cheval, m.; on back, a 
 
 cheval. 
 
 horticultural, horticole. 
 hospital, hopital, m. 
 hot, chaud. 
 hour, heure, /. 
 house, maison, /. ; menage, m. ; at 
 
 the of, chez ; maid, femme 
 
 de chambre; wife, menagere. 
 household, menage, m. 
 how, comment? comme! que! 
 
 many, much, combien? 
 however, cependant, pourtant; 
 
 quelque . . . que; it may be, 
 
 quoi qu'il en soit. 
 human, humain. 
 hundred (a), cent; about a , 
 
 une centaine. 
 hunger, faim, /. 
 hungry, be , avoir faim. 
 hunt, chasser. 
 
 hurt, faire mal a; oneself, 
 
 se faire mal. 
 husband, mari. 
 
 I, je, moi. 
 
 ice, glace, /. 
 
 idle, oisif, paresseux. 
 
 idleness, oisivete, /. 
 
 if, si; (before il, ils) s'. 
 
 ill, malade. 
 
 ill-mannered, mal eleve". 
 
 illustrate, illustrer. 
 
 imagine, se figurer. 
 
 impatiently, impatiemment. 
 
 import, importer. 
 
 important, important; it is , il 
 importe, il est important. 
 
 impossible, impossible. 
 
 improvement, perfect ionnement, 
 m. 
 
 in, dans, en, a, de; it (them), y; 
 to be , y etre. 
 
 inch, pouce, m. 
 
 increase, augmenter; keeps in- 
 creasing, va en augment ant. 
 
 indeed, bien, en effet. 
 
 industrious, diligent. 
 
 inflammably inflammable. 
 
 influenza, grippe, /. 
 
 inform, informer, faire savoir. 
 
 inhabit, habiter. 
 
 ink, encre, /. 
 
 inquire, s' informer. 
 
 instruct, instruire. 
 
 intelligence, intelligence, /. 
 
 intelligent, intelligent. 
 
 intend, avoir rintention de. 
 
 interest, interesser. 
 
 interesting, interessant. 
 
 interior, interieur, m. 
 
 into, dans, en. 
 
 introduce, presenter. 
 
 invent, inventer, imaginer, 
 
 invitation, invitation, /. 
 
 invite, inviter. 
 
298 
 
 ENGLISH-FRENCH VOCABULARY 
 
 iron, fer, m. 
 
 irregular, deregle. 
 
 is, see be. 
 
 it, il, elle; le, la; cela; ce. 
 
 Italian, italien. 
 
 its, son, sa, ses. 
 
 ivory, ivoire, m. 
 
 kiss, embrasser. 
 kitchen, cuisine, /. 
 knead, petrir. 
 kneading trough, petrin, m. 
 knife, couteau, m. 
 knock, frapper. 
 
 know, connaitre, savoir; how to, 
 savoir. 
 
 James, Jacques. 
 
 Jane, Jeanne. 
 
 January, Janvier, m. ' 
 
 jewel, bijou, m. 
 
 John, Jean. 
 
 join, joindre. 
 
 joiner, menuisier, m. 
 
 * jolly fellow/ bon vivant, m. 
 
 journey, voyage, m. 
 
 joy, joie, /. 
 
 Julian, Julien. 
 
 July, juillet, m. 
 
 jump, sauter. 
 
 just, seulement; have , venir 
 
 de; have come, venir d'ar- 
 
 river. 
 
 keep, tenir, garder; house, 
 
 faire le menage; to the house, 
 
 garder la maison. 
 keeper, gardien, m. 
 key, clef, /. 
 kill, tuer. 
 kilo, contr. of kilogramme (about 
 
 2 Ibs.). 
 
 kilometre, kilometre, m. 
 kind, n.j espece, /., sorte, /.; what 
 
 of weather is it? quel temps 
 
 fait-il? 
 kind, adj., aimable, bon; to, 
 
 bon pour. 
 kindly, will you , veuillez (bien), 
 
 ayez la bonte" de. 
 kindness, bonte, obligeance, /. 
 king, roi. 
 
 ladder, echelle, /. 
 
 laden, charge. 
 
 lady, dame; ladies, dames, mes- 
 
 dames; young ladies, demoi- 
 selles, jeunes filles. 
 lake, lac, m. 
 lamp, lampe, /. 
 land, n., terre, /. 
 land, v., debarquer. 
 landlord, proprietaire, m. or f. 
 landscape, paysage, m. 
 language, langue, /. 
 large, grand, gros; grow , 
 
 grossir. 
 last, adj., dernier, passe; at , a 
 
 la fin, enfin; year, Fannee 
 
 passee (derniere). 
 last, v., durer. 
 late, tard, en retard; later, plus 
 
 tard. 
 
 Latin, latin, m. 
 latter, dernier; celui-ci. 
 laugh, rire. 
 
 law, loi, /. ; against the , de"f endu. 
 lay, placer, poser; the cloth, 
 
 mettre le couvert. 
 laziness, paresse, /. 
 lazy, paresseux. 
 lead, mener. 
 leaf, feuille,/.; leaves, feuilles, pi., 
 
 feuillage, m. 
 
 leap-year, annee (/.) bissextile, 
 learn, apprendre. 
 least, adj., moindre; adv., moins; 
 
 at , au (du) moins. 
 leave, laisser; partir (de); quitter. 
 
ENGLISH-FRENCH VOCABULARY 
 
 299 
 
 lecture, cours, w. 
 
 left, gauche; on the , a (la) 
 
 gauche, 
 leg, jambe, /. 
 lend, preter. 
 less, moins. 
 
 lesson, legon, /., devoir, m. 
 let, laisser, faire; (with impve.) 
 
 que; us go, partons; him 
 
 go, qu'il parte; us sit down, 
 
 asseyons-nous. 
 letter, lettre, /. 
 library, bibliotheque, /. 
 lie, etre couche; down, se 
 
 coucher. 
 life, vie, /. 
 light, n., lumiere, /. 
 light, adj., leger; lighter, plus 
 
 leger, moins lourd. 
 light, v., eclairer; (kindle) allumer. 
 lighting, n., eclairage, m. 
 like, v., aimer; vouloir, trouver, se 
 
 plaire; I should , je voudrais 
 
 (bien); better (best), aimer 
 
 mieux. 
 
 like, adv., comme. 
 likewise, pareillement. 
 limp, boiter. 
 
 line, n., ligne,/. ; (of poetry) vers, m. 
 line, v.j doubler. 
 linen, linge, m. 
 lion, lion, ra. 
 listen (to), e"couter. 
 little, adj., petit; adv., peu. 
 live, vivre; demeurer; (in), ha- 
 
 biter; on, vivre de. 
 living, vie, /.; good , bonne 
 
 chere, /. 
 
 loaf (of bread), pain, m. 
 Loire, Loire, /. 
 London, Londres, m. 
 lonesome, be , s'ennuyer. 
 long, long, longtemps; a time, 
 
 longtemps; no longer, ne . . . 
 
 plus; how ?, depuis quand? 
 
 as as, tant que; be , tarder. 
 
 look (at), regarder; for, cher- 
 
 cher; they (/.) gentle, elles ont 
 
 Fair douces. 
 loose, detache; become , se 
 
 detacher, 
 lose, perdre. 
 loss, perte, /. 
 lot, terrain, m. 
 Louis, Lewis, Louis. 
 Louisa, Louise. 
 Louvre, Louvre, m. 
 love, aimer; one another, 
 
 s' aimer. 
 low, bas. 
 
 lower, v. tr., descendre. 
 Lucy, Lucie. 
 luggage, bagages, m. pi. 
 Luke, Luc. 
 
 lunch, n., dejeuner, m. 
 lunch, v.j dejeuner. 
 Luxembourg, Luxembourg, m. 
 Lyons, Lyon, m. 
 
 M 
 
 madam, madame. 
 magnificent, magnifique. 
 mahogany, acajou, m. 
 maid, bonne, /., servante, /., 
 
 domestique, /. 
 mail, courrier, m. 
 majority, majorite", /. 
 make, faire, rendre; have made 
 
 for oneself, se faire faire; is 
 
 made of, fait de (en). 
 mamma, maman. 
 man, homme; young men, jeunes 
 
 gens. 
 manner, maniere, /.; of-living, 
 
 vie, /. 
 many, beaucoup; a great (good) 
 
 , beaucoup de; bien des; as 
 
 as, autant. 
 map, carte, /. 
 marble, marbre, m. ; ( for playing) 
 
 bille, /. 
 
300 
 
 ENGLISH-FRENCH VOCABULARY 
 
 march, marche, /. 
 
 Marcus Aurelius, Marc-Airrele. 
 
 Margaret, Marguerite. 
 
 market, marche, m. 
 
 marriage, manage, m. 
 
 marry, marier (of parents and 
 
 officials), epouser (of contracting 
 
 parties)^ be (get) married, se 
 
 marier. 
 
 Marseilles, Marseille,/. 
 Mary, Marie, 
 mason, magon, m. 
 mass, messe, /. 
 
 master, maitre, m., professeur, m. 
 material, e"toffe, /.; materiaux, 
 
 m. pi. 
 matter, affaire, /. ; it is a of, il 
 
 s'agit de; what is the with 
 
 you? qu'avez-vous? no 
 
 which, n'importe lequel. 
 mature, mur. 
 May, n. mai, m. 
 
 may, v. pouvoir; it be, il sepeut. 
 me, me, moi. 
 meadow, pre, m. 
 mean, vouloir dire, 
 meaning, signification, /. 
 means, moyen, m. 
 measure, mesure, /. 
 meat, viande, /. 
 
 medicine, medecine, /. ; remede, m. 
 meet, rencontrer; each other, se 
 
 rencontrer; make (both) ends , 
 
 joindre les deux bouts, 
 mention, mentionner, parler de; 
 
 don't it, il n'y a pas de quoi. 
 menu, menu, m. 
 merchant, marchand, m. 
 merit, merite, m. 
 merry, gai, joyeux. 
 merry-go-round, chevaux (m. pi.) 
 
 de bois. 
 
 metre, metre, m. 
 midnight, minuit, m. 
 mild, doux. 
 milk, n., lait, m. 
 
 milk, v., tirer, traire. 
 
 miller, meunier, m. 
 
 mind, never , n'importe. 
 
 mine, a moi, le mien; a friend of 
 
 , un de mes amis. 
 minute, minute, /., moment, m. 
 mirror, miroir, m. 
 misfortune, maiheur, m. 
 Miss, n., mademoiselle, 
 miss, v.j manquer. 
 Mississippi, Mississipi, m. 
 mistake, erreur, /.; make (s), se 
 
 tromper. 
 mistaken, be , se tromper; if I 
 
 am not , si je ne me trompe. 
 moderate, moderer. 
 modern, moderne. 
 moment, moment, m. 
 Monday, lundi, m. 
 money, argent, m. 
 monkey, singe, m. 
 month, mois, m. 
 Montreal, Montreal, m. 
 more, encore, plus, davantage; 
 
 any , encore; no , ne . . . 
 
 plus; some , encore; the 
 
 . . . the . . ., plus . . . plus. 
 morning, matin, m.; coat, ja- 
 
 quette, /.; good , bonjour. 
 most, le plus, la plupart de. 
 mother, mere, /. 
 mother-of-pearl, nacre, /. 
 motor-car, automobile, m. or f. 
 mountain, montagne, /. 
 move, remuer, mouvoir; se mettre 
 
 en branle. 
 
 Mr., Monsieur (contr. M.). 
 Mrs., Madame (contr. M me ). 
 Mt. Blanc, le mont Blanc, 
 much, beaucoup; very , beau- 
 
 coup, bien; as as, autant 
 
 que; so , tant, tellement. 
 mud, boue, /. 
 
 muddy, be , faire de la boue. 
 municipal, municipal, 
 municipality, commune, /. 
 
ENGLISH-FRENCH VOCABULARY 
 
 301 
 
 museum, musee, m. 
 
 music, musique, /. 
 
 must, falloir, devoir; we , il nous 
 faut, il faut que nous, nous de- 
 vons; not, il ne faut pas; 
 have been, a du etre. 
 
 my, mon, ma, mes. 
 
 myself, moi-meme. 
 
 mysterious, mysterieux. 
 
 N 
 
 nail, clou, m. 
 
 name, n., nom, m. ; what is his ?, 
 
 comment s'appelle-t-il? my is, 
 
 je m'appelle. 
 name, v., nommer. 
 Napoleon, Napoleon, 
 narrow, etroit. 
 naughty, mechant. 
 near, pres (de); be (come) , 
 
 manquer de, penser, faillir, s'en 
 
 falloir de peu. 
 nearly, a peu pres, pres de, presque; 
 
 I fell, j'ai manque de tomber. 
 necessary, necessaire; be , etre 
 
 necessaire, falloir. 
 necklace, collier, m. 
 necktie, cravate, /. 
 need, avoir besoin de; il faut. 
 needle, aiguille, /. 
 neighbour, voisin, m. 
 neighbourhood, environs, m. pi. 
 neither, ni; . . . nor, ne . . . ni 
 
 . . . ni. 
 
 nephew, neveu. 
 nest, nid, m. 
 never, ne . . . jamais. 
 new, neuf, nouveau. 
 newly, recemment; married 
 
 couple, les nouveaux maries. 
 New Orleans, la Nouvelle-Or- 
 
 leans. 
 
 news, nouvelle(s), /. 
 newspaper, journal, m. 
 New Year's Day, le jour de 1'An. 
 
 New York, New-York. 
 
 next, ensuite, puis; procham; 
 
 what ? et avec c.a? the 
 
 day, le lendemain. 
 nice, gentil, aimable. 
 niece, niece. 
 night, nuit, /. ; last , hier au soir, 
 
 cette nuit. 
 nine, neuf. 
 nineteen, dix-neuf. 
 ninety, quatre-vingt-dix. 
 no, non; mais non; ne . . . pas; 
 
 letter, pas de lettre ; one, 
 
 personne. 
 
 nobody, ne . . . personne; per- 
 sonne. 
 
 noise, bruit, m. 
 none, ne . . . aucun (pasun) ; aucun; 
 
 pas; there are now, il n'y en 
 
 a plus. 
 
 noon, midi, m. 
 nor, ni; I either, ni moi non 
 
 plus. 
 
 Norman, normand. 
 Normandy, Normandie, /. 
 north, nord, m. 
 not, ne . . . pas, non; is it ? 
 
 n'est-ce pas? one, pas un(e); 
 
 at all, pas du tout, 
 note, billet, m., mot, m. 
 nothing, ne . . . rien, rien; but, 
 
 rien que. 
 
 notice, observer, remarquer. 
 Notre Dame, Notre-Dame. 
 novel, roman, m. 
 now, maintenant; a present; 
 
 and then, de temps en temps; 
 
 adays, de nos jours; not , 
 
 ne . . . plus. 
 
 number, nombre, m., nurnero, m. 
 numerous, nombreux. 
 
 oak, chene, m. 
 oats, avoine, /. s. 
 obey, obeir a. 
 
302 
 
 ENGLISH-FRENCH VOCABULAItt 
 
 object, objet, m. 
 
 obliged, oblige; he was , il a 
 
 du. 
 
 observation, observation, /. 
 observe, observer, remarquer. 
 obtain, obtenir. 
 occupation, occupation, /. 
 occur, arriver, se faire. 
 o'clock, heure(s), /. 
 of, de; it (them), en; the, du 
 
 (etc.). 
 
 offer, offrir. 
 office, bureau, m. 
 often, souvent. 
 oil, huile, /.; lamp, lampe (/.) a 
 
 huile; painting, peinture (/.) 
 
 a 1'huile. 
 old, vieux, age; she is more than 
 
 three years , elle a plus de 
 
 trois ans; how is he? quel 
 
 age a-t-il? age, vieillesse, /. 
 omelet, omelette, /. 
 on, sur, dans; de. 
 once, une fois; at , tout de suite. 
 one, un, m., une, /.; on; the , 
 
 celui (celle); this , celui-ci; 
 
 that , celui-la; the white ones, 
 
 ies blancs. 
 onion, oignon, m. 
 only, ne . . . que, seulement; seul. 
 open, ouvrir, s'ouvrir; p. part. 
 
 ouvert; in the air, en plein 
 
 air. 
 
 opposite, en face de. 
 or, ou. 
 
 orchard, verger, m. 
 order, in that, pour que, de 
 
 sorte que, afin que; in to, 
 
 pour, afin de. 
 
 order, v., commander, ordonner. 
 ordinary, ordinaire, 
 other, autre; others, Ies autres, 
 
 d'autres. 
 otter, loutre, /. 
 ought, one , on devrait; he 
 
 not to have, il n'aurait pas du. 
 
 our, notre, nos; ours, a nous, le 
 
 notre (etc.) 
 out of, hors de. 
 outside (of it), dehors. 
 oven, four, m. 
 over, par; au-dessus de. 
 overcoat, pardessus, m. 
 oversee, surveiller. 
 owe, devoir. 
 
 own, propre, a lui; my , le mien. 
 ox, bosuf. 
 
 page, page, /. 
 
 pail, seau, m. 
 
 pain, douleur, /., mal, m. 
 
 paint, peindre; in oils, peindre 
 
 a 1'huile. 
 painter, peintre. 
 
 painting, peinture, /., tableau, m. 
 pair, paire, /. 
 palace, palais, m. 
 papa, papa. 
 paper, papier, m. 
 pardon, n., pardon, m. ; I beg your 
 
 , je vous demande pardon, 
 pardon, v., pardonner. 
 parent, parent, m. 
 Paris, Paris, m. 
 Parisian, parisien. 
 (parish) priest, cure, 
 park, pare, m., jardin, m. 
 parlour, salon, m. 
 part, role, m., partie, /.; the most 
 
 , la plupart, la plus grande 
 
 partie. 
 
 partridge, perdrix, /. 
 party, soiree, /. ; parti, m. ; our , 
 
 Ies notres. 
 
 pass, n., (of mountains) col, m. 
 pass, v., passer; (at examination) 
 
 reussir, tre re$u. 
 passage, passage, ra.; traversee,/.; 
 
 corridor, m. . 
 past, pass6. 
 pastel, pastel, m. 
 
ENGLISH-FRENCH VOCABULARY 
 
 303 
 
 pastry, patisserie, /. 
 
 path, sentier, m. 
 
 patient, malade, m. or f. 
 
 pay (for), payer; a visit, faire 
 
 une visit e. 
 pea, pois, m.; green peas, petits 
 
 pois. 
 
 peace, paix, /. 
 
 pear, poire, /. ; tree, poirier, m. 
 pearl, perle, /. 
 peasant, paysan, m. 
 pebble, caillou, m. 
 pen, plume, /. 
 pencil, crayon, rri. 
 people, peuple, m.; personnes, /. 
 
 pi., gens, m. or f. ; on, monde, m. 
 perceive, apercevoir, s'apercevoir 
 
 de. 
 
 perhaps, peut-etre (que). 
 permission, permission, /. 
 permit, permettre. 
 person, personne, /. 
 perspire, transpirer. 
 Peter, Pierre, 
 petroleum, petrole, m. 
 pianist, pianiste, m. or f. 
 piano, piano, m. 
 pick, cueillir; up, ramasser. 
 picture, image, /., tableau, m. 
 piece, morceau, m.; (of money) 
 
 piece, /. 
 pine, pin, m. 
 pipe, pipe, /. 
 pit, fosse, /. 
 pity, n., dommage, m.; pitie*, /.; 
 
 what a , quel dommage. 
 pity, v.j plaindre. 
 place, n., endroit, m., place, /., lieu, 
 
 m.; take of, remplacer; take 
 
 , avoir lieu. 
 
 place, v., placer, poser, mettre. 
 plain, simple. 
 plan, plan, m. 
 plank, planche, /. 
 plant, planter. 
 plate, assiette, /. 
 
 play, n.j piece, /. ; go to the , aller 
 
 au theatre, 
 play, v., jouer; on the piano, 
 
 jouer du piano. 
 pleasant, agreable; (of weather) 
 
 beau. 
 please, plaire a; if you , please, 
 
 s'il vous plait. 
 pleased, content, 
 pleasure, plaisir, m. 
 plenty, assez de, beaucoup de. 
 plough, n., charrue, /. 
 plough, v., labourer, 
 ploughing, n., labour, m. 
 ploughman, laboureur, m. 
 p.m., du soir. 
 pocket, poche, /. 
 poem, poeme, m. 
 poet, poete, m. 
 police, police, /.; man, agent 
 
 (de police). 
 
 politeness, politesse, /. 
 poor, pauvre. 
 porcelain, porcelaine, /. 
 pore, pore, m. 
 port, port, m. 
 porter, facteur. 
 portrait, portrait, m. 
 position, place, /., poste, m. 
 possible, possible, 
 postman, facteur. 
 post office, poste, /. 
 potato, pomme (/.) de terre. 
 poultry, volaille, /. 
 pound, livre, /. 
 practice, clientele, /. 
 preceding, precedent, 
 precise (ly), precis. 
 prefer, preferer, aimer mieux. 
 preparation (s), preparatifs, m. pi. 
 prepare, preparer; se preparer. 
 prescribe, ordonner. 
 prescription, ordonnance, /. 
 present, cadeau, m., present, m.\ 
 
 at , a present; be , assister, 
 
 etre present. 
 
304 
 
 ENGLISH-FRENCH VOCABULARY 
 
 pretty, joli. 
 
 prevent, empecher. 
 
 price, prix, m. 
 
 priest, pretre, cure. 
 
 princess, princesse. 
 
 prize, prix, m. 
 
 probable, probable. 
 
 probably, probablement. 
 
 problem, probleme, m. 
 
 process, precede, m. 
 
 product, produit, m. 
 
 professor, prof esseur, m. or f. 
 
 profit (s), benefices, m. pi.', make 
 
 , tirer des benefices. 
 promise, promettre. 
 property, propriete*, /. 
 proportion, proportion, /. ; in as, 
 
 a mesure que. 
 prosperity, prosperity, /. 
 protect, proteger. 
 proverb, proverbe, m. 
 provisions, vivres, m. pl.' } get , 
 
 se fournir. 
 
 public, n., public, m. 
 public, adj., public, 
 pulse, pouls, m. 
 Punch and Judy, Guignol, m. 
 pupil, eleve, m. or f. 
 purchase, achat, m. 
 purple, lilas. 
 
 purse, porte-monnaie, m. 
 put, mettre, placer; on, mettre; 
 
 away (in), serrer; in 
 place, caser; in, y mettre; 
 
 out, eteindre. 
 
 quality, qualite, /. 
 
 quarter, quart, m.; quinze minu- 
 tes, /.; at a past one, a une 
 heure (et) un quart; at a to 
 one, a une heure moins le (un) 
 quart. 
 
 queen, reine, /. 
 
 question, question, /. 
 
 quickly, vite. 
 
 quiet, tranquille; be, become , 
 
 se taire. 
 quite, assez, tout a fait, tres, bien. 
 
 radish, radis, m. 
 
 railroad, railway, chemin (m.) de 
 fer. 
 
 rain, n., pluie, /. 
 
 rain, v., pleuvoir. 
 
 rarely, rarement. 
 
 rather, assez; I would , j'aime- 
 rais mieux. 
 
 read, lire. 
 
 reading, lecture, /. ; room (salle, 
 /.) or salon (m.) de lecture. 
 
 ready, pret; fait; get , se dis- 
 poser. 
 
 reap, moissonner. 
 
 reaping machine, moissonneuse, /. 
 
 reason, raison, /., motif, m. 
 
 receive, recevoir. 
 
 recently, recemment. 
 
 reception, reception, /. 
 
 recognize, reconnaitre. 
 
 recover, se remettre, se retablir, 
 guerir. 
 
 recovered, remis, retabli. 
 
 red, rouge. 
 
 reflect, reflechir. 
 
 refuse, refuser. 
 
 regard, with to, a propos de. 
 
 regret, regretter. 
 
 reign, n., regne, m. 
 
 reign, v., regner. 
 
 relate, raconter. 
 
 relation, relative, parent, m. 
 
 relish, 'hors-d'oeuvre, m. 
 
 remain, rester. 
 
 remarkable, remarquable. 
 
 remember, se rappeler, se souve- 
 nir de, retenir. 
 
 render, rendre. 
 
 repair, reparer. 
 
ENGLISH-FRENCH VOCABULARY 
 
 305 
 
 reply, repondre, repliquer. 
 represent, representer. 
 republican, republicain, ra. 
 reputation, reputation, /. 
 required, is , il faut. 
 resemble, ressembler (a). 
 resort, station, /.; summer , 
 
 station d'6te. 
 respect, respecter, 
 rest, the , le reste; les autres. 
 restaurant, restaurant, m. 
 restore, restaurer, remettre, re- 
 
 tablir. 
 
 retreat, retraite, /. 
 return, n., retour, m. 
 return, v. t revenir (come back), re- 
 
 tourner (go back) ; home, ren- 
 
 trer (chez soi). 
 rhinoceros, rhinoceros, m. 
 Rhone, Rhone, m. 
 rich, riche. 
 richly, richement. 
 ride, go for (take) a , se pro- 
 
 mener a cheval. 
 right, droit, m. ; raison, /. ; (of time) 
 
 a 1'heure; on the , a (la) droit e; 
 
 he is (hi the) , il a raison. 
 ring, sonner. 
 ripe, mur. 
 ripen, murir. 
 
 rise, se lever, s'elever; lever, 
 river, riviere, /.; (falling into the 
 
 sea) fleuve, m. 
 road, chemin, m., route, /. 
 roaring, rugissement, m. 
 roast, n.j roti, m. 
 roast, v., rotir. 
 robbery, vol, m. 
 Robert, Robert, 
 role, role, m. 
 roll, n., petit pain, m. 
 roll, v., rouler. 
 rolling, n., roulis, m. 
 roof, toit, m. 
 
 room, pice, /., salle, /., chambre, /. 
 *ose, rose, /. 
 
 rule, regie, /. 
 
 run, courir, marcher; (of liquids) 
 
 couler ; off the track, derailler ; 
 
 get over, se faire ecraser. 
 rush, se precipiter. 
 
 sack, sac, m. 
 
 sack coat, veston, m. 
 
 safe, sauf; - and sound, sain et 
 
 sauf. 
 
 saint, saint, m. 
 salad, salade, /. 
 salute, saluer; each other, se 
 
 saluer. 
 same, meme; at the time, en 
 
 meme temps; it is all the to 
 
 me, cela m'est egal. 
 sand, sable, m. 
 sardine, sardine, /. 
 satisfactory, satisfaisant; not be 
 
 , laisser a desirer. 
 satisfied, satisfait, content. 
 Saturday, samedi, m. 
 save, economiser, epargner. 
 sawmill, scierie, /. 
 say, dire; they , on dit. 
 scaffolding, e"chafaudage, m. 
 scene, scene, /. 
 scholar, ecolier, -re. 
 school, ecole, /., college, ra.; at , 
 
 a Tecole; boy, ecolier; girl, 
 
 ecoliere. 
 
 scissors, ciseaux, m. pi. 
 score, vingtaine, /. 
 sea, mer, /.; port, port (m.) de 
 
 mer; be sick, avoir le mal de 
 
 mer. 
 
 seashore, bord de la mer. 
 seaside resort, station (/.) balne- 
 
 aire, bains (m.) de mer. 
 season, saison, /. 
 
 seat, place, /., siege, m., bane, m. 
 seated, be , s'asseoir, etre assis. 
 second, deuxieme, second; deux. 
 
306 
 
 ENGLISH-FRENCH VOCABULARY 
 
 see, voir; be seen, se voir; 
 
 about (after), s'occuper de; 
 
 each other, se voir. 
 seek, chercher. 
 seem, sembler, paraitre. 
 Seine, Seine, /. . 
 seize, saisir. 
 select, choisir. 
 sell, vendre, se vendre; again, 
 
 revendre. 
 senate, senat, m. 
 send, envoyer; for, envoyer 
 
 chercher, faire venir. 
 separate, separer. 
 serious, grave, srieux. 
 servant, bonne, /., servante, /., 
 
 domestique, m. or f. 
 serve, servir. 
 service, service, m. 
 set, mettre; out, partir; the 
 
 table, mettre la nappe (le 
 
 convert) . 
 seven, sept, 
 seventeen, dix-sept. 
 seventy, soixante-dix. 
 seventy-five, soixante-quinze. 
 several, plusieurs. 
 severe, rude, 
 sew, coudre. 
 sewing, couture, /. 
 shade, nuance, /.; ombre, /.; in 
 
 the , a 1' ombre, 
 shake, secouer; hands, se 
 
 donner la main, se serrer la 
 
 main, 
 shall, sign of jut.; what I do? 
 
 que voulez-vous que je fasse? 
 she, elle, ce. 
 sheep, mouton, m. 
 shelter, abri, m.; sheltered from, 
 
 a Tabri de. 
 
 ship, navire, m., vaisseau, m. 
 shoe, soulier, m. 
 shoemaker, cordonnier, m. 
 shop, magasin, m., boutique, /.; 
 
 at the of, chez; go shopping, 
 
 faire des emplettes, courir les 
 
 magasins. 
 shore, bord, m., cote, /.; go on , 
 
 d6barquer. 
 short, court, 
 should, sign of condl.; one , on 
 
 devrait; you have, vous 
 
 auriez du. 
 shout, crier, 
 show, n., concours, m. 
 show, v., montrer; faire voir; 
 
 in, faire entrer; up (stairs), 
 
 faire monter. 
 shut, fermer. 
 
 sick, malade; people, malades. 
 sickle, f aucille, /. 
 side, cote, m. ; by the of, a cote 
 
 de. 
 
 sideboard, buffet, m. 
 sidewalk, trottoir, m. 
 sight, vue,/., coup (m.) d'ceil; fine 
 
 sights, beautes, /. pi. 
 sign, signe, m. 
 silk, soie, /.; worm, ver (m.) & 
 
 soie; dress, robe (/.) de soie; 
 
 goods, soieries /. pi. ; room, 
 
 salon (m.) des soieries. 
 silver, argent, m. 
 silverware, argenterie, /. 
 simple, simple. 
 since, depuis (que); que; puis- 
 
 que; it is a long tune , il y a 
 
 longtemps que ... ne ... 
 sing, chanter. 
 singer, chanteuse, /. 
 singing, chant, m. 
 single, seul. 
 sir, monsieur, 
 sister, sceur. 
 sit (down), s'asseoir, se mettre a 
 
 table. 
 
 sitting, assis. 
 situated, situe\ 
 six, six. 
 sixteen, seize, 
 sixty, soixante. 
 
ENGLISH-FRENCH VOCABULARY 
 
 307 
 
 skate, ft., patin, m. 
 
 skate, v., patiner. 
 
 skirt, jupe, /. 
 
 sleep, dormir; coucher; go to , 
 
 s'endormir. 
 
 sleeping car, wagon-lit, m. 
 
 sleigh, traineau, m.; go sleighing, 
 
 aller (se promener) en traineau. 
 slice, tranche, /. ; of bread and 
 
 butter, tartine (/.) de beurre. 
 slippery, glissant. 
 slow, lent; be too , retarder. 
 slowly, lentement, doucement. 
 small, petit. 
 
 smell, sentir; sweet, sentir bon. 
 smoke, fumer. 
 sneeze, eternuer. 
 snow, n. t neige, /. 
 snow, v., neiger. 
 so, si, ainsi ; le ; not , pas si, moins ; 
 
 much, many, tant, telle- 
 
 ment; that, de sorte que, 
 
 pour que. 
 soap, savon, m. 
 society, societe, /. 
 solve, resoudre. 
 some, du, etc.; quelque; quelcon- 
 
 que; quelques-uns; en. 
 somebody, some one, quelqu'un, 
 
 on. 
 
 something, quelque chose (de). 
 sometimes, quelquefois. 
 somewhere, quelque part, 
 son, fils. 
 
 song, chanson, /. 
 
 soon, bientot; sooner, plus tot; as 
 as, aussitot que; I would as 
 
 , j'aimerais autant. 
 sore, I have a throat, j'ai mal a 
 
 la gorge. 
 sorry, fache; be , regretter, 6tre 
 
 fache. 
 
 sort, espece, /., sorte, /. 
 sound, n., bruit", m. 
 sound, adj., sain, 
 soup, potage, m., soupe, /. 
 
 sour, aigre. 
 
 south, sud, m., midi, m. 
 
 sow, semer. 
 
 speak, parler. 
 
 spectacles, lunettes, /. pi. 
 
 speed, vitesse, /. 
 
 spend, depenser (money), passer 
 
 (time) . 
 
 splendid, superbe, magnifique. 
 spoon, cuiller, /. 
 sport, sport, m. 
 spring, printemps, m.; (of water) 
 
 source, /. 
 spruce, sapin, m. 
 square, carre. 
 squirrel, ecureuil, m. 
 stable, (for cows) etable, /., (for 
 
 horses) ecurie, /. 
 stairway, escalier, m. 
 stale, rassis. 
 stand, se trouver, etre debout, 
 
 s'elever; standing, debout. 
 start, partir; tressaillir. 
 state, etat, m. ; room, cabine, /. 
 station, gare, /. 
 statue, statue, /. 
 stay, n., sejour, m. 
 stay, v., rester. 
 steal, voler. 
 steam, vapeur, /. 
 steamer, bateau (m.) a vapeur, 
 
 paquebot, m. 
 steel, acier, m.; engraving,. 
 
 gravure (/.) sur acier. 
 step, pas, m. 
 
 stick, baton, m., canne, /. 
 still, encore, tou jours. 
 St. John, saint Jean. 
 St. Lawrence, Saint-Laurent, m. 
 stone, pierre, /. 
 stop, arreter; s'arreter. 
 ? store, magasin, m. 
 story, etage (of a house), m. 
 story, histoire, /. 
 strange, Strange. 
 stranger, Stranger, m. 
 
308 
 
 ENGLISH-FRENCH VOCABULARY 
 
 straw, paille, /. ; hat, chapeau 
 
 (m.) de paille. 
 strawberry, fraise, /. 
 stream, ruisseau, m., cours (m.) 
 
 d'eau. 
 
 street, rue, /. 
 strike, frapper. 
 strong, fort, 
 student, etudiant, m. 
 study, e"tudier. 
 
 study table, table (/.) de travail, 
 stupid, bete, stupide. 
 subject, sujet, m. 
 succeed, reussir; (at examination) 
 
 etre re9U. 
 
 success, succes, m. 
 such, tel; a, un tel; si. 
 suffer, souffrir. 
 suffice, be sufficient, suffire. 
 sugar, sucre, m. 
 suit (of clothes), vehement, m., 
 
 complet, m. 
 summer, ete*, m. 
 sun, soleil, m. 
 Sunday, dimanche, m. 
 sunny, be , faire du soleil. 
 superintend, surveiller. 
 sure, stir, certain, 
 surface, surface, /. 
 surround, entourer. 
 sweet, doux. 
 swim, nager. 
 
 table, table, /.; cloth, nappe, /., 
 couvert, m., tapis, m.; set the 
 , mettre la nappe (le couvert). 
 
 tailor, tailleur, m. 
 
 take, prendre; mener, conduire; 
 from, prendre a; to, transpor- 
 ter a; a walk, faire une prome- 
 nade, se promener a pied; 
 away, emporter; out, sortir; 
 after, tenir de; about, pro- 
 mener; off, oter, quitter. 
 
 taking, prise, /. 
 
 talk, parler. 
 
 tall, grand. 
 
 tapestry, tapisserie, /. 
 
 task, tache, /., devoir, m. 
 
 taste, n.j gout, m. 
 
 taste, v., gotiter. 
 
 tax, reprocher. 
 
 tea, the, m. ; cup, tasse (/.) a the., 
 
 teach, enseigner, instruire, ap- 
 
 prendre, montrer. 
 teacher, professeur, m. or/.; (pri- 
 mary] instituteur, m., institu- 
 
 trice, /. 
 
 tear (out), arracher. 
 tease, taquiner. 
 tedium, ennui, m. 
 telegraph, telegraphier. 
 telephone, telephones 
 tell, dire, raconter. 
 temperature, temperature, /. 
 ten, dix. 
 tender, tendre. 
 tent, tente, /. 
 
 terms, good , bonne intelligence, 
 terrible, terrible. 
 Thames, Tamise, /. 
 than, que; (before numerals] de*. 
 thank, remercier; thanks, merci, 
 
 je vous remercie. 
 thankful, reconnaissant. 
 that, qui, que; ce, cet, cette; cela; 
 
 celui(-la); que, de sorte que; 
 
 one, celui-la; is, voila, 
 
 c'est; is your book? est-ce 
 
 la votre livre? 
 thaw, degeler. 
 the, le, la, les, 
 theatre, theatre, m. 
 thee, te, toi. 
 their, leur, leurs; theirs, a eux 
 
 (etc.); leleur (etc.). 
 them, les, eux, elles, leur; of , 
 
 d'eux, en. 
 
 then, alors, puis, ensuite. 
 there, la, y; (it) is, voila; i 
 
 (are), il y a. 
 
ENGLISH-FRENCH VOCABULARY 
 
 309 
 
 thermometer, thermometre, m. 
 they, Us, m., eux, m., elles, /.; ce; 
 
 on. 
 
 thick, epais. 
 thief, voleur, m. 
 thimble, de", m. 
 thin, mince. 
 
 thine, a toi, le tien (etc.) 
 thing, chose,/., affaire, /.; some- 
 
 , quelque chose, 
 think, penser, croire, reflechir, 
 
 trouver; what do you of it? 
 
 qu'en pensez-vous? comment le 
 
 trouvez-vous? of me, pensez a 
 
 moi; what are you thinking of? 
 
 a quoi pensez-vous? 
 third, troisieme; tiers, m. 
 thirst, soif, /.; be thirsty, avoir 
 
 soif; be very thirsty, avoir bien 
 
 (tres) soif, mourir de soif. 
 thirty, trente; about , une tren- 
 
 taine. 
 this, ce, cet, cette; ce . . . -ci; ceci; 
 
 is, voici; one, celui-ci. 
 thou, tu, toi. 
 
 though, bien que, quoique. 
 thousand (a), mille, mil, millier. 
 thread, fil, m. 
 three, trois. 
 thresh, battre. 
 throat, gorge, /. 
 through, par, a travers de. 
 throw, jeter, lancer; away, 
 
 jeter. 
 
 thumb, police, m. 
 Thursday, jeudi, m. 
 thy, ton, ta, tes. 
 ticket, billet, m. 
 tie, n., era vat e, /. 
 tie (up), v., attacher. 
 tile, tuile, /. 
 till, jusque, jusqu'a. 
 time, temps, m., fois, /., heure, /.; 
 
 moment, m.; three s, trois 
 
 fois ; at what ? a quelle heure? 
 
 on , a Fheure, a Fheure 
 
 exacte; from to , de temps 
 
 en temps; have a good , 
 
 s'amuser (bien). 
 timid, timide. 
 tip, pourboire, m. 
 tired, fatigue". *> 
 
 to, a, en, pour; chez; jusqu'a. 
 to-day, aujourd'hui. 
 together, ensemble. 
 to-morrow, demain; the day after 
 
 , apres-demain. 
 tongue, langue, /.; show the . 
 
 tirer la langue. 
 
 too, aussi; trop; much, trop. 
 tool, outil, m. 
 tooth, dent, /.; brush, brosse 
 
 (/.) a dents; ache, mal (m.) 
 
 aux dents. 
 top, toupie, /. 
 Toronto, Toronto, m. 
 torrent, torrent, m. 
 toss, jeter, lancer. 
 touch, toucher (a). 
 towards, vers. 
 towel, serviette, /. 
 town, ville, /.; in , en ville; to 
 
 , a la ville. 
 townsman, citadin. 
 toy, joujou, m. 
 train, train, m. 
 tramway, tramway, m. 
 translate, traduire. 
 travel, n., voyage, m. 
 travel, v., voyager, 
 tree, arbre, m. 
 tremble, tressaillir. 
 trim, garnir. 
 taimming, garniture, /. 
 trip, voyage, m., promenade, /. 
 trouble, peine, /. ; what is the ? 
 
 de quoi s'agit-il? 
 trout, truite, /. 
 true, vrai. 
 
 truly, vraiment, reellement. 
 trunk, malle, /. 
 try, tacher; (on), essayer. 
 
310 
 
 ENGLISH-FRENCH VOCABULARY 
 
 Tuesday, mardi, m. 
 
 twelve, douze; o'clock, midi, 
 
 m., minuit, m. 
 twenty, vingt. 
 twenty-five, vingt-cinq. 
 twice, deux fods. 
 two, deux. 
 
 U 
 
 umbrella, parapluie, m. 
 
 uncle, oncle, m. 
 
 under, sous; it, dessous. 
 
 understand, comprendre; not 
 
 at all, n'y comprendre rien. 
 unfortunate, malheureux. 
 unhappy, malheureux. 
 United States, Etats-Unis, m. pi. 
 university, universite, /. 
 unless, a moins de, a moins que 
 
 . . . ne. 
 
 unsoiled, frais. 
 until, jusque, jusqu'a; jusqu'a ce 
 
 que, que. 
 up, en haut; be all with, en 
 
 etre fait de. 
 upper, superieur. 
 upstairs, en haut; show , faire 
 
 monter. 
 us, nous, 
 use, n., usage, m.; make of, se 
 
 servir de; what is that? a quoi 
 
 sert cela? that is no , cela 
 
 ne sert a rien. 
 use, v. y se servir de, employer; I 
 
 used to play, je jouais. 
 useful, utile. 
 utensil, ustensile, m. 
 utilize, utiliser. 
 
 valise, valise, /. 
 vase, vase, m. 
 vast, vaste. 
 veal, veau, m. 
 vegetable, legume, m. 
 Venus, Venus. 
 
 verse, A^erset, m.; (line of poetry) 
 
 vers, m. 
 
 yery, tres, bien, fort; beaucoup. 
 vessel, vaisseau, m. 
 vice, vice, m. 
 village, village, m. 
 violent, violent, 
 visit, n., visit e, /.; on a , en 
 
 visite. 
 visit, v., visiter, faire visite a, 
 
 rendre visite a, aller voir. 
 voice, voix, /. 
 
 volume, volume, m., tome, m. 
 vote, n., voix, /.; voting, vote, m. 
 vote, v., voter. 
 
 W 
 
 wages, gages, m. pi. 
 
 wainscoting, boiserie, /. 
 
 waist, corsage, m. 
 
 waistcoat, gilet, m. 
 
 wait (for), attendre; keep waiting, 
 
 faire attendre. 
 
 waken, reveiller; se reVeiller. 
 walk, promenade, /. ; go for a , 
 
 (aller) faire une promenade. 
 wall, mur, m. 
 walnut, noix, /. ; tree (or wood), 
 
 noyer, m. 
 
 want to, vouloir, desirer. 
 warm, adj., chaud; it is , il fait 
 
 chaud. 
 
 warm, v., chauffer. 
 warmth, chaleur, /. 
 wash, laver; se laver; (linen) 
 
 blanchir. 
 waste, gaspiller. 
 watch, montre, /. 
 water, eau, /.; fall, cascade, /. 
 way, fagon, /., maniere, /.; chemin, 
 
 m.j moyen, m.; by the , a pro- 
 
 pos; there is no , il n'y a pas 
 
 moyen; in such a that, de 
 
 telle fagon que. 
 we, nous; on. 
 weak, faible. 
 
ENGLISH-FRENCH VOCABULARY 
 
 311 
 
 wealth, richesse(s), /. 
 
 wear, porter. 
 
 weather, temps, m.; the is 
 
 fine, il fait beau; in cold , 
 
 par le temps froid. 
 week, semaine, huit jours; next , 
 
 la semaine prochaine; a from 
 
 to-day, d'aujourd'hui en huit; 
 
 two weeks, deux semaines, 
 
 quinze jours, une quinzaine. 
 well, bien; then, eh bien; very 
 
 , tres bien, je veux bien; not 
 
 be very , etre souffrant; get 
 
 , guerir; off (-to-do), heu- 
 
 reux, aise; be , se porter bien. 
 were, see be. 
 west, ouest, m. 
 what, que, quoi, ce qui, ce que; 
 
 quel? qu'est-ce qui? qu'est-ce 
 
 que? 
 whatever, quoi que; quel que; 
 
 quelconque; quelque . . . que, 
 
 n'importe quel. 
 wheat, ble, m. 
 when, quand, lorsque, ou; a quelle 
 
 heure? 
 whenever, quand, toutes les fois 
 
 que. 
 
 where, ou. 
 wherever, en quelque lieu que, 
 
 partout ou, ou que. 
 whether, si; soit que, que. 
 which, qui, que, ce qui, ce que, 
 
 lequel; quel; of , dont. 
 while, whilst, pendant que, tandis 
 
 que; en. 
 whistle, sifner. 
 white, blanc. 
 who, qui, lequel (etc.). 
 whoever, qui que, quiconque. 
 whole, tout, seule; the day, 
 
 toute la journee. 
 whom, qui, que, lequel (etc.). 
 whose, de qui, a qui, dont, duquel 
 
 (etc.). 
 why, pourquoi. 
 
 wide, large. 
 
 wife, femme. 
 
 wild, sauvage. 
 
 will, sign of fut.\ vouloir; when 
 
 you , quand vous voudrez; 
 
 you kindly? voulez-vous bien? 
 William, Guillaume. 
 win, gagner, 1'emporter; the 
 
 day, Temporter. 
 wind, vent, m.; there is , il fait 
 
 du vent, 
 window, f enetre, /. ; (front) shop , 
 
 devanture, /. 
 window blind, store, m. 
 windy, be , faire du vent, 
 wine, vin, m.; glass, verre (m.) 
 
 a vin. 
 
 winter, hiver, m. 
 wise, sage, intelligent, raison- 
 
 nable. 
 wish, desirer, vouloir; I (should 
 
 like), je voudrais. 
 with, avec, de, chez, contre, au- 
 
 pres de. 
 
 without, sans, sans que. 
 woman, femme; doctor, femme 
 
 docteur. 
 
 wonder, se demander. 
 wonderful, remarquable, eton- 
 
 nant, merveilleux. 
 wonderfully, a merveille. 
 wood, bois, m. 
 woodcutter, bucheron, m. 
 wooden, de bois, en bois. 
 woollens, lainages, m. pi. 
 word, mot, m. 
 
 work, n.j travail, m., ouvrage, m. 
 work, v., travailler; faire marcher; 
 
 exploiter; fonctionner. 
 workman, ouvrier, m. 
 world, monde, m. 
 worm, ver, m. 
 worse, adj., pire, plus mauvais; 
 
 adv., pis, plus mal. 
 worth, be , valoir; while, 
 
 valoir la peine; have 5 francs 
 
312 
 
 ENGLISH-FRENCH VOCABULARY 
 
 of, en avoir pour 5 francs; a 
 
 million, riche d'un million, 
 worthy, brave, digne. 
 would, sign of condl. and of impf. 
 
 ind.; voudrais, voulais. 
 write, ecrire; to each other, 
 
 s'ecrire. 
 wrong, mauvais; tort, m.; he is , 
 
 il a tort, 
 wrought-iron, fer (m.) forge. 
 
 yard, cour, /. ; metre, m. 
 year, an, m., annee, /.; every , 
 tons les ans; this , cette annee. 
 
 yeast, levain, m. 
 
 yellow, jaune; become , jaunir. 
 
 yes, oui, si. 
 
 yesterday, hier; the day before , 
 
 avant-hier. 
 yet, encore; deja; cependant; not 
 
 , pas encore, 
 yield, donner. 
 yonder, la-bas. 
 you, vous; tu, te, toi; on. 
 young, jeune. 
 your, votre, vos; ton, ta, tea; 
 
 yours, a toi, a vous; le tien (etc.), 
 
 le votre (etc.). 
 yourself, vous, vous-meme. 
 
INDEX 
 
 a : denoting place, 12 ; rep- 
 etition of, 12; contrac- 
 tion with definite article, 
 12, 83, 87, 92; denoting 
 indirect object, 21; be- 
 fore infinitive, 60; with 
 place-names, 108; before 
 venir, 170; required after 
 certain verbs, 180; a 
 disjunctive pronoun for 
 possessive, Lesson XXII 
 and 211; forming ad- 
 jectival phrases, 221. 
 
 accents, Introduction, A. 
 
 adjectives: feminine, plural 
 and agreement, 14,207; 
 irregular plural of, 32; 
 position of, 33 ; irregular 
 feminine of, 34; adjec- 
 tives and nouns, feminine 
 of, 206 ; when invariable, 
 207; with avoir Pair, 
 207; agreement with 
 gens, 207; adverbs 
 from adjectives, 216; 
 see also possessive, de- 
 monstrative, etc. 
 
 adverb: position, 48; com- 
 parison, 59; numeral ad- 
 verb, 127; from adjec- 
 tives, 216; distinctions, 
 217. 
 
 age, expressions of, 135. 
 
 agir, impersonal, 185. 
 
 agreement: verb and sub- 
 ject, 4, 160; personal 
 pronoun and antecedent, 
 7; adjectives, 14, 207; 
 possessive adjective, 16; 
 relative pronoun, 36; 
 past participle, 49, 51, 
 120, 196. 
 
 aller + infinitive, 169; 
 + chercher, 174. 
 
 alphabet, Introduction, A. 
 
 a moins que, with ne, 220. 
 
 apposition, 200; apparent, 
 200. 
 
 article, see definite and in- 
 definite. 
 
 au=a+le, 12, 83,87,92. 
 
 aucun, 104. 
 
 au-dessous de, 222. 
 
 au-dessus de, 222. 
 
 aupres de, 222. 
 
 aussi, in comparison, 56- 
 59; = hence, word-order, 
 161. 
 
 autant, 217. 
 
 autre, 101; Pun Fautre, 
 117. 
 
 autrui, 101. 
 
 aux=a + les, 12, 83, 87, 
 92. 
 
 auxiliary function, 163 and 
 following. 
 
 auxiliary verbs: conjuga- 
 tion, Appendix, C, 2; in 
 compound tenses, 45, 
 51, 113; in passive, 118; 
 word-order with, 48, 
 113. 
 
 avant, 222. 
 
 avant que, with ne, 220. 
 
 avoir: conjugation, Appen- 
 dix, C, 2; use in compound 
 tenses, 45 ;y avoir, 31, 
 114, 185, 187; avoir -fbe- 
 soin (chaud, etc.), 202; 
 avoir 1'air, 207. 
 
 bien, of quantity, 26. 
 
 fa, for cela, 79. 
 
 can, distinctions, 165, 166. 
 
 capitals, Introduction, Q. 
 
 cardinals, 121. 
 
 ce, demonstrative adjec- 
 tive, 43. 
 
 ce: pronoun, 35; +e~tre, 
 54 ; as real subject, 80, 
 182; ce qui (que), recapit- 
 ulatory use, 98; c'est 
 and il est, 182; ce and 
 il(s), elle(s), 183. 
 
 conditional anterior; 112; 
 replaced by imperfect in- 
 dicative, 188; replaced 
 by pluperfect subjunc- 
 tive, 193. 
 
 313 
 
 conditional sentences, 113. 
 
 conditional tense, 110, 
 111; of deferential state- 
 ment, 190; of probabil- 
 ity, etc., 190; of conces- 
 sion, with quand (meme) 
 or que, 190; of implied 
 futurity, 190; of hear- 
 say information, 190. 
 
 conjunctions: requiring sub- 
 junctive, 147, 224; 
 requiring past anterior, 
 153; various distinctions 
 of, 223; corresponding 
 to prepositional phrases, 
 223. 
 
 conjunctive personal pro- 
 nouns, 22, 23; position, 
 68, 72; as indirect ob- 
 ject of reflexives, 116. 
 
 consonants, pronunciation, 
 Introduction, M . 
 
 contractions : de -f- definite 
 article, 10, 83, 87, 92; 
 a + definite article, 12, 
 83, 87, 92. 
 
 could, distinctions, 165. 
 
 dans = in, 12, note. 
 
 dates: year, 129; month, 
 134. 
 
 days, of week, 132. 
 
 de: of possession, 10; rep- 
 etition of, 10; contrac- 
 tion with definite article, 
 10, 83, 87, 92; in ad- 
 jectival phrases, 30, 
 221; with superlative, 
 57; after plus, moins, 
 59 ; before infinitive, 60 ; 
 with place-names, 108; 
 with passive, 118; of di- 
 mension, 131; before 
 venir, 170; after certain 
 verbs, 180; with histor- 
 ical infinitive, 191 ; caus- 
 ing omission of partitive 
 de, 198. 
 
 definite article: forms, repe- 
 tition, 2; contractions 
 
314 
 
 INDEX 
 
 with de and a, 10, 12, 
 83, 87, 92; omission with 
 partitive, 28; use in su- 
 perlative, 57; with place- 
 names, 108; denoting 
 possession, 117; distrib- 
 utively, 124; with titles, 
 199; with appositive 
 noun, 200; omitted in 
 certain expressions, 202 ; 
 for possessive adjective, 
 203. 
 
 demi, agreement, 126. 
 
 demonstrative ad j ecti ve : 
 forms, repetition, 43. 
 
 demonstrative pronoun, 
 35, 79; see also ce, ce- 
 lui, etc. 
 
 depuis (quand?), with pres- 
 ent and imperfect indica- 
 tive, 187, 188. 
 
 depuis que and puisque, 
 223. 
 
 dernier +subjunctive, 146. 
 
 des = de + les, 10, 83, 87, 
 92; denoting plural of un, 
 25. 
 
 dessous, 217. 
 
 dessus, 217. 
 
 devant, 222. 
 
 devoir + infinitive, 168. 
 
 dimensions, 131. 
 
 disjunctive personal pro- 
 nouns, 52-54. 
 
 dormer, conjugation, Ap- 
 pendix, C, 1. 
 
 dont, 94. 
 
 du=de + le, 10, 83, 87, 
 92. 
 
 e, 6, of stem syllable, Ap- 
 pendix, D. 
 
 -eler, verbs in, Appendix, 
 D. 
 
 elision, Introduction, O. 
 
 empecher, with ne, 220. 
 
 en: pronominal adverb, 27 ; 
 position, 68, 72; with 
 indefinite antecedent, 
 210. 
 
 en: preposition, with place- 
 names, 108; with par- 
 ticiple, 139; forming 
 adjectival phrases, 221. 
 
 encore un, 101. 
 
 en quelque lieu que = where- 
 ever, 217. 
 
 entendre -f- infinitive, 172; 
 + dire, +parlerde, 174. 
 
 entendu, agreement, 196. 
 
 entre, 222. 
 
 envers, 222. 
 
 environ, 222. 
 
 envoyer chercher, 174. 
 
 est-ce que, 20. 
 
 ete, invariable, 118. 
 
 -eter, verbs in, Appendix, 
 D. 
 
 etre: conjugation, Appen- 
 dix, C, 2; use in compound 
 tenses, 51, 119. 
 
 -eur, feminine of, 206. 
 
 eviter, with ne, 220. 
 
 faire: of weather, tempera- 
 ture, etc., 114, 204; 
 causatively, and govern- 
 ment of, 172; +at- 
 tendre, +savoir, + venir, 
 174. 
 
 fait, when invariable, 172. 
 
 finir: conjugation, Appen- 
 dix, C, 1; +par, 178. 
 
 fois (une fois, etc.), 122. 
 
 fractions, 126. 
 
 future anterior, 78; of 
 probability, etc., 189. 
 
 future tense, 74-76; of 
 probability, etc., 189. 
 
 gender, of nouns, 1, also 
 Appendix, A. 
 
 general noun, 24. 
 
 gens, gender and agree- 
 ment, 207. 
 
 -ger, verbs in, Appendix, D. 
 
 guere, with ne, 104, 218. 
 
 holidays, 136. 
 however, 146, 217. 
 
 il: impersonal, 114; invari- 
 able, 210; anticipating 
 real subject, 185. 
 
 il est and c'est, 182; =il y 
 a, 185. 
 
 il(s), elle(s) and ce, 183. 
 
 il s'agit, 185. 
 
 il se peut, 185. 
 
 ily a, 31, 114, 185; ily a 
 que, with present and im- 
 perfect indicative, 187. 
 
 imperative mood, 69, 70; 
 negatively, 71 ; with pro- 
 noun objects, 72; of 
 reflexives, 116; 3d sin- 
 gular and plural of, 148; 
 replaced by infinitive, 
 191. 
 
 imperfect indicative, 63- 
 65; with depuis, etc., de- 
 noting how long, 188; 
 replacing conditional an- 
 terior, 188. 
 
 imperfect subjunctive, 
 154-156. 
 
 impersonal verbs, 114, 
 185. 
 
 indefinite adjectives, 40, 
 100-105, 207. 
 
 indefinite article: forms, re- 
 petition, 1; omission, 
 200, 202; employed 
 contrary to English us- 
 age, 202. 
 
 indefinite pronouns, 40, 
 100-105. 
 
 indirect object, 21. 
 
 -ing forms, 60, 141. 
 
 infinitive mood: after verbs, 
 nouns, adjectives, 60; 
 for -ing forms, 60, 141 ; 
 replacing subjunctive, 
 156, note; for noun 
 clause, 176; preceded by 
 par, pour, 178; after 
 prepositional phrases, 
 178; for imperative, 
 191; historical infinitive, 
 191; infinitive or sub- 
 junctive, 195. 
 
 interrogation, 8, 9, 20, 
 87-91; forms with rela- 
 tive pronoun, 37. 
 
 interrogative adjective, 50. 
 
 interrogative locutions, 91. 
 
 interrogative pronouns, 
 87-91. 
 
 irregular verbs, remarks on; 
 158; exercise form for, 
 159; list of, Appendix, 
 E. 
 
 jamais, with ne, 104. 
 
 la, compared with y, 39. 
 
 -ft, 43, 82. 
 
 laisse, agreement, 196. 
 
 laisser+infinitive, 172. 
 
 le (la, les), see also definite 
 article and personal pro- 
 noun; le, invariable, 210; 
 le, predicative, 210. 
 
 lequel, 95. 
 
 lequel? 90. 
 
 liaison, Introduction, N. 
 
 lorsque and quand, 223. 
 
 Tun, Pautre, 117. 
 
INDEX 
 
 315 
 
 measures, French, 123. 
 mil, in dates, 129. 
 moi, for me, 72. 
 moins, in comparison, 56- 
 
 59; as adverb of quantity, 
 
 59. 
 
 mon, in address, 211. 
 money, Frenc/a, 123. 
 months, 133. 
 multiplicatives, 122. 
 
 nasal vowels, Introduction, 
 K. 
 
 ne: with pas, point, etc., 
 11, 104, 218; position, 
 48, 218; in comparisons, 
 208; omitted, 218; 
 without pas, etc., 219; 
 redundant, 220; ne . . . 
 que, 104, 198, 217; ne 
 . . . pas que, 217. 
 
 negation: ne . . . pas, 11; 
 with indefinites, 104; 
 summary of forms, 104, 
 218; pas, etc., omitted, 
 219; ne redundant, 
 220. 
 
 neither . . . nor, 218. 
 
 n'importe, 215, 219. 
 
 non, 218; que non, 217. 
 
 noun: general and partitive, 
 24, 25; plural of, 2, 
 32 and Appendix, B; 
 gender of, 1 and Ap- 
 pendix, A ; in -eur, -teur, 
 feminine of, 206; femi- 
 nine like adjectives, 206. 
 
 mil, 104. 
 
 numerals, 121-137; car- 
 dinals, 121; ordinals, 
 125. 
 
 on (1'on), 38; replacing 
 
 passive, 38; repetition 
 
 of, 214. 
 
 only, how expressed, 217. 
 ordinals, 125. 
 ou, as relative pronoun, 
 
 96; ou q\ie=wherever, 
 
 217. 
 
 oui: que oui, 217. 
 own, how expressed, 211. 
 
 par, with passive, 118; of 
 price, 124; with faire, 
 construction, 172; after 
 commencer and finir, 
 178. 
 
 parmi, 222. 
 
 participles: used as adjec- 
 
 tives, 33; see also, 
 present, past, perfect par- 
 ticiples. 
 
 partitive noun, 25; omis- 
 sion of article, 28; omis- 
 sion of partitive sign, 
 29, 198; exceptional 
 cases of, 198. 
 
 partout ou = wherever, 217. 
 
 pas, with ne, 11, 104, 218; 
 ne omitted, 218; posi- 
 tion, 218; pas un, 104. 
 
 passive voice, 118; re- 
 placed by on, 38, 118; 
 replaced by reflexives, 
 117. 
 
 past anterior, 151, 153. 
 
 past definite, 149, 150, 
 152, 153. 
 
 past indefinite, 46, 47. 
 
 past participle, 44 ; in com- 
 pound tenses, 45, 51; 
 agreement of, 49, 118, 
 120, 140, 196; with im- 
 personal verb, 185, 
 196; special cases, 196. 
 
 pendant que and tandis que, 
 223. 
 
 perfect participle, 138, 
 140. 
 
 personal pronouns: in ad- 
 dress, 5; agreement with 
 antecedent, 7, 210; use 
 and position as objects, 
 18, 21, 23, 68, 72; con- 
 junctive, 22, 23; dis- 
 junctive, 52-54; re- 
 flexive object, 116. 
 
 personne, 104. 
 
 peut-etre (que), word-order 
 after, 161. 
 
 pluperfect indicative, 67; 
 pluperfect and past an- 
 terior, 153; replaced by 
 pluperfect subjunctive, 
 193. 
 
 pluperfect subjunctive, 
 155, 156; replacing plu- 
 perfect indicative or con- 
 ditional anterior, 193. 
 
 plural: of nouns and adjec- 
 tives, 2, 32. 
 
 plus: in comparison, 56- 
 59; as adverb of quanti- 
 ty, 59; with ne, 104, 
 218; position of, 218. 
 
 point, with ne, 104, 218. 
 
 possession, how denoted, 
 10, 85, 117, 203. 
 
 possessive adjective: forms, 
 15; agreement and re- 
 petition, 16; replaced by 
 definite article, 203; in 
 polite address, 211; in* 
 definite son, 214. 
 
 possessive pronoun, 83^ 
 85; absolutely, 211. 
 
 pour, of purpose, 178; after 
 assez, trop, 178; = how- 
 ever, 217. ' 
 
 pouvoir + infinitive, 165; 
 il se peut, 185. 
 
 premier: in dates, 134; in 
 titles, 130; + subjunc- 
 tives, 146. 
 
 preposition: with infinitive, 
 60; distinctions, 222; 
 corresponding to con- 
 junctions, 223. 
 
 pres de, 222. 
 
 present indicative, idiomat- 
 ic use, 187. 
 
 present participle, 138, 
 139. 
 
 present subjunctive, 142- 
 148; for imperfect sub- 
 junctive, 156. 
 
 principal parts, formation 
 of tenses from, 157. 
 
 pronominal adverbs, 27, 
 39; position,, 68, 72. 
 
 pronouns, see personal, pos- 
 sessive, etc. 
 
 propre, 211. 
 
 puisque and depuis que, 
 223. 
 
 punctuation, Introduction, 
 P. 
 
 quand and lorsque, 223. 
 
 quand (meme), cpnditional 
 after, 190. 
 
 quantity: expressions of, 
 26; agreement of past 
 participle with, 160, 196. 
 
 quantity, of vowels, Intro- 
 duction, F. 
 
 que, relative pronoun, 36. 
 
 que? 9, 89. 
 
 que, conjunction: in com- 
 parison, 56; with sub- 
 junctive, 142; not omit- 
 ted, 144; replaced by 
 comme, 208; replacing 
 other conjunctions, 193. 
 
 quel? 50; for qui? 88; 
 compared with lequel? 
 90. 
 
316 
 
 INDEX 
 
 quel! 50. 
 
 quelconque, 215. 
 
 quel que + subjunctive, 
 
 146. 
 
 quelque = however, 217. 
 quelque chose, 103. 
 quelque . . . que+subjunc- 
 
 tive, 215. 
 quelqu'un, 102. 
 qu'est-ce qui? 37, 89. 
 qui: relative pronoun, 36; 
 
 after preposition, 93; 
 
 =he who, etc., 212; qui 
 
 . . . qui, 212. 
 qui? 9, 88. 
 quiconque, 215. 
 qui que -f- subjunctive, 215. 
 quoi, 97; de quoi, 212. 
 quoi? 89, 
 quoi que + subjunctive, 
 
 215. 
 
 reciprocal verbs, 117. 
 
 reflexive verbs, 115-117; 
 for English passive, 117; 
 compound tenses, 119; 
 omission of se, 172. 
 
 relative pronoun, 36, 92- 
 98, 212; agreement, 3.6; 
 not omitted, 36; in in- 
 terrogative locutions, 37. 
 
 rien, 104. 
 
 rompre, conjugation, Ap- 
 pendix, C, 1. 
 
 sache, deferential state- 
 ment, 193. 
 
 savoir+ infinitive, 166. 
 
 se, reflexive to on, 214. 
 
 sembler, il (me) semble, 
 construction, 193. 
 
 semi-vowels, Introduction, 
 /,. 
 
 s'en aller, conjugation, Ap- 
 pendix, C, 5. 
 
 seul+ subjunctive, 146. 
 
 seulement, 217. 
 
 si: =aussi, 56; = whether 
 (if), 113; replaced by 
 
 que, 193; = yes, 217; 
 = however, 217. 
 
 soi, indefinitely, 54. 
 
 subject, position of, 161. 
 
 stress, Introduction, E. 
 
 subjunctive mood, 142- 
 148, 154-156; in noun 
 clause, 144; in adjec- 
 tival clause, 146; in ad- 
 verbial clause, 147; in 
 principal sentence, 148; 
 tense sequence, 145, 
 156; after negation, etc., 
 193; subjunctive or in- 
 finitive, 195; required 
 after certain conjunc- 
 tions, 224. 
 
 superlative of adjectives, 
 57; of adverbs, 59. 
 
 sur: of dimension, 131; in 
 adjectival phrases, 221. 
 
 syllabication, Introduction, 
 D. 
 
 -t-, in interrogation, 8. 
 
 tandis que and pendant que, 
 223. 
 
 tant, 217. 
 
 tel, 105. 
 
 tenses: various English 
 forms, 19; formation of 
 compound tenses, 45, 
 51, 119; from principal 
 parts, 157; see also pres- 
 ent, imperfect, etc. 
 
 -teur, feminine of, 206. 
 
 there is (are), 17, 31. 
 
 time, how denoted, 137. 
 
 titles: numerical, 130; with 
 definite article, 199. 
 
 toi, for te, 72 
 
 tout, 40; with gens, 207; 
 as adverb, 217; = how- 
 ever, 217; toutes les fois 
 que, 217. 
 
 tu = you, 5. 
 
 un, article or numeral, 1. 
 unique + subjunctive, 146. 
 
 venir+ infinitive, or+ a, or 
 + de, 170; + chercher, 
 prendre, 174. 
 
 verb: regular conjugations, 
 Appendix, C, 1 ; auxiliary, 
 Appendix, C, 2, agree- 
 ment with subject, 4, 
 160; government of, 
 180; constructions with 
 two objects, 195. 
 
 verb-phrases, 164-166, 
 168-170; 172, 174. 
 
 vers, 222. 
 
 void, 17; voici . . . que, 
 with present indicative, 
 187. 
 
 voila, 17; voild. . . . que, 
 with present indicative, 
 187; compared with il 
 y a, 17, 31. 
 
 vouloir + infinitive, 164. 
 
 vous = you, 5. 
 
 vowels, pronunciation, In- 
 troduction, G-K. 
 
 vu, agreement, 196. 
 
 weights, French, 123. 
 
 what = that which, 98. 
 
 what? 9, 89. 
 
 whatever, 146, 215. 
 
 whenever, 217. 
 
 wherever, 217. 
 
 which, in summing up, 98* 
 
 whoever, 146, 215. 
 
 whose, 94. 
 
 whose? 88. 
 
 will, distinctions, 164. 
 
 would, distinctions, 164. 
 
 y, pronominal adverb, 39; 
 y and la, 39; position, 
 39, 68, 72; omission 
 with irai(s), 168, note; 
 with indefinite antece- 
 dent, 210. 
 
 -yer, verbs in, Appendix. 
 D. 
 
 you, how translated, 5. 
 
ADVERTISEMENTS 
 
lbeatb'8 flDo&ern ^Language Series 
 
 FRENCH GRAMMARS, READERS, ETC. 
 
 Armand's Grammaire Elementaire. 
 
 Blanchaud's Progressive French Idioms. 
 
 Bouvet's Exercises in French Syntax and Composition. 
 
 Bowen's First Scientific French Reader. 
 
 Bruce's Dictees Franjaises. 
 
 Bruce's Grammaire Francaise. 
 
 Brace's Lectures Faciles. 
 
 Capus's Pour Charmer nos Petits. 
 
 Chapuzet and Daniels' Mes Premiers Pas en Francais. 
 
 Clarke's Subjunctive Mood. An inductive treatise, with exercises. 
 
 Comfort's Exercises in French Prose Composition. 
 
 Davies's Elementary Scientific French Reader. 
 
 Edgren's Compendious French Grammar. 
 
 Fontaine's En France. 
 
 Fontaine's Lectures Courantes. 
 
 Fontaine's Livre de Lecture et de Conversation. 
 
 Fraser and Squair's Abridged French Grammar. 
 
 Fraser and Squair's Complete French Grammar. 
 
 Fraser and Squair's Shorter French Course. 
 
 French Verb Blank (Fraser and Squair) . 
 
 Grandgent's Essentials of French Grammar. 
 
 Grandgent's French Composition. 
 
 Grandgent's Short French Grammar. 
 
 Heath's French Dictionary. 
 
 Benin's Methode. 
 
 Hotchkiss's Le Premier Livre de Francais. 
 
 Knowles and Favard's Grammaire de la Conversation. 
 
 Mansion's Exercises in French Composition. 
 
 Mansion's First Year French. For young beginners. 
 
 Martin's Essentials of French Pronunciation. 
 
 Martin and Russell's At West Point. 
 
 Meras' Le Petit Vocabulaire. 
 
 Pattou's Causeries en France. 
 
 Pellissier's Idiomatic French Composition. 
 
 Perfect French Possible (Knowles and Favard) 
 
 Prisoners of the Temple (Guerber). For French composition. 
 
 Roux's Lessons in Grammar and Composition, based on Colomba. 
 
 Schenck's French Verb Forms. 
 
 Snow and Lebon's Easy French. 
 
 Story of Cupid and Psyche (Guerber). For French composition. 
 
 Super's Preparatory French Reader. 
 
Ibeatb's /IDo&ern ^Language Series 
 
 ELEMENTARY FRENCH TEXTS. 
 
 Assolant's R6cits de la Vieille France. Notes by E. B. Wauton. 
 Berthet's Le Pacte de Famine (Dickinson). 
 Bruno's Les Enfants Patriotes (Lyon). Vocabulary. 
 Bruno's Tour de la France par deux Enfants (Fontaine). Vocabulary, 
 Claretie's Pierrille (Fran?ois). Vocab. and exs. 
 Daudet's Trois Contes Choisis (Sanderson). Vocabulary. 
 Desnoyers' Jean-Paul Choppart (Fontaine). Vocab. and exs. 
 Enault's Le Chien du Capitaine (Fontaine). Vocabulary. 
 Erckmann-Chatrian's Le Conscrit de 1813 (Super). Vocabulary. 
 Erckmann-Chatrian's L'Histoire d'un Paysan (Lyon). 
 Erckmann-Chatrian's Le Juif Polonais (Manley). Vocabulary. 
 Erckmann-Chatrian's Madame Therese (Manley). Vocabulary. 
 Fabliaux et Contes du Moyen Age (Mansion). Vocabulary. 
 France's Abeille (Lebon). 
 
 French Fairy Tales (Joynes). Vocabulary and exercises. 
 French Plays for Children (Spink). Vocabulary. 
 Gervais's Un Cas de Conscience (Horsley). Vocabulary. 
 La Bedolliere's La Mere Michel et son Chat (Lyon). Vocabulary. 
 Labiche's La Grammaire (Levi). Vocabulary. 
 Labiche's La Poudre aux Yeux (Wells). Vocabulary. 
 Labiche's Le Voyage de M. Perrichon (Wells). Vocab. and exs. 
 Laboulaye's Contes Bleus (Fontaine). Vocabulary. 
 La Main Malheureuse (Guerber). Vocabulary. 
 Laurie's Memoires d'un Collegien (Super). Vocab. and exs. 
 Legouve and Labiche's Cigale chez les Fourmis (Witherby). 
 Lemaitre, Contes (Rensch). Vocabulary. 
 Mairet's La Tache du Petit Pierre (Super). Vocab. and exs. 
 Maistre's La Jeune Siberienne (Fontaine). Vocab. and exs. 
 Malot's Sans Famille (Spiers). Vocabulary and exercises. 
 Meilhac and Halevy's L'Ete de la St. Martin (Francois) Vocab. 
 Moinaux's Les deux Sourds (Spiers). Vocabulary. 
 Muller's Grandes Decouvertes Modernes. Vocabulary. 
 Recits de Guerre et de Revolution (Minssen). Vocabulary. 
 Recits Historiques (Moffett). Vocabulary and exercises. 
 Saintine's Picciola (Super). Vocabulary. 
 Segur's Les Malheurs de Sophie (White). Vocab. and exs. 
 Selections for Sight Translation (Bruce). 
 Verne's L'Expedition de la Jeune-Hardie (Lyon) . Vocabulary. 
 
Ibeatb's /IDofcern ^Language Series 
 
 INTERMEDIATE FRENCH TEXTS. (Partial List.) 
 About's La Mere de la Marquise (Brush). Vocabulary. 
 About's Le Roi des Montagnes (Logic). With vocab. 
 
 Balzac: Cinq Scenes de la Comedie Humaine (Wells). Glossary. 
 Balzac's Eugenie Grandet (Spiers). Vocabulary. 
 Balzac's Le Cure de Tours (Super). Vocabulary. 
 Chateaubriand's Atala (Kuhns). Vocabulary. 
 Contes des Romanciers Naturalistes (Dow and Skinner). Vocab. 
 Daudet's La Belle-Nivernaise (Boielle). Vocabulary. 
 Daudet's Le Petit Chose (Super). Vocabulary. 
 Daudet's Tartarin de Tarascon (Hawkins). Vocabulary. 
 Dumas's Due de Beaufort (Kitchen). Vocabulary. 
 Dumas's La Question d'Argent (Henning) . Vocabulary. 
 Dumas's La Tulipe Noire (Fontaine). With vocabulary. 
 
 Dumas's Les Trois Mousquetaires (Spiers). Vocabulary. 
 Dumas's Monte-Cristo (Spiers). Vocabulary. 
 
 Feuillet's Roman d'un jeune homme pauvre (Bruner). Vocabulary. 
 Gautier's Voyage en Espagne (Steel). 
 Greville's Dosia (Hamilton). Vocabulary. 
 Hugo's Bug Jargal (Boi'elle). 
 
 Hugo's La Chute. From Les Miser able s (Huss). Vocabulary. 
 Hugo's Quatre-vingt-treize (Fontaine). Vocabulary. 
 Labiche's La Cagnotte (Farnsworth) . 
 La Brete's Mon Oncle et mon Cure (Colin). Vocabulary. 
 Lamartine's Graziella (Warren). 
 Lamartine's Jeanne d'Arc (Barrere). Vocabulary. 
 Lamartine's Scenes de la Revolution Francaise (Super). Vocab. 
 Lesage's Gil Bias (Sanderson). 
 
 Maupassant: Huit Contes Choisis (White). Vocabulary. 
 Michelet: Extraits del'histoire de France (Wright). 
 Musset: Trois Comedies (McKenzie). 
 Sarcey's Le Siege de Paris (Spiers). Vocabulary. 
 Taine's L'Ancien Regime (Giese). Vocabulary. 
 Theuriet's Bigarreau (Fontaine). Vocab. and exercises. 
 Tocqueville's Voyage en Amerique (Ford). Vocabulary. 
 Vigny's Cinq-Mars (Sankey). Abridged. 
 Vigny's Le Cachet Rouge (Fortier). 
 Vigny's La Canne de Jonc (Spiers). 
 Voltaire's Zadig (Babbitt). Vocabulary, 
 
Ibeatb's /IDo&ern ^Language Series 
 
 INTERMEDIATE FRENCH TEXTS. (Partial List.) 
 Augier's Le Gendre de M. Poirier (Wells). Vocabulary. 
 Bazin's Les Oberle (Spiers) . Vocabulary. 
 Beaumarchais's Le Barbier de Seville (Spiers). Vocabulary. 
 French Lyrics (Bowen). 
 Gautier's Jettatura (Schinz). 
 
 Halevy's L'Abbe Constantin (Logie) . Vocabulary. 
 Halevy's Un Mariage d'Amour (Hawkins). Vocabulary. 
 Historiettes Modernes (Fontaine). Vol.1, Vol.11. 
 
 La France quitravaille (Jago). Vocabulary. 
 Lectures Historiques (Moffett). Vocabulary 
 Loti's Le Roman d'un Enfant. (Whittem). Vocabulary. 
 Loti's Pecheur d'Islande (Super). Vocabulary. 
 Loti's Ramuntcho (Fontaine). 
 
 Marivaux's Le Jeu del 'amour et du hasard (Fortier). Vocab. 
 Merimee's Chronique du Regne de Charles IX (Desages). 
 Me"rimee's Colomba (Fontaine). Vocabulary . 
 Moliere en Recits (Chapuzet and Daniels). Vocabulary. 
 Moliere's L'Avare (Levi). 
 
 Moliere's Le Bourgeois Gentilhomme (Warren). Vocabulary. 
 Moliere's Le Medecin Malgre Lui (Hawkins). Vocabulary. 
 Pailleron's Le Monde ou 1'on s'ennuie (Pendleton). Vocabulary. 
 Poemes et Chants de France (Daniels and Travers) . Vocabulary. 
 Racine's Andro ma que (Wells). Vocabulary. 
 Racine's Athalie (Eggert). 
 Racine's Esther (Spiers). Vocabulary. 
 Renan's Souvenirs d'Enfance et de Jeunesse (Babbitt). 
 Sand's La Mare au Diable (Sumichrast). Vocabulary. 
 Sand's La Petite Fadette (Super). Vocabulary. 
 Sandeau's Mile de la Seigliere (Warren). Vocabulary. 
 Sardou's Les Pattes de Mouche (Farnsw trth). Vocabulary. 
 Scribe's Bataille de Dames (Wells). Vocabulary. 
 Scribe's Le Verre d'Eau (Eggert). Vocabulary. 
 Sept Grands Auteurs du XIXe Siecle (Fortier). Lectures. 
 Souvestre's Un Philosophe sous les Toits (Fraser). Vocabulary. 
 Thiers's Expedition de Bonaparte en Egypte (Fabregou). 
 Verne's Tour du Monde en quatre-vingts jours (Edgren). Vocab. 
 Verne's Vingt mille lieues sous les mers (Fontaine). Vocab. 
 Zola's La Debacle (Wells). Abridged. 
 
I 
 
 RETURN TO the circulation desk of an, 
 University of California Library 
 
 NORTHERN REGIONAL LIBRARY FACILITY 
 Bldg. 400, Richmond Field Station 
 University of California 
 Richmond, CA 94804-4698 
 
 ALL BOOKS MAY BE RECALLED AFTER 7 DAYS 
 
 
 be rechar9ed by ***** 
 
 DUE AS STAMPED BELOW 
 
 1 1999 
 
 it 
 
 _^ 
 
Tb UlObO 
 
 803 
 
 THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LIBRARY